€¦ · ingrpt .............. . 228 ingrun .............. . 231 ingsched ............. . 235...

System Automation for z/OS

Operator's CommandsVersion 3 Release 5

SC34-2720-00

IBM

NoteBefore using this information and the product it supports, read the information in Appendix C, “Notices,” on page 595.

Edition Notes

This edition applies to IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS (5698-SA3), Version 3 Release 5, an IBM licensedprogram, and to all subsequent releases and modifications until otherwise indicated in new editions.

This edition replaces SC34-2649-00.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 1996, 2014.US Government Users Restricted Rights – Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contractwith IBM Corp.

Contents

Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii

Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix

Accessibility . . . . . . . . . . . . xiUsing assistive technologies . . . . . . . . . xiKeyboard navigation of the user interface . . . . xi

Dotted decimal syntax diagrams . . . xiii

How to send your comments to IBM . . xv

About this publication . . . . . . . xviiWho Should Use This Publication . . . . . . xviiWhere to Find More Information. . . . . . . xvii

The System Automation for z/OS Library. . . xviiRelated Product Information . . . . . . . xvii

Summary of Changes for SC34-2720-00 . . . . xviiiNew Information . . . . . . . . . . . xviiiChanged Information . . . . . . . . . . xixDeleted Information . . . . . . . . . . xix

Part 1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . 1

Chapter 1. Overview of Commands . . . 3

Chapter 2. Understanding Terms . . . . 5Resource. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Specifying Resources . . . . . . . . . . 6

Chapter 3. Format of Syntax Diagrams . 9

Part 2. SA z/OS System OperationsCommands . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Chapter 4. System OperationsCommands . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Using System Operations Commands. . . . . . 13

General Information . . . . . . . . . . 13Overview of Commands that OperateSysplexwide . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Additional Parameters for System OperationsCommands . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Varying the Format of the Command Output . . 17

ACF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19AOCHELP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26AOCTRACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27ASF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32ASFUSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34DISPACF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36DISPAOPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38DISPAPG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

DISPASF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42DISPAUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44DISPERRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45DISPEVT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47DISPEVTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48DISPFLGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51DISPGW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54DISPINFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56DISPMSGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58DISPMTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59DISPSCHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63DISPSFLT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65DISPSTAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67DISPSYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72DISPTREE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73DISPTRG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75DRAINJES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77EXPLAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78INGAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79INGAUTO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93INGCF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97INGCF DRAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104INGCF ENABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . 108INGCF MAINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111INGCF PATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112INGCF STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . 113INGCFG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115INGCFL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115INGCICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117INGDB2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121INGDLA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124INGEVENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126INGFILT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127INGGROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134INGHIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142INGHWSRV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144INGIMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147INGINFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152INGLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155INGLKUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165INGMDFY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170INGMOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173INGMSGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178INGNTFY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181INGPAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184INGPW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187INGPLEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191INGPLEX CDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196INGPLEX SYStem . . . . . . . . . . . . 202INGPLEX CONsole . . . . . . . . . . . 204INGPLEX IPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207INGPLEX SDUMP. . . . . . . . . . . . 208INGPLEX SVCdump . . . . . . . . . . . 211INGPLEX SLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214INGRELS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215INGREQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2014 iii

||||

INGRPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228INGRUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231INGSCHED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235INGSEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242INGSESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246INGSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250INGSTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255INGTHRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261INGTOPO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265INGTRIG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266INGTWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268INGVOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281OPCAQRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282RESTART. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285RESYNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286SETHOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288SETSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290SETTIMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Part 3. SA z/OS I/O OperationsCommands. . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Chapter 5. I/O Operations Commands 301Using I/O Operations Commands . . . . . . 301Consensus Processing . . . . . . . . . . 301Safe Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301FICON Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . 302FICON Cascaded Switches . . . . . . . . . 302ALLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305CHAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307CONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309DISCONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311DISPLAY CHANGECHECK . . . . . . . . 312DISPLAY CHP . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312DISPLAY DEV . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314DISPLAY HOST . . . . . . . . . . . . 316DISPLAY NAME . . . . . . . . . . . . 319DISPLAY PORT . . . . . . . . . . . . 322DISPLAY RESULTS . . . . . . . . . . . 324DISPLAY SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . 329DISPLAY TIMEOUT . . . . . . . . . . . 333DISPLAY VARY . . . . . . . . . . . . 333GETLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336LOGREC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337PROHIBIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338REMOVE CHP . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340REMOVE SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . 342RESET CHANGECHECK . . . . . . . . . 344RESET HOST . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345RESET SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . 348RESET TIMEOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . 349RESTORE CHP . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349RESTORE SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . 351SYNC SWITCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . 352UNBLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353UNCHAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355UNLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356WRITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Part 4. SA z/OS ProcessorOperations Commands . . . . . . 359

Chapter 6. Using ProcessorOperations Commands . . . . . . . 361General Information . . . . . . . . . . . 361Host-based Commands . . . . . . . . . . 361Common Commands . . . . . . . . . . . 362Ensemble Commands . . . . . . . . . . 362PSM Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Chapter 7. Host-based Commands 363ISQCCMD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363ISQCHK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366ISQCMON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367ISQECMD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368ISQEXEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371ISQHELP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372ISQIPSWT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373ISQOVRD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375ISQROUTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376ISQSEND. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378ISQSNDH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380ISQSTART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382ISQSTOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384ISQVARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385ISQXCLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400ISQXCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402ISQXDRL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405ISQXDST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406ISQXIII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427ISQXLOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429ISQXMON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430ISQXOPT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433ISQXPSM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435ISQXUNL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437

Chapter 8. Common Commands . . . 439ACTIVATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439CBU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442CCNTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445CLRHWMSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448CONDATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449CPCDATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451CTRLCONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452DEACTIVATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454EXTINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456GETCLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457GETIINFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459GETILDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460GETIPSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461GETISTAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462GETITKN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463GETSDGR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465GETSINFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466GETSSTAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468ICNTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480OOCOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483

iv System Automation for z/OS:

||

POWERMOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485PROFILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487RESERVE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505RESTART. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507SECLOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508START . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510STP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511STPDATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514SYSRESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516TCDATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518TCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520

Chapter 9. Ensemble Commands . . . 523ACTIVATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523BCDATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525BLDATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526CONDATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528DEACTIVATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529DISCOVERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532DROP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533ENSDATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535GETBCSTAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536GETBLSTAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537GETESTAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538GETVHSTAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539GETVSSTAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541HMCSWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544SUBSCRIBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547UNSUBSCRIBE. . . . . . . . . . . . . 549VHDATA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552VSDATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553WLDATA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555ZBXDATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556

Chapter 10. PSM Commands - SpecialRequests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559ISQACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559ISQCLEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559ISQMSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559ISQPSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560ISQQUERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560ISQSTATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560ISQTRACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561STOPALL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561

Part 5. Appendixes . . . . . . . . 563

Appendix A. Definitions for I/OOperations Commands . . . . . . . 565ESCON/FICON Director . . . . . . . . . 565Switch Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . 565Switch Unique Identifier. . . . . . . . . . 566

Logical Switch Number (LSN) . . . . . . . . 566Port Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566Switch Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566Allow or Prohibit Mask of a Port . . . . . . . 567Switch Port Hardware Status on a DisplayCommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567Logical Tokens . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568Physical Tokens . . . . . . . . . . . . 568Channel Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568

A Parallel Channel . . . . . . . . . . 569An ESCON (CNC) Channel . . . . . . . 570An ESCON Channel Operating in Converted(CVC) Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . 570A FICON (FC) Channel . . . . . . . . . 570Coupling Facility Channels . . . . . . . . 570OSA Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . 570

Making Connectivity Changes . . . . . . . . 570NOForce|NOCheck|Force Option Set . . . . 571Backout|Nobackout Option Set . . . . . . 572

When a Command Fails . . . . . . . . . . 572Switching Commands . . . . . . . . . . 573Types Of Channels . . . . . . . . . . . 576Remove (Quiesce) a Switch . . . . . . . . . 576Restore (Enable) a Switch . . . . . . . . . 577Using Port Names as a Tool in SwitchingCommands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577Chain and Unchain a Switchable Path (ESCONonly) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577Chaining a Path (ESCON only) . . . . . . . 578

Two Scenarios for a CH Chain in a CNC Path 579A "Partially-ESCON" Path . . . . . . . . . 581An ESCON-in-Converted-Mode (CVC) Path . . . 581A Parallel Channel in Block (BL) Mode . . . . . 581Processing a Vary Path Request . . . . . . . 582

General Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . 582VTAM Application Name . . . . . . . . . 583TCP/IP Host Name . . . . . . . . . . . 583

Appendix B. General Considerationsfor I/O Operations Commands . . . . 585General Information and Tips for UsingMultisystem Commands. . . . . . . . . . 585General Considerations for Using the QueryEntity|Interface|Relations Commands . . . . . 586Device and Path Status After ConnectivityCommands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588

Appendix C. Notices . . . . . . . . 595Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597Terms and conditions for product documentation 597

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629

Contents v

||

vi System Automation for z/OS:

Figures

1. Resource Selection Panel . . . . . . . . 62. Resource Selection Panel: Non-Sysplexwide 153. Resource Selection Panel 2: Sysplexwide 164. AOCHELP Command Dialog Panel . . . . 275. AOCTRACE Main Command Dialog Panel 306. AOCTRACE Command Dialog Panel for a

Specific REXX Script . . . . . . . . . 317. Display of Automation Control File Settings

for Subsystem (DISPACF SUBSYSTEM) . . . 388. Automation Operators Panel . . . . . . . 409. DISPAPG Panel . . . . . . . . . . . 42

10. Display of Automation Status File Informationfor TSO (DISPASF TSO) . . . . . . . . 44

11. DISPAUTO Command Dialog Panel . . . . 4512. DISPERRS Command Dialog Panel . . . . 4613. DISPEVT Command Dialog Panel . . . . . 4814. DISPEVTS Command Dialog Panel . . . . 5015. DISPEVTS Command Dialog Panel: Setting an

Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5116. DISPFLGS Command Dialog Panel . . . . 5317. DISPGW Command Dialog Panel 1 . . . . 5518. DISPINFO Command Dialog Panel . . . . 5719. Authorized Message Receivers (DISPMSGS)

Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5920. DISPMTR Initial Command Dialog Panel 6121. DISPMTR Command Dialog Panel Showing

Details for a Monitor . . . . . . . . . 6322. DISPSCHD Command Dialog Panel . . . . 6423. DISPSFLT Command Dialog Panel . . . . . 6724. Display of Status of All Automated Resources

(DISPSTAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7025. DISPSYS Command Dialog Panel . . . . . 7326. DISPTREE Command Dialog Panel . . . . 7527. DISPTRG Command Dialog Panel . . . . . 7628. EXPLAIN Command Dialog Panel . . . . . 7929. INGAMS Command Dialog Panel . . . . . 8430. INGAMS Command Dialog Panel to Control

Secondary Automation Manager Functions . . 8631. INGAMS Command Dialog Panel to Show

Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8832. INGAMS Command Dialog Panel to Refresh

the Configuration . . . . . . . . . . 9033. INGAMS Command Dialog Panel to Manage

Diagnostic Functions . . . . . . . . . 9134. INGAMS Work Item Statistics Display . . . 9235. INGAMS Work Item History Display . . . . 9336. INGAUTO Command Dialog Panel . . . . 9737. INGCF Selection Panel . . . . . . . . 10438. ENABLE Command Dialog Panel: After

Populating . . . . . . . . . . . . 11039. ENABLE Command Dialog Panel: After

Issuing Command "INGCF E cf_name" . . . 11140. MAINT Command Output . . . . . . . 11241. PATH Command Dialog Panel . . . . . . 11242. STRUCTURE Command Dialog Panel 11343. INGCICS REQ=CMD Command Dialog Panel 119

44. INGCICS REQ=BROADCAST CommandDialog Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

45. INGCICS REQ=INFO Command Dialog Panel 12146. SA z/OS Discovery Library Adapter Report 12647. INGFILT Command Dialog Panel . . . . . 13248. INGGROUP Command Dialog Panel 14049. INGGROUP Command Dialog Selection

Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14150. INGGROUP Command Dialog Panel Showing

Members' Detail . . . . . . . . . . 14151. INGHIST Command Dialog Panel . . . . 14452. INGIMS Command Dialog Panel . . . . . 15053. INGIMS REQ=BROADCAST Command

Dialog Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . 15154. IMS Dependent Regions Panel . . . . . . 15255. INGINFO Command Dialog Panel . . . . 15456. INGLIST Command Dialog Panel . . . . . 16057. INGLIST Command Dialog Panel To Update

Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16458. INGLKUP Command Dialog Panel . . . . 16959. INGLKUP Command Dialog Panel for the

ANALYSE Option . . . . . . . . . . 17060. INGMDFY Command Dialog Panel . . . . 17261. INGMOVE Command Dialog Panel . . . . 17662. INGMOVE Confirmation Panel . . . . . 17863. INGMSGS Command Dialog Panel . . . . 18064. INGNTFY Command Dialog Panel . . . . 18365. INGPAC Pacing Gate(s) Display Panel 18666. INGPAC Pacing Gate Detail Display Panel 18767. INGPLEX Selection Panel . . . . . . . 19468. INGPLEX CDS Command Dialog Panel 19769. Confirmation Panel for Switching from the

Current Primary CDS to the Alternate CDS . 19970. INGPLEX CDS Command Dialog Panel after

the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 19971. CFRM Couple Data Set Information Panel

before Policy Switch . . . . . . . . . 20072. Confirmation Panel for Policy Switch 20173. Channel Path Information for CFRM Couple

Data Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20174. INGPLEX SYSTEM Command Dialog Panel 1 20375. INGPLEX SYSTEM Command Dialog Panel 2 20476. INGPLEX CONS Command Dialog Panel 20577. INGPLEX IPL Main Panel . . . . . . . 20878. INGPLEX Dump Options Panel . . . . . 20979. INGPLEX SDUMP Panel . . . . . . . . 20980. INGPLEX SDUMP Modification Panel 21081. INGPLEX SVCDUMP Target System Selection

Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21182. INGPLEX SVCDUMP Address Space

Selection Panel . . . . . . . . . . . 21283. INGPLEX SVCDUMP Address Space Detail

Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21284. INGPLEX SVCDUMP Dump Option Panel 21385. INGPLEX SVC Line Mode Sample . . . . 21486. INGPLEX SLIP Main Panel . . . . . . . 215

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2014 vii

||

||||

|||

||||

||

||||

87. INGRELS Command Dialog Panel . . . . 21788. INGRELS Command Dialog Panel with All

Details Collapsed . . . . . . . . . . 21889. INGREQ Command Dialog Panel 1 . . . . 22790. INGREQ Command Dialog Panel 2 . . . . 22891. INGRPT Command Dialog Panel . . . . . 23092. INGRUN Command Dialog Panel . . . . 23493. INGSCHED Initial Command Dialog Panel 23894. INGSCHED Command Dialog Panel Showing

Schedule Details . . . . . . . . . . 23995. INGSCHED Command Dialog Panel Showing

Schedule Overrides . . . . . . . . . 24096. INGSCHED Command Dialog Panel Showing

Resources Related to a Schedule . . . . . 24197. INGSCHED Command Dialog Panel Showing

Resource Overrides . . . . . . . . . 24298. INGSEND Command Dialog Panel . . . . 24699. INGSESS Command Dialog Panel. . . . . 247

100. INGSESS Command Dialog Detail Panel 249101. The INGSTR Panel without Structure

Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . 259102. The INGSTR Panel with Structure Conditions 260103. REALLOCATE Confirmation Panel . . . . 261104. INGSTR Line Command Output . . . . . 261105. Display of Threshold Settings for JES

(INGTHRES JES) . . . . . . . . . . 264106. INGTHRES Command Dialog Panel to Add

Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . 265107. INGTRIG Initial Command Dialog Panel 267108. INGTRIG Command Dialog Panel Showing

Resources Associated with a Trigger . . . . 268109. INGTWS Command Dialog Panel . . . . . 273110. INGTWS REQ=LIST TYPE=APPL Command

Dialog Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . 274111. INGTWS REQ=LIST TYPE=OP Command

Dialog Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . 275112. INGTWS REQ=LIST TYPE=SR Command

Dialog Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . 275113. INGTWS REQ=LIST TYPE=WS Command

Dialog Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . 276114. INGTWS REQ=LIST TYPE=CAL Command

Dialog Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . 276115. INGTWS Filter Command Dialog Panel 277116. INGVOTE Command Dialog Panel . . . . 280117. INGVOTE Command Output . . . . . . 281118. OPCAQRY Command Dialog Panel . . . . 283119. OPCAQRY Command Dialog Panel Showing

Details for a Command . . . . . . . . 284120. OPCAQRY Command Dialog Panel Showing

Details for a Command in Error . . . . . 285121. SETSTATE Command Dialog Panel . . . . 293122. SETTIMER Command Dialog Panel: Display

of Scheduled Timers . . . . . . . . . 294123. SETTIMER Command Dialog Panel: Adding

or Changing Timers . . . . . . . . . 296124. ALLOW Command: Sample 1 . . . . . . 305

125. ALLOW Command: Sample 2 . . . . . . 305126. BLOCK Command: Sample 1 . . . . . . 306127. BLOCK Command: Sample 2 . . . . . . 307128. CHAIN Command: Sample 1 . . . . . . 309129. CHAIN Command: Sample 2 . . . . . . 309130. CONNECT Command Sample . . . . . . 311131. DISPLAY CHP Command: Sample 1 . . . . 314132. DISPLAY CHP Command: Sample 2 . . . . 314133. DISPLAY DEV Command Sample. . . . . 316134. DISPLAY HOST Command: Sample 1 319135. DISPLAY NAME Command: Sample 1 321136. DISPLAY NAME Command: Sample 2 321137. DISPLAY NAME Command: Sample 3 322138. DISPLAY PORT Command: Sample 1 324139. DISPLAY PORT Command: Sample 2 324140. DISPLAY RESULTS Command: Scenario 1 328141. DISPLAY RESULTS Command: Scenario 2 329142. DISPLAY SWITCH Command: Sample 1 332143. PROHIBIT Command: Sample 1 . . . . . 339144. PROHIBIT Command: Sample 2 . . . . . 339145. REMOVE SWITCH Command Sample 344146. RESET HOST Command: Scenario 1 . . . . 347147. RESET HOST Command: Scenario 2 . . . . 347148. UNBLOCK Command: Sample 1 . . . . . 354149. UNBLOCK Command: Sample 2 . . . . . 355150. UNCHAIN Command Sample . . . . . . 356151. WRITE Command: Sample 1 . . . . . . 358152. WRITE Command: Sample 2 . . . . . . 358153. ISQXDST Status Summary Panel . . . . . 408154. Target System Summary Panel . . . . . . 411155. Target Hardware SummaryPanel for

OCF-Based Processors . . . . . . . . 416156. Ensemble Main View . . . . . . . . . 417157. ISQEZBX cursor sensitive areas . . . . . 421158. zBX Base Operation Blade View . . . . . 422159. Path Detail Panel . . . . . . . . . . 425160. Sample System Options Panel for an

OCF-Based Processor in a Basic-Mode MVSTarget System . . . . . . . . . . . 434

161. Sample System Options Panel for anOCF-Based Processor in LPAR-Mode MVSTarget System . . . . . . . . . . . 434

162. Sample of an ESCON Director Diagram 565163. Switch Port Hardware Status Format 568164. PROHIBIT Command Example . . . . . 574165. CONNECT Command Example . . . . . 574166. BLOCK Command Example . . . . . . 574167. UNBLOCK Command Example . . . . . 575168. DISCONNECT Command Example . . . . 575169. ALLOW Command Example . . . . . . 576170. Examples of Chained Paths . . . . . . . 578171. Chain: Scenario 1 . . . . . . . . . . 579172. Chain: Scenario 2 . . . . . . . . . . 580173. ESCON-in-Converted-Mode Sample . . . . 581174. Parallel Channel in Block Mode Sample 582

viii System Automation for z/OS:

||

||

||

Tables

1. System Automation for z/OS Library xvii2. Overview of Commands . . . . . . . . 33. ISQVARS Keywords Sorted by Keyword

Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3924. Ensemble Connection Status . . . . . . 419

5. Device and Path Status Before and After theREMOVE SWITCH and RESTORE SWITCHCommands . . . . . . . . . . . . 589

6. Path and Device Status Summary . . . . . 592

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2014 ix

x System Automation for z/OS:

Accessibility

Accessibility features help users with physical disabilities, such as restrictedmobility or limited vision, to use software products successfully. SystemAutomation for z/OS supports several user interfaces. Product functionality andaccessibility features vary according to the interface.

The major accessibility features in this product enable users in the following ways:v Use assistive technologies such as screen reader software and digital speech

synthesizer, to hear what is displayed on screen. Consult the productdocumentation of the assistive technology for details on using those technologieswith this product and screen magnifier software

v Operate specific or equivalent features using only the keyboardv Magnify what is displayed on screen.

The product documentation includes the following features to aid accessibility:v All documentation is available to both HTML and convertible PDF formats to

give the maximum opportunity for users to apply screen-reader softwarev All images in the documentation are provided with alternative text so that users

with vision impairments can understand the contents of the images.

Using assistive technologiesAssistive technology products, such as screen readers, function with the userinterfaces found in z/OS®. Consult the assistive technology documentation forspecific information when using such products to access z/OS interfaces.

Keyboard navigation of the user interfaceUsers can access z/OS user interfaces using TSO/E or ISPF. Refer to z/OS TSO/EPrimer, z/OS TSO/E User's Guide, and z/OS ISPF User's Guide Vol 1 for informationabout accessing TSO/E and ISPF interfaces. These guides describe how to useTSO/E and ISPF, including the use of keyboard shortcuts or function keys (PFkeys). Each guide includes the default settings for the PF keys and explains how tomodify their functions.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2014 xi

xii System Automation for z/OS:

Dotted decimal syntax diagrams

Syntax diagrams are provided in dotted decimal format for users accessing theInformation Center using a screen reader. In dotted decimal format, each syntaxelement is written on a separate line. If two or more syntax elements are alwayspresent together (or always absent together), they can appear on the same line,because they can be considered as a single compound syntax element.

Each line starts with a dotted decimal number; for example, 3 or 3.1 or 3.1.1. Tohear these numbers correctly, make sure that your screen reader is set to read outpunctuation. All the syntax elements that have the same dotted decimal number(for example, all the syntax elements that have the number 3.1) are mutuallyexclusive alternatives. If you hear the lines 3.1 USERID and 3.1 SYSTEMID, youknow that your syntax can include either USERID or SYSTEMID, but not both.

The dotted decimal numbering level denotes the level of nesting. For example, if asyntax element with dotted decimal number 3 is followed by a series of syntaxelements with dotted decimal number 3.1, all the syntax elements numbered 3.1are subordinate to the syntax element numbered 3.

Certain words and symbols are used next to the dotted decimal numbers to addinformation about the syntax elements. Occasionally, these words and symbolsmight occur at the beginning of the element itself. For ease of identification, if theword or symbol is a part of the syntax element, it is preceded by the backslash (\)character. The * symbol can be used next to a dotted decimal number to indicatethat the syntax element repeats. For example, syntax element *FILE with dotteddecimal number 3 is given the format 3 \* FILE. Format 3* FILE indicates thatsyntax element FILE repeats. Format 3* \* FILE indicates that syntax element *FILE repeats.

Characters such as commas, which are used to separate a string of syntaxelements, are shown in the syntax just before the items they separate. Thesecharacters can appear on the same line as each item, or on a separate line with thesame dotted decimal number as the relevant items. The line can also show anothersymbol giving information about the syntax elements. For example, the lines 5.1*,5.1 LASTRUN, and 5.1 DELETE mean that if you use more than one of theLASTRUN and DELETE syntax elements, the elements must be separated by acomma. If no separator is given, assume that you use a blank to separate eachsyntax element.

If a syntax element is preceded by the % symbol, this indicates a reference that isdefined elsewhere. The string following the % symbol is the name of a syntaxfragment rather than a literal. For example, the line 2.1 %OP1 means that youshould refer to separate syntax fragment OP1.

The following words and symbols are used next to the dotted decimal numbers:v ? means an optional syntax element. A dotted decimal number followed by the ?

symbol indicates that all the syntax elements with a corresponding dotteddecimal number, and any subordinate syntax elements, are optional. If there isonly one syntax element with a dotted decimal number, the ? symbol isdisplayed on the same line as the syntax element, (for example 5? NOTIFY). Ifthere is more than one syntax element with a dotted decimal number, the ?symbol is displayed on a line by itself, followed by the syntax elements that are

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2014 xiii

optional. For example, if you hear the lines 5 ?, 5 NOTIFY, and 5 UPDATE, youknow that syntax elements NOTIFY and UPDATE are optional; that is, you canchoose one or none of them. The ? symbol is equivalent to a bypass line in arailroad diagram.

v ! means a default syntax element. A dotted decimal number followed by the !symbol and a syntax element indicates that the syntax element is the defaultoption for all syntax elements that share the same dotted decimal number. Onlyone of the syntax elements that share the same dotted decimal number canspecify a ! symbol. For example, if you hear the lines 2? FILE, 2.1! (KEEP), and2.1 (DELETE), you know that (KEEP) is the default option for the FILE keyword.In this example, if you include the FILE keyword but do not specify an option,default option KEEP will be applied. A default option also applies to the nexthigher dotted decimal number. In this example, if the FILE keyword is omitted,default FILE(KEEP) is used. However, if you hear the lines 2? FILE, 2.1, 2.1.1!(KEEP), and 2.1.1 (DELETE), the default option KEEP only applies to the nexthigher dotted decimal number, 2.1 (which does not have an associatedkeyword), and does not apply to 2? FILE. Nothing is used if the keyword FILEis omitted.

v * means a syntax element that can be repeated 0 or more times. A dotteddecimal number followed by the * symbol indicates that this syntax element canbe used zero or more times; that is, it is optional and can be repeated. Forexample, if you hear the line 5.1* data area, you know that you can include onedata area, more than one data area, or no data area. If you hear the lines 3*, 3HOST, and 3 STATE, you know that you can include HOST, STATE, bothtogether, or nothing.

Notes:

1. If a dotted decimal number has an asterisk (*) next to it and there is only oneitem with that dotted decimal number, you can repeat that same item morethan once.

2. If a dotted decimal number has an asterisk next to it and several items havethat dotted decimal number, you can use more than one item from the list,but you cannot use the items more than once each. In the previous example,you could write HOST STATE, but you could not write HOST HOST.

3. The * symbol is equivalent to a loop-back line in a railroad syntax diagram.v + means a syntax element that must be included one or more times. A dotted

decimal number followed by the + symbol indicates that this syntax elementmust be included one or more times; that is, it must be included at least onceand can be repeated. For example, if you hear the line 6.1+ data area, you mustinclude at least one data area. If you hear the lines 2+, 2 HOST, and 2 STATE,you know that you must include HOST, STATE, or both. Similar to the * symbol,the + symbol can only repeat a particular item if it is the only item with thatdotted decimal number. The + symbol, like the * symbol, is equivalent to aloop-back line in a railroad syntax diagram.

xiv System Automation for z/OS:

How to send your comments to IBM

We appreciate your input on this publication. Feel free to send us any commentsyou might have.

If you have feedback to the manuals

If you have comments on the manuals, like clarity, accuracy, and completeness ofthe information, use the Feedback channel on IBM Knowledge Center to send yourcomments.1. Click Feedback > Email IBM Knowledge Center support at the bottom right

of IBM Knowledge Center.2. On the Launch Application page, choose one email application and log in. A

new email is displayed.3. In the email body, write down your feedback. Please include the specific book

and topic name that you're commenting on.4. Send the email to the default recipient.5. SA z/OS team will respond to you by email as soon as possible.

If you have a technical problem

Use one of the following feedback methods:v Contact your IBM service representativev Call IBM technical supportv Visit the IBM zSeries support web page at www.ibm.com/systems/z/support/

When you send comments to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use ordistribute your comments in any way it believes appropriate without incurring anyobligation to you.

IBM or any other organizations will only use the personal information that yousupply to contact you about the issues that you submit.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2014 xv

http://www.ibm.com/support/knowledgecenter/SSWRCJ_3.5.0/com.ibm.safos.doc_3.5/kc_welcome-444.html

http://www.ibm.com/systems/z/support/

xvi System Automation for z/OS:

About this publication

This publication provides detailed information and reference material for operatingIBM® Tivoli® System Automation for z/OS (SA z/OS).

Throughout this publication references to MVS™ refer either to MVS/ESA, or to theMVS element of z/OS.

Who Should Use This PublicationThis information is intended primarily for operators and system programmers. Itmay also be useful for others, for example, help desk personnel and customerengineers.

Where to Find More Information

The System Automation for z/OS LibraryTable 1 shows the information units in the System Automation for z/OS library:

Table 1. System Automation for z/OS Library

Title Order Number

IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS Planning and Installation SC34-2716

IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS Customizing and Programming SC34-2715

IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS Defining Automation Policy SC34-2717

IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS User's Guide SC34-2718

IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS Messages and Codes SC34-2719

IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS Operator's Commands SC34-2720

IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS Programmer's Reference SC34-2748

IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS Product Automation Programmer'sReference and Operator's Guide

SC34-2714

IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS TWS Automation Programmer's andOperator's Reference Guide

SC34-2749

IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS End-to-End Automation Adapter SC34-2750

IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS Monitoring Agent Configuration andUser's Guide

SC34-2751

SA z/OS Home Page:

For the latest news on SA z/OS, visit the SA z/OS home page at:http://www-03.ibm.com/software/products/en/tivosystautoforzos

Related Product InformationFor information that supports Tivoli System Automation for z/OS, visit the z/OSlibrary in IBM Knowledge Center (https://www.ibm.com/support/knowledgecenter/SSLTBW).

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2014 xvii

|||

http://www-03.ibm.com/software/products/en/tivosystautoforzos

https://www.ibm.com/support/knowledgecenter/SSLTBW

https://www.ibm.com/support/knowledgecenter/SSLTBW

Summary of Changes for SC34-2720-00This document contains information previously presented in System Automationfor z/OS V3R4.0 Operator's Commands, SC34-2649-00.

You may notice changes in the style and structure of some content in thisdocument—for example, headings that use uppercase for the first letter of initialwords only, and procedures that have a different look and format. The changes areongoing improvements to the consistency and retrievability of information in ourdocuments.

This document contains terminology, maintenance, and editorial changes.

New InformationThe following information and commands have been introduced:

System OperationsINGPAC

The “INGPAC” on page 184 command is added for managing pacinggates.

INGPWThe “INGPW” on page 187 command is added for managing passwords.

DISPINFOThe UP Status Delay field is added to the DISPINFO command output. See“DISPINFO” on page 56.

INGAMSThe XSTATUS parameter is added to the INGAMS command to displayinformation denoted by the PLEXID specification for XCF groups. See“INGAMS” on page 79.

HMCSWITCHA new Ensemble command is added for switching between a Primary andan alternative Hardware Management Console (HMC). See“HMCSWITCH” on page 542.

INGFILT/INGLISTThe PGNAME parameter is added for INGFILT and INGLIST to displayinformation about Pacing Gates for resources. See INGFILT and “INGLIST”on page 155.

Processor OperationsISQSNDH

A new processor operations ISQSNDH command is added for sendinghigh priority commands. See “ISQSNDH” on page 380.

ISQVARS KeywordsTwo new keywords lparscop (LPAR scope) and pollopt (Path poll option) areadded to the list of keywords available with the processor operationscommand “ISQVARS” on page 385.

ISQVARS Keywords for SNMPv3Three new keywords snmpv3 (Use SNMPv3 protocol), v3pwd (SNMPv3Password), and v3User (SNMPv3 Username) are added for the SNMPv3settings, when using the processor operations command “ISQVARS” onpage 385.

xviii System Automation for z/OS:

Changed InformationInformation has been updated for the following commands:

System OperationsDISPAPG

The DISPAPG command panel is updated.

INGFILT/INGLISTThe Application Type and SubType parameters are replaced by theCategory and Subcategory parameters in INGFILT and “INGLIST” on page155 to cover IBM-defined and user-defined application categories.

INGMDFYThe scenarios for using these commands are redefined. See “INGMDFY”on page 170.

Processor OperationsISQXDST

The SA z/OS PATH details screen (ISQEPNVC) is updated. See “DisplayPath Details” on page 424 for new SNMPv3 security fields and parameters.

Additional value ZAWARE for ISQVARS variablesValue ZAWARE is added for variables ostype (Target operating systemtype) and tmode (Target system mode) in use with the “ISQVARS” on page385 command.

Deleted InformationThe following information has been deleted:

UOW and INIT settings for the Override parameter in INGREQ/INGRUNThe above settings are retired for the “INGREQ” on page 218/“INGRUN”on page 231 system operations commands.

About this publication xix

xx System Automation for z/OS:

Part 1. Introduction

This part gives an overview of System Automation for z/OS commands — how toenter them, their format, and the various types of commands.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1996, 2014 1

2 System Automation for z/OS:

Chapter 1. Overview of Commands

Table 2 gives a brief overview of the System Automation for z/OS commands. Thisoverview describes the various types of commands, their functions and where theycan be entered. For detailed information about how to issue commands, see IBMTivoli System Automation for z/OS User's Guide.

Table 2. Overview of Commands

Type of command Function Where entered

System operationscommands

Control and maintainresources in the enterprisefrom a single point of control

NetView console, or NMC

I/O operations commands Control input/output devices TSO/ISPF, API, operatorconsole

Processor operationscommands

Common commands forautomation

API, NetView console, orNMCNote: Precede withISQCCMD command

Control hardware processors NetView console or NMC

Ensemble commands forSystem z® zEnterprise®

BladeCenter Extension (zBX)automation

API, NetView consoleNote: Precede withISQECMD command


Overview of Commands


Chapter 2. Understanding Terms

This section contains details of various terms that are used throughout this book.

ResourceIn SA z/OS the term resource denotes any entity that can be automated. Theautomation manager administrates resources.

A resource is identified by its name. The resource name must be unique within theautomation manager name space. The format of the resource name isname/type[/system]. The three components of the resource name can be thefollowing:

Name Specifies the name of the resource, for example the subsystem name for anapplication (APL) or the automation name for an application group (APG).

Type Specifies the type of the resource. The type parameter is optional. It canhave the following values:APL Indicates that the resource is a subsystem.APG Indicates that the resource is an application group.EVT Indicates that the resource is an event.MTR Indicates that the resource is a monitor.SVP Indicates that the resource is a service period (schedule).SYG Indicates the group of all resources of a system. SYG is created

automatically. This is the application group that contains allresources of a particular system.

SYS Indicates that the resource is a system.

SystemSpecifies the system/image name where the resource is defined. Thesystem parameter is not used for sysplex resources, for example, sysplexapplication groups, events or service periods.

If the resource that you specified is not unique within the domain of theautomation manager, a selection panel is displayed where you can select what youwant to work with, as shown in Figure 1 on page 6.


Specifying ResourcesThere are various ways of specifying automation manager resources in SystemAutomation for z/OS. The scope of the automation manager is a sysplex orSA z/OS subplex (that a group that shares the same XCF ID).

Using Components of Resource NamesComponents are the parts that make up the name of a resource using automationmanager notation.

Here are a few examples of how to specify resource names using components:

TSO All resources that have the name TSO.

TSO/APGAll resources that have the name TSO, and the type APG.

TSO/APLAll resources that have the name TSO, of the type APL, on all systems inthe sysplex.

Using WildcardsYou can also use an asterisk (*) to substitute one or more components of afully-qualified resource name. Components are optional and may be replaced by anasterisk (*).

For example, a specification for TSO expands with TSO/*/*.

Here are a few examples of how to specify resources using wildcards:

*/APL/SYS1All resources of type APL, on system SYS1.

TSO/*/SYS1All resources that have the name TSO, of any type, on system SYS1.

AOFKSEL4 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 4Domain ID = IPSNO ---------- INGINFO ---------- Date = 02/24/00Operator ID = NETOP1 Time = 11:12:00

Multiple instances found for TSOSelect one item to be processed, then press ENTER.

Sel Name Type System Description--- ----------- ---- -------- ------------------------------------------

TSO APL KEY1 Time Sharing OptionTSO APL KEY2 Time Sharing OptionTSO APL KEY3 Time Sharing OptionTSO APL KEY4 Time Sharing Option

Command ===>PF1=Help PF2=End PF3=ReturnPF6=Roll PF12=Retrieve

Figure 1. Resource Selection Panel

Understanding Terms


*/SYS/*All resources of type SYS, on any system in the sysplex.

*/*/* All resources of any type on any system in the sysplex.

You can specify wildcards for a component of the fully-qualified resource name.The following shows a few examples:

TSO*/APL/KEY*All resources starting with TSO, of type APL, on the systems whose namesstart with KEY.

*TSO/AP*/*All resources whose names end with TSO, of any type starting with AP, onany system in the sysplex.

You can use the percentage sign (%) as a placeholder for one character. This meansthat any character in that position of the resource name matches. The followingshows a few examples:

%TSO*All resources whose names contain TSO starting in character two.

TSO/S%S/*All resources whose names start with TSO and where the first and lastcharacter of the type is S, on any system in the sysplex.

Understanding Terms

Chapter 2. Understanding Terms 7

Understanding Terms


Chapter 3. Format of Syntax Diagrams

The description of each command and routine includes the format of the commandin a syntax diagram. The diagram shows the operands for the commands. Useblanks to separate the operands, unless otherwise stated or diagrammed.

To construct a command from the diagram, follow the diagram from left to right,choosing the path that suits your needs. Following is a sample syntax diagram thatexplains how to construct a command. This sample command is for illustrationonly.

►►(1) (2)

ASample

(3)ALL

SOMENONE

(4)EQ

▼(5) (6)

job_number ►◄

Notes:

1 Start here. ►►─ indicates the start of the diagram.

2 You can type ASAMPLE or abbreviate it to AS. The uppercase characters are theabbreviation. Operands on the main line are required.

3 Choose one of the options. The default is always above the main line. In thiscase, ALL is the default. If the option includes punctuation marks, includethem too: =()., .

4 Choose E, Q, or neither. Operands below the main line are optional.

5 Repeat job_number any number of times. Variables are shown in italics.Replace them with a real name or value. Note that if you specify more thanone job_number you must put them in brackets.

6 End here. ─►◄ indicates the end of the command.

If a command continues to the next line, you see ─► and ►─. ├and┤ indicates afragment for a specific condition or option.

Examples:===> asample none q DAF00821 DAF00832 ELD00824===> as some DLR01445


Format of Syntax Diagrams


Part 2. SA z/OS System Operations Commands

This part describes SA z/OS system operations commands — their format, andspecifics of how to use them.

See IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS User's Guide for general informationabout the SA z/OS commands.


Chapter 4. System Operations Commands

Using System Operations Commands

General InformationYou can issue any system operations command by typing the command and itsparameters on the command line of any NetView or system operations panel.

You can also issue system operations commands by entering the command viaNMC. In addition, System Automation for z/OS provides a menu of commanddialogs that allows you to select a command dialog panel for a specific systemoperations command. For further information on how to issue system operationscommands, see IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS User's Guide.

Overview of Commands that Operate SysplexwideThe following system operations commands operate sysplexwide (which meansthat they also operate across an SA z/OS subplex):

DISPEVT/DISPEVTSDISPMTRINGAMSINGCF/INGCFLINGCFGINGCICSINGEVENTINGHISTINGIMSINGINFOINGLISTINGMOVEINGTWSINGPLEXINGRELSINGREQINGRUNINGSCHEDINGSETINGSTRINGTRIGINGVOTE

You can issue sysplexwide commands from any system within the sysplex,regardless of where the resource resides.

If no target is specified, the command that was issued will find the affectedresources in the sysplex.

Specifying the target system parameter is only required when routing thecommand from the focal-point system to a system in another sysplex or to a singleremote system.


For further information about sysplexwide commands, see IBM Tivoli SystemAutomation for z/OS User's Guide.

Additional Parameters for System Operations CommandsThe following parameters are available for a number of system operationscommands.

TARGET ParameterPurpose

The TARGET parameter lets you specify the system where the command is to beprocessed. You can direct the command to:v A particular system in the sysplex, or enterprisev A subset of systems in the sysplex, or enterprisev A sysplexv All systems currently active in the local sysplex

Format

►► Command nameTARGET= Destination

Dest_list*ALL

►◄

Destination:

system_namedomain_IDsaplex_name

Dest_list:

▼( Destination )

Values

system_nameSpecifies the name of the z/OS system

domain_IDSpecifies the NetView domain identifier

saplex_nameSpecifies the name of the sysplex

*ALL SA z/OS specifies that the command should be routed to all SA z/OSsystems that are currently active in the local sysplex.

Note that not all of the commands that support the TARGET parameteralso support the *ALL value. Refer to the syntax diagrams to find outwhether *ALL is supported.


Processing

The search sequence to locate the target is as follows:1. System name within the local sysplex2. Domain ID within the local sysplex3. Local sysplex name

If it is a human operator, the search continues in the following sequence:v Domain ID within the enterprisev System name within the enterprisev Sysplex name within the enterprise

If no value is specified, and the command does not refer to a defined resource, it isprocessed on the local system.

Non-Sysplexwide Commands:

If you do not specify the TARGET parameter, and the SA z/OS command refers toa defined resource, SA z/OS processing is as follows:v If the resource is only defined on one active system, the command is routed to

that system.v When processing the command in line mode, SA z/OS checks whether the

resource is defined on the local system. If it is, the command is processed locally.Otherwise, an error message is issued.

v If the resource is defined on more than one active system, and the command isnot running on an autotask, SA z/OS displays a selection panel such as inFigure 2 where you can select the resource or resources that the command is tobe routed to.

If you enter dispacf mvsesa a panel similar to Figure 2 is displayed.

If the target is within the local sysplex, the communication method is via XCFfacilities. Otherwise, the NetView RMTCMD command is used.

AOFKSEL1 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 4Domain ID = IPUFA ---------- DISPACF ---------- Date = 06/27/00Operator ID = NETOP1 Time = 17:43:12

Multiple instances found for MVSESA in sysplex(es) AOCPLEXSelect one or more items to be processed, then press ENTER.

Sel System Domain--- -------- --------

AOCA IPUFAAOCB IPUFBAOCC IPUFCAOCD IPUFD

Command ===>PF1=Help PF2=End PF3=ReturnPF6=Roll PF12=Retrieve

Figure 2. Resource Selection Panel: Non-Sysplexwide

Additional Parameters for System Operations Commands

Chapter 4. System Operations Commands 15

Sysplexwide Commands:

Sysplexwide commands are processed locally.

If a target is specified and the resource is not defined on the specified system,SA z/OS issues an error message.

If you enter ingvote stdt000* a panel similar to Figure 3 is displayed.

OUTMODE ParameterPurpose

The OUTMODE parameter lets you specify the output mode of a command.

Format

►► Command nameOUTMODE= LINE

AUTONETLOG

►◄

Values

LINEIf you specify LINE, the output is displayed in line mode, independent of thetask type. Further characteristics are:v No color attributes are set for data that is shown in line mode.v The sequence of the fields may be different in line mode than in fullscreen.v Not all fields from the fullscreen display may be shown in line mode.v Line mode output is shown in a multiline message.v System operations commands can be issued within a NetView PIPE by using

the OUTMODE=LINE parameter, unless noted otherwise in the commanddescription.

AOFKSEL4 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 32Domain ID = IPUFA ---------- INGVOTE ---------- Date = 06/27/00Operator ID = NETOP1 Time = 17:50:39

Multiple instances found for STDT000*Select one item to be processed, then press ENTER.


STDT000AN00 APL AOCA Parent for all STD* appl 05/16/00 06:25STDT000AN00 APL AOCB Parent for all STD* appl 05/16/00 06:25STDT000AN00 APL AOCC Parent for all STD* appl 05/16/00 06:25STDT000AN00 APL AOCD Parent for all STD* appl 05/16/00 06:25STDT000AN1A APL AOCA Child of AN10 (child tree --- AN1B)STDT000AN1A APL AOCB Child of AN10 (child tree --- AN1B)STDT000AN1A APL AOCC Child of AN10 (child tree --- AN1B)STDT000AN1A APL AOCD Child of AN10 (child tree --- AN1B)STDT000AN1B APL AOCASTDT000AN1B APL AOCBSTDT000AN1B APL AOCC

Command ===>PF1=Help PF2=End PF3=ReturnPF6=Roll PF8=Forward PF12=Retrieve

Figure 3. Resource Selection Panel 2: Sysplexwide



v Line mode output is not processed by the NetView automation table and isnot written to the netlog. To write output from a command such asDISPSTAT to the netlog, use a PIPE command, for example:PIPE NETV DISPSTAT OUTMODE=LINE | LOGTO NETLOG

v Line mode output cannot be processed by a TRAP and WAIT.v System operations commands that support the OUTMODE=LINE option can

be used in user-written command lists. Note, however, that the format of theoutput may change in later releases.

v If you work with OUTMODE=LINE no prompt panel is displayed.

AUTOSpecifies that when the task that the command list runs on is unattended, theoutput of the command is written to the NetView log. Otherwise the output iswritten to the console.

NETLOGSpecifies that the output of the command is written to the NetView log.

Note: If no value is specified, the decision whether to display the commandoutput with a fullscreen panel or in line mode is based on the NetView task typethat the command is running on.

OUTDSN ParameterPurpose

This parameter lets you specify the name of the data set that is to contain theoutput of the command.

Format

►► Command nameOUTDSN=dsname

►◄

Values

dsnameThe data set name. You can specify a sequential data set or a member of apartitioned data set.

The record format should be variable-blocked and recommended is VB 1024.

Restrictions

The data set must already exist.

The OUTDSN parameter forces OUTMODE=LINE.

Note: If OUTDSN specifies a data set that is already allocated to NetView (forexample DSILIST), the exclusive ENQ that is issued when OUTDSN is used willnot be removed until NetView is stopped. Thus, it is recommended that you donot use pre-allocated data sets for OUTDSN.

Varying the Format of the Command OutputMost of the commands in fullscreen mode support the SORT and FINDsubcommands.



|

Sorting a ListThe SORT subcommand lets you change the order that data is displayed in.

The syntax of the SORT subcommand is as follows:

►► SORT ▼sort_order coln ►◄

sort_order:

A

D

You can specify the following:

sort_orderThe sort order. It can be:A The list is displayed in ascending order. This is the default.D The list is displayed in descending order.

coln The column to be sorted on. You can specify more than one column,separated by a comma or a blank.

For example, specifying SORT D,3 1 4 sorts the display in descending sequenceand in the order column 3, 1, and 4.

For commands that support horizontal scrolling (for example, DISPSTAT orINGLIST), the column title (header) can be used instead of column number. Thetitle can be abbreviated. First match is taken. For those commands you can alsoenter SORT without parameters which leads you to the column tailoring panel.There you can assign sort orders and sort keys to the columns. You can also hidecolumns or change the column sequence and whether a column is to be prefixed(show on every panel) or not. Refer to the online help on the column tailoringpanel for further capabilities of SORT.

Searching for StringsThe FIND subcommand searches the display data for a specified string.

It can be abbreviated to F. The RFIND (repeat find) command is used to find thenext occurrence of the string in the display data. It can be abbreviated to RF.

The syntax of the FIND subcommand is as follows:

►► FIND search_string direction ►◄

direction:

N

P

You can specify the following parameters with the FIND and RFIND commands:



||||||||

search_stringThe string that is to be searched for. The search starts at the first lineshown in the display.

directionThe direction that is used for the search. It can be:N Find the next occurrence (forward direction). This is the default.P Find the previous occurrence (backward direction).

ACFPurpose

The ACF command loads, displays, and modifies automation control file entries.You can use ACF to refresh data of a particular system if it does not affectautomation manager configuration data.

For modification and display actions to work, the automation control file must beloaded into storage. Once loaded, the displays and modifications affect anin-storage version of the automation control file, allowing you to make temporarychanges. To make permanent changes, change the automation policy using thecustomization dialogs, generate the automation control file member, then reloadthe new version using INGAMS. This ensures that the configuration matches theautomation manager and the automation agents.

Recommendations:

1. Use the INGAMS command rather than the ACF command to load or refreshan automation control file. This ensures that the configuration matches theautomation manager and the automation agents.

2. Changes to automation policy that are made using the SA z/OS commanddialogs or the ACF command are temporary. They modify the currentin-storage version of the automation control file directly. They do not modifythe automation control file that is stored on disk. To change an automationpolicy setting permanently, make sure you also change the automation policy(using the customization dialogs) that is stored on disk.

3. If the customization dialogs are used to rebuild the automation control file ondisk, the changed data on disk will replace the data in storage at ACFREFRESH.

4. Use scope-checking to limit operator use of ACF to load and displayoperations.

The following syntax diagrams show how to use the ACF command to perform thedifferent functions ACF supports. Do not combine syntax from the separatediagrams in the same ACF call.

Note: The ACF command is freeform:v Commas are optionalv More than one space can separate keywordsv Keywords can be specified in any sequencev Any parameters specified must follow the keyword that they apply to

To replace or add information in the automation control file use the followingsyntax:



Syntax

►► ACFfunction optionsdisplay request optionsdelete request optionsadd/replace request options

►◄

function options:

COLDREFRESHATLOADSTATUS

TOKEN=current_token DSN=current_dsnCHECK

TOKEN=token DSN=dataset_nameTOKEN=*

display options:

(1)REQ=DISP ENTRY=*

ENTRY=entry

▼

TYPE=*

TYPE= ( type )

delete options:

REQ=DEL ENTRY=entry TYPE=type

add/replace options:

REQ=REPL ENTRY=entry TYPE=type ▼

parms=value

Notes:

1 The specification of either REQ=DISP or ENTRY=entry is required.

Parameters

COLDReloads the currently loaded automation control file data from disk.Automation is disabled while the automation control file load is performed. Itdeletes all global variables that were associated with the Entry/type pairsdefined in the policy database. It also deletes all exceptional messages anddisabled timers. Statistical data provided by the INGRPT command is alsodeleted.

ACF


Note: It is not recommended to use ACF COLD. Especially for cleanups, usethe INGCLEAN command. For further details, refer to the INGCLEANcommand reference in IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS Programmer'sReference.

REFRESHUpdates the currently loaded automation control file data. Automation is notdisabled while the automation control file load is performed. Only data thathas been changed will be loaded, everything else remains the same as before.This is the safe way to update the automation control file. Refresh will not loaddata of a subsystem that is currently in the process of being started or stoppedby SA z/OS. SA z/OS will automatically retry the refresh five minutes laterfor the data that cannot currently be processed.

Note: ACF REFRESH will not delete global variables that were associated withEntry/Type pairs, that were deleted from the policy database before the lastbuild was done, if those Entry/Types were not associated with a subsystem, amonitor resource, or an application group. However, if a keyword/value isremoved from the Entry/Type, this is a change to the Entry/Type, andconsequently an ACF REFRESH will rebuild the Entry/Type with the resultthat the deleted keyword/value pair is removed from the global variables. Alldeleted Entry/Types and their associated global variables will be reset duringthe next SA z/OS NetView restart or during ACF COLD processing or byusing the INGCLEAN command. For further details, refer to the INGCLEANcommand reference in IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS Programmer'sReference.

ATLOADReloads the NetView automation tables that are specified in the System Infopolicy item and the message revision table, depending on the value ofAOFSMARTMAT.

STATUSDisplays information about the automation control file that is currently instorage.

CHECKVerifies the ACF for validity and tests the automation tables that are specifiedin the System Info policy and also the message revision table, depending onthe value of AOFSMARTMAT.

TOKENThe configuration token that the ACF should be validated against.

current_tokenThe token that is currently in use (displayed with ACF STATUS). This isthe default.

tokenThe configuration token used as the reference.

* Specifying an asterisk (*) means that the token validation should beomitted.

DSNThe data set name that contains the ACF data.

current_dsnThe data set that is currently in use (displayed via ACF STATUS). This isthe default.

ACF


dataset_nameThe configuration data set name containing the ACF data.

REQThe type of request for automation control file information the ACF commandperforms. This value can be one of the following:DISP

Displays information in the automation control file. This value is thedefault if this parameter is not coded.

DELDeletes information in the automation control file. This value must becoded when using ACF to delete automation control file information.

REPLReplaces or adds information in the automation control file. This valuemust be coded when using ACF to replace automation control fileinformation. REPL adds the entry specified on the ENTRY parameter if theentry does not already exist in the automation control file.

REQ=REPL will update data in place. That is, only data that is to bereplaced needs to be specified in the command. All other existing data willbe retained.

ENTRYThe entry field of the automation control file. This value can be up to 32characters long, without imbedded blanks, commas, or quotes.

If information in the automation control file is displayed (REQ=DISP), andno value is specified in the entry field, ENTRY=* is used.

TYPEThe type field in the automation control file. The following values can bespecified:* Specifying * returns all type fields that are associated with a given

entry, for example, all SUBSYSTEM or NTFYOP entries. * is the defaultvalue when REQ=DISP (display). REQ=DISP supports the use of * as awildcard character when specifying type names, with the followingrestrictions:v The wildcard character, *, must be the last character in the type

name. If an asterisk appears in any other position in a type namethen it will be treated as a literal. If an asterisk appears in any otherposition in a type name with an asterisk as the last character then nowildcard processing occurs and both asterisks are treated as literals.

v If you update an entry, you must specify the ENTRY= operandwithout a wildcard.

v If no matches are found, a final search is performed with a typename of DEFAULTS.

For other ACF request types (delete and replace), you must specify anactual type name.

typeThe name of the type field. REQ=REPL requests allow you to enteronly one type.

When ENTRY=SUBSYSTEM, type can be up to 11 bytes long. In allother cases, type can be up to 32 characters long, without imbeddedblanks, commas, or quotes.

(type,type,...)Multiple types may be specified for DISP and DEL requests. Typenames should be enclosed in parentheses and separated by commas.

ACF


For REQ=DISP, only the first type name found is displayed. ForREQ=DEL requests, all the type names will be deleted.

parms=valueThe data associated with the specified ENTRY and TYPE fields. This fieldis valid only with the REQ=REPL option. Specify this field as theparameter value, an equal (=) sign, and the value, without any spaces inbetween; for example, AUTO=NO.

The value can be any character data. It can have imbedded quotes,commas, and blanks, provided that single quotes, double quotes, orparentheses frame the value. If the value contains parentheses, then youcannot use parentheses as delimiters.

SA z/OS defines several ENTRY, TYPE, and parms=value fields. Aparms=value example is the JOB=jobname parameter in the SUBSYSTEMautomation control file entry.

Note: REQ=REPL will update data in place. That is, only modified data isupdated. All data will be retained.

Restrictions and Limitationsv If you use the COLD parameter, automation is disabled while the ACF LOAD is

in progress. If you use the REFRESH parameter, automation continues.v An automation control file cannot be loaded by an operator using the ACF

command if the automation flag for major resource MVSESA is set to ‘N’. If theautomation flag for the MVSESA.RELOAD.CONFIRM minor resource is set to‘Y’, the operator can reload the ACF.

v ACF must comply with the automation manager configuration, otherwisemessage AOF618I is issued.

v The ACF command should be used with care to change or delete automationpolicy settings. All changes are only temporary changes and may get lost duringthe next configuration refresh. The changes are definitely lost during an ACFCOLD or after processing the INGCLEAN command.

v The number of entries in the automation control file is limited only by theamount of storage in the SA z/OS address space or region. If you have a verylarge configuration, you may have to increase the REGION size in the SA z/OSprocedure.

v Not all data can be changed using ACF REQ=REPL, for example, serviceperiods, events, triggers, and dependencies cannot be changed. ACF REQ=DELand ACF REQ=REPL cannot be used to add or delete an application(subsystem), an application class, an application group or a monitor resource. Itis NOT recommended to change data of existing applications, application groupsand monitor resources via ACF REQ=REPL to avoid data mismatch betweenautomation agent and automation manager. Use the customization dialogs todefine these items and/or change those data.

v Changes to System Defaults and Application Defaults policy items are notpropagated to the instances that have inherited this data.

Security Considerations

The ACF command supports resource level security. If turned on, the followingprofiles in class SYSAUTO are checked:

ACF


|

||

Profile Authority Condition

AGT.sysplex.xcfgrp.RES.resname.restype[.ressys]

UPDATE When function option isREFRESH or ATLOAD

CONTROL When function option isCOLD and for delete(REQ=DEL) or add/replacerequests (REQ=REPL)

Usage other than listed in the table does not cause a resource level security check.For further details, refer to IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS Planning andInstallation.

Return Codes0 Function completed successfully.1 Control file inactive.3 ACF token mismatch.4 Invalid parameters were used in the call.12 No valid ACF member available.20 ACF reload not allowed by automation flag settings.24 Resource level security check failed100

Other error.

Usagev ACF performs two flag checks when the automation control file is reloaded. The

checks are of the Automation flags for MVSESA.RELOAD.CONFIRM andMVSESA.RELOAD.ACTION. The action flag is checked only if the reload is tocontinue.

MVSESA.RELOAD.CONFIRMThis lets you:– Turn the flag off and thus disable an automation control file reload by

an operator.– Tell SA z/OS to ask for confirmation by setting the AOFCONFIRM

TGLOBAL to YES in a flag exit.– Use a flag exit to perform additional checks and processing before

deciding to either cancel or proceed with the reload.

If the flag is found to be off, the operator cannot reload the automationcontrol file.

Note: You need to be aware of this if you turn the MVSESA automationflag off.

If the flag is on, the AOFCONFIRM task global is checked. If it is set toYES, SA z/OS will post a message requesting confirmation of the reloadrequest. If AOFCONFIRM is null, SA z/OS will proceed with the reload.

MVSESA.RELOAD.ACTIONThis provides an opportunity for you to do your own processing onceSA z/OS is committed to reloading or restoring the automation controlfile. You can use a flag exit to call your own code. Your exit shouldreturn 0, indicating that the flag is turned on. If you return a nonzeroreturn code, subsequent exits defined for the flag will not be invoked.

ACF


||||

|||||

||||||

|||

||

Note that there is no way of preventing the reload from an exit on thisflag. See IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS Defining Automation Policyand IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS Customizing and Programmingfor further information.

v When you use ACF REQ=DISP to request a certain ENTRY value with one ormore specific TYPE values, ACF searches for those types in the order specifiedin the command. When the first match is found, the information is returned tothe requester as a multiline message. If there are no matches, it performs a finalsearch with a type of DEFAULTS for that ENTRY value. If there is still no match,a message is returned to the requester. If the type DEFAULTS is found, thatinformation is returned to the requester.

v If, when ACF is used to display an automation control file entry, a specific TYPEis found, it is treated as a complete entry. Only that specific entry is displayed.

Messages

The following lists the messages that are issued during the operation of ACF.

For the load function (COLD/REFRESH):AOF042I MEMBER ACFZ999 NOT FOUNDAOF100I 16:05:09 : ’ACF REFRESH’ COMMAND ISSUEDAOF618I NO VALID ACF FOUND FOR sysname - detail descriptionAOF782I AUTOMATION CONTROL FILE PROCESSING COMPLETED

For the status function (STATUS):AOF005I MEMBER ACFZ992 CURRENTLY BEING USED FOR THE CONTROL FILEAOF006I BUILT BY OPER1 ON 04/29/12 AT 11:43:03AOF006I REFRESHED BY OPER1 ON 04/30/12 AT 08:52:20AOF006I CONFIGURATION TOKEN = 2012049090119000C6F7A2084AOF006I CONFIGURATION DATASET = OPER1.USER.V34.ACFAOF002I END OF MULTI-LINE MESSAGE GROUP

For the delete and replace function (REQ=DEL/REPL):AOF001I REQUEST REPL SUCCESSFUL FOR JES2-$HASP098

Note: In a display where the type_name is asterisk (*), multiple sets of AOF112I andAOF113I messages may be displayed. When the type is omitted or specified asasterisk (*), the DESIRED TYPE is not displayed in the AOF112I message.

For the display function (REQ=DISP):AOF041I UNABLE TO FIND entry type

AOF111I AUTOMATION CONFIGURATION DISPLAY - ENTRY= entry_nameAOF112I ACTIVE TYPE= act_type, DESIRED TYPE= desired_type ...AOF113I DATA IS data=valueAOF002I END OF MULTILINE MESSAGE GROUP

For example, the following may occur:AOF111I AUTOMATION CONFIGURATION DISPLAY - ENTRY= NTFYOPAOF112I ACTIVE TYPE= NETOP1AOF113I DATA IS OPER=’OPER 1’AOF113I DATA IS CLASS=(10,40)AOF112I ACTIVE TYPE= NETOP2AOF113I DATA IS CLASS=(10)AOF002I END OF MULTILINE MESSAGE GROUP

Note: Use of the replace parameter (REPL) adds an entry if none exists, resultingin a successful message.

ACF


Generic error messages that can occur:AOF013I SPECIFIED OPERAND operand INVALID FOR PARAMETER parameter.AOF025I SYNTAX ERROR

Examples

The ACF command to display the Start automation flag for the CICST subsystemis:ACF REQ=DISP,ENTRY=START,TYPE=CICST

The response is:AOF111I AUTOMATION CONFIGURATION DISPLAY - ENTRY= STARTAOF112I ACTIVE TYPE= CICST , DESIRED TYPE= CICSTAOF113I DATA IS AUTO=YAOF113I DATA IS NOAUTO=(TUESDAY,10:00,12:00)AOF002I END OF MULTILINE MESSAGE GROUP

In this example, a Start automation flag exists for the CICST subsystem. Theoperator or automation procedure processes the command to display the entry, andthe associated response is returned as a multiline message.

Use the following automation procedure to update ACF data for an entry. It allowsyou to modify the automation agent configuration data without affecting otherautomation agents or the automation manager./* ************************************************* **** Function: **** - Read ACF Fragment **** - Modify ACF entries **** ***************************************************/’PIPE (NAME ACFREPL)’,’QSAM (DSN) -dataset-’, /* read ACF fragment */’! NLOC 1.1 /*/’, /* skip comments */’! COLLECT’, /* collect to multiline */’! NETV ACF REQ=REPL’, /* call ACF command */’! CONS’ /* issue msgs to console */

AOCHELPPurpose

AOCHELP displays information about SA z/OS commands, and enables you toexecute them.

Syntax

►► AOCHELPcommandname

►◄

Parameters

commandname

Specifies the SA z/OS system operations command that you requireinformation about. The result is the same as if you had specified helpcommandname.

ACF


Restrictions and Limitationsv Some commands may not be executed from the AOCHELP command dialog.

Attempts to execute these commands produce SA z/OS message AOF129I.v Help is available only in fullscreen mode.v The AOCHELP command can only be used when SA z/OS has initialized.

Usage

If you type aochelp by itself, you see a list of commands to choose from, as shownin Figure 4. From this panel you can ask for help on a command by entering itsitem number.

Examples

To get help, specify the associated number of the command.

To execute the command, specify the number associated with the commandfollowed by an x, for example, 9x.

AOCTRACEPurpose

The AOCTRACE command turns the SA z/OS system operations debuggingfeature on or off. AOCTRACE allows you to activate:v Debugging globallyv Debugging for specific REXX scriptv Debugging at a certain level of detailv Tracing for a particular messagev REXX trace for a specific REXX script

AOFPH000 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 62Domain ID = IPUFA ---------- AOCHELP ---------- Date = 09/01/12Operator ID = NETOP1 Time = 11:57:56

1 AOCHELP Display help for SA z/OS commands2 AOCTRACE Control the SA z/OS internal trace3 CROSS DOMAIN Dealing with other domains4 DISPACF Display control file information5 DISPAOPS Display automated operator information6 DISPAPG Display Automation group information7 DISPASF Display status file information8 DISPAUTO Display commands9 DISPERRS Display error information

10 DISPEVT Display event information11 DISPEVTS Display all events in a Sysplex12 DISPFLGS Display automation flag information13 DISPGW Display NNT gateway information14 DISPINFO Display subsystem information

Enter n for help or nX to execute the command (if possible).

Command ===>PF1=Help PF2=End PF3=Return PF6=Roll

PF8=Forward PF12=Retrieve

Figure 4. AOCHELP Command Dialog Panel

AOCHELP


Syntax

►► AOCTRACEOFFON

MSG/id OFFON

rexx_exec OFFON

level TraceTrace

►

►TARGET= system_name

domain_IDOUTMODE= LINE

AUTONETLOG

►◄

Trace:

traceroutine_name

Parameters

MSG/idThe message that is being traced.

rexx_execThe name of the REXX script that you want to debug.

ON Turns the debugging feature on.

If you do not specify a REXX script or message, AOCTRACE activates a globaldebugging flag. This causes each SA z/OS system operations REXX script thatis invoked to write a record (AOF700I) to the netlog showing the parametersthat it was invoked with.

If you do specify a REXX script or message, only that REXX script or messagewrites messages to the netlog. The netlog shows when and where the REXXscript was called, and what parameters were given.

If you specify a REXX script or message but not a trace, an intermediate levelof debugging is activated for the specified REXX script or message. This causesthe REXX script to issue a number of messages describing its actions. Note,however, that not all REXX scripts support this facility.

OFFTurns the debugging feature off.

If a REXX script is specified, this option deactivates both the intermediate andREXX tracing for the specified REXX script.

If a message is specified, this option deactivates message tracing for thespecified message.

If a REXX script or message is not specified, this option disables the globaltrace.

traceThe type of REXX trace that you want for the specified REXX script. Validvalues are:

AOCTRACE


A AllR ResultsI IntermediatesC CommandsE ErrorsF FailuresL LabelsO OffN Normal

routine_nameThe REXX script that is being traced.

levelSpecifies the debug level that allows you to limit the amount of debuginformation that is written to the netlog. The meaning of the level depends onthe particular REXX script.

NORMThis is the default. Control flow and important data area is written tothe netlog.

MAX Extensive logging of control flow and data areas and structures.

/AM Indicates that data received from the automation manager is nottraced.

/SLAVEIndicates that data received from the command slave is not traced.

TARGETFor information on the TARGET parameter, see “TARGET Parameter” on page14.

OUTMODEFor information on the OUTMODE parameter, see “OUTMODE Parameter” onpage 16.

For further information about AOCTRACE command usage, see "Appendix C -Problem Determination" of IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS User's Guide.

Restrictions and Limitations

The trace operand can only be used on interpreted REXX scripts.

Using the trace on certain REXX scripts can cause execution problems, particularlywith REXX scripts that trap messages.

The REXX trace setting of S (Scan) is not available.

Message tracing only works from the command line.

Note: The debugging facility is not active if REXX traces A, R, or I are used.

Examples

If you enter aoctrace on you see a message indicating that the debugging facilityhas been enabled. While the debugging facility is enabled, message AOF700I iswritten to the netlog for each procedure being processed.

AOCTRACE


If no parameter is specified Figure 5 is displayed.

The panel shows all the REXX scripts (that is, clists) and messages that have debugmode or REXX tracing turned on.

The first entry is the *GLOBAL* entry. This entry is always shown. It showswhether the global debug option is on or off. You cannot modify the setting with acommand code. To set the global debugging option specify AOCTRACE ON orAOCTRACE OFF on the command line.

*MSG* in the CLIST column indicates a message trace entry. The message ID isshown in the Subroutines/Messages being traced column. As with the Globalentry (*GLOBAL*), message trace entries cannot be modified on this panel: youmust use the AOCTRACE MSG/id,ON|OFF command entered at the commandline to do so.

The following information is shown:v The CLIST field shows the name of the REXX script.v The System field shows the name of the system where debugging or tracing is

active.v The Dbg field indicates whether or not debug mode is on. Y indicates that

debug mode is turned on.v The Level field indicates the debug level.v The T (Trace) field shows the Trace option specified for the REXX script.v The Subroutines/Messages being traced field shows the list of subroutines that

are being traced.

The Cmd field lets you specify the command codes shown on the panel. Type theappropriate letter next to the resource name and press Enter. The followingcommand codes are available:

A Allows you to add debug or trace settings for another REXX script. The panelshown in Figure 6 on page 31 is displayed where you can specify the REXXscript name and optionally overtype the other settings.

AOFKAANL SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 8Domain ID = IPSFP ---------- AOCTRACE ---------- Date = 08/16/08Operator ID = NETOP1 Time = 17:41:18

Enter ADD in the Command line to create an entryCmd: A Add C Change D Turn off Debug R Reset T Turn off Trace

Cmd CLIST System Dbg Level T Subroutines/Messages being traced--- -------- -------- --- -------- - -----------------------------------------

*GLOBAL* KEY4 Y*MSG* KEY4 IEF403*MSG* KEY4 IEF404EVJEATDF KEY4 Y REVJESPRQ KEY4 YEVJESPSC KEY4 YEVJESRST KEY4 YINGRMORD KEY4 YINGRYST0 KEY4 Y Y AOF_SHOW_LIST_PANEL


PF9=Refresh PF10=ALL_OFF PF12=Retrieve

Figure 5. AOCTRACE Main Command Dialog Panel

AOCTRACE


C Allows you to modify the debug or trace settings of the selected REXX script.The panel shown in Figure 6 is displayed showing the current settings. Hereyou can overtype the appropriate values.

D Turns off the debug option for the selected REXX script.

R Turns off the debug and trace option for the selected REXX script.

T Turns off the trace option for the selected REXX script.

Use the PF9 key to refresh the data displayed.

Use the PF10 key to turn off the debug and trace option for ALL displayed REXXscripts.

The ADD command can also be entered at the command line to define the debug ortrace settings for a REXX script.

Figure 6 is displayed when the command code A or C is specified on the panel inFigure 5 on page 30, or a REXX script name is specified as the only parameter ofthe AOCTRACE command. You can use this panel to enable and disable theautomation debugging facility for a given REXX script.

The following fields can be entered:

Clist nameSpecify the name of the clist (that is, REXX script) When turned ON, theREXX script will write debug information to the NetView log. Note that ifyou have already specified a REXX script with the AOCTRACE command,or entered the command code C next to a REXX script on the mainAOCTRACE panel, this field will contain that REXX script name andcannot be changed.

debug modeSpecify ON to turn on the REXX script's debug mode.

AOFKAAND SA z/OS - Command DialogsDomain ID = IPUN8 ---------- AOCTRACE ---------- Date = 08/16/08Operator ID = NETOP1 Time = 17:50:21

Specify or revise the following parameters:

Clist name INGRVRP0debug mode ON (ON or OFF)debug detail level (NORM, MAX, /AM, /SLAVE)REXX trace option (A, R, I, C, E, F, L, O N)

Subroutines to be traced: (* for all)

- or -

Message id ________________________________

Command ===>PF1=Help PF2=End PF3=Return PF6=Roll PF12=Retrieve

Figure 6. AOCTRACE Command Dialog Panel for a Specific REXX Script

AOCTRACE


debug detail levelSpecify the debug level for the REXX script. The meaning of the debuglevel varies from REXX script to REXX script. Standard values are:

NORMThis is the default. Control flow and important data area is writtento the netlog.

MAX Extensive logging of control flow and data areas and structures.

/AM Indicates that data received from the automation manager is nottraced.

/SLAVEIndicates that data received from the command slave is not traced.

REXX trace optionSpecify the trace setting for the REXX script. It can be one of the following:A AllR ResultsI IntermediatesC CommandsE ErrorsF FailuresL LabelsO OffN Normal_ Default

For more information about trace settings, see TRACE in z/OS TSO/EREXX Reference.

Notes:

1. The REXX script debug setting need not be ON to use REXX scripttrace.

2. Specifying REXX trace option A, I, or R makes individual REXX scriptdebugging ineffective.

Subroutines to be tracedSpecify the list of subroutines to be traced. By default, only the REXXscript main routine will be traced. You can specify more than onesubroutine name separated by a blank character. Specify '*' to trace allsubroutines.

Message idSpecify the message identifier to be traced.

ASFPurpose

The ASF command is a file manager command that displays records from theautomation status file. The automation status file records are maintained in aVSAM data set. ASF interfaces with the VSAM file to obtain control informationthat is vital to SA z/OS, such as:v Automation statusv Time and date information for specific events within the lifecycle of an

application

AOCTRACE


v Whether an error threshold has been exceededv Time and date information for error conditions

You can also use the ASF command to reset occurrences of threshold errors byupdating records in the automation status file.

Syntax

To display single or multiple records use the following syntax:

►► ASFREQ=DISP

ID=resourceFROM=resource

TO=resource

►◄

To reset occurrences of threshold errors use the following syntax:

►► ASF REQ=REPL ID=resource ERRORDT='' THRSHLD='' ►◄

Parameters

REQThe type of request for automation status file information that the ASFcommand performs. This value may be:

DISPDisplays information in the automation status file. This value is the defaultif the REQ parameter is not coded.

REPLResets a record in the automation status file.

ID The resource ID that is the key to the automation status file record. This ID isthe application name for application records. This value can be from 1 through64 characters long.

FROMThe resource ID that is the starting key when displaying multiple automationstatus file records. This resource is the application name for applicationrecords. This value can be from 1 through 64 characters long.

TO The resource ID that is the ending key when displaying multiple automationstatus file records. If not specified, the value defaults to the FROM parametervalue. This resource is the application name for application records. This valuecan be from 1 through 64 characters long.

If a resource ID is specified, the records that are to be displayed are resolvedalphabetically.

ERRORDTSpecify ERRORDT=’’ THRSHLD=’’ with REQ=REPL to reset occurrences ofthreshold errors for a resource.

THRSHLDSpecify ERRORDT=’’ THRSHLD=’’ with REQ=REPL to reset occurrences ofthreshold errors for a resource.

ASF


Usage

To modify automation status file fields that are reserved for your data, use theASFUSER command. See “ASFUSER” for details.

Error conditions

To display status information about subsystem JES2, enter:ASF REQ=DISP ID=JES2

To reset the occurrences of threshold errors for the application APPC, enter:ASF ID=APPC REQ=REPL ERRORDT=’’ THRSHLD=’’

ASFUSERPurpose

The ASFUSER command is a file manager command that updates the 40 user fieldsin the automation status file. The ASFUSER command has different formatsdepending on whether it is used to:v Display multiple recordsv Display, delete, or replace (update) a single record

The ASFUSER command is pipeable.

Syntax

To display single or multiple records use the following syntax:

►► ASFUSERREQ=DISP

ID=resourceFROM=resourceTO=resource

►◄

To delete a single record use the following syntax:

►► ASFUSER REQ=DEL ID=resource ►◄

To replace (update) a record use the following syntax:

►► ASFUSER REQ=REPL ID=resource ▼

(1)USERn=data

►◄

Notes:

1 n can be a number from 1 through 40

ASF


Parameters

REQThe type of request for automation status file record information the ASFUSERcommand performs. This value may be one of the following:

ValueDescription

DISPDisplays a record in the automation status file. This value is the default ifthe REQ parameter is not coded.

DELDeletes a record in the automation status file.

REPLReplaces or adds a record in the automation status file.

If this parameter is specified, other parameters that describe the data to bedisplayed, deleted, or updated must be specified.

FROMThe resource ID that is the starting key when displaying multiple automationstatus file records. This value can be from 1 through 64 characters long.

TO The resource ID that is the ending key when displaying multiple records. If notspecified, the value defaults to the same key as the FROM parameter. Thisvalue can be from 1 through 64 characters long.

ID The resource ID that is the key to the automation status file record. This ID isthe application name for application records. This ID can be from 1 through 64characters long.

USER1=data–USER40=dataThese parameters specify data that is stored in each of the 40 fields in theautomation status file that are reserved for your information. All theseparameters are optional. The specified data can be 1 through 20 characterslong. These parameters are only used with ASFUSER replace requests(REQ=REPL). The data must be enclosed in parenthesis or quotes if it containsblanks or a comma.


None.

Usage

If your automation procedure performs a replace or update function, only thosefields that need replacing must be specified. No change occurs to other automationstatus file fields.

Examples

Example 1

This example shows a command to create an automation status file record for aresource with a resource ID of DASD.

The ASFUSER command to create the record is:

ASFUSER


ASFUSER REQ=REPL ID=DASD USER1=3390 USER2=SITE1

The response to the ASFUSER command is:AOF001I REQUEST "REPLACE" WAS SUCCESSFUL FOR "DASD"

Example 2

This example shows a command to display an automation status file record forDASD.

The ASFUSER command to display the record is:ASFUSER ID=DASD

The response to the ASFUSER command is:AOF150I STATISTICS DISPLAY REQUESTED FOR DASD THRU DASDAOF151I ID=DASD , TYPE= N/A , STATUS= N/AAOF152I LAST UPDATED BY OPERATOR OPER1AOF158I USER1 = 3390AOF158I USER2 = SITE1AOF002I END OF MULTILINE MESSAGE GROUP

Example 3

This example shows a command to update the DASD automation status file recordto add a new DASD device type.

The ASFUSER command to add a new field to the existing record is:ASFUSER REQ=REPL,id=DASD,USER3=3990

The response to the ASFUSER command is:AOF001I REQUEST "REPLACE" WAS SUCCESSFUL FOR "DASD"

Note: Other values in record DASD remain as they were before the ASFUSERcommand was issued.

DISPACFPurpose

The DISPACF command displays resource information and automation policysettings for a specific entry or entry-type pair in the automation control file.

Syntax

►► DISPACF entry_name*

entry_type TARGET= DestinationDest_list

*ALL

►

►OUTMODE= LINE

AUTONETLOG

►◄

ASFUSER


Destination:


Dest_list:

▼( Destination )

Parameters

entry_nameSpecifies the name of the entry in the automation control file.

If you specify *, all entry names are displayed.

entry_typeSpecifies the type within the entry in the automation control file. If you specifya particular type-name, only that type-name (and its data fields) for theentry-name is displayed.

If you specify *, all of the type-names and their data fields for the entry-nameare displayed. This is the default. Wildcard is supported.




The DISPACF command can only be used when SA z/OS is initialized.

Examples

If you enter dispacf subsystem, you will see a fullscreen display similar toFigure 7 on page 38.

DISPACF


This command displays information for all types of the SUBSYSTEM entry, becauseyou accepted the default TYPE=*.

If you type dispacf subsystem jes2, you see only information about the JES2 type.

DISPAOPSPurpose

The DISPAOPS command displays a list of automation operators that are currentlyactive.

Syntax

►► DISPAOPSTARGET= Destination

Dest_list*ALL

OUTMODE= LINEAUTONETLOG

►◄

AOFK3D0X SA z/OS - Command Response Line 1 of 893Domain ID = IPSNO ---------- DISPACF ---------- Date = 07/19/00Operator ID = NETOP1 Time = 18:38:13

Command = ACF ENTRY=SUBSYSTEM,TYPE=*,REQ=DISPSYSTEM = KEY3 AUTOMATION CONFIGURATION DISPLAY - ENTRY= SUBSYSTEM-------------------------------------------------------------------------------AUTOMATION CONFIGURATION DISPLAY - ENTRY= SUBSYSTEMTYPE IS ALLOCASJOBTYPE = MVSRESTARTOPT = ALWAYSSHUTDLY = 00:01:00STRTDLY = 00:02:00TERMDLY = 00:00:12EXTSTART = ALWAYSEXTSTOP = ALWAYSJOB = ALLOCASSCHEDSUB = MSTRSDESC = ’MVS ADDRESS SPACE’TYPE IS AMCPIPLOPTIONS = NOSTARTPARMS = ’,RUN=3’PROCNAME = AAAZTSEMJOB = AMCPJOBTYPE = TRANSIENTOBJECTCLASS = JES2_TRANSPARENT = (JES2)SDESC = ’SIMULATED SUBSYSTEM’TRANRERUN = NOTYPE IS ANTMAINJOBTYPE = MVSRESTARTOPT = ALWAYSSHUTDLY = 00:01:00STRTDLY = 00:02:00TERMDLY = 00:00:12EXTSTART = ALWAYSEXTSTOP = ALWAYSJOB = ANTMAINSCHEDSUB = MSTR


PF8=Forward PF9=Refresh PF12=Retrieve

Figure 7. Display of Automation Control File Settings for Subsystem (DISPACFSUBSYSTEM)

DISPACF


Destination:


Dest_list:

▼( Destination )

Parameters




The DISPAOPS command can only be used when SA z/OS is initialized.

Examples

Type dispaops on any command line and press the Enter key. You will see a panelsimilar to Figure 8 on page 40.

DISPAOPS


v The System field shows the name of the system where the automated function isdefined

v The Automated Function field shows the name of the automated function that isused in SA z/OS automation procedures

v The Primary field shows the NetView automation operator ID assigned to thisautomated function

v The Status field shows the current status of the primary automation operatorv The Secondary field shows the Backup NetView automation operator ID

assigned to this automated functionv The Status field shows the current status of the backup automation operator

The primary and backup NetView automation operator IDs are assigned to theautomated function in the command dialogs.

DISPAPGPurpose

The DISPAPG command displays detailed information about a specifiedapplication group that is of interest from the automation agent point of view, suchas:v Automation agent-related informationv Automation manager-related informationv The message history for captured messages that are associated with the group

AOFK2SO SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 20Domain ID = IPUF9 ---------- DISPAOPS ---------- Date = 12/17/97Operator ID = NETOP1 Time = 15:19:59

AutomatedSystem Function Primary Status Secondary Status-------- ---------- ------- ------ --------- ------AOC9 GATOPER GATIPUF9 ACTIVAOC9 AOFWRK01 AUTWRK01 ACTIVAOC9 AOFWRK02 AUTWRK02 ACTIVAOC9 AOFWRK03 AUTWRK03 ACTIVAOC9 AOFWRK04 AUTWRK04 ACTIVAOC9 AOFWRK05 AUTWRK05 ACTIVAOC9 BASEOPER AUTBASE ACTIVAOC9 SHUTOPER AUTSHUT ACTIVAOC9 MONOPER AUTMON ACTIVAOC9 GSSOPER AUTGSS ACTIVAOC9 MVSCONS AUTCON ACTIVAOC9 MSGOPER AUTMSG ACTIVAOC9 NETOPER AUTNET1 ACTIV AUTNET2 ACTIVAOC9 JESOPER AUTJES ACTIVAOC9 SYSOPER AUTSYS ACTIVAOC9 RECOPER AUTREC ACTIVAOC9 LOGOPER AUTLOG ACTIVAOC9 PPIOPER AOFARCAT ACTIVAOC9 HBOPER AUTHB ACTIVAOC9 RPCOPER AUTRPC ACTIV


PF9=Refresh PF12=Retrieve

Figure 8. Automation Operators Panel

DISPAOPS


Syntax

►► DISPAPG applgroupTARGET= system_name

domain_IDsaplex_name

OUTDSN=dsnameOUTMODE= LINE

AUTONETLOG

►◄

Parameters

applgroupThe name of the application group you want information about. If you do notspecify a application group, a menu is displayed where you can specify theapplication group name.


OUTDSNFor information on the OUTDSN parameter, see “OUTDSN Parameter” onpage 17.



The DISPAPG command can only be used when SA z/OS is initialized.

Examples

If you enter dispapg followed by the name of an application group at a commandline you will see a panel similar to Figure 9 on page 42.

DISPAPG


You can use the Resource and Target fields to specify the name of a differentapplication group or you can press PF9 to refresh the information about thecurrent application group.

You can use the PF4 key to invoke the INGINFO command to get details about theapplication group from the automation manager point of view.

DISPASFPurpose

DISPASF displays the information contained in the automation status file. This fileholds information that is to be retained across SA z/OS automation agent sessions.

Syntax

►► DISPASFidentifier TARGET= Destination

Dest_list*ALL

►

►OUTMODE= LINE

AUTONETLOG

►◄

AOFKADAG SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 11Domain ID = IPSFP -------- DISPAPG ---------- Date = 09/05/07Operator ID = NETOP1 System = KEY1 Time = 09:10:01

Resource ==> MOVSYSTM/APG/KEY1 format: name/type/systemTarget ==> System name, domain ID or sysplex name

Resource : MOVSYSTM/APG/KEY1Description : System move pref 700/500/300 MOVSYS1/2/3

Nature : MOVEBehaviour : ACTIVEDesired Available : ALWAYSMonitor for IPL complete : YES

Prepare Move : YESMove mode : PARALLELStatus determination : CSONLY

Inform list : SDF

Availability target : 1Satisfactory target : 1

Command ===>PF1=Help PF2=End PF3=Return PF4=INGINFO PF6=Roll


Figure 9. DISPAPG Panel

DISPAPG


|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||

Destination:


Dest_list:

▼( Destination )

Parameters

identifierSpecifies the name of an object in the status file. Such an object can be, forexample, a subsystem. If you do not specify an identifier, a panel is displayedwhere you can specify an object.




The DISPASF command can only be used when SA z/OS is initialized.

Examples

If you enter dispasf tso, you see a panel similar to Figure 10 on page 44.

DISPASF


DISPAUTOPurpose

DISPAUTO provides a menu where you can initiate command dialogs that displayinformation about your automation.

Syntax

►► DISPAUTOSelection Additional parameters

►◄

Parameters

SelectionThis is one of the commands that is listed for the DISPAUTO command.

Additional parametersThis indicates additional parameters that can be specified with the selectedcommand.

Note: All keywords can be abbreviated to the minimum unique abbreviation.Additional parameters are passed ‘as is’ to the appropriate command routine.


The DISPAUTO command can only be used when SA z/OS is initialized.

Examples

If you enter dispauto on an operator station task (OST) the panel in Figure 11 onpage 45 is displayed.

AOFK3D0X SA z/OS - Command Response Line 1 of 19Domain ID = IPUF9 ---------- DISPASF ---------- Date = 01/09/09Operator ID = NETOP1 Time = 18:59:11

Command = ASF ID=TSO,REQ=DISPSYSTEM = KEY1 STATISTICS DISPLAY REQUESTED FOR TSO THRU TSO-------------------------------------------------------------------------------STATISTICS DISPLAY REQUESTED FOR TSO THRU TSOID= TSOYYYY , TYPE= SUBSYSTEM , STATUS= UPLAST UPDATED BY OPERATOR AUTWRK15LAST STOP EVENT: TS= 01/07/2009 18:01:32 , TYPE= NORMLAST DOWN EVENT: TS= 01/07/2009 18:01:36 , TYPE= NORMLAST THRESHOLD EXCEEDED -OPERATOR NOTIFIED: NLAST STATUS CHANGE DATE= 01/09/2009 , TIME= 11:42:05 , OPID= AUTWRK15

ERROR COUNT DATE TIME09 05/30/2008 06:48:0008 05/08/2008 17:35:0007 04/24/2008 06:14:0006 04/18/2008 07:16:00



Figure 10. Display of Automation Status File Information for TSO (DISPASF TSO)

DISPAUTO


After the command selection number, you can specify appropriate parameters forthe selected commands, for example, 10 TARGET=xxx, where xxx is the domain ID,or the system name of a system in the sysplex.

DISPERRSPurpose

The DISPERRS command displays information about resources that errors havebeen recorded for in the status file.

Syntax

►► DISPERRSfilter TARGET= Destination

Dest_list*ALL

►

►OUTMODE= LINE

AUTONETLOG

►◄

Destination:


AOFKAADA SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 33Domain ID = IPUFA ---------- DISPAUTO ---------- Date = 09/01/06Operator ID = NETOP1 Time = 12:46:21

1 FLAGS Display current automation flag settings2 SCHEDULE Display all scheduled NOAUTO periods3 NOTIFY Display status of all notify operators4 THRESHOLDS Display all current threshold settings5 ERRORS Display all resources with errors6 STATUS Display the current status of all subsystems7 REQUESTS Display all requests8 SUBSYSTEMS Display information about subsystem9 MESSAGES Display current message assignments

10 AUTOOPS Display SA for z/OS controlled autotasks11 GATEWAYS Display gateway status and statistics12 SYSTEM Display system parameters and status13 CF Display coupling facility statuses14 CDS Display couple data set statuses15 TRIGGERS Display list of defined triggers16 SERVICE Display list of defined schedules



Figure 11. DISPAUTO Command Dialog Panel

DISPAUTO


Dest_list:

▼( Destination )

Parameters

filterThis is the filter to be applied for the output. Only resource names that matchthe filter criteria are displayed.

The filter consists of one or more qualifiers separated by a period. A wildcard,*, is supported at the beginning or the end of each qualifier.




The DISPERRS command can only be used when SA z/OS is initialized.

Examples

If you enter disperrs you see a panel similar to Figure 12.

v The System field shows the name of the system where the resource is defined.v The Resource field shows the name of the resource.v The Type field shows the type of resource.

AOFKAAD5 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 21Domain ID = IPUFA ---------- DISPERRS ---------- Date = 09/16/08Operator ID = NETOP1 Time = 15:08:12

System Resource Type Thrs No Date Time-------- ------------------------------- ---------- ---- -- ---------- --------AOCA AM SUBSYSTEM INFR 9 09/16/2008 09:11:34

8 09/03/2008 07:55:347 09/02/2008 09:18:486 09/02/2008 09:14:295 08/04/2008 13:10:554 07/31/2008 12:47:003 07/08/2008 14:24:002 07/03/2008 08:49:001 06/25/2008 12:45:00

AOCA AM2 SUBSYSTEM INFR 2 09/08/2008 09:38:141 09/03/2008 07:55:32

AOCA MQLOCAL SUBSYSTEM CRIT 2 06/19/2008 17:04:001 06/19/2008 17:04:00

AOCA AOFIPLDT CONTROL 8 08/27/2008 19:32:00



Figure 12. DISPERRS Command Dialog Panel

DISPERRS


v The Thrs field shows the type of threshold, if any, that was exceeded when thelast error was recorded. This is either CRIT (critical), FREQ (frequent), or INFR(infrequent).

v The No field shows the sequence number assigned to the error.v The Date and Time fields show the date and time that the error occurred.

DISPEVTPurpose

The DISPEVT command displays relationships between an event and the relatedresources. DISPEVT shows all the resources that use the event.

Syntax

►► DISPEVT eventTARGET= system_name



►

►WAIT=nnn

►◄

Parameters

eventSpecifies the name of the event.

TARGETFor information on the TARGET parameter, see “TARGET Parameter” on page14. Note that if you specify a sysplex name as a target, this is translated to thenext system that is available in the sysplex and the DISPEVT command isprocessed there.


WAIT

Specifies the number of seconds to wait before reporting that a timeoutoccurred if the automation manager does not provide the requested data. Themaximum time interval is 999 seconds.

If omitted, the time interval is 30 seconds.


The DISPEVT command can only be used when SA z/OS is initialized.

Usage

The DISPEVT command operates sysplexwide. For an overview see “Overview ofCommands that Operate Sysplexwide” on page 13.

If you specify OUTMODE=LINE, specifying event becomes mandatory.

DISPERRS


Examples

If you enter dispevt b000s100, Figure 13 is displayed.

v The Event field shows the name of the event. You can overwrite the event toinitiate a new display.

v The Target field shows the name of the system where the command is executed.You can overwrite the system name to initiate a new display.

v The Description field shows the description of the event.v The Unset condition field shows the status that an application must have to

reset an event.v The Resource field shows the name of the resource where the event is defined.v The Type field shows the type of the resource.v The System field shows the name of the system where the resource is defined.v The Trigger field shows the trigger that the resource is linked to.v The Status field shows the status of the event for that particular resource. It can

contain the following values:

SET The event is set. It is shown in white.

UNSETThe event is unset. It is shown in red.

If the status of the event is neither SET nor UNSET, the event is in anunknown state. This is treated as UNSET.

DISPEVTSPurpose

DISPEVTS displays all events defined in a sysplex. From the fullscreen panel youcan set or reset an event or display the related resources of an event.

AOFLE000 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 4Domain ID = IPUF9 ---------- DISPEVT ---------- Date = 11/26/99Operator ID = NATOP1 Sysplex = KEY1PLEX Time = 15:29:27

Event ==> B000S100Target ==> KEY3 System name, domain id or sysplex nameDescription . . : Start cond 1 Trigger6 batch job endUnset condition. : UP

Resource Type System Trigger Status----------- ---- -------- -------- ------TRGG006AA10 APL KEY1 TRIGGER6 SETTRGG006AA10 APL KEY2 TRIGGER6 UNSETTRGG006AA10 APL KEY3 TRIGGER6TRGG006AA10 APL KEY4 TRIGGER6 SET



Figure 13. DISPEVT Command Dialog Panel

DISPEVT


Syntax

►► DISPEVTSTARGET= system_name



►

►WAIT=nnn

►◄

Parameters

TARGETFor information on the TARGET parameter, see “TARGET Parameter” on page14. Note that if you specify a sysplex name as a target, this is translated to thenext system that is available in the sysplex and the DISPEVTS command isprocessed there.


WAIT




The DISPEVTS command can only be used when SA z/OS is initialized.

Examples

If you enter dispevts, a panel that shows all events defined in the sysplex isdisplayed, as shown in Figure 14 on page 50.

DISPEVTS


v The Cmd field lets you specify the command codes shown on the panel. Typethe appropriate letter next to the resource name and press Enter. The followingcommand codes are available:

D Shows the related resources.

S Sets or resets the event.v The Event field shows the name of the event.v The Unset field shows the status that an application must have to reset an event.

The following values can occur:

STARTUnsets the event when the resource is being started.

UP Unsets the event when the resource becomes available.

DOWNUnsets the event when the resource becomes unavailable.

If you do not specify anything the event will not be unset.v The Description field shows the description of the event.

Type S next to an event and press Enter. The panel shown in Figure 15 on page 51is displayed.

AOFLE100 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 38Domain ID = IPUF9 ---------- DISPEVTS ---------- Date = 11/26/99Operator ID = NETOP1 System = AOC9 Time = 15:00:20

Cmd: D show related resources S set/reset event

Cmd Event Unset Description--- -------- ----- ----------------------------------------

BATCHSTP NONE Batch jobs B000P100,P200,P300BATCHSTR NONE Batch jobs B000S100,S200,S300B000P100 DOWN Stop cond 1 Trigger6 (batch job end)B000P200 DOWN = P1B000P300 DOWN Stop cond 2 Trigger6 (batch job 1 min)B000S100 UP Start cond 1 Trigger6 batch job endB000S200 UP = P1B000S300 UP Start cond 2 Trigger 6 batch end (1 min)DRWEVT1 UP unset UPDRWEVT13 NONE unset noneDRWEVT14 NONE unset noneDRWEVT15 NONE unset none



Figure 14. DISPEVTS Command Dialog Panel

DISPEVTS


v The Event field shows the name of the event.v The Description field shows the description of the event.v The Unset condition field shows the status that an application must have to

reset an event.v The Function field shows the action to be performed. It can be overwritten.v The Resource field shows the name of the application that is the only affected

application when the command is executed. It can be overwritten.v The Target field shows the name of the target system where the processing takes

place. It can be overwritten. You only need to specify the name of the targetsystem if you want to address a remote sysplex.

DISPFLGSPurpose

The DISPFLGS command shows all resources that have explicit agent automationflags defined for them, what those flags are, and what the effective automationflags resulting from them are.

Syntax

►► DISPFLGSfilter TARGET= Destination

Dest_list*ALL

►

►OUTMODE= LINE

AUTONETLOG

►◄

AOFLE110 SA z/OS - Command DialogsDomain ID = IPSNO -------- INGEVENT --------- Date = 03/02/00Operator ID = NETOP1 Sysplex = KEY1PLEX Time = 12:35:26

Event . . . . . . . : EVTSTOPDescription . . . . : Shutdown eventUnset condition . . : DOWN

Specify/revise the following parameters and then press enter:

Function => SET or UNSETResource => Resource name

Target => System name, domain ID or sysplex name

Command ===>F1=Help F2=End F3=Return F6=Roll

F12=Retrieve

Figure 15. DISPEVTS Command Dialog Panel: Setting an Event

DISPEVTS


Destination:


Dest_list:

▼( Destination )

Parameters

filterIs the filter to be applied for the output. Only resource names that match thefilter criteria are displayed. Wildcard is supported. The filter consists of themajor name and, optionally, of a minor name separated by a dot, for example,CICS*.TRANS* , or *.*CEMT. Specify * to view major resources. To view minorresources specify xyz.*.




The DISPFLGS command can only be used when SA z/OS is initialized.

Usage

Subsystems that are not shown have no explicit automation flags set and haveeffective flags defined in the SUBSYSTEM entry.

Examples

If you enter dispflgs within SA z/OS you see a panel similar to Figure 16 on page53.

DISPFLGS


The following command codes are available:

A Lets you define automation flags for a resource using the same flag settings asthe selected resource. On the next panel displayed you can specify the resourcename and optionally overtype the flag settings.

C Lets you modify the automation flags of the selected resource. The next panelshows the current flag settings. You can overtype the flag values.

R Resets the automation flags to the values specified in the automation controlfile (ACF).

S Shows the scheduled override settings of the automation flags for the selectedresource.

v The Resource field shows the name of the resource. Names shown indented onecharacter to the right represent minor resources, for example, MVSESA.DUMP asshown below. If the minor resources MVSESA.DUMP.ONE,MVSESA.DUMP.TWO, and MVSESA.DUMP.TWO.THREE existed, the Resourcecolumn would look like the example below:MVSESADUMPONETWOTHREE

Major resources correspond to subsystems and minor resources correspond tospecific situations or resources within a major resource. By default, automationflags for minor resources are derived from their major resources.The entries are sorted alphabetically.

v The Actual flag settings are the flags that have been set for the resource.v The Effective flag settings are the flags that are in effect for the resource.

The columns are headed with an abbreviation of the name of the automationflag.The value of each flag is:- There is no explicit setting.N The flag is turned off.

AOFKAAAU SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 17Domain ID = IPSFM ---------- DISPFLGS ---------- Date = 07/28/06Operator ID = NETOP1 Time = 11:48:14

Cmd: A Add flags C Change flags R Reset flags S Scheduled OverridesActual Effective

Cmd System Resource A I S R T RS A I S R T RS--- -------- ---------------------- - - - - - - - - - - - -

KEY1 ASSISTD Y - - - - - Y Y Y Y Y YKEY1 DEFAULTS - - - - - - Y Y Y Y Y YKEY1 MINORRES - - - - E - Y Y Y Y E YKEY1 AAA011I - - - - E - Y Y Y Y E YKEY1 MVSESA Y - - Y - - Y Y Y Y Y YKEY1 CDS - - - Y - - Y Y Y Y Y YKEY1 CF - - - Y - - Y Y Y Y Y YKEY1 ENQ - - - N - - Y Y Y N Y YKEY1 HUNGCMD - - - N - - Y Y Y N Y YKEY1 LONGENQ - - - N - - Y Y Y N Y YKEY1 SYSIEFSD - - - N - - Y Y Y N Y YKEY1 HEALTHCHK - - - Y - - Y Y Y Y Y Y



Figure 16. DISPFLGS Command Dialog Panel

DISPFLGS


E A user exit is invoked whenever SA z/OS checks the flag.Y The flag is turned on.L The resulting commands or replies, or both, of an automated action are

written to the netlog only but not issued when the event occurs.? There is an error.

See IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS Customizing and Programming for furtherinformation on automation flags and minor resources.

DISPGWPurpose

DISPGW displays gateway definitions, statuses, and connectivity information.

Syntax

►► DISPGWTARGET= system_name


OUTDSN=dsnameOUTMODE=

LINEAUTONETLOG

►◄

Parameters





The DISPGW command can only be used when SA z/OS is initialized.

Usage

There are related panels that display gateway information. Use PF11 and PF10 toscroll through them.

Examples

If you enter dispgw you see a panel similar to Figure 17 on page 55.

DISPFLGS


The amount of data depends on the screen size. Press PF10/11 to scrollhorizontally.v The Domain field shows the domain ID of the system that a gateway has been

defined to, known as the gateway domain.v The SDF Root field shows the system name of the gateway domain.v The Status field shows the current status of the gateway.

The following are statuses that may occur for gateways:ACTIVE

The connection was established.BAD DOMAIN

The specified domain is unknown. Message: DSI031I.INACTIVE

The connection cannot be established. One of the following messageswas issued: DSI008I, DSI015A, DSI027I.

INV OPIDThe specified operator ID is invalid. Messages: DSI021A, DSI077A,DSI400A.

NOT STARTDThe domain has not been started by gateway initialization.

SESSFAILThe attempt to start a session with the domain ended with a VTAM®

request failure. See DSI046I in the netlog for details.v The Comm field shows the communication method that is used for the

outbound connection with the gateway domain:*XCF* XCF is used as the transport mechanism. This is the case when the

gateway domain resides in the same logical sysplex.*IP * The transport mechanism is via RMTCMD using IP.*SNA*

The transport mechanism is via RMTCMD using SNA.*RPC* The remote procedure call technique is used as the transport mechanism.

Note: The RMTCMD method is derived from the RMTSYN entries found inCNMSTYLE. If you use RMTALIAS to describe more than one transport method,then you can influence which is selected as the RMTSYN entries are sorted inascending order.

v The Release level field shows the SA z/OS release level of the gateway domain.

AOFK2GL SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 32Domain Id . : IPZFL ------------ DISPGW ------------ Date . . : 04/17/14Operator Id : NETOP1 System = TSA1 Time . . : 14:51:49

Focal Point = IPZFL

Domain SDF Root Status Comm Release level In Status Out Status-------- -------- ----------- ----- ------------- ----------- -----------IPSFL KEY6 ACTIVE *IP * SA z/OS 3.5 ACTIVE ACTIVEIPSFM INACTIVE INACTIVE SESSFAILIPSFN KEY2 INACTIVE SA z/OS 3.4 INACTIVE SESSFAILIPSF7 KEY7 ACTIVE *IP * SA z/OS 3.4 ACTIVE ACTIVEIPUFA INACTIVE INACTIVE SESSFAILIPZFL TSA1 ACTIVE *XCF* SA z/OS 3.5 ACTIVE ACTIVEIPZFM TSA2 ACTIVE *XCF* SA z/OS 3.5 ACTIVE ACTIVEIPZFN TSA3 ACTIVE *XCF* SA z/OS 3.5 ACTIVE ACTIVE


Figure 17. DISPGW Command Dialog Panel 1

DISPGW


||||||||||||||||||||||

v The In/Outbound Status field shows the status of the inbound and outboundNetView sessions from this domain to the gateway domain. If this domaincommunicates with the gateway through another domain, the status is NODIRECT.

v The Last out/in field shows the first 8 bytes of the last gateway request from thegateway domain to this domain, and the last gateway request from this domainto the gateway domain. It can be any of the following: CHECK, CONNECT,DISCONN, or FPRESET.

v The System field shows the name of the system.v The SMF ID field shows the SMF ID assigned to the system.v The SA Plexname field shows the SA z/OS SYSPLEX name. In most cases the

name is identical to the physical SYSPLEX namev The XCF Group field shows XCF group name the system belongs to.v The Net Id field shows the Networking ID.v The SYSPLEX field shows the physical sysplex name.v The PrimaryFP field shows the name of the primary focal point defined for the

domain.v The BackupFP field shows the name of the backup focal point defined for the

domain.v The Description field shows a description of the gateway domain, obtained

from the automation control file.

DISPINFOPurpose

DISPINFO displays detailed information about a specified subsystem.

If the subsystem is a CICS® or IMS™ subsystem that is being controlled by CICSAutomation or IMS Automation, a PF10 option is available to give access to CICSor IMS related information. This PF key is not available if the subsystem is down.See “Examples” on page 57 for more details.

Syntax

►► DISPINFO subsystemTARGET= system_name



AUTONETLOG

►◄

Parameters

subsystemThe name of the subsystem you want information about. If you do not specifya subsystem, a menu is displayed where you can specify the subsystem.



DISPGW




The DISPINFO command can only be used when SA z/OS is initialized.

Examples

For the subsystem and the system fields, you can override the values and refreshthe display. You can also scroll forward and backward.

AOFKINFO SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 194Domain ID = IPXFI -------- DISPINFO ---------- Date = 11/07/13Operator ID = SAOPER Time = 15:12:04

Subsystem ==> IMS1CTL System ==> KEYA System name, domain IDor sysplex name

Subsystem : IMS1CTL on System : KEYA

Description : IMS1 Control Region

Inform list : SDF EIF IOM

Class chain : C_IMS_DCCTL Class for IMS DCCTL regionsC_IMSCTL Class for IMS Control regions

Job Name : IMSCA1CR

Job Type : MVS

Category : IMS

Subcategory : CTL

Current status : DOWN

Last Monitored : 14:50:58 on 11/07/13Last Changed : 09:46:38 on 11/07/13Last Message

AOF571I 09:46:38 : IMS1CTL SUBSYSTEM STATUS FOR JOB IMSCA1CRIS DOWN - AT IPL

Monitor : INGPJMONMonitor Status : INACTIVEMonitor Interval : None specified

Last start : 09:45:52 on 11/01/13 Type : NORMLast termination : 09:48:38 on 11/07/13

ARM Element Name : None

WLM Resource Name : None

Command Prefix : None

Subsystem ID : MCA1IMSPlex name : MC0A

Command ===>PF1=Help PF2=End PF3=Return PF4=INGINFO PF6=Roll


Figure 18. DISPINFO Command Dialog Panel

DISPINFO


||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||

For further details about the fields on the panel, see the customization dialogs andIBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS Defining Automation Policy.

When obtaining automation flag settings, no user exits are invoked.

To display the default settings use the subsystem name DEFAULTS orSUBSYSTEM.

PF4 lets you toggle to the automation manager command INGINFO.

If PF10 is shown the DISPINFO command invokes the INGCICS or INGIMScommands. For more information see “INGCICS” on page 117 or “INGIMS” onpage 147.

DISPMSGSPurpose

The DISPMSGS command displays a list of automation operators that receiveautomated messages.

Syntax

►► DISPMSGSTARGET= system_name



►◄

Parameters




The DISPMSGS command can only be used when SA z/OS is initialized.

Examples

Enter dispmsgs on a command line to display the Authorized Message Receiverspanel, as shown in Figure 19 on page 59.

DISPINFO


The information contained on the panel is:v The Message field shows the message or message prefix.v The Primary Receivers field shows the automation operators, identified by their

NetView IDs. The Primary Receivers column lists automation operators that canreceive the messages listed beside their names. These messages go to the firstautomation operator listed in the Primary Receivers column that is active.

v The Secondary Receivers field shows the Alternate automation operators,identified by their NetView IDs. Secondary Receivers receive copies of themessages listed beside their names.

DISPMTRPurpose

The DISPMTR command displays and allows you to manage monitors that youhave defined using the customization dialogs for your system.

Syntax

►► DISPMTR ▼

monitorREQ=DETAIL

▼RESOURCE= resname

►

AOFK2SM SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 17Domain ID = IPSNO ---------- DISPMSGS ---------- Date = 06/27/00Operator ID = NETOP1 System = KEY3 Time = 15:05:53

Message Primary Receivers Secondary Receivers------- ----------------- -------------------’*AOF01’ AUTWRK01 AUTGSS AUTSYS

AUTBASE’*AOF02’ AUTWRK02 AUTGSS AUTSYS




AUTBASE’AOF*’ AUTMSG AUTSYS AUTBASE’IEA*’ AUTREC AUTSYS AUTBASE’IEE600I AUTSYS’IEE889I AUTSYS AUTBASE’IEE*’ AUTREC AUTSYS AUTBASE’IOS*’ AUTREC AUTSYS AUTBASE’*’ AUTLOG AUTSYS AUTBASE



Figure 19. Authorized Message Receivers (DISPMSGS) Panel

DISPMSGS





AUTONETLOG

WAIT=YESWAIT=nnn ►◄

Parameters

monitorThe name of the monitor resource. More than one name can be specified.Wildcard is supported, for example, SAP*.

resourceThe resource name that the associated monitor, or monitors, should bedisplayed for. If more than one name is specified, they must be enclosed inparentheses. Wildcard is supported.

REQ=DETAILDisplays detailed information for the specified monitor.

Note: Specification of the full monitor resource name is necessary if it is aremote monitor. Also, when using this option only one monitor can bespecified.




WAITSpecifies whether or not to wait until the request is complete. The default isYES.

nnn is the number of seconds to wait before giving up and reporting that atimeout has occurred. The maximum time interval is 999 seconds.


The DISPMTR command can be used only when SA z/OS is initialized.

Examples

If you enter dispmtr, a panel similar to that shown in Figure 20 on page 61 isdisplayed.

DISPMTR


|||

The amount of data depends on the screen size. Press PF10/11 to scrollhorizontally.v The Cmd field lets you specify command codes. To use one of the command

codes shown, type the appropriate letter next to the resource name and pressEnter. The following command codes are available:

A Resets the health status to NORMAL, if the monitor status is ACTIVE.

Resets the health status to INACTIVE, if the monitor status is BROKEN.

B Starts the monitor resource (makes it available).

C Stops the monitor resource (makes it unavailable).

D Shows the monitor details and history data.

E Invokes INGVOTE for the monitor resource to show votes and requestsagainst the monitor.

F Invokes INGINFO for the monitor resource to show details about themonitor.

I Invokes INGSCHED for the monitor resource to show details about theoverrides that exist for the monitor.

v The Monitor column shows the name of the monitor.v The System column shows the name of the system where the monitor runs.v The Status column shows the status of the monitor. It can have one of the

following values:

STARTINGThe monitor is about to become active. An activate command might bein progress.

ACTIVEThe monitor is active.

STOPPINGThe monitor is about to become inactive. A deactivate command mightbe in progress.

INGKYMN0 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 2Domain ID = IPUN8 ---------- DISPMTR ---------- Date = 01/02/03Operator ID = NETOP1 System = AOC8 Time = 13:15:00

Cmd: A Reset B Start C Stop D Details E INGVOTE F INGINFO I INGSCHED

CMD Monitor System Status Health Last monitored--- ------------ -------- ------------ ------------ -------------------_ JES2MON AOCA ACTIVE UNKNOWN 2009-12-01 17:28:16_ PMTRA AOCA ACTIVE NORMAL 2009-12-02 15:03:39_ PMTRB1 AOCA ACTIVE NORMAL 2009-12-02 15:03:40_ PMTRB2 AOCA ACTIVE NORMAL 2009-12-01 17:28:17_ PMTRB3 AOCA ACTIVE NORMAL 2009-12-01 17:28:16


PF8=Forward PF9=Refresh PF11=Next PF12=Retrieve

Figure 20. DISPMTR Initial Command Dialog Panel

DISPMTR


INACTIVEThe monitor is inactive.

FAILEDThe monitor failed. Recovery might be in progress. No acceptable healthstatus is provided.

BROKENThe monitor and its recovery failed. This is a permanent condition. Themonitor is no longer invoked. Use command code 'A' to reset themonitor to INACTIVE.

v The Health column shows the status of the monitor. This implies that themonitor is active. It can have one of the following values:

UNKNOWNThe health status has not been determined yet.

NORMALThe health is OK.

WARNINGThe health is degraded.

MINORSimilar to WARNING but more severe.

CRITICALSimilar to MINOR but more severe.

FATALSimilar to CRITICAL but more severe.

v The Last monitored column shows when the resource was last monitored.v The Status message column shows message that is associated with the status. If

the message has been truncated it ends with ..., use command code D to viewfull details about the message.

v The Description column shows descriptive information about the monitorresource.

v The Monitored Object column shows the name of the real object that is beingmonitored by this monitor.

v The Jobname column shows the name of the job this Monitor resource acceptsevents from.

The SORT, FIND, and RFIND subcommands are supported. See “Varying theFormat of the Command Output” on page 17 for information.

If you enter command code D for a resource, a panel similar to Figure 21 on page63 is displayed.

DISPMTR


DISPSCHDPurpose

DISPSCHD displays all resources that have scheduled override settings for theautomation flags. Scheduled overrides are specified using the customization dialog.They are specific times when automation is turned off for a particular flag andresource.

Syntax

►► DISPSCHDfilter TARGET= Destination

Dest_list*ALL

►

►OUTMODE= LINE

AUTONETLOG

►◄

Destination:


Dest_list:

▼( Destination )

INGKYMO1 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 107Domain ID = IPSFP ---------- DISPMTR ---------- Date = 11/23/09Operator ID = NETOP1 System = AOC8 Time = 13:15:15

Monitor : CICS1CON1/MTR/AOC8Target : AOC8Description : CICS Connection Monitor for CICS1TOR

Monitored Object : BICM.CICSAO84.CONNECT.AO83Inform List : SDF NMC SMF USR TTT EIF IOM

Commands...Activate :Deactivate :Monitoring :

Interval :

Last termination : 17:50:26 on 11/22/09Last start : 00:01:09 on 11/23/09



Figure 21. DISPMTR Command Dialog Panel Showing Details for a Monitor

DISPSCHD


Parameters

filterIs the filter to be applied for the output. Only resource names that match thefilter criteria are displayed. Wildcard is supported. The filter consists of themajor name and, optionally, of a minor name separated by a dot, for example,CICS*.TRANS* , or *.*CEMT. Specify * to view major resources. To view minorresources specify xyz.*.

TARGETFor information on the TARGET parameter, see “OUTMODE Parameter” onpage 16.



The DISPSCHD command can only be used when SA z/OS is initialized.

Examples

If you enter dispschd a panel similar to Figure 22 is displayed.

v The System column shows the name of the system where the resource isdefined.

v The Resource column shows the name of resources that have NOAUTOspecified in the automation control file. The resources are displayed in the orderthat they occur in the automation control file in.

v The Fl (Flag) column shows an abbreviation of the automation flag name.v The Day column shows the day or days when automation is turned off. Valid

values are:– Monday through Sunday– * (for every day)

AOFKAASC SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 6Domain ID = IPUF9 ---------- DISPSCHD ---------- Date = 08/14/07Operator ID = NETOP1 Time = 21:57:58

System Resource Fl Day Start - End-------- -------------------------------- -- --------- -------------AOC9 CICST A WEEKDAY 07:30 - 04:00AOC9 THURSDAY 03:00 - 05:00AOC9 I * 12:00 - 13:00AOC9 R WEEKEND 18:00 - 19:00AOC9 RS * 12:00 - 13:00AOC9 MVSDUMP R * 07:00 - 18:00



Figure 22. DISPSCHD Command Dialog Panel

DISPSCHD


– Weekend– Weekday

v The Start column shows the start time (hh:mm) of the non-automation period.v The End column shows the end time (hh:mm) that automation is disabled for.

Note: The display does not take into account any changes made with theINGAUTO command.

Entries for DEFAULTS or SUBSYSTEM will affect all subsystems that do not havetheir own automation flags coded.

DISPSFLTPurpose

The DISPSFLT command lets you set up view filters for DISPSTAT.

Syntax

►► DISPSFLTREQ=GET

REQ=SET

▼RESOURCE= ( resource_name )

►

►

▼STATUS= ( status )¬\

TARGET= system_namedomain_idsaplex_name

►

►OUTMODE= LINE

AUTONETLOG

►◄

Parameters

REQSpecifies the type of the request. It can be one of the following:

SET Specifies setting new filter settings.

GET Specifies returning the current filter settings. This is the default.

RESOURCESpecifies the name of the resource, or resources, to be displayed. The format isresource name. It can be a list of names. Wildcards are supported. If you specifyonly one resource you need not put it in parentheses.

STATUSSpecifies the resource statuses that you want to display. If you specify a list ofstatuses, separate them with a comma and enclose them in brackets (bracketsare not needed for a single status). If ‘¬’, or ‘\’ is used, all statuses except theones that you specify are displayed.

DISPSCHD


The following are predefined lists:

STATUS=*Lists all resource statuses.

STATUS=1Lists all resources that are currently UP or ENDED.

STATUS=2Lists all resources that are in a ‘normal’ status (DOWN, STARTED, UP,AUTOTERM, AUTODOWN, ACTIVE, ENDED, ENDING, RESTART,EXTSTART, RUNNING).

STATUS=3Lists all resources that are in a ‘down’ status (DOWN, INACTIVE,RESTART, AUTODOWN, CTLDOWN, STOPPED, BROKEN, MOVED,FALLBACK).

STATUS=4Lists all resources that are in a start transition status (RESTART,STARTED, STARTED2, ACTIVE, RUNNING, EXTSTART).

STATUS=5Lists all resources that are in a stop transition status (AUTOTERM,ENDING, STOPPING, ABENDING, BREAKING)



If no parameters are specified, the filter settings are used.

If a subsystem name is specified, but no other parameters, for example, TARGET=,are specified, all subsystems of this name found on any system will be displayed.

Usage

The DISPSFLT command can also be used when SA z/OS is not initialized.

The DISPSFLT command lets you set filter options at operator logon from withinthe operator's initial REXX script.

Examples

If the operator is responsible for all resources starting with xyz, DISPSFLT will becalled with the parameter RESOURCE=xyz. If you enter dispsflt a panel similar toFigure 23 on page 67 is displayed.

DISPSFLT


Filters are used to tailor the DISPSTAT display. To be displayed, a subsystem mustpass all the filter criteria. If a filter is not explicitly set, it defaults to '*', whichmeans that all subsystems pass it. Some filters allow you to specify a wildcardcharacter, in the form of a trailing '*'.v The Resources field contains the name of the resources or their jobs.v The Statuses field shows the subsystem's current status. If ‘¬’, or ‘\’ is specified,

all statuses not specified are used.v The Targets field shows the name of the target system.v If you press PF4 the filter settings are cleared.

Subsystems are evaluated to see if they meet the current filter criteria when:v DISPSTAT is invoked with filter parameters.v The filters are changed through the DISPSTAT Filters panel.v The Refresh key (PF9) is selected from the DISPSTAT panel.

Note: If you make changes on this panel, and then decide that you do not wantthese changes to take effect, you can select the Reset key (PF5), which reinstatesthe field values that were present when you entered the panel. If you press PF9 thefilter settings are saved until the session is terminated.

DISPSTATPurpose

DISPSTAT displays current information about one or more subsystems.

Syntax

AOFKSTA3 SA z/OS - Command DialogsDomain ID = IPSNO -------- DISPSFLT ---------- Date = 06/27/00Operator ID = NETOP1 Time = 15:08:40

Resources ( *, *esour*, resource or jobname )*

Statuses ( *, status or choice, leading ¬ or \ negates)RESTART STARTED STARTED2 ACTIVE RUNNING EXTSTART

Precoded: 1 All resources that are currently UP or ENDED2 All resources that are in a normal status3 All resources that are in a down status4 All resources that are in a start transition state5 All resources that are in a stop transition state

Targets ( system name , domain ID , sysplex name or * )KEY3

Command ===>PF1=Help PF2=End PF3=Return PF4=Clear PF5=Reset PF6=Roll

PF9=Save PF12=Retrieve

Figure 23. DISPSFLT Command Dialog Panel

DISPSFLT


►► DISPSTAT

▼

*ALLKIDS subsystem*KIDS subsystem*ALLPARENTS subsystem*PARENTS subsystemALL

subsystem

ALL2CONS=YES

ALL2CONS=NO►

►

▼STATUS= ( status )¬\

►

►TARGET= Destination

Dest_list*ALL


AUTONETLOG

►◄

Destination:


Dest_list:

▼( Destination )

Parameters

subsystemSpecifies the particular subsystem whose status or automation flags you wantto check. You can specify any automated subsystem. Wildcards are supported.An asterisk (*) matches a string of arbitrary length and a percentage (%)matches a single character.

*ALLKIDSLists all children and children of children of the selected subsystem. Wildcardsare not available for the subsystem here.

*KIDSLists the direct children of the selected subsystem. Wildcards are not availablefor the subsystem here.

*ALLPARENTSLists all parents and parents of parents of the subsystem. Wildcards are notavailable for the subsystem here.

DISPSTAT


*PARENTSLists the direct parents of the selected subsystem. Wildcards are not availablefor the subsystem here.

ALLDisplays the current information for all automated subsystems.

STATUSSpecifies the resource statuses that you want to display. If you specify a list ofstatuses, separate them with a comma and enclose them in brackets (bracketsare not needed for a single status). If ‘¬’, or ‘\’ is used, all statuses except theones that you specify are displayed.

The following are predefined lists:

STATUS=*Lists all resource statuses.

STATUS=1Lists all resources that are currently UP or ENDED.

STATUS=2Lists all resources that are in a ‘normal’ status (DOWN, STARTED, UP,AUTOTERM, AUTODOWN, ACTIVE, ENDED, ENDING, RESTART,EXTSTART, RUNNING).

STATUS=3Lists all resources that are in a ‘down’ status (DOWN, INACTIVE,RESTART, AUTODOWN, CTLDOWN, STOPPED, BROKEN, MOVED,FALLBACK).

STATUS=4Lists all resources that are in a start transition status (RESTART,STARTED, STARTED2, ACTIVE, RUNNING, EXTSTART).

STATUS=5Lists all resources that are in a stop transition status (AUTOTERM,ENDING, STOPPING, ABENDING, BREAKING)

ALL2CONSSpecifies whether or not a complete list of columns is displayed. Theparameter only applies to line mode. The following are valid values:

YES Displays the complete list of columns. This is the default.

NO Displays only 60 characters of display data for each resource. Thiscommand is beneficial when DISPSTAT is entered on the systemconsole.

For example, you can specify:DISPSTAT cics* OUTMODE=LINE ALL2CONS=NO


OUTDSNFor information on the OUTDSN parameter, see “OUTDSN Parameter” onpage 17. Note, however, that for the DISPSTAT command the minimum recordlength of the output data set is 256 bytes.

DISPSTAT



If no parameters are specified, the filter settings will be used, or, if not set,DISPSTAT will show all resources from the local system.

If a subsystem name is specified, but no other parameters, for example, TARGET=,are specified, all subsystems of this name found on any system will be displayed.


The DISPSTAT command can only be used when SA z/OS is initialized.

Examples

If you enter dispstat, you see information about all automated resources, asshown in Figure 24.

The amount of data displayed depends on the screen size used. Press PF10 andPF11 to scroll horizontally.

PF4 lets you toggle to the INGLIST command dialog showing the same resourcesfrom the automation manager view.v The CMD field allows you to invoke other SA z/OS command dialogs, or

control the amount of information displayed. To use one of the commanddialogs, type the appropriate letter next to the resource name, and press Enter.When you return to this panel the data within the command scope is refreshed.The current filters are not reapplied until you select Refresh (PF9).For example, to invoke the INGTHRES dialog in order to change thresholds forJES2, move the cursor in front of JES2 and type d.You can specify X to exclude subsystems.

INGKYDS0 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 68Domain ID = IPUFJ -------- DISPSTAT --------- Date = 12/13/11Operator ID = OPER1 System = AOC4 Time = 12:17:16A dispflgs B setstate C ingreq-stop D thresholds E explain F info G treeH trigger I service J all children K children L all parents M parentsCMD Resource Status System Jobname A I S R T RS Type Activity--- ----------- -------- -------- -------- - - - - - -- -------- ---------

AM UP AOC4 AMA4 - - - - - - MVS --none--AM2 UP AOC4 AMS4 - - - - - - MVS --none--APPC UP AOC4 APPC - - - - - - MVS --none--ASCH UP AOC4 ASCH - - - - - - MVS --none--BLSJPRMI ENDED AOC4 BLSJPRMI - - - - - - TRANS --none--DLF UP AOC4 DLF - - - - - - MVS --none--FFST UP AOC4 FFST - - - - - - MVS --none--IRRDPTAB ENDED AOC4 IRRDPTAB - - - - - - TRANS --none--JES2 UP AOC4 JES2 - - - - - - MVS --none--LLA UP AOC4 LLA - - - - - - MVS --none--PAPLMTRA UP AOC4 PAPLMTRA - - - - - - MVS --none--PAPLMTRB UP AOC4 PAPLMTRB - - - - - - MVS --none--PBSYSPL1 UP AOC4 PBSYSPL1 - - - - - - MVS --none--

Command ===>PF1=Help PF2=End PF3=Return PF4=INGLIST PF5=Filters PF6=Roll

PF8=Forward PF9=Refresh PF10=Previous PF11=Next PF12=Retrieve

Figure 24. Display of Status of All Automated Resources (DISPSTAT)

DISPSTAT


||

Note: The U command code is supported if the AOFEXC04 exit is installed.v The Resource field shows the name of the resource in its corresponding status

color, for example, green when the system is UP.v The Status field shows the current status of the resource as supplied by the

automation agent.v The System is the name of the system that this instance of the resource is from.v The Jobname is the job name of the resource.v The automation flags are as follows:

A If this flag is set to N (No), no automation is on, regardless of how the otherflags are set. If this is set to Y (Yes), SA z/OS checks each of the other flagsto see if they are set to Y or N.

I If this is on, automation issues the correct MVS start command for eachsubsystem when SA z/OS is initialized and assures that subsystems arestarted in the order specified in the automation control file.

S If this is on, automation manages and completes the startup process ofsubsystems.

R If this is on, automation takes the specified action for any MVS message thatis not associated with the initialization, startup, shutdown, or restart of asubsystem. For example, if this flag is on, automation takes actions to restartthe subsystem in case of an abend.

T If this is on, automation manages the shutdown process for subsystems byissuing shutdown commands and responding to prompts for additionalinformation.

RS If this is on, automation monitors subsystems to ensure that they arerunning and, if one fails, attempts to restart it according to the policy in theautomation control file.

Each flag has a value of:N OffE User exitY OnL Log? Error

Note: DISPSTAT shows settings that have been set by the INGAUTO command.It does not show the effective setting for the specific flag. Use the DISPFLGScommand to view the effective settings for the flags.

v The Type field shows the type of job, either MVS, NONMVS, TRANS(ient), orONE-SHOT.

v The Activity field shows whether the resource is in a starting or stoppingprocess.

v The Last Changed field shows the date and time that the status of thesubsystem last changed.

v The Last Monitored field shows the time that the system was last monitored. Ifmonitoring has been disabled this field is set to dashes.

v The Description field shows a description of the subsystem, from theautomation control file.

Press PF5 to display the DISPSFLT panel. For a description of the DISPSFLTcommand see “DISPSFLT” on page 65.

DISPSTAT


||

DISPSYSPurpose

The DISPSYS command displays information about the NetView automation agentsetup and the environment that it runs on.

Note that if no data is defined or it is not relevant (for example, the sysplex groupname for a system that is not in a sysplex) the word 'none' is displayed in theappropriate field.

Syntax

►► DISPSYSTARGET= system_name



►◄

Parameters




The DISPSYS command can only be used when SA z/OS is initialized.

Usage

DISPSYS is used when you want to see the system parameters and SA z/OS statusinformation for the Sysplex Timer.

Examples

If you enter dispsys, you will see a panel similar to Figure 25 on page 73.

DISPSYS


For further details about the fields on the panel, see the online help, thecustomization dialog and IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS DefiningAutomation Policy.

DISPTREEPurpose

The DISPTREE command displays the dependency graph for a particular resource.

Syntax

►► DISPTREE subsystemDEPENDENCY=START

DEPENDENCY= STOPGROUP

►




►◄

Parameters

subsystemThe name of the subsystem the display is to be focused upon.

AOFKADAE SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 98Domain ID = IPSFO ---------- DISPSYS ---------- Date = 11/28/11Operator ID = NETOP1 System = SYS3 Time = 12:17:12

System : KEYC in Sysplex : KEYAPLEXDomain : IPXFISysplex Group : KEY1PLEXXCF Group name : INGXSGUGXCF PlexID : INGPX$BD

SoftwareOperating System : z/OS 01.11.00NetView : Tivoli NetView for z/OS V6R2

Tower(s) : SASystem Automation : V3R5M0

Tower(s) : SYSOPS PROCOPS

ConfigurationData set : KEYAPLEX.V350.ACF(ACFZ992)Built by : NETOP1 04/24/14 13:24:42Activated : 04/24/14 13:25:24CFG Token : 20140424132434000C6F7A2084

Runmode(s)Current : *ALLDefined

WEEKEND : WK1 WK2 WK3DISASTER_RECOVERY : RD1 RD2



Figure 25. DISPSYS Command Dialog Panel

DISPSYS


|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||

DEPENDENCYSpecifies the type of dependency that should be used to draw the dependencygraph. The following options are available:

STARTThe start relationship that is defined for the named subsystem will be usedto draw the graph.

STOPThe stop relationship that is defined for the named subsystem will be usedto draw the graph.

GROUPThe group relationship that is defined for the named subsystem will beused to draw the graph.




The DISPTREE command can only be used when SA z/OS is initialized.

Examples

If you enter disptree jes2, a panel similar to Figure 26 on page 75 is displayed.

DISPTREE


v The Subsystem field shows the name of the subsystemv The Target field shows the name of the system where the subsystem residesv The Dependency field shows the dependency type (START, STOP, or GROUP)

If you position the cursor next to a resource and press PF4 the tree structure of theresource is shown.

PF5 lets you toggle to the DISPINFO command dialog.

DISPTRGPurpose

The DISPTRG command displays the trigger conditions of a subsystem.

Syntax

►► DISPTRG resourceTARGET= system_name



►

AOFKTREE SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 78Domain ID = IPSNO -------- DISPTREE ---------- Date = 07/19/00Operator ID = NETOP1 Time = 18:39:18

Subsystem ==> JES2 Target ==> KEY3 Dependency ==> START

PCAUTH --+AOCSSI --+

AOCAPPL --+JES2+-- AMCP+-- ASTEX+-- DBUSS+-- IRRDPTAB+-- MIM| +-- TMS| +-- SLS| +-- HSM+-- OMIIHIST| +-- OMIIHDI| +-- OMIIETE| +-- OMIICOL| +-- OMIICCOL| +-- OMIICCUA+-- PIRLM| +-- PIMS| +-- OMIIPIMS| +-- PIMSDBRC| +-- PIMSDLI+-- PMO+-- QFETCHA+-- QFETCHB+-- QFETCHC+-- QFETCHD+-- RMF| +-- RMFGAT+-- RODM| +-- GMFHS| +-- NETGMFLS

Command ===>PF1=Help PF2=End PF3=Return PF4=Focus PF5=Info PF6=Roll

PF8=Forward PF9=Refresh PF11=Right PF12=Retrieve

Figure 26. DISPTREE Command Dialog Panel

DISPTREE


►WAIT=nnn

►◄

Parameters

resourceThe name of the resource that the trigger condition is displayed for. The formatis name/type[/system]. Wildcard is supported.



WAIT

Specifies the number of seconds to wait before reporting that a timeout hasoccurred if the automation manager does not provide the requested data. Themaximum time interval is 999 seconds.



The DISPTRG command can only be used when SA z/OS is initialized.

Examples

If you type the name of a resource that a trigger has been defined for, a panelsimilar to Figure 27 is displayed.

v The Resource field shows the name of the resource that uses the trigger.v The Target field shows the name of the system where the subsystem is defined.v The Trigger field shows the trigger that is defined for the subsystem.

AOFLT000 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 4Domain ID = IPSFO ---------- DISPTRG ---------- Date = 12/12/11Operator ID = NETOP1 Target = KEY3 Time = 13:26:58

Resource => TRGG006AA10/APL/KEY3Target => KEY3 System name, domain id or sysplex nameTrigger. . . : TRIGGER6

Cmd: S show detailsCmd Type Events--- -------- -------- ------- -------- -------- -------- -------- ---------

STARTUP B000S100 B000S200STARTUP B000S300SHUTDOWN B000P100 B000P200SHUTDOWN B000P300



Figure 27. DISPTRG Command Dialog Panel

DISPTRG


v The Cmd field allows you to specify command codes. The following commandcode is available:

S Shows details of the system defined.v The Type field shows the type of the specified condition.v The Events field shows the names of the specified events. Event that are

satisfied are shown in white. Unset events are shown in red.

DRAINJESPurpose

DRAINJES drains (that is, halts) JES2 resources prior to JES2 shutdown.Specifically, DRAINJES issues commands to drain the initiators, syslog, offloadertasks, lines, printers, punches, and readers (depending on which resources arelisted in the automation control file).

Syntax

►► DRAINJES subsystemTARGET= Destination

Dest_list*ALL

►

►OUTMODE= LINE

AUTONETLOG

►◄

Destination:


Dest_list:

▼( Destination )

Parameters

subsystemSpecifies the name of the JES2 subsystem whose resources you want to drain.If you are in fullscreen mode and you do not specify a subsystem, a panel isdisplayed where you can specify the subsystem. If you are in line mode anerror message is displayed.



DISPTRG



The DRAINJES command can only be used when SA z/OS is initialized.

Usage

Normally, you do not need to issue this command because it is performedautomatically as part of the SHUTDOWN processing. However, if SA z/OS isunable to shut down a particular JES2 subsystem, you can use DRAINJES.

Examples

Assuming the JES2 subsystem name is JES2, type drainjes jes2 to drain the JES2resources.

EXPLAINPurpose

The EXPLAIN facility gives you a description of the automation statuses that canoccur for SA z/OS subsystems. It explains what the status means, why thesubsystem may have got into the status, and how another status can be achieved.

Syntax

►► EXPLAINstatussubsystem

TARGET= system_namedomain_IDsaplex_name

►◄

Parameters

If you do not specify any parameters, a menu panel is displayed where you canspecify either an automation manager status, automation agent status, or the nameof a subsystem.

statusThe status you want to see explained.

subsystemThe name of the subsystem you are investigating. Its status is queried and anexplanation of the automation agent status is displayed.



The EXPLAIN command can only be used when SA z/OS is initialized.

Usage

Use EXPLAIN when you want information about an automation status.

DRAINJES


Examples

If you enter EXPLAIN, a panel similar to Figure 28 is displayed.

INGAMSPurpose

The INGAMS command displays details about currently registered automationmanagers and automation agents, and lets you change the operation mode (PAMor SAM) of the automation managers. Note that it is only possible to make asecondary automation manager a primary one, not vice versa.

INGAMS lets you dynamically refresh the definition data for an automationmanager and the corresponding ACFs with the contents of a specifiedconfiguration data set. The consistency of the configuration data as used by theautomation agent and the associated ACFs is maintained. Data that would causeresources to contain conflicting definitions is rejected during configuration refreshwith an appropriate message.

You can also use the INGAMS command to initiate and view diagnosticinformation for the primary automation manager.

Syntax

AOFKEXPL SA z/OS - Command DialogsDomain ID = IPSFO ---------- EXPLAIN ---------- Date = 06/27/02Operator ID = NETOP1 Time = 17:28:26

Specify one of the following for a description of the corresponding status:

1. Agent status (? for list)2. Automation manager status (? for list)3. Subsystem name


PF12=Retrieve

Figure 28. EXPLAIN Command Dialog Panel

EXPLAIN


►► INGAMSSTATUS

XSTATUSSTART=HOT

SET name MODE=PAMSTART= WARM

COLDDETAILS nameDIAG

REQ= SNAPSHOTDSN=dsname

STARTRECDSN=dsname

STOPRECSTATS Report optionSTARTMON INTERVAL=nnnSTOPMON

DISABLEENABLESUSPEND SYSTEMS=(*all|system1 system2 ...)RESUME SYSTEMS=(*all|system1 system2 ...)REFRESH CFG= dsname

dsname(generation)**(generation)

►


domain_idsaplex_name


AUTONETLOG

►◄

Report option:

STATS=SUMMARY

STATS=DETAIL

Parameters

STATUSDisplays a list of all automation manager and automation agents in the sysplexthat are registered to the same XCF group.

XSTATUSDisplays a list of all automation manager and automation agents in the sysplexthat are registered to the same XCF group denoted by the PLEXID specificationfor the local automation agent.

SETChanges the operation mode of the specified automation manager.

nameThe name of the automation manager.

MODESpecifies the mode of operation, this can be:

INGAMS


||||

PAMPrimary automation manager

STARTSpecifies how an automation manager switch should be carried out. Validvalues are HOT, WARM, or COLD.

DETAILSDisplays detailed information about the specified automation manager.

DIAGDisplays the diagnostic panel where you can either request that a snapshot ofthe current state image queue be taken or that recording of the inbound workitems be started or stopped. The output file must be a sequential data set.

REQIs the function to be performed. It can be one of the following:SNAPSHOT

Write a snapshot of automation manager data.STARTREC

Start recording.STOPREC

Stop recording.STATS

Display work item statistics.STARTMON

Activate work item queue monitoring.STOPMON

Stop work item queue monitoring.

INTERVALThe time period in seconds between two monitoring cycles. The value can bein the range of 10–999.

STATSSpecify the type of work item statistics report to generate: A SUMMARY (thedefault) or a DETAIL report, which shows details about all tasks.

DISABLECauses the automation manager to stop writing to the takeover file. It alsodeallocates the takeover file from the automation manager. This is onlynecessary when performing repair operations on the takeover file.

ENABLECauses the automation manager to start updating the takeover file for eachwork item processed.

SUSPENDTells the automation manager to suspend sending orders to start or stopresources that are hosted by the systems that are specified with the SYSTEMSparameter.

RESUMETells the automation manager to resume sending orders to start or stopresources that are hosted by the suspended systems that are specified with theSYSTEMS parameter.

SYSTEMSThe parameter to define the systems that the sending of orders is suspended orresumed for. If you specify multiple systems, they must be enclosed inparentheses.

INGAMS


Alternatively, you can use *all to specify all the systems that are controlled bythe automation manager.

REFRESHUpdates an automation manager with the definition data that is stored in thespecified configuration file. This also reloads the appropriate ACFs on theactive automation agents.

Notes:

1. INGAMS REFRESH does not delete global variables that are associatedwith ENTRY TYPEs that were deleted from the policy database before thelast build if those ENTRY TYPEs are not associated with a subsystem.However, if a keyword/value is removed from the ENTRY TYPE, this is achange to the E-T. Therefore, INGAMS REFRESH rebuilds the E-T and thedeleted keyword/value pair is removed from the global variables.All deleted entry types and their associated global variables are resetduring the next SA z/OS COLD start or during ACF COLD processing.

2. The configuration refresh on the automation agent runs parallel to otheractivities. Thus any start/stop orders may be processed before the new datais loaded.

3. Issuing an INGAMS REFRESH command while an agent is SUSPENDEDdue to an Automation Manager takeover will interfere with the stillongoing load process and will result in a delay for the processing of theINGAMS REFRESH command. It is recommended that you wait until allagents are in the READY status before issuing the INGAMS REFRESHcommand.

CFGThis is the name of a partitioned data set that holds the configuration filemember and the ACF fragments. The name can be a fully qualified data setname or generation data group (GDG) name. You can use an asterisk (*) toindicate a reload of the configuration file that was previously used or adifferent generation of the GDG that was previously used.

dsnameSpecifies a data set name. If you specify a GDG base data set name, thelatest generation (0) is used.

dsname (generation)Specifies the name of a generation data group (GDG) and the generationnumber (zero or a negative signed integer) of a generation data set withinthe GDG, for example, *(-2).

DSNLets you specify the name of the data set that contains the snapshot or workitem recording data. You can only use a sequential file.

The output data set must be pre-allocated with a RECFM FB and LREC 80. Itmust be allocated as a single volume data set, without candidate volumes forfurther expansion.



INGAMS




None.


The INGAMS command supports resource level security. If turned on, thefollowing profiles in class SYSAUTO are checked:


AGT.sysplex.xcfgrp.RES._CONFIG UPDATE When function option isREFRESH

AGT.sysplex.xcfgrp.RES._MANAGER UPDATE When function option is SET

CONTROL When function option isDISABLE, ENABLE,SUSPEND or RESUME

AGT.sysplex.xcfgrp.RES._MANAGER.DIAG

UPDATE When function option isDIAG for all function otherthan STATS (other thanREQ=STATS)

Usage other than listed in the above tables does not cause a resource level securitycheck. For further details, refer to IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS Planningand Installation

Usage

The INGAMS command operates sysplexwide. For an overview see “Overview ofCommands that Operate Sysplexwide” on page 13.

When using the DIAG parameter make sure that the data set for writing asnapshot or starting recording is online and free before issuing a command. Thedata set must be used exclusively by the automation manager (DISP=OLD) formaking snapshots or recording.

Examples

If you enter ingams a panel similar to Figure 29 on page 84 is displayed.

INGAMS


|

||

||||

||||

|||

||||

||||||||

|||

v The Cmd field allows you to specify command codes to initiate various activitiesrelated to automation managers. To use one of the command codes shown, typethe appropriate letter next to the resource name, and press Enter. The amount ofdata displayed depends on the screen size. Press PF10/PF11 for horizontalscrolling. The following command codes are available:

A Displays the automation manager menu panel allowing you to:– Modify the automation manager operation mode. You can only change a

secondary automation manager to a primary one.– Enable and disable takeover file processing– Suspend or resume the sending of orders from the automation manager

to the automation agent on the system specified. This is useful if, forexample, you have erroneously issued a command to shut down a systemor sysplex. In such a situation, you now have the chance to rectify theerror.You should also note that while the automation manager is suspended fora particular system, it continues to respond to queries (such as INGLISTor INGVOTE) and any automation action for other systems within itsscope.

See “Controlling the Secondary Automation Manager Functions” on page 86.

B Displays additional information about the automation manager orautomation agent. For an automation agent, the DISPSYS command is issuedto show details about the agent and the environment the agent runs on. See“Showing Details about the Automation Manager” on page 87.

C Displays the refresh configuration data panel where you enter the name ofthe data set that contains the automation manager configuration members.This is then used to update the definition data for the automation managerin real time and to reload the corresponding automation configuration filesfor the active automation agents. This command thus maintains theconsistency of the configuration data that is used by the automation agentand its automation configuration files. See “Refreshing the ConfigurationData Sysplexwide” on page 89.

INGKYAM0 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 4Domain ID = IPUFJ ---------- INGAMS ---------- Date = 11/03/14Operator ID = NETOP1 Sysplex = AOC4PLEX Time = 16:33:35

Cmd: A Manage B Show Details C Refresh Configuration D Diagnostic

CMD System Member Role Status Sysplex XCF-Group Release Comm PA--- -------- --------- ----- ---------- -------- --------- ------- ---- ---

AOC4 AOC4$$$$1 PAM READY AOC4PLEX INGXSGA4 V3R5M0 XCFAOC4 AOC4 AGENT READY AOC4PLEX INGXSGA4 V3R5M0 XCFAOC5 AOC5$$$$1 SAM READY AOC4PLEX INGXSGA4 V3R5M0 XCFAOC5 AOC5 AGENT READY AOC4PLEX INGXSGA4 V3R5M0 XCF


PF9=Refresh PF10=Previous PF11=Next PF12=Retrieve

Figure 29. INGAMS Command Dialog Panel

INGAMS


||||||||||||||||||||||||

D Displays the utility panel where you can perform the following diagnosticfunctions:– Write snapshot.– Start or stop recording.– Display work item statistics– Start or stop monitoring of the work item queue.

For further information, see “Diagnostic Functions” on page 90 and “How toUse the Diagnostic Option of INGAMS” in IBM Tivoli System Automation forz/OS User's Guide.

v The System field shows the name of the system where an instance of theautomation manager or automation agent runs.

v The Member field shows the name of the agent or manager. The name must beunique within the XCF group. The member name for an automation manager isautomatically generated and consists of the z/OS system name plus a1-character suffix running from 1 to 9. The z/OS system name is padded with '$'to create an 8-character system name before appending the suffix.

Note: The member name of an automation agent is equal to the z/OS systemname.

v The Role field shows the type of the system. It can be one of the following:AGENT

An automation agent.PAM The primary automation manager.SAM The secondary automation manager. There can be more than one.

v The Status field shows the status of the member. It can be one of the following:COMM

Is the type of communication being used between the automation managerand the automation agent.

NOT READYThe automation agent or manager is initializing.

PENDINGThe automation manager is in the process of initializing as a primaryautomation manager (PAM).

READYThe member is completely initialized.

REFRESHThe automation manager is performing a configuration refresh.

SELECTEDThe automation manager is selected to become the next primary automationmanager (PAM).

STOPPINGThe automation manager is terminating.

SUSPENDEDThe automation agent has been placed in suspended mode.

v The Sysplex field shows the name of the sysplex.v The XCF-Group field shows the name of the associated XCF-Group.v The Release field shows the SA z/OS Version and Release of the automation

manager or automation agent.v The Comm field shows the type of communication in use between the

automation manager and the automation agent.v The PA field shows if this is a primary agent (PA) communicating with a higher

level automation manager.v The Runmode field shows the Runmode assigned to this system (agents only).

INGAMS


v The Pref field shows the preference value assigned to various automationinstances.

v The SMF ID field shows the SMF ID assigned to the system.v The Primary FP field shows the name of the primary focal point defined to the

system.v The Backup FP field shows the name of the backup focal point defined to the

system.

Values for the columns SMF ID, Primary FP and Backup FP are only available ifthe agent is a member of the extended XCF communication group.

The FIND/RFIND/SORT commands are supported. See “Varying the Format ofthe Command Output” on page 17 for information.

Controlling the Secondary Automation Manager FunctionsIf you enter command code A for a secondary automation manager, a panel isdisplayed where you can specify the new mode of operation, as shown inFigure 30. Switching into primary mode is considered a directed takeover.

Use this panel to initiate the following functions:

Make primary Automation managerThis allows you to change the operation mode of a secondary automationmanager to become primary (PAM). This is considered a directed takeover.Optionally, you can specify the start mode for the new PAM. Valid startmodes are HOT, WARM or COLD. The default is HOT.

Note: A primary automation manager cannot be changed to a SAM.

Enable Takeover fileThis causes the automation manager to start updating the Takeover file for

INGKYAM1 SA z/OS - Command DialogsDomain ID = IPSFO ---------- INGAMS ---------- Date = 16/12/11Operator ID = NETOP1 Sysplex = KEY1PLEX Time = 13:41:27

Specify or revise the following data:

Action => 1. Make primary Automation manager - Start =>2. Enable Takeover File3. Disable Takeover File4. Suspend System5. Resume System6. Stop queue monitoring

Automation manager => KEY3$$$$2Target => System name, domain id or sysplex name


PF12=Retrieve

Figure 30. INGAMS Command Dialog Panel to Control Secondary Automation ManagerFunctions

INGAMS


||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||

|

||

||

||

each work item that is processed. This is necessary after the Takeover filehas been enlarged or another error condition resolved.

Disable Takeover fileThis causes the automation manager to stop writing to the Takeover file.The Takeover file is freed from the automation manager.

Suspend SystemThis causes the automation manager to stop sending orders to the agentrunning on the system specified left of the action. You can specify morethan one system name separated by a blank character. Specify *all tosuspend all systems that are controlled by the automation manager.

Resume SystemThis causes the automation manager to resume sending orders to the agentrunning on the system specified left of the action. You can specify morethan one system name separated by a blank character. Specify *all toresume all systems that are controlled by the automation manager.

Fill in the following fields:

Automation managerSpecify the name of the automation manager.

Target The name of the system where the automation manager resides. This isonly necessary when the automation manager is not within the localsysplex. You can specify either the system name, the domain ID or thesysplex name.

Showing Details about the Automation ManagerIf you enter command code B for an automation manager, a panel similar toFigure 31 on page 88 is displayed.

INGAMS


The Takeover file section shows the data set name of the takeover file, its status,and the I/O interval time.

The status may be ENABLED, ENABLED - IO SUPPRESSED (meaning thetakeover file is still allocated but the PAM has stopped writing to it because of anearlier I/O error), or DISABLED (meaning the takeover file has been deallocatedand the manager has stopped writing to it as a result of the operator selecting toDISABLE the takeover file).


Automation Manager : AOC4$$$$1 running on system : AOC4Operation mode : PAM Job name : YAMBUMUStatus : READY Start type : HOTXCF-Groupname : INGXSGA4Start time : 02 AUG 2011 08:46:51PAM selected time : 02 AUG 2011 09:39:45

Takeover file : AOC.AM.A4.HSATKOVRStatus : ENABLEDIO Interval (secs) : 05

Service level ... HSACMAIN FrameworkCompile date : 25 JUL 2011 12:54 18 APR 2011 14:03Size : 00B41A60 00050F50Signature : SA34DR09 SA34DR0134

PARMLIB settingsBLOCKOMVS : YESPREF : 10

Workitem StatisticsExternal : 207Internal : 407

CPU time (secs) : 20.486

Logic Deck ...Release : V3R4M0Date built : 13 Jul 2011Time built : 06:00:21Last APAR : NONE

Diagnostic InfoSnapshot size : 2712008Number of resources : 329Number of requests : 49Number group requests : 48History records : 102943Max History records : 262144

Config dataset name : BUMU.INGRCLUP.V340.ACFConfig member : HSAZ99P

Z99PCRES STRUCTURE 20110801150652Z999CLGC STRUCTURE 20110801150652Z99PCSCH SCHEDULE 20110801150652

Config token : 20110801150652FF066AAD2094Config version : 01

Command ===>PF1=Help PF2=End PF3=Return PF6=RollPF7=Back PF9=Refresh PF12=Retrieve

Figure 31. INGAMS Command Dialog Panel to Show Details

INGAMS


||

|||||

SA z/OS delays I/O to the takeover file for the number of seconds specified bythe I/O interval. The in-storage pages are only marked to be written. This reducesthe amount of I/O to the takeover file significantly, giving an update work itemthe same performance characteristics as a query work item.

The Service level section shows the current APAR level including the compilationdate of the HSACMAIN module and the automation manager framework. This isused primarily for debugging purposes.

The PARMLIB settings section shows the BLOCKOMVS and Preference Settings.

The Workitem Statistics section shows the number of work items received fromthe various automation agents (that is, external work items) and the internallygenerated work items.

The CPU Time shows the processor time (in seconds) used by the automationmanager.

The Suspended Systems section shows those systems that the sending of orders bythe automation manager has been suspended for.

The Logic Deck section shows the date and time when the logic deck was builtand the last APAR number of the logic deck.

The Diagnostic Info section shows details about the size of the state image andother useful information. This can be used when allocating the data set that willhold the snapshot data.

The Configuration section displays the data set name that the configuration isloaded from, the main configuration member name, and the include members withtheir timestamps.

Note that the last two sections (Configuration, and Diagnostic Info) are onlypresent for the primary automation manager.

Refreshing the Configuration Data SysplexwideIf you enter command code C for an automation manager, a panel similar toFigure 32 on page 90 is displayed.

INGAMS


||||

v In the Configuration data set name field specify the name of the data setcontaining the automation manager configuration members. The name can be afully qualified data set name or a generation data group name. You can use * toindicate a reload of the configuration from the data set that was used previously,or a different generation of the previously used GDG.

v In the Target field specify the name of the system where the automationmanager resides. Specifying this is only necessary if the automation manager isnot within the local sysplex. You can specify either the system name, thedomain, or the sysplex name.

Diagnostic FunctionsIf you enter command code D for a primary automation manager, a panel similarto Figure 33 on page 91 is displayed.



Configuration data set name (* for current data set)

*(-1)

Target => System name, domain id or sysplex name


PF12=Retrieve

Figure 32. INGAMS Command Dialog Panel to Refresh the Configuration

INGAMS


Initiating Diagnostic FunctionsFor options 1–3, fill in the following fields:

Data set nameSpecify the name of the data set that will hold the snapshot data. The dataset can be a sequential file or a member of a partitioned data set. Howeverthe recording data set can only be a sequential file.

Notes:

1. A data set name is required when writing a snapshot or when startingrecording.

2. Make sure that the automation manager has the appropriate authorityto write to the data set.

Target Specify the name of the system where the automation manager resides. Itis only required when the automation manager is not in the local sysplex.You can specify either the system name, the domain ID or the sysplexname.

Use options 5 and 6 to start and stop work item queue monitoring. The monitorexamines the work item input queue for expired work items and issues messageINGX1011I when more work items arrive than can be processed by the automationmanager within the monitoring interval.

When you start monitoring, fill in the following field:

IntervalSpecify monitoring interval in seconds. The valid range is 10–999.

Work item StatisticsTo display work item statistics, you enter 4 in the Action field without specifying adata set name or system. This displays a panel similar to Figure 34 on page 92.



Action => 1. Write Snapshot2. Start recording3. Stop recording4. Work item Statistics5. Start queue monitoring - Interval =>6. Stop queue monitoring

Data set name =>



PF12=Retrieve

Figure 33. INGAMS Command Dialog Panel to Manage Diagnostic Functions

INGAMS


This panel shows history information about the work items processed by theautomation manager. The automation manager keeps track of the last 500 workitems processed by each of the tasks that build the automation manager kernel.

The following data is shown:Snapshot

The snapshot timestamp shows the time of the query.Task The name of the task.Queue

The number of elements in the workitem input queue.CPU Time

The processor time (in seconds) used by the automation manager.Status The status of the task. It is one of the following:

BUSY The task is processing a work item.IDLE The task is waiting for work.NOTIDLE

The task has completed work but is not waiting for work.UNKNOWN

History records have not yet been defined for this task.Since This is the number of seconds that the task has been processing the work

item (elapsed time). If this number is unexpectedly high, it is an indicationthat something is wrong. The following coloring is used depending onhow long the work item has been active for:

Color Active longer than

Red 60 seconds

Yellow 30 seconds

Blue 15 seconds

The columns to the right of the Since column show the number of work items thathave been processed in one minute, starting from the time the statistics query wasmade or refreshed (with INGAMS DIAG REQ=STATS).


Snapshot: 2011-12-16 17:02:37 Queue: 0 CPU time: 11.617

Cmd: S DetailsSince

Cmd Task Status (secs) 17:02 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -10--- ---------- -------- -------- ----- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

ADMIN IDLEQUERY1 IDLE 4 1 1QUERY2 IDLEQUERY3 UNKNOWNSCHED IDLE 1 1 1UPDATER1 IDLE 2 2 2UPDATER2 IDLEUPDATER3 IDLEUPDATER4 IDLE--------------------------------------------------------------------------Totals 3 4 1 1 3 3

Command ===>PF1=Help PF2=End PF3=Return PF6=RollPF7=Back PF9=Refresh PF12=Retrieve

Figure 34. INGAMS Work Item Statistics Display

INGAMS


You can use the S command code to display details of the work item history forthe selected task, such as the starting time and total processing time of the workitem, as shown in Figure 35.

INGAUTOPurpose

The INGAUTO command lets you change the settings of the automation flags forthe specific subsystem, for the MVSESA, SUBSYSTEM or DEFAULTS, resources orfor a minor resource under one of those major resources. You can change thesetting to ON, OFF, EXITS or LOG. If an INTERVAL is specified the changes areeffective for the specified time period.

Any changes are only effective until a NetView recycle or the ACF COLDcommand being issued. You can also ask for a flag to be set back to the valuespecified in the current configuration file.

Syntax

►► INGAUTO EXITSOFFONRESETLOG

MVSESADEFAULTSSUBSYSTEMresname ▼ subcomponent

►

INGKYAM6 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 300Domain ID = IPZFA ---------- INGAMS ---------- Date = 09/28/07Operator ID = NETOP1 Sysplex = SATPLEX Time = 13:51:52

Snapshot: 2007-09-15 13:29:55Starting Elapsed

Task Day Time in secs Busy Work item---------- --- -------- ------- ---- ----------------------------------------QUERY1 11:53:36 0.043 GET_RESOURCE_DATAQUERY1 11:54:11 0.096 GET_RAW_RESOURCE_DATAQUERY1 11:54:11 0.067 GET_RAW_RESOURCE_DATAQUERY1 11:54:11 0.069 GET_RAW_RESOURCE_DATAQUERY1 11:54:12 0.067 GET_RAW_RESOURCE_DATAQUERY1 11:54:12 0.067 GET_RAW_RESOURCE_DATAQUERY1 11:54:13 0.067 GET_RESOURCE_DATAQUERY1 11:54:14 0.066 GET_RESOURCE_DATAQUERY1 11:54:15 0.067 GET_RESOURCE_DATAQUERY1 11:54:16 0.066 GET_RESOURCE_DATAQUERY1 11:54:17 0.067 GET_RESOURCE_DATAQUERY1 11:59:11 0.091 GET_RAW_RESOURCE_DATA



Figure 35. INGAMS Work Item History Display

INGAMS


►SCOPE=ONLY

SCOPE= ALLCHILDREN

FLAG=RECOVERY

FLAG= AUTOMATIONINITSTARTRESTARTSTARTTERMINATE

INTERVAL=dd:hh:mm►


Dest_list*ALL


►◄

Destination:

system_namedomain_idsaplex_name

Dest_list:

▼( Destination )

Parameters

If you do not specify a resource (MVSESA, SUBSYSTEM, DEFAULTS, resname orsubcomponent) and are running in full screen mode, a menu appears promptingyou for a resource name. If you are in line mode, a resource is a requiredparameter.

EXITSEnables user exits for the flag that you specify.

OFFSets the automation flag that you specify to off.

ON Sets the automation flag that you specify to on.

RESETResets the automation flag to the values that you specified in your policydatabase.

LOGWrites the commands and replies to the netlog if an event occurs that triggersthe automated action.

DEFAULTSSpecifies the value DEFAULTS. This sets automation flags for all resources thatdo not have their own flags defined.

SUBSYSTEMSets defaults for all subsystems.

MVSESASets defaults for all MVS subcomponents.

INGAUTO


||||

resnameSpecifies the name of a particular resource, for example, a subsystem name likeJES2 or a resource under MVSESA such as WTOBUF. You can specify anyresource known to the Automation Agent.

Wildcards are supported, for example, IMS* or *PRD.

subcomponentsSpecifies the subcomponents of the resource. Enter a period (.) between eachsubcomponent name. When specifying a subcomponent without specifying amajor resource, MVSESA is used as a major resource. The period (.) in front ofthe subcomponent must then be omitted.

SCOPESpecifies whether to change automation for this resource and its dependentresources, dependent resources only, or this resource alone. Valid options arethe following:

ONLYSpecifies this resource alone. This is the default.

ALLSpecifies this resource and its dependent resources.

CHILDRENSpecifies dependent resources only.

FLAGSpecifies the automation flags to set on, off, reset, or enable a user exit for,(depending on whether you specified INGAUTO ON, OFF, RESET or EXITS).See IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS Customizing and Programming forfurther information on automation flags. Valid options are the following:

AUTOMATIONThis sets the Automation flag, which is the controlling flag. If you set theAutomation flag to OFF, SA z/OS turns all automation off. If theAutomation flag is ON, SA z/OS checks the other flags.

INITSTARTSets the Initstart flag. This is checked after SA z/OS initialization for thefirst start of an application. If this flag is on, SA z/OS will start theresource, provided its goal is to be available and all other conditions for itsstartup have been met.

RECOVERYSets the Recovery flag. If this is set to on, SA z/OS will perform recoveryactions other than restarting a resource.

RESTARTSets the Restart flag. If this is set to on, SA z/OS will restart the resource ifpossible.

STARTSets the Start flag. If this is set to on, SA z/OS will manage and completethe startup of the resource.

TERMINATESets the Terminate flag. If this is set to on, SA z/OS will processautomated shutdown requests for the resource.

INTERVAL=dd:hh:mmSpecifies the period of time the flag will be changed for. At the end of theinterval, the flag is reset to the state defined in the agent's configuration file.

INGAUTO


|||

|

||||




The INGAUTO command can only be used when SA z/OS is initialized.

A flag cannot be reset for an interval.

Usage

If the Automation flag is currently set to off, and you have changed one of theother flags, your change will not be effective until the Automation flag is set to on.Occurrences will be detailed in the netlog.

If you have selected EXITS for an automation flag, and none have been specified inyour automation control file, automation will be set to on. Occurrences will bedetailed in the netlog.

SCOPE=ONLY is the only valid scope for DEFAULTS, a resource type, andsubcomponents. ALL and CHILDREN are not valid.

Make sure you specify the correct subcomponent name. Even if you specify asubcomponent that does not exist, the message FUNCTION SUCCESSFULLYCOMPLETED will appear.

Examples

To turn all automation on in SA z/OS for TSO and for 2 hours only, enter thefollowing:ingauto on,tso,flag=automation,interval=00:02:00

To turn all automation on for the WTOR buffer shortage recovery, enter thefollowing:ingauto on,mvsesa.wto

INGAUTO


INGCF

PurposeThe INGCF command supports all the functions of SA z/OS that deal withcoupling facilities. It supports full mode and line mode; for line mode capability,see “INGCFL” on page 115. If you issue INGCF in line mode, only the displayfunction is available.

The INGCF command supports the following parameters:v DRAIN

Removes all allocated structures from the coupling facility, to disconnect thecoupling facility from the systems of the sysplex, and to inactivate the couplingfacility.

v ENABLEActivates a coupling facility, to connect it with the systems of a sysplex and topopulate it with structures.

v MAINTPuts the coupling facility into or takes it out of maintenance mode.

v PATHDisplays and controls the sender paths of the target coupling facility. It sets thesender paths ONLINE and OFFLINE physically and logically.

v STRUCTUREDisplays detail information and rebuilds or deletes a selected structure on thetarget coupling facility. It also lets you start and stop duplexing.

INGCF associates a status with every coupling facility, and a condition with everystructure (instance) that is allocated on the target coupling facility. The structurecondition is influenced by the release level of the system that allocated thestructure. The INGCF functions use the coupling facility state and the structureconditions to determine which action can be performed in any given situation.

AOFKAASF SA z/OS - Command DialogsDomain ID = IPUN8 ---------- INGAUTO ---------- Date = 09/02/03Operator ID = NETOP1 Time = 17:23:40

Resource name => MVSESA Specific or group resource or DEFAULTSSub-components => WTO Resource sub-components

Note : Be sure to specify the correct sub-component nameTarget => AOC8 System name, domain ID, sysplex name, *ALLScope => ONLY Change automation for:

ONLY - only this resourceCHILDREN - dependantsALL - resource and dependants

Automation => Specify new settings for automation flagsInitstart => Y - flag is always onStart => N - flag is always offRecovery => Y E - exits called if specifiedTerminate => L - resulting commands are logged onlyRestart => R - return to automation control file

settingsInterval => Specify duration of change (dd:hh:mm)

or leave blank for an indefinite change


Figure 36. INGAUTO Command Dialog Panel

INGCF


Therefore, the DRAIN and ENABLE functions can enforce a correct sequence ofactions for complex tasks such as draining or restoring a coupling facility.

If the selected action impacts the sysplex configuration it must be confirmed beforeexecution.

AuthorizationsThe actions that you can initiate with INGCF depend on your authorizations. Thepanels show your authorization type. Note that the authorization types apply tothe current function, and that your authorization type may vary for differentfunctions.

The following authorization types exist:

DISPLAYYou cannot initiate any action that affects the sysplex configuration.

ALL BUT (ACTIVATE|SHUTDOWN)This type only occurs in the DRAIN and ENABLE command dialogs. Youcan rebuild structures, force the deletion of structures and set the senderpaths offline and online, but you cannot inactivate or activate the couplingfacility.

ALL You can initiate all actions from the corresponding panel.

Depending on your authorizations, it is possible that you have, for example,authorization type ALL for the STRUCTURE function, and authorization typeDISPLAY for the DRAIN function.

Note: The actions that modify the sysplex configuration are marked by an asterisk('*') in the following descriptions.

Syntax

►► INGCFDrain cfnameEnable cfnameMaint cfname MODE= OFF

ONPath cfname

CONDITION=NOStructure cfname

CONDITION = NOCOND YES

►




►◄

cfname:

CF_name

INGCF


ParametersDrain

Prepares a coupling facility for removal from the sysplex.

EnableIntegrates or reintegrates a coupling facility into a sysplex.

MaintControls the maintenance mode of a coupling facility.

PathControls the sender paths of a coupling facility.

StructureOffers manipulation of individual structures (detail information, rebuild,deletion).

CF_nameThe name of the target coupling facility for the specified function. The defaultis a selection panel that shows all available coupling facilities of the sysplex.

CONDITIONSpecify YES if you want to get the current condition for each structure.Selecting this option increases the response time required to build the display.The default is NO.

MODESpecify ON if you want to put the coupling facility into maintenance mode, orOFF to take it out of maintenance mode.

TARGETFor information on the TARGET parameter, refer to “TARGET Parameter” onpage 14.

OUTMODEFor information on the OUTMODE parameter, refer to “OUTMODEParameter” on page 16.

Restrictions and LimitationsThe ENABLE and the PATH functions require that the active IODF is catalogued.Otherwise, sender path information cannot be retrieved in certain situations.

INGCF ENABLE assumes that the receiver paths from the coupling facility to thesystems of the sysplex have been defined and activated. This requires a POR of theCPC that the coupling facility resides on.

Coupling Facility StatesThe status of a coupling facility can be as follows:

ACTIVATINGThe coupling facility is being activated and will then become DRAINED.

DEACTIVATINGThe coupling facility is being deactivated and will then become INACTIVE.

DRAININGThe coupling facility is being disconnected from the connected systems.

DRAINEDThe coupling facility does not have a connection to any system and can beremoved from the sysplex.

INGCF


DRAINED NOHWACCThe coupling facility does not have a connection to any system, but cannotbe removed from the sysplex because the BCP (Basic Control Program)internal interface is not available.

Note: This status is also displayed when the coupling facility has beendeactivated from the HMC (Hardware Management Console) but the XCFdisplay commands still return the name of the coupling facility.

ENABLINGThe coupling facility is being connected to the systems of the sysplex thatuse it.

FORCINGAllocated structures are being deleted from the coupling facility. This onlyhappens with structures that have no active connectors, and with theseonly when they cannot be rebuilt by system-managed rebuild.

INACTIVEThe coupling facility is not active.

INACTIVE NOHWACCThe coupling facility is not active and cannot be activated because the BCPInternal Interface does not have access to the appropriate Support Element.

MAINTMODEThe coupling facility is in maintenance mode and has not allocated anystructures. It can now be removed from the configuration or deactivatedwithout touching the sender paths. If you want to move structures back tothe coupling facility you need to take it out of maintenance mode beforepopulating it.

MAINTMODE OFFLINEThe coupling facility is in maintenance mode and may have allocatedstructures. At least one system has set all its sender paths to the couplingfacility to OFFLINE. XCF will reject any rebuild command to the couplingfacility.

MAINTMODE NOHWACCThe coupling facility is in maintenance mode and has not allocated anystructures. It can now be removed from the configuration without touchingthe sender paths. However, this must be done manually becauseautomation does not have access to the appropriate Support Element. Ifyou want to move structures back to the coupling facility you need to takeit out of maintenance mode before populating it.

NORMALThe coupling facility may have allocated structures and is connected to allsystems.

NORMAL MAINTMODEThe coupling facility is in maintenance mode but has allocated one or morestructures. The coupling facility is no longer eligible for structureallocations.

NORMAL OFFLINEThe coupling facility may have allocated structures. At least one systemhas set all its sender paths to this coupling facility to OFFLINE. XES willreject any rebuild request for this coupling facility.

INGCF


NOTINPOLICYThe coupling facility is active but not defined in the active CFRM policy.

POPULATINGThe coupling facility is being populated with all those structures that haveit on the first place in their preference list.

REBUILDINGEither all allocated structures that can be rebuilt are being removed fromthe coupling facility by the XES rebuild process (initiated by DRAIN), orone particular such structure is being removed (initiated by theSTRUCTURE).

Structure ConditionsThe condition of an allocated structure can be:

Rebuild is not supported.The structure can neither be rebuilt, nor can its deletion be forced.

The structure has at least one active connector that does not supportuser-managed rebuild, and at least one active connector that does notsupport system-managed rebuild.

System-managed processes not supported.The structure cannot be rebuilt, nor can its deletion be forced.

System-managed rebuild, which is a system-managed process, is notpossible for one of the following reasons:v The structure was allocated from a system with OS/390 V2.7 or earlier.v The CFRM couple data sets have not been formatted to support

system-managed processes (ITEM NAME(SMREBLD) NUMBER(1) was notspecified).

Note: In certain rare cases system-managed processes are not supportedalthough the condition that is displayed on the DRAIN panel seems toindicate the contrary. Then, the rebuild will be initiated, but will fail withmessage IXC367I indicating that system-managed processes are notsupported for the structure.

No alternate coupling facility defined or available.The structure can neither be rebuilt, nor can its deletion be forced.

The structure has an active connector and supports rebuild but does nothave an alternate coupling facility defined in its preference list, or thealternate coupling facilities that are defined in the preference list arecurrently unavailable.

Insufficient space detected for rebuild.The structure cannot or could not be rebuilt. Its deletion cannot be forced.

No alternate coupling facility has enough space to rebuild the structure.

Preference list is empty.The structure cannot be rebuilt because its preference list is currentlyempty. A possible reason for this is a pending policy change, see P column.

Structure is pending deallocation.XES accepted a forced deletion of the structure but does the realdeallocation later.

INGCF


Note: This status can only occur when MVS APAR OW39404 has not beeninstalled.

Structure is being rebuilt.The structure is being rebuilt to another coupling facility.

Duplex rebuild is being stopped.Two instances of the structure were maintained on different couplingfacilities. The application is being disconnected from that instance that isallocated on the target coupling facility. After disconnecting, the instance isdeleted.

No connection exists.The structure cannot be rebuilt, but you can force its deletion.

The structure does not have any connections and cannot be rebuilt withsystem-managed rebuild.

No alternate coupling facility for structure with no connections.The structure cannot be rebuilt, but you can force its deletion.

The structure does not have any connections. It could be rebuilt withsystem-managed rebuild, but no alternate coupling facility is defined in itspreference list or available.

No alternate coupling facility for structure with no active connections.The structure cannot be rebuilt, but you can force its deletion.

The structure has only DISCONNECTING, FAILED, orFAILED-PERSISTENT connections. It could be rebuilt withsystem-managed rebuild, but no alternate coupling facility is defined in itspreference list or available.

The structure’s initial size is less than its actual size.The SIZE value is greater by twice the INITSIZE value. The structure canbe rebuilt, but a SIZE value that is greater than twice the INITSIZE mightcause the following:v It might be impossible to allocate a structure at a size of INITSIZE,

because the amount of control storage that is required to support theSIZE value might actually be larger than INITSIZE.

v If the allocation succeeds, it might result in a structure with aproportionally large amount of its storage allotted to structure controls,leaving too few structure objects to be exploited usefully by theassociated application.

For example, if you have requested a maximum size that is very muchlarger than the initial size, the system will attempt to use a proportionallylarge amount of the allocated storage for its controls. The result could bethat the allocated storage contains control structures for the futuremaximum size of the structure and insufficient storage might remain forthe application's initial use.

No active connection exists.The structure cannot be rebuilt, but you can force its deletion.

The structure has only DISCONNECTING, FAILED, orFAILED-PERSISTENT connections and cannot be rebuilt withsystem-managed rebuild.

Note: INGCF DRAIN deallocates structures with this condition as part ofthe REBUILD action (see REBUILD(10) in “INGCF DRAIN” on page 104).

INGCF


||||

|||

||||

||||||

INGCF STRUCTURE accepts a rebuild request for structures with thiscondition, but deallocates them (see Rebuild (R)).

No connections. System-managed rebuild supported.The structure can be rebuilt.

The structure does not have any connections, but can be rebuilt withsystem-managed rebuild.

No active connections. System-managed rebuild supported.The structure can be rebuilt with system-managed rebuild.

User-managed rebuild is not possible for the structure because it has onlyDISCONNECTING, FAILED, or FAILED-PERSISTENT connections.

System-managed rebuild is supportedThe structure can be rebuilt.

The structure has active connectors. At least one active connector does notsupport user-managed rebuild, but all active connectors supportsystem-managed rebuild.

Duplex rebuild is active.The application is connected to two instances of the same structure ondifferent coupling facilities.

[No condition]When no condition is displayed, the structure can be rebuilt.

The structure has at least one active connection, and all its activeconnectors support user-managed rebuild.

Structure is awaiting rebuild.The structure has been selected for rebuild but has not been processed yet.

Structure is currently allocated on cf_name.The structure can be rebuilt on the target coupling facility with thePOPULATE action of the ENABLE function. It is currently allocated on thecf_name coupling facility, but the target coupling facility precedes cf_namein the structure's preference list. This condition is displayed only in theENABLE command dialog.

Structure allocated in cf_name cannot be rebuilt to this CF.The structure can probably not be rebuilt on the target coupling facilitywith the POPULATE action of the ENABLE function. It is currentlyallocated in the cf_name coupling facility, but the target coupling facilityprecedes cf_name in the structure’s preference list. And, the actual size ofthe structure is greater than the free space of the target coupling facility.This condition is displayed only in the ENABLE command dialog.

ExampleIf you issue INGCF without any parameters, a panel with all coupling facilities ofthe sysplex is displayed, as shown in Figure 37 on page 104.

INGCF


Specify a function for a selected coupling facility and press Enter.

INGCF DRAINPurpose

The DRAIN function of INGCF facilitates the removal of a coupling facility fromthe sysplex, for example, for maintenance purposes. With this option, you canperform the following sequence of tasks:1. Display information for all allocated structures of the coupling facility.2. Put the coupling facility into maintenance mode if the MAINT function is

available.3. Rebuild all rebuildable structures on another coupling facility, and delete

instances of structures on the target coupling facility that are being duplexed onanother coupling facility.

Notes:

a. The scope of the structures that can be rebuilt depends on the release levelof the sysplex members.

b. INGCF DRAIN rebuilds structures one at a time (SETXCFSTART,REBUILD,STRNAME=), not globally (SETXCFSTART,REBUILD,CFNAME=), and always on a coupling facility that isdifferent from the target coupling facility (LOCATION=OTHER).

c. Generally, you should be aware that it is XES that performs the actualrebuild. Not all of the factors that XES takes into account when allocating astructure are accessible to SA z/OS. Therefore, a rebuild request for astructure that should be rebuildable according to its condition can fail incertain rare cases.

4. Force the deletion of structures that have no active connectors and cannot berebuilt.

INGLX900 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 2Domain Id = IPSFO ---------- INGCF ---------- Date = 02/23/03Operator Id = NETOP1 Time = 13:42:35

Sysplex . . . . . . : KEY1PLEX SM process level . : 12- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Cmds: D drain CF / E enable CF / M start or stop maintenance mode

P display sender paths / S display structures

CF Name Total Space Free Space Free% V Lvl LP Node Descriptor-------- ----------- ---------- ----- - --- -- ------------------------------

_ CF01 507392 K 446976 K 88.09 Y 11 D 009672.RX6.IBM.51.000000064516_ CF02 245248 K 210944 K 86.01 Y 11 E 009672.RX6.IBM.51.000000064516


F9=Refresh F12=Retrieve

Figure 37. INGCF Selection Panel

INGCF DRAIN


Note: There are structures that you can neither rebuild nor delete with theforce action. Included are the structures that have at least one active connectorand do not support rebuild. To remove such structures, first disconnect allactive connectors, and then delete the structure manually if it is persistent orhas persistent connections.

5. When the coupling facility is not in maintenance mode, disconnect the couplingfacility from the systems that it is connected to.

6. Inactivate the target coupling facility.

INGCF DRAIN ensures that these actions are performed in the correct order, asspecified above.

Actions

The following F-keys are supported:

*REBUILD (F10)Starts the rebuild of structures that can be rebuilt on another couplingfacility. Thus, a rebuild is only initiated for structures whose preference listcontains more than one coupling facility.

There are two methods for rebuild, user-managed and system-managedrebuild. User-managed rebuild is supported for all release levels.System-managed rebuild is only available with systems that have beenenabled by formatting the CFRM couple data sets with the specification:ITEM NAME(SMREBLD) NUMBER(1)

System-managed rebuild is only performed when the requirements foruser-managed rebuild are not met. This applies, for example, to structureswithout active connectors.

The REBUILD action also deletes all structure instances on the targetcoupling facility that are being duplexed on another coupling facility.

Note: The REBUILD action deallocates structures with the condition Noactive connection exists.. See No active connection exists.

*FORCE (F5)Forces the deallocation of structures with one of the following conditions:v No connection exists.

v No alternate coupling facility for structure with no activeconnections.

v No alternate coupling facility for structure with no connections.

This action is only made available after all structures that can be rebuilthave been rebuilt.

*MAINTON (F5)Puts the coupling facility into maintenance mode.

Note that this function is only available before you start the rebuildprocess. Once you have started the rebuild process and you want to putthe coupling facility into maintenance mode you need to issue thecommand INGCF MAINT cf_name MODE=ON.

*DRAIN (F4)Disconnects the coupling facility from its connected systems by setting thesender paths OFFLINE.

INGCF DRAIN


This action is only enabled after all structures of the target coupling facilityhave been removed to another coupling facility or deallocated. Note thatstructures that have active connectors but do not support rebuild cannot beremoved with F10 or F5. They must be deallocated manually beforeexecuting this step is enabled.

*SHUTDOWN (F11)This action inactivates the coupling facility. It is only made available whenall connections between the coupling facility and the systems of thesysplex have been disconnected.

Note: This function key is unavailable when running on a z/OS imagethat runs under z/VM®.

Note that these actions can only be performed if INGCF DRAIN is issued in fullmode. In line mode, only the display function is available.

To avoid performance degradation due to multiple rebuild processes, orunpredictable results due to multiple executions of an action, all actions are locked.Therefore, an action is rejected if any lock exists even if the action does not affectthe action currently being performed. Because the action can take a long time it isalso executed asynchronously on a dedicated autotask, preventing the operatorfrom being blocked. To check progress, use the refresh function (F9).

Example not Using MAINTMODE

In the following example, a coupling facility is drained:1. All of its structures that can be rebuilt are rebuilt on another coupling facility,

and duplexing is stopped.2. For all structures that have no active connector and cannot be rebuilt deletion is

forced.3. All systems that are connected with the coupling facility are disconnected.4. The coupling facility is inactivated.

When you issue INGCF with the DRAIN option, you can specify the couplingfacility to be drained, for example by entering INGCF DRAIN CF01. If you do notspecify a coupling facility name, INGCF displays a selection panel with allcoupling facilities that are defined in the sysplex.

The status of the coupling facility (NORMAL) and the authorization type of theoperator (ALL) are displayed on the right side of the panel header. The main partof the panel consists of a list containing the structures allocated in CF01 and theirconditions. The conditions are classified by color and an asterisk. The asterisksignifies that a structure cannot be rebuilt.

Depending on the availability of the MAINT function, either the two actions,MAINTON with F5 and REBUILD with F10, are enabled, or only REBUILD withF10, is enabled. Pressing F10 calls the confirmation panel of the rebuild process.

After F10 has been pressed on the confirmation panel and the rebuild is completethe command dialog can be refreshed with F9.

One structure could not be rebuilt because no alternate coupling facility isspecified in its preference list. The REBUILD action is no longer available. Instead,the FORCE action (F5) is available because the structure that could not be rebuilthas a condition that allows forcing the deallocation of the structure. Pressing F5

INGCF DRAIN


calls a confirmation panel similar to that for REBUILD. Pressing F10 on theconfirmation panel and refreshing the command dialog after the action has beencompleted results in an empty panel.

No more structures are allocated in the coupling facility and the coupling facility isnot in maintenance mode, so that the coupling facility can be released from theconnections with the systems of the sysplex. Consequently, INGCF DRAIN enablesthe DRAIN action (F4). After completion of that action, the status of the couplingfacility changes to DRAINED.

Because the coupling facility is no longer connected to any system, it can beinactivated. After pressing F11 and confirming the action the status of the couplingfacility changes to INACTIVE.

Example Using MAINTMODE

In the following example, a coupling facility is drained:1. The coupling facility is put into maintenance mode.2. All of its structures that can be rebuilt are rebuilt on another coupling facility,

and duplexing is stopped.3. Deletion is forced for all structures that have no active connector and cannot be

rebuilt.4. The coupling facility is made inactivate.

Note: It is no longer necessary to turn the sender paths offline when thecoupling facility is in maintenance mode, regardless of whether or not allsystems in the sysplex run z/OS 1.9 or later.

When you issue INGCF with the DRAIN option, you can specify the couplingfacility to be drained, for example, by entering INGCF DRAIN CF02. If you do notspecify a coupling facility name, INGCF displays a selection panel with allcoupling facilities that are defined in the sysplex.

The status of the coupling facility (NORMAL) and the authorization type of theoperator (ALL) are displayed on the right side of the panel header. The main partof the panel consists of a list containing the structures allocated in CF02 and theirconditions. The conditions are classified by color and an asterisk. The asterisksignifies that a structure cannot be rebuilt.

Two actions are enabled, MAINTON with F5 and REBUILD with F10. Pressing F5calls the confirmation panel for starting the maintenance mode.

After pressing F10 on the confirmation panel, the main panel shows the new status(NORMAL MAINTMODE) and leaves only F10 for the rebuild process. PressingF10 calls the confirmation panel for the rebuild process.

After pressing F10 on the confirmation panel and the rebuild is complete, you canrefresh the command dialog with F9.

One structure could not be rebuilt because no alternate coupling facility isspecified in its preference list. The REBUILD action is no longer available. Instead,the FORCE action (F5) is available because the structure that could not be rebuilthas a condition that allows forcing the deallocation of the structure.

INGCF DRAIN


Pressing F5 calls a confirmation panel similar to that for REBUILD. Pressing F10 onthe confirmation panel and refreshing the command dialog after the action hasbeen completed results in an empty panel and the status of the coupling facilityhas changed to MAINTMODE.

Because no more structures are allocated in the coupling facility, it can beinactivated. After pressing F11 the status of the coupling facility changes toINACTIVE.

INGCF ENABLEPurpose

The ENABLE function of the INGCF command is intended to support theintegration AND re-integration of a coupling facility into a sysplex. With thisoption, you can:1. Activate the target coupling facility.2. Connect the systems of the sysplex with the coupling facility.3. Take the coupling facility out of maintenance mode when it is in this mode and

the MAINT function is supported.4. Switch to another CFRM policy if the target coupling facility is not defined in

the active policy and a suitable policy is available.A suitable CFRM policy must contain:v A definition of the target coupling facilityv Appropriate definitions for every active coupling facility and every allocated

structure5. Rebuild all structures on the target coupling facility whose preference list starts

with this coupling facility, unless this is excluded by other requirements.

INGCF ENABLE ensures that these actions are performed in the correct order, asspecified above.

Actions

The possible actions and the associated F-keys are:

*ACTIVATE (F11)This action activates the CFCC (Coupling Facility Control Code) throughthe BCP Internal Interface by an ACTIVATE command.

Note: This function key is unavailable when running on a z/OS imagethat runs under z/VM.

*ENABLE (F4)Sets the sender paths of all systems of the sysplex to ONLINE. This actionis enabled when the coupling facility is active.

*MAINTOFF (F5)Takes the coupling facility out of maintenance mode.

*SWITCH (F5)Switches to another CFRM policy when the target coupling facility is notdefined in the active CFRM policy and a suitable policy is available. Whenthere is more than one suitable policy you can choose one of these from aselection panel.

INGCF DRAIN


A CFRM policy is suitable when it contains:v A definition of the target coupling facilityv Definitions for every active coupling facility and every allocated

structure

This action is only made available when the target coupling facility isactive, but not defined in the current CFRM policy.

*POPULATE (F10)Starts a rebuild process by which all structures that have the targetcoupling facility at the beginning of their preference list but are currentlyallocated on another coupling facility are allocated on the target couplingfacility.

This action requires that the coupling facility be enabled, connected to allmembers of the sysplex, and defined in the current CFRM policy. Theaction is offered whenever INGCF ENABLE detects that a structure is notallocated on the target coupling facility although it is the preferredcoupling facility of that structure.

Note: When you have drained a coupling facility with INGCF DRAIN andthen reintegrate it with INGCF ENABLE, be aware that the set ofstructures that are allocated on the target coupling facility after populationcan be different from the original set before the draining. Typically, thishappens when the original set does not contain exactly those structuresthat have the target coupling facility at the first position in their preferencelist.

Note that these actions can only be performed when INGCF ENABLE is called infull mode. In line mode, only the display function is available.

Example with CF not in MAINTMODE

In the following example, a coupling facility that has already been activated isreintegrated into the sysplex in two steps:1. The coupling facility is connected to all systems of the sysplex.2. All structures that have the target coupling facility as the first coupling facility

in their preference list are allocated on the target coupling facility.

If you issue INGCF with the ENABLE option, you can specify the coupling facilityto be reintegrated, for example by entering INGCF ENABLE CF02. If you do notspecify a coupling facility name, INGCF shows a selection panel with all couplingfacilities that are defined in the sysplex.

The selected coupling facility has already been activated manually, therefore itsstatus, as shown on the right of the panel header, is DRAINED. The authorizationtype of the operator (ALL) is also displayed on the right side of the panel header.The main part of the panel is empty because no structures are allocated in CF02.The only action that is activated is ENABLE with F4. If you press F4 aconfirmation panel is displayed.

After pressing F10 on the confirmation panel, the command dialog shows thatstructures are currently allocated in CF01.

The status has changed to NORMAL, and F10 is enabled for populating thecoupling facility. This implies that the target coupling facility is defined in theactive CFRM policy.

INGCF ENABLE


The structure list contains 10 entries with the condition Structure is currentlyallocated in CF01.. These are the structures that are currently allocated in CF01,but have CF02 in the first position in their preference list.

Pressing F10 and confirming the action populates the coupling facility.

Example with CF in MAINTMODE

In the following example, a coupling facility that has already been activated isreintegrated into the sysplex in two steps:1. The coupling facility is taken out of maintenance mode.

Note: It is no longer necessary to turn the sender paths offline when thecoupling facility is in maintenance mode, regardless of whether or not allsystems in the sysplex run z/OS 1.9 or later.

2. All structures that have the target coupling facility as the first coupling facilityin their preference list are allocated on the target coupling facility.

If you issue INGCF with the ENABLE option, you can specify the coupling facilityto be reintegrated, for example, by entering INGCF ENABLE CF02. If you do notspecify a coupling facility name, INGCF shows a selection panel with all couplingfacilities that are defined in the sysplex.

The selected coupling facility has already been activated manually, therefore itsstatus, as shown on the right of the panel header in Figure 39 on page 111, isMAINTMODE. The authorization type of the operator (ALL) is also displayed onthe right of the panel header. The structure list contains 10 entries with thecondition Structure is currently allocated in CF01. These are the structuresthat are currently allocated in CF01, but have CF02 in the first position in theirpreference list. The only action that is activated is MAINTOFF with F5.

INGLX901 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 10Domain Id = IPSFP ------ INGCF ENABLE ------- Date = 09/29/08Operator Id = USER1 Time = 13:52:50

Coupling Facility ==> CF02 Status . . . . . . : NORMALSysplex . . . . . ==> KEY1PLEX Permission . . . . : ALL- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Structure Condition---------------- -------------------------------------------------------------DBNA_GBP2 No active connection. System-managed rebuild supported.DBNA_LOCK1 No active connection. System-managed rebuild supported.HSA_LOG System-managed rebuild is supported.IXCPLEX_PATH3IXCPLEX_PATH4JES2CKPT1 System-managed rebuild is supported.LOGGER_STR2 The structure’s initial size < its actual size.SYSZWLM_9F092064 System-managed rebuild is supported.S941EMHQ No connections. System-managed rebuild supported.S941MSGQ No connections. System-managed rebuild supported.



Figure 38. ENABLE Command Dialog Panel: After Populating

INGCF ENABLE


If you press F5 a confirmation panel is displayed.

After pressing F10 on the confirmation panel, the command dialog shows the newstatus and a new function key.

The status has changed to NORMAL, and F10 is enabled for populating thecoupling facility. This implies that the target coupling facility is defined in theactive CFRM policy.

Pressing F10 and confirming the action populates the coupling facility.

INGCF MAINTPurpose

The MAINT function of the INGCF command is intended to put a coupling facilityinto or take it out of maintenance mode.

After the corresponding XCF command has been processed the command issuesthe INGCF command without any positional parameters.

Restrictions

The function requires:v At least one system in the SA z/OS sysplex must run z/OS 1.9, or later.v The MAINT function must be supported by all SA z/OS applications that are

involved in command processing.

Example

In the following example, a coupling facility is put into maintenance mode usingthe command INGCF M cf_name MODE=ON OUTMODE=LINE:

INGLX901 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 10Domain Id = IPSFP ------ INGCF ENABLE ------- Date = 09/29/08Operator Id = USER1 Time = 13:55:52

Coupling Facility ==> CF02 Status . . . . . . : MAINTMODESysplex . . . . . ==> KEY1PLEX Permission . . . . : ALL- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Structure Condition---------------- -------------------------------------------------------------DBNA_GBP2 Structure is currently allocated in CF01.DBNA_LOCK1 Structure is currently allocated in CF01.HSA_LOG Structure is currently allocated in CF01.IXCPLEX_PATH3 Structure is currently allocated in CF01.IXCPLEX_PATH4 Structure is currently allocated in CF01.JES2CKPT1 Structure is currently allocated in CF01.LOGGER_STR2 Structure is currently allocated in CF01.SYSZWLM_9F092064 Structure is currently allocated in CF01.S941EMHQ Structure is currently allocated in CF01.S941MSGQ Structure is currently allocated in CF01.

Command ===>F1=Help F2=End F3=Return F5=MaintOFF F6=Roll


Figure 39. ENABLE Command Dialog Panel: After Issuing Command "INGCF E cf_name"

INGCF ENABLE


INGCF PATHPurpose

The INGCF PATH function displays the sender paths, that is, the paths from theconnected systems to the specified coupling facility.

Restrictions

The last sender path of each system can only be set to OFFLINE when no morestructures are allocated.

Example


F Sets the sender path OFFLINE.

N Sets the sender path ONLINE.

The fields on the command dialog panel display the following information:v If you have issued INGCF with the PATH parameter, the Coupling Facility field

is an input field. To display the path list of another coupling facility specify thename of the coupling facility in this field and press Enter.

v The Allocated Structures field shows the number of allocated structures.

Sysplex . . . . . . : KEY1PLEXSM process level . : 16MAINTMODE supported : Y

CF Name M Total KB Free KB Free% V Lvl LP Node Descriptor-------- - -------- -------- ----- - --- -- ------------------------------CF01 N 457472 165376 36.15 Y 13 1 002064.116.IBM.02.000000099F09CF02 Y 457472 456960 99.89 Y 13 F 002064.116.IBM.02.000000099F09*** End of Display ***

Figure 40. MAINT Command Output

INGLX903 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 14Domain Id = IPSFN ------- INGCF PATH -------- Date = 06/20/01Operator Id = USER1 Time = 10:28:49

Coupling Facility ==> CF01 Allocated Structures: 37Sysplex . . . . . ==> KEY1PLEX Permission . . . . : ALL- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Cmds: F set OFFLINE / N set ONLINE

System CHPID Physical Logical Type-------- ----- ------------------- ------- ----KEY1 A5 ONLINE ONLINE CFS

A9 ONLINE ONLINE CFSKEY2 A5 ONLINE ONLINE CFS

A9 ONLINE ONLINE CFSKEY3 A5 ONLINE ONLINE CFS

A9 ONLINE ONLINE CFSKEY4 05 ONLINE ONLINE CFSKEY6 A5 ONLINE ONLINE CFS

A9 ONLINE ONLINE CFS


F8=Forward F9=Refresh F12=Retrieve

Figure 41. PATH Command Dialog Panel

INGCF PATH


v The Permission field shows your authorization level.v The System field contains the names of the systems that are connected to the

target coupling facility.v The CHPID field shows the IDs of the sender channel paths.v The Physical field shows the status of the sender channel paths.v The Logical field shows the logical status of the paths to that coupling facility.v The Type field shows the type of the sender channel paths.

INGCF STRUCTUREPurpose

The STRUCTURE function of the INGCF displays the allocated structures of acoupling facility. You can initiate a rebuild or deallocation of a selected structure ifthe conditions for these actions are satisfied.

Example


D Displays detail information about the structure.

*F Forces the deallocation of the structure if it has one of the following conditions:v No connection exists.

v No alternate CF for structure with no active connections.

v No alternate CF for structure with no connections.

When you try to force the deallocation of a structure that can be rebuilt, anerror message is issued.

*P Stops duplexing of the selected structure.

*R Starts the rebuild of the selected structure. Depending on the PENDING status,the automation starts the rebuild with a different LOCATION parameter(PENDING uses the parameter LOCATION=NORMAL, otherwise

INGLX904 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 15Domain ID = IPSFM ----- INGCF STRUCTURE ----- Date = 02/22/02Operator ID = NETOP1 Time = 16:09:04

Coupling Facility ==> CF01Sysplex . . . . . ==> KEY1PLEX Permission . . . . : ALLInclude condition ==> YES (Yes/No - Condition retrieval takes longer)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Cmds: D display details / F force / P stop duplex / R rebuild / S start duplex

Structure P D Condition---------------- - - -------------------------------------------------------DSNA_GBP0 U Duplex rebuild is active.DSNA_GBP32K P UDSNA_LOCK1 S Duplex rebuild is active.DSNA_SCA S System-managed rebuild is supported.ISGLOCKISTGENERIC System-managed rebuild is supported.IXCGRSIXCVLF



Figure 42. STRUCTURE Command Dialog Panel

INGCF PATH


LOCATION=OTHER). A rebuild with the parameter LOCATION=OTHER isonly initiated for structures whose preference list contains more than onecoupling facility.

There are two methods for rebuild, user-managed and system-managedrebuild. User-managed rebuild is supported for all release levels.System-managed rebuild is only available with systems that have been enabledby formatting the CFRM couple data sets with the specification:ITEM NAME(SMREBLD) NUMBER(1)

System-managed rebuild is only performed when the requirements foruser-managed rebuild are not met. This applies, for example, to structureswithout active connectors.

INGCF STRUCTURE accepts a rebuild request for structures with the condition'No active connection exists.,' but deallocates them. See No active connectionexists.

*S Starts duplexing of the selected structure.

There are two methods for duplexing, user-managed and system-managedduplexing. User-managed duplexing is supported for all release levels.System-managed duplexing is only available when it has been enabled byformatting the CFRM couple data sets with the specificationITEM NAME(SMDUPLEX) NUMBER(1)

System-managed duplexing is only performed when the requirements foruser-managed duplexing are not met. This applies, for example, to structureswithout active connectors.

Starting the duplex rebuild of a structure requires at least the policy entryallowing the duplex rebuild of the structure. If there is no entry the duplexrebuild is disabled. The other requirements depend on the type of the duplexrebuild. When all connectors to a structure allow user-managed duplex rebuild,this type takes precedence over system-managed duplex rebuild. However,user-managed rebuild also requires at least one active connector. Thus, whenthe operator starts the duplex rebuild for a structure allowing user-managedduplex rebuild as well as system-managed rebuild but without having activeconnectors, XCF tries to initiate a system-managed duplex rebuild.System-managed duplex rebuild has the following requirements:v System-managed rebuild must be supported by all connectors.v The structure must be allocated in a coupling facility supporting

system-managed duplexing and another coupling facility supportingsystem-managed duplexing must be defined in its preference list.

v The CFRM couple data set must support system-managed duplex rebuildand the structure must not have a policy change pending.

v The structure must be defined in the active CFRM policy when anyconnection state is not active.

The fields on the command dialog panel display the following information:v The Coupling Facility field is an input field, if you have specified INGCF with

the STR parameter. To display the structure list of another coupling facility,specify the name of the coupling facility in this field and press Enter.

v The Include Condition field is an input field. By specifying Yes or No in thisfield you determine whether or not the conditions of the structures are displayedin the Structure column.

INGCF STRUCTURE


v The Permission field shows your authorization level. There are two possiblevalues, ALL and DISPLAY. DISPLAY signifies that you can only use the displayfunctions. ALL signifies that you can also rebuild and delete structures.

v You can specify an action code before every structure entry. The codes you canenter depend on your authorization level.

v The Structure column shows the names of the structures.v If the P column contains the letter P, this indicates that policy changes are

pending for the structure.A structure has policy changes pending if it was allocated at the time of a CFRMpolicy switch, but XES could not bring the switch into effect for that structure.One reason for a pending policy change is that the old and the new policydefine the structure differently, for example, with different preference lists.

v The D column indicates the type of duplexing that is possible. The followingvalues are possible:U User-managed duplexingS System-managed duplexingB User-managed and system-managed duplexing

v The Condition column shows the status of the structures. You can switch thedisplay of the conditions on and off with the Include Condition field.

INGCFGPurpose

The INGCFG command may be used with the CLEAR_HISTORY parameter toclear the workitem history for the given resource(s).

Syntax

►► INGCFG CLEAR_HISTORY, ▼ resource ►◄

Parameters

resourceSpecifies the name of the resources to have workitems cleared. The format isname[/type[/system]]. It can be a list of names. The resource names must beseparated by a blank. Asterisks (*) and a percentage sign (%) can be used aswildcard characters.

INGCFLPurpose

The INGCFL routine supports line mode for INGCF other than display capability.

Support of the maintenance mode of a coupling facility depends on the functionthat is specified:v ACTIVATE, ENABLE, and POPULATE automatically handle the maintenance

mode of the coupling facility. However, each command will fail when thecoupling facility is in maintenance mode but the mode is not supported bySA z/OS (see Restrictions).

INGCF STRUCTURE


|||||||||||||||||

|

|

v DEACTIVATE and DRAIN put the coupling facility into maintenance modewhen possible. Otherwise, both functions proceed with setting the sender pathsoffline after the rebuild has been performed.

v REBUILD does not make use of the maintenance mode capability.

Syntax

►►RESP=SYNC

INGCFL Activate CF_nameDEactivate RESP=ASYNCDRainEnablePopulateRebuild

►

►system

TARGET = domainsysplex

►◄

Parameters

ActivateActivates the coupling facility.

DEactivateDeactivates the coupling facility after performing DRAIN.

DRainPerforms REBUILD, then puts the coupling facility into maintenance mode ifpossible. Otherwise, it sets the sender paths to OFFLINE.

EnablePerforms ACTIVATE, then takes the coupling facility out of maintenance modeif it is in this mode. Finally, it sets the sender paths to ONLINE.

PopulateStarts the populate process of the coupling facility after performing ENABLE.

RebuildStarts the rebuild process of the coupling facility.

CF_nameThe name of the target coupling facility for the specified function.

RESPSpecifies whether the final result is returned synchronously as a return code orasynchronously as a message (default: synchronous response).

TARGETSpecifies the system where the command is executed (default: local system).

Note: The real activation and deactivation of a coupling facility are unavailablewhen running on a z/OS image that runs under z/VM.

Return Codes

0 The command completed normally.

1 An initialization error occurred. Check the netlog for explanatory messages.

INGCFL


3 The slave routine failed. Check the netlog for explanatory messages. If you arestill unable to detect the reason for failure, attempt a rerun after turning ondebugging for the INGRVX92 slave routine.

4 The lock is unavailable to update the coupling facilities.

5 The authorization check failed for function. Check the netlog for explanatorymessages.

6 The status of the coupling facility is not as expected for the current request.Running with GDPS debugging should provide a listing of status changes thathave taken place. This return code does not necessarily indicate that therequest failed.

7 The permission check has failed for the POPULATE request.


The real activation and deactivation of a coupling facility are unavailable whenrunning on a z/OS image that runs under z/VM.

INGCICSPurpose

The INGCICS command lets you:v Issue any console-enabled CICS transaction.v Broadcast messages to all or selected CICS users.v Issue a list of defined transactions and view the output.v Display the output of CICS transactions in fullscreen or pipeable line mode.

Syntax

►► INGCICSresource command_specification

broadcast_specificationinfo_specification

►




►◄

command_specification:

REQ=CMDCMD=cics_transaction MSG=message ID

broadcast_specification:

REQ=BROADCASTMSG=message ROUTE=cics_route_options

INGCFL


info_specification:

REQ=INFO

Parameters

resourceThe resource specifies the name of the CICS subsystem that the command willbe issued to. The format is subsystem[/APL[/system]], where the subsystem isthe specific name of the desired CICS subsystem and system is the name of thesystem that the CICS is running on.

Note: You need not specify the fully qualified name of the resource. However,the command requires enough information to execute the request against aunique CICS subsystem. The command does not support issuing requests tomultiple CICS subsystems at the same time.

REQSpecifies the request to be issued to the CICS subsystem. It can be one of thefollowing:

CMD Issues a CICS transaction and displays the results.

BROADCASTIssues a CICS broadcast to all or selected users.

INFO Issues a set of predefined commands and displays the results. The listof commands is obtained from the CICSINFO user message policy ofthe subsystem specified by the resource name.

CMDSpecifies the CICS transaction and its parameters to be executed for aREQ=CMD type request. If the command and parameters contain spaces,enclose the command in quotation marks (single or double). For CEMTtransactions INGCICS waits up to twice the period that is defined by thesystem wait time parameter for a result.

MSGSpecifies the message to be sent to all or selected CICS terminals or users forthe REQ=BROADCAST request.

For REQ=CMD the MSG command can be used to contain a list of words thatwill be used to end processing if they are received anywhere in the outputresults. The words will normally be a required message ID and when enteredINGCICS waits up to the period that is defined by the system wait timeparameter for a result. If no words are entered, CMD is processed until anyresult is received.

ROUTESpecifies the CICS routing information that is used to select the CICS terminalsor users are to receive the message for a REQ=BROADCAST request. Thecontents of the ROUTE= parameter are the parameters to be supplied to theCMSG transaction to route messages to CICS terminals or users. See the CMSGtransaction for the details of the parameters for that transaction.


INGCICS




To use the INGCICS command system operations must be initialized. CICSsubsystems must be enabled for system console commands using the MVSMODIFY command.

Usage

The INGCICS command operates sysplexwide. For an overview see “Overview ofCommands that Operate Sysplexwide” on page 13.

Examples

If you enter INGCICS REQ=CMD a panel similar to Figure 43 is displayed.

v The Resource field shows the name of the CICS subsystem to be used forissuing the requests. The format is name/type[/system]. Wildcards aresupported.

v The Target field shows the name of the system (system name, domain ID, orsysplex name) that the command should be routed to. Specifying this is onlynecessary if the resources are not part of the local sysplex.

v The Request field shows the request to be carried out. It can be CMD,BROADCAST or INFO.

EVEKYCMD SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 28Domain ID = IPSFM ---------- INGCICS ---------- Date = 03/05/02Operator ID = SAUSER Time = 08:23:31

Resource => EYUMAS1A/APL/KEY1 Format: name/type/systemTarget => System name, domain ID or sysplex nameRequest => CMD CMD, BROADCAST or INFOCICS Transaction => CEMT I TACICS Route =>CICS Message =>

=>

Tas(0000024) Tra(CONL) Sus Tas Pri( 255 )Sta(U ) Use(STCUSER ) Uow(B747C4105BD4E305)Tas(0000026) Tra(COI0) Sus Tas Pri( 255 )Sta(U ) Use(STCUSER ) Uow(B747C413B3F7A908)Tas(0000027) Tra(CONM) Sus Tas Pri( 240 )Sta(U ) Use(STCUSER ) Uow(B747C41430B48804)Tas(0000028) Tra(CONM) Sus Tas Pri( 240 )Sta(U ) Use(STCUSER ) Uow(B747C41430C33084)Tas(0000029) Tra(CONM) Sus Tas Pri( 240 )Sta(U ) Use(STCUSER ) Uow(B747C41430CFD804)Tas(0000030) Tra(CONM) Sus Tas Pri( 240 )Sta(U ) Use(STCUSER ) Uow(B747C41430DB0684)Tas(0000031) Tra(CONM) Sus Tas Pri( 240 )Sta(U ) Use(STCUSER ) Uow(B747C41430E8D844)Tas(0000032) Tra(CONM) Sus Tas Pri( 240 )Sta(U ) Use(STCUSER ) Uow(B747C41430F56504)

Command ===>PF1=Help PF2=End PF3=Return PF4=DISPINFO PF6=Roll


Figure 43. INGCICS REQ=CMD Command Dialog Panel

INGCICS


v The CICS Transaction field shows the CICS transaction to be executed on theCICS subsystem specified by the resource field.

v The CICS Route field shows the routing parameters for the CMSG transactionwhen the request is BROADCAST.

v The CICS Message field shows the message to be sent to users or terminals forthe BROADCAST request.

v The output from the CICS transaction appears in the blank area after the CICSMessage field.

If you specify INGCICS REQ=BROADCAST a panel similar to Figure 44 is displayed.

The CICS command that is issued is displayed in the CICS Transaction field. The&ROUTE and &MESSAGE parameters are resolved to the corresponding panelfields. Do not overwrite the command that is displayed because changes are nothonored.

If you specify INGCICS REQ=INFO a panel similar to Figure 45 on page 121 isdisplayed.


Resource => EYUMAS1A/APL/KEY1 Format: name/type/systemTarget => System name, domain ID or sysplex nameRequest => BROADCAST CMD, BROADCAST or INFOCICS Transaction => CMSG R=&ROUTE,’&MESSAGE’,SCICS Route => ALLCICS Message => test1

=>



Figure 44. INGCICS REQ=BROADCAST Command Dialog Panel

INGCICS


INGDB2Purpose

The INGDB2 utility lets you:v Start or stop a table spacev Terminate active threadsv Inform TSO users that their thread is about to be terminatedv Check for indoubt threads

Syntax

►► INGDB2 TABLE subsystemTERM parmCHECK_INDOUBTINFORM_TSO

►



►◄

Parameters

TABLEThe TABLE parameter requests to start or stop a table space.


Resource => EYUMAS1A/APL/KEY1 Format: name/type/systemSystem => System name, domain ID or sysplex nameRequest => INFO CMD, BROADCAST or INFOCICS Transaction =>CICS Route =>CICS Message =>

=>

SYSTEM INFORMATION

Aging( 00500 )Akp( 04000 )Cdsasize(00786432)Cicstslevel(010200)Cmdprotect(Cmdprot)Db2conn(SG12)Dfltuser(STCUSER)Dsalimit( 05242880 )Dtrprogram( DFHDYP )Dumping( Nosysdump )Ecdsasize(0006291456)Edsalimit( 0041943040 )Erdsasize(0013631488)Esdsasize(0000000000)



Figure 45. INGCICS REQ=INFO Command Dialog Panel

INGDB2


For DB2® table space stop, certain active threads that use the specified tablespace are terminated. These include REMOVE, DB2CALL, BATCH and TSO.TSO users are issued with a message informing them that their thread is aboutto be terminated before actual thread termination.

TERMThe TERM parameter requests the termination of all active threads for a DB2subsystem. These include REMOTE, DB2CALL, BATCH, TSO and allremaining threads.

All threads are discovered using the DIS THD() command and canceled bytoken using CAN THD(tokenid). UTILITY threads are treated differently: afterhaving been discovered using DIS UTIL() and checked not to be COPY,REORG, REPAIR or LOAD, they are terminated using the TERM UTIL()command. UTILITY threads are ignored during the cancel-threads-by-tokenprocess.

TSO users that are using threads that cannot be stopped are canceled.

CHECK_INDOUBTThis parameter requests a check for indoubt threads.

INFORM_TSOWith this parameter, TSO users with an active stoppable thread are informedthat their thread is about to be terminated.

subsystemSpecifies the subsystem name of the DB2 subsystem.

parmSpecifies a positional parameter string.

When INGDB2 is called with TABLE as the first parameter, one or three valuesare expected at this position in the parameter sequence, as follows:parm1 START or STOP to start or stop a table space.parm2 A database name. This is not required if parm1 is START.parm3 A table space name. This is not required if parm1 is START.

When all three parameters are passed to INGDB2, the START or STOP requestapplies to the specified table space.

If only START is passed to INGDB2, a start command is issued for all tablespaces that are currently in the status LPL or GRECP. Table spaces of databaseDSNDB01 are started before those of database DSNDB06. After this, the tablespaces of all other databases are started.

When requesting a STOP for a specified tablespace, the following processingcycles are done:1. The command STO DB(dbname) SPACENAM(tsname) is issued.

If the specified table space is then still used by any DDF threads or BATCHjobs, these processes are canceled.TSO users of threads still using the table space are notified that the tablespace is to be stopped and they are requested to stop using it.

2. If the table space is still used by TSO users, these users are canceled. Afterone minute, a message is send to the cancelled users to inform them atlogon, that they were canceled due to the stop of a tablespace.

3. If the table space is still used by any processes, a message is issued listingthe name and type of all these processes.

INGDB2


The delay time between the processing cycles is determined by the STOPTablespace Delay option in the DB2 CONTROL policy item of the DB2 master.The default value is 2 minutes.

TARGETFor information on the target parameter, see “The TARGET Parameter” in IBMTivoli System Automation for z/OS Operator's Commands.

Version

When you specify INGDB2 TABLE,&SUBSAPPL,START [dbname tsname] as acommand in the automation policy that is to be issued in response to a receivedmessage, code definitions for message ID DATABASE are used to decide whetherany databases or table spaces are excluded from recovery.

To exclude databases or table spaces from recovery, specify a code definition asfollows with IGNORE or EXCLUDE as the Value Returned.

Code1 Code2 Code3 Value Returned

database tablespace IGNORE|EXCLUDE


The INGDB2 utility can only be used when:v SA z/OS is initializedv The DB2 subsystem is defined to SA z/OS as application of category DB2 and

subcategory MSTRv The status of the DB2 subsystem is UP, but for TERM and INFORM_TSO the

status can be AUTOTERM to allow for SHUTNORM passes.

For non-utility threads, only those with a non-zero token can be canceled withINGDB2 TERM.

Return Codes

0 Function completed successfully

1 Indoubt threads were found when being called with the CHECK_INDOUBTparameter

Note: When your INGDB2 CHECK_INDOUBT command is part of your DB2shutdown commands in the policy and you have return code checking enabled(specified '*' in the AutoFn field), System Automation does not issue any othershutdown commands. The Automation Status of the DB2 is set to PROBLEM.Manual intervention is required.

4 Incorrect parameters were used in the call

5 Timeout or other error occurred (for example, the DB2 subsystem is not UP).

6 SA z/OS initialization incomplete, unable to process command request

Examples

To terminate threads for a DB2 subsystem called DB2P, enter the followingcommand:INGDB2 TERM DB2P

INGDB2


||

|||||

||

To start a table space where the DB2 subsystem is DB2P, the database name isDB2PDBN and the table space name is DB2PTSN, enter the following command:INGDB2 TABLE DB2P START DB2PDBN DB2PTSN

INGDLAPurpose

The INGDLA command invokes the SA z/OS Discovery Library Adapter todiscover SA z/OS configuration data, which is primarily the SA z/OS resourcesand their relationships. It then saves the data in an Identity Markup Language(IdML) book, which can be forwarded to a system that is hosting a TivoliApplication Discovery Dependency Manager (TADDM).

The discovery scope of the INGDLA command is the entire sysplex, that is, all thesystems that the SA z/OS automation manager controls.

You can use the INGDLA command, for example, after a major configurationchange, or periodically driven by a NetView timer.

Syntax

►► INGDLACODEPAGE=1047

CODEPAGE=nnnn ODSN=dsname

MEMBER=INGBOOK

MEMBER=name►

►ORGNAME=orgname ENCODING=nnnn HOSTNAME=name WAIT=nnn

►

►CHECKSUM=YES

CHECKSUM=NO CONTACTINFO=data►◄

Parameters

CODEPAGESpecifies the encoding codepage — this is the one that NetView uses. Thedefault is 1047, unless it is overwritten by the installation defaults (usingthe INGCNTL command, see IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OSProgrammer's Reference).

You must specify this parameter if you are running with a differentcodepage. Failure to do so will result in the generation and downloadingof a corrupt Identity Markup Language (IdML) book that TivoliApplication Discovery Dependency Manager (TADDM) cannot load.

ODSNSpecifies the name of the output data set. The data set must be apre-allocated (catalogued) PDS with attribute VB=3000. The name must befully qualified, with or without surrounding quotes. The user ID thatNetView is running under must have UPDATE access to it. With theINGCNTL command, this parameter can be preset (see INGCNTL in IBMTivoli System Automation for z/OS Programmer's Reference).

MEMBERSpecifies the name of the member that will contain the IdML data. The

INGDB2


||||||

default is INGBOOK unless it is overwritten with installation defaults (seeINGCNTL in IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS Programmer's Reference).

Reserved member name is @CHCKSUM.

ORGNAMESpecifies the name of the organization. The default is to take the defaultname from the IBM Tivoli Change and Configuration ManagementDatabase (CCMDB) unless it is overwritten by the installation defaults (seeINGCNTL in IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS Programmer's Reference).

Place quotes around the organization name in order to maintain mixedcase names.

ENCODINGSpecifies the encoding option. Valid values are EBCDIC, ASCII and UTF-8.The default is UTF-8 unless overwritten by the installation defaults (seeINGCNTL in IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS Programmer's Reference).

HOSTNAMESpecifies the name of the host of the management software system (that is,SA z/OS). It is used to address SA z/OS. If specified, it takes precedenceover a discovered host name.

WAIT Specifies the maximum number of seconds to wait for the automationmanager query to respond. The maximum time interval is 999 seconds. Thedefault is 30 seconds.

CHECKSUMSpecifies whether to skip generating the SA z/OS DLA book if thechecksum matches:

YESSkip generation if the checksum matches. This is the default.

NO Ignore checksum results.

CONTACTINFOProvides details of ports and security keys that are needed to establish asession with NetView over TCP/IP when used in conjunction with the hostname.

Return Codes

0 Successful completion.

8 Error occurred, such as a bad return code received from the automationmanager.

12 Bad input parameters or allocation failed.

16 Fatal error.

Usage

The INGDLA command can be invoked from the NetView command line on anysystem in the sysplex.

The INGDLA command operates sysplexwide. For an overview see “Overview ofCommands that Operate Sysplexwide” on page 13.

INGDLA


Examples

If you enter ingdla at the command line, SA z/OS displays a report that informsyou of the progress of the DLA.

INGEVENTPurpose

The INGEVENT command sets or resets a particular event for all affectedresources in a sysplex, or for specific resources.

Syntax

►► INGEVENT eventRESOURCE=*/*/*

REQ= SETRESET|UNSET RESOURCE=resource

►



WAIT=YES

WAIT=NOWAIT=nnn

►◄

Parameters

eventSpecifies the name of the event.

REQSpecifies the request to be performed. It can have the following values:

SETSets the event for all resources having the event defined.

ING502I SA z/OS Discovery Library Adapter started 14:18:05 29 NOV 2007ING501I DRIVING SA Z/OS DISCOVERYING501I .QUERYING RESOURCESING501I .QUERYING RELATIONSHIP DATAING501I ..FOR RESOURCES */APL/SAT1ING501I ..FOR RESOURCES */APL/SAT2ING501I ..FOR RESOURCES */APL/SAT3ING501I ..FOR RESOURCES */APL/SAT4ING501I ..FOR RESOURCES */APG/SAT1ING501I ..FOR RESOURCES */APG/SAT2ING501I ..FOR RESOURCES */APG/SAT3ING501I ..FOR RESOURCES */APG/SAT4ING501I ..FOR RESOURCES */APGING501I ..FOR RESOURCES */MTR/*ING501I .OBTAINING AGENT INFORMATION FOR SAT1ING501I PROCESSING CHECKSUMSING501I COMPOSING SA Z/OS DISCOVERY BOOKING501I .WRITING BOOK: INGBOOKING501I ..COMPOSING RESOURCE DEFINITIONSING501I ..COMPOSING RESOURCE RELATIONSHIPSING501I ..COMPOSING DELAYED RELATIONSHIPSING501I .FINISHED WRITING BOOK: INGBOOKING501I UPDATING CHECKSUM DATAING504I Checksum data updatedING503I SA z/OS Discovery Library Adapter completed 14:18:17 29 NOV 2007, RC=0

Figure 46. SA z/OS Discovery Library Adapter Report

INGDLA


RESET|UNSETResets or unsets the event for all resources having the event defined.

Note that RESET and UNSET are synonyms.

RESOURCESpecifies the name of the resource where INGEVENT should be effective. It canbe abbreviated to RES. The format is name/type[/system]





Wildcards are not supported.

Usage

The INGEVENT command operates sysplexwide. For an overview see “Overviewof Commands that Operate Sysplexwide” on page 13.

Examples

To set an event for all resources that are linked to that event, type the following:INGEVENT B000P100 REQ=SET

The command response is as follows:IPUFA AOF442I SET EVENT B000P100 DONE FOR RESOURCE */*/* ON AOCPLEX. -

FROM=AOCAIPUFA AOF099I FUNCTION COMPLETED

INGFILTPurpose

The INGFILT command restricts the amount of information shown in the display.Use INGFILT to set a default filter for the operator's logon. If an asterisk (*) isspecified, the filter is reset.

Syntax

►►NETVASIS

INGFILTREQ=SET

REQ=GET►

INGEVENT


► filter_criteriaOUTMODE= LINE

AUTONETLOG

►◄

filter_criteria:

▼

RESOURCE= *

( resource_name )

►

►

▼

OBSERVED= *

( status )^\

►

►

▼

DESIRED= *

( status )^\

►

►

▼

AUTOSTAT= *

( status )^\

►

►

▼

COMPOUND= *

( status )^\

AUTOFLAG= YESNO*

►

INGFILT


►

▼

CATEGORY= *

( CICS )DB2IMSIMAGEINFOSPHEREITMJES2JES3LIFELINEMQOPCTCPIPUSS

►

►

▼

SUBCAT= *

( subcategory )

►

►

▼

GROUPTYPE= *

( grouptype )

DESCR= *text

►

►

▼

HEALTH= *

( status )^\

►

►

▼

JOBNAME= *

( jobname )

►

►

▼

RUNTOKEN= *

( runtoken )

►

►

▼

PGNAME= *

( pgname )

INGFILT


|||||

Parameters

NETVASISPrefix the INGFILT command with NETVASIS if you want to pass thedescription text in lower or mixed case.

REQSpecifies the type of the request. The type can be:

SETSets new filter settings. This is the default. If no filter parameter isspecified when the command is invoked, the appropriate value of thecurrent filter settings is taken.

GETReturns the current filter settings. Any filter parameter that is specifiedwhen the command is invoked will be added to the current filter settings.

filter_criteriaThe filter criteria to be applied prior to displaying the data.

RESOURCESpecifies the names of the resources to be displayed. The format isname/type[/system]. The resource names must be separated by a blank.Asterisks (*) can be used as wildcard characters.

OBSERVEDSpecifies the observed statuses to be displayed. The statuses must beseparated by a blank. It can be abbreviated, for example, to AV foravailable. You can also specify an asterisk (*) to reset the current filtersetting, for example, INGFILT OBSERVED=*.

If '^' or '\' is used, all statuses except the ones you specify are displayed.Here is a list of possible Observed Status values and their shortest possibleabbreviations: AVAILABLE (A), UNKNOWN (U), SYSGONE (SY),SOFTDOWN (SO), HARDDOWN (H), STARTING (STAR), DEGRADED(D), STOPPING (STO), PROBLEM (P), WASAVAILABLE (W), andSTANDBY (STAN).

DESIREDSpecifies the desired statuses to be displayed. The statuses must beseparated by a blank. It can be abbreviated, for example, to AV foravailable. You can also specify an asterisk (*) to reset the current filtersetting, for example, INGFILT DESIRED=*.

If '^' or '\' is used, all statuses except the ones you specify are displayed.Here is a list of possible Desired Status values and their shortest possibleabbreviations: AVAILABLE (A), UNAVAILABLE (U), and UNKNOWN(UNK).

AUTOSTATSpecifies the automation status to be displayed. The statuses must beseparated by a blank. It can be abbreviated, for example, to ID for idle. Youcan also specify an asterisk (*) to reset the current filter setting, forexample, INGFILT AUTOSTAT=*.

If '^' or '\' is used, all statuses except the ones you specify are displayed.Here is a list of possible Autostat Status values and their shortest possibleabbreviations: UNKNOWN (U), IDLE (ID), ORDERED (O), BUSY (B),DENIED (D), PROBLEM (P), and INTERNAL (IN).

INGFILT


COMPOUNDSpecifies the compound status. The statuses must be separated by a blank.It can be abbreviated, for example, to SA for satisfactory. You can alsospecify an asterisk (*) to reset the current filter setting, for example,INGFILT COMPOUND=*.

If '^' or '\' is used, all statuses except the ones you specify are displayed.Here is a list of possible Compound Status values and their shortestpossible abbreviations: PROBLEM (P), DENIED (DEN), INHIBITED (INH),AWAITING (AW), INAUTO (INA), DEGRADED (DEG), andSATISFACTORY (S).

AUTOFLAGSpecifies the automation flag to be displayed. It can be either YES or NO,and can be abbreviated. You can also specify an asterisk (*) to reset thecurrent filter setting, for example, INGFILT AUTOFLAG=*.

CATEGORYSpecifies the IBM-defined or user-defined categories that the resourcebelongs to. More than one value can be specified. If an asterisk (*) isspecified, the filter is reset (the filter previously set by the INGFILTcommand).

SUBCATSpecifies the IBM-defined or user-defined subcategories of the resource.More than one value can be specified. The subcategory can containwildcard characters. An asterisk (*) matches a string of arbitrary length anda percentage sign (%) matches a single character. If an asterisk (*) isspecified, the filter is reset (the filter previously set by the INGFILTcommand). For compatibility reasons keyword SUBTYPE is still accepted.

GROUPTYPESpecifies the type (nature) of the resource group. More than one value canbe specified. You can also specify an asterisk (*) to reset the current filtersetting, for example, INGFILT GROUPTYPE=*.

DESCRSpecifies the text string as a filter. The text can contain wildcards. Anasterisk (*) matches a string of arbitrary length and a percentage sign (%)matches a single character. You can also specify an asterisk (*) to reset thecurrent filter setting. The DESCR parameter is case-sensitive. The textstring must be enclosed in single or double quotation marks orparentheses() to maintain the case-sensitivity of the entry.

HEALTHSpecifies the desired health statuses to be displayed. The statuses must beseparated by a blank. It can be abbreviated, for example, to NO for normal.You can also specify an asterisk (*) to reset the current filter setting, forexample, INGFILT HEALTH=*.

If '^' or '\' is used, all statuses except the ones you specify are displayed.Here is a list of possible Health Status values and their shortest possibleabbreviations: SYSGONE (S), UNKNOWN (U), NORMAL (N), WARNING(W), MINOR (M), CRITICAL (C), and FATAL (F).

JOBNAMEThe jobname assigned to the resource. More than one jobname can bespecified. Wildcards are supported. You can also specify an asterisk (*) toreset the current filter setting.

INGFILT


|||||

|||||||

RUNTOKENThe runtoken assigned to the resource. More than one runtoken can bespecified. Wildcards are supported. You can also specify an asterisk (*) toreset the current filter setting.

PGNAMEThe pacing gate assigned to the resource. More than one pacing gate canbe specified. Wildcards are supported. You can also specify an asterisk (*)to reset the current filter setting.



None.

Usage

The INGFILT command can also be used when SA z/OS is not initialized.

The INGFILT command lets you set filter options at operator logon from withinthe operator's initial REXX script.

Examples

If you enter ingfilt a panel similar to Figure 47 is displayed.

This panel shows the current INGLIST filters. The filter settings are kept in taskglobals, so when you next run INGLIST they will be used again. Press PF9 to savethe currently displayed filters into these globals.

INGKYFLT SA z/OS - Command DialogsDomain ID = IPUFA ---------- INGFILT ---------- Date = 12/13/11Operator ID = NETOP1 Time = 16:35:20

Resources... format: name/type/system or *am*/*/**

Observed status ==> *Desired status ==> *Automation status ==> *Compound status ==> *Health status ==> *Automation flag ==> Yes or NoCategory ==> *Subcategory ==> *Group type ==> *Job name(s) ==> *Description ==> *RunToken(s) ==> *Pacing gate(s) ==> *


PF9=Save PF12=Retrieve

Figure 47. INGFILT Command Dialog Panel

INGFILT


||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||

||||

You can specify one or more of the following filters:

ResourcesThis is the list of resources in name/type/system format. You can alsospecify a wildcard.

Observed statusThis is the list of observed statuses. You can abbreviate the status, forexample, to AV for available. Any resources whose observed status is inthe list is eligible for the display.

Desired statusThis is the list of desired statuses. You can abbreviate the status. Anyresources whose desired status is in the list is eligible for the display.

Automation statusThis is the list of automation statuses. You can abbreviate the status. Anyresource whose automation status is in the list is eligible for the display.

Compound statusThis is the list of compound statuses. You can abbreviate the status. Anyresources whose compound status is in the list is eligible for the display.

Health statusThis is the list of health statuses. You can abbreviate the status. Anyresource whose health status is in the list is eligible for the display.

Automation flagThis is the automation flag for the resource. Specify either YES or NO.

CategoryThis is the list of IBM-defined or user-defined categories that the resourcebelongs to. IBM defined-categories are for example CICS, IMS, DB2, OPC,USS, IMAGE, JES2, JES3, INFOSPHERE, LIFELINE, MQ or ITM.

SubcategoryThis is the list of IBM-defined or user-defined subcategories that theresource belongs to.

For IBM-defined categories the following values might be used:v CICS: AOR TOR FOR DOR QOR CMAS WUIv DB2: MSTR SPAS IRLM DBM1 DIST WLMS ADMTv IMS: CTL TP DBRC DLS FP BMP FDRv ITM: TEMA, TEMSv LIFELINE: ADVISOR AGENTv OPC: CONTROLLER TRACKER SERVER DATASERVER

Group typeThis is the type (nature) of the resource group. You can specify more thanone group type.

Job NameThe job name assigned to the resource. You can specify more than one jobname. Wildcards are supported.

DescriptionThe description of the resource. Wildcards are supported.

Runtoken(s)The runtoken assigned to the resource. You can specify more than oneruntoken. Wildcards are supported.

INGFILT


||||

|||

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

Pacing gate(s)The pacing gate assigned to the resource. You can specify more than onepacing gate. Wildcards are supported.

In order to be eligible for the display, a resource must match all filter criteria. Anasterisk indicates that the filter has not been set.

Use the PF4 key to clear the currently established filter settings. The filter willcontain an asterisk, meaning that the filter not set, or a blank.

Use the PF5 key to go back to the currently established filter settings.

Note: If INGFILT was called from INGLIST, the filters that are displayed takeeffect when you press Enter. If you press PF9 first, the filters will be saved.

INGGROUPPurpose

The INGGROUP command displays the members of a group and their settings.INGGROUP can also be used to:v Move an application from one system to another by terminating the application

and starting it on a system of your choice.v Activate or deactivate a group.v Adjust the availability or satisfactory target (server group only).v Initiate or cancel the rolling recycle of a group.

Syntax

►► INGGROUP ▼ group_nameWAIT=YES

ACTION optionsWAIT=NOWAIT=nnn

►




►◄

ACTION options:

INGFILT


|||

▼

▼

▼

ACTION= EXCLUDE SYSTEMS=( sysname )AVOIDINCLUDE

ACTION= ACTIVATEPACIFY

ACTION=MEMBERSACTION=POLICY

GROUPTYPE=( grouptype )ACTION=OVERRIDES

GROUPTYPE=( grouptype )ACTION=RESETACTION=DEFAULTACTION=RECYCLE

CHUNK=nnnACTION=CANCELACTION=ADJUST ADJUST options

ADJUST options:

AVTGT=adjustment SATTGT=adjustment►

►

▼ ▼MEMBERS=( member_n ) PREF=( pref_n )

Parameters

group_nameThis is a list of application groups, possibly including wildcards, that are to bethe target of the command.v For an ADJUST action, specify only a single application group.v For an AVOID/INCLUDE/EXCLUDE action, you may specify several

application groups.v For an ACTIVATE/PACIFY action, you may specify several application

groups.v For a MEMBERS action, you may specify only a single application group.v For the RECYCLE/CANCEL action, you may specify several application

groups.

ACTIONIndicates that you want to remove movable members from a system(EXCLUDE), prohibit the manager from activating movable members on asystem (AVOID) or that you want to undo either of the other two actions(INCLUDE).

EXCLUDERemoves resources immediately from the excluded systems. This actsto disruptively force resources from a system.

INGGROUP


AVOIDNo new resources will be moved to the system and those that are therewill be removed as scheduled service outages permit. This would beused to gradually (and non-disruptively) remove resources from asystem in preparation for an Exclude at a later point in time (mainly toreduce the disruption caused by the Exclude). However, note that ifthere is no other way to maintain or restore application availability,groups will choose to ignore avoidance policies.

For instance, when a group goes in recovery mode due to the failure ofan active member, another member is started even when its system isin the avoided list. However, when all systems are avoided and agroup is stopped and restarted, the group is put in the compoundstatus of AWAITING and no member is started.

INCLUDEThe movement of resources to the system depends on the relativepreferences of the resources on that system and on other systems. It ispossible that the resources will not be moved to that system until thenext scheduled service outage.

ACTIVATEChanges the behavior of a group to active. If used on group that isalready active, there is no effect. When a group becomes active, it willdistribute votes to all of its non-passive members reflecting its natureand goals. Making a group active may cause some of its members tobe stopped or started.

PACIFYChanges the behavior of a group to passive. If used on group that isalready passive, there is no effect. When a group becomes passive, itwithdraws all votes that it has propagated to its members. Making agroup passive may cause some of its members to either start or stop,depending upon the votes that it had propagated.

MEMBERSDisplays the group members and their settings.

POLICYDisplays the policies for the specified resource groups.

OVERRIDESDisplays the overrides for the specified resource groups that have beenmade with the INGGROUP command.

RESETSets the preference assigned to the members of the application groupto its initial value. Applies only to MOVE and SERVER groups.

DEFAULTSets the following group policies to the values that are defined in thepolicy database:v Availability and satisfactory targetv Preference value of group membersv Group passive attribute

RECYCLECauses a rolling recycle to be initiated for each selected server or movegroup.

INGGROUP


Note: If you specify more than one group and any of them havecommon members, only one of the groups can be involved in acomplete rolling recycle. The other groups are flagged as beinginvolved in a partial recycle, that is, some of their members (possiblyall of them) are being or have been recycled.

Specify CHUNK to indicate the number of server group members torecycle in parallel. Refer to CHUNK for further details.If the systems ina Server group all have the same preference value, the system that isactive after a rolling recycle has completed may not be the same one asbefore the rolling recycle. Thus, triggering a rolling recycle alwaysresults in a move occurring. If you set the preference of the originalsystem more than 250 points higher than that of any other system, therolling recycle is followed by a second move to return the applicationto that system. This leads to an increase in the application down time.

Note: Preference values do not influence the order in which resourcesare recycled. The resources of the group are recycled from last to firstas they are displayed in the list of group members.

CANCELCauses any rolling recycles amongst the selected groups to be canceled.

ADJUSTIndicates that you want to temporarily adjust a group's policy.

SYSTEMSIs the list of systems to be excluded or included. If no groups are specified, allapplication groups with resources in these systems are affected.

This parameter must be specified for INCLUDE, AVOID, and EXCLUDEactions.

GROUPTYPESpecifies the type (nature) of the resource group. More than one value can bespecified.

CHUNKIndicates the number of SERVER group members to recycle in parallel.

Note: SA z/OS adjusts the chunk size to ensure that at least one groupmember is active at any time to avoid an application outage. This is the casewhen the chunk size is greater or equal to the number of active groupmembers. However, the chunk size is only adjusted when it is possible in ameaningful way. For instance, when CHUNK=1 is specified and there is onlyone active SERVER group member, there is no possible adjustment and thislast member will be recycled.

AVTGTSpecifies the availability target that is to be set for the group. The value, n, is apositive number. It specifies the number of group members that should bemade available when the group has to be available.

You can also specify *, which resets the AVTGT parameter to the value that isspecified in the policy database.

This parameter may only be specified for an ADJUST action.

For details of how the AVTGT changes apply, see SATTGT below.

SATTGTSpecifies the number of members in the group that must be active before the

INGGROUP


|

automation manager treats the group as being in a satisfactory state. The valuemust be a positive, decimal number. The parameter will be ignored for groupsother than server groups.

You can also specify *, which resets the SATTGT parameter to the valuespecified in the policy database.

This parameter may only be specified for the ADJUST action.

Changes to target values, as set by the AVTGT and SATTGT parameters, applyin the following manner:v The Availability and Satisfactory Target values in the automation policy are

not affected.v An adjustment value is calculated that, when applied to the corresponding

target value in the automation policy, produces the "result" value. (See alsothe Application Group Resources Policy in IBM Tivoli System Automation forz/OS Defining Automation Policy).

v The "result" target value is then used by the automation when a target valueis required.

v The adjustment value, rather than the "result" value, is preserved whenperforming an automation manager HOT restart or an INGAMS REFRESH ifthe target is defined as *ALL in the automation policy. Alternatively, if thetarget value is explicitly defined to be numerically equal to the "Number ofselected Resources" in the automation policy, the "result" value is preservedrather than the adjustment.

MEMBERSSpecifies a list of group members that the preference value should be set for.Wildcards may not be used.

This parameter may only be specified on an ADJUST action.

PREFSpecifies a preference value that is to be used for each specified member. Thenumber of values specified should be the same as the number of membersspecified. Each preference is an integer value that replaces the member'scurrent preference value. You can also specify *, which resets the PREFparameter to the value that is specified in the policy database.

Preference values are used to determine which members in the group areselected to make the group active.

This parameter may only be specified on an ADJUST action when a list ofmembers has been specified.

Changes to preference values, as set by the PREF parameter, apply in thefollowing manner:v The preference value in the automation policy is not affected.v An adjustment value is calculated that, when applied to the preference value

in the automation policy, produces the "result" value.v The "result" preference value is then used by the automation when a

preference value is required.v The adjustment value, rather than the "result" value, is preserved when

performing an automation manager HOT restart or an INGAMS REFRESH,but is lost during WARM and COLD restarts.If an adjustment was made via the INGGROUP or INGMOVE commandand to the base preference via the customization dialogs, the current

INGGROUP


||

||

||||

||

||||||

effective preference and the new base preference will be taken to calculate anew adjusted preference. As a result, the old effective preference will bepreserved.






None.


The INGGROUP command supports resource level security. If turned on, thefollowing profiles in class SYSAUTO are checked:



UPDATE When action option isRECYCLE, CANCEL, RESET,DEFAULT, EXCLUDE,AVOID, or INCLUDE

CONTROL When action option isACTIVATE, PACIFY, orADJUST

Usage other than listed in the table does not cause a resource level security check.If multiple resources are affected, multiple resources are checked. The request iscarried out or rejected as a whole.

For further details, refer to IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS Planning andInstallation.

Usage

The INGGROUP command operates sysplexwide. For an overview, see “Overviewof Commands that Operate Sysplexwide” on page 13.

Automation policy overrides that have been entered using the INGGROUPcommand are preserved when performing an automation manager HOT restartand an INGAMS REFRESH, but are lost during WARM and COLD restarts.

Examples

If you enter inggroup a panel similar to Figure 48 on page 140 is displayed.

INGGROUP


|

||

||||

|||||||

|||||

|||

||

This panel allows you to change the policy of application groups. You may specify:v The target sysplex for the command with the Target field. If omitted, this

defaults to the local system or sysplex. Specify the system name only whenviewing or changing the policy of an application group that is not part of thelocal sysplex.

v The policy change that you want to make with the Action field. The policyoptions are explained below.

v Next, you must specify in the Group(s) field either the name of the target groupor a set of templates that will match one or more groups. All policy items workwith a list of group name templates, and apply to all Move and Server groupsthat match those names. Although applying a policy to a basic group is not anerror, it will not achieve anything either.

Note: A group name of xxxx will be automatically expanded into xxxx/APG/*,except for ADJUST and MEMBERS actions.

v For the Exclude, Avoid, and Include policy items, you can specify a list names ofsystems that the policy is to be set for. Specify a question mark (?) to see the listof systems within the sysplex.

See the online help for details about the policy items that you can change.

After entering the appropriate information in the fields for the policy item that youwant to change, press PF10 or Enter to make your changes active and proceed withthe action.

You can press PF4 to display the members detail panel (Figure 50 on page 141),where you can fine-tune the group by changing the preferences of its individualmembers. If you do not specify a group on the main INGGROUP panel, a selectionpanel (Figure 49 on page 141) displays all the groups that are currently available,with the message Multiple instances found for */APG. Select one application

INGKYGRA SA z/OS - Command DialogsDomain ID = IPUFA ---------- INGGROUP ---------- Date = 09/17/08Operator ID = NETOP1 Sysplex = AOCAPLEX Time = 14:52:51



Action => EXCLUDE-AVOID-INCLUDE or ACTIVATE-PACIFY orADJUST or RESET DEFAULT or OVERRIDES, POLICY orRECYCLE-CANCEL

Opt.Parms =>

Group(s) =>

System(s) =>

Command ===>PF1=Help PF2=End PF3=Return PF4=Members PF6=Roll

PF10=GO PF12=Retrieve

Figure 48. INGGROUP Command Dialog Panel

INGGROUP


||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||

group and press Enter.

The members detail panel, as shown in Figure 50, allows you to change thepreference policy values for the members of Move and Server groups.

On this panel you can change the values in the Result field to change theavailability target for that server group. Also, in the Result column you can changethe preference value for that member. The effective preference value is shown inthe Eff column. (Preference value changes are also possible for Server groups).

Changes to preference values for members, as set with the Result field areimplemented in the following manner:1. The preference value in the automation policy is not affected.

AOFKSEL4 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 160Domain ID = IPUFA ---------- INGGROUP ---------- Date = 10/27/09Operator ID = NETOP1 Time = 15:54:24

Multiple instances found for */APGSelect one item to be processed, then press ENTER.


AMAPG APG APG for Automation ManagersBASE_APPL APG AOCA Base z/OS ApplicationsBASE_APPL APG AOCB Base z/OS ApplicationsBASE_APPL APG AOCC Base z/OS ApplicationsBASE_APPL APG AOCD Base z/OS ApplicationsBASE_SUPP APG AOCA Base z/OS Support FunctionsBASE_SUPP APG AOCB Base z/OS Support FunctionsBASE_SUPP APG AOCC Base z/OS Support FunctionsBASE_SUPP APG AOCD Base z/OS Support FunctionsBASE_SYS APG AOCA Base z/OS ComponentsBASE_SYS APG AOCB Base z/OS Components

Command ===>PF1=Help PF2=End PF3=ReturnPF6=Roll PF8=Forward PF12=Retrieve

Figure 49. INGGROUP Command Dialog Selection Panel

INGKYGRB SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 3Domain ID = IPUFA ---------- INGGROUP ---------- Date = 09/17/08Operator ID = NETOP1 Time = 16:06:05

Group: MOVPLEX1/APG Nature: Move Passive: NODescription: Sysplex move group KEY1/SAT1/TSA1 pref.Excluded :Avoided :Mode : Normal Availability Target: 1 Adjust: 0 Result=> 1Move Mode: Parallel Satisfactory Target=> 1 Adjust: 0Rolling Recycle: COMPLETE

Name Type System Pref Adj Result Avl Eff Stat Act----------- ---- -------- ---- ----- ------ ---- ---- ---- ----MOVPLEX1 APL SAT1 700 0 700 Yes 950 Sel --MOVPLEX1 APL SAT2 700 0 700 No 700 Uns --MOVPLEX1 APL SAT3 700 0 700 No 700 Uns --


PF9=Refresh PF10=GO PF11=Reset PF12=Retrieve

Figure 50. INGGROUP Command Dialog Panel Showing Members' Detail

INGGROUP


2. An adjustment value is calculated, which produces the Result value, when itwas applied to the preference value in the automation policy.

3. The Result preference value is used by the automation when a preference valueis required.

4. The adjustment value, not the Result, is preserved across automation managerHOT restart and across INGAMS REFRESH, but is lost during WARM andCOLD restarts.

To make your changes active, press PF10. To reset the initial settings, press PF11.

The action taken after PF10 is pressed may differ from the assumed or proposedaction displayed in the action column of panel INGKYGRB. This is because theassumed or proposed action is calculated by processing the group's resources inalphanumeric sequence, while the actual action performed is calculated by theautomation manager that processes the group's resources in a random sequence.

For further details about this panel and how to use it, and sample preferencescenarios, see the online help.

Note: The avoid, exclude, and include parameters are only applied to the membersof the group. They are not propagated further when the member is also a group.

To remove subsystems from the list of members that can be used, enter thefollowing:INGGROUP group1 TSO/APG ACTION=EXCLUDE

INGHISTPurpose

The INGHIST command shows history information about the work item processedby the automation manager. It also lets you display messages that the managerissues to the system logger.

Syntax

►► INGHISTREQ=HISTORY

RESOURCE=resourcenameREQ=LOG

►

►START=timestamp END=timestamp MAX=nnnnn WIMAX=nnnnn

►

►OUTDSN=dsnameOUTMODE= LINE

AUTONETLOG


►◄

Parameters

REQSpecifies the request to be performed. It can have the following keywords:

INGGROUP


HISTORYDisplays the work item history. This is the default.

LOG Retrieves the messages written to the system logger by the automationmanager.

RESOURCESpecifies the name of the resource to be displayed. The format isname/type[/system]. The RESOURCE parameter can only be specified ifREQ=HISTORY.

STARTIs the start date and, optionally, time for the display of the history data. Theformat is yyyy-mm-dd [hh:mm:ss]. If omitted, the history data from the lasthour will be displayed, unless another limiting parameter (resource name) isspecified. If you specify more than one value, they must be enclosed withparentheses, or separated by a period (.), for example:inghist resource=stdt000an1x start=(2000-03-10 08:00:00)

oringhist resource=stdt000an1x start=2000-03-10.08:00:00

ENDIs the end date and, optionally, time for the display of the history data. Theformat is yyyy-mm-dd [hh:mm:ss]. If you specify more than one value, theymust be enclosed with parentheses, or separated by a period (.).

MAXSpecifies the maximum number of work items to be shown. Use this parameterto limit the output if many work items exist within the specified time period.

WIMAXSpecifies the maximum number of work item records to be shown after workitem expansion. The value can be * to indicate unlimited or a value to limitexpansion. The default is 10000. If the report becomes truncated then themessage "***OUTPUT TRUNCATED***" will appear.





To use INGHIST system operations does not have to be initialized.

Usage

The INGHIST command operates sysplexwide. For an overview see “Overview ofCommands that Operate Sysplexwide” on page 13.

Time-interval search criteria are entered in local time. However, because the historydata is stored using GMT time stamps, it is necessary for INGHIST to convert the

INGHIST


local-time search criteria to GMT before retrieving the data. This may make itnecessary for the operator to make a manual adjustment to the time-interval searchcriteria after a daylight-saving-time change has been set. The local-time-to-GMTconversion calculation will be one hour different after a daylight-saving-timechange. Data written after a daylight-saving-time change will be retrieved asexpected but data written before will be offset by one hour.

Examples

If you enter inghist resource=stdt000an1x/apl/aoc7 a panel similar to Figure 51is displayed.

The FIND/RFIND subcommands are supported. See “Varying the Format of theCommand Output” on page 17 for information.

INGHWSRVPurpose

This service and diagnostic command can help you to recover from the SA-BCPiiconnection problems. It also can help to handle better planned Support Elementreboots, which normally would be disruptive to active SA-BCPii connections. TheINGHWSRV command lets you:v terminate all BCP internal interface connections and disable the BCP internal

interface for this SA agent instancev display Processor Operations and BCP internal interface NetView common

global variables (CGLOBALs)v display specific target hardware or system NetView common global variables

(CGLOBALs)v free control blocks that are associated with abended hardware system

connections and clear hanging software locksv force the termination of the BCPii connection to a specified target hardware or

establish a BCPii connection to this target hardware

INGKYHI0 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 15Domain ID = IPUFM ---------- INGHIST ---------- Date = 07/24/00Operator ID = AFRANCK Sysplex = AOC7PLEX Time = 14:20:46

Start time ==> format: yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ssEnd time ==> Resource ==> STDT000AN1X/APL/AOC7

Cmd: + Expand workitem (e) - Collapse workitem (c)Cmd Date Time Footprint--- ---------- -------- -------------------------------------------------------

2000-07-24 14:18:32 Termination processing for STDT000AN1X/APL/AOC7completed

2000-07-24 14:18:30 Agent status for STDT000AN1X/APL/AOC7 = RESTART2000-07-24 14:18:29 No PRESTART commands to issue2000-07-24 14:18:29 Agent status for STDT000AN1X/APL/AOC7 = AUTODOWN2000-07-24 14:18:27 Shutdown in progress2000-07-24 14:18:25 Startup for STDT000AN1X/APL/AOC7 in progress2000-07-24 14:18:24 Agent status for STDT000AN1X/APL/AOC7 = AUTOTERM2000-07-24 14:18:23 Agent status for STDT000AN1X/APL/AOC7 = STARTED2000-07-24 14:18:20 No SHUTINIT commands to issue



Figure 51. INGHIST Command Dialog Panel

INGHIST


v suspend permanently the usage of a BCPii connection to the specified targethardware or resume from this connection mode afterwards

v enforce BCPii session priority for nominated applications.

Syntax

►► INGHWSRV TERMGLOBALLCHECKBCPIIPRIO

GDPSNONE

target_system_nametarget_hardware_name

FORCECONNECTSUSPENDRESUME

►◄

Parameters

TERMTerminates all BCP internal interface connections and disable the BCP internalinterface completely. A System Automation agent restart or an ACF COLD startmay be required to re-establish the SA-BCPii again.

GLOBALDisplays Processor Operations and BCP internal interface common globalvariables.

LCHECKScans NetView CGlobal pool for any available SA_BCPii lock variable anddeletes it. This command issues no additional message.

BCPIIPRIO appl_designatorSA-BCPii protocol usage is shared between SA z/OS and applications likeGDPS. Currently no serialization mechanism grants exclusive non-disruptiveusage of SA-BCPii session when needed.

The BCPIIPRIO flag allows you to prevent active SA-BCPii sessions from beingterminated by SA z/OS.

While this flag is set, the internal SA-BCPii session management will not try toterminate SA-BCPii connections relevant for the application identified by thedesignator. The setting of this flag is not persistent. It must be set after eachSystem Automation agent start. The scope of the flag is the System Automationagent where it was set. The currently supported appl_designators are:

GDPS If the IBM Service Offering GDPS is installed, configured and running,SA_BCPii session terminations to processors also defined in theGEOPLEX domain/options of this System Automation agent will NOTbe executed by the internal SA-BCPii session management. However,session terminations issued by GDPS or by using a INGHWSRVcommand function will still work.

NONEClears the exiting BCPIIPRIO setting, if any. The internal SA-BCPiisession management may now terminate active SA-BCPii sessionsagain.

INGHWSRV


Note, that specifying BCPIIPRIO without an appl_designator shows the currentflag setting in WTO message ING823I.

target_system_nameDisplays NetView common global variables (CGLOBALs) for the specifiedtarget system name.

target_hardware_name (no parameters)Displays NetView common global variables (CGLOBALs) for the specifiedtarget hardware name.

target_hardware_name_FORCEEnforces termination of the BCPii connection to the target hardware.

target_hardware_name_CONNECTEstablishes the BCPii connection to the target hardware.

target_hardware_name_SUSPENDThe BCPii connection to the target hardware is put into SUSPENDED mode, arunning connection is terminated before it is suspended. The only actionpossible for a suspended connection is RESUME.

target_hardware_name_RESUMEA previously suspended BCPii connection is put back into normal mode. Inthat mode, a CONNECT can be issued again.


This command is provided as a diagnostic service and recovery tool for SA-BCPiiconnections only. Do not use it for normal SA-BCPii operation. Be also aware ofthis restriction when this command is called from an automation script.

The setting of the BCPIIPRIO flag has side effects for 'INGAMS REFRESH' and'ACF COLD' processing if processor/system/lpar related ACF data was changed.The internal SA-BCPii session management may trigger the termination and restartfor one or multiple processor connections. With the flag set, the termination step isalways skipped. The re-initialization of a still active SA-BCPii session will alwaysend successfully, but configuration changes, if any, will not be picked up for thissession.

Usage

You should use the FORCE option only after a connection failure to free controlblocks that are associated with the target hardware name or as a last option toterminate a SA-BCPii session, if no other application provided method (forexample, GDPS) is possible.

The CONNECT tries to start an asynchronous SA-BCPii session to the targethardware, but does not register for specific events. It is expected that applications(for example, GDPS) take care of this.

It is recommended to use SUSPEND as part of an operational procedure beforeallowing an IBM customer engineer (CE) to perform a repair or a MCL upgradeaction which requires an SE reboot or restart. Use RESUME to recover a previouslysuspended SA-BCPii SE connection, once the IBM CE has ended therepair/upgrade action.

INGHWSRV


Note, that SA-BCPii application such as GDPS, may provide SUSPEND/RESUMEsupport in their user interfaces or APIs. It is recommended to use theapplication-provided support in those cases.

A typical use case for BCPIIPRIO with GDPS would be to make sure, that beforecomplex HW operations management actions like IPLs or CPC capacity changesare started, the flag is set and after successful execution set back to NONE again.This reduces the risk that an unwanted automatic SA-BCPii session managementaction is disruptive for your HW automation. Please note, that technical sessionproblems cannot be avoided with this flag. This also applies to uncoordinated SEmaintenance actions, which may require a SE reboot.

INGIMSPurpose

The INGIMS command lets you:v Issue both type-1 and type-2 IMS commands, and to issue those commands

against an IMSplex and its members.v Broadcast messages to all or selected IMS users.v Issue a list of defined transactions or commands and view the output.v Display the output of IMS transactions in fullscreen or pipeable line mode.

Syntax

►► INGIMS Resource specificationIMSplex specification TARGET=target

►


AUTONETLOG

►◄

Resource specification:

resource REQ=CMD CMD=cmd MSG=messageREQ=XCMD CMD=cmd MSG=messageREQ=INFOREQ=XINFOREQ=BROADCAST MSG=message ROUTE=routeREQ=DEPREQ=TCO

IMSplex specification:

IMSPLEX=name REQ=XCMD CMD=cmd ▼MEMBERS= ( name )*%

RESP=YES

RESP=NO►

INGHWSRV


►CMDWAIT=time

Parameters

resourceThe resource specifies the name of the IMS subsystem that the command isissued to. The format is subsystem[/APL[/system]], where the subsystem isthe specific name of the desired IMS subsystem and system is the name of thesystem that the IMS is running on.

Note: If you specify REQ=XCMD or REQ=XINFO, SA z/OS determines theIMSplex name that the IMS subsystem belongs to and routes the command tothat IMS.

REQSpecifies the request to be issued to the IMS subsystem. It can be one of thefollowing:

CMD Issues the specified IMS command or transaction and displays theresults. The command is forwarded to IMS using its console interface.

Enclose the command in single or double quotation marks if thecommand and parameters contain spaces.

REQ=CMD is the default.

Note: Do not specify the prefix character, forward slash (/), for IMScommands.

XCMDThis is the same as CMD but the command is forwarded to IMS viathe IMS Operations Manager if either the IMSPLEX parameter isspecified or an IMSplex name for the given resource is available in thepolicy. IMS type 2 commands are also supported in that case.Otherwise the console interface is used that supports only type-1commands. However, the output is formatted in the same way ineither case.

Note: Do not specify the prefix character, forward slash (/), for IMScommands.

INFO Issues a set of predefined commands and displays the results. The listof commands is obtained from the user-defined keyword-data pairs forthe IMSINFO message ID in the policy of the subsystem that isspecified by the resource name. The individual commands are executedas with CMD.

XINFOThis is the same as INFO but the individual commands are executed aswith XCMD.

BROADCASTIssues an IMS broadcast to all or selected users.

DEP Displays the dependent region associated with the control region.

TCO Displays the details about the IMS Timed Control Operations function.

INGIMS


IMSPLEXSpecifies the IMSplex name.

MEMBERSIdentifies a list of members where the command should be executed. It can be:v Asterisk (*), which causes the command to be forwarded to all registered

command processing clients in the IMSplex.v Percent sign (%), which causes the command to be forwarded to one

registered command processing client with MASTER capability.v A list of member names or type identifiers, or both. The type identifiers are

subcategories of the category IMS (that is, DBCTL, DCCTL, DBDC, or FDBR)and must be preceded by an asterisk, for example, *DCCTL or *FDBR. *CTLcan be used as shorthand for "*DBCTL *DCCTL *DBDC".

MEMBERS is optional. If omitted the command is forwarded to all registeredcommand processing clients.

RESPSpecifies whether output should be returned to the caller or not. RESP isoptional and the default is YES

CMDWAITSpecifies the maximum wait time for a command to complete. CMDWAIT isoptional and the default is the value of CGLOBAL WAITTIME.

MSGSpecifies the message to be sent to all or selected IMS terminals or users forthe REQ=BROADCAST request. Enclose the message in single or doublequotation marks.

For REQ=CMD the MSG parameter can be used to contain a list of words thatwill be used to end processing if they are received anywhere in the outputresults. The words will normally be a required message ID. If no words areentered the CMD will be processed until any result is received.

ROUTESpecifies the IMS routing information used to select the IMS terminals or usersare to receive the message for a REQ=BROADCAST request. The contents ofthe ROUTE parameter are the parameters to be supplied to the /BROtransaction to route messages to IMS terminals or users. See the /BROtransaction for the details of the parameters for that transaction.





To use the INGIMS command, system operations must be initialized. IMSsubsystems must be enabled for system console commands using the MCS/E-MCSConsole.

INGIMS


||||

Usage

The INGIMS command operates sysplexwide. For an overview see “Overview ofCommands that Operate Sysplexwide” on page 13.

Examples

If you enter ingims a panel similar to Figure 52 is displayed.

v The Resource field shows the name of the IMS subsystem to be used for issuingthe requests. The format is name/type[/system]. Wildcards are supported.

v The IMSPlex name field shows the name of the IMSplex.v The IMS Members field identifies the members where the commands should be

processed. The IMS is either named by its subsystem ID or its type identifier.Type identifiers are DB, DC, FDBR, CQS, and so on. You must prefix the typeidentifier with an asterisk (*), for example, *DBDC. You can use *CTL asshorthand for *DB *DC *DBDC.

v The Target field shows the name of the system (system name, domain ID, orsysplex name) that the command should be routed to. Specifying this is onlynecessary if the resources do not reside in the local sysplex.

v The Request field shows the request to be carried out. It can be CMD,BROADCAST, INFO, XCMD, or XINFO.

Note: If you specify XCMD or XINFO, you must use either the IMSPlex nameor IMS Members field, or both, to specify the destination of the request.

v The IMS Command field shows the IMS transaction to be executed on the IMSsubsystem specified by the resource field.

v The Response field indicates whether the output should be returned to thecaller.

v The Command wait time field specifies the maximum wait time for a commandto complete. The default is the value of WAITTIME common global variable.

v The IMS Route field shows the routing parameters for the /BRO commandwhen the request is BROADCAST.

EVIKYCMD SA z/OS - Command Dialogs LineDomain ID = IPSFM ---------- INGIMS ---------- Date = 06/08/09Operator ID = NETOP1 Time = 15:08:38

Resource => SREL1 -or- IMSPlex name =>IMS Members =>Target => System name, domain ID or sysplex nameRequest => XCMD CMD or XCMD, INFO or XINFO, BROADCAST, DEP, TCOIMS Command =>

Response => YES Yes/No Command wait time => 60 (seconds)IMS Route =>IMS Message =>

=>



Figure 52. INGIMS Command Dialog Panel

INGIMS


v The IMS Message field shows the message to be sent to users/terminals for theBROADCAST request.

The output from the IMS transaction appears in the blank area below the IMSMessage field.

If you specify, for example, INGIMS EIMSDBRC REQ=BROADCAST a panel similar toFigure 53 is displayed.

If you specify, for example, INGIMS REQ=XCMD CMD='DIS ACT' output similar to thefollowing is displayed in a NetView window (which allows you to scroll throughthe output):OM=IMSAA1OM Rc=00000000 Rsn=00000000Master=MAC1 User=STCUSER Cmd=DIS ACT

MbrName MsgDataMAA1 REGID JOBNAME TYPE TRAN/STEP PROGRAM STATUS CLASSMAA1 4 IMSAA1M1 TP WAITING 1MAA1 JMPRGN JMP NONEMAA1 JBPRGN JBP NONEMAA1 BATCHREG BMP NONEMAA1 1 IMSAA1F1 FPM NO MSG. DFSIVP4MAA1 3 IMSAA1F3 FPM NO MSG. DBFSAMP3MAA1 DBTRGN DBT NONEMAA1 IMSAA1RC DBRCMAA1 IMSAA1DL DLSMAA1 VTAM ACB OPEN -LOGONS ENABLEDMAA1 IMSLU=N/A.N/A APPC STATUS=DISABLED TIMEOUT= 0MAA1 OTMA GROUP=N/A STATUS=NOTACTIVEMAA1 APPC/OTMA SHARED QUEUE STATUS - LOCAL=INACTIVE GLOBAL=INACTIVEMAA1 APPC/OTMA RRS MAX TCBS - 40 ATTACHED TCBS - 1 QUEUED RRSWKS-MAA1 APPLID=IPXAGIA1 GRSNAME= STATUS=DISABLEDMAA1 LINE ACTIVE-IN - 1 ACTIV-OUT - 0MAA1 NODE ACTIVE-IN - 0 ACTIV-OUT - 0MAA1 *09139/155812*

If you specify, for example, INGIMS REQ=XINFO output similar to the following isdisplayed:

EVIKYCMD SA z/OS - Command Dialogs LineDomain ID = IPSFM ---------- INGIMS ---------- Date = 06/08/09Operator ID = NETOP1 Time = 15:11:23

Resource => EIMSDBRC/APL/AOC8 -or- IMSPlex name =>IMS Members =>Target => System name, domain ID or sysplex nameRequest => BROADCAST CMD or XCMD, INFO or XINFO, BROADCAST, DEP, TCOIMS Command => BROADCAST

Response => Yes/No Command wait time => (seconds)IMS Route => ACTIVEIMS Message =>

=>



Figure 53. INGIMS REQ=BROADCAST Command Dialog Panel

INGIMS


QUERY CQS DATA--------------------------------------------------------------

OM=IMSAA1OM Rc=00000000 Rsn=00000000Master=MAC1 User=STCUSER Cmd=DIS CQS

MbrName MsgDataMAA1 DFS4444I DISPLAY FROM ID=MAA1MAA1 JOBNAME VERS# STATUSMAA1 IMSAA1SQ 1.5 CONNECTEDMAA1 *09148/174750*DISPLAY COORDINATOR CONTROLLERS---------------------------------------------

OM=IMSAA1OM Rc=00000000 Rsn=00000000Master=MAC1 User=STCUSER Cmd=DIS CCTL

MbrName MsgDataMAA1 DFS4444I DISPLAY FROM ID=MAA1MAA1 CCTL STATUSMAA1 IMSAA1SQ 1.5 CONNECTEDMAA1 *09148/174715*

Note that a separator line is inserted between the individual command outputs.

You can issue a command against members of an IMSplex with the IMSPLEXparameter, for example:INGIMS IMSPLEX=IMXPLEX_1 MEMBERS=*CTL REQ=XCMD CMD='QUERY AREA' OUTMODE=LINE

If you wish to view IMS dependent regions, use the INGIMS command dialogwith REQ=DEP and the following screen is displayed:

INGINFOPurpose

INGINFO displays details about a particular group or resource from theautomation manager point of view.

EVIKYDP0 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 5Domain ID = IPSFP ---- Dependent Regions ----- Date = 08/03/07Operator ID = OPER Time = 12:44:37Control Reg.= IMSCTL/APL/KEY4CMD: A Update B Start C Stop D INGRELS E INGVOTE F INGINFO

H DISPTRG I INGSCHED N /ASSIGN P /PSTOP / scrollCMD Name Type System Reg.Id Type Trans/Step Program IMS Status--- ----------- ---- ------ ------ ---- ---------- -------- ----------------

IMSDBRC APL KEY4 DBRCIMSDLS APL KEY4 DLSIMSFP1 APL KEY4 1 FPME NO MSG. DFSIVP4IMSMP1 APL KEY4 2 TP WAITINGIMSPPI APL KEY4 3 BMP IMS941PP EVIRYPPI


PF9=Refresh PF10=Previous PF11=Next PF12=Retrieve

Figure 54. IMS Dependent Regions Panel

INGIMS


Syntax

►► INGINFO resourceNOHIST WAIT=nnn TARGET= system_name


►


AUTONETLOG

►◄

Parameters

resourceSpecifies the name of the resource to be displayed. The format isname/type[/system].

NOHISTSpecifies that no history information should be included in the display.

WAIT







None.

Usage

The INGINFO command operates sysplexwide. For an overview see “Overview ofCommands that Operate Sysplexwide” on page 13.

Examples

If you enter, for example, inginfo TPXA/APL/KEY3 a panel similar to Figure 55 onpage 154 is displayed.

INGINFO


This panel shows detailed information about the specified resource that includes:v Resource statuses and dependenciesv Resource settingsv Relationships that have been defined for the resourcev Requests that have been issued against resourcev Votes that are pending for the resourcev History data that has been collected for the resource

There are two input fields, Resource and Target, where you can specify the nameof the resource and the system that is to be queried. You can specify a wildcard forthe resource name. Specify the system name only when obtaining details about aresource that is not part of the local sysplex.

If the specified resource name is not unique a selection panel will be displayedwhere you can select the resource concerned. You can either enter a resource nameto get details about the resource, or press the PF9 key to refresh the informationabout the current resource.

If the resource is of type APL (that is, application), you can use the PF4 key toinvoke the DISPINFO command to obtain details about the resource from theautomation agent point of view. PF4 invokes DISPMTR when the resource is amonitor resource, DISPAPG when the resource is an application group (that is,type APG), and it invokes DISPSYS when the resource is a system resource (that is,SYS).

If the resource is of type APL (that is, application) and is also associated with apacing gate, you can use the PF5 key to invoke the INGPAC command to obtaininformation about this pacing gate. The PF5 key is not shown for applications thatare not linked to a pacing gate and also not shown for any other resource type.

You can use the FIND(F) and RFIND(RF) subcommands to search the displayeddata for a specific string. The line containing the string is then displayed as top

INGKYIN0 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 901Domain ID = IPSNO ---------- INGINFO ---------- Date = 05/25/06Operator ID = NETOP1 Sysplex = KEY1PLEX Time = 11:06:35

Resource ==> TPXA/APL/KEY3 format: name/type/systemTarget ==> System name, domain ID or sysplex name

Resource : TPXA/APL/KEY3Description : Simulated subsystem

Status...Observed Status : AVAILABLEDesired Status : AVAILABLEAutomation Status : IDLEStartable Status : YESCompound Status : SATISFACTORY Last changed : 2006-05-24 06:19:24Health Status : N/A

Dependencies...PreStart : SatisfiedStart : Satisfied



Figure 55. INGINFO Command Dialog Panel

INGINFO


||||||

||||

line of the display. For example, to locate the line containing "abc" enter FIND abc.Optionally you may add the direction parameter, which is either P (previous) or N(next). The default is next. When you want to locate the next or previousoccurrence of the string, enter RFIND or RF optionally followed by the direction.

Notes:

1. The history data is stored using GMT time stamps so it is necessary forINGINFO to convert these time stamps to local-time before displaying the data.The GMT-to-local-time conversion calculation will be one hour different after adaylight-saving-time change. Data written after a daylight-saving-time changewill be retrieved as expected but data written before will be offset by one hour.

2. For groups, you may see Failed :Yes under the heading Group Details..... ThisGroup Failed flag is set when any member of the group (Basic, Move or Server)enters a HardDown state (CTLDOWN, BROKEN, STOPPED). The flag will notbe cleared automatically by a subsequent successful (re)start of the APG'smembers. It remains set until manually cleared. Its sole purpose is to supportthe MakeAvailable/passive/WhenGroupHasNotFailed relationship. The usageis for situations where the (re)start of a dependent resource must be preventeduntil a certain recovery-related action has been performed. There are two waysto clear the flag manually:

via the INGSET command (INGSET SET resource GRPFAILED=NO)via the option 'A Update' from the INGLIST command. On panelINGKYST1, the group failed flag can be manipulated under the option '5.Set Group Failed Flag ___(Yes or No)'.

INGLISTPurpose

The INGLIST command displays details about one or more resources.

Syntax

►►NETVASIS

▼INGLIST filter criteriaresource

►




AUTONETLOG

WAIT=nnn►

►MEMBERS=YES

►◄

filter criteria:

INGINFO


▼

OBSERVED= *

( status )^\

►

►

▼

DESIRED= *

( status )^\

►

►

▼

AUTOSTAT= *

( status )^\

►

►

▼

COMPOUND= *

( status )^\

AUTOFLAG= *YESNO

►

►CATEGORY= CICS

DB2IMSIMAGEINFOSPHEREITMJES2JES3LIFELINEMQOPCTCPIPUSS

▼

SUBCAT= *

( subcategory )

►

►DESCR= *

text

▼

GROUPTYPE= *

( grouptype )

►

INGLIST


►

▼

HEALTH= *

( status )^\

►

►

▼

JOBNAME= *

( jobname )

►

►

▼

RUNTOKEN= *

( runtoken )

►

►

▼

PGNAME= *

( pgname )

Parameters

NETVASISPrefix the INGLIST command with NETVASIS if you want to pass thedescription text in lower or mixed case.

resourceSpecifies the name of the resources to be displayed. The format isname/type[/system]. It can be a list of names. The resource names must beseparated by a blank. Asterisks (*) and a percentage sign (%) can be used aswildcard characters.

filter criteriaThe filter criteria to be applied prior to displaying the data. See also“INGFILT” on page 127 for further information. The following values canoccur:

OBSERVEDSpecifies the observed statuses to be displayed. The statuses must beseparated by a blank. It can be abbreviated, for example, to AV foravailable. If '^' or '\' is used, all statuses except the ones you specify aredisplayed. If an asterisk (*) is specified, the filter is reset (the filterpreviously set by the INGFILT command). Here is a list of possibleObserved Status values and their shortest possible abbreviations:AVAILABLE (A), UNKNOWN (U), SYSGONE (SY), SOFTDOWN (SO),HARDDOWN (H), STARTING (STAR), DEGRADED (D), STOPPING(STO), PROBLEM (P), WASAVAILABLE (W), and STANDBY (STAN).

DESIREDSpecifies the desired statuses to be displayed. The statuses must beseparated by a blank. It can be abbreviated, for example, to AV foravailable. If '^' or '\' is used, all statuses except the ones you specify aredisplayed. If an asterisk (*) is specified, the filter is reset (the filter

INGLIST


|||||

previously set by the INGFILT command). Here is a list of possible DesiredStatus values and their shortest possible abbreviations: AVAILABLE (A),UNAVAILABLE (U), and UNKNOWN (UNK).

AUTOSTATSpecifies the automation status to be displayed. The statuses must beseparated by a blank. It can be abbreviated, for example, to ID for idle. If'^' or '\' is used, all statuses except the ones you specify are displayed. Ifan asterisk (*) is specified, the filter is reset (the filter previously set by theINGFILT command). Here is a list of possible Autostat Status values andtheir shortest possible abbreviations: UNKNOWN (U), IDLE (ID),ORDERED (O), BUSY (B), DENIED (D), PROBLEM (P), and INTERNAL(IN).

COMPOUNDSpecifies the compound status. The statuses must be separated by a blank.It can be abbreviated, for example, to SA for satisfactory. If '^' or '\' isused, all statuses except the ones you specify are displayed. If an asterisk(*) is specified, the filter is reset (the filter previously set by the INGFILTcommand). Here is a list of possible Compound Status values and theirshortest possible abbreviations: PROBLEM (P), DENIED (DEN),INHIBITED (INH), AWAITING (AW), INAUTO (INA), DEGRADED (DEG),and SATISFACTORY (S).

AUTOFLAGSpecifies the automation flag to be displayed. It can be either YES or NOand can be abbreviated. If an asterisk (*) is specified, the filter is reset (thefilter previously set by the INGFILT command).

CATEGORYSpecifies the IBM-defined or user-defined category that the resourcebelongs to. More than one value can be specified. If an asterisk (*) isspecified, the filter is reset (the filter previously set by the INGFILTcommand).

SUBCATSpecifies the IBM-defined or user-defined subcategory of the resource.More than one value can be specified. The subcategory can containwildcard characters. An asterisk (*) matches a string of arbitrary length anda percentage sign (%) matches a single character. If an asterisk (*) isspecified, the filter is reset (the filter previously set by the INGFILTcommand). For compatibility reasons keyword SUBTYPE is still accepted.

DESCRSpecifies the text string used as a filter. The text can contain wildcards. Anasterisk (*) matches a string of arbitrary length and a percentage sign (%)matches a single character. The DESCR parameter is case-sensitive. The textstring must be enclosed in single or double quotation marks orparentheses() to maintain the case-sensitivity of the entry. If an asterisk (*)is specified, the filter is reset (the filter previously set by the INGFILTcommand).

GROUPTYPESpecifies the type (nature) of the resource group. More than one value canbe specified. If an asterisk (*) is specified, the filter is reset (the filterpreviously set by the INGFILT command).

HEALTHSpecifies the desired health statuses to be displayed. The statuses must beseparated by a blank. It can be abbreviated, for example, to NO for normal.

INGLIST


||||

|||||||

You can also specify an asterisk (*) to reset the current filter setting, forexample, INGFILT HEALTH=*. If '^' or '\' is used, all statuses except theones you specify are displayed. Here is a list of possible Health Statusvalues and their shortest possible abbreviations: SYSGONE (S),UNKNOWN (U), NORMAL (N), WARNING (W), MINOR (M), CRITICAL(C), and FATAL (F).

JOBNAMEThe jobname assigned to the resource. More than one jobname can bespecified. Wildcards are supported. If an asterisk (*) is specified, the filteris reset (the filter previously set by the INGFILT command).

RUNTOKENThe runtoken assigned to the resource. More than one runtoken can bespecified. Wildcards are supported. If an asterisk (*) is specified, the filteris reset (the filter previously set by the INGFILT command).

PGNAMEThe pacing gate assigned to the resource. More than one pacing gate canbe specified. Wildcards are supported. You can also specify an asterisk (*)to reset the current filter setting.

For further information about statuses, see IBM Tivoli System Automation forz/OS User's Guide.


OUTDSNFor information on the OUTDSN parameter, see “OUTDSN Parameter” onpage 17. Note, however, that for the INGLIST command the minimum recordlength of the output data set is 256 bytes.


WAIT



MEMBERS

Displays the members of resource groups that match the filter criteria. Theonly valid specification is YES. MEMBERS=NO is accepted but does not haveany meaning.

Note: When specifying MEMBERS=YES only one resource name can bespecified and it must be fully specified.


None.

INGLIST


||||

Usage

The INGLIST command operates sysplexwide. For an overview see “Overview ofCommands that Operate Sysplexwide” on page 13.

Examples

If you enter inglist, you will see information about all automated resources, asshown in Figure 56.

The amount of data depends on the screen size. Press PF10/11 to scrollhorizontally.

Use the PF5 key to restrict the list of resources to be displayed. This causes theINGFILT panel to be displayed, where you specify the filter criteria to be used forthe display.

You can use the PF4 key to toggle to the DISPSTAT panel to view the sameresources, but now from the automation agent viewpoint. To return to the INGLISTpanel press the PF3 key on the DISPSTAT panel. Note that pressing PF4 on theDISPSTAT panel displays the INGLIST panel for all resources shown in theDISPSTAT panel. However, this might not be the same as the original INGLISTdisplay because the DISPSTAT display might be modified due to filtering orsuppressing of resources that the automation agent does not handle, such asapplication groups.

This panel displays the following information:v The CMD field lets you specify command codes. To use one of the command

codes shown, type the appropriate letter next to the resource name and pressEnter. The following command codes are available:

A Resets the status of the resource or application group (observed status,automation status). Sets or resets attributes that are assigned to the resource.

INGKYST0 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 383Domain ID = IPSNO -------- INGLIST --------- Date = 11/23/09Operator ID = NETOP1 Sysplex = KEY1PLEX Time = 17:27:19A Update B Start C Stop D INGRELS E INGVOTE F INGINFO G MembersH DISPTRG I INGSCHED J INGGROUP K INGCICS L INGIMS M DISPMTR T INGTWSU User X INGLKUP / scrollCMD Name Type System Compound Desired Observed Nature--- ------------ ---- -------- ------------ ----------- ---------- --------

ALLOCAS APL KEY1 INHIBITED AVAILABLE UNKNOWNALLOCAS APL KEY2 INHIBITED AVAILABLE UNKNOWNALLOCAS APL KEY3 SATISFACTORY AVAILABLE AVAILABLEALLOCAS APL KEY4 INHIBITED AVAILABLE UNKNOWNAMCP APL KEY1 INHIBITED AVAILABLE UNKNOWNAMCP APL KEY2 INHIBITED AVAILABLE UNKNOWNAMCP APL KEY3 PROBLEM AVAILABLE HARDDOWNAMCP APL KEY4 INHIBITED AVAILABLE UNKNOWNANTMAIN APL KEY1 INHIBITED AVAILABLE UNKNOWNANTMAIN APL KEY2 INHIBITED AVAILABLE UNKNOWNANTMAIN APL KEY3 SATISFACTORY AVAILABLE AVAILABLEANTMAIN APL KEY4 INHIBITED AVAILABLE UNKNOWNAOCAPPL APL KEY1 INHIBITED AVAILABLE UNKNOWN

Command ===>PF1=Help PF2=End PF3=Return PF4=DISPSTAT PF5=Filters PF6=Roll

PF8=Forward PF9=Refresh PF10=Previous PF11=Next PF12=Retrieve

Figure 56. INGLIST Command Dialog Panel

INGLIST


The automation agent status can also be updated if you enter this commandcode. See “Setting the Status or Attribute of a Resource or ApplicationGroup” on page 163.

B Start. Calls the INGREQ command dialog to make the resource available.See “INGREQ” on page 218 for further information.

C Stop. Calls the INGREQ command dialog to make the resource unavailable.See “INGREQ” on page 218 for further information.

D Displays dependency information and its evaluation for the resource.

E Invokes the INGVOTE command, showing all requests currently present forthe resource. Allows the operator to cancel a request.

F Shows details about the resource by invoking the INGINFO command.

G Shows all members for the selected application group or processor in a newwindow.

H Invokes the DISPTRG command to show the trigger definitions for theselected resource.

I Invokes the INGSCHED command to show the resource overrides for theselected resource.

J Invokes the INGGROUP ACTION=MEMBERS command to show memberdetails.

K Invokes the INGCICS command using the selected resource.

L Invokes the INGIMS command using selected resource.

M Invokes the DISPMTR command to show the monitors that have beendefined for the selected resource.

P Invokes the INGPAC command using the selected resource.

T Invokes the INGTWS command using selected resource.

U Invokes the AOFEXC04 user exit if it has been installed.

X Invokes the INGKLUP REQ=ANALYSE command. The X character examinesthe automation manager and automation agent for the selected resource toprovide information about why the resource could not be brought into thedesired state. The display lists all of the potential problems that might stopthat action from succeeding. The display simply shows the resourcesconcerned and a note of the potential problems that have been detected withthem.

v The Name field shows the name of the resource.v The Type field shows the type of the resource.v The System field shows where the resource is defined.v The Compound field shows the compound status of the resource. This is a

summary of all statuses of the resource and provides a single value to check thestatus of a resource.

v The Desired field shows the status that the automation manager is trying tomove the resource to. It can either be available or unavailable.

v The Nature field applies to group resources only and defines the type of thegroup. It can have the following values:

BASICIndicates that the group contains a number of different resources, all ofwhich perform different roles to constitute a complete application.

INGLIST


||

MOVEIndicates that the group contains alternate instances of the sameresource.

SERVERIndicates that the group contains a number of readily interchangeableresources. The group has a target that tells the automation manager howmany of them should be made available for the group to be available.

v The Automation field shows the status representing the automation agents'automation for the resource.

v The Startable field indicates whether or not it is possible to start the resource ifthe automation manager is asked to do so at this point in time.

v The Health field shows the health status of the resource.v The Auto field shows the automation flag that is maintained by the automation

manager. No automation is performed for the resource by the automationmanager if the flag is off.

v The Hold field shows the hold flag that is maintained by the automationmanager.

v The Description field shows descriptive information about the resource.v The Starttype field shows the preset start type to be used the next time the

resource is made available (started). This value is set by INGSET and willoverride any TYPE value specified (or defaulted) on the next INGREQ startrequest.

v The Stoptype field shows the preset stop type to be used the next time theresource is made unavailable (shutdown). This value is set by INGSET and willoverride any TYPE value specified (or defaulted) on the next INGREQ stoprequest. However, a stop type of FORCE, wherever specified, will always behonored.

v The Trigger field shows the trigger that is associated with the resource.v The Schedule field shows the schedule (service period) that the resource is

linked to.v The Category field shows the IBM-defined or user-defined category of the

resources. For IBM-defined categories, these might be CICS, DB2, or IMS.v The Subcategory field shows the IBM-defined or user-defined subcategories of

the resource. For IBM-defined the resource categories might be CICS, DB2, IMS,OPC, INFOSPHERE, LIFELINE, MQ and ITM.

v The Jobname field shows the job name assigned to the resource.v The Qual field indicates how a resource qualifies for the current runmode. There

are three indicators:

G Resource qualifies because it is in one or more groups that qualify.

R Resource qualifies because it was explicitly added via the INGRUNcommand.

T Resource qualifies because of its runtokens.v The Inform List field shows the list of specified targets (such as SDF) that

receive application status changes.v The DDS field shows the default desired status of the resource.v Resources can be associated with a pacing gate during startup and shutdown

phases to control how many resources can be started or stopped concurrently.For such resources the following information is available:

INGLIST


||

|||

|||

Pacing GateThe name of the pacing gate that is associated with this resource.

Pacing StatusThe pacing status of the resource. The following status values exist:

blankThe resource is not associated with a pacing gate.

InactiveThere is no activity in any of the pacing gates associated with theresource.

WaitingThe resource is waiting for transition through a pacing gate.

StartingThe resource is currently in transition through the pacing gate to becomeAVAILABLE.

StoppingThe resource is currently in transition through the pacing gate to becomeUNAVAILABLE.

Different colors are used to indicate when a particular status is regarded asabnormal:v A desired status of UNAVAILABLE is shown in blue.v A compound status of PROBLEM is shown in red, DENIED and INHIBITED are

shown in pink, while a compound status of DEGRADED is shown in yellow.v An observed status of HARDDOWN or PROBLEM is shown in red, while an

observed status that is not in line with the desired status is shown in yellow.

Additionally you can use the following command codes:v The slash character (/) to make the selected line the first line of the display.


Setting the Status or Attribute of a Resource or ApplicationGroup

If you enter command code A for a resource, a panel similar to Figure 57 on page164 is displayed.

INGLIST


||

||

||

|||

||

|||

|||

Use this panel to update the observed or automation status of the selectedresource, or to modify other resource settings. In detail, you can:v Set the start or stop type to be used the next timev Turn the automation manager's Global Automation flag on or off

The automation manager checks the Global Automation flag before it sends anyorder to the automation agent to start or stop the specific resource. The purposeof this flag is to prevent (if flag is set to NO) or enable (if flag is set to YES) thestarting or stopping of resources from the point of view of the automationmanager. This can be done for resources that reside on systems that are currentlyinactive, for example, to prevent the startup of the resource at IPL time of thesystem.

v Turn the automation manager's Hold flag on or offThe Hold flag specifies whether the resource is to be started. The Hold flag canbe set only if the resource is down, that is if its observed status is eitherHardDown, SoftDown, SysGone, or Unknown. When the Hold flag is set to YES,the specific resource is set in compound status of DENIED unless there is a startrequest or a vote against it.For instance, when an APL with default desired status of AVAILABLE is amember of a BASIC group and it has no other vote against it, this APL will bein status DENIED. When an operator issues a start request for it, the APL isstarted.

v Turn the Group Failed flag on or offThe Group Failed flag is set when any member of the group (BASIC, MOVE, orSERVER) enters a HardDown state (CTLDOWN, BROKEN, or STOPPED). Theflag is not cleared automatically by a subsequent successful start or restart of theAPG's members. It remains set until manually cleared. Its sole purpose is tosupport the MakeAvailable/passive/WhenGroupHasNotFailed relationship. Theusage is for situations where the start or restart of a dependent resource must beprevented until a certain recovery-related action is performed.

v Update the observed statusv Update the automation statusv Update the agent status

INGKYST1 SA z/OS - Command DialogsDomain ID = IPUFP ---------- INGLIST ---------- Date = 04/08/05Operator ID = NETOP1 Sysplex = KEY1PLEX Time = 17:25:08

Resource . . : AM/APL/KEY4Description. : Primary Automation Manager

Action to be performed ==> current setting1. Set START Type

Parm2. Set STOP Type

Parm3. Set Automation Flag NO YES4. Set Hold Flag YES NO5. Set Group failed flag (Yes or No)

6. Set Observed Status AVAILABLE7. Set Automation Status IDLE8. Set Agent Status UP


PF12=Retrieve

Figure 57. INGLIST Command Dialog Panel To Update Status

INGLIST


Fill in the following fields:

ActionThis identifies what to update. This is a one-digit numeric characterranging from 1 to 8. Depending on the specified action, fill out theappropriate field.

START typeSpecify the new start type if action 1 is entered. Specify a question mark (?)to see a list of defined startup types. To reset the start type to its default,specify NORM.

STOP typeSpecify the new stop type if action 2 is entered. Valid shutdown types areNORM, IMMED, and FORCE. To reset the stop type to its default, specifyNORM.

Group failed flagSpecify YES or NO if action 5 is entered.

Observed StatusSpecify the new observed status if action 6 is entered. You can abbreviatethe observed status, for example, you can enter AV for available. Here is alist of possible observed status values and their shortest possibleabbreviations: AVAILABLE (A), UNKNOWN (U), SYSGONE (SY),SOFTDOWN (SO), HARDDOWN (H), STARTING (STAR), DEGRADED(D), STOPPING (STO), PROBLEM (P), WASAVAILABLE (W), andSTANDBY (STAN).

Automation StatusSpecify the new automation status if action 7 is entered. You can abbreviatethe automation status. Here is a list of possible Automation Status valuesand their shortest possible abbreviations: UNKNOWN (U), IDLE (ID),ORDERED (O), BUSY (B), DENIED (D), PROBLEM (P), and INTERNAL(IN).

Agent statusSpecify the automation agent status if action 8 is entered. The agent statuscan be one of the following: CTLDOWN, RESTART, UP, MOVED,AUTODOWN, or ENDED.

Setting the Hold flag to YES will only be granted if:v The resource is down, that is, its observed status is either HardDown, SoftDown,

SysGone, or Unknown.v The automation manager is not in the process of starting the resource.

If the resource has a start vote that is propagated from a SERVER group, theresource is started even when the Hold flag is set to YES.

INGLKUPPurpose

INGLKUP has three purposes:1. The INGLKUP command lets you display all jobs that are not controlled by

SA z/OS. You can either stop, cancel or force those jobs with the correspondingMVS command.

INGLIST


You can list all active jobs, started tasks (STCs), and APPC/MVS transactionprograms. You can define an exclude list to tailor the list that is displayed.

2. The INGLKUP command can also be used to obtain diagnostic informationabout a particular resource if you want to perform debugging.

3. The INGLKUP command queries the automation manager and the variousagents for the reasons why the resource concerned could not be brought intothe desired status.

Syntax

1. Syntax for JOB display

►► INGLKUPREQ=JOB

▼

QUAL=ALL

QUAL = ( * )APPCJOBSTC

TIMEOUT=nnn►

►(1)

COMMAND=commandTARGET= system_name


►


AUTONETLOG

►◄

Notes:

1 Line Mode only

2. Syntax for diagnostic display

►► INGLKUPresource

REQ=COLLECTTARGET= system_name


►


AUTONETLOG

►◄

3. Syntax for analyse function

►► INGLKUPresource

REQ=ANALYSE STATE= UPDOWN

►

INGLKUP





AUTONETLOG

TIMEOUT=nnn►

►WAIT=nnn

►◄

Parameters

REQSpecifies the type of request to be performed.

JOB Displays all jobs, started tasks, and APPC/MVS transaction programsthat are not controlled by SA z/OS. Note that the term JOB includesbatch jobs, started tasks, and APPC/MVS programs.

COLLECTCauses diagnostic information to be displayed in the netlog ifOUTDSN is not specified.

ANALYSEReports possible reasons why the resource concerned could not bebrought into the desired state.

resourceSpecifies the name of the resource to be processed. The format isname{/type{/system}}. Wildcard is supported. If more than one resourcematches the wildcard specification, a selection panel is displayed.

A resource specification is only valid when REQ=COLLECT.

QUALSpecifies the type of "job" to be displayed. QUAL can be ALL, JOB, STC, APPCor *. The default is ALL. You can specify more than one qualifier by enclosingthe qualifiers in parentheses.

COMMANDSpecifies the command to be issued in order to terminate the jobs/started tasks(STC). Valid entries are STOP, CANCEL or FORCE. These commands may beabbreviated. This parameter is used with Line Mode only.

STATESpecifies the state the resource should be in:

UP Resource is available.

DOWNResource is in a "DOWN" state.

TIMEOUTSpecifies the maximum number of seconds the INGLKUP command waits forresponses from the remote system that the command was sent to. Themaximum is 999 seconds. The default is 30 seconds.

WAITSpecifies the number of seconds to wait before reporting that a timeoutoccurred if the automation manager does not provide the requested data. Themaximum time internal is 999 seconds. If omitted, the time interval is 30seconds.

INGLKUP


|||

||||

|||||


OUTDSNFor information on the OUTDSN parameter, see “OUTDSN Parameter” onpage 17. The record length must be at least 80 bytes if a resource is specified or256 bytes if no resource is specified.



INGLKUP issues the MVS D J,L command to get all active jobs. Then the REXXsystem address spaces are added to this list through the MVS D A,AXR* command.

With the DISPSTAT command, the list of subsystems managed by SystemAutomation is obtained. For the INGLKUP display, the two lists are compared,also taking the user-defined exclude list into consideration. System address spacesother than AXR* are not displayed.

INGLKUP may display subsystem address spaces if the subsystems are NON-MVSsubsystems but are represented by an MVS address space. This occurs, forexample, in the case of the IMS PPI dependent region.

Usage

1. Exclude List for REQ=JOB: An exclude list may be built using User Entry Type(UET) pairs. The exclude list allows the Automation Administrator to reduce thelist of active jobs that are shown when REQ=JOB.

The UET data is specified in the policy database as follows:

Entry INGLKUP

Type EXCLUDE

Keyword/DataJOB

Data Is JOB=jobname (where jobname specifies the JOB or STC to be excludedfrom the display). Wildcard is supported in jobname. For more information,refer to IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS Defining Automation Policy.

2. Output for REQ=COLLECT: If you specify a resource name withREQ=COLLECT, the output from the following commands is collected:v INGINFOv INGRELSv INGSCHEDv DISPAPG (for APG resources only)v DISPINFOv DISPMTR (for MTR resources only)v DISPTRG

INGLKUP


||

||||

If you do not specify a resource name with REQ=COLLECT, the output from thefollowing commands is collected:v INGLISTv INGSESSv DISPMTRv DISPSTAT

Whether you specify a resource name or not, output from the following commandsis always displayed with REQ=COLLECT:v INGAMSv INGHISTv INGVOTE

Examples

If you specify inglkup and cancel a job with command code C, a panel similar toFigure 58 is displayed.

This panel displays all active jobs, started tasks (STC) and APPC/MVS transactionprograms that are not controlled by SA z/OS. You can either stop or cancel oreven force the job (or jobs).

For each job the following information is shown:v The Cmd field lets you specify the command codes shown on the panel. Type

the appropriate letter next to the job name and press Enter. The followingcommand codes are available:

C Cancel the job.

F Force the job.

P Stop the job.v The Job field shows the job name.v The Step field the step name.v The Procedure field shows the procedure step name.

INGKYLU0 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 24Domain ID = IPSFP ---------- INGLKUP ---------- Date = 04/12/12Operator ID = NETOP1 System = KEY4 Time = 14:36:17

Cmd: C cancel job F force job P stop job

Cmd Job Step Procedure Type ASID System--- -------- -------- --------- ---- ---- --------

AMST AMST AMPROC SO KEY4AMST2 AMST2 AMPROC SO KEY4APPC APPC APPC S KEY4ASCH ASCH ASCH S KEY4BTSO BTSO AAAZSSEM S KEY4 ** CANCELLED **CU12 STEP1 CU12 AO 0049 KEY4CU12 STEP1 CU12 AO 005A KEY4CU129 STEP1 CU12 AO KEY4FTPD1 STEP1 FTPOE AO KEY4FTPOE1 STEP1 FTPOE AO KEY4



Figure 58. INGLKUP Command Dialog Panel

INGLKUP


v The Type field shows the job type.v The ASID field shows the address space ID (this is only present if the job name

is not unique).v The System field shows the name of the system that the job is running on.


If you specify REQ=ANALYSE for the INGLKUP command, the following panel isdisplayed:

INGKYLU2 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs LineDomain ID = IPUNA ---------- INGLKUP ---------- Date = 12/14/11Operator ID = OPER1 Sysplex = AOCAPLEX Time = 14:13:25

Resource => PMTRB3/MTR/AOC5 Examined State ==> UPTarget => System name, domain ID or sysplex name

Name Type System Cat Problem----------- ---- -------- --- ----------------------------------------------PMTRB3 MTR AOC5 Pot AM Observed status is UNKNOWNPMTRB3 MTR AOC5 Pot AM Automation status is UNKNOWNPAPLMTRA APL AOC5 Pot AM Observed status is UNKNOWNPAPLMTRA APL AOC5 Pot AM Automation status is UNKNOWNPAPLMTRB APL AOC5 Pot AM Observed status is UNKNOWNPAPLMTRB APL AOC5 Pot AM Automation status is UNKNOWN



INGMDFYPurpose

The INGMDFY command displays the currently defined actions for the startup orshutdown of a subsystem and allows you to modify them for the next startup orshutdown.

INGMDFY also allows you to define additional actions or to delete defined actionsfor the startup or shutdown of a subsystem.

Syntax

►► INGMDFY subsystem phasejobname

►◄

Parameters

subsystemThe name of the subsystem that the defined actions are to be displayed for.

jobnameThe job name of the subsystem that the defined actions are to be displayed for.

Figure 59. INGLKUP Command Dialog Panel for the ANALYSE Option

INGLKUP


|||

phaseThis parameter is used to specify whether startup or shutdown actions are tobe displayed.

STARTStartup actions are to be displayed.

STOPShutdown actions are to be displayed.

Restrictions and Limitationsv The INGMDFY command can only be used when SA z/OS is initialized.v The INGMDFY command is provided for fullscreen mode.v To ensure consistency during the startup or shutdown process of an application,

the save and reset functions are not applicable during startup or shutdownprocessing of the related application.

v Persistence of modifications:– NetView Recycle (or ACF COLD which should only be used in emergency

cases)Both the modified start/stop definitions in storage and the previously loadedACF data in the KEEP are lost. At restart, SA z/OS initializes with theautomation policy data from disk.

– Configuration RefreshIf the configuration data for a subsystem has been changed in the automationpolicy, both the modified start/stop definitions in storage and the previouslyloaded ACF data in the KEEP are lost during the configuration refresh. Thenew ACF data is loaded from disk.

– Temporarily Changing ACF Data with ACF REQ=REPLWhen using ACF REQ=REPL, only the currently loaded ACF data ismodified. An existing KEEP remains untouched so that previously loadedACF data is restored after the next start/stop or after INGMDFY expires.


The INGMDFY command supports resource level security. If turned on, thefollowing profiles in class SYSAUTO are checked:


AGT.sysplex.xcfgrp.RES._CONFIG UPDATE Always


Usage

INGMDFY also displays default startup commands if no startup commands aredefined for applications with a job type other than NONMVS and they can bemodified.

INGMDFY


||

|||

|

||

||||

||||

||

Examples

If you enter INGMDFY followed by a subsystem name and START or STOP, apanel similar to Figure 60 is displayed.

Use the command code S or C to overwrite the command definition of a selectedrow in another panel or to define a new command for an empty row.

Use the command code S or R to overwrite the reply definition of a selected row inanother panel or to define a new reply in an empty row.

Only one command code can be issued at a time.

Additionally you can use the slash character (/) to make the selected line the firstline of the display.

When overwriting the displayed data, the changes are at first accumulated instorage, until PF5 is used to save the changes. Thereafter the previously loadedconfiguration definitions are saved and the changed definitions are loaded intostorage. The changed definitions are used for the next startup or shutdown of theapplication.

After the changed definitions have been used to start up or shut down anapplication, the changes are discarded and the saved configuration data is restoredinto storage to be used for further startups or shutdowns of the application.

The Modified flag indicates that changed startup or shutdown definitions havebeen loaded into storage.

PF7/PF8 lets you scroll forward and backward if more than one screen is neededto display the data.

AOFKEDSS SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 15Domain ID = IPSNO ---------- INGMDFY ---------- Date = 10/16/13Operator ID = NETOP1 Sysplex = KEY1PLEX Time = 20:55:00

Subsystem: VTAM Category: Extstop : NEVER Modified: NoSubcategory: Jobtype : MVS

S/C Define Command S/R Define Reply

Cmd Phase AutoFn/* Command TextPass Retry CT Reply Text

--- ---------- -------- -------------------------------------------------------SHUTINIT

NETOPER MVS D NET,BFRUSE

SHUTNORMPASS1 MVS Z NET,QUICKPASS2 MVS Z NET,CANCEL

SHUTIMMEDPASS1 MVS Z NET,CANCEL

Command ===>PF1=Help PF2=End PF3=Return PF4=Reset PF5=Save Changes PF6=Roll


Figure 60. INGMDFY Command Dialog Panel

INGMDFY


|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||

PF10/PF11 lets you shift right and left if the defined action is longer than thescreen width.

For further details about the fields on the panel, see the online help and IBM TivoliSystem Automation for z/OS Defining Automation Policy.

INGMOVEPurpose

INGMOVE makes moving sysplex application groups easier. Rather thanmanipulating the preference value of each member in the sysplex applicationgroup, you simply specify where the group should be moved to.

In a sysplex application group of type MOVE only one member is active at a time.By specifying the new location of the move group, the active member is terminatedand the member associated with the new location is activated.

INGMOVE supports the moving of a sysplex application group to another system.

Syntax

To move sysplex application groups

►► INGMOVE ▼ resource_name

▼SYSTEMS= ( system ) QUAL= ACTIVEINACTIVE

►

►TO= system

*ANY*HOME

feedback optionWAIT=nnn

►

►(1) ACTION=MOVE

ACTION=PREPARE

(2) VERIFY=YES

VERIFY= NOWTOR


AUTONETLOG

►



►◄

Feedback option:

INGMDFY


FDBK=( MSG ,G ,max_time )MSG/userid ,F

,BWAIT

Notes:

1 Can only be used in line mode.

2 The default depends on the type of task that the INGMOVE command runson. If the task that the command runs on, is an autotask associated with a*ANY* console, the default is WTOR. The default for an unattended task isNO.

Parameters

resource_nameSpecifies the name of the sysplex application group. More than one name canbe specified, separated by a blank or a comma. Each name can contain awildcard.

If no group name is specified, all sysplex application groups of type MOVE aredisplayed.

WAIT



TO Specifies the system that the application group should be moved to.

Alternatively, *ANY can be specified. This causes the application to be moved toany other viable system in the sysplex. In the background, an INGGROUPACTION=EXCLUDE is done. The advantage of this, however, is that theINGMOVE command checks for the successful completion of the moveoperation within the allowed time interval.

FDBKSpecifies the feedback parameter that causes the final result of the command tobe reported back to the designated instance.

MSG Causes message signaling of the successful or unsuccessful completionof the command to be performed.

The message is sent back to the originator of the command. Theoriginator is determined by the NetView OPID(S) function unless theuser ID is specified. Depending on the status, either message ING300Ior ING301I is issued. The message text contains the command that wasprocessed successfully or failed.

useridIdentifies the NetView user ID of the person to be notified ifdifferent to the originating user.

Use the following values to specify when to issue the message:

G Issue the message only when the resource has reached its expectedstatus.

F Issue the message only if the resource did not reach its expectedstate in the specified time interval.

INGMOVE


B Issue the message in all cases.

WAIT To wait for the completion of the command (denoted by the max_timeparameter). Note that the WAIT option is rejected when the INGMOVEcommand executes on a work operator.

max_timeThe time interval in NetView format (mm:ss, :ss, mm or hh:mm:ss) thatSA z/OS will wait. If the specified resource has not reached theexpected state, the command is considered to have failed and theoperation is posted in error.

SYSTEMSSpecifies a list of systems to be used as a filter. Only groups that can run onone of the specified systems are displayed. If more than one system isspecified, they must be separated by a blank character and enclosed inparentheses.

QUALSpecifies a qualifier for the SYSTEMS filter. It can be one of the following:

ACTIVEShows only those groups that are running on one of the systemsspecified with the SYSTEMS parameter.

INACTIVEShows only those groups that are not running on one of the systemsspecified with the SYSTEMS parameter.

ACTIONSpecifies when the action is to be done. Valid values are:MOVE

Perform the move immediately. This is the default.PREPARE

Perform the move at the next recycle.

VERIFYSpecifies whether the operator is prompted for confirmation prior to carryingout the requested action. The default depends on the type of task that theINGMOVE command runs on. It is NO for Unattended tasks, otherwise YES.

YES Asks the operator for confirmation.

NO No verification is performed. This setting is always for Unattendedtasks.

WTORThe list of affected resources is displayed before the requested action iscarried out. The operator is prompted to verify the list via WTOR.

The default depends on the type of task that the INGMOVE command runson. If the task the command runs on is an autotask associated with a *ANY*console, the default is WTOR. The default for an unattended task is NO.



INGMOVE




The FDBK parameter will only monitor resources within the local sysplex.


The INGMOVE command supports resource level security. If turned on, thefollowing profile in class SYSAUTO is checked:


AGT.sysplex.xcfgrp.RES.resname.restype UPDATE Always

If multiple resources are affected, multiple profiles are checked. The request iscarried out or rejected as a whole.

For further details, refer to IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS Planning andInstallation

Examples

If you enter ingmove a panel similar to Figure 61 is displayed.

This panel shows all sysplex application groups of type MOVE (referred to as movegroups) that match the specified filter criteria. The following information is shown:v The Group name column shows the name of the move group. Because the move

groups are unique within a sysplex, only the first part of the resource groupname is shown.

v The Obs Status column shows the observed status of the move group as seen bythe automation manager.

INGKYMV0 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Group 1 of 7Domain ID = IPSNO ---------- INGMOVE ---------- Date = 11/23/09Operator ID = NETOP1 Sysplex = KEY1PLEX Time = 13:08:38

B Start C Stop D INGRELS E INGVOTE F INGINFO G Members I INGSCHEDJ INGGROUP M Move P Prepare R Reset X Box Group / scrollCmd Group name Obs Status ---- Systems ---- Move to--- ----------- ----------- -------- -------- -------- --------- --------

ARMGROUP SOFTDOWN KEY1 KEY2 KEY3 KEY4KEY5 KEY6 KEY7

MOVDISRN AVAILABLE KEY2 KEY4 *MOVDISRY AVAILABLE KEY2 KEY4 KEY2MOVPLEXA AVAILABLE KEY1 KEY2 KEY3 KEY4 KEY2

KEY5 KEY6MOVPLEXB SOFTDOWN KEY1 KEY2 KEY3 KEY4MOVPLEXC SOFTDOWN KEY1 KEY2 KEY3 KEY4MOVPLEXD AVAILABLE KEY1 KEY2 KEY3 =



Figure 61. INGMOVE Command Dialog Panel

INGMOVE


|

||

||||

||||

||

||

v The Systems columns show a list of the systems where a member of the MOVEgroup exists and could run. Different colors are used to indicate the state of thesystem or the member of the group that is running on that system, as follows:– Red if the system is down– Yellow if the member of the group that is running on that system is not

startable– Green if a member of the group is currently active on that system– Pink if the system is excluded– White if the system is avoided– Turquoise in all other cases

The home system, or systems, which are those that have the highest preferencevalue, are underlined.The system that has the highest actual preference is shown in reverse video,unless it is a home system. Note that this can be more than one system.

v The Move to column is an input field where you can specify the system that thegroup should be moved to. Moving a sysplex application move group meansterminating the member that is currently active and starting the member on thedesignated system.Initially, SA z/OS shows the best system to be used for a move operation in thisfield, based on the state of the group members and their preference points. Theproposed system is shown in blue.You can designate the system by specifying in the Move to field:– The name of the system.– An asterisk (*). This means that the group is moved back to its home system,

which is the one with the highest base preference value. If more than onehome system exists, it is moved to the first one in the list.

– An equals sign (=). This is a shorthand form that means to take the valuefrom the nearest field above with a value specified in it.

You can enter the following action codes in the Cmd field to launch othercommands:

B Start. Calls the INGREQ command dialog to make the resource available. See“INGREQ” on page 218 for further information.

C Stop. Calls the INGREQ command dialog to make the resource unavailable.See “INGREQ” on page 218 for further information.

D Invokes the INGRELS command to display dependency information and itsevaluation for the resource.

E Invokes the INGVOTE command, showing all requests currently present forthe resource. Allows the operator to cancel a request.

F Shows details about the resource by invoking the INGINFO command.

G Invokes the INGLIST MEMBERS=YES command to show all members for theselected application group in a new window.

I Invokes the INGSCHED command to show the resource overrides for theselected resource.

J Invokes the INGGROUP ACTION=MEMBERS command to show memberdetails.

M Moves the group to the designated system.

P Moves the group to the designated system when the group is next recycled.

INGMOVE


R Resets the preference values of the group members to the values that aredefined in the policy database.

X Boxes the group. The member that is currently active acquires a preference of2800 so that if the system is terminated the group will not move to anothersystem.

You can use the / character to place the selected line as the first line of the display.

Note: This panel does not support the FIND and SORT subcommands.

If you specify one or more systems Figure 62 is displayed to ask you forconfirmation.

For each group that is to be moved the panel shows:v The name of the groupv The name of the system where the group is currently activev The name of the system that the group should be moved tov Descriptive information about the action

Specifying GO at the command line or pressing the PF10 key carries out the moveoperation. Specifying CANCEL at the command line or pressing the PF11 keyreturns you to the previous panel.

Note: Pressing PF2 or PF3 has the same behavior as PF11.

INGMSGSPurpose

The INGMSGS command displays all important (that is, exceptional) messages thatcurrently exist for a given system. The command is also used to delete exceptionalmessages.

Syntax

►►REQ=DISPLAY

INGMSGSresource_name REQ=DELETE delete options

►

INGKYMV1 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 3Domain ID = IPSNO ---------- INGMOVE ---------- Date = 09/10/04Operator ID = NETOP1 Time = 12:23:25

Verify the Move Group activities

Group name Runs on Move to Action----------- -------- -------- --------------------MOVDISRN AOCB AOCD nowMOVPLEXA AOCA AOCB nowMOVPLEXB AOCB at recycle

Figure 62. INGMOVE Confirmation Panel

INGMOVE



domain_idsaplex_name*ALL


AUTONETLOG

►◄

delete options:

▼DOM=( msgid )QUAL=qualifier SEVERITY=sev

►

►,00:00

EXPIRED=(date ),time

Parameters

resource_nameAn optional parameter used as a filter. Only exceptional messages that areassociated with the specified resource are shown. The resource name cancontain a wildcard. More than 1 resource name can be specified. If no resourcename is specified, only messages that are not associated with a resourceautomated by SA z/OS are taken into account (MVSESA).

REQSpecifies the type of request to be performed:DISPLAY

Displays all exceptional messages for the resource. This is the defaultsetting.

DELETEDeletes the message(s) based on the delete settings:

DOMSpecifies one or more IDs of messages to be deleted. The message IDs must beseparated by a blank character and enclosed in parenthesis or quotes if morethan one message ID is specified. The message ID can contain wildcards.

QUALSpecifies a qualifier that is used to identify the message in addition to itsmessage ID.

SEVERITYSpecifies the severity of the message used as Filter Criteria. Valid entries areUNUSUAL, IMPORTANT and CRITICAL.

EXPIREDSpecifies the expiry date and time of the message. Any message that wasissued prior to the specified timestamp will be deleted when also the otherspecified filter criteria match. The date format is yyyy-mm-dd and the timeformat is hh:mm. The time specification is optional.

INGMSGS






The INGMSGS command can only be used when SA z/OS has initialized.

A qualifier is not displayed when invoking INGMSGS in line mode.

Examples

If you enter ingmsgs a panel similar to Figure 63 is displayed.

This panel displays exceptional messages that have been captured by SA z/OS. Anexceptional message is a message whose severity is either Unusual, Important orCritical. By default the messages are displayed in chronological order (the oldestmessage is shown at the top of the panel) but can be rearranged in any otherorder, for example, by severity with the SORT subcommand. The individualmessages are colored depending on their severity. The color attribute is defined viaSDF status definitions.

For each message the following information is shown:v The Timestamp column shows the date and time when the message was

captured.v The S column shows the severity assigned to the message. It can be:

U Unusual

INGKYMSG SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 26Domain ID = IPUFA -------- INGMSGS --------- Date = 11/23/09Operator ID = NETOP1 System = AOCA Time = 17:16:48

CMD: D Delete F INGINFO/DISPSYS

CMD Timestamp S Message--- ------------------- - -----------------------------------------------------

2009-11-23 09:08:05 C SYSTEM=AOCA RESOURCE=HGSIPLALWY/APL/AOCAAOF571I 09:08:05 : HGSIPLALWY SUBSYSTEM STATUS FOR JOB HGSIPLA IS STOPPED - AT SYS-OPS RELOAD

2009-11-23 09:08:05 C SYSTEM=AOCA RESOURCE=APLC/APL/AOCAAOF571I 09:08:05 : APLC SUBSYSTEM STATUS FOR JOB APLCIS BROKEN - AT SYS-OPS RELOAD

2009-11-23 09:08:06 C SYSTEM=AOCA RESOURCE=HGSTRTIPL/APL/AOCAAOF571I 09:08:06 : HGSTRTIPL SUBSYSTEM STATUS FOR JOBHSTRTIPL IS STOPPED - AT SYS-OPS RELOAD

2009-11-23 09:08:06 U SYSTEM=AOCA RESOURCE=HGDDSEXTC/APL/AOCAAOF571I 09:08:06 : HGDDSEXTC SUBSYSTEM STATUS FOR JOBHGDDSEXC IS CTLDOWN - AT SYS-OPS RELOAD



Figure 63. INGMSGS Command Dialog Panel

INGMSGS


I ImportantC Critical

v The Message column shows the message text, the system where the messagewas captured, the qualifier if present that is associated with the message and thename of the resource associated with the message. If no resource name is shown,the message is associated with the system.

You can enter the following action codes in the Cmd field to launch othercommands:

D Delete (DOM) the message. This also removes the message from any target ithas been forwarded to (SDF, NMC, TEP).

F Shows details about the resource that is associated with the message byinvoking the INGINFO or DISPSYS command.

INGNTFYPurpose

INGNTFY allows you to add, change, delete, and display notification operatorsettings.

Syntax

►► INGNTFYyour_opid

ON Settingsyour_opid

OFFyour_opid

ADD opid SettingsDELETE opidDISP opername

your_opidQUERY opid

TARGET= system_namedomain_IDsaplex_name*ALL

►

►OUTMODE= LINE

AUTONETLOG

►◄

Settings:

▼

CLASS=(4080)

CLASS= ( class ) ▼HELDMSG= ( type )

►

►DESC='description'

Parameters

ON Allows the operator who issues the command to receive notifications.

INGMSGS


OFFTurns off notifications for the operator who issues the command.

ADDAdds the operator specified in opid to the list of notification operators, orchanges the definition of the existing operator specified in opid.

Note: Use of the ADD function to change the definition of an existing operatorcompletely deletes the old definition. It is necessary to re-specify all messageclasses and held message types that you want this operator to retain. Thisallows you to remove unwanted message classes and held message types froman existing operator.

DELETERemoves the operator specified in opid from the list of notification operators.

DISPDisplays information about the operator that is specified in opername, whichcan also contain a wildcard, such as *abc, abc*, or *abc*.

QUERYDisplays information about the operator that is specified in opid.

opidThe ID of the operator to add, change, delete, or query.

your_opidThe ID of the operator issuing the command.

CLASSThe classes of messages the operator is to receive. See IBM Tivoli SystemAutomation for z/OS Messages and Codes for information about which classes arevalid. Up to ten comma-delimited classes, enclosed in parentheses, can bedefined for an operator. The default classes are 40 and 80, unless definedotherwise in the automation control file.

DESCAn optional description of the operator. If the description contains blanks,commas, or other punctuation characters it must be enclosed in singlequotation marks.

HELDMSGThe type or types of messages to hold on the operator's screen. If more thanone type is specified, the types should be separated by commas and enclosedin parentheses. The types are:

Type Meaning

A Immediate Action

D Immediate Decision

E Eventual Action

I Information

W System Wait


INGNTFY



For further details of message types and message notifications, see IBM TivoliSystem Automation for z/OS Messages and Codes.


Any changes you make using the INGNTFY command are in effect only until theautomation control file is reloaded.

The INGNTFY command can only be used when SA z/OS is initialized.

Examples

To turn your messages off, enter ingntfy off

To add notification operator Jim, assign him all messages in class 43, and holdImmediate Action type messages on his screen, enter:ingntfy add jim class=43 heldmsg=a

If no parameter is specified in the INGNTFY command, a panel similar toFigure 64 is displayed.

v The Cmd field lets you specify the command codes shown on the panel. Typethe appropriate letter next to the resource name and press Enter. The followingcommand codes are available:

A Add a notification operator using the settings of the selected operator.

C Show or change the settings for the selected operator.

D Delete the notification operator.

O Turn off message receiving for the selected notification operator.

AOFKAANT SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 6Domain ID = IPUN8 ---------- INGNTFY ---------- Date = 06/19/09Operator ID = NETOP1 Time = 20:12:52

Cmd: A Add C Show/Change settings D Delete O Turn OFF msg receiving

Cmd Operator System Log Rcv Description Classes--- -------- -------- --- --- ------------------- ----------------------–--

AUTNOTI1 AOC8 Y N MSG AOP 40 80DON AOC8 Y N DON JONES 40GIS AOC8 Y Y GISELA STUART 80MIK AOC8 Y Y MIK SMITH 60NOTI1 AOC8 N Y 40 41 42 43 44NOTI2 AOC8 N Y 80 81 82



Figure 64. INGNTFY Command Dialog Panel

INGNTFY


v The Operator field shows the operator ID. It is not necessarily defined toNetView.

v The System field shows the name of the system where the operator is defined.v The Log field shows a Y if the operator was logged on when the command

dialog was started, or an N if the operator was not logged on.v The Rcv (Receive) field shows a Y if the operator was receiving messages when

the command dialog was started, or an N if the operator was not receivingmessages.

v The Description field shows a description of the operator from either theautomation control file or the INGNTFY command dialog.

v The Classes field shows the classes that are assigned to the notify operators.

INGPAC

Purpose

The INGPAC command displays information about pacing gates, theircharacteristics and runtime statistics.

It also shows details about pacing gate contention with the resources currentlygranted access to the gate and those waiting for access to the gate.

The RESOURCE-keyword can be used to have INGPAC list all pacing gate(s) thatare associated with the resource denoted by the resname variable.

Syntax

►► INGPACpgnamelistRESOURCE=resname

filter criteria ►




AUTONETLOG

WAIT=YESWAIT=nnn ►◄

filter-criteria:

TYPE= STARTSTOP

SYSTEM=name

Parameters

pgnamelistA list of one or more pacing gate names, separated by blank or comma,enclosed in parentheses. Parentheses can be omitted if the list consists of onlyone element.

INGNTFY


|

|

||

||

||

|

|||||||||||||||||||||||

||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||

|

|

||||||||||||||||||||||||||||

|

|

||||

resnameThe fully qualified name of the application in automation manager notation forwhich the associated pacing gates are listed.

filter-criteriaSpecifies filter to further reduce the set of pacing gates being displayed. Thefollowing filters are displayed:

TYPE Specify START to only display pacing gates effective for starting ofapplications.

Specify STOP to only display pacing gates effective for stopping ofapplications.

SYSTEMSpecify the name of a system to only display pacing gates defined forthat system.







None.


The INGPAC command supports resource level security. If turned on, thefollowing profile in class SYSAUTO is checked:


AGT.sysplex.xcfgrp.RES_MANAGER_PACING UPDATE When command code R isissued to release a resource onthe INGPAC detail panel.

Usage other than listed in the table does not cause a resource level security check.For further details, refer to IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS Planning andInstallation.

Examples

If you enter INGPAC a panel similar to that shown in Figure 65 on page 186 isdisplayed:

INGPAC


|||

|||

|||

||

|||

|||

|||

|||

|||

||

|

|

|

||

||||

||||||

|||

|

|||

The amount of data depends on the screen size. Press PF10/11 to scrollhorizontally.v The CMD field lets you specify command codes. To use one of the command

codes shown, type the appropriate letter next to the pacing gate and press Enter.The following command codes are available:– D to display a detail panel showing pacing gate statistics and providing a

snapshot of resources currently using the pacing gate or waiting for use.– L to list all resources that potentially may use this pacing gate for start or

stop activities.

The SORT, FIND, and RFIND subcommands are supported. See “Varying theFormat of the Command Output” on page 17 or online help for furtherinformation.

Refer to the online help on the panel (PF1) for a description of individual fields.

If you enter command code D for a pacing gate, a panel similar to Figure 66 onpage 187 is displayed here:

INGKYPA0 Automation Control - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 10Domain Id . : IPUFL ------------ INGPAC ------------ Date . . : 07/11/14Operator Id : JMH Sysplex = AOC6PLEX Time . . : 15:38:14

CMD: D Details L List Resources

CMD Pacing Gate Type System Limit Num Res Num Wait Avg Wait--- -------------------- ----- -------- -------- -------- -------- --------

AWASGATE Start AOC6 2 0 0 4AWASGATE Stop AOC6 3 0 0 12WASGATE Start AOC6 2 18 16 491WASGATE Stop AOC6 NOLIMIT 0 0 -WASGATEA Start AOC6 1 0 0 -WASGATEA Stop AOC6 NOLIMIT 0 0 -WASGATEB Start AOC6 1 0 0 -WASGATEB Stop AOC6 NOLIMIT 0 0 -WASGATEC Start AOC6 1 0 0 -WASGATEC Stop AOC6 NOLIMIT 0 0 -


F9=Refresh F10=Previous F11=Next F12=Retrieve

Figure 65. INGPAC Pacing Gate(s) Display Panel

INGPAC


||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||

|||

||

||

|||

|

|||

The amount of data depends on the screen size. Press PF10/11 to scrollhorizontally.v The CMD field lets you specify command codes. To use one of the command

codes shown, type the appropriate letter next to the resource name and pressEnter. The following command codes are available:– I to display a panel with details about this application– R to release the resource to let it start or stop regardless of the pacing gate

status at the moment.

The SORT, FIND, and RFIND subcommands are supported. See “Varying theFormat of the Command Output” on page 17 or the online help for furtherinformation.

Refer to the online help on the panel (PF1) for a description of the individualfields.

INGPWPurpose

The INGPW command initializes the SA z/OS password protection feature. TheINGPW command processor maintains a VSAM file containing passwords for userIDs, called the password data set. These passwords are used when establishingsessions to external products. The records in the password data set are keyed usinga combination of the user ID and owner ID. Each record has these fields:

The current-password fieldThe new-password fieldThe password maskThe date-password-last-changed field

Domain Id . : IPUFL ------------ INGPAC ------------ Date . . : 07/11/14Operator Id : JMH Sysplex = AOC6PLEX Time . . : 15:38:14

Pacing gate: WASGATE Type: Start System: AOC6Description: WebSphere startup pacing gate Limit : 2

Wait time(s) Active time (s) Number Resources------------------ --------------------- ------------------Current: 541 Current: 21 Waiting: 7Average: 500 Average: 78 Active: 2Maximum: 903 Maximum: 303 Other: 0

CMD: I Resource Info R Release

CMD Resource Name Status Wait Actve Total Req Date--- ------------------------- -------- --------- --------- --------- --------

WAS05/APL/AOC6 Starting 602 28 630 07/09/14WAS25/APL/AOC6 Starting 614 13 627 07/09/14WAS21/APL/AOC6 Waiting 329 0 329 07/09/14WAS22/APL/AOC6 Waiting 329 0 329 07/09/14WAS26/APL/AOC6 Waiting 626 0 626 07/09/14WAS27/APL/AOC6 Waiting 626 0 626 07/09/14WAS28/APL/AOC6 Waiting 626 0 626 07/09/14WAS29/APL/AOC6 Waiting 626 0 626 07/09/14WAS30/APL/AOC6 Waiting 626 0 626 07/09/14



Figure 66. INGPAC Pacing Gate Detail Display Panel

INGPAC


|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||

|||

|

||

|||

||

|

|

|||||

|

|

|

|

The password change intervalPasswords are stored in encrypted format

Syntax

►► INGPW user_ID owner_ID ►

►,READ

,MASK=%X%X%X%X%X%X%X%X ,EXPINT=0,INIT

,MASK=mask ,EXPINT=int,MASK=%X%X%X%X%X%X%X%X ,EXPINT=0

,INIT=password,MASK=mask ,EXPINT=int

,DELETE,MASK=%X%X%X%X%X%X%X%X ,EXPINT=0

,REGEN,MASK=mask ,EXPINT=int

,UPDATE

►◄

Parameters

user_iduser id (4-32 characters). The parameter is case-sensitive.

owner_id(1-8 characters) the owning entity for which password maintenance services arerequired (custom value, policy entry, and so on, depends on consumer service).The parameter is case-sensitive.

READSpecifies that the appropriate password is retrieved from the data set. This isthe default if no request is specified.

INITUsed to create an entry in the password data set for the specified user_id andowner_id values and to specify an initial or new password value for the entry.Using INGPW with the INIT parameter is required as part of installing thepassword protection feature. An INIT request without a new password can beused to redefine expiration interval and password mask for the existingpassword record. If a value is specified for the MASK=mask keyword togetherwith the INIT keyword, then the value of the mask becomes the default maskfor the REGEN keyword.

passwordSpecifies initial/new password for the specified user_id and owner_id. Thepassword value must be between 4 and 32 characters long. The password iscase-sensitive.

DELETESpecifies that the record with the matching user_id and owner_id should bedeleted.

REGENCauses a new password to be generated (satisfying the requirements of the

INGPW


|

|

|

||||||||||

||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||

|

|

||

||||

|||

|||||||||

||||

|||

||

mask if it is specified). The current and new passwords are shown in responseto INGPW REGEN and any subsequent INGPW READ until there is a INGPWUPDATE.

MASKDescribes the format used when generating new passwords for specifieduser_id and owner_id records. The password generation mask consists of 4 to 32pairs of characters, each pair defining the attributes of a single passwordcharacter. The first character of each pair determines how the second characteris used.

! A password character of the value indicated by the following maskcharacter is required.

% A password character of the type indicated by the following maskcharacter is required.

? A password character of the type indicated by the following maskcharacter is optional.

The password mask is processed from left to right, and generates a string ofcharacters with a length equal to or greater than the number required.Passwords of at least 4 characters are required. The password character typecodes indicate a set of characters to be used when generating a new password.The valid type codes are case-sensitive and are as follows:v $ - National onlyv A - Uppercase alphabetic onlyv a - Lowercase alphabetic onlyv B - Uppercase Alphabetic/Nationalv b - Lowercase Alphabetic/Nationalv C - Uppercase Consonant (Alphabetic, no vowels)v c - Lowercase Consonant (Alphabetic, no vowels)v E - Even numericsv N - Numeric onlyv O - Odd numericsv V - Uppercase vowels onlyv v - Lowercase vowels onlyv W - Uppercase alphanumerics (no vowels)v w - Lowercase alphanumerics (no vowels)v X - Uppercase alphanumericsv x - Lowercase alphanumericsv Y - Uppercase alphabetical/Nationalv y - Lowercase alphabetical/Nationalv Z - Uppercase alphanumeric/National (no vowels)v z - Lowercase alphanumeric/National (no vowels)

For example, a password mask of !N!N!T%$%C?N%N%E would causepasswords to be generated that begin with 'NNT' followed by a nationalcharacter, a consonant, and a two or three digit even number. If a value is notspecified for mask, then the system-defined default is %X%X%X%X%X%X%X%X.

INGPW


|||

||||||

|||

|||

|||

|||||

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|||||

EXPINTDefines the expiration interval used when defining or generating newpasswords.

intnumber of days before current password expiration and next passwordregeneration. Default is 0 (no password expiration required). The expirationinterval can be 0 to 365 days.

UPDATEMakes the new password generated by REGEN become the current password.

Return Codes

0 Successful completion.

4 No storage obtained.

8 Record not found in VSAM data set.

12 Error Processing VSAM data set.

16 Bad Invocation.

20 Not Authorized.

Security considerations

For security reasons, using command-class checking on INGPW is stronglyrecommended. Refer to IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS Planning andInstallation for more details about command authorization.

Access to the password records can be protected using theING.PW.user_id.owner_id resource in the SYSAUTO class defined in RACF. Thefollowing example shows how to define an INGPW resource in RACF:RDEFINE SYSAUTO ING.PW.ENSOPERATOR.ZBXENS UACC(NONE)

The user record for user_id ENSOPERATOR and owner_id ZBXENS is defined as aresource in the RACF class SYSAUTO with a universal access attribute of NONE.Note that you use a wildcard character to specify the resource more generically ifthat is suitable for your environment.

Level of password access

READ: read password record (READ request)

UPDATE: update existing password (UPDATE request)

CONTROL: initialize or change existing record(INIT,REGEN requests)

ALTER: delete password record (DELETE request)

Usage

Use a blank instead of a comma to separate the user_id and owner_id values.

If parameter values are required in mixed case (for example, mixed casepasswords), you must use the 'NetVasis INGPW' form to make sure that the data ispassed without uppercase translation. Failure to do so may result in incorrect datareturned or generated by the INGPW command.

INGPW


|||

||||

||

|

||

||

||

||

||

||

|

|||

|||

|

||||

|||

||

||

|||

|||

|

|

||||

ExamplesNETVASIS INGPW TestUser TESTSRV,INIT=MYp01WDs,MASK=%A%A%a%N%N%A%A%a

The command initializes a new record for used_id=TestUser and owner_id=TESTSRVwith initial mixed case password MYp01WDs and set MASK to generate passwords inmixed case.INGPW TestUser TESTSRV,INIT=MYp01WDs,MASK=%A%A%a%N%N%A%A%A

The command initializes a new record for used_id=TestUser and owner_id=TESTSRVwith initial upper case password MYP01WDS and set MASK to generate passwords inuppercase.

INGPLEX

PurposeThe INGPLEX command comprises all the sysplex-related functions of SA z/OS. Itcan be called in full mode and in line mode.

Syntax

►► INGPLEXCDS

TYPE= ARMCFRM DETAIL=CHPIDLOGRSFMSYSPLEX

(1)CFCONsoleDUMP

(2)IPL DEL = IPLRECD

SHOW= IPLRECDDISP= IPLRECCOMP= IPLREC WITH= IPLRECLIST=sysname

SDumpSLIP

ID=slipid SYSTEM=sysname(3)

STRSVCdump

sysname(4) LIST

REQ = COMPDUMP

SYStem

►




►◄

INGPW


|

|

|||

|

|||

||

|

||

|

|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||

||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||

|

IPLRECD:

sysname/timestamp

IPLREC:

sysname/timestamp[/member[/suffix]]

Notes:

1 For details, see “INGCF” on page 97.

2 Line mode only

3 For details, see “INGSTR” on page 255.

4 Line mode only

ParametersCDS

Displays information about CDSs and supports replacement of the currentalternate CDS by a new one as well as making the alternate CDS the newprimary. For further information about INGPLEX CDS refer to “INGPLEXCDS” on page 196.

TYPEThe type of CDS that the CDS function is issued for. Possible values areARM, CFRM, LOGR, SFM, and SYSPLEX.

DETAILIf you specify this parameter with the CDS function, the channel paths forthe respective CDS type are displayed.

CF This is the equivalent of the INGCF command.

CONsoleDisplays information about consoles.

DUMPShows the DUMP submenu.

IPLShows and compares IPL information. It can be issued with the followingoptions:

DELDeletes a single IPL record and all its related information. Note that theDEL parameter is supported in line mode only.

SHOWShows the details panel of the specified IPL record.

DISPShows all, one, or particular PARMLIB members used by the IPL of thespecified system and at the specified date and time.

COMPCompares all, one, or particular PARMLIB members used by the IPL of thespecified system and at the specified date and time with those specified inthe WITH parameter.

INGPLEX


|

||||||||||

|

||||||||||

|

||

||

||

||

|

|||||

|||

|||

||

||

||

|||

|||

||

|||

||||

LISTShows the IPL summary records of the specified system.

WITHThe COMP parameter compares all, one, or particular PARMLIB membersused by the IPL of the specified system, at the specified date and time withthose specified in parameter WITH.

sysnameIs the name of the system in the sysplex.

timestampIs the IPL date and time. The format is YYYYMMDDhhmm.

memberIs the name of the PARMLIB member without the suffix.

suffixIs the suffix of the PARMLIB member.

For further information about INGPLEX IPL refer to “INGPLEX IPL” on page207.

SDUMPDisplays and controls the SDUMP options being set on all systems in thesysplex. For further information about INGPLEX SDUMP refer to “INGPLEXSDUMP” on page 208.

SLIPDisplays and controls all SLIP traps of all systems in the sysplex. Controlling islimited to DISABLE, ENABLE, or REMOVE a SLIP trap. The followingparameters are supported:

ID Limits the line mode output and the initial full screen display to theparticular SLIP trap ID.

slipidIs the ID of a SLIP trap. It can consist of one to four characters. Wildcardsare not supported.

SYSTEMLimits the line mode output and the initial full screen display to theparticular system.

For further information about INGPLEX SLIP, see “INGPLEX SLIP” on page214.

STRThis parameter is equivalent to the INGSTR command. See “INGSTR” on page255.

SVCdumpAllows you to issue a multisystem dump of up to 15 address spaces includingdata spaces owned by the address spaces, structures used by the addressspaces, and XCF group members on the same or on other systems in thesysplex of those groups the address spaces have joined. The followingparameters are supported:

sysnameIs the name of the system that has joined the XCF group of theNetView that the operator is logged on to.

REQ Specifies the type of the line-mode request.

INGPLEX


||

||||

||

||

||

||

||

||||

||||

|||

|||

|||

||

|||

||||||

|||

||

LIST Requests the list of all active address spaces. This is the defaultwhen the parameter is omitted.

COMPRequests the list of all components of the address spaces thatare passed to the command.

DUMPRequests a dump of the address spaces and their componentsthat are passed to the command.

For further information about INGPLEX SVCDUMP, see “INGPLEXSVCdump” on page 211.

SYStemDisplays information about a member system of the sysplex.

TARGETFor information on the TARGET parameter, refer to “TARGET Parameter” onpage 14.

OUTMODEFor information on the OUTMODE parameter, refer to “OUTMODEParameter” on page 16.

ExampleIf you specify INGPLEX without parameters, the selection panel shown inFigure 67 is displayed.

Use this panel to launch other command dialogs showing sysplex-relatedinformation.

Use one of the following command codes to invoke another command dialog:

1 INGPLEX SYStemDisplays the target sysplex name, its GRS mode and its systems. For eachsystem the following details are shown:

INGLX000 SA z/OS - Command DialogsDomain Id = IPSFM --------- INGPLEX --------- Date = 04/07/05Operator Id = NETOP1 Time = 18:50:47

Sysplex . . . . . . : SYS1PLEX

Select the desired command: INGPLEX ...

1 Display systems (including ETR & signalling paths) SYStem2 Display consoles CONsole3 Control coupling facilities CF4 Control couple data sets CDS

6 Display IPL information IPL7 Control dumps DUMP

10 Control all structures (allocated and unallocated)


F12=Retrieve

Figure 67. INGPLEX Selection Panel

INGPLEX


|||

|||

|||

||

||

|||

|||

|

|||

||

|

|||

v System namev Statusv SSUM actionv SSUM interval timev SSUM weightv SFM failure detection intervalv WLM query timestampv Total free SUsv SUs usedv SU-consuming resourcesv Free SUs

See “INGPLEX SYStem” on page 202.

2 INGPLEX CONsoleDisplays the following details for the target sysplex:v Master console namev WTO & WTOR buffer utilizationv Number of queued messages of various typesv Awaiting mounts and operator requestsv List of consoles with more details, such as:

– Name– Status– Authority– Number of WTOR buffers, etc.

See “INGPLEX CONsole” on page 204.

3 INGPLEX CFDisplays the coupling facilities in the sysplex, their spaces, and CF levels.Each coupling facility can be drained and enabled. The structures of eachcoupling facility can be displayed, rebuilt, and forced. Duplexing can bestarted and stopped, when supported. The paths of the coupling facilitycan be displayed and set online or offline.

See “INGCFL” on page 115.

4 INGPLEX CDSDisplays the couple data sets in the sysplex. For each couple data set,paths and more detailed information can be displayed. The couple datasets can be switched and new alternate data sets can be allocated.

See “INGPLEX CDS” on page 196.

6 INGPLEX IPLDisplays and compares IPL information being used during the IPL of anoperating system. The information shown or compared can be varied fromall available information to the content of a particular PARMLIB member.

See “INGPLEX IPL” on page 207.

7 INGPLEX DUMPDisplays the default dump options as well as the setting of the slip trapsfor all systems in the sysplex. It also allows you to change the settingseither locally, sysplexwide, or for some systems in the sysplex. In addition,the function allows to take multisystem SVC dumps.

INGPLEX


|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

||

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

||||||

|

||||

|

||||

|

|||||

See “INGPLEX SDUMP” on page 208, “INGPLEX SVCdump” on page 211,and “INGPLEX SLIP” on page 214.

10 INGSTRDisplays all allocated and unallocated structures, independent of thecoupling facility. The structures can be displayed, rebuilt, forced, andduplexing can be started and stopped, when supported. You can alsoreallocate all structures from their current location to their preferredlocation if all systems in the sysplex support the XCF REALLOCATEcommand.

See “INGSTR” on page 255.

INGPLEX CDSPurpose

The CDS function displays information about all the couple data sets in thesystem, including details of the corresponding policies. For every CDS type that isrequired by the implementation INGPLEX CDS allows the operator to:v Switch from the primary to the alternate CDSv Define a new alternate CDSv Change the active policy (if applicable)

Actions are started by specifying an action code for a selected CDS type on thepanel.

Actions

The possible action codes are:

*A: Allocate alternate CDSReplaces the current alternate CDS for a selected CDS type with a newone. There are two options how to do this:v The alternate CDS is allocated automatically by SA z/OS.

This automatic allocation requires that spare volumes have been defined,and that one of these spare volumes is available.

v Specify the data set that is to be used as the new alternate CDS.If you specify your own data set, observe the following:– The data set must exist– It must have been formatted with the XCF formatting tool– It must be at least as large as the current primary CDS, which means

that every value you have passed to the XCF formatting tool (forexample, in the case of a sysplex CDS, the maximum number ofsystems supported) must be equal to or greater than thecorresponding value of the primary CDS.

C: Display CHPIDsDisplays information about the channel paths for the selected CDS type.

D: Display CDS informationDisplays detail information about the selected CDS type. This comprisesthe formatting parameters and the policies that are contained in the CDS, ifapplicable. When the CDSs of the selected type contain policies, the detailinformation panel provides further actions:

INGPLEX


||

|||||||

|

||

|

|||

|

|

|

||

|

|

|||

|

||

|

|

|

|

|||||

||

|||||

D: Display policyDisplays details about the selected policy.

S: Start policyMakes the selected policy the active policy.

The policy switch must be confirmed before it is executed.

*P: Switch alternate CDS to primary CDSMakes the alternate CDS the primary one. Because an alternate CDS is nolonger available after the switch, SA z/OS shows a confirmation panelbefore the action is performed. On the panel, you can specify a newalternate CDS. When CDS recovery is switched on and you do not supplyyour own alternate CDS, SA z/OS tries to allocate a new alternate CDSautomatically. The special requirements for manual and automatic creationof the new alternate CDS are the same as those for the replacement of thealternate CDS (action code A).

Examples

The following example illustrates the switch from the primary to the alternateCDS.

The following examples start with issuing INGPLEX CDS and pressing F8 on the CDScommand dialog to scroll down the CDS list. The panel shown in Figure 68 isdisplayed.

The panel header contains sysplex-related information about the system that theINGPLEX command was executed on. The details are as follows:v The System field shows the name of the system.v The Interval field shows the system failure detection interval in seconds. This

interval is the amount of time XCF lets elapse without a status update beforeassuming that the system failed.

v The OPNotify field shows the number of seconds that XCF waits beforenotifying the operator of a potential system problem.

INGKX300 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 7 of 18Domain ID = IPSFO ------- INGPLEX CDS ------- Date = 03/01/01Operator ID = NETOP1 Sysplex = KEY1PLEX Time = 10:08:10

System..: KEY3 Interval...: 86400 OPNotify: 86400Maxmsg..: 999999 Cleanup....: 60 Retry...: 255Classlen: 956 Max CFlevel: 9 COUPLExx: COUPLER1SMREBLD.: 1 Max SMlevel: 9

Cmds: A allocate alternate CDS / C display CHPIDsD display CDS information / P switch alternate CDS to primary CDS

Type MS Volume Dev Couple Dataset Name-------- -- ------ ---- --------------------------------------------

_ CFRMPRIMARY..: 16 KEY1SP 260B SYS1.KEY1.PXESCDSALTERNATE: 16 KEYUSR 261C SYS1.KEY1.AXESCDS

_ LOGRPRIMARY..: 8 KEY1SP 260B SYS1.KEY1.PLOGCDSALTERNATE: 8 KEYUSR 261C SYS1.KEY1.ALOGCDS

Command ===>F1=Help F2=End F3=Return F6=RollPF7=Back PF8=Forward F9=Refresh F12=Retrieve

Figure 68. INGPLEX CDS Command Dialog Panel

INGPLEX CDS


||

||

|

|||||||||

|

||

||||

||

|

|||

||

v The Maxmsg field shows the default value for the maximum amount ofkilobytes of message buffer space. This default value is used when MAXMSG isnot specified on SETXCF START commands.

v The Cleanup field shows the number of seconds that XCF waits for cleanup ofmembers.

v The Retry field shows the default value for the retry limit. This value is usedwhen the RETRY keyword is not specified on SETXCF START commands.

v The Classlen field shows the default length (in bytes) of messages allowed for atransport class. This value is used when CLASSLEN is not specified on theSETXCF START CLASSDEF command.

v The Max CFlevel field shows the maximum CFLEVEL supported by this system.This system can connect to a coupling facility with a higher CFLEVEL than thevalue of Max CFlevel but would not be enabled to use any functions supportedby the higher level coupling facility.

v The COUPLExx field shows the COUPLExx Parmlib member used for systemIPL.

v The SMRBLD field shows whether (value 1) or not (value 0) system-managedrebuild has been activated in the CFRM couple data set.

v The Max SMlevel field shows the maximum system-managed process levelsupported by this system.

The main part of the screen shows information about the primary and alternateCDSs for every CDS type. Press F8 to scroll and display further entries. The MSfield shows the maximum number of systems that are supported by the CDS.

Making an Alternate CDS the Primary CDSIn this example, the alternate LOGR couple data set is made the new primary CDS.A new alternate CDS is automatically generated.

To switch the LOGR couple data set, enter P before LOGR on the panel displayed inFigure 68 on page 197, and press Enter. INGPLEX CDS displays the confirmationpanel shown in Figure 69 on page 199.

INGPLEX CDS


|||

||

||

|||

||||

||

||

||

|||

|

||

|||

|

Use this panel to determine how a new alternate CDS is to be created after theswitch. You can either specify your own new alternate CDS or let SA z/OS createit for you. When you specify the new alternate CDS yourself, the data set mustexist and must have been formatted with the XCF formatting tool. Automaticcreation requires that spare volumes have been defined for LOGR couple data sets.

Pressing F10 causes SA z/OS to generate the new alternate CDS. After returning tothe CDS command dialog, refreshing the panel, and scrolling down with F8, thepanel looks as shown in Figure 70.

INGKX30A SA z/OS - Command DialogsDomain ID = IPSFO ------- INGPLEX CDS ------- Date = 03/01/01Operator Id = NETOP1 Sysplex = KEY1PLEX Time = 10:08:13

SETXCF PSWITCH Confirmation

You are going to remove the LOGR primary couple data set.The alternate couple data set SYS1.KEY1.ALOGCDSbecomes the primary as soon as you proceed with the GO function key.Immediately after the switch, automation will try to allocate a new alternatecouple data set on one of the spare volumes defined during the customization.If you want the automation to allocate your own alternate couple data setcomplete the necessary information below.

Your alternate couple dataset...

Name ==>

Volume ==>

Command ===>F2=End F3=Return F6=Roll

F10=Go F11=Cancel F12=Retrieve

Figure 69. Confirmation Panel for Switching from the Current Primary CDS to the AlternateCDS


System..: KEY3 Interval...: 86400 OPNotify: 86400Maxmsg..: 999999 Cleanup....: 60 Retry...: 255Classlen: 956 Max CFlevel: 9 COUPLExx: COUPLER1SMREBLD.: 1 Max SMlevel: 9

Cmds: A allocate alternate CDS / C display CHPIDsD display CDS information / P switch alternate CDS to primary CDS

Type MS Volume Dev Couple Dataset Name-------- -- ------ ---- --------------------------------------------

_ CFRMPRIMARY..: 16 KEY1SP 260B SYS1.KEY1.PXESCDSALTERNATE: 16 KEYUSR 261C SYS1.KEY1.AXESCDS

_ LOGRPRIMARY..: 8 KEYUSR 261C SYS1.KEY1.ALOGCDSALTERNATE: 8 AOCUSR 262B AOC.CDS.TEST.LOGR.CDS02

Command ===>F1=Help F2=End F3=Return F6=RollPF7=Back PF8=Forward F9=Refresh F12=Retrieve

Figure 70. INGPLEX CDS Command Dialog Panel after the Switch

INGPLEX CDS


|||||

|||

|

The previous alternate LOGR CDS has become the primary, and there is a newalternate, which was created by SA z/OS.

Switching the CFRM PolicyIn this example, the active CFRM policy is switched.

Enter D before CFRM on the panel displayed in Figure 68 on page 197, and pressEnter. The panel shown in Figure 71 is displayed.

The panel shows information about the names and locations of the CDSs. Thepanel also shows the parameters that were used by the formatting tool of XCF forthe allocation of the CDS. The POLICY column, for example, displays themaximum number of policies the CDS can contain. Furthermore, the panel showsinformation about the policies in the CDS, for example, how many couplingfacilities and structures are defined in every policy, and which policy is currentlyactive.

To switch to the HIRPOL policy, enter S before this policy and press Enter.INGPLEX CDS displays the confirmation panel shown in Figure 72 on page 201.


CFRM Couple Data Set InformationData Set InformationVolume Device FORMAT TOD Data Set Name------ ------ ------------------- --------------------------------------------KEY1SP 260B 08/29/2000 08:51:30 SYS1.KEY1.PXESCDSKEYUSR 261C 08/29/2000 08:47:42 SYS1.KEY1.AXESCDSControl Card InformationMS POLICY CF STR CONNECT SMREBLD SMDUPLEX-- ------ -- --- ------- ------- --------16 8 4 64 16 1 0Policy InformationCmds: D display policy / S start policy

Name CF Str Date Time Userid-------- -- --- ---------- -------- --------

_ BZOEPOL ACTIVE 2 19 02/10/2001 10:05:47 BZOE_ HIRPOL 2 19 02/19/2001 19:45:57 HIR_ HIRPOL1 1 8 08/25/2000 09:20:04 HIR


PF8=Forward F9=Refresh F12=Retrieve

Figure 71. CFRM Couple Data Set Information Panel before Policy Switch

INGPLEX CDS


||

|

|

||

|

|||||||

|||

Displaying the Channel Paths for a CDS TypeIn this example, the channel paths for the CFRM couple data sets are displayed.

Enter C before CFRM on the panel displayed in Figure 68 on page 197, and pressEnter. The panel shown in Figure 73 is displayed.

v The System field shows the name of the sysplex members.v The T field (for 'type') indicates whether the CDS is the primary (value 'P') or

alternate (value 'A').v The DEVN field displays the number of the device that the CDS resides on.

INGKX30C SA z/OS - Command DialogsDomain ID = IPSFO ------- INGPLEX CDS ------- Date = 03/01/01Operator Id = NETOP1 Sysplex = KEY1PLEX Time = 10:13:17

SETXCF START Confirmation

You are going to start a new CFRM CDS policy named HIRPOL .

The current policy

BZOEPOL

will be stopped as soon as you proceed with the GO function key,



Figure 72. Confirmation Panel for Policy Switch


CFRM Channel Path InformationSystem T DEVN CHPIDs SSID-------- - ---- --------------------------------------- ----KEY1 P 260A E4=+ E5=+ E2=+ E3=+ 2600

A 2610 E4=+ E5=+ E2=+ E3=+ 2600KEY2 P 260A E4=+ E5=+ E2=+ E3=+ 2600

A 2610 E4=+ E5=+ E2=+ E3=+ 2600KEY3 P 260A E4=+ E5=+ E2=+ E3=+ 2600

A 2610 E4=+ E5=+ E2=+ E3=+ 2600KEY4 P 260A 13=+ 22=+ 30=+ 94=+ 2600

A 2610 13=+ 22=+ 30=+ 94=+ 2600



Figure 73. Channel Path Information for CFRM Couple Data Sets

INGPLEX CDS


|

|

|

|||

|

||

|

v The CHPIDs field shows the status of the paths to the devices in the formatchpid=status_code. The codes are those of the operating system. They have thefollowing meaning:

+ The path is logically and physically available and I/O on the path wassuccessful.

* The path is physically, but not logically available. The subchannel's logicalpath indicator is off but I/O to the path is successful. You can use thecommand VARY PATH (ddd,nn),ONLINE to make channel path nn logicallyavailable to device ddd.

- The path is neither logically nor physically available. The subchannel'slogical and physical indicators are both off for this channel path. You canuse the command CONFIG CHP(nn),ONLINE to make the channel path logicallyavailable to all devices connected to the channel.

& The device is reserved to another path. This indicator applies to devices withthe dynamic pathing selection feature.

< The path is installed but not physically available. The start subchannelrequest received a condition code of 3.

> The device microcode has detected an error and will not allow I/O tocomplete on the path.

B The path is unable to communicate. The device indicates that a busy orreserve condition exists on the path.

C A controller error occurred while accessing the device.

D A device error occurred while accessing the device.

I Intervention is required; the device is not ready.

R The path is available and the device is reserved to this path/group. Thisonly applies to devices with the dynamic pathing feature.

T A time out has occurred; there is no response from the device. The cause ofthe time out is undetermined and this condition is transient.

U A storage control unit or storage director error occurred while accessing thedevice.

X Unable to determine the failing unit.v The SSID field displays the storage subsystem that the device belongs to.

INGPLEX SYStemPurpose

The SYSTEM function displays the target sysplex name, its GRS mode and itsmember systems.

Example

Figure 74 on page 203 shows an example of the INGPLEX SYSTEM commanddialog panel.

INGPLEX CDS


|||

|||

|||||

|||||

|||

|||

|||

|||

||

||

||

|||

|||

|||

||

|

||

|

||

|

|||


C Displays the online or offline status of one or more processors and any vectorfacilities, or ICRFs attached to those processors.

E Displays the timer synchronization mode and ETR ports.

I Displays IPL information.

O Displays IOS-related configuration information.

S Displays the number of megabytes of central and expanded storage assignedand available to the system.

D Displays the device number of one or more inbound or outbound signallingpaths that XCF can use and information about inbound or outbound XCFsignalling paths to this system.

T Displays detailed signalling path information for all coupling facilitystructures.

The following information is displayed:v The Sysplex field shows the name of the sysplex.v The GRS Mode field shows the GRS mode of the target system. The mode can

be either STAR or RING.v The Cmd field allows you to specify command codes. To use one of the

command codes shown, type the appropriate letter next to the resource name,and press Enter.

v The System column shows the name of the system.v The Status column shows the status of the system.v The Monitor Timestamp column shows the last time stamp recorded for status

monitoring on this system.v The INTERVAL column shows the system failure detection interval in seconds.

This interval is the time XCF allows to elapse without a status update beforeassuming that the system failed.

AOFKX100 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 4Domain ID = IPSFP ----- INGPLEX SYSTEM ------ Date = 27/01/06Operator ID = NETOP1 Time = 16:29:12

Sysplex . . . . . . : KEY1PLEXGRS Mode . . . . . : STAR

Display more info: C CPU E ETR I IPL O IOS S STOR/ESTORSignalling Path : D device T structure

Monitor ----------- SSUM -----------Cmd System Status Timestamp INTERVAL Action TIME WEIGHT--- -------- -------- --------- -------- ---------- -------- ------

KEY1 ACTIVE 16:28:34 86400 ISOLATE 50 50KEY2 ACTIVE 16:28:35 86400 ISOLATE 50 15KEY3 ACTIVE 16:28:34 86400 ISOLATE 50 15KEY4 ACTIVE 16:28:36 86400 ISOLATE 50 15



Figure 74. INGPLEX SYSTEM Command Dialog Panel 1

INGPLEX SYSTEM


|

|||

||

||

||

|||

||||

|||

|

|

||

|||

|

|

||

|||

The last three columns contain configuration data of the SFM policy (if applicable).v The SSUM Action field shows the SSUM action. It can be one of the following:

– ISOLATE– DEACTIVATE– RESET– PROMPT– N/A

v The SSUM TIME field shows the SSUM interval as specified in the current SFMpolicy.

v The SSUM WEIGHT field shows the SSUM weight specified in the current SFMpolicy. This value is used in sysplex reconfigurations after a signallingconnectivity failure.

Use the PF11 key to view WLM-related information to the right, as shown inFigure 75.

v The Timestamp field shows the last time stamp when capacity data was queriedfrom WLM.

v The SUs Total field shows the number of available SUs.v The SUs Used field shows the number of used SUs in the last 10 minutes.v The Resource field shows the number of SU-consuming resources with a desired

state of AVAILABLE.v The SUs Exp. field shows the number of free SUs, taking into account the

resources that SA z/OS is about to start or stop.

INGPLEX CONsolePurpose

The CONSOLE function displays the following information for the target sysplex:v The name of the master consolev WTO & WTOR buffer utilization

AOFKX100 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 4Domain ID = IPSFP ----- INGPLEX SYSTEM ------ Date = 27/01/06Operator ID = NETOP1 Time = 16:29:16

Sysplex . . . . . . : KEY1PLEXGRS Mode . . . . . : STAR

Display more info: C CPU E ETR I IPL O IOS S STOR/ESTORSignalling Path : D device T structure

--------------------------- WLM Data ---------------------------Cmd System Timestamp SUs Total SUs Used Resources SUs Exp.--- -------- ---------------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ----------

KEY1 2006-01-27 16:28 32343721 594686 675 31749046KEY2 2006-01-27 16:28 32411392 617101 1 31794291KEY3 2006-01-27 16:28 32603037 541798 1 32061239KEY4 2006-01-27 16:28 32967516 83846 3 32883672



Figure 75. INGPLEX SYSTEM Command Dialog Panel 2

INGPLEX SYSTEM


|

||||||

||

|||

|||

||

|

|

||

||

||

|

|

|

|

v Number of queued messages (replies) of various typesv Awaiting mountsv Operator requests and list of consoles (name, status, authority, number of WTOR

buffers, UD, device, system, ALTGRP, MSCOPE)

Example

Use one of the following command codes to get more information for the selectedconsole or consoles:

D Displays details for the console

R Displays current requests for the console

The fields on the command dialog panel display the following information:v The Sysplex field shows the name of the sysplex.v The Message Buffer Usage field shows the limit of the number of WTO message

buffers allowed outstanding.v The Awaiting Replies field shows a decimal number representing the number of

messages awaiting replies.v The Immediate Action field shows a decimal number representing the number

of outstanding immediate action messages (with descriptor codes 1 or 2). If thenumber is greater than 99999, asterisks appear in this field.

v The Critical Action field shows a decimal number representing the number ofoutstanding critical eventual action messages (with descriptor code 11). If thenumber is greater than 99999, asterisks appear in this field.

v The Master Console field shows the name of the master console.v The Reply Buffer Usage field shows the limit of the number of WTOR message

buffers allowed outstanding. The maximum value of yyyy is specified by theRMAX parameter in the CONSOLxx parmlib member.

v The Eventual Action field shows a decimal number representing the number ofoutstanding eventual action messages (with descriptor code 3). If the number isgreater than 99999, asterisks appear in this field.

INGLX400 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 6Domain Id = IPSFP ----- INGPLEX CONSOLE ----- Date = 04/12/01Operator Id = NETOP1 Time = 10:36:26

Sysplex . . . . . . : KEY1PLEX Master Console . . . : --none--Message Buffer Usage : 14 / 9999 Reply Buffer Usage . : 14 / 99Awaiting Replies . . : 14 Eventual Action . . : 0Immediate Action . . : 0 Awaiting Mounts . . : 0Critical Action . . : 0 Operator Requests . : 0- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Cmds: D Details / R Requests

Console Status AUTH NBUF UD Device System ALTGRP MSCOPE-------- -------- ------ ---- -- ------ -------- -------- --------MASTER INACTIVE MASTER n/a Y -none- --none-- --none-- *ALLMASTER1 INACTIVE ALL n/a N -none- --none-- --none-- *ALL03 INACTIVE MASTER n/a N -none- --none-- --none-- *ALL04 INACTIVE MASTER n/a N -none- --none-- --none-- *ALL05 INACTIVE MASTER n/a N -none- --none-- --none-- *ALL06 INACTIVE MASTER n/a N -none- --none-- --none-- *ALL



Figure 76. INGPLEX CONS Command Dialog Panel

INGPLEX CONSOLE


|

|

||

||

||

||

||

|

|

||

||

|||

|||

|

|||

|||

v The Awaiting Mounts field shows a decimal number representing the number ofoutstanding mount requests.

v The Operator Requests field shows a decimal number representing the numberof outstanding requests for operator intervention.

v The following details are shown for each MCS console that has been defined. Ifthe MSCOPE information does not fit on the primary screen, the PF10 functionkey is available for you to toggle between the primary panel and the panelshowing MSCOPE information.

v The Console field shows the name of the console as specified in the CONSOLxxparmlib member.

v The Status field shows the status of the console. The following values can occur:

HARDCOPYHardcopy log. This condition is only indicated if the console is active onthe system where the command processes.

ACTIVEActive console

ACTIVE-PIn the process of becoming an active console. This condition is onlyindicated if the console is active on the system where the command isprocessing.

MASTERMaster console

INACTIVEInactive console

INACT-PIn the process of becoming a non-active console. This condition is onlyindicated if the console is active on the system where the command isprocessing.

PROB-DETThe active system console is in the problem determination mode. PD isindicated only for the system console.

SUBSYSSubsystem-allocatable console

v The AUTH field shows which commands may be entered from this console. Thefollowing values can occur:

ALL Any INFO, SYS, IO, or CONS command may be entered from thisconsole.

CONS INFO commands and any commands from the console command groupmay be entered from this console.

INFO Any command from the informational command group may be enteredfrom this console.

IO INFO commands and any commands from the I/O Control commandgroup may be entered from this console.

MASTERThe specified console is authorized to enter any operator command.

NONEThis console does not have command authority.

INGPLEX CONSOLE


||

||

||||

||

|

|||

||

||||

||

||

||||

|||

||

||

|||

|||

|||

|||

||

||

SYS INFO commands and any commands from the system control commandgroup may be entered form this console.

v The NBUF field shows the number of WTO message buffers currently queued tothis console. If nnnn is greater than 9999, asterisks (****) appear in this field.

v The UD field shows whether this console is receiving messages with the UDattribute.

v The Device field shows the device number of the console as specified in theCONSOLxx parmlib member.

v The System field shows the system name of the active console.v The ALTGRP field shows the alternate group defined for this console.v The MSCOPE field lists the name of the system or systems that this console is

receiving unsolicited messages from. Note that these systems might be differentfrom the system where this console is physically attached.

INGPLEX IPLPurpose

With the INGPLEX IPL command you can view and compare the IPL informationof the operating system. The IPL information is collected by the PROCLIB member(for further information, refer to the installation procedure step "ConfigureSYS1.PARMLIB Members" in "Configuring SA z/OS on Host Systems" of IBMTivoli System Automation for z/OS Planning and Installation). If a system does notbehave after IPL as expected, the IPL recording function enables you to identifyparameters that were changed, for example, since the last IPL. The recordingfunction enables you to compare different IPL scenarios. INGPLEX IPL is a toolthat helps to identify and resolve the cause of startup problems. The followinginformation can be displayed:v The selected system (or blank)v The name of the sysplexv The maximum number of IPLs that are stored for each systemv An indicator showing whether comments in PARMLIB members are ignored

when collecting information

INGPLEX CONSOLE


|||

||

||

||

|

|

|||

||

|

||||||||||

|

|

|

||

Example

Use F10 and F11 to scroll through all available columns. SORT by column numbersis supported as well as the FIND and RFind command to locate information on thepanel. You can also limit the display to a particular system by specifying thesystem name in the appropriate entry field.


C Compares the complete IPL information with another IPL record. A secondpanel will be displayed where you can select the second record.

D Displays detailed information about this IPL record.

E Erases the IPL information records. This action must be confirmed.v The Sysplex field shows the name of the sysplex.v The System field shows the name of the system in the sysplex.v The IPL Timestamp field shows the date and time of the IPL. The format is

YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM converted to local timezone.v The Dev field shows the IPL device number.v The Volume field shows the volume serial of the IPL device.v The OpSys field shows the name of the operating system, for example, z/OS or

OS/390®.v The Release field shows the release level of the operationg system.v The FMID field shows the FMID of the operating system.

For further information about the panel fields refer to the online help.

INGPLEX SDUMPPurpose

The INGPLEX SDUMP command lets you control the default dump optionssysplexwide.

INGLX200 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 6Domain ID = IPSFM ------- INGPLEX IPL ------- Date = 02/22/02Operator ID = NETOP1 Time = 17:59:27

System . . . . . ==> Max. number of IPL records/system : 10Sysplex . . . . . ==> KEY1PLEX Suppression of PARMLIB comments . : N- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Cmds: C compare record / D display details / E erase record

System IPL Timestamp Dev Volume OpSys Release FMID-------- ---------------- ---- ------ ------ -------- --------KEYA 2002-02-22 13:52 770E 120204 z/OS SP7.0.2 HBB7705KEYA 2002-02-09 09:28 770E 120204 z/OS SP7.0.2 HBB7705KEYA 2002-02-08 15:28 770E 120204 z/OS SP7.0.2 HBB7705KEYA 2001-12-10 14:31 0707 120147 z/OS SP7.0.2 HBB7705KEYB 2002-02-22 13:59 770E 120204 z/OS SP7.0.2 HBB7705KEYB 2002-02-14 16:24 770E 120204 z/OS SP7.0.2 HBB7705KEYB 2002-02-11 18:46 770E 120204 z/OS SP7.0.2 HBB7705KEYB 2002-02-11 15:36 770E 120204 z/OS SP7.0.2 HBB7705KEYB 2002-02-11 14:22 770E 120204 z/OS SP7.0.2 HBB7705


F8=Forward F9=Refresh F10=Previous F11=Next F12=Retrieve

Figure 77. INGPLEX IPL Main Panel

INGPLEX IPL


Example

The dump functions can be invoked directly by specifying the commands, or fromthe dump panel of the INGPLEX command selecting the appropriate command. Inaddition, you can invoke the dump submenu from the main panel of the INGPLEXcommand selecting command 7. The panel shown in Figure 78 is displayed.

If you select option 1, the panel shown in Figure 79 is displayed.

The following command code is available:

INGLX250 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 12Domain Id = IPSFP --------- INGPLEX --------- Date = 02/26/02Operator Id = NETOP1 Time = 16:30:36

Sysplex . . . . . . : KEY1PLEX

Select the desired command: INGPLEX ...

1 Control default SDUMP options SDUMP2 Issue SVC dumps SVCDUMP3 Control SLIP trap settings SLIP


F12=Retrieve

Figure 78. INGPLEX Dump Options Panel

INGLX251 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 12Domain Id = IPSFP ------ INGPLEX SDUMP ------ Date = 02/26/02Operator Id = NETOP1 Time = 15:44:58

Sysplex . . . . . ==> KEY1PLEX Permission . . . . : ALL- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Cmds: C change

System Dump options-------- -------------------------------------------------------------------KEY1 Q= Type= Buffers= 0K MaxSpace= 500M MsgTime=99999

LSQATRT

KEY2 Q= Type= Buffers= 0K MaxSpace= 500M MsgTime=99999LSQA

TRTKEY3 Q= Type= Buffers= 0K MaxSpace= 500M MsgTime=99999

LSQATRT

KEY4 Q= Type= Buffers= 0K MaxSpace= 500M MsgTime=99999



Figure 79. INGPLEX SDUMP Panel

INGPLEX SDUMP


C changeInvokes the modification panel by providing the options of the selected systemas input:

v The Sysplex field shows the name of the sysplex.v The System field shows the name of the system in the sysplex.v The Permission field shows your authorization level.v The Dump options field shows the default SDUMP options of all systems in the

sysplex. For each system the following details are displayed:

Q= Shows whether or not SDUMP quiesces the system while dumping thecontents of the SQA or CSA.

TYPE=Causes SVC dump to dump the cross memory address spaces that thecaller has when SVC dump gets control (XMEM) or when the errorcausing the dump occurs (XMEME).

BUFFERS=Shows the reserved storage exclusively used by SVC dump. This storagecan be used while capturing the contents of the common area storage.

MaxSpaceShows the maximum amount of virtual storage that SVC dump can useto capture volatile virtual storage data, summary dump data, andcomponent-specific data before writing the dump to DASD.

MsgTimeShows how long (mm) the message IEA793A is shown at the console.When the system deletes the message, it also deletes the captured dump.

The FIND and RFIND commands are supported. If you specify command code C,the panel shown in Figure 80 is displayed.

The modification panel allows you to modify all SDUMP options. Furthermore,you can delete SDUMP options. After entering your changes you can set the newoptions for:

INGLX252 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 12Domain Id = IPSFP ------ INGPLEX SDUMP ------ Date = 02/26/02Operator Id = NETOP1 Time = 16:18:08

System . . . . . . : KEY1Sysplex . . . . . . : KEY1PLEX Recommended options are underlined.

NODUMP ... ==> N (all other options below are ignored)

ALLNUC ... ==> ALLPSA(*) ==> COUPLE ... ==> CSA ...... ==>GRSQ ..... ==> LPA ...... ==> LSQA ..... ==> Y NUC ...... ==>PSA ...... ==> RGN ...... ==> SERVERS .. ==> SQA(*) ... ==>SUMSUMP(*) ==> SWA ...... ==> TRT ...... ==> Y WLM ...... ==>XESDATA .. ==> (*) = The NOxxx option is generated when not selected.

Q(uiesce) ==> (YES / NO)Type ..... ==> (XMEM / XMEME)Buffers .. ==> 0K (nnnnK / nnnM)MaxSpace . ==> 500 (MB)MsgTime .. ==> 99999 (minutes)

Command ===>F1=Help F2=End F3=Return F4=Set SYS F5=Undo all F6=Roll

F10=Set SYSS F11=Set SYSP F12=Retrieve

Figure 80. INGPLEX SDUMP Modification Panel

INGPLEX SDUMP


v The selected systemv All systems in the sysplexv Selected systems in the sysplex

To set the options press the appropriate F-key. If you want to modify selectedsystems in the sysplex, you are prompted for the systems that the SDUMP optionsare being changed for. To reset the options to the state when the modificationpanel was invoked press F5 Undo all.

Note: The user must be authorized to change any SDUMP option. Theauthorization can be any of those that are used for controlling coupling facilitiesand couple data sets.

For further information about the panel fields refer to the online help.

INGPLEX SVCdumpPurpose

The INGPLEX SVCDUMP function allows you to issue a multisystem dump of upto 15 address spaces of a single system including their data spaces and structures.

Example

v The Sel field lets you select a system that a multisystem dump is issued from.v The System field shows the name of the system having joined the same XCF

group the operator is logged on to.

For further information about the panel fields refer to the online help. Afterselecting a system and pressing Enter, the panel shown in Figure 82 on page 212 isdisplayed.

INGLX26S SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 6Domain Id = IPSFP ----- INGPLEX SVCDUMP ----- Date = 02/06/02Operator Id = NETOP1 Time = 17:05:17

The following systems of sysplex KEY1PLEX are registered to the automation.Use any non-blank character to select one system and then press ENTER.

Sel System--- --------

KEY2KEY3KEY4


F12=Retrieve

Figure 81. INGPLEX SVCDUMP Target System Selection Panel

INGPLEX SDUMP


If, for example, you select the VTAM address space and the WATS address space(which is a user), press Enter and then press F5, the panel shown in Figure 83 isdisplayed.

Address space VTAM has some data spaces (D), one list structure (L) and someXCF group members (M). TSO user WATS has nothing.

The following command codes are supported:

D Deselects the previous selection.

S Selects a local address space, data space, structure, or XCF group memberaddress space for the SVC dump.

INGLX260 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 38 of 63Domain Id = IPXFG ----- INGPLEX SVCDUMP ----- Date = 03/11/02Operator Id = NETOP1 Time = 12:26:26

System . . . . . ==> KEYASysplex . . . . . ==> KEYAPLEX- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Cmds: D/S de-/select job names for the SVC dump (up to 15 can be specified)

Jobname ASID WorkUnitID Userid-------- ---- ---------- --------TNF 0024TRACE 0004TSO 003B STC05983 STCUSERVLF 0019VMCF 0025VTAM 001E STC05982 STCUSER selectedWATS 0217 TSU06587 _ selectedWLM 000BXCFAS 0006

Command ===>F1=Help F2=End F3=Return F5=NextPnl F6=Roll


Figure 82. INGPLEX SVCDUMP Address Space Selection Panel

INGLX261 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 9Domain Id = IPXFG ----- INGPLEX SVCDUMP ----- Date = 03/11/02Operator Id = NETOP1 Time = 12:34:04

System . . . . . . : KEYASysplex . . . . . . : KEYAPLEX- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Cmds: D/S de-/select the areas to be dumped (max. 113 structures)

A selection of the job name includes all related areas.

Jobname ASID T Data Space/XCF Group Member/Structure-------- ---- - -------------------------------------------VTAM 001E

D IST90C95D 00012IXLD 00013IXLL ISTGENERIC selectedM ISTCFS01.KEYB.VTAM.IPXVH___DEIBMIPS selectedM ISTXCF.KEYB.VTAM.IPXVH___DEIBMIPS selectedM IXCLO008.KEYB.VTAM.M28 selected

WATS 0217Command ===>F1=Help F2=End F3=Return F4=PrevPnl F5=NextPnl F6=Roll


Figure 83. INGPLEX SVCDUMP Address Space Detail Panel

INGPLEX SVCdump


If you press F5, the dump option selection panel is displayed, as shown inFigure 84.

The panel shows the default dump options that are set on invocation. Afterspecifying the dump title, press F5 to issue the dump. When the dump is taken,the function returns to the address space selection panel with all selections cleared.The SORT, FIND and RFIND commands are supported for selection panels only.For further information about the panel fields refer to the online help.

Executing this command in line-mode requires the following 5 steps:1. Execute the command:

INGPLEX SVC sysname [REQ=LIST] OUTMODE=LINE

2. Remove the first 5 lines and the last line from the output. Then select theaddress spaces that you want to dump and save the entries using a PIPEcommand:PIPE ... | SAFE INGRX260

Keep the same format that is returned in the REQ=LIST output.3. Execute the command:

INGPLEX SVC sysname REQ=COMP OUTMODE=LINE

4. Again remove the first 5 lines and the last line from the output. Then select theaddress spaces and the associated components, such as data spaces, XCF groupmembers, and cache and list structures and save these entries using a PIPEcommand:PIPE ... | LIT \dump title/sdata options/stropt\ |SAFE INGRX260

Keep the same format that is returned in the REQ=COMP output. The dumpoptions passed by the LIT stage correspond exactly to the values in Figure 84.

5. Execute the command:INGPLEX SVC sysname REQ=DUMP OUTMODE=LINE

INGLX262 SA z/OS - Command DialogsDomain Id = IPSFP ------- INGPLEX SVC ------- Date = 02/26/02Operator Id = NETOP1 Time = 18:02:56

System . . . . . . : KEY3Sysplex . . . . . . : KEY1PLEX

Title .... ==>==>

SDATA Dump Options (recommended options are underlined)ALLNUC ... ==> ALLPSA(*) ==> Y COUPLE ... ==> CSA ...... ==> YGRSQ ..... ==> Y LPA ...... ==> LSQA ..... ==> NUC ...... ==> YPSA ...... ==> RGN ...... ==> Y SERVERS .. ==> SQA(*) ... ==> YSUMSUMP(*) ==> Y SWA ...... ==> TRT ...... ==> Y WLM ...... ==>XESDATA .. ==> (*) = The NOxxx option is used when not selected.

Structure Dump Options (SUMMARY and ADJUNCT/ENTRYDATA are mutually exclusive)COCLASS .. ==> EMCONTROLS ==> LISTNUM .. ==> STGCLASS . ==>ADJUNCT .. ==> ENTRYDATA ==> SUMMARY .. ==>

Command ===>F1=Help F2=End F3=Return F4=PrevPnl F5=Dump F6=Roll

F12=Retrieve

Figure 84. INGPLEX SVCDUMP Dump Option Panel

INGPLEX SVCdump


INGPLEX SLIPPurpose

With the INGPLEX SLIP command you can display serviceability level indicationprocessing (SLIP) traps being set at all systems in the sysplex. With INGPLEX SLIPyou can view, enable, disable, and delete the SLIP trap defined in the sysplex.

"PIPE NETV INGPLEX SVC "sysname" OUTMODE=LINE" ,"| SEP" ,"| NOT TAKE 5" ,"| NOT TAKE LAST" ,"| STEM z."

"PIPE STEM z.","| LOCATE 1.6 /RASP /" , /* locate RASP and */

"1.6 /TRACE /" , /* TRACE address space */"| SAFE INGRX260"

"PIPE NETV INGPLEX SVC "sysname" REQ=COMP OUTMODE=LINE" ,"| SEP" ,"| NOT TAKE 5" ,"| NOT TAKE LAST" ,"| STEM z."

dumpopt = ’Dump RASP and TRACE in line mode’ || ,’/ALLNUC ALLPSA CSA GRSQ LSQA PSA RGN SQA SWA TRT’

"PIPE STEM z.","| NLOC 17.1 /M/" , /* don’t process XCF group members */"| LIT \"dumpopt"\" ,"| SAFE INGRX260"

"PIPE NETV INGPLEX SVC "sysname" REQ=DUMP OUTMODE=LINE" ,"| CONS ONLY"

Figure 85. INGPLEX SVC Line Mode Sample

INGPLEX SLIP


Example


+ Shows the settings of the SLIP trap.

- Hides the settings of the SLIP trap.

D Disables the SLIP trap.

E Enables the SLIP trap.

R Deletes the SLIP trap.

The SORT, FIND and RFIND commands are supported.

Note: The user must be authorized to enable, disable, and delete a SLIP trap. Theauthorization can be any of those that are used for controlling coupling facilitiesand couple data sets.

For information about the panel fields refer to the online help.

INGRELSPurpose

The INGRELS command shows the relationships that are defined for the givenresource.

Syntax

►► INGRELS resourceTARGET= system_name



AUTONETLOG

►

INGLX270 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 96Domain Id = IPSFP ------ INGPLEX SLIP ------- Date = 02/26/02Operator Id = NETOP1 Time = 18:20:21

System . . . . . ==> (leave blank for all systems)Slip Trap Id . . ==> (leave blank for all ids)Sysplex . . . . . ==> KEY1PLEX Permission . . . . : ALL- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Cmds: +/- display/hide settings D disable E enable R remove

System Id Status Settings-------- ---- -------- ---------------------------------------------------KEY1 XB37 ENABLEDKEY1 XD37 ENABLEDKEY1 XE37 ENABLEDKEY1 X0E7 ENABLEDKEY1 X0F3 ENABLEDKEY1 X013 ENABLEDKEY1 X028 ENABLEDKEY1 X13E ENABLED



Figure 86. INGPLEX SLIP Main Panel

INGPLEX SLIP


►WAIT=nnn

SHOW=EXPANDED

SHOW=COLLAPSED►◄

Parameters

resourceSpecifies the name of the resource to be displayed. The format isname/type[/system].




WAIT



SHOWSpecifies whether or not to show just the relationships or also the relationshipconditions. It can be:

EXPANDEDThis shows relationships and their conditions. This is the default.

COLLAPSEDThis shows just the relationships.


None.

Usage

The INGRELS command operates sysplexwide. For an overview see “Overview ofCommands that Operate Sysplexwide” on page 13.

Examples

If you enter ingrels and the name of a resource, a panel similar to that inFigure 87 on page 217 is displayed.

INGRELS


v The Cmd field lets you specify command codes. To use one of the commandcodes shown, type the appropriate letter next to the resource name and pressEnter. The following command codes are available:

+ Shows the condition details that exist for the selected relationship. This isonly applicable if the relationship conditions are collapsed.

- Collapses the condition details so that only the relationship is shown.

E Shows the requests and votes of the resource (it displays the INGVOTEpanel for the resource).

F Shows detailed information about the resource (it displays the INGINFOpanel for the resource).

J Displays the INGGROUP panel for the resource.

S Focuses on the selected resource. This is equivalent to specifying the selectedresource name in the Resource field at the top of the panel.

v The Name field shows the name of the resource that the specified resource has arelationship with. This is referred to as the relationship partner and is also calledthe supporting resource.

v The Type field shows the type of the resource.v The Target field shows the name of the system where the resource resides.v The Dir field shows the direction of the relationships as seen from the specified

resource.

F Forward. The relationship exists from the specified resource to the partnerresource.

B Backward. The relationship exists from the partner resource to the specifiedresource.

INGKYRL0 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 115Domain ID = IPUN8 ---------- INGRELS ---------- Date = 01/02/03Operator ID = NETOP1 Sysplex = AOC8PLEX Time = 13:15:00

Resource => NETVIEW/APL/AOC8Target => System name, domain id or sysplex name

Cmd: - Collapse + Expand E INGVOTE F INGINFO J INGGROUP S Focus

Cmd Name Type System Dir Relationship--- ----------- ---- -------- --- ---------------------------------------------

ALWAYSUP APL AOC8 B HasParent - StrongCond: stopDependency - UNSATISFIEDCond: reallyDown - UNSATISFIEDCond: allExpectedDown

AOC8 SYG AOC8 B HasMemberCond: startDependencyCond: stopDependencyCond: extStart - UNSATISFIEDCond: extStop - UNSATISFIEDCond: extStopDelayedCond: prestartDependencyCond: prestopDependencyCond: groupTriggerStartupInhibited - YESCond: groupTriggerShutdownInhibited - YESCond: groupAutomationDisabled - UNSATISFIED

BZOENEW APL AOC8 B HasParent - StrongCond: stopDependency - UNSATISFIED

Command ===>PF1=Help PF2=End PF3=Return PF5=Collapse all PF6=Roll

PF8=Forward PF9=Refresh PF11=Expand all PF12=Retrieve

Figure 87. INGRELS Command Dialog Panel

INGRELS


v The Relationship field shows the name of the relationship that exists betweenthe two resources. This defines the dependency that exists between the tworesources. The status of all descendants will be considered for a relationshipwith strong chaining. For weak chaining only the direct descendants arechecked. Weak is the default. Strong chaining causes SA z/OS to check allrelationships of the involved resources along the dependency graph.If the relationship name contains 'active', this means that an attempt is made tobring the supporting resource in the required state to satisfy the dependency.Active is the default.

The following PF keys are supported:v Use the PF5 key to collapse the visible relationship conditions for all

relationships.v Use the PF11 key to see the relationship condition details for all relationships.

If you collapse all condition details, the INGRELS panel looks like Figure 88.

INGREQPurpose

The INGREQ command lets you:v Initiate the shutdown process for one or more resourcesv Initiate the startup process for one or more resourcesv Cancel a request that was previously made for the specified resource

INGKYRL0 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 27Domain ID = IPUN8 ---------- INGRELS ---------- Date = 01/02/03Operator ID = NETOP1 Sysplex = AOC8PLEX Time = 13:15:41

Resource => NETVIEW/APL/AOC8Target => System name, domain id or sysplex name

Cmd: - Collapse + Expand E INGVOTE F INGINFO J INGGROUP S Focus

Cmd Name Type System Dir Relationship--- ----------- ---- -------- --- ---------------------------------------------_ ALWAYSUP APL AOC8 B HasParent - Strong_ AOC8 SYG AOC8 B HasMember_ BZOENEW APL AOC8 B HasParent - Strong_ ECICAOR APL AOC8 B HasParent - Strong_ ECICSTOR APL AOC8 B HasParent - Strong_ EDB2IRLM APL AOC8 B HasParent - Strong_ EDM2MSTR APL AOC8 B HasParent - Strong_ EIMSCTL1 APL AOC8 B HasParent - Strong_ EIMSDBRC APL AOC8 B HasParent - Strong_ EOPCCNTL APL AOC8 B HasParent - Strong_ EOPCTRK APL AOC8 B HasParent - Strong_ HASPASPR APL AOC8 B HasParent - Strong_ MOVSYS1 APL AOC8 B HasParent - Strong_ MOVSYS2 APL AOC8 B HasParent - Strong_ MOVSYS3 APL AOC8 B HasParent - Strong_ MULTIEVT APL AOC8 B HasParent - Strong_ MULTISTR APL AOC8 B HasParent - Strong

Command ===>PF1=Help PF2=End PF3=Return PF5=Collapse all PF6=Roll

PF8=Forward PF9=Refresh PF11=Expand all PF12=Retrieve

Figure 88. INGRELS Command Dialog Panel with All Details Collapsed

INGRELS


Syntax

To start up or shut down resources:

►►NETVASIS

INGREQ resourceALL

REQ= START startup parmsUPSTOP shutdown parmsDOWN

►

►PRI=LOW

PRI= FORCEHIGH

,00:00EXPIRE=( )

* ,timedate

+hh:mm

►

►TIMEOUT=(interval )

MSG,

CANCEL

JOB=YES►

►

▼REMOVE= ( AVAILABLE )DEGRADEDSYSGONEUNKNOWN

*NO

►

►

▼

OVERRIDE=NOfeedback option

OVERRIDE=( ALL )DPYFLGSTSTRG

PRECHECK=YES

PRECHECK=NO►

►VERIFY=YES

VERIFY= NOWTOR

SOURCE=source

WAIT=YES

WAIT=NOWAIT=nnn

CMT=text►




APPLPARMS=►

INGREQ


►MULT=YES

►◄

Startup parms:

SCOPE=ONLY

SCOPE=ALL

TYPE=NORM

TYPE=user

Shutdown parms:

SCOPE=ALL

SCOPE= ONLYCHILDREN

TYPE=NORM

TYPE= IMMEDFORCE

RESTART=NO

RESTART=YES►

►INTERRUPT=NO

INTERRUPT=YES

To cancel a request:

►► INGREQ resource REQ=CANCELSOURCE=source

VERIFY=YES

VERIFY= NOWTOR

►

►WAIT=YES

WAIT=NOWAIT=nnn



►

► feedback option ►◄

Feedback option:

FDBK=( MSG ,G ,max_time )MSG/userid ,F ,exp_status

,BWAIT

Parameters

NETVASISPrefix the INGREQ command with NETVASIS if you want to pass thedescription text in lower or mixed case.

resourceSpecifies the name of the resource to be processed. The format isname[/type[/system]]. Wildcards are supported. In fullscreen mode, if more thanone resource matches the wildcard specification, a selection panel is displayed.

INGREQ


In line mode, if more than one resource matches the wildcard specification andMULT=YES is specified, all selected resources are processed. Multiple resourcespecification in line mode without MULT=YES causes an error message to bedisplayed.

To shut down all resources for a system, specify name/SYG/name, where name isthe system name. Alternatively, you can specify ALL.

Note: You need not specify the full name of the resource. This applies to thesystem as well as to the type. If the resource name is unique within the namespace of the automation manager, the system name need not be specified. Ifthe resource name is unique within the appropriate types, the type need not bespecified. A valid resource name could be, for example, CICSPROD.

REQSpecifies the request to be carried out. It can be either START or STOP.Alternatively you can use UP or DOWN.

Specify CANCEL if you want to cancel a request.

PRISpecifies the priority given to the request. It can be:

FORCETakes precedence over requests posted with HIGH priority, forexample, INGREQ=START PRI=FORCE overrules an INGREQ=STOPPRI=HIGH request.

HIGH High priority.

LOW Low priority. This is the default.

EXPIRESpecifies the expiry date and time of the request. The request is automaticallyremoved when it expires. The date format is yyyy-mm-dd. The time format ishh:mm.

Alternatively, you can specify a relative time, for example, +04:00. The relativetime will be automatically converted into the absolute date/time. Themaximum relative time interval is 24:00 hours.

TIMEOUTSpecifies the interval used to check whether the request has been successfullycompleted. Either a message is issued, or the request is cancelled if the requesthas not been satisfied after that time. The format is mm.

MSGSpecifies that a message should be issued telling the notify operator thatthe request was not satisfied within the expected time interval. The defaultis to issue a message.

CANCELSpecifies that the request should be canceled.

JOBIndicates the specified resource is a job name. The job name can contain awildcard.

REMOVEIndicates the condition when the request is automatically removed, regardlessof whether the request is satisfied or not. If the specified condition matches theobserved status of the resource, the request is deleted.

INGREQ


AVAILABLEWhen starting a resource and specifying REMOVE=AVAILABLE, thiscauses the request to be removed from the system as soon as the resourcebecomes available.

DEGRADEDAs soon as the observed status of the resource becomes DEGRADED, thestart request is removed. Thus there will be no requests outstanding for theresource and a INGREQ ALL will go through even with low priority.

SYSGONEIf the system where the automation agent runs leaves the sysplex, theobserved status of all resources running on that system becomesSYSGONE.

UNKNOWNIf the automation agent stops, the observed status of all resourcescontrolled by the automation agent becomes UNKNOWN.

Alternatively you can specify an asterisk (*) or NO to reset theinstallation-defined default.

OVERRIDESpecifies the overrides to be considered for the request. These can be one ormore of the following:

NO Specifies that no override is done. For example, a resource will not bestarted unless its startup flag is set on and its trigger, if used, is satisfied.This is the default.

ALLSets the DPY, FLG, STS, and TRG flags to on. For startup this means thatthe resource is made available regardless of the automation flag settings, itstrigger setting or the state of the start dependencies defined for theresource. For shutdown this means that the resource is made unavailableregardless of its automation flag settings, the trigger state and the state ofthe stop dependencies.

DPYCauses the status of the relevant START/STOP dependencies that aredefined for the resource to be ignored.

Note: This parameter should only be used with STOP SCOPE=ONLY.

FLGThe appropriate automation flags will be ignored for the resource.

STSThe current observed status of the resource is ignored by the agent duringINGREQ precheck processing. Override STS does not affect automationmanager processing. Therefore, the automation manager may still reject therequest after the agent has forwarded it to the automation manager.

TRGThe current trigger settings will be ignored when determining whether ornot the resource can be started or stopped.

PRECHECKSpecifies whether or not the startup or shutdown process should pre-validateany actions before actually performing them. The value can be:

INGREQ


|||

YESValidation is performed for the entry resources. This is the default.

NO Validation is not performed before the command is issued.

The following validation is done for each resource that is to be affected by theINGREQ request:v START or STOP ability, depending on current status

The automation manager will not order the start of a resource that is in aHarddown status. A check is performed to make sure that the resource is notin STOPPED, BROKEN, or CTLDOWN status. The resource is also checkedto verify that it is not currently involved in an automated shutdown. For astop request, a check is performed to verify that the resource is not currentlyinvolved in an automated startup.

v Automation flag checks, depending on the request typeIf the global automation flag is on, for a start request, the initstart flag ischecked when the resource is currently in DOWN status. For any otherdown state, the restart flag is checked.For a stop request, the terminate flag is checked.

v Existence of start or stop commandsA check is performed to make sure that the definitions for appropriate startor stop commands exist.

These checks are made on each automation agent that hosts a specific resourcebefore any automation manager involvement in the request. Any failure that isdetected during the precheck phase results in an INGREQ request failure. Thisis indicated by a non-zero return code and a relevant error message that isissued and delivered as set by the OUTMODE parameter.

VERIFYSpecifies whether the startup or shutdown process should be verified. Thefollowing specifications are valid:

YES Depending on the NetView task type that the INGREQ command isrunning on, the verification is either displayed on a fullscreen panel or,in line mode, shown on the console. The latter is also done whenOUTMODE=LINE is coded.

WTORThe list of affected resources is displayed before the startup orshutdown begins. The operator is prompted to verify the list viaWTOR.

NO No verification is performed. VERIFY is set to NO for unattendedtasks. Otherwise it is set to YES.

The default depends on the type of task that the INGREQ command runs on.

SOURCESpecifies the originator of the request. The default is OPERATOR for an OSTand AUTOOPS for an autotask. When REQ=CANCEL, this parameter is usedas a filter. Only those requests from the named source are cancelled. Wildcardsare supported, for example, OP*. An asterisk (*) matches a string of arbitrarylength and a percentage sign (%) matches a single character.


INGREQ


The variable nnn is the number of seconds to wait before giving up andreporting that a timeout has occurred. The maximum time interval is 999seconds.

CMTSpecifies descriptive information about the request. The maximum length is120 characters. If the text contains embedded blanks, it must be enclosed inquotation marks or parentheses.



APPLPARMSThe content of APPLPARMS is put into the &APPLPARMS variable.

MULTSpecifies that more than one resource will be accepted when running in linemode, if the resource wildcard specification results in multiple resources.

SCOPESpecifies whether the startup or shutdown affects a resource or its descendants,or both. Valid options are:

ONLYSpecifies that only the specified resource is started or stopped. This is thedefault for startup.

ALLSpecifies that the resource and its descendants are started or stopped. Thisis the default for shutdown.

CHILDREN (shutdown only)Specifies that only the descendants of the resource are stopped.

TYPESpecifies the type of the startup or shutdown. Each type must be defined inthe policy database. Valid options are:

NORM (startup or shutdown)Specifies a normal startup or shutdown. This is the default.

IMMED (shutdown only)Specifies an immediate shutdown.

FORCE (shutdown only)Specifies a forced shutdown.

user (startup only)Specifies a user-defined startup type.

Note:

Note: If no startup commands are defined for the specified start type, thestartup commands for start type NORM are issued.

If the specified stop type is not defined in the policy when shutting down theresource, SA z/OS uses the next lower stop type instead.

INGREQ


The value specified here will be overridden by the INGSETSTARTTYPE/STOPTYPE value if previously specified. However, a stop type ofFORCE, wherever specified, will always be honored.

Use the VERIFY option to view the TYPE value that will be used for thisrequest.

Once a shutdown has got to a PROBLEM or DENIED state, you can submitanother shutdown request against the resource, specifying a differentshutdown type or override parameters or both.

If you want to escalate the shutdown of a child subsystem, you can issue theINGREQ directly against it, but you must use a higher priority than theshutdown request against the parent was made with.

RESTART (shutdown only)Specifies whether the resource should be restarted automatically when it hasbeen shutdown completely. Valid options are:

NO Specifies that no restart is performed. This is the default.

YESSpecifies that a restart is performed.

INTERRUPT (shutdown only)Specifies whether or not a request to shut down a resource should interruptthe startup phase of the resource:

NO If the resource is starting, the automation manager waits for the resource'sUP message before proceeding with the shutdown. This is the default.

YES

The automation manager interrupts the startup process as soon as this stoprequest is submitted.

FDBKSpecifies the feedback parameter that causes the final result of the command tobe reported back to the designated instance.

MSG Causes message signaling of the successful or unsuccessful completionof the command to be performed.

The message is sent back to the originator of the command. Theoriginator is determined by the NetView OPID(S) function unless theuser ID is specified. Depending on the status, either message ING300Ior ING301I is issued. The message text contains the command that wasprocessed successfully or failed.

useridIdentifies the NetView user ID of the person to be notified ifdifferent to the originating user.

Use the following values to specify when to issue the message:

G Issue the message only when the resource has reached its expectedstatus.

F Issue the message only if the resource did not reach its expectedstate in the specified time interval.

B Issue the message in all cases.

WAIT To wait for the completion of the command (denoted by the max_time

INGREQ


parameter). Note that the WAIT option is rejected when the INGREQcommand executes on a work operator.

max_timeThe time interval in NetView format (mm:ss, :ss, mm or hh:mm:ss) thatSA z/OS will wait. If the specified resource has not reached theexpected state, the command is considered to have failed and theoperation is posted in error.

exp_statusThe observed status that the resource should be in to considercommand processing to be complete. The status can be abbreviated, forexample, AV for Available. More than 1 status can be specified. Here isa list of possible Observed Status values and their shortest possibleabbreviations: AVAILABLE (A), UNKNOWN (U), SYSGONE (SY),SOFTDOWN (SO), HARDDOWN (H), STARTING (STAR),DEGRADED (D), STOPPING (STO), PROBLEM (P), WASAVAILABLE(W), and STANDBY (STAN).


To use the INGREQ command system operations must be initialized.

The FDBK parameter will only monitor resources within the local sysplex.


The INGREQ command supports resource level security. If turned on, thefollowing profiles in class SYSAUTO are checked:



UPDATE Unless authority isCONTROL

CONTROL When SCOPE, OVERRIDE,or INTERRUPT is used witha value other than thedefault (IBM supplied orinstallation default)

If multiple resources are affected multiple profiles are checked. For START andSTOP requests the request is carried out or rejected as a whole. CANCEL requestsare processed individually.


Usage

The INGREQ command operates sysplexwide. For an overview see “Overview ofCommands that Operate Sysplexwide” on page 13.

Examples

If you enter INGREQ a panel similar to Figure 89 on page 227 is displayed.

INGREQ


|

||

||||

|||||

|||||||

|||

||

v The Resource field shows the name of the resource to be processed. The formatis name/type[/system]. Wildcard is supported.

v The Target field shows the name of the system (system name, domain ID, orsysplex name) that the command should be routed to. Specifying this is onlynecessary if the resources are not part of the local sysplex.

v The Request field shows the request to be carried out. This is either START orSTOP. Alternatively you can use UP or DOWN. To remove a previously maderequest from the same source specify CANCEL.

v The Type field shows the type of the startup or shutdown. Valid shutdowntypes are NORM, IMMED and FORCE as well as any other type defined in thepolicy database for the resource. Specify a question mark (?) to display the list ofdefined startup types.

v The Scope field shows whether the startup or shutdown affects this resource orits descendants, or both.

v The Priority field shows the priority given to the request.v The Expire field shows the expiry date and time when the request will be

removed.v The AutoRemove field shows the condition when the request is automatically

removed regardless of whether the request is satisfied or not.v The Restart field shows whether the resource should be restarted automatically

when it has been shutdown completely. This applies only when requesting ashutdown of a resource.

v The Override field shows the overrides to be considered for the request. Theparameter can be used to bypass the conditions or settings that would otherwiseprevent a resource, or resources, from starting or shutting down.

v The Verify field shows whether the startup or shutdown process should beverified. If YES or WTOR is entered, the list of affected resources is displayedbefore the startup or shutdown begins. You will be prompted to verify the list. IfWTOR is specified, you will be prompted via a WTOR. If NO is entered, thestartup or shutdown begins immediately. The default is YES.

v The Comment field lets you specify descriptive information, for example, whythe request was made.

INGKYRU0 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Page 1 of 2Domain ID = IPSFP ---------- INGREQ ---------- Date = 04/27/06Operator ID = NETOP1 Time = 18:52:41

Resource => CICS/APL/KEY4 format: name/type/systemTarget => System name, domain ID or sysplex name

Request => START Request type (START/UP, STOP/DOWN or CANCEL)Type => NORM Type of processing (NORM/IMMED/FORCE/user) or ?Scope => Request scope (ONLY/CHILDREN/ALL)Priority => LOW Priority of request (FORCE/HIGH/LOW)Expire => , Expiration date(yyyy-mm-dd), time(hh:mm)AutoRemove => - see help for listRestart => NO Restart resource after shutdown (YES/NO)Override => NO (ALL/NO/TRG/FLG/DPY/STS)Verify => YES Check affected resources (YES/NO/WTOR)Comment =>

Appl Parms => ,CN


PF11=Next PF12=Retrieve

Figure 89. INGREQ Command Dialog Panel 1

INGREQ


||||||||||||||||||||||||||||

v The Appl Parms field shows modifications or parameters to the START or STOPrequest.

If you press PF11 a panel similar to Figure 90 is displayed.

v The Timeout field shows the time period that the request must complete in.After this time interval either a message is issued, or the request is canceled.

v The Precheck field shows whether or not the startup or shutdown processshould perform up-front validation.

v The Interrupt field shows whether or not a request to shut down a resourceshould interrupt the startup phase of a resource:YES

The automation manager interrupts the startup process as soon as this stoprequest is submitted.

NO If the resource is starting, the automation manager waits for the resource'sUP message before proceeding with the shutdown. This is the default.

INGRPTPurpose

The INGRPT command displays statistical information about the automation agentand some basic information about the automation manager. Two types of reportsare produced:v Summary report.v Detail report.

Syntax

►► INGRPTRESET

Report optionsRESOURCE=name

►

INGKYRU2 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Page 2 of 2Domain ID = IPSFP ---------- INGREQ ---------- Date = 04/27/06Operator ID = NETOP1 Time = 18:53:03

Resource => CICS/APL/KEY4 format: name/type/systemTarget => System name, domain ID or sysplex name

Timeout => 0 / MSG Interval in minutes / Option (MSG/CANCEL)Precheck => YES Precheck for flags and passes (YES/NO)Interrupt => NO Specify YES to terminate Startup processes


PF10=Previous PF12=Retrieve

Figure 90. INGREQ Command Dialog Panel 2

INGREQ



Dest_list*ALL


AUTONETLOG

WAIT=YES

WAIT=nnn►◄

Report options:

STATS=SUMMARY

STATS= DETAILNONE

Destination:


Dest_list:

▼( Destination )

Parameters

The following parameters are supported:

RESETResets the counters to 0. This option can be specified with the STATSparameter to get the statistics information and subsequently reset the counters.

RESOURCEIs the name of the subsystem that you want to collect the statistics for, forexample, TSO. Wildcard is supported, for example, INGRPT STATS=DRESOURCE=abc*. The wildcard can be leading or trailing, for example *abc*.






INGRPT


STATSSpecifies whether to generate a summary report or a detail report. Detailstatistics include information about each resource or subsystem that isautomated by the agent. The following options are valid:SUMMARY

This is the default.DETAIL

Specifies to show detailed information for each resource (subsystem in theautomation agent terminology).

NONENo report is produced. The NONE option is only useful if the reset optionis specified.


None.

Usage

Issuing ACF COLD resets the statistic counters.

The statistic counters for a subsystem removed with INGAMS REFRESH are noterased. However, the statistic counters for a subsystem are cleared if ACF COLD orINGRPT RESET is issued.

Examples

If you enter INGRPT you will see the start of a summary report for your systemthat is similar to Figure 91.

This panel shows statistical information about the automation agent and somebasic information about the automation manager. The report shows informationthat has been gathered during the SA z/OS session. The SA z/OS session beginswith either SysOps initialization or the last INGRPT RESET command (whichever

INGKYRP0 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 53Domain ID = IPUN8 ---------- INGRPT ---------- Date = 10/31/03Operator ID = NETOP1 System = AOC8 Time = 13:04:14

***************************** Summary Statistics *****************************System : AOC8 31 Oct 2003 13:04:12------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Begin of statistics : 10/30/03 11:32:25 Domain : IPUN8End of statistics : 10/31/03 13:04:12 Sysplex : AOC8PLEXElapsed time (hours) : 25:32 (1532 min)

Automation Agent StatisticsCPU time used (seconds) : 344.87

Total number of resources defined : 69Total number of resources managed : 22

Total number of messages automated : 0Average number of messages per hour : 0.0



Figure 91. INGRPT Command Dialog Panel

INGRPT


comes last) until the INGRPT STATS=SUMMARY/DETAIL command is issued.The counters are not retained across SysOps sessions.

The summary report for a particular subsystem shows:v The total number of messages automated for the resource.v The average number of messages automation per hour.v The total number of resulting commands.v The total number of Start commands issued.v The total number of Stop commands issued.v The total number of critical threshold reached hits.

INGRUNPurpose

The INGRUN command lets you:v Set a runmode for a systemv Add the qualification of one or more resources for any runmodev Delete runmode qualification for one or more resources

Syntax

►► INGRUN REQ= SET mode-specADD resource-specDEL resource-spec


►

►OUTMODE= LINE

AUTONETLOG

WAIT=YES

WAIT=NOWAIT=nnn

►◄

mode-spec:

SYSTEM = system RUNMODE=runmodeYES

PERSISTENT =NO

►

►TYPE=NORM

TYPE= IMMEDFORCE

PRI=LOW

PRI= FORCEHIGH

▼

OVERRIDE=NO

OVERRIDE=( )ALLDPYFLGSTSTRG

►

INGRPT


►VERIFY=YES

VERIFY= NOWTOR

CMT="text"

resource-spec:

RUNRES=resource(1) NO

MULT =YES

Notes:

1 Line-mode only

Parameters

REQThe request to be carried out.

SET Specifies a new runmode is set

ADD Qualifies one or more individual resources for a runmode

DEL Deletes the runmode qualification for the given resource

RUNMODESpecifies the runmode to be activated. The runmode must be specified in thepolicy database. In full-screen mode, a question mark(?) can be specified todisplay a selection list. Use *ALL to disable runmode consideration.

PERSISTENTSpecifies whether the request should be kept across system IPL. Valid optionsare:

YES The runmode request is kept in the takeover file. This is the defaultsetting.

NO The runmode request is removed as soon as the system leaves thesysplex. For more information, see REMOVE=SYSGONE of the“INGREQ” on page 218 command.

RUNRESSpecifies the resource to be considered qualified for any runmode. The formatis name/type[/system]. In full-screen mode, if more than one resource matchesthe specification, a selection panel is displayed. In full-screen mode, for a DELrequest a question mark(?) can be specified to display a selection list of allresources previously specified on an ADD request.

MULTSpecifies that more than one resource will be accepted when running in linemode, if the resource wildcard specification results in multiple resources. Thiscommand is available in line mode only.

NO The resource specification must resolve to a single resource.

YES Multiple resources can be processed with a single invocation of theINGRUN command.

SYSTEMSpecifies the system for which the runmode is set.

INGRUN


|||

|||

||||

TYPESpecifies the type of shutdown to be used for resources that do not qualify forthe new runmode. For more information, see the “INGREQ” on page 218command.

PRI / PRIORITYSpecifies the priority for the shutdown of the resources that do not qualify forthe new runmode. For more information, see the “INGREQ” on page 218command.

OVERRIDESpecifies the overrides that are to be considered when shutting down resourcesthat do not qualify for the new runmode. For more information, see the“INGREQ” on page 218 command.

VERIFYSpecifies if the shutdown process of resources that do not qualify for the newrunmode should be verified.

CMT / COMMENTSpecifies descriptive information, for example, why the request was made.

TARGETFor information on the TARGET parameter, see “TARGET Parameter” on page14


WAITSpecifies whether to wait or not for the request to complete. The default isYES.

nnn is the number of seconds to wait before giving up and reporting that atimeout has occurred. The maximum time interval is 999 seconds. For moreinformation, see the “INGREQ” on page 218 command.


To use the INGRUN command, system operations must be initialized.


The INGRUN command supports resource level security. If turned on, thefollowing profiles in class SYSAUTO are checked:



UPDATE Always

If multiple resources are affected, multiple profiles are checked. For SET requests,this is the SYG resource corresponding to the selected system (system/SYG/system).The request is carried out or rejected as a whole.


INGRUN


|

||

||||

||||

|

|||

||

Usage

The INGRUN command operates sysplexwide.

Examples

If you enter ingrun a panel similar to Figure 92 is displayed.

RequestValid request types are SET, ADD, and DEL.

TargetSpecifies the name of the system (system name, domain ID or sysplex name)that the command should be routed to. This is only necessary when you wantto operate outside of the local sysplex.

The following parameters are valid for SET only:

SystemSpecifies the name of the system that you want to set a runmode for.

RunmodeSpecifies the name of the runmode that you want to set. You can specify aquestion mark (?) to select a from a list of all available resources.

PersistentSpecifies whether the request should be kept across system IPL. For moreinformation, see REMOVE=SYSGONE of “INGREQ” on page 218 command.

TypeSpecifies the type of shutdown to be used for resources that do not qualify forthe new runmode. For more information, see the “INGREQ” on page 218command for further details.

PrioritySpecifies the priority for the shutdown of the resources that do not qualify forthe new runmode. For more information, see the “INGREQ” on page 218command for further details.

INGKYRM0 SA z/OS - Command DialogsDomain ID = IPUFJ ---------- INGRUN ---------- Date = 08/11/11Operator ID = NETOPER1 Time = 12:10:38

Request => Request type (SET, ADD or DEL)Target => System name, domain ID or sysplex name

--- Parameters for SET request --------------------------------------------System => System nameRunmode => Runmode name (mode or ?)Persistent => Keep request across IPL (YES/NO)Type => Type of processing (NORM/IMMED/FORCE)Priority => Priority of request (FORCE/HIGH/LOW)Override => (ALL/NO/TRG/FLG/DPY/STS)Verify => Check affected resources (YES/NO/WTOR)Comment =>

--- Parameters for ADD or DEL requests ------------------------------------Resource => format: name/type/system

AOF710A VERIFY/REVISE INPUT AND THEN PRESS ENTERCommand ===>

PF1=Help PF2=End PF3=Return PF6=RollPF12=Retrieve

Figure 92. INGRUN Command Dialog Panel

INGRUN


||||||||||||||||||||||||||||

OverrideSpecifies the overrides that are to be considered when shutting down resourcesthat do not qualify for the new runmode. For more information, see“INGREQ” on page 218 for further details.

VerifySpecifies whether the shutdown process of resources that do not qualify for thenew runmode should be verified. For more information, see “INGREQ” onpage 218 for further details.

CommentSpecifies descriptive information, for example, why the request was made.

The following parameter is set for ADD and DEL requests:

ResourceSpecifies the name of the resource for which you want to add or delete thequalification. The format is name/type/system or name/type for sysplexresources. Wildcards and incomplete specifications are supported. For DELrequests a question mark (?) can be specified which lets you choose from a listof resources previously specified on an ADD request.

INGSCHEDPurpose

INGSCHED displays a list of all defined schedules (service periods). It lets you:v Update the time slots (this is referred to as a schedule override).v Display the list of resources that are associated with the schedule.v Delete schedule or resource overrides.

Syntax

►► INGSCHEDschedule schedule optionsresource resource optionsREQ=TIMERS

WAIT=YES

WAIT=NOWAIT=nnn

►




AUTONETLOG

►◄

schedule options:

REQ=DISP DATE=curr_date DAYS=1

REQ= BASEDEL date daysDISP date daysREPL date priority timeslotsRESOURCES

INGRUN


resource options:

REQ=DISP DATE=curr_date DAYS=1

REQ= DEL date daysDISP date daysREPL date priority timeslots

date:

DATE=curr_date

DATE=YYYYMMDD

days:

DAYS=1

DAYS=1..366

priority:

LOW LOWPRI=( , )

HIGH HIGH

timeslots:

▼UP=( hhmm-hhmm ) ▼DOWN=( hhmm-hhmm )

Parameters

scheduleIs the name of the schedule to be displayed.

resourceSpecifies the resource that the schedule overrides are to be displayed for. Theformat is name/type[/system].

REQSpecifies the request. The request can be:BASE

Displays the base schedule information.DEL

Deletes the overrides for the specified date.DISP

Displays the base schedule, schedule override or resource overridesstarting with the specified date.

REPLReplaces the schedule or resource override with a new one.

INGSCHED


RESOURCESDisplays the resources that use the specified schedule (service period).

TIMERSDisplays the list of timers that are currently scheduled.

DATESpecifies the date in yyyymmdd format that the delete or replace of theoverride should be done for.

curr_dateThe current date.

DAYSSpecifies the number of days for which the overrides should be displayed ordeleted.

PRIORITYSpecifies the priority to be assigned to the override. The first value is the UPpriority and the second value is the DOWN priority. Valid values are:HIGH

High priority.LOW

Low priority.

Both priorities are optional. The default is LOW. The priority values can beabbreviated.

UP Specifies the UP start and stop times in the format hhmm-hhmm. Up to fivetime slots can be specified separated by a comma. The UP time slots define thetime windows where the resource must or should be available. A priority ofHIGH means that the resource must be available, while a priority of LOWmeans that the resource should be available.

DOWNSpecifies the DOWN start and stop times. The format is hhmm-hhmm. Up tofive time slots can be specified separated by a comma. The DOWN time slotsdefine the time window where the resource must or should be not available(that is, unavailable). A priority of HIGH means that the resource must beunavailable, while a priority of LOW means that the resource should beunavailable. If you specify DOWN, specifying the UP priority becomesmandatory.

WAIT Specifies whether or not to wait until the request is complete. The default isYES.





INGSCHED



The INGSCHED command can only be used when system operations is initialized.

Service period overrides cannot be modified immediately after a system timechange where the system clock was set back, for example, in case of daylightsavings. Overrides cannot be modified until the new local time passes the originalpre-adjustment local time.

Usage

The INGSCHED command operates sysplexwide. For an overview see “Overviewof Commands that Operate Sysplexwide” on page 13.

The automation agent as well as the automation manager verify each time slotbeing modified. Due to the delay between these verifications, a time slot of thecurrent day that is still valid when the agent checks it could already be invalidwhen the automation manager checks it. For example, the agent passes an overriderequest to the manager at 10:59:59. The automation manager scheduler receives therequest at 11:00:01 and rejects it because the start time has already elapsed. This isindicated by return code 8 and reason code X'10C4' in message INGY1004. If thiserror occurs, you can fix it by correcting the time slot in error and reissuing theoverride.

Examples

If you enter ingsched a panel similar to Figure 93 is displayed.

v The Cmd field allows you to specify command codes. To use one of thecommand codes shown, type the appropriate letter next to the resource nameand press Enter. The following command codes are available:

A Show Details. Displays the service periods for the selected schedule withoutany override.

INGKYSP0 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 3Domain ID = IPSNM ---------- INGSCHED ---------- Date = 08/25/03Operator ID = NETOP1 Time = 13:56:24

Cmd: A Show Details B Show Overrides C Show Resources

Cmd Schedule Description--- -------- ----------------------------------------

STD_SERV Standard Service PeriodTSOPLUS Special service period for TSOPLUSONLINE Schedule for CICS applications



Figure 93. INGSCHED Initial Command Dialog Panel

INGSCHED


B Show Overrides. Displays the overrides for the selected schedule startingwith the current day for the next n days filling one panel.

C Show Resources. Displays the list of resources or application groups thatmake use of the schedule. This can then be used to modify the serviceperiods for the resource.

v The Schedule field shows the schedule (service period) defined in the sysplex.v The Description field shows the description specified for the resource.

Showing Schedule Details

Overrides are shown in white.

The base time slots for a selected schedule are displayed when specifyingcommand code A in front of the schedule. The panel in Figure 94 is displayed (notethat INGSCHED REQUEST=BASE shows a similar panel).

v The Schedule field shows the name of the schedule as defined in the sysplex.v The Day field shows the day of the week.v The Pri field shows the priority associated with the day of the week. It can have

the following values:

H High priority. The resource must be down or up.

L Low priority. The resource should be down or up.v The Strt/Stop field shows the begin and end times of the service window.

Showing Schedule Overrides

To display detailed information for a particular schedule, specify command code Bin front of the schedule. The panel displayed, as shown in Figure 95 on page 240,shows the start and stop times starting from the requested date. The default startsfrom the current day. For each day, two rows are displayed:

INGKYSP1 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 14Domain ID = IPSFO ---------- INGSCHED ---------- Date = 08/25/03Operator ID = NETOP1 Sysplex = KEY1PLEX Time = 14:36:07

Schedule. . : SHIFT1 Weekday A.M. (06:00 - 11:59)

Day Pri Strt/Stop Strt/Stop Strt/Stop Strt/Stop Strt/Stop--- -- --- --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------MON UP H 0600-1159 - - - -

DN H 0000-0559 1200-2400 - - -TUE UP H 0600-1159 - - - -

DN H 0000-0559 1200-2400 - - -WED UP H 0600-1159 - - - -

DN H 0000-0559 1200-2400 - - -THU UP H 0600-1159 - - - -

DN H 0000-0559 1200-2400 - - -FRI UP H 0600-1159 - - - -

DN H 0000-0559 1200-2400 - - -SAT UP L - - - - -

DN H 0000-2400 - - - -SUN UP L - - - - -

DN H 0000-2400 - - - -



Figure 94. INGSCHED Command Dialog Panel Showing Schedule Details

INGSCHED


v The first row (UP) shows the time slots when the associated resources should beup (available).

v The second row (DN) shows the time slots when the associated resources shouldbe down (unavailable).

To modify the start and stop times for the various days, overtype them. Start andstop times that have been overwritten are shown in yellow. The overrides for aparticular day can be removed with command code D, except for time slots thatare affected by the current time. The time slots will then be restored to the originalvalues.

To delete individual overrides, blank out the appropriate time slot.

Showing Resources Related to a Schedule

A list of resources that use the selected schedule is displayed when specifyingcommand code C in front of the schedule. A panel similar to Figure 96 on page 241is displayed.

INGKYSP2 SA z/OS - Command DialogsDomain ID = IPSFO ---------- INGSCHED ---------- Date = 08/25/03Operator ID = AFRANCK Sysplex = KEY1PLEX Time = 14:53:15

Schedule. . : SHIFT1 Weekday A.M. (06:00 - 11:59)Starting date => 08 / 25 / 2003 (mm/dd/yyyy)

C Date Pri Strt/Stop Strt/Stop Strt/Stop Strt/Stop Strt/Stop- ------------ -- --- --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------

08/25/03 Mon UP H 0600 1159 - - - -DN H 0000 0559 1200 2400 - - -

08/26/03 Tue UP H 0600 1159 - - - -DN H 0000 0559 1200 2400 - - -

08/27/03 Wed UP H 0600 1159 - - - -DN H 0000 0559 1200 2400 - - -

08/28/03 Thu UP H 0600 1159 - - - -DN H 0000 0559 1200 2400 - - -

08/29/03 Fri UP H 0600 1159 - - - -DN H 0000 0559 1200 2400 - - -

08/30/03 Sat UP L - - - - -DN H 0000 2400 - - - -

08/31/03 Sun UP L - - - - -DN H 0000 2400 - - - -

09/01/03 Mon UP H 0600 1159 - - - -DN H 0000 0559 1200 2400 - - -

09/02/03 Tue UP H 0600 1159 - - - -DN H 0000 0559 1200 2400 - - -

Command ===>PF1=Help PF2=End PF3=Return PF6=RollPF7=Backward PF8=Forward PF9=Refresh PF12=Retrieve

Figure 95. INGSCHED Command Dialog Panel Showing Schedule Overrides

INGSCHED


v The Cmd field allows you to display specific information for each system. Thefollowing command code is available:

S Shows overrides. Changes service periods for the resource group.v The Resource field shows the name of the resource that uses the specified

schedule.v The Type field shows the type of the resource.v The System field shows the name of the system that the resource resides on.v The Description field shows the description specified for the resource.

The FIND/RFIND subcommands are supported. See “Varying the Format of theCommand Output” on page 17 for information.

Showing Resource Overrides

A panel similar to Figure 97 on page 242 shows schedule overrides for the selectedresource.

INGKYSP3 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 6Domain ID = IPSFO ---------- INGSCHED ---------- Date = 08/25/03Operator ID = NETOP1 Sysplex = KEY1PLEX Time = 14:57:29

Schedule. . : SHIFT1 Weekday A.M. (06:00 - 11:59)

Cmd: S Show OverridesCmd Resource Type System Description--- -------- ---- -------- ----------------------------------------

MSCSUBSYS APL KEY3 test applicationMSCSUBSYS APL KEY4 test applicationSTDT001AA00 APL KEY1 A. M. shift (6:00 - 11:59)STDT001AA00 APL KEY2 A. M. shift (6:00 - 11:59)STDT001AA00 APL KEY3 A. M. shift (6:00 - 11:59)STDT001AA00 APL KEY4 A. M. shift (6:00 - 11:59)



Figure 96. INGSCHED Command Dialog Panel Showing Resources Related to a Schedule

INGSCHED


The panel shows the service windows currently defined for the resource. Theservice windows are determined as follows:v Base service periods from the associated schedule, if any are defined.v Override service periods from the associated schedule, if any are defined.v Override service periods associated with the resource.v The Day field shows the day of the week.v The Pri field shows the priority associated with the day of the week. It can have

the following values:

H High priority.

L Low priority.v The Strt/Stop fields show the beginning and end times of the service window.

For each day, two rows are displayed.– The first row (UP) shows the time slots when the associated resources must

be up (available).– The second row (DN) shows the time slots where the associated resources

must be down (unavailable).

Time slots that are overrides for the resource are shown in pink. Time slots definedfor the base schedule are shown in green, while its overrides are shown in yellow.Time slots that are already passed cannot be deleted or overridden. To set anoverride, type over the appropriate time field.

INGSENDPurpose

INGSEND routes commands to other domains using NetView RMTCMD.

You should use the TARGET parameter with system operations commands ifpossible.

INGKYSP2 SA z/OS - Command DialogsDomain ID = IPUFA ---------- INGSCHED ---------- Date = 08/26/03Operator ID = NETOP1 Sysplex = AOCPLEX Time = 14:56:08

Resource . . . : STDT005AA00/APL/AOCA Schedule . . : SHIFT5Starting date => 07 / 04 / 2000 (mm/dd/yyyy)

C Date Pri Strt/Stop Strt/Stop Strt/Stop Strt/Stop Strt/Stop- ------------ -- --- --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------

08/26/03 Tue UP LDN H 0000 1900

08/27/03 Wed UP L 1600 1800DN H 1800 1900

08/28/03 Thu UP LDN H 0000 1900

08/29/03 Fri UP LDN H 0000 1900

08/30/03 Sat UP LDN H 0000 1900

08/31/03 Sun UP LDN H 0000 1900

Command ===>PF1=Help PF2=End PF3=Return PF6=RollPF7=Backward PF8=Forward PF9=Refresh PF12=Retrieve

Figure 97. INGSCHED Command Dialog Panel Showing Resource Overrides

INGSCHED


Syntax

►►NETVASIS

INGSENDRESP=YES

RESP= ACKCORRNO

►

►

(1)OPER=defined/issuing_task_ID,

OPER=operator_ID

(2)TO=current target domain

TO= FPdomain

netid.

►

►CRM=RMTCMD CORRWAIT=defined/10

CORRWAIT=valueCMD=command ►◄

Notes:

1 The default value can be defined using the SA z/OS customization dialog. Ifit has not been defined, SA z/OS provides the default.

2 This value is set by the command routing process. That is, the last targetdomain that you sent a command to is remembered and used as the default.

Parameters

NETVASISPrefix the INGSEND command with NETVASIS if you want to pass thecommand text in lower or mixed case.

RESPSpecifies whether you want to receive an asynchronous response oracknowledgement when you issue the command. Valid options are:

ACKIf you use this option:v A message is displayed on the operator's NCCF console stating whether

or not the command executed successfully.v If the command executed successfully, message AOF672I will be

displayed.v If the command executed but failed, message AOF671I will be displayed.v If the command could not be delivered to the target domain or

RMTCMD autotask, or was delivered and failed to begin execution, theappropriate NetView RMTCMD message will be displayed to explainthe failure.

NO Specifies that you do not want to receive any output from the command.

YESSpecifies that you want the output from the command displayed on yourNCCF console.

CORRSpecifies that you want the output from the command to be displayed by

INGSEND


the NetView WINDOW command. See “Restrictions and Limitations” oncorrelating command output.

OPERSpecifies the operator to use to issue the command.

operator_ID can be defined using the customization dialog for each domain. Ifnot defined, it will default to the issuing task ID.

Notes:

1. If the operator alias GATOPER or BASEOPER is specified, the operator IDwill default to the issuing task ID.

2. If orig.operid = target.operid in the OPER keyword, the command will beissued.

TO Specifies the domain that the command is being issued to.

[netid].domainSpecifies the domain that the command is being issued to. It can bedefined using the customization dialog. Netid is optional.

FP Specifies that the command is to be routed to the current focal point.

Notes:

1. When INGSEND is issued on the current focal point, and TO=FP isspecified, the command will be issued.

2. If this parameter (TO=) is omitted, the current target domain (that is, thelast domain you sent a command to) is used, if one is set. If none is set,error message AOF102I will be issued.

CRMSpecifies that the command routing mechanism to be used is the NetViewRMTCMD command. Only CRM=RMTCMD is valid. The parameter is forcompatibility only.

CORRWAITSpecifies the CORRWAIT value (in seconds) to be used when INGSEND usesNetView PIPES. The Corrwait PIPE stage is necessary to trap asynchronouscommand output. A default for this value can be predefined for each targetsystem, using the customization dialog. If not predefined, the default is 10seconds. For more information on the use of this value, see the discussion ofthe PIPE command in NetView Operation.

CMDSpecifies the command to be executed. The length of the command can be upto 280 characters.

Restrictions and Limitationsv The INGSEND command will not execute under the primary POI task (PPT).v INGSEND uses the NetView PIPE command to trap the message output from

the routed command. Not all commands are PIPE-enabled, which means that thecommand may not be treated as requested in the RESP keyword. Some examplesof commands that are not PIPE-enabled are:– MVS commands on a NetView not exploiting EMCS.– Commands that produce fullscreen output.– A NetView command that is not PIPE-enabled.

INGSEND


For more information on RMTCMD and PIPE commands, see Tivoli NetView forz/OS User's Guide.

Usage

If the command you are issuing contains either a space, a comma, or a delimiter,you should delimit the command.

You can delimit the command you are sending with either single quotation marks,double quotation marks, or '/'. If you want to include an occurrence of thedelimiter character within the delimited string, the character must be preceded byanother delimiter character. The delimiter character must appear as the firstcharacter of the string after the 'CMD='. INGSEND sends the command defined bythe start and end delimiter. Examples of INGSEND with commands that usedelimiters are shown in “Examples.”

Examples

The following examples show how INGSEND is used and correctly delimited:1. Consider the following example:

"INGSEND RESP=ACK,TO=CNM01,CMD=START TASK=DSILOG"

Command START TASK=DSILOG will be routed with the following:

Keyword Value Reason

TO CNM01 Specified

RESP ACK Specified

OPER OPER4 Predefined

CRM RMTCMD Default

The following message will be issued to OPER2's NCCF console:"AOF672I COMMAND (START TASK=DSILOG) WAS EXECUTED IN DOMAIN CNM01 BY ARMTCMD COMMAND FROM OPERATOR OPER2"

OPER4 is defined using the customization dialog. The above example does notuse delimiters.

2. The following example does not use delimiters as far as INGSEND is concernedeven though there are delimiter characters in it:INGSEND RESP=ACK,TO=CNM01,CMD=MVS $D’RMF’

3. The following is correctly delimited:INGSEND RESP=ACK,TO=CNM01,CMD=’ACT CHP123’

4. The following example is also correctly delimited and contains the delimitercharacter within the delimiters. This command is equivalent to the secondexample:INGSEND RESP=ACK,TO=CNM01,CMD=’MVS $D’RMF’

5. The following example is also correctly delimited and is an alternative way totype the previous example:INGSEND RESP=ACK,TO=CNM01,CMD=/MVS $D’RMF’/

6. The following example will be passed as correctly delimited but only ’MVS $Dwill be sent because the end delimiter follows the D thus defining thecommand:INGSEND RESP=ACK,TO=CNM01,CMD=’MVS $D’RMF’ "

INGSEND


If you enter INGSEND without specifying any parameters, a panel similar toFigure 98 will be displayed.

The available fields correspond to the parameters of the INGSEND command (see“Parameters” on page 243 for details).

INGSESSPurpose

INGSESS displays OMEGAMON® session definitions, the session status andstatistical information about the session.

Syntax

►► INGSESSsession_name

REQ=DISPLAY

REQ= DETAILSTARTSTOP

►


domain_ID*ALL


AUTONETLOG

►◄

Parameters

session_nameThe name of the OMEGAMON session that an action is requested for. Thisparameter is only useful in line mode.

INGKYSND SA z/OS - Command DialogsDomain ID = IPUN8 ---------- INGSEND ---------- Date = 11/04/03Operator ID = NETOPER Time = 16:58:22

Specify or revise the following parameters:

Response => YES Enter ACK, YES, NO or CORROperator id => Leave blank for defaultTarget (TO) => format: [netid.]domainCorrwait =>Command ...


Figure 98. INGSEND Command Dialog Panel

INGSEND


More than one name can be specified for the REQ=DISPLAY function.Wildcards are supported. The session name is mandatory for the Start, Stop,and Detail request.

REQ=actionThe action that you want to perform for session_name. It can be one of thefollowing:

DISPLAYReturns the list of sessions that match the specified filter criteria. Thisis the default.

DETAILReturns details for the named session.

STARTCreates a new session using the session attributes for session_name.

STOP Destroys the named session.

This parameter is only useful in line mode.




Examples

Figure 99 is displayed when you enter the INGSESS command at the NetViewcommand line.

INGKYSS0 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 8Domain ID = IPSFM -------- INGSESS --------- Date = 04/22/05Operator ID = NETOP1 System = KEYA Time = 14:18:55

CMD: B Start session C Stop session D Details

CMD Session System Type Status Appl-id User id SessOper--- ----------- -------- -------- ---------- -------- -------- --------

CICSKY41 KEYA OMIICICS ACTIVE IPSPOC0 SAOM AOFSES01DB2SGG4 KEYA OMIIDB2 ACTIVE IPSPD2C SAOM AOFSES02DB2SG14 KEYA OMIIDB2 SESSFAIL IPSPD2C SAOM AOFSES01IMS742CR KEYA OMIIIMS ACTIVE IPSPOI0 SAOM AOFSES02IMS743CR KEYA OMIIIMS MAINT IPSPOI0 SAOM AOFSES01JHSY4MVS KEYA OMIIMVS ACTIVE IPSPM2RC SAOM AOFSES02JHSY4MV2 KEYA OMIIMVS INACTIVE IPSPM2RC SAOM AOFSES01OMSY4MVS KEYA OMIIMVS ACTIVE IPSPM2RC SAOM AOFSES01



Figure 99. INGSESS Command Dialog Panel

INGSESS


v The Cmd field allows you to display specific information for each system. Thefollowing command code is available:

B Creates a new session with the appropriate OMEGAMON, if it does notalready exist, that is, the session status is INACTIVE or MAINT. Aftersuccessful session creation, the session status is ACTIVE. The sessionremains active until it is stopped, either explicitly (using command code C),or implicitly by NetView on behalf of OMEGAMON or session tasktermination.

C Destroys the session with the appropriate OMEGAMON. The session statuswill be changed to MAINT. The session is disabled so as to prevent it frombeing created implicitly again.

D Displays details for the selected session, such as the session attributes fromthe session definition, the current status, and statistical information.

v The Session column shows the name of the session that represents anOMEGAMON monitor.

v The System column shows the system that established the connection toOMEGAMON.

v The Type column shows the type of session, that is, the OS or middleware thatthe OMEGAMON monitor is monitoring.

v The Status column shows the status of the session. It can be ACTIVE,INACTIVE, MAINT, SESSFAIL, or AUTHFAIL.

v The Appl-id column shows the name of the OMEGAMON VTAM application asdefined by the installation during customization of the OMEGAMON product.

v The User id column shows the user that is defined to log on to theOMEGAMON application. The user ID is needed to control access to theOMEGAMON application. It may be blank if product level security is notimplemented for this OMEGAMON application.

v The SessOper column shows the automated function name that was assigned tothe session by SA z/OS during initialization.

If command code D is selected, the detail screen as shown in Figure 100 on page249 is displayed.

INGSESS


v The Session field shows the name of the session that represents anOMEGAMON monitor

v The System field shows the system that established the connection toOMEGAMON.

v The Description field shows descriptive information for this session as specifiedin the automation policy.

v The Status field shows the status of the session. It can be ACTIVE, INACTIVE,MAINT, SESSFAIL, or AUTHFAIL.

v The Session Operator field shows the automated function name that wasassigned to the session by SA z/OS during initialization.

v The Logical Unit field shows the name of the source LU that was assigned byNetView upon establishing a Terminal Access Facility (TAF) fullscreen session.

v The Application id field shows the name of the OMEGAMON VTAMapplication as defined by the installation during customization of theOMEGAMON product.

v The User id field shows the user that is defined to log on to the OMEGAMONapplication. The user ID is needed to control access to the OMEGAMONapplication. It may be blank if product level security is not implemented for thisOMEGAMON application.

v The Password field shows the password in the form of a string of asterisks or'SAFPW'. This is the password used to logon to the OMEGAMON application.

v The Timeout field shows the maximum time to wait for a response fromOMEGAMON before the request is terminated.

v The Logon data field shows the data that is sent to the OMEGAMON sessionduring logon.

v The Users field shows a list of operators or *AUTO that have interacted with thesession since it became ACTIVE.

INGKYSS1 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 22Domain ID = IPXNG ---------- INGSESS ---------- Date = 04/22/05Operator ID = NETOP1 System = KEYA Time = 14:43:23

Session : OMSY4MVSSystem : KEYA in Sysplex : KEYAPLEXType : OMIIMVSDescription : OMEGAMON for MVS on KEY4

Status : ACTIVESession Operator : AOFSES01Logical Unit : TFNG#000

Application id : IPSPM2RCUser id : SAOMPassword : SAFPWTimeout : 29Logon data :

Users...NETOP1

Statistics...Total # Commands : 13Total # exception analysis : 14Total # exceptions tripped : 630



Figure 100. INGSESS Command Dialog Detail Panel

INGSESS


v The Statistics section shows:– The Total # Commands field shows the number of commands that have been

issued on this session since the session became ACTIVE. The counter is reseteach time the session becomes ACTIVE.

– The Total # exception analysis field shows the number of exception trapanalysis commands that have been issued since the session became ACTIVE.The counter is reset each time the session becomes ACTIVE.

– The Total # exceptions tripped field shows the number of exceptions thatactually tripped as reported by the session since it became ACTIVE. Thecounter is reset each time the session becomes ACTIVE.

INGSETPurpose

INGSET is a line-mode command that is primarily used in automation REXXscripts. With the INGSET command you can:v Remove an operator's requestv Set a status attribute or automation flag for a resource or application groupv Clear or set the hold flag for a resource or application groupv Set the start or stop type for a resource

Syntax

►► INGSET CANCEL resource REQUEST=request SOURCE=source ConfirmVERIFY=NO

KILL resource REQUEST=request SOURCE=sourceSET resource Status options Command_Parm Flags

►

►,00:00

EXPIRED=(date ),time

WAIT=YES

WAIT=NOWAIT=nnn


►

►OUTMODE= LINE

AUTONETLOG

►◄

Confirm:

VERIFY=YES

VERIFY= NOWTOR

Status options:

OBSERVED=status AUTOSTAT=status HEALTH=status

INGSESS


Command_Parm:

STARTPARM= parm*

STOPPARM= parm*

STARTTYPE=starttype►

►STOPTYPE=stoptype

Flags:

AUTOFLAG= YESNO

HOLDFLAG= YESNO

GRPFAILED= YESNO

Parameters

CANCELRemoves a request.

resourceSpecifies the resource that the request is to be canceled for. The format isname/type/system. Wildcard is supported.

KILLRemoves a request without verifying. To perform verification specify theVERIFY parameter.

resourceSpecifies the resource that the request is to be killed for. The format isname/type/system. Wildcard is supported.

SETSets one or more resource attributes. The following settings can be made:v Observed statusv The health statusv Automation statusv Automation flagsv Hold flagv Start type for next startupv Stop type for next shutdown

Wildcard is supported for the SET parameter.

resourceSpecifies the resource that an attribute is to be set for. The format isname/type/system. Wildcard is supported.

REQUESTCauses the request to be canceled. You can specify one of the following:v MAKEAVAILABLEv MAKEAVAILABLESOv MAKEUNAVAILABLEv MAKEUNAVAILABLESCv MAKEUNAVAILABLESO

INGSET


Wildcard is supported, for example, REQUEST=MAKEUN*

A MakeAvailable vote on a resource reflects an INGREQresource,REQ=UP,SCOPE=ALL. That is, the vote is inherited from the resourcethat it was issued against by all of its dependent resources.

A MakeAvailableSO vote on a resource reflects an INGREQresource,REQ=UP,SCOPE=ONLY. That is, the vote is not inherited from theresource that it was issued against by all of its dependent resources, but onlyby that resource.

A MakeUnavailable vote on a resource reflects an INGREQresource,REQ=DOWN,SCOPE=ALL. That is, the vote is inherited from theresource that it was issued against by the resource and all of its dependentresources.

A MakeUnavailableSC vote on a resource reflects an INGREQresource,REQ=DOWN,SCOPE=CHILDREN. That is, the vote is inherited fromthe resource that it was issued against by all of its dependent resources, but itdoes not affect the resource itself.

A MakeUnavailableSO vote on a resource reflects an INGREQresource,REQ=DOWN,SCOPE=ONLY. That is, the vote is not inherited from theresource that it was issued against by all of its dependent resources, but affectsonly that resource.

SOURCESpecifies the source of the request, for example OPERATOR, or AUTOOPS.Wildcard is supported, for example, SOURCE=*

OBSERVEDSpecifies the observed status to be assigned to the resource. The status can beabbreviated, for example, to AV for available. Here is a list of possibleObserved Status values and their shortest possible abbreviations: AVAILABLE(A), UNKNOWN (U), SYSGONE (SY), SOFTDOWN (SO), HARDDOWN (H),STARTING (STAR), DEGRADED (D), STOPPING (STO), PROBLEM (P),WASAVAILABLE (W), and STANDBY (STAN).

AUTOSTATSpecifies the automation status to be assigned to the resource. The status canbe abbreviated, for example, to ID for idle. Here is a list of possible AutostatStatus values and their shortest possible abbreviations: UNKNOWN (U), IDLE(ID), ORDERED (O), BUSY (B), DENIED (D), PROBLEM (P), and INTERNAL(IN).

HEALTHSpecifies the health status to be assigned to the resource. The status can beabbreviated, for example, to NO for normal. Here is a list of possible HealthStatus values and their shortest possible abbreviations: SYSGONE (S),UNKNOWN (U), NORMAL (N), WARNING (W), MINOR (M), CRITICAL (C)and FATAL (F).

EXPIREDSpecifies the expiry date and time of the request. Any request older than orequal to the specified timestamp is deleted when the other filter criteria arematched. The date format is yyyy-mm-dd and the time format is hh:mm. Thetime specification is optional.

INGSET


CAUTION:Care must be taken when using the EXPIRED parameter for a remotesysplex that runs in a different time zone. The local time of the systemwhere INGSET CANCEL/KILL command is issued determines whether ornot the request is expired.



VERIFYSpecifies whether canceling the request is to be verified. The followingspecifications are valid:

YES Depending on the NetView task type that the INGREQ command isrunning on, the verification is either displayed on a fullscreen panel or,in line mode, shown on the console. The latter is also done whenOUTMODE=LINE is coded.

NO No verification is performed. VERIFY is set to NO for AUTOTASKs.Otherwise it is set to YES.

WTORThe list of affected resources is displayed before the request isremoved. The operator is prompted to verify the list via WTOR.

The default depends on the type of task that the INGREQ command runs on.



STARTPARMIs the START parameter that is passed to the next START command. The valuethat is specified here is used only once and takes precedence over the PARMvalue that is specified on the next INGREQ (REQ=START) command. Use * toreset its value.

STOPPARMIs the STOP parameter that is passed to the next STOP command. The valuethat is specified here is used only once and takes precedence over the PARMvalue that is specified on the next INGREQ (REQ=STOP) command. Use * toreset its value.

STARTTYPESpecifies the type of command to be issued for the resource's next startup. Thevalue specified here is used only once and takes precedence over the TYPEvalue specified on the next INGREQ (REQ=START) command.

STOPTYPESpecifies the type of command to be issued for the resource's next shutdown.The value specified here is used only once and takes precedence over the TYPEvalue specified on the next INGREQ (REQ=STOP) command. However, a stoptype of FORCE, wherever specified, will always be honored.

INGSET


AUTOFLAGSpecifies the automation flag. It can be either YES or NO. It can beabbreviated.

HOLDFLAGSpecifies whether the resource is to be started. It can be either YES or NO. TheHOLD flag can only be set if the resource is down, that is if its observed statusis either HardDown, SoftDown, SysGone or Unknown.

GRPFAILEDSpecifies the group failed flag. It can be either YES or NO.


The INGSET command supports resource level security. If turned on, the followingprofiles in SYSAUTO are checked:



UPDATE When function isCANCEL orKILL

CONTROL When functionoption is SET

If multiple resources are affected, multiple profiles are checked. For SET requests,the request is carried out or rejected as a whole. CANCEL and KILL requests areprocessed for each profile.


Return Codes

The following return codes can occur:0 The request was processed successfully.1 An error occurred while processing the request or exit requested.

Usage

Note that if you cancel the verification process of a list of affected resources,SA z/OS may issue a slightly misleading message. Although the verification hasbeen canceled, message AOF099I FUNCTION COMPLETED may be returned.

Examples

To cancel a previously issued request to make a resource available, enter thefollowing:INGSET CANCEL TSO/APL/KEY1 REQUEST=MAKEAVAILABLE SOURCE=OPERATOR

To set the start type for the next startup of a JES2 resource to COLD, enter thefollowing:INGSET SET JES2/APL/KEY1 STARTTYPE=COLD

INGSET


|

||

||||

||||||

||||

|||

||

INGSTRPurpose

The INGSTR command allows you to display and manipulate all the structuresthat are defined in your active policy and all allocated structures in the sysplex.You can rebuild or delete a selected structure or start and stop the duplexing of astructure, if applicable.

The command supports full mode and line mode but in line mode only the displayfunction is available. Therefore, you cannot start an action when you issue INGSTRfrom an NCCF console.

Authorizations

The actions that you can initiate with INGSTR depend on your authorizations. Youcan see your authorization type on the panel. Note that the authorization types seethe current function, and that your authorization type can be different for differentfunctions.

The following authorization types exist:

DISPLAYYou cannot initiate any action that affects the sysplex configuration.

ALL You can initiate all actions from the corresponding panel.

Note: The codes or PF keys that you can initiate one of these actions with are onlydisplayed if you are authorized to perform the action.

Syntax

►► INGSTRstrname[*] CONDition= No

YesALL= No

Yes

►



OUTMODE=LINE►◄

Parameters

strname[*]Specifies a name pattern that limits the display. The default is to show allstructures that match the 'ALL' condition.

CONDitionDefines whether or not the rebuild condition of each structure is to bedetermined and displayed.

ALLDefines whether allocated and unallocated structures or just allocatedstructures are displayed.


INGSTR



Structure Conditions

The condition of an allocated structure can be:

Rebuild is not supported.The structure can neither be rebuilt, nor can its deletion be forced.

The structure has at least one active connector that does not supportuser-managed rebuild, and at least one active connector that does notsupport system-managed rebuild.

System-managed processes not supported.The structure cannot be rebuilt, nor can its deletion be forced.

System-managed rebuild, which is a system-managed process, is notpossible for the following reason:v The CFRM couple data sets have not been formatted to support

system-managed processes (ITEM NAME(SMREBLD) NUMBER(1) was notspecified).

Note: In certain rare cases system-managed processes are not supportedalthough the condition that is displayed on the DRAIN panel seems toindicate the contrary. Then, the rebuild will be initiated, but will fail withmessage IXC367I indicating that system-managed processes are notsupported for the structure.

No alternate coupling facility defined or available.The structure can neither be rebuilt, nor can its deletion be forced.

The structure has an active connector and supports rebuild but does nothave an alternate coupling facility defined in its preference list, or thealternate coupling facilities that are defined in the preference list arecurrently unavailable.

Insufficient space detected for rebuild.The structure cannot or could not be rebuilt. Its deletion cannot be forced.

No alternate coupling facility has enough space to rebuild the structure.

Preference list is empty.The structure cannot be rebuilt because its preference list is currentlyempty. A possible reason for this is a pending policy change; for pendingpolicy changes, see P column.

Structure is pending deallocation.XES accepted a forced deletion of the structure but does the realdeallocation later.

Note: This status can only occur when MVS APAR OW39404 has not beeninstalled.

Structure is being rebuilt.The structure is being rebuilt to another coupling facility.

Duplex rebuild is being stopped.Two instances of the structure were maintained on different coupling

INGSTR


facilities. The application is being disconnected from that instance that isallocated on the target coupling facility. After disconnecting, the instance isdeleted.

No connection exists.The structure cannot be rebuilt, but you can force its deletion.

The structure does not have any connections and cannot be rebuilt withsystem-managed rebuild.

No alternate coupling facility for structure with no connections.The structure cannot be rebuilt, but you can force its deletion.

The structure does not have any connections. It could be rebuilt withsystem-managed rebuild, but no alternate coupling facility is defined in itspreference list or available.

No alternate coupling facility for structure with no active connections.The structure cannot be rebuilt, but you can force its deletion.

The structure has only DISCONNECTING, FAILED, orFAILED-PERSISTENT connections. It could be rebuilt withsystem-managed rebuild, but no alternate coupling facility is defined in itspreference list or available.

The structure’s initial size is less than its actual size.The SIZE value is greater than twice the INITSIZE value. The structure canbe rebuilt, but a SIZE value that is greater than twice the INITSIZE mightcause the following:v It might be impossible to allocate a structure at a size of INITSIZE,

because the amount of control storage that is required to support theSIZE value might actually be larger than INITSIZE.

v If the allocation succeeds, it might result in a structure with aproportionally large amount of its storage allotted to structure controls,leaving too few structure objects to be exploited usefully by theassociated application.

For example, if you have requested a maximum size that is very muchlarger than the initial size, the system will attempt to use a proportionallylarge amount of the allocated storage for its controls. The result could bethat the allocated storage contains control structures for the futuremaximum size of the structure and insufficient storage might remain forthe application's initial use.

No active connection exists.The structure cannot be rebuilt, but you can force its deletion.

The structure has only DISCONNECTING, FAILED, orFAILED-PERSISTENT connections and cannot be rebuilt withsystem-managed rebuild.

Note: INGCF STRUCTURE accepts a rebuild request for structures withthis condition, but deallocates them.

No connections. System-managed rebuild supported.The structure can be rebuilt.

The structure does not have any connections, but can be rebuilt withsystem-managed rebuild.

No active connections. System-managed rebuild supported.The structure can be rebuilt with system-managed rebuild.

INGSTR


||||

|||

||||

||||||

User-managed rebuild is not possible for the structure because it has onlyDISCONNECTING, FAILED, or FAILED-PERSISTENT connections.

System-managed rebuild is supportedThe structure can be rebuilt.

The structure has active connectors. At least one active connector does notsupport user-managed rebuild, but all active connectors supportsystem-managed rebuild.

Duplex rebuild is active.The application is connected to two instances of the same structure ondifferent coupling facilities.

[No condition]When no condition is displayed, the structure can be rebuilt.

The structure has at least one active connection, and all its activeconnectors support user-managed rebuild.

Structure is awaiting rebuild.The structure has been selected for rebuild but has not been processed yet.

Structure is currently allocated on cf_name.The structure can be rebuilt on the target coupling facility with thePOPULATE action of the ENABLE function. It is currently allocated on thecf_name coupling facility, but the target coupling facility precedes cf_namein the structure's preference list. This condition is displayed only in theENABLE command dialog.

Structure allocated in cf_name cannot be rebuilt to this CF.The structure can probably not be rebuilt on the target CF with thePOPULATE action of the ENABLE function. It is currently allocated in thecf_name CF, but the target CF precedes cf_name in the structure's preferencelist. And, the actual size of the structure is greater than the free space ofthe target CF. This condition is displayed only in the ENABLE commanddialog.

Examples

If you enter ingstr without any parameters, a panel with all coupling facilities ofthe sysplex is displayed, as shown in Figure 101 on page 259.

INGSTR


The structure display shows all structures regardless of their allocation status orthe coupling facility. You can limit the display by specifying a structure namepattern.v The P column indicates whether a policy change is pending for the structure.

Rebuilding the structure, if possible, will remove the pending status.v The D column shows what type of duplexing is supported:

U Indicates that user-managed duplexing is supported.

S System-managed duplexing.

B Both, where user-managed is preferred when possible.

Note that, for performance reasons, this status does not include a check of theSMDUPLEX flag in the CFRM couple data set. However, this flag is checkedwhen you use command code S.

v The Old column shows where the structure is allocated or where it was firstallocated when it is being duplexed.

v The New column shows where the duplexed structure is allocated.v The Pref. Location(s) column shows the locations where the structure should

preferably be allocated. When the structure is allocated to the preferred couplingfacility this column is blank. A '*' in front of the coupling facility name (ornames) indicates that the structure does not allow XCF to perform a reallocation.

v The following command codes are available:

D Display details of the selected structure.

F Force the deletion of the selected structure.

P Stop duplexing of the selected structure.

R Rebuild the selected structure.

S Start duplexing of the selected structure.

When the Include unallocated option is set to YES, all structures that are definedin the policy are shown. When the Include condition option is set to YES, the

INGLX906 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 6 of 52Domain ID = IPXFI --------- INGSTR ---------- Date = 11/23/04Operator ID = NETOPER1 Time = 11:17:27

Structure names . . ==> Status . . . . . . : NORMALSysplex . . . . . . ==> KEYAPLEX Permission . . . . : ALLInclude condition . ==> NO (Yes/No - Condition retrieval takes longer)Include unallocated ==> NO (Yes/No)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Cmds: D display details / F force / P stop duplex / R rebuild / S start duplex

Structure P D Old New Pref. Location(s)---------------- - - -------- -------- -----------------DSNA_GBP0 U CFA CFBDSNA_GBP1 S CFA CFBDSNA_GBP2 U CFA CFBDSNA_GBP32K CFADSNA_LOCK1 S CFA CFA CFA CFBDSNA_SCA S CFB CFB CFAGRPXCSQ_ADMIN CFB


F8=Forward F9=Refresh F10=ReAlloc F12=Retrieve

Figure 101. The INGSTR Panel without Structure Conditions.

INGSTR


structure's current condition is also shown. Specifying this option increases theresponse time required to build the display. A panel similar to that shown inFigure 102 is displayed.

Depending on the status of the CFs and the systems in the sysplex you can use thePF10 key to perform the XCF REALLOCATE command to move the allocatedstructures to their preferred location. When you press PF10 to move the structures,a panel asking you to confirm the action is displayed, as shown in Figure 103 onpage 261. Press PF10 to confirm the action, or PF11 to cancel the reallocation.

Note: You must be authorized to perform the FORCE, REBUILD, START, STOP, orREALLOC action.

INGLX906 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 11 of 104Domain ID = IPXFI --------- INGSTR ---------- Date = 11/23/04Operator ID = NETOPER1 Time = 11:18:28

Structure names . . ==> Status . . . . . . : NORMALSysplex . . . . . . ==> KEYAPLEX Permission . . . . : ALLInclude condition . ==> YES (Yes/No - Condition retrieval takes longer)Include unallocated ==> YES (Yes/No)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Cmds: D display details / F force / P stop duplex / R rebuild / S start duplex

Structure P D Old New Pref. Location(s)---------------- - - -------- -------- -----------------DSNA_GBP0 U CFA CFB

Condition ...: Duplex rebuild is active.DSNA_GBP1 S CFA CFB

Condition ...: *Structure is not allocated.DSNA_GBP2 U CFA CFB

Condition ...:DSNA_GBP32K CFA

Condition ...: *Structure is not allocated.DSNA_LOCK1 S CFB CFA CFA CFB

Condition ...: Duplex rebuild is active.DSNA_SCA S CFA CFB CFA

Condition ...: System-managed rebuild is supported.GRPXCSQ_ADMIN CFB

Condition ...: System-managed rebuild is supported.GRPXHSAQUEUE CFB

Condition ...: System-managed rebuild is supported.HSA_LOG CFB CFA

Condition ...:IEFAUTOS CFA

Condition ...: *Structure is not allocated.IMSOSAMCACHE *CFB

Condition ...: *Structure is not allocated.IMSVSAMCACHE *CFB

Condition ...: *Structure is not allocated.ING_HEALTHCHKLOG CFA CFB

Condition ...:


F8=Forward F9=Refresh F10=ReAlloc F12=Retrieve

Figure 102. The INGSTR Panel with Structure Conditions

INGSTR


If you enter, for example, the command INGSTR D* COND=Y ALL=YOUTMODE=LINE, this produces line command output, as shown in Figure 104.

INGTHRESPurpose

The INGTHRES command displays all thresholds that are defined for a resource.INGTHRES lists the thresholds that were set using the INGTHRES command orthat are defined in your automation control file. INGTHRES also lets you set,change or delete the threshold settings for a particular resource. INGTHRES alsosets the defaults for all MVS subcomponents, for all subsystems, or for MVSESAcomponents.

Syntax

►► INGTHRESDEFAULTSSUBSYSTEMMVSESAresnamefilter

REQ=SET

REQ=DELThresholds ►

INGLX92X SA z/OS - Command DialogsDomain Id = IPXFI --------- INGSTR ---------- Date = 11/23/04Operator Id = NETOP1 Time = 12:32:58

Sysplex . . . . . . : KEYAPLEX

R E A L L O C A T E Confirmation

The XCF REALLOCATE process runs asynchronously on the next system in thesysplex that has access to the CFRM couple data set. XCF processes allstructures in sequence. Once started use the refresh PF key for getting thecurrent status of the process. When the process has completed but not allstructures have been moved to their preferred location look for IXC544Imessages in the netlog. This message provides an explanation of the reason whya structure wasn’t adjusted.



Figure 103. REALLOCATE Confirmation Panel

Structures: D*Sysplex...: KEYAPLEX

Structure P D Old New Pref. Location(s) Condition----------- - -------- -------- ----------------- ----------------------------DSNA_GBP0 U CFA CFB Duplex rebuild is active.DSNA_GBP1 S CFA CFB *Structure is not allocated.DSNA_GBP2 U CFA CFBDSNA_GBP32K CFA *Structure is not allocated.DSNA_LOCK1 S CFB CFA CFA CFB Duplex rebuild is active.DSNA_SCA S CFA CFB CFB CFA Duplex rebuild is active.*** End of Display ***

Figure 104. INGSTR Line Command Output

INGSTR



Dest_list*ALL


►◄

Thresholds:

CRIT=(nn,interval) FREQ=(nn,interval) INFR=(nn,interval)

Destination:


Dest_list:

▼( Destination )

Parameters

If you do not specify a subsystem, the INGTHRES panel is displayed.

DEFAULTSSets the default settings for all automated resources that: do not have theirown threshold settings OR do not belong to a group that has its own thresholdsettings.

SUBSYSTEMSets defaults for all subsystems.

MVSESASets defaults for all MVS subcomponents.

resnameSpecifies a particular resource, for example, WTOBUF. You can specify anyautomated resource.

filterIs the filter used for the output. Only resource names that match the filtercriteria are displayed. Wildcard is supported. The filter consists of the majorresource name and, optionally, of a minor resource name separated by aperiod, for example, CICS*.TRANS*, or .*CEMT. To view major resources specify*. To view minor resources specify xyz.*.

REQSpecifies the request type which can be:SET

Adds or updates the thresholds for the given resource. This is the defaultsetting.

DELDeletes the thresholds for the given resource.

INGTHRES


CRITSpecifies values for the critical threshold.

FREQSpecifies values for the frequent threshold.

INFRSpecifies values for the infrequent threshold.

nn Specifies the number of errors before the threshold is reached. You can specifya maximum of 50.

intervalSpecifies the time period before the threshold is reached in the formhh:mm[:ss], where:hh Hoursmm Minutesss Seconds




The changes you make are active only until the next time the automation controlfile is loaded.

The INGTHRES command can only be used when SA z/OS is initialized.

Usage

SA z/OS uses threshold settings to determine when to stop trying to recover acomponent or restart a subsystem. The primary use of thresholds is to tracksubsystem abends and to make sure that the abend-and-recovery cycle does notbecome a loop.

When a threshold is crossed, SA z/OS performs the action specified for thatthreshold in the automation control file. For components, this action iscustomer-defined: contact your SA z/OS administrator for more information. Forsubsystems, SA z/OS performs the following actions:

Threshold exceeded Action

Infrequent Issues warning message

Frequent Issues warning message

Critical Stops Restart automation and issues a message to that effect

All three threshold values (CRIT, FREQ, and INFR) can be set with one invocationof the command.

The Critical threshold should specify more errors or a shorter time period than theFrequent and Infrequent thresholds.

INGTHRES


Examples

To set defaults for all automated resources, enter:ingthres defaults crit=(2,00:14) freq=(2,01:00) infr=(4,04:00)

To add or replace the critical threshold for the resource JES2, enter:ingthres jes2 crit=(2,02:00)

If you enter ingthres jes2, you will see the command dialog shown in Figure 105.

If JES reaches the Critical threshold, Restart automation does not continue. If JESexceeds the Frequent or Infrequent threshold, a message is sent to notificationoperators to inform them.v The Cmd field lets you modify the thresholds of a resource. The following

command codes are supported:A Add new thresholds for a resource with the same values as the one selected.C Change existing thresholds for a selected resource.D Delete threshold settings for a selected resource.To define thresholds for a resource you can either type the ADD command atthe command line or specify command code A in front of the resource whosethresholds should be used as the default. You can then modify the settings asneeded.

v The System field shows the name of the system where the resource resides.v The Resource field shows the name of the resource that the thresholds are

defined for. The entries are sorted alphabetically.v The Critical field shows the critical threshold defined for the resource.v The Frequent field shows the frequent threshold defined for the resource.v The Infrequent field shows the infrequent threshold defined for the resource.

INGKYTH0 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 4Domain ID = IPSFM ---------- INGTHRES ---------- Date = 11/23/09Operator ID = NETOP1 Time = 12:52:57

Cmd: A Add thresholds C Change thresholds D Delete thresholds

Cmd System Resource Critical Frequent Infrequent--- -------- ---------------- -------------- -------------- --------------

KEY1 DEFAULTS 4 in 01:00:00 4 in 02:00:00 6 in 12:00:00KEY1 MVSESA 1 in 01:00:00 1 in 02:00:00 1 in 04:00:00KEY1 SUBSYSTEM 1 in 00:05:00 1 in 00:30:00 1 in 01:00:00KEY1 JES2 1 in 01:00:00 1 in 04:00:00 1 in 08:00:00



Figure 105. Display of Threshold Settings for JES (INGTHRES JES)

INGTHRES


If you specify command code A, a panel similar to Figure 106 is displayed.

INGTOPOPurpose

The INGTOPO command collects SA z/OS topology information from theautomation manager via the target systems and maintains the correspondingobjects and their hierarchies within RODM.

Syntax

►► INGTOPO INITtask_name

REBUILD plexSWEEPSWEEPSYS plex

►◄

Parameters

INITINIT mode causes INGTOPO to build or update the SA z/OS objects inRODM in accordance with the automation managers of all sysplexes that aredefined in the INGTOPOF file. INIT must be specified as the first mode ofINGTOPO. The autotask that the Topology Manager is run under is alsorequired.

Check the return code of message ING063I in the NetView log to provideinformation about the result of the INIT request.

You can call INGTOPO with INIT any time. INGTOPO then either rebuilds theSA z/OS objects from scratch or just performs the necessary updateoperations. In the former case all event-based minor resources that existed in

AOFKAASR SA z/OS - Command DialogsDomain ID = IPSFM ---------- INGTHRES ---------- Date = 12/07/01Operator ID = NETOP1 Time = 16:30:54

Specify thresholds and resource changes:

Resource => resource name, MVSESA, SUBSYSTEM or DEFAULTSMinor name => minor resource nameTarget => KEY4 System name, domain ID, sysplex name or *all

Critical => 04 errors in 01:00:00 Time (hh:mm:ss)Frequent => 04 errors in 02:00:00 Time (hh:mm:ss)Infrequent => 06 errors in 12:00:00 Time (hh:mm:ss)

Pressing ENTER will set the THRESHOLD values


PF12=Retrieve

Figure 106. INGTHRES Command Dialog Panel to Add Thresholds

INGTHRES


RODM will be lost, because these minor resources do not exist within theautomation manager and therefore cannot be built.

task_nameSpecifies the autotask that is used for status collection on the focal pointsystem.

plexSpecifies the sysplex or processor operations focal point.

REBUILDIn REBUILD mode, INGTOPO removes all SA z/OS objects in RODM for thespecified sysplex and rebuilds them from scratch. Note that after callingINGTOPO with REBUILD, all event-based minor resources that existed inRODM for this sysplex will be lost because these minor resources do not existwithin the automation manager and therefore cannot be built.

Note that the INGTOPO INIT command must have been successfully run atleast once before you can use the REBUILD option.

SWEEPAll SA z/OS topology manager objects in RODM are erased and all internalinformation is reset.

SWEEPSYS plexRemoves all SA z/OS objects in RODM for the specified sysplex or processoroperations focal point and stops all monitoring services.


To run the INGTOPO command the Multisystem Manager (MSM) must be active.

Usage

The INGTOPO command should be issued from the NetView that provides statusupdates to NMC.

INGTRIGPurpose

INGTRIG shows all triggers that are defined and used by resources within thesysplex.

Syntax

►► INGTRIGtrigger TARGET= system_name



►

►WAIT=nnn

►◄

Parameters

triggerSpecifies the name of a trigger so that all the resources that use the trigger aredisplayed.

INGTOPO




WAIT




Triggers for previous releases of SA z/OS cannot be shown.

Usage

The INGTRIG command operates sysplexwide. For an overview see “Overview ofCommands that Operate Sysplexwide” on page 13.

Examples

If you enter ingtrig a panel similar to Figure 107 is displayed.

This panel shows all triggers that are defined within the scope of the automationmanager.v The Cmd field allows you to display specific information for each system. The

following command code is available:

S Show associated resources. Displays all resources that use the trigger.v The Trigger field shows the name of the trigger.

INGKYTR0 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 10Domain ID = IPSFP ---------- INGTRIG ---------- Date = 10/26/99Operator ID = NETOP1 Sysplex = KEY1PLEX Time = 10:55:16

Cmd: S show associated resources

Cmd Trigger Description--- -------- ----------------------------------------

BATCHSTP Batch jobs B000P100,P200,P300BATCHSTR Batch jobs B000S100,S200,S300MDOTRGI3 Trigger3MDOTRIG1 Trigger1MDOTRIG2 Trigger2MSCTRG1 scheduling test trigger 1MSCTRG2 scheduling test trigger 2TRIGGER6 Hourly window + batch controlled eventsTRIGGER7 Command controlled events, No UNSETTRIGGER8 Command controlled events, diff. unsets



Figure 107. INGTRIG Initial Command Dialog Panel

INGTRIG


v The Description field shows the description of the trigger.

The FIND/RFIND and SORT subcommands are supported. See “Varying theFormat of the Command Output” on page 17 for information.

Showing Resources

Specify command code S in front of a trigger, or ingtrig triggername to displayall resources that are associated with that selected trigger, as shown in Figure 108.

v The Cmd field allows you to specify command codes to display specificinformation for the trigger. The following command code is available:

S Show trigger details. Initiates the DISPTRG command dialog for the selectedresource.

v The Resource field shows the name of the resource.v The Type field shows the type of the resource.v The System field shows the name of the system where the resource resides.v The Description field shows the description specified for the resource.


INGTWSPurpose

The INGTWS command lets you:v Display Application, Operation, Special Resource, Work Station and Calendar

information from the Current Plan.v Modify Application, Operation, Special Resource, Work Station information in

the Current Plan.

INGKYTR1 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 4Domain ID = IPSFP ---------- INGTRIG ---------- Date = 10/26/99Operator ID = AFRANCK Sysplex = KEY1PLEX Time = 11:16:54

Trigger . . : TRIGGER6 Hourly window + batch controlled events

Cmd: S show trigger detailsCmd Resource Type System Description--- ----------- ---- -------- ---------------------------------------------

TRGG006AA10 APL KEY1TRGG006AA10 APL KEY2TRGG006AA10 APL KEY3TRGG006AA10 APL KEY4



Figure 108. INGTRIG Command Dialog Panel Showing Resources Associated with a Trigger

INGTRIG


v Issue a request against any controller defined to SA z/OS in a sysplex.v Issue a request against a foreign controller where the local tracker is defined to

SA z/OS.v The output of the INGTWS command is either full screen or in pipeable line

mode.

Note: INGOPC is a synonym for INGTWS.

Syntax

►► INGTWS

▼

Resource

( resource_name )

REQ= LISTMOD TYPE= APPL

OPSRWSCAL

►

►TARGET=target OUTMODE= LINE

AUTONETLOG

MOD Options LIST Options ►

► APPL Selection Criteria OP Selection Criteria SR Selection Criteria ►

► WS Selection Criteria ►◄

MOD options:

▼

;

UPDATE=( keyword=value )

LIST options:

▼

;

TWSPARM=( keyword=value )

APPL Selection criteria:

AD=appl-id IA=yymmddhhmm

OP Selection criteria:

AD=appl-id IA=yymmddhhmm OPNO=nnnn JOBNAME=jobname STATUS=status ►

► ERRCODE=error_code GROUP=group OWNER=owner PRIORITY=priority ►

► WSNAME=workstation

SR Selection options:

SRNAME=special_resource

INGTWS


WS Selection options:

WSNAME=workstation

Parameters

resourceThe resource specifies the TWS controller that is to be queried or modified.Multiple specifications are allowed as well as system and sysplex applicationgroups. Wildcards % and * are supported.

The command attempts to resolve the specification to a single appropriatetarget resource. In all cases the groups are resolved to their members andwildcards are resolved to specific sets of resources.

The resulting list of resources is scanned to check whether there is a singleactive controller. If a single active controller is found then it is used. If noactive controller is found then the list is scanned to check whether there is asingle active tracker (only active trackers with LUNAME policy entries arechecked because only these trackers can be used to communicate with TWS viathe PIF interface). If a single active tracker is found then it is used.

If no viable resources are found an error message is displayed. If multipleviable resources are found, and INGTWS is running in full screen mode, aselection panel is displayed; when OUTMODE=LINE is specified an errormessage is displayed.

If an active controller could be found, a command is dispatched to theappropriate system in the sysplex to execute the TWS API on the same systemas the active controller. If a tracker was found, the LUNAME parameter of thetrackers OPCCNTL entry may be used to specify a remote controller. In thiscase the command is dispatched to the system where the tracker is runningand the APPC API is used to connect to the remote controller from thatsystem.

REQSpecifies the request to be issued to the TWS subsystem. It can be one of thefollowing:

LIST Lists TWS Current Plan resources.

MOD Modifies TWS Current Plan resources.

TYPESpecifies the type of Current Plan resource to be listed or modified. It can beone of the following:

APPL Specifies the Current Plan Application Description resource.

OP Specifies the Current Plan Operation resource.

SR Specifies the Current Plan Special resource.

WS Specifies the Current Plan Workstation resource.

CAL Specifies the Current Plan Calendar resource.

UPDATESpecifies the fields that are to be updated and the new contents of the field.Multiple fields can be specified separated by a semi-colon ";". The names of thefields are the same names as specified in the MODIFY command arguments inTWS for z/OS Programming Interfaces.

INGTWS


An alternative to specifying all the fields to be updated using the UPDATE=parameter is to specify the fields and their contents in the default SAFE.Specify one field per message with the format of<fieldname><blank>=<blank><contents>. The blanks between the fieldnameand the = symbol and the = symbol and the contents are required.

TWSPARMSpecifies additional fields to be used to locate a resource during LISTprocessing. Multiple fields may be specified separated by a semi-colon ";". Thenames of the fields are the same names as specified in the LIST commandarguments described in the TWS for z/OS Programming Interfaces manual. Thefield names must match the TWS segment being searched. For example, CPOCfields are valid for TYPE=APPL and CPOP fields are valid for TYPE=OP, andso on. A TWS EQQ* message will be issued if the field specification isincorrect.

An alternative to specifying additional LIST fields using the TWSPARM=parameter is to specify the fields and their values in the default SAFE. Specifyone field per message using the format<fieldname><blanks>=<blanks><contents>. The blanks are optional.

If the same field names are specified in both the TWSPARM and the defaultSAFE, the TWSPARM values will be used.

Additional LIST fields can only be specified with OUTMODE=LINE.

AD Specifies the Application Description selection criteria. For LIST requests, thismay contain the trailing "*" wildcard character. For MOD requests, this must bethe exact name of the application description to be updated.

IA Specifies the input arrival date/time of the application. The format is asspecified by the system programmer when installing and customizing TWS.The default format is YYYYMMDDHHMM.

OPNOSpecifies the operation number selection criteria. This is the operation numberof an operation in an application description.

JOBNAMESpecifies the TWS jobname. This field is used to qualify requests of type OPand is optional for all requests.

STATUSSpecifies the TWS status. This field is used to qualify requests of type OP andis optional for all requests.

ERRCODESpecifies the TWS error code. This field is used to qualify requests of type OPand is optional for all requests.

GROUPSpecifies the TWS group. This field is used to qualify requests of type OP andis optional for all requests.

OWNERSpecifies the TWS owner. This field is used to qualify requests of type OP andis optional for all requests.

PRIORITYSpecifies the TWS priority. This field is used to qualify requests of type OP andis optional for all requests.

INGTWS


SRNAMESpecifies the Special Resource selection criteria.

For LIST requests, this may contain the trailing "*" wildcard character. ForMOD requests, this must be the exact name of the special resource.

If the special resource name contains special characters then it must beenclosed in single quotation marks.

WSNAMESpecifies the workstation name selection criteria. Specifies the workstationname selection criteria but may also be used to qualify TYPE=OP requests.

For LIST requests, this may contain the trailing "*" wildcard character. ForMOD requests, this must be the exact name of the workstation.

TARGETSpecifies the name of the system (system, domain, or sysplex) that thecommand should be routed to. The TWS controller specified in the resourcefield must be active on this system or the command will return no data. This isonly necessary when the resource is not part of the local sysplex.

For information on the TARGET parameter, see “TARGET Parameter” on page14.



To use the INGTWS command system operations must be initialized.

Usage

The INGTWS command operates sysplexwide. For an overview see “Overview ofCommands that Operate Sysplexwide” on page 13.

Examples

If you type INGTWS a panel similar to Figure 109 on page 273 is displayed.

INGTWS


v The Resource field shows the name of the TWS active controller subsystem to beused for issuing the requests. The format is name/type[/system]. Wildcards aresupported.

v The Target field shows the name of the system (system name, domain, orsysplex name) that the command should be routed to. Specifying this is onlynecessary if the resources do not reside on the local sysplex.

v The Request field shows the request to be carried out. It can be LIST orMODIFY.

v The Type field shows the type of TWS Current Plan resource to be specified.v The Application field specifies the TWS application ID, This field is used to

qualify requests of type APPL or OP and is optional for LIST requests but isrequired for MODIFY requests.

v The IA®(R) Date/Time field specifies the TWS input arrival time. This field isused to qualify requests of type APPL or OP and is optional for LIST requestsbut is required for MODIFY requests.

v The Operation # field specifies the TWS operation number. This field is used toqualify requests of type APPL or OP and is optional for LIST requests but isrequired for MODIFY requests.

v The Jobname field specifies the TWS jobname associated with an operation. Thisfield is used to qualify requests of type OP and is optional for all requests.

v The Status field specifies the TWS status associated with an operation. This fieldis used to qualify requests of type OP and is optional for all requests.

v The Error Code field specifies the TWS error code associated with an operation.This field is used to qualify requests of type OP and is optional for all requests.

v The Group field specifies the TWS group associated with an operation. Thisfield is used to qualify requests of type OP and is optional for all requests.

v The Owner field specifies the TWS owner associated with an operation. Thisfield is used to qualify requests of type OP and is optional for all requests.

v The Priority field specifies the TWS priority associated with an operation. Thisfield is used to qualify requests of type OP and is optional for all requests.

EVJKYRQ0 SA z/OS - Command DialogsDomain ID = IPSFM ---------- INGTWS ---------- Date = 05/08/03Operator ID = NETOP1 Time = 04:28:39

Resource => format: name/type/systemTarget => System name, domain ID or sysplex name

Request => Request type (LIST/MODIFY)Type => Type of resource (APPL/OP/SR/WS/CAL)

Application =>IA Date/Time=> (YYMMDDHHMM)

Operation # => Group =>Jobname => Owner =>Status => Priority =>Error Code =>Workstation =>

SR Name =>


PF12=Retrieve

Figure 109. INGTWS Command Dialog Panel

INGTWS


v The Workstation field specifies the TWS workstation for the operation. This fieldis used to qualify requests of type OP and type WS and is optional for all LISTrequests but is required for type WS MODIFY requests.

v The SR Name field specifies the TWS special resource name. This field is usedto qualify requests of type SR and is optional for LIST requests but is requiredfor MODIFY requests.

To set the status of the special resource 'testnnnn' to available, enter the followingcommand:

ingtws req=mod type=sr srname=testnnnn outmode=line Update=(resavail=y)

If you specify INGTWS * REQ=LIST TYPE=APPL a panel similar to Figure 110 isdisplayed.

If you specify INGTWS * REQ=LIST TYPE=OP a panel similar to Figure 111 on page275 is displayed.

INGKYSTO SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 65Domain ID = IPSFM -------- INGTWS --------- Date = 04/10/02Operator ID = AFRANCK Sysplex = KEY1PLEX Time = 16:19:30CMD: A Update B Operations / scroll

Application Occurrence ListInput Arrival Error

CMD Application Id Date Time Status Code Description--- ---------------- -------- ----- --------- ----- ------------------------

JKOPCTST1 02/01/23 00:01 Completed Test Batch IfaceJKTEST1 02/01/23 00:08 Completed This is a testJKOPCTST1 02/01/24 00:01 Completed Test Batch IfaceJKTEST1 02/01/24 00:08 Completed This is a testIEFBR14 02/01/24 08:01 Completed This is a testJKOPCTST1 02/01/25 00:01 Starting Test Batch IfaceJKTEST1 02/01/25 00:08 Completed This is a testIEFBR14 02/01/25 08:01 Completed This is a testJKOPCTST1 02/01/26 00:01 Error Test Batch IfaceJKTEST1 02/01/26 00:08 Completed This is a testIEFBR14 02/01/26 08:01 Completed This is a testJKOPCTST1 02/01/27 00:01 Error Test Batch IfaceJKTEST1 02/01/27 00:08 Completed This is a test

Command ===>PF1=Help PF2=End PF3=Return PF5=Filters PF6=Roll

Figure 110. INGTWS REQ=LIST TYPE=APPL Command Dialog Panel

INGTWS


If you specify INGTWS * REQ=LIST TYPE=SR a panel similar to Figure 112 isdisplayed.

If you specify INGTWS * REQ=LIST TYPE=WS a panel similar to Figure 113 on page276 is displayed.

INGKYSTO SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 3Domain ID = IPSFM -------- INGTWS --------- Date = 04/10/02Operator ID = NETOP1 Sysplex = KEY1PLEX Time = 16:23:08CMD: A Update / scroll

Operations ListOp. -------JES------- Err. Work

CMD Num. Name Number Status Reason Code Stn.--- ---- -------- -------- --------- ------------------------------ ---- ----

1 EVJSJ001 Completed NV011 JKTST1 JOB06429 Completed N0011 IEFBR14 JOB00325 Completed CPU11 EVJSJ001 JOB07522 Completed N0011 JKTST1 JOB07521 Completed N0011 IEFBR14 JOB07523 Completed CPU11 EVJSJ001 JOB00787 Interrupt N0011 JKTST1 JOB07524 Completed N0011 IEFBR14 JOB07526 Completed CPU11 EVJSJ001 JOB07528 Error JCL N0011 JKTST1 JOB07527 Completed N0011 IEFBR14 JOB07529 Completed CPU11 EVJSJ001 JOB07533 Error JCL N001


Figure 111. INGTWS REQ=LIST TYPE=OP Command Dialog Panel


Special Resources List--Actual-- -Default--

CMD Name Av. Quant. Av. Quant.--- -------------------------------------------- --- ------ --- ------

ING.KEY1.APL.CICSK1G.DOWN No 1 Yes 1ING.KEY1.APL.CICSK1G.UP No 1 Yes 1ING.KEY1.APL.RMF.DOWN No 1 Yes 1ING.KEY1.APL.RMF.UP Yes 1 Yes 1ING.KEY1.APL.RMFIII.DOWN No 1 Yes 1ING.KEY1.APL.RMFIII.UP Yes 1 Yes 1ING.KEY2.APL.CICSK1G.DOWN Yes 1 Yes 1ING.KEY2.APL.CICSK1G.UP No 1 Yes 1ING.KEY2.APL.RMF.DOWN No 1 Yes 1ING.KEY2.APL.RMF.UP Yes 1 Yes 1ING.KEY2.APL.RMFIII.DOWN No 1 Yes 1ING.KEY2.APL.RMFIII.UP Yes 1 Yes 1ING.KEY3.APL.CICSK1G.DOWN Yes 1 Yes 1


Figure 112. INGTWS REQ=LIST TYPE=SR Command Dialog Panel

INGTWS


If you specify INGTWS * REQ=LIST TYPE=CAL a panel similar to Figure 114 isdisplayed.

Press PF10 and PF11 to display more information for each resource type. Issuingthe command code A Update command against a resource in the CMD fielddisplays a panel that lets you modify the resource. The Application Description listsupports the B Operations command code. Issuing this command code against anapplication resource displays a list of operations for that resource.SORT/FIND/RFIND commands are supported. See “Varying the Format of theCommand Output” on page 17 for further information.


Work Stations ListReporting JCL Alt. Para.

CMD Name Status Type Attribute Prep STC WTO ReRoute WS Server--- ---- ------- ---------- ---------- ---- --- --- ------- ---- ------

NV02 Unknown General Automatic No No No No NoNV03 Unknown General Automatic No No No No NoOPR1 Unknown General Completion No No No No NoWTO1 Active General Automatic No No Yes No NoNV01 Unknown General Automatic No No No No NoCPU1 Active Computer Automatic No No No No NoN001 Active Computer Automatic No No No No No


Figure 113. INGTWS REQ=LIST TYPE=WS Command Dialog Panel

INGKYSTO SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 2Domain ID = IPSFM -------- INGTWS --------- Date = 04/10/02Operator ID = NETOP1 Sysplex = KEY1PLEX Time = 16:31:46CMD: / scroll

Calendar List

CMD Name Days Shift Description--- ---------------- ---- ----- ------------------------------

APC 7 0000 general APC calendarDEFAULT 8 0000 general APC calendar


Figure 114. INGTWS REQ=LIST TYPE=CAL Command Dialog Panel

INGTWS


Pressing PF5 displays a filter selection panel similar to Figure 115 is displayed.

Specify filter strings in the format field-name op contents where:v field-name is a valid field name as specified by the MODIFY command

arguments in TWS for z/OS Programming Interfaces.v op can have the following values:

=^=<<=>>=

v contents are the desired values to be matched by the op. The trailing wildcardcharacter '*' may be used for op.

The operands must be separated by a blank.

INGVOTEPurpose

The INGVOTE command displays:v All pending requests that were entered from the automation manager.v All pending votes of a specified resource.

Syntax

EVJKFLT SA z/OS - Command DialogsDomain ID = IPSFM ---------- EVJFILT ---------- Date = 04/10/02Operator ID = NETOP1 Time = 16:36:48

Specify or revise the filter criteria:

Active Controller ==> OPCF/APL/KEY1OPC/TWS resource ==> CAL APPL, OP, SR, WS or CAL

Generic Filter strings in the format NAME = value==> ==>==> ==>==> ==>==> ==>==> ==>==> ==>==> ==>==> ==>==> ==>==> ==>


Figure 115. INGTWS Filter Command Dialog Panel

INGTWS


►► INGVOTEresource

STATUS=ALL

STATUS= WINNINGNOWINNINGLOSINGNOLOSING

SOURCE=name►

►EXCLUDE=( res_type ) USER=name WAIT=nnn

►

►SYSTEM=(-system_list-) RESNAME=resname

SHOW=EXPANDED

SHOW=COLLAPSED►




AUTONETLOG

►◄

Parameters

resourceSpecifies the resource to be displayed. The format is name/type[/system].Wildcard is supported.

STATUSSpecifies whether to display the winning or losing requests or votes only. Thedefault is ALL. The STATUS parameter can have the following values:

WINNINGDisplays the winning requests or votes.

NOWINNINGDisplays the losing requests or votes.

LOSINGDisplays the losing requests or votes.

NOLOSINGDisplays the winning requests or votes only.

ALL Displays all winning and losing requests or votes. This is the default.

The values can be abbreviated. Note that if you specify a resource name thevote status is examined, otherwise the request status is examined.

SOURCEThis is used as a filter. Only those requests that originate from the namedsource are shown. Wildcards are supported, for example, OP*. An asterisk (*)matches a string of arbitrary length and a percentage sign (%) matches a singlecharacter.



INGVOTE



EXCLUDESpecifies the resource type to be excluded from the display. More than onevalue can be specified. For example, INGVOTE EXCLUDE=SVP causes all serviceperiod resources to be filtered out from the display. Specify NO or * to reset theinstallation-provided default.

USERThis is used as a filter. Only those requests that originate from the specifieduser id are shown. Wildcard is supported. An asterisk (*) matches a string ofarbitrary length and a percentage sign (%) matches a single character.

WAIT



SYSTEMThis is used as a filter. Only resources are shown that reside on one of thegiven systems. You can use system names or domain ids to identify thosesystems. An asterisk (*) also includes sysplexwide resources. The parenthesescan be omitted when only one system is specified. Note that this parameter isignored when a resource name is specified.

RESNAMEThis is used as a filter for resource names in the format name/type[/system].Only resources that match the specified resource name are shown. Wildcardsare supported. An asterisk (*) matches a string of arbitrary length and apercentage sign (%) matches a single character. Note that this parameter isignored when a resource name is specified.

SHOWSpecifies whether or not to show just the request types or also the requestdetails. It can be:

EXPANDEDThis shows request types and the request details. This is the default.

COLLAPSEDThis shows the just the request types.


None.


The INGVOTE command supports resource level security. If turned on, thefollowing profiles in SYSAUTO are checked:



UPDATE When issuing CANCEL orKILL against requests fromfull screen

INGVOTE


|

||

||||

|||||||

Usage other than listed in the table does not cause a resource level security check.Multiple requests entered on the panel are processed individually.


Usage

The INGVOTE command operates sysplexwide. For an overview see “Overview ofCommands that Operate Sysplexwide” on page 13.

Examples

If you enter ingvote a panel similar to Figure 116 is displayed.

v The Cmd field allows you to specify command codes. To use one of thecommand codes shown, type the appropriate letter next to the resource nameand press Enter. The following command codes are available:

C Cancels the request.

K Cancels the request without showing the verification panel.

S Shows details about the request.

V Shows all the votes or requests that have been entered for that resource.v The Type field shows the type of the resource.v The Name field shows the name of the resource that the request was made

against.v The Request Data field shows details about the request. See the online help for

further information.

The subcommands FIND/RFIND are supported. See “Varying the Format of theCommand Output” on page 17 for more information.

INGKYRQ2 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 25Domain ID = IPUFA ---------- INGVOTE ---------- Date = 09/08/08Operator ID = NETOP1 Sysplex = AOCPLEX Time = 19:05:50

Cmd: C Cancel request K Kill request S Show details V Show votesCmd Name Type System Request Data--- ----------- ---- -------- ------ ------------------------------------------

BNKNACHT SVP Req : MakeUnAvailableAt : 2008-09-08 09:39:58Org : SCHEDULEPri : 01120000 Should Be Down - ScheduleStat: Winning/Unsatisfied

BZOMSCMV SVP Req : MakeAvailable_OnlyAt : 2008-09-08 09:39:58Org : SCHEDULEPri : 02140000 Must Be Up - ScheduleStat: Winning/Unsatisfied

HOURLY SVP Req : MakeAvailable_OnlyAt : 2008-09-08 10:00:01Org : SCHEDULE



Figure 116. INGVOTE Command Dialog Panel

INGVOTE


||

||

Line-mode OutputThe line-mode output of the INGVOTE command shows additional informationabout the request:v Timeout optionv Application parametersv Request options (command type, Restart option, Override option, Autoremove

option)

Figure 117 shows an example.

MONITORPurpose

The MONITOR command causes the SA z/OS monitoring routine to be run.

Syntax

►► MONITOR

▼ subsystem


►◄

Parameters

subsystemIs the name of the subsystem you want monitored. It can be a list ofsubsystems. The default is that all subsystems will be monitored.

You can also specify wildcards. This applies a filter for monitoring. Onlyresource names that match the filter criteria are monitored. Wildcard issupported. Valid specifications are, for example, *abc, abc*, or *abc*.


INGKYRQ0 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 5Domain ID = IPUNA ---------- INGVOTE ---------- Date = 12/14/11Operator ID = NETOPER1 Sysplex = AOCAPLEX Time = 17:03:16

Resource ==> SVPHDOWN/SVPSystem ==> System name, domain id or sysplex name

Cmd: C cancel request K Kill request S show request detailsCmd Action WIN Request/Vote Data--- ------ --- ----------------------------------------------------------------

STOP Y Request : MakeUnAvailableCreated : 2011-12-14 16:23:19Originator : SCHEDULEPriority : 02120000 Must Be Down - ScheduleStatus : Winning

Figure 117. INGVOTE Command Output

INGVOTE



The MONITOR command can only be used when SA z/OS is initialized.

The output of the MONITOR command is always in line mode.

Usage

MONITOR can be used whenever you want to validate your current automationagent status information.

Examples

To monitor TSO, VTAM and all subsystems that start with CICS, enter thefollowing:monitor TSO VTAM CICS*

OPCAQRYPurpose

The OPCAQRY command displays the status of TWS Automation operations,including all commands that are received via the request interface. It displays allcommand requests processed within the defined time limit.

Syntax

►► OPCAQRYsubsystem REQ=DETAIL TARGET= system_name

domain_IDsaplex_name*ALL

►

►OUTMODE= LINE

AUTONETLOG

►◄

Parameters

subsystemThe name of the subsystem. Unless you specify REQ=DETAIL, more than onesubsystem name as well as a wildcard can be specified. The wildcard can be,for example, SAP*, *SAP or *SAP*

Note: This parameter has no effect for requests with a type of 'COMMAND'.

REQ=DETAILDisplays TWS-related information for the specified subsystem. The resourcename is mandatory when REQ=DETAIL is specified.

Note: This parameter is not applicable for requests with a type of'COMMAND'.


MONITOR


|||

|

||



The OPCAQRY command can only be used when SA z/OS is initialized.

Examples

If you enter the OPCAQRY command without the REQ=DETAIL parameter, apanel similar to Figure 118 is displayed. The panel shows information aboutTWS-controlled subsystems that match the filter criteria.

v The Cmd field allows you to specify command codes to invoke anothercommand dialog. The following command codes are available:

D Shows the TWS operation details for the subsystem.

R Resets the timer and completion flags to a null value, and unlocks a specificsubsystem after a user error has been detected and corrected. By resettingthe timer and completion flags, SA z/OS again accepts requests from TWS.

v The Status field shows the status of the request or command in SA z/OS.For a request this is either complete, incomplete, timeout, in progress, or norequest.A status of timeout indicates that the operation is marked in error because it didnot complete within the time limit set by the system programmer in the OPCAcode entry.A status of incomplete indicates that the operation did not achieve the expectedstatus set by the system programmer in the OPCA code entry.Complete and no request are considered normal statuses.For a command, the statuses are:

EVJKYQRY SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 3Domain ID = IPSFP -------- OPCAQRY --------- Date = 04/29/06Operator ID = NETOP1 System = KEY4 Time = 18:08:27

CMD: D Details R Reset

CMD Subsystem System Application Request Date Time Status--- ----------- -------- ---------------- -------- -------- ----- ------------

OPCAO1 KEY4 OPCAO#TESTAD STOP 04/28/06 17:00 CompleteOPCAO2 KEY4 OPCAO#TESTAD RECYCLE 04/28/06 17:14 CompleteRMF KEY4 OPCAO#TESTAD STOP 04/29/06 18:05 In progress

KEY4 OPCAO#TESTAD COMMAND 04/29/06 18:07 In progress



Figure 118. OPCAQRY Command Dialog Panel

OPCAQRY


In progressThe command has been received

In errorThe command completed but failed

CompleteThe command completed successfully

TimeoutThe command did not finish in time

WaitingThe command finished processing but is now waiting for completion


If you enter command code D for a subsystem or specify the REQ=DETAIL option,a panel similar to Figure 119 is displayed.

If the command is in an error condition, the details that are displayed are similarto those in Figure 120 on page 285.

EVJKYQR1 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 17Domain ID = IPSFP -------- OPCAQRY --------- Date = 04/29/06Operator ID = NETOP1 System = KEY4 Time = 18:10:48

Application : OPCAO#TESTADWorkstation : NV04Operation number : 10IA Time : 04/28/06 17:00Job Name : OPCAO1Owner : NETOP1

Arrived in SA z/OS : 04/28/06 17:00Command : INGREQ CICS2/APl/SYS1 REQ=START OUTMODE=LINE VERIFY=NOStatus : In progressTask : CMD1

Checking Routine : CMD1$CHCKMaximum wait time : 00:30Maximum return code : 0



Figure 119. OPCAQRY Command Dialog Panel Showing Details for a Command

OPCAQRY


RESTARTPurpose

The RESTART command checks a specified subsystem or all subsystems that aredefined to SA z/OS on a particular system, and sets the HOLD flag to No.

Syntax

►► RESTARTsubsystem TARGET= Destination

Dest_list*ALL

►

►OUTMODE= LINE

AUTONETLOG

►◄

Destination:


Dest_list:

▼

,

( Destination )

EVJKYQR1 SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 17Domain ID = IPSFP -------- OPCAQRY --------- Date = 04/29/06Operator ID = NETOP1 System = KEY4 Time = 18:10:48

Application : OPCAO#TESTADWorkstation : NV04Operation number : 10IA Time : 04/28/06 17:00Job Name : OPCAO1Owner : NETOP1

Arrived in SA z/OS : 04/28/06 17:00Command : INGLIST * OUTMODE=LINEStatus : In errorTask : Task

Error code : U007Error message : AOF227I UNABLE TO PROCESS INGLIST - COMMAND NOT

PERFORMED DUE TO USER EXIT

Checking Routine : CMD1$CHCKMaximum wait time : 00:30Maximum return code : 0



Figure 120. OPCAQRY Command Dialog Panel Showing Details for a Command in Error

RESTART


Parameters

subsystemSpecifies the name of the subsystem to be allowed to start. If you do notspecify a subsystem name, SA z/OS attempts to restart all subsystems.




You can only use the RESTART command when SA z/OS is initialized.

RESYNCPurpose

This command causes SA z/OS to rerun selected parts of its initial statusdetermination routines or to reinitialize parts of its environment setup.

Syntax

►► RESYNCSUBSYSTEMREGISTERAMWTORXCFSMFTIMERNTFYOPGATEWAYSDFSDFDEFSCPMSGCPMSG_NMCFPEXITSUTCOFFSET

TARGET= DestinationDest_list

*ALL

►

►OUTMODE= LINE

AUTONETLOG

►◄

Destination:


RESTART


Dest_list:

▼( Destination )

Parameters

SUBSYSTEMReinitializes the status of all subsystems on the local agent and clears thestatus file from deleted subsystems.

REGISTERRegisters all subsystem resources and monitor resources on the local agent andcross system to all agents in the sysplex.

AM Status synchronization of all subsystem resources and monitor resources withthe automation manager.

WTORRetrieves the list of outstanding WTORs from the system, and updates thestored WTOR data in SA z/OS to refresh their display in SDF and NMC.

XCFRetrieves information from MVS and updates the stored data in SA z/OSabout:v The status of the sysplex timer and the IDs of each active sidev The coupling facilities that are known to MVSv The status of the couple data sets that are in use by the sysplex

SMFChecks the SMF data sets and, if any of the SMF data sets are found in theDUMP status, issues the commands that are defined to SMFDUMP in theMESSAGES/USER DATA automation policy for the MVSESA entry.

TIMERThe timers for the general subsystem monitor and the gateway monitor arereset.

NTFYOPResets the hold settings at all notify operators via SETHOLD AUTO andsubscribes the receivers of class 8x and 9x messages to the automationmanager.

GATEWAYThe gateway connections to remote systems that are controlled by SA z/OSare restarted.

SDFReinitializes the status information for the local SDF and forwards it to theSDF focal point.

SDFDEFSGenerates the SDF panels using the advanced automation option (AAO)AOF_AAO_SDFROOT.n for the SDF root names that are to be applied.

CPMSGForwards the captured exceptional messages to SDF. An exceptional message isa message with a severity of Unusual, Important or Critical.

RESYNC


||

CPMSG_NMCForwards the captured exceptional messages to NMC. An exceptional messageis a message with a severity of Unusual, Important or Critical.

FP Resends the status information for the local SDF to the SDF focal point.

EXITSReregisters SA z/OS exit routines if applicable. This includes dropping orloading the SA z/OS USS process exit and the SA z/OS ARM exit. Inaddition, the existence of user exits AOFEXSTA, AOFEXX02, AOFEEXX03 andAOFEXX04 is verified and the exits are enabled or disabled as appropriate.

UTCOFFSETReevaluates the time zone offset relating to the Coordinated Universal Time(UTC), formerly known as Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).




The RESYNC command can only be used when SA z/OS is initialized.

Usage

This command should only be used when your statuses have gone out ofsynchronization with actual statuses. Possible causes of this are SSI task failure,problems with your NetView automation table, or communication problems withthe automation manager.

SETHOLDPurpose

SETHOLD lets you select which AOF messages are held for your operator ID. Thiscommand is used by the INGNTFY command but can be invoked separately.

Syntax

►► SETHOLD CONFIGAUTOi a e d w

►◄

Parameters

CONFIGSpecifying this option changes your hold settings to match the settingsspecified for your operator ID in the automation control file. If your operatorID is not defined as a notification operator, no messages will be held.

AUTOSpecifying this option changes your hold settings to match the settings

RESYNC


INGNTFY has currently defined for your operator ID. If your operator ID isnot a notification operator, or its definition as a notification operator has beendeleted, no messages will be held.

i a e d wEach character specifies the hold setting for the corresponding type of message.If a Y is specified, messages of that type will be held, if any other character isspecified, messages of that type will not be held. A character must be specifiedfor each type.


The SETHOLD command is only useful on an OST task. If issued on an NNT orRMT task, the message-holding flags in the remote domain will be ignored,because the automation table on the OST task will override whatever messageattributes may have been specified in the remote domain.

SETHOLD does not update the INGNTFY globals, so if you use it with anythingother than the AUTO parameter, the hold settings shown by INGNTFY QUERYmay not reflect reality.

Usage

SA z/OS issues SETHOLD at SA z/OS initialization, when you log on to NetViewinterface, and when INGNTFY is used.

When you log on, an entry in the sample automation table (in memberAOFMSGMS) will invoke SETHOLD AUTO for your operator ID. When INGNTFY isused to change an operator's HOLD settings, SETHOLD AUTO will be issued on theappropriate OST task after the global information has been updated.

A more efficient usage would be to modify your initial REXX scripts to issueSETHOLD with specific settings and to not have any hold settings specified in theautomation control file or through INGNTFY. If you choose to do this, you willneed to remove the automation table entry for the OST (in member AOFMSGMS)and set the AOFLOCALHOLD advanced automation option to 1. Doing this willstop INGNTFY from using EXCMD to issue SETHOLD AUTO, which can disrupt thehold settings specified from your profiles.

Note that the attributes for held messages are defined as automation tablesynonyms in the AOFMSGSY member.

It is recommended that you do not hold information messages because SA z/OScan generate quite a few of them. If you do hold them, use the CLRHELDcommand to remove them. You may want to modify the attributes for heldinformation messages (held in the AOFMSGSY ACF member) so that heldinformation messages will not actually be held.

Examples

To hold the messages that INGNTFY says you should have held, enter SETHOLDAUTO. Messages will be held according to the task INGNTFY setting.

To hold all but information messages, enter SETHOLD N Y Y Y Y. All AOF messages,except informational ones, will be held.

SETHOLD


SETSTATEPurpose

SETSTATE changes the agent automation status of a given subsystem.

Syntax

►► SETSTATE subsystem AUTODOWNCTLDOWNENDEDMOVEDRESTARTUP

SCOPE=ONLY

SCOPE= ALLCHILDREN

START=NO

START=YES►

►OVERRIDE=NO

OVERRIDE= ALLEVTFLGTRG

TARGET= DestinationDest_list

*ALL

►

►OUTMODE= LINE

AUTONETLOG

►◄

Destination:


Dest_list:

▼

,

( Destination )

Parameters

subsystemSpecifies the subsystem whose status (or whose dependent resource's status)you want to change. You can also specify the subsystem's job name.

AUTODOWNChanges the status from CTLDOWN, STOPPED, BROKEN, MOVED orFALLBACK to AUTODOWN. It is primarily used to return the resource toautomation control after the operator has fixed the problem.

CTLDOWNChanges the status to CTLDOWN so that the subsystem cannot be started byautomation.

SETSTATE


ENDEDChanges the status to ENDED.

MOVEDThe effect of this parameter depends on how the subsystem is defined:v If the subsystem does not have any secondary system associations, the effect

of the MOVED operand is the same as the effect of the CTLDOWN operand:the status of the subsystem is changed to CTLDOWN.

v If the subsystem does have secondary system associations:– If the command is issued on one of the subsystem's primary systems, the

subsystem's status is changed to MOVED– If the command is issued on one of the subsystem's secondary systems,

the subsystem's status is changed to FALLBACK.

RESTARTChanges the status to RESTART so that the subsystem can be restarted. Specifythis if your Initstart flag is set to No. This can only be used when:v SCOPE=ONLY or SCOPE=ALLv The application monitor status of the subsystem is INACTIVE

UP Changes the status to UP/RUNNING if the subsystem's UPMSG has beenmissed. This can only be used when:v SCOPE=ONLYv The application monitor status of the subsystem is ACTIVEv If the subsystem is enabled for automatic restart management, its automatic

restart management status must be AVAILABLE or AVAILABLE-TO.

Note: For transient subsystems, UP becomes RUNNING.

SCOPESpecifies what is affected by this command:

ONLYChanges the status of this resource only. This is the default.

ALLChanges the status of this resource and its dependent resources.

CHILDRENChanges the status of the dependent resources only.

OVERRIDESpecifies the overrides to be considered for the request. It can be one of thefollowing:

NO Specifies that no override will be done. This is the default.

ALLSets the FLG, TRG as well as DPY and STS overrides on. For DPY and STSsee the “INGREQ” on page 218 command for more details.

EVT | TRGThe startup or shutdown trigger conditions will be ignored.

FLGThe appropriate automation flags will be ignored for the resource.

STARTSpecifies whether the resource is started after the status has been updated.

SETSTATE


NO No request is sent to the automation manager. The automation agent statusis updated. This is the default.

YESA default start request is sent to the automation manager.

Note: The START parameter is deprecated. SA z/OS 3.5 is the last release thatsupports it.




The SETSTATE command will not execute under the primary POI task (PPT).

The SETSTATE command can only be used when SA z/OS is initialized.

When the SETSTATE command is used to change the status of a subsystem to UPor AUTODOWN, then this will trigger a call to ACTIVMSG or TERMMSG. Whenusing AUTHCHK=SOURCEID as part of your SAF product authorization checkingprofile, the operator/task issuing the SETSTATE command will require theauthority to issue commands and replies that may subsequently be triggered byACTIVMSG or TERMMSG. This is due to the fact that the status change processdid not originate on the work operator assigned to the subsystem as usual but onthe operator/task who issued the SETSTATE command.


The SETSTATE command supports resource level security. If turned on, thefollowing profiles in SYSAUTO are checked:



UPDATE Always

If START=YES is specified another resource level security check is done by theinvoked INGREQ command.


Usage

Use SETSTATE to:v Resume handling an application after a manual operator shutdown or after any

other event that causes an application to get into a non-automatable status (forexample STOPPED, CTLDOWN, BROKEN, ACTIVE)

v Prevent automation from restarting an application if you specify CTLDOWN.v Alert the automation that an application that was shut down will be moved to

another system.

SETSTATE


||

||||||||

|

||

||||

||||

|

||

||

v The SETSTATE command issues an automation manager request with a priorityof HIGH (unless overridden by the advanced automation global INGREQ_PRI).Because requests entered by the operator are persistent, it may be necessary tomanually remove the associated vote before subsequent requests are activated.

Examples

If you enter setstate TSO a panel similar to Figure 121 is displayed.

SETTIMERPurpose

SETTIMER displays all scheduled timers. You can add, change, delete, suspend,and reactivate timers.

Syntax

►► SETTIMERTARGET= system_name



►◄

Parameters



AOFKSAST SA z/OS - Command DialogsDomain ID = IPSNO ---------- SETSTATE ---------- Date = 07/19/00Operator ID = NETOP1 Time = 18:53:29

Specify subsystem and new state:

Subsystem => TSO Subsystem to be processedTarget => System name, domain ID, sysplex name or *ALLState => Put subsystem in the following state:

(RESTART / AUTODOWN / CTLDOWN / UP / ENDED /MOVED)

Scope => ONLY Change state for:ONLY - only this subsystemCHILDREN - only dependant subsystemsALL - resource and dependants

Start => NO Start or restart subsystem now (YES/NO)Override => NO Override(Start=YES) (NO/FLG/TRG/SVP/EVT/ALL)


PF12=Retrieve

Figure 121. SETSTATE Command Dialog Panel

SETSTATE



The SETTIMER command can only be used when SA z/OS is initialized.

Usage

For instructions on how to add, change, or delete timers, see “Setting Timers” inIBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS User's Guide.

Examples

If you enter settimer a panel similar to Figure 122 is displayed.

v The CMD field allows you to add, change, or delete a timer. Valid values are:A Add a new timer with the same values as the one selected.C Change an existing timer.D Delete a timer.U Suspend a timer. The timer is deleted from NetView but all its relevant data

is kept in common global variables. Only CHRON timers can be suspended.R Resume (or reactivate) a suspended timer. Timers that are associated with a

subsystem have a new timer ID (ITMRxxxx) assigned to them.v The TIMER-ID field shows the name assigned to the timer. It cannot be ALL or

begin with a number or the words SYS, RST, AOF, or ING. Valid characters areA–Z, 0–9, #, @, $, , !, _ and ?.

v The SCHEDULED TIME field shows the next scheduled day and time that thistimer is set to expire.

v The TYPE field shows the type of timer. There are three types:

After Set to occur only after the elapsed time that was specified when thetimer was scheduled. For example, if at 12:00 am, you specify 2 hours,the timer will expire at 02:00 pm.

At Set to occur at the specified date and time. Occurs only once.

AOFKATI SA z/OS - Command Dialogs Line 1 of 43Domain ID = IPSFP ---------- SETTIMER ---------- Date = 09/09/08Operator ID = NETOP1 System = KEY4 Time = 09:21:21Enter ADD on the COMMAND line to create a new timer entryor use CMD selections A add, C change, or D delete to delete existing timers.

U Suspend timer, or R Resume to re-activate timerCMD TIMER-ID SCHEDULED TIME TYPE TASK INTERVAL CLOCK SAVE CTUP--- -------- ----------------- ----- -------- ------------ ----- ---- ----

AOFI0014 09/09/08 15:41:10 AFTER PPT GMT NOCmd: AOFRASCD HBOPER INGRYHBT NOTIFY_NMC

MEMSTORE 09/09/08 15:42:03 EVERY AUTO2 000 00:02:00 GMT NOCmd: MEMSTORE 5% 5

RGTAMCPU ** SUSPENDED ** CHRON AUTRGTA 000 00:05:00 GMT NOCmd: CHRON EVERY=(INTERVAL=(00.05.00)) ROUTE=AUTRGTA ID=RGTAMCPU COMMA

ND=’RGTAMCPU’AOFI000F 09/09/08 15:45:52 AFTER PPT GMT NO

Cmd: AOFRASCD AOFWRK10 AOFRSMTR MONITOR,HGDDSMTR/MTR/KEY4AOFI0010 09/09/08 15:45:52 AFTER PPT GMT NO

Cmd: AOFRASCD AOFWRK13 AOFRSMTR MONITOR,HGMTRINFORM/MTR/KEY4



Figure 122. SETTIMER Command Dialog Panel: Display of Scheduled Timers

SETTIMER


Every Set to occur at the time intervals indicated in the Interval field, or at aspecific time each day or week.

v The TASK field shows the operator where the timer runs. This can be a primaryprogrammed operator interface task (PPT), an automation operator, or a humanoperator. This task must be logged on when the timer is set and when it expires.It can also specify a group name. Group names must begin with a plus (+) sign.If a group name is specified, the command runs on the first task in the groupthat is active when the timer expires.

Note: Not all commands can run under the PPT.v The INTERVAL field is only valid for Every type timers. It indicates the time

intervals that the timer is set to occur at. For example, a value of 00:30:00 meansthat the timer will issue the command specified every 30 minutes.

v The CLOCK field specifies the time format. It can be GMT, which means that alocal time change does not affect the command processing, or LOCAL, so thatthe time is to be adjusted automatically when daylight saving time changes, orwhen the z/OS time is adjusted by an operator for other reasons.

v The SAVE field specifies whether the timer is to be saved to an external file.This allows the timer to be restored after a NetView outage. This applies totimers created using either the customization dialog or the operator interface.Valid values are YES or NO. The default is YES.

v The CTUP field specifies whether to activate the timer if it occurs at a timewhen NetView is down. Valid values are Yes or No. If CTUP is set to YES, thecommand specified in the timer definition is issued when NetView is restarted,if the timer expired while NetView was down.The field can only be set to YES if:– This is an At type timer (it occurs once at a specific time and date).– The timer was created using the customization dialog.– The Save field is set to YES.

v The Cmd field below the timer ID specifies the command to be issued when thetimer expires.

Adding a new timer or changing an existing one leads to the Add/Change Timerpanel, similar to Figure 123 on page 296.

SETTIMER


To set the timer, fill in the fields (note that if you are changing a timer the TimerID field cannot be altered).

Use the following fields on this panel to define when the different types of timersare to expire:

Timer Type Fields

AFTER Interval: The number of days (0–365) to elapse before the timer is run.

AT Day of Week: Specify the day of the week (Monday through Sunday).Only the first three characters are required (for example, FRI forFRIDAY).

Specific date: Specify the date (in mm/dd/yy notation) and time (inhh:mm:ss notation). Hours and seconds default to zero if not entered. Ifthe time begins with an X or multiple Xs instead of a number, thecommand is set to begin at the next increment of time.

EVERY Interval: The number of days (0–365) to elapse before the timer is run.

From/To: You can also specify the date and time that the interval is tostart and to end. If omitted, the timer runs from midnight to midnight.

Day of Week: Specify the day of the week (Monday through Sunday).Only the first three characters are required (for example, FRI forFRIDAY). You can also specify DAILY for every day of the week,WEEKDAY, or WEEKEND.

Use the Notify field to specify the value for CHRON parameter NOTIFY whichdefines to whom a BNH549I message is sent a notification when certain eventsoccur in the processing of the CHRON command. It supports four event typesIGNORE, PURGE, REMOVE and RUN. This field is automatically enclosed inparentheses.

AOFKATIR SA z/OS - Command DialogsDomain ID = IPSFP ---------- SETTIMER ---------- Date = 11/27/06Operator ID = NETOP1 Add/Change Timer Time = 12:38:41

Timer ID => MEMSTORE on System : SAT1Type => EVERY AFTER, AT or EVERYWhen?- Interval => days 0-365 and 00:02:00 hh:mm:ss (AFTER EVERY)

From => hh:mm:ss To hh:mm:ss (EVERY)- Day of Week => at (AT or EVERY)- Specific date => mm/dd/yy at (AT)

Task => AUTO2 Operator ID, PPT or Group nameSave => NO No, Yes Timer clock => GMT GMT, LOCAL

Notify =>Remark =>CHRON parameters =>

Timer command => MEMSTORE 5% 5



Figure 123. SETTIMER Command Dialog Panel: Adding or Changing Timers

SETTIMER


Use the Remark field to specify the value for the CHRON parameter REM whichcan be any string specifying informational data. The field is automatically enclosedin quotes.

Use the CHRON Parameters field to specify additional CHRON parameters, suchas REFRESH or RECOVERY.

You can also specify suboptions of the EVERY parameter such as REMOVE,REMAFTER, DAYSMON, CALENDAR, MXREPEAT, OFF, or FOR.

Enter the command that is to be run when the timer expires in the Timercommand field. The command can span the three input fields, which are protectedif the timer command does not fit in the fields. You can use the PF4 key to clearthe command fields.

SETTIMER


SETTIMER


Part 3. SA z/OS I/O Operations Commands

This part describes SA z/OS I/O operations (I/O-Ops) commands in detail: theirpurpose, format, and specifics of how to use them.

For general information about SA z/OS commands, see IBM Tivoli SystemAutomation for z/OS User's Guide.


Chapter 5. I/O Operations Commands

Using I/O Operations CommandsYou can issue I/O operations commands by entering the command in two ways:v ISPF dialogsv The operator console

Not all commands can be issued in both ways. For detailed information aboutwhere the commands can be used and about the authorization levels they require,see Appendix B, “General Considerations for I/O Operations Commands,” on page585.

Note that the LSN in all output messages will show "- -" when this value is notvalid. This can happen only to cascaded switches that have no channel attachment,which is normally the case. For this reason, it is recommended that all switches aredefined to Hardware Configuration Definition (HCD) including their devicenumbers. This allows I/O Operations to resolve the LSN also for theabove-mentioned switches.

Consensus ProcessingConsensus processing means a connectivity command is routed to all I/O operationsapplications that are affected by the command and the results are rated andaccumulated until all of them have been received or the timeout value has expiredwhichever occurs first.

Unless the command is being forced any vote against the command causes theissuing I/O operations application to fail the command. A vote against thecommand is assumed when:v a remote I/O operations application has not been excluded from consensus

processing (see “"Reset Host" command”) while the communication to it couldnot be established or is interrupted.

v the timeout value expires and a response is still missing.v an I/O operations application responds with a negative vote.

For backout processing see “Making Connectivity Changes” on page 570.

Safe SwitchingI/O-Ops varies paths online or offline when, because of port manipulation, thepath from a channel to a device either becomes valid or is no longer valid.

The term safe-switching means that all vary path offline requests due to anI/O-Ops connectivity command are backed out if one of these requests fails andBACKOUT was specified at command invocation. All requests means thoserequests on all systems that have access to the switch (or switches) that are affectedby the command.

For FICON® switches, safe-switching also includes the entire vary process forconnectivity commands that affect Inter-Switch-Link ports (E-ports). BecauseI/O-Ops does not know the topology between the entry switch and the destination


switch of a path, paths that go through an ISL link will not be varied when anE-port is the target of a connectivity command.

The following conditions result in the failure of a request:v A vary path offline request fails when the request would disable the last path

to a device that is currently in use.v If no VTAM connection could be established between two systems that have

access to a switch and run I/O-Ops, I/O-Ops on the local system (that is, wherethe command is entered) assumes that the command fails on the remote system.To avoid this, exclude this system from consensus processing using thecommand RESET HOST vtamname PURGE.

v For other reasons refer to “Making Connectivity Changes” on page 570.

FICON SwitchesFICON switches allow imbedded space characters on port names. Consequently,I/O-Ops will not issue message IHVD106I when detecting imbedded blanks inport names of FICON switches.

However, I/O-Ops does not support imbedded blanks on port names, either in theISPF dialogs or in the console command interface. The reason is that generic namesand port names must not contain imbedded blanks when used in I/O-Ops consolecommands.

FICON Cascaded SwitchesI/O-Ops supports cascaded switches with some restrictions:1. For CTC connections on cascaded switches, I/O-Ops can neither display CTC

control unit data nor manage CTC devices. The reason for this is that whenI/O-Ops attempts to determine the attached NDs of such a device, it can getstuck behind a never-ending channel program on the device.

2. The Block command is not supported on Inter-Switch-Link ports (E_Ports).When an E_Port is affected by the command, it is rejected with return code 8and reason code X'49'. In addition, the message IHVC913I is issued, showingthe first or only port that is affected by the command.

3. All other I/O-Ops commands affecting E_Ports (Allow, Prohibit, Unblock, andWRITEPORT) must specify the command option IGNore when an E_Port isinvolved. Otherwise the command is rejected with return code 8 and reasoncode X'49'. In addition, the message IHVC913I is issued, showing the first oronly port that is affected by the command.The IGNore option makes the issuer of the command aware that safe-switchingcan no longer be guaranteed.

4. If an attached Node Descriptor of a device cannot be determined because thepath or channel is offline, the Display Device command does not show anycontrol unit data for the particular channel path id.

5. A dynamic configuration change that results in the allocation or dealloction of acascaded switch is currently not supported.

Note: It is recommended that all switches are defined to the HardwareConfiguration Definition (HCD) including their device numbers. This allowsI/O-Ops to also show the LSN for cascaded switches.


ALLOWPurpose

Use the ALLOW command to define a dynamic connection between ports on oneswitch or on all the switches allocated to the issuing I/O operations.

You can allow the dynamic connections that are shown in the following syntaxdiagram. With the ALLOW command, you can, for example, define partitionswithin a system to facilitate maintenance. For information on the reciprocalcommand, see “PROHIBIT” on page 338.

Syntax

►► Allow (portaddress_x)portname_xgeneric_name

►

►ALSO

(portaddress_y) swchdevnportname_y * ONLYgeneric_name

ALSO(*) swchdevn* *

IGNore►

►Vary NOForce BAckout

NOCheck NOBackoutForce NOBackout

NOVary Force NOBackout

►◄

Parameters

(portaddress_x)|portname_x|generic_nameSpecifies the target port by its port address (enclosed in parentheses), by itsindividual port name, or by a generic port name. For a discussion, see“Switching Commands” on page 573.

(portaddress_y)|portname_y|generic_name|(*)|*Specifies one of the following: the port address of a second port (enclosed inparentheses), the port name of a second port, a generic port name, all otherport addresses (* enclosed in parentheses), or all other port names (* notenclosed in parentheses). For a discussion, see “Switching Commands” on page573.

swchdevn|*Specifies one switch or all switches (* not enclosed in parentheses) that areallocated to the issuing I/O operations. For a discussion, see “SwitchIdentifiers” on page 565.

Options

ALSO|ONLY

ALSO (default) specifies that the ports affected by the command will connectdynamically to each other, regardless of whether they connect dynamically toother ports on the same switch.

ALLOW

Chapter 5. I/O Operations Commands 303

ONLY specifies that the ports affected by the command will connectdynamically to each other, but each port is disallowed a dynamic connection toany other port on the switch.

IGNoreYou must specify this option when an Inter-Switch-Link port (E_Port) isinvolved. Otherwise the command is rejected with return code 8 and reasoncode X'49'. The reason is I/O operations can no longer guarantee"safe-switching" when an E_Port is involved.

Connectivity options

For a discussion on Vary|NOVary, NOForce|NOCheck|Force, andBAckout|NOBAckout see “Making Connectivity Changes” on page 570.

For a discussion of why it sometimes isn't obvious that the status of a path ora device has changed after an operator has issued a connectivity command, see“Device and Path Status After Connectivity Commands” on page 588.

Usagev If you specify an individual or generic port name, all the switches involved must

have at least 1 port implemented with an applicable port name.v If you specify the same port in both operands and do not specify a generic

name, the command will fail because I/O operations will not allow that port tohave a dynamic connection with itself.

v If you specify 1 or 2 generic names and at least 1 port in each operand is uniqueand valid, the command will succeed. I/O operations will allow the validdynamic connections and disallow a port to connect to itself.

v Although you cannot use the ONLY option and specify either all port addresses(*) or all port names *, you can specify a generic port name. Assume, forexample, that all the ports on switch 100 are named and the names start with F:FC1, FC2, FC3, and so on. Although you cannot specify A * * 100, you canspecify A F* F* 100.

v When you specify the ONLY option, all paths to the specified ports are variedoffline. The dynamic path between the two ports is varied online.

v If a parallel channel and CV converter are involved, you should consider theinformation provided in “A Parallel Channel in Block (BL) Mode” on page 581.

Examples

In the following example, port FB is allowed to have a dynamic connection onlywith port D6 on switch 100. The dynamic connections that port FB had with otherports are now prohibited.

A (FB) (D6) 100 ONLYIHVC000I ALLOW command successful

ALLOW


In the following example of using a generic port name, all the ports whose portnames start with the characters HB.CHP_39 are allowed to have dynamicconnections with ports that begin with CU. on switch 200.

ALLOW HB.CHP_39 CU.* 200IHVC000I ALLOW command successful

BLOCKPurpose

Use the BLOCK command to prevent data transfer through the specified port onone or on all the switches allocated to the issuing I/O operations.

See “UNBLOCK” on page 353 for information on the reciprocal command.

Syntax

►► BLOCK (portaddress)portnamegeneric_name

swchdevn*

►




►◄

Before │ After│

┌──────┬──┬─────┐ │ ┌──────┬──┬─────┐│ 0100 │C0│ │ │ │ 0100 │C0│ │├──┐ └──┘ ┌──┤ │ ├──┐ └──┘ ┌──┤│FB├─┬──┬──┐ │D4│ │ │FB├─┬──┬──┐ │D4│├──┘ │ │ │ └──┤ │ ├──┘ │ │ │ └──┤├──┐ │ │ │ ┌──┤ │ ├──┐(P)(P) │ ┌──┤│EA├─┘ │ └─┤D6│ │ │EA├─┘ │ └─┤D6│├──┘ ┌┴─┐ └──┤ │ ├──┘ ┌┴─┐ └──┤│ │E0│ │ │ │ │E0│ │└──────┴──┴─────┘ │ └──────┴──┴─────┘

Figure 124. ALLOW Command: Sample 1

HB.CHP_32┌──────┬─▼┬─────┐│ 0200 │C0│ │├──┐ └┬┬┘ ┌──┤│FB│ ││ │D4│◄ HB.CHP_39├──┘ ││ └──┤├──┐ ││ ┌──┤│EA│ │└───┤D6│◄ CU.820├──┘ ┌┴─┐ └──┤│ │E0│ │└──────┴─▲┴─────┘

CU.F00

Figure 125. ALLOW Command: Sample 2

ALLOW


Parameters

(portaddress)|portname|generic_nameSpecifies the ports to be blocked by an individual port address, by anindividual port name, or by a generic port name. For a discussion, see“Switching Commands” on page 573.

swchdevn|*Specifies one switch or all switches (* not enclosed in parentheses) allocated tothe issuing I/O operations. For a discussion, see “Switch Identifiers” on page565.

Options





The command is rejected with return code 8 and reason code X'49' when anInter-Switch-Link port (E_Port) is affected. The reason is that I/O operations doesnot know the paths and devices to be varied offline.

Usagev If a CVC CHPID is involved, “An ESCON-in-Converted-Mode (CVC) Path” on

page 581 provides more information.v If a parallel CHPID is involved, “A Parallel Channel in Block (BL) Mode” on

page 581 provides more information.

ExamplesB (D6) 100IHVC000I BLOCK command successful

In the following example of using a generic port name, all ports whose port namesstart with the characters CU.F are blocked on all the switches allocated to theissuing I/O operations.

Before │ After│

┌──────┬──┬─────┐ │ ┌──────┬──┬─────┐│ 0100 │C0│ │ │ │ 0100 │C0│ │├──┐ └──┘ ┌──┤ │ ├──┐ └──┘ ┌──┤│FB│ │D4│ │ │FB│ │D4│├──┘ └──┤ │ ├──┘ └──┤├──┐ ┌──┤ │ ├──┐ ┌──┤│EA│ │D6│ │ │EA│ │D6× Port D6 is blocked├──┘ ┌──┐ └──┤ │ ├──┘ ┌──┐ └──┤│ │E0│ │ │ │ │E0│ │└──────┴──┴─────┘ │ └──────┴──┴─────┘

Figure 126. BLOCK Command: Sample 1

BLOCK


B CU.F* *IHVC000I BLOCK command successful

CHAINPurpose

Use the CHAIN command to define a chain in a chained path that traverses twoswitches that are physically linked to each other.

One switch acts as a fiber repeater and is called the passthru switch. Two ports inthe chain are statically connected to each other in the passthru switch. The otherswitch is called the destination switch because the chain “ends” in that switch.

For more information, see “Chain and Unchain a Switchable Path (ESCON only)”on page 577. See “UNCHAIN” on page 355 for the reciprocal command.

Note: The CHAIN command is not applicable to FICON switches.

Syntax

►► CHAIN (portaddress_e)portname_e

destination_swchdevn (portaddress_m)portname_m

►

► (portaddress_a)portname_a

passthru_swchdevn ►




►◄

Parameters

(portaddress_e)|portname_eSpecifies the port ending the chain on the destination switch by its portaddress (enclosed in parentheses) or by its port name. For a discussion, see“Switching Commands” on page 573.

┌──────┬──┬─────┐ ┌──────┬──┬─────┐│ 0100 │C0│ │ │ 0200 │C0│ │├──┐ └──┘ ┌──┤ ├──┐ └──┘ ┌──┤│FB│ │D4│ │FB│ │D4│├──┘ └──┤ ├──┘ └──┤├──┐ ┌──┤ ├──┐ ┌──┤ D6 ports are blocked│EA│ CU.F00 ►│D6× │EA│ CU.F00 ►│D6×├──┘ ┌──┐ └──┤ ├──┘ ┌──┐ └──┤│ │E0│ │ │ │E0│ │└──────┴──┴─────┘ └──────┴──┴─────┘

Figure 127. BLOCK Command: Sample 2

BLOCK


destination_swchdevnSpecifies the device number of the destination switch, which is the switch thatends the chain. For a discussion, see “Switch Identifiers” on page 565.

(portaddress_m)|portname_mSpecifies middle port by its port address (enclosed in parentheses) or by itsport name. For a discussion, see “Switching Commands” on page 573.

(portaddress_a)|portname_aSpecifies the port to which the CHPID or control unit is physically attached tothe beginning of the chained path by its port address (enclosed in parentheses)or by its port name. For a discussion, see “Switching Commands” on page 573.

passthru_swchdevnSpecifies the device number of the passthru switch, which is the switch thathas the static connection between ports a and m. For a discussion, see “SwitchIdentifiers” on page 565.

Options



Usagev Additional steps may be required. See “Chain and Unchain a Switchable Path

(ESCON only)” on page 577.v If you need to define a chain, consider entering the Chain command when I/O

operations is started so that the program can take the definition into account forall vary path processing.

v Chaining can add complexity to I/O operations' vary path processing. See“Chain and Unchain a Switchable Path (ESCON only)” on page 577 for moreinformation.

ExamplesCHAIN (F2) 200 (D4) (C1) 100IHVC000I CHAIN command successful

CHAIN


CHAIN (E0) 100 (D6) (CB) 200IHVC000I CHAIN command successful

CONNECTPurpose

Use the CONNECT command to establish a static, or dedicated, connectionbetween two ports on the same switch or those two ports on all switches allocatedto the issuing I/O operations.

Before │ After│

┌────────────────┐ │ ┌────────────────┐│ I/O Operations │ │ │ I/O Operations │├────────────────┤ │ ├────────────────┤│ SYSA │ │ │ SYSA │└─┬──┬──────┬──┬─┘ │ └─┬──┬──────┬──┬─┘

│3A│ │3C│ │ │3A│ │3C│└┬─┘ └┬─┘ │ └┬─┘ └┬─┘│ │ │ │ │

┌─┬┴─┬─┬──┬─┬┴─┬─┐ ┌────────────────┐ │ ┌─┬┴─┬─┬──┬─┬┴─┬─┐ ┌────────────────┐│ │FB├─┤FE│ │C1│ │ │ │ │ │ │FB├─┤FE│ │C1│ │ │ ││ └──┘ └──┘ └──┘ │ │ │ │ │ └──┘ └──┘ └╥─┘ │ │ ││ ┌──┤ ├──┐ ┌──┤ │ │ ║┌──┤ ├──┐ ┌──┤│ │D4╞═══╡F2├──────────┤C5│ │ │ ╚╡D4╞═══╡F2├──────────┤C5││ 0100 └──┤ ├──┘ 0200 └──┤ │ │ 0100 └──┤ ├──┘ 0200 └──┤└────────────────┘ └────────────────┘ │ └────────────────┘ └────────────────┘

│ Passthru switch Destination switchC1-D4-F2 are chainedC1 is physically-attached portD4 is the middle portF2 is the end-of-chain port

Figure 128. CHAIN Command: Sample 1

Before │ After│


│3A│ │3C│ │ │3A│ │3C│└┬─┘ └┬─┘ │ └┬─┘ └┬─┘│ │ │ │ │

┌─┬┴─┬─┬──┬─┬┴─┬─┐ ┌────────────────┐ │ ┌─┬┴─┬─┬──┬─┬┴─┬─┐ ┌────────────────┐│ │FB├─┤FE├─┤C1│ │ │ │ │ │ │FB├─┤FE├─┤C1│ │ │ ││ └──┘ └──┘ └┬─┘ │ │ │ │ │ └──┘ └──┘ └┬─┘ │ │ ││ │┌──┤ ├──┐ ┌──┤ │ │ │┌──┤ ├──┐ ┌──┤│ └┤E0╞═══╡D6├──────────┤CB│ │ │ └┤E0╞═══╡D6╞══════════╡CB││ 0100 └──┤ ├──┘ 0200 └──┤ │ │ 0100 └──┤ ├──┘ 0200 └──┤└────────────────┘ └────────────────┘ │ └────────────────┘ └────────────────┘

│ Passthru switch Destination switchE0-D6-CB are chainedCB is physically-attached portD6 is the middle portE0 is the end-of-chain port

Figure 129. CHAIN Command: Sample 2

CHAIN


See “DISCONNECT” on page 311 for the reciprocal command.

Note: The CONNECT command is not applicable to FICON switches.

Syntax

►► Connect (portaddress_x)portname_x

(portaddress_y)portname_y

swchdevn*

►




►◄

Parameters

(portaddress_x)|portname_xSpecifies one target port on the switch by its port address (enclosed inparentheses) or by its port name. For a discussion, see “Switching Commands”on page 573.

(portaddress_y)|portname_ySpecifies the other target port by its port address or by its port name. For adiscussion, see “Switching Commands” on page 573.


Options



Usage

The two ports on the passthru switch of a chain are implicitly connected by theChain command. Under some circumstances, however, you will need to enter theConnect command in addition to the Chain command. See “Chain and Unchain aSwitchable Path (ESCON only)” on page 577 for more information.

Examples

In the following example, ports C0 and D6 become statically connected. In thehierarchy of port attributes, a static connection overrides a dynamic connection.Therefore, port EA cannot communicate with port C0 as long as the latter remainsstatically connected.

C (FB) (D6) 100IHVC000I CONNECT command successful

CONNECT


DISCONNECTPurpose

Use the DISCONNECT command to cancel the definition of a static, or dedicated,connection between two ports on the same switch or those same two ports on allswitches allocated to the issuing I/O operations.

See “CONNECT” on page 309 for the reciprocal command.

Note: The DISCONNECT command is not applicable to FICON switches.

Syntax

►► disconNect (portaddress_x)portname_x

(portaddress_y)portname_y

swchdevn*

►




►◄

Parameters

(portaddress_x)|portname_xSpecifies one target port on the switch by its port address (enclosed inparentheses) or by its port name. For a discussion, see “Switching Commands”on page 573.

(portaddress_y)|portname_ySpecifies the other target port by its port address or by its port name.


Options



Before │ After│

┌──────┬──┬─────┐ │ ┌──────┬──┬─────┐│ 0100 │C0│ │ │ │ 0100 │C0│ │├──┐ └──┘ ┌──┤ │ ├──┐ └──┘ ┌──┤│FB├─┬──┬──┐ │D4│ │ │FB╞═══════╗ │D4│├──┘ │ │ │ └──┤ │ ├──┘ ║ └──┤├──┐ │ │ │ ┌──┤ │ ├──┐ ║ ┌──┤│EA├─┘ │ └─┤D6│ │ │EA│ ╚═╡D6│├──┘ ┌┴─┐ └──┤ │ ├──┘ ┌──┐ └──┤│ │E0│ │ │ │ │E0│ │└──────┴──┴─────┘ │ └──────┴──┴─────┘

Figure 130. CONNECT Command Sample

DISCONNECT


Usage

If a CVC CHPID is involved, “An ESCON-in-Converted-Mode (CVC) Path” onpage 581 provides more information.

ExamplesN (FB) (D6) 100IHVC000I DISCONNECT command successful

DISPLAY CHANGECHECKPurpose

Use the DISPLAY CHANGECHECK command to display the current setting of theoption which indicates whether all opened switches (ON) are checked for a datachange prior to a connectivity command or only those (OFF) that are actuallyaffected by a connectivity command. The default setting on the startup of I/OOperations is ON.

Syntax

DISPLAY CHANGECHECK

►► Display ChangeCheck ►◄

ExamplesD CCIHVC861I Option CHANGECHECK is set to ON.

DISPLAY CHPPurpose

Use the DISPLAY CHP command to display data about one or all of the channelpath identifiers (CHPIDs) online to the operating system (host) image that theissuing I/O operations is running on.

Syntax

►► Display Chp chpid*

►◄

Parameters

chpidSpecifies a single channel path identifier (CHPID).

* All CHPIDs that are known to the issuing I/O operations.

DISCONNECT


Usage

For more information on the data that is displayed, see the references under thefields:

IHVC221I PortIHVC812I Chp Swch StatusIHVC813I Chp Type Devn LSN Port H S C P Port nameIHVC814I .. ..... .... .. .. .. . .. . ........................A B C D E F G H

IHVC815I PortIHVC816I Chp Swch StatusIHVC817I Chp Type Devn LSN Port H S C P Port nameIHVC818I .. ..... .... .. .. .. . .. . ........................A B C D E F G H[IHVC210I Connected to: .. .. . .. . ........................IHVC211I Chained to: .... .. .. .. . .. . ........................IHVC224I .. connected to: .. .. . .. . ........................IHVC225I .. chained to:.... .. .. .. . .. . ........................]

A Message identifier

Note: The message ID is not shown in the actual display.

B Channel path ID (see “Channel Types” on page 568)

C Channel type (see “Channel Types” on page 568)

D Switch device number (see “Switch Identifiers” on page 565)

E Logical switch number (see “Logical Switch Number (LSN)” on page 566)

F Port address (see “Port Addresses” on page 566)

G Port status codes (see “Switch Port Hardware Status on a DisplayCommand” on page 567)

H Port name (see “Using Port Names as a Tool in Switching Commands” onpage 577)

ExamplesD C 3CIHVC999I I/O-OPS display

PortChp Swch Status

Chp Type Devn LSN Port H S C P Port name3C CNC_S 0200 02 F2 C HA.CHP_3CChained to: 0100 01 D4 C C1 LINK.200D4 connected to: C1 C D4 HA.CHP_3C

DISPLAY CHP


D C 3AIHVC999I I/O-OPS display

PortChp Swch Status

Chp Type Devn LSN Port H S C P Port name3A CNC_S 0100 01 FB P HA.CHP_3A

DISPLAY DEVPurpose

Use the DISPLAY DEV command to display data about one, a range, or all thedevices connected to one or all the switches that are allocated to the issuing I/Ooperations.

Syntax

►► Display Dev devn swchdevn*

lower-upper swchdevnlower-**

►◄

┌────────────────┐│ I/O Operations │├────────────────┤│ SYSA │└─┬──┬──────┬──┬─┘

│3A│ │3C│└┬─┘ └┬─┘│ │HA.CHP_3C

┌─┬┴─┬─┬──┬─┬┴▼┬─┐ ┌────────────────┐│ │FB├─┤FE│ │C1│ │ │ ││ └──┘ └──┘ └╥─┘ │ │ HA.CHP_3C ││ ║┌──┤ ├─▼┐ ┌──┤│ ╚╡D4╞═══╡F2├──────────┤C5│◄ CU.820│ 0100 └▲─┤ ├──┘ 0200 └──┤└──────────────│─┘ └────────────────┘ 3C, C1, D4, and F2

LINK.200 information is displayed

Figure 131. DISPLAY CHP Command: Sample 1

┌────────────────┐│ I/O Operations │├────────────────┤│ SYSA │└─┬──┬───────────┘

│3A│└┬─┘│HA.CHP_3A

┌─┬┴▼┬───────────┐│ │FB├─────┐ ││ └┬─┘ │ ││ │ (P) ┌──┤│ ┌┴─┐ └──┤D4││ │E0│ 0100 └──┤└─┴──┴───────────┘

Figure 132. DISPLAY CHP Command: Sample 2

DISPLAY CHP


Parameters

devnA specific device number.

lower-upperThe range of device numbers from the lower limit, followed by a hyphen - andthe upper limit.

lower-*The range of device numbers from the lower limit, followed by a hyphen - andan asterisk (* not enclosed in parentheses) to indicate the highest number.

* All the device numbers (* not enclosed in parentheses).

swchdevnSpecifies one switch allocated to the issuing I/O operations.

* All switches allocated to the issuing I/O operations. For a discussion, see“Switch Identifiers” on page 565.


If an attached Node Descriptor (ND) of a device on a cascaded switch cannot bedetermined because the path or channel is offline, no control unit data is shownfor the particular channel path ID.

This is always true for CTC connections on cascaded switches. The reason is thatI/O operations can get stuck behind a never-ending channel program on a CTCdevice when attempting to determine the attached NDs of the device.

Usage

For more information on the displayed output, see the references under the fields.

IHVC824I PortIHVC825I Chp Swch StatusIHVC826I Devn Chp Type Devn LSN Port H S C P Port nameA B C D E F G H IIHVC827I .... .. ..... .... .. .. .. . .. . ........................[IHVC220I Cntl unit data:.... .. .. .. . .. . ........................IHVC828I Connected to: .. .. . .. . ........................IHVC829I Chained to: .... .. .. .. . .. . ........................IHVC830I .. connected to: .. .. . .. . ........................IHVC831I .. chained to: .... .. .. .. . .. . ........................]



B Channel path ID (see “Channel Types” on page 568)

C Channel type (see “Channel Types” on page 568)

D Switch device number (see “Switch Identifiers” on page 565)

E Logical switch number (see “Logical Switch Number (LSN)” on page 566)

F Port address (see “Port Addresses” on page 566)

G Port status codes (see “Switch Port Hardware Status on a DisplayCommand” on page 567)

DISPLAY DEV


H Port name (see “Using Port Names as a Tool in Switching Commands” onpage 577)

ExamplesD D F01 *IHVC999I I/O-OPS display

PortChp Swch Status

Devn Chp Type Devn LSN Port H S C P Port name0F01 3A CNC_S 0100 01 FB HA.CHP_3ACntl unit data:0100 01 D6 CU.F000F01 3D CNC_S 0200 02 F7 HA.CHP_3DCntl unit data:0200 02 D6 CU.F00

DISPLAY HOSTPurpose

Use the DISPLAY HOST command to display status about the specified I/Ooperations(host).

See “DISPLAY RESULTS” on page 324 for the related command, and “Processing aVary Path Request” on page 582 for more information.

Syntax

►► Display Host vtamnametcphostname*

swchdevn

►◄


│3A│ │3D│└┬─┘ └┬─┘│HA.CHP_3A└────────────┐HA.CHP_3D

┌─┬┴▼┬───────────┐ ┌───┬┴▼┬─────────┐│ │FB├──────┐ │ │ │F7│ ││ └──┘ │ │ │ └┬─┘ ││ 0100 │ ┌──┤ ├──┐ │ 0200 ││ └─┤D6├┐ ┌┤D6├─┘ ││ CU.F00 ►└──┤│ │├──┘◄ CU.F00 │└────────────────┘│ │└────────────────┘

│ │┌─┴─┴─┐│ F00 │ The paths to device F01 are└──┬──┘ 3A, FB, D6, F00, and┌─┴─┐ 3D, F7, D6, F00│F01│└───┘

Figure 133. DISPLAY DEV Command Sample

DISPLAY DEV


Parameters

vtamname|tcphostname|*Specifies one or all I/O operations hosts known to the issuing I/O operations.

vtamnameSpecifies an I/O operations by its VTAM application name (VTAM ID).You can specify THIS-SYS in uppercase characters if the issuing I/Ooperations is the target program and any of the following conditions holds:v The issuing I/O operations does not have a valid VTAM application

name and TCP/IP host name.v The issuing I/O operations' VTAM name and the TCP/IP host name are

not available.v VTAM and TCP/IP are not available.

tcphostnameSpecifies an I/O operations by its TCP/IP host name. You can specifyTHIS-SYS in uppercase characters if the issuing I/O operations is the targetprogram and any of the following conditions holds:v The issuing I/O operations does not have a valid VTAM application

name and TCP/IP host name.v The issuing I/O operations' VTAM name and TCP/IP host name are not

available.v VTAM and TCP/IP are not available.

* (asterisk)Specifies all the I/O operations known to the issuing I/O operations.

For a discussion, see “Switching Commands” on page 573.

swchdevn | *Specifies one switch allocated to the issuing I/O operations. If you do notspecify a switch device number, the issuing I/O operations displays statusabout all its participating hosts. For a discussion, see “Switch Identifiers” onpage 565.

Usagev See the following example for the type of data that is displayed.v If the DISPLAY RESULTS, LOGREC, SYNC SWITCH, or WRITE command is

entered, the data that could be displayed by DISPLAY HOST is refreshed.v For more information on the displayed output, see the references under the

fields:

IHVC803I This Host: ......../........ Sysplex/System: ......../........IHVC804I Name Level Physical identifier Sysplex SystemIHVC202I ........ .. .. .......................... ........ ........A BIHVC206I ........ .......................................

C DIHVCxxxI One or more status messages


B VTAM name (see “VTAM Application Name” on page 583)

C TCP/IP host name (see “TCP/IP Host Name” on page 583)

D IPv4 or IPv6 address

DISPLAY HOST


IHVC805I The following switches are attached:IHVC806I SwchIHVC807I Devn LSN Unique idIHVC200I .... .. ..........................A B C D


B Switch device number (see “Switch Identifiers” on page 565)

C Logical switch number (see “Logical Switch Number (LSN)” on page 566)

D Switch ID number (see “Switch Unique Identifier” on page 566)

IHVC884I Sysplex system(s) not associated with a host name detected:IHVC885I Sysplex <- Systems ------------------------------------->IHVC886I ........ ........, ........, ........, ........, ........,A B C


B Sysplex name

C System name (or names) in the sysplex that are not associated with a VTAMname or a TCP/IP host name

ExamplesD H IHVHOST1IHVC999I I/O-OPS displayIHVC803I This Host: IHVAPPL1/IHVHOST1 Sysplex/System: IHVPLEX1/IHVSYS1IHVC804I Name Level Physical identifier Sysplex SystemIHVC202I IHVAPPL1 V3 R2 002084B16IBM02000000016F7A IHVPLEX1 IHVSYS1IHVC206I IHVHOST1 9.123.47.11IHVC537I VTAM communication is initialized on this hostIHVC537I TCP/IP communication is initialized on this hostIHVC805I The following switches are attached:IHVC806I SwchIHVC807I Devn LSN Unique idIHVC200I 0100 01 009032005IBM510000000A7260IHVC200I 0200 02 009032005IBM510000000A7465

DISPLAY HOST


D H *IHVC999I I/O-OPS displayIHVC803I This Host: IHVAPPL1/IHVHOST1 Sysplex/System: IHVPLEX1/IHVSYS1IHVC804I Name Level Physical identifier Sysplex SystemIHVC202I IHVAPPL1 V3 R2 002084B16IBM02000000016F7A IHVPLEX1 IHVSYS1IHVC206I IHVHOST1 9.123.47.11IHVC537I VTAM communication is initialized on this hostIHVC537I TCP/IP communication is initialized on this hostIHVC202I IHVAPPL2 V3 R1 002084B16IBM0200000001795A IHVPLEX1 IHVSYS2IHVC535I VTAM session established with this hostIHVC202I IHVAPPL3 V3 R1IHVC525I This host has been RESET offIHVC516I VTAM or TCP/IP session NOT established with this hostIHVC202I IHVHOSTA V3 R2 002084B16IBM02000000016F7A IHVPLEXA IHVSYSAIHVC206I IHVHOSTA 0123:4567:89AB:CDEF:0123:4567:89AB:CDEFIHVC535I TCP/IP session established with this hostIHVC884I Sysplex system(s) not associated with a host name detected:IHVC885I Sysplex <- Systems ------------------------------------->IHVC886I IHVPLEX1 IHVSYS5, IHVSYS8, , , ,

DISPLAY NAMEPurpose

Use the DISPLAY NAME command to display data about the implemented portson a switch that port names have been assigned to. (See “WRITE” on page 357 forthe command used to assign port names.)

Syntax

►► Display Name portname swchdevngeneric_name *

* swchdevnBlockConnect

NodeDescriptor►◄

┌────────────────┐│ I/O Operations ││ IHVAPPL1 │├────────────────┤│ IHVSYS1 │└┬──┬┬──┬┬──┬┬──┬┘│3A││3B││3C││3D│└┬─┘└┬─┘└┬─┘└┬─┘│ │ │ └────────────┐│ │ └───────┐ ││ └─────────┐ │ │└────┐ │ │ │

┌─────┬┴─┬─────┐│ │ ┌─────┬┴─┬─────┐│ │C0│ ││ │ │ │C0│ │├──┐ └──┘ ┌──┤│ │ ├──┐ └──┘ ┌──┤│FB│ │D4├┘ │ │FB│ │D4│├──┘ 0100 └──┤ │ ├──┘ 0200 └──┤├──┐ ┌──┤ │ ├──┐ ┌──┤│EA│ │D6│ └─┤EA│ │D6│├──┘ ┌──┐ └──┤ ├──┘ ┌──┐ └──┤│ │E0│ │ │ │E0│ │└─────┴──┴─────┘ └─────┴──┴─────┘

Figure 134. DISPLAY HOST Command: Sample 1

DISPLAY HOST


Parameters

portname|generic_name|*Specifies that data be displayed about a specifically named port, all ports withthe specified generic logical port name, or all named addressable ports (* notenclosed in parentheses). If you specify * in this operand, you cannot specify *in the next operand, but you can specify Block or Connect as options. For adiscussion, see “Switching Commands” on page 573.

swchdevn|*Specifies one switch or all switches (* not enclosed in parentheses) allocated tothe issuing I/O operations. If you specify *, you must specify either anindividual or a generic port name, but not all port names. For a discussion, see“Switch Identifiers” on page 565.

Options

Block|ConnectSpecifies that data be displayed only about those named ports that are blockedor statically connected to another port. If you specify this option, you mustalso specify * for all port names.

NodeDescriptorSpecifies that you want to display data of the attached hardware. For all portsexcept the CUP device port, the node descriptor of the attached hardware isdisplayed on a separate line when the I/O DEF column shows an unambiguousattachment.

Usage

For more information on the displayed output, see the references under the fields.

IHVC844I PortIHVC845I Swch Status I/OIHVC846I Port Name Devn LSN Port H S C P DefA B C D E F GIHVC247I [ND .............................. ....]

H



B Port name (see “Using Port Names as a Tool in Switching Commands” onpage 577)

C Switch device number (see “Switch Identifiers” on page 565)

D Logical switch number (see “Logical Switch Number (LSN)” on page 566)

E Port address (see “Port Addresses” on page 566)

F Port status codes (see “Switch Port Hardware Status on a DisplayCommand” on page 567)

G I/O definition (see “Switch Ports” on page 566)

H Node descriptor including tag field

DISPLAY NAME


Examples

D N * 100IHVC999I I/O-OPS display

PortSwch Status I/O

Port Name Devn LSN Port H S C P DefHA.CHP_88.CVC 0100 01 C0 E0 P CHHA.CHP_3C 0100 01 C1 D4 PLINK.200 0100 01 D4 C C1 PCU.F00 0100 01 D6 P CUCU.B20.9034 0100 01 E0 C0 P CUCU.190 0100 01 EA P CUHA.CHP_3A 0100 01 FB P CH

HA.CHP_88.CVC HA.CHP_3C┌───┬─▼┬┬─▼┬───┐│ │C0││C1│ │├──┐└──┘└──┘┌──┤

HA.CHP_3A ►│FB│ │D4│◄ LINK.200├──┘ 0100 └──┤├──┐ ┌──┤

CU.190 ►│EA│ │D6│◄ CU.F00├──┘ ┌──┐ └──┤│ │E0│ │└─────┴─▲┴─────┘

CU.B20.9034

Figure 135. DISPLAY NAME Command: Sample 1. Display all port names

D N CU.F00 *IHVC999I I/O-OPS display

PortSwch Status I/O

Port Name Devn LSN Port H S C P DefCU.F00 0100 01 D6 P CUCU.F00 0200 02 D6 CU

┌─────┬──┬─────┐ ┌─────┬──┬─────┐│ │C0│ │ │ │C0│ │├──┐ └──┘ │ ├──┐ └──┘ ┌──┤│FB│ │ │FB│ │D4│├──┘ 0100 │ ├──┘ 0200 └──┤├──┐ ┌──┤ │ ┌──┤│EA├──(P)───┤D6|◄ CU.F00 │ │D6│◄ CU.F00├──┘ ┌──┐ └──┤ │ ┌──┐ └──┤│ │E0│ │ │ │E0│ │└─────┴──┴─────┘ └─────┴──┴─────┘

Figure 136. DISPLAY NAME Command: Sample 2. Display D6 port names

DISPLAY NAME


DISPLAY PORTPurpose

Use the DISPLAY PORT command to display data about one or all the ports thatare implemented and installed on the specified switch.

Syntax

►► Display Port (portaddress) swchdevn(*) swchdevn

BlockConnect

NodeDescriptor►◄

Parameters

(portaddress)|(*)Specifies that data should be displayed about one addressable port or all (*enclosed in parentheses) the addressable ports. For a discussion, see “PortAddresses” on page 566.

swchdevnSpecifies the switch device number that the port is located on. The switch mustbe allocated to the issuing I/O operations. For a discussion, see “SwitchIdentifiers” on page 565.

Options

Block|ConnectSpecifies that you want data displayed about only those ports that are blockedor statically connected. (If a port is both blocked and statically connected, itwould be listed if either alternative is chosen.) If you specify this option, youmust specify all addressable ports as an operand (* enclosed in parentheses).

NodeDescriptorSpecifies that you want to display data of the attached hardware. For all ports

D N * 100B NDIHVC999I I/O-OPS display

PortSwch Status I/O

Port Name Devn LSN Port H S C P DefDan2-17B(0.1B) 100B 0B C0Dan2-26B(1.1B) 100B 0B C1150A 100B 0B C2 + CU

ND 009394.002.IBM.73.0000000C0440 00033174-1E0 100B 0B C5 +150B 100B 0B C9 +G14-429(36) 100B 0B CA CH

ND 002084.B16.IBM.02.000000016F7A 8036G30-111(0.21) 100B 0B D2G30-112(0.22) 100B 0B D3F09-2A 100B 0B D4RAP2-23 100B 0B D5F09-2B 100B 0B D6F09-2D 100B 0B D8SWCH-0B(100B)12.11.2007 100B 0B FE CU

Figure 137. DISPLAY NAME Command: Sample 3. Display all port names and nodedescriptors

DISPLAY PORT


except the CUP device port, the node descriptor of the attached hardware isdisplayed on a separate line when the I/O DEF column shows an unambiguousattachment.

Usage

Unlike the Display Name command, Display Port can apply to only one switch ata time.

For more information on the displayed output, see the references under the fields:

IHVC844I PORTIHVC845I SWCH STATUS I/OIHVC846I PORT NAME DEVN LSN PORT H S C P DEFA B C D E F GIHVC247I [ND .............................. ....]

H



B Port name (see “Using Port Names as a Tool in Switching Commands” onpage 577)

C Switch device number (see “Switch Identifiers” on page 565)

D Logical switch number (see “Logical Switch Number (LSN)” on page 566)

E Port address (see “Port Addresses” on page 566)

F Port status codes (see “Switch Port Hardware Status on a DisplayCommand” on page 567)

G I/O definition (see “Switch Ports” on page 566)

H Node descriptor of the attached hardware including the tag field

IHV849I Allow/Prohibit mask for this port:IHV240I A/P Port I/O-Def Port nameA B C D EIHV241I . .. .... ........................

or

IHV849I Allow/Prohibit mask for this port:IHV245I A/P Port I/O-Def Port name / Node descriptorA B C D E FIHV241I . .. .... ........................ /IHV246I .............................. ....



B Allow or prohibit mask (see “Allow or Prohibit Mask of a Port” on page567)

C Port address (see “Port Addresses” on page 566)

D I/O definition (see “Switch Ports” on page 566)

E Port name (see “Using Port Names as a Tool in Switching Commands” onpage 577)

F Node descriptor of the attached hardware including the tag field

DISPLAY PORT


ExamplesD P (D6) 100IHVC999I I/O-OPS display

PortSwch Status I/O

Port Name Devn LSN Port H S C P Def0100 01 D6 P CU

Allow/Prohibit mask for this port:A/P Port I/O-Def Port nameA C0 CH HA.CHP_88.CVCP C1 CH HA.CHP_3CA C2A C3A C4:A FB CH HA.CHP_3AA FE CU

DISPLAY RESULTSPurpose

Use the DISPLAY RESULTS command to display the results of the issuing I/Ooperations’ most recently processed connectivity LOGREC, SYNC SWITCH, orWRITE command (except REMOVE and RESTORE Dev commands). The DISPLAYRESULTS command is a useful tool to help you analyze the resulting configurationstatus, especially in cases where one or more vary path requests failed.

HA.CHP_88.CVC HA.CHP_3C┌───┬─▼┬┬─▼┬───┐│ │C0││C1│ │├──┐└──┘└─┬┘┌──┤

HA.CHP_3A ►│FB│ │ │D4│├──┘ 0100 │ └──┤├──┐ (P)┌──┤│EA│ └─┤D6│├──┘ ┌──┐ └──┤│ │E0│ │└─────┴──┴─────┘

Figure 138. DISPLAY PORT Command: Sample 1

D P (*) 1011 NDIHVC999I I/O-OPS display

PortSwch Status I/O

Port Name Devn LSN Port H S C P Def1011 11 04 ISL

ND 006064.001.MCD.01.000001311AB9 30031011 11 05 ISL

ND 006064.001.MCD.01.000001311AB9 30021011 11 06 +1011 11 071011 11 081011 11 09 +1011 11 0A1011 11 0B N1011 11 0C L:1011 11 FE CU

Figure 139. DISPLAY PORT Command: Sample 2. Display all ports of a switch including thenode descriptors.

DISPLAY PORT


For related commands, see “DISPLAY HOST” on page 316 and “DISPLAY VARY”on page 333.

Syntax

►► Display Results ►◄

Usagev In addition to displaying data about its most recently processed connectivity

command (except Remove and Restore Dev), the issuing I/O operations displaysany subsequent command up to the next connectivity, Logrec, Sync Switch, orWrite command.

v To review any additional failed vary path requests resulting from the samecommand, use the “DISPLAY VARY” on page 333.

v For more information on the displayed output fields, see the references underthe fields:

IHVC803I This Host: vtamappl/tcphost Sysplex/System: plexname/sysnameIHVC808I VTAMname/TCP host Sysplex SystemIHVC201I vtamnm1 /tcpname1 plexnam1 sysname1IHVCnnnI One or more status messagesIHVC500I Swch devn LSN Unique id Status CodeIHVC501I .... .. .......................... ............. ..A B C D E FIHVCnnnI One or more status messages


Note: Message IDs in italics are not shown in display.



D Unique identifier (see “Switch Unique Identifier” on page 566)

E Switch status

F Switch status code

IHVCnnnI can be one of the following:

IHVC205ICannot CHAIN a port to itself

IHVC301IPort name xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx already on this switch

IHVC404ICurrent switch data unavailable

IHVC405ISwitch data has been changed

IHVC409IPort xx does not exist

IHVC410ICommands cannot affect port xx (switch control unit)

IHVC411IUnable to return this switch to original state

DISPLAY RESULTS


IHVC413II/O-Ops internal error

IHVC414IAttempted to CONNECT port xx to itself

IHVC415IPort xx already CONNECTed

IHVC416IPort xx not installed, cannot CONNECT

IHVC417INo available paths to the switch for the command

IHVC419INo port names exist which can be affected by this command

IHVC420IAttempted to ALLOW port xx to itself

IHVC431ISwitch has been REMOVEd

IHVC433ISwitch has been RESTOREd

IHVC434IName xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx not valid

IHVC435IAttempted to ALLOW FC port xx to FC port xx

IHVC436ICannot connect xx, because it is a fibre channel port

IHVC437ISettings on switch prevent configuration changes

IHVC502ISwitch not defined as a device

IHVC506INo failures detected by this switch

IHVC520ICommand not sent to this switch

IHVC522ICould not communicate with the switch

IHVC523ICould not write host names to the switch

IHVC524ISwitch data has been changed during command execution

IHVC533IPort xx cannot be CONNECTed while in maintenance mode

IHVC622IESCON Converter Model 2 paths may require xxxxxxxxxxx:

IHVC623IId Type Mod Serial number Port Logical name / Unique id

DISPLAY RESULTS


IHVC624IChained path associated with: xx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

IHVC625IData follows for chained switch: xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

IHVC626ICU xxxxxx xxx xxxxxxxxxxxx xx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

IHVC627ICV xxxxxx xxx xxxxxxxxxxxx xx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

IHVC641ISWCH does not support the requested function

IHVC645ISwitch file in use, no access

IHVC646IMaximum number of files saved at the switch

IHVC647IFile name xxxxxxxx does not exist on switch

IHVC649IRequired resources not available to access file

IHVC651IConnectivity attributes for port xx conflict with port xx

IHVC653IIncorrect number of implemented ports for switch

IHVC657ICannot delete IPL file at the switch

IHVC659ISwitch initialization not complete

IHVC843Ixxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx does not exist on switch xxxx

IHVC903IPort xx already CHAINed

IHVC906ICannot xxxxxxxxxx CHAINed port xx

IHVC908IPorts xx and xx are not CONNECTed to each other

IHVC909IExecution of the CHAIN command will form a closed loop

IHVC910IPort xx is not part of a CHAINed path

IHVC911IPorts xx and xx are not part of the same CHAINed path

IHVC912IPorts not in the correct CHAINed path order

Examples

DISPLAY RESULTS


Example 1As shown in Figure 140, a chain has been defined so that ports CB and D6 arestatically connected on the passthru switch 200.

A user entered N (D6) (CB) 200 and the command failed.

The user then entered the DISPLAY RESULTS command to analyze the cause offailure.

D RIHVC999I I/O operations displayIHVC803I This Host: IHVAPPLA/TCPHOSTA Sysplex/System: SYSPLEX1/SYSTEM12IHVC808I VTAMname/TCP host Sysplex SystemIHVC201I IHVAPPLA/TCPHOSTA SYSPLEX1 SYSTEM66IHVC505I No failures detected by this hostIHVC808I VTAMname/TCP host Sysplex SystemIHVC201I IHVAPPLB/ SYSPLEX1 SYSTEM22IHVC505I No failures detected by this hostSwch devn LSN Unique id Status Code

0100 01 009032002IBM01000000034893 OPERATIONAL 00Command not sent to this SWCH

Swch devn LSN Unique id Status Code0200 02 009032002IBM02000000093622 OPERATIONAL 00Cannot DISCONNECT CHAINed port D6Cannot DISCONNECT CHAINed port CB

Example 2The user tried to Block (C3) 200 NOF.

The command fails because an operational CV converter is attached to port C3.


│3A│ │3C│└┬─┘ └┬─┘│ │

┌─┬┴─┬─┬──┬─┬┴─┬─┐ ┌────────────────┐│ │FB├─┤FE│ │C1│ │ │ ││ └──┘ └──┘ └┬─┘ │ │ │ E0-D6-CB are chained│ │┌──┤ ├──┐ ┌──┤ CB is physically-attached port│ └┤E0╞═══╡D6╞══════════╡CB│ D6 is the middle port│ 0100 └──┤ ├──┘ 0200 └──┤ E0 is the end-of-chain port└────────────────┘ └────────────────┘Destination switch Passthru switch

Figure 140. DISPLAY RESULTS Command: Scenario 1

DISPLAY RESULTS


The user entered the DISPLAY RESULTS command to analyze the cause of failure.

D RIHVC999I I/O operations displayIHVC803I This Host: IHVAPPLA/TCPHOSTA Sysplex/System: SYSPLEX1/SYSTEM12IHVC808I VTAMname/TCP host Sysplex SystemIHVC201I IHVAPPLA/TCPHOSTA SYSPLEX1 SYSTEM66IHVC621I ESCON Converter Model 2(s) detectedIHVC808I VTAMname/TCP host Sysplex SystemIHVC201I IHVAPPLB/ SYSPLEX1 SYSTEM22IHVC505I No failures detected by this hostSwch devn LSN Unique id Status Code

0100 01 009032002IBM01000000034893 OPERATIONAL 00Command not sent to this SWCH

Swch devn LSN Unique id Status Code0200 02 009032002IBM02000000093622 OPERATIONAL 00ESCON Converter Model 2 paths may require DISABLEMENT:Id Type Mod Serial number Port Logical name / Unique idCU 003990 G03 000000090046 C5 CU.820CV 009035 002 000000020466 C3 HB.CHP_15.CV.820.3990

DISPLAY SWITCHPurpose

Use the DISPLAY SWITCH command to display data about one or about all theswitches allocated to the issuing I/O operations.

Syntax

►► Display Switch *DETail

swchdevnBlock NodeDescriptorConnect

►◄

┌────────────────┐ ┌────────────────┐│ I/O Operations │ │ I/O Operations ││ IHVAPPLA │←────────────→│ IHVAPPLB │├────────────────┤ ├────────────────┤│ SYSA │ │ SYSB │└┬──┬───┬──┬─┬──┬┘ └───┬──┬┬──┬─┬──┬┘│3C│ │3D│ │27│ │32││39│ │15│└┬─┘ └┬─┘ └┬─┘ └┬─┘└┬─┘ └┬┬┘│ │ └──────┐ │ │ └┘│ └──────────┐│ │ └─┐

┌─┴─┬──┬──────┬──┐ ││HA.CHP_27 ┌──┬┬┴─┬──┬┴─┬──┐ ┌────┐│ │C0│ │C1│ │└──────────┤FB├┤C0│ │C1│ │ ┌─┤ CV │├──┐└┬─┘ └┬─┤ │ ├──┘└──┘ └┬┬┘ │ │ └────┘│FB├─┼──────┐ ┌┴─┤ │HA.CHP_3D ├──┐ ┌────┘│┌──┤ │├┬─┘ │ 100 │ │D4├─┐└───────────┤F7├─┐│ 200 ││C3├─┘ HB.CHP_15.CV.820.3990││ │ │ └──┤ │ ├──┘ ││ ┌──┘└┬─┤├┴─┐ │ │ │ │ │┌───┼┼──┼───┐│ ││EA│┌┴─┐ ┌┴─┐ │ │LINK.200 ├┴─┐┌┴┴┐┌┴─┐┌┴┴┐│├──┘│E0│ │D6│ │ └────────────┤F2││D6││CB││C5│CU.820└───┴──┴───┴──┴──┘ └──┴┴──┴┴──┴┴┬─┴┘

┌─┴─┐│820│└─┬─┘┌─┴─┐│821│└───┘

Figure 141. DISPLAY RESULTS Command: Scenario 2

DISPLAY RESULTS


Parameters

*|swchdevnSpecifies one switch or all switches (* not enclosed in parentheses) allocated tothe issuing I/O operations. For a discussion, see “Switch Identifiers” on page565.

Options

DETailSpecifies that you want additional hardware information displayed along withthe default information. This option is for problem determination purposes.

Block|ConnectSpecifies that you want data displayed about only those ports that are blockedor are part of a static connection. (If a port is both blocked and staticallyconnected, it is listed if either parameter is chosen.) You can enter this optionalparameter only if you also specified an individual switch device number.

NodeDescriptorSpecifies that you want data of the attached hardware displayed. For all portsexcept the CUP device port the node descriptor of the attached hardware isdisplayed on a separate line when the I/O DEF shows an unambiguousattachment.

Usage

For more information on the displayed output, see the references under the fields:

IHVC834I Swch LSN Unique id Ins Status SCA B C D E F GIHVC838I .... .. .......................... ... ............. ..






E Installed ports (see HCD Term)

F Switch status

G Switch status code

IHVC273I Swch LSN Unique id Tag Status SC FlagsA B C D E F G HIHVC274I LIC EC level Sense bytes 0-15

I J KIHVC275I Ins Imp 1st LP Sense bytes 16-31

L M N O KIHVC276I .... .. .......................... .... ............. .. ........IHVC277I ..... ....... ........ ........ ........ ........IHVC278I ... ... ... ... ........ ........ ........ ........




DISPLAY SWITCH




E Tag of the node element descriptor (NED)

F Switch status

G Switch status code

H Switch internal flags

I Switch licensed internal code (LIC) version and release

J Engineering change (EC) level

K Sense data

L Installed ports (see HCD Term)

M Implemented ports without CUP

N First implemented port

O Logical paths

IHVC835I PortIHVC836I StatusIHVC837I Port H S C P I/O-Def Port nameA B C D EIHVC839I .. .. . .. . .... ........................

or

IHVC835I PortIHVC836I StatusIHVC237I Port H S C P I/O-Def Port name / Node descriptorA B C D E FIHVC839I .. .. . .. . .... ........................ /IHVC239I .............................. ....



B Port number (see “Port Addresses” on page 566)

C Port status code (see “Switch Port Hardware Status on a Display Command”on page 567)

D Port name (see “Using Port Names as a Tool in Switching Commands” onpage 577)

E I/O definition (see “Switch Ports” on page 566)

F Node descriptor of the attached hardware including the tag field

Examples

DISPLAY SWITCH


Example 1Display all information about switch 100.

D S 100 NDIHVC999I I/O-OPS displaySwch LSN Unique id Ins Status SC0100 01 009032002IBM01000000034893 61 OPERATIONAL 00

PortStatus

Port H S C P I/O-Def Port name / Node descriptorC0 E0 P CH HA.CHP_88.CVC /

002084.B16.IBM.02.000000016F7A C088C1 D4 P CH HA.CHP_3C /

002084.B16.IBM.02.000000016F7A C03CC2 PC3 P:D4 C1 P CU LINK.200 /

002107.932.IBM.75.0000000CC481 0230:FB P CH HA.CHP_3A /

002084.B16.IBM.02.000000016F7A C03AFE CU

HA.CHP_88.CVC HA.CHP_3C┌───┬─▼┬┬─▼┬───┐│ │C0││C1│ │├──┐└──┘└──┘┌──┤

HA.CHP_3A ►│FB│ │D4│◄ LINK.200├──┘ 0100 └──┤├──┐ ┌──┤

CU.190 ►│EA│ │D6│◄ CU.F00├──┘ ┌──┐ └──┤│ │E0│ │└─────┴─▲┴─────┘

CU.B20.9034

Figure 142. DISPLAY SWITCH Command: Sample 1. Display all information about Switch100

DISPLAY SWITCH


Example 2Display detailed information about all switches.

IHV D S * DETIHVC999I I/O-OPS displaySwch LSN Unique id Tag Status SC Flags

LIC EC level Sense bytes 0-15Ins Imp 1st LP Sense bytes 16-31

1E NOT OPEN 1C1001 01 009032005IBM510000000A7260 0000 OPERATIONAL 00 20000000

05.04 n/a 00000000 00000004 05040000 00000000242 248 4 255 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

1002 02 009032005IBM510000000A7465 0000 OPERATIONAL 00 2000000005.04 n/a NO SENSE DATA241 248 4 255

100A 0A 009032003IBM51000000002013 0000 OPERATIONAL 00 2000000004.03 n/a 00000000 00000002 04030000 00000000125 124 128 255 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

1011 11 006140001MCD010000013124DA 0000 OPERATIONAL 00 0000000009.06 00000000 00000045 09060000 00000000133 144 4 256 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

101A 1A 009032003IBM51000000002483 0000 OPERATIONAL 00 2000000004.03 n/a 00000000 00000002 04030000 00000000101 124 128 255 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

101B 1B 010000002MCD0100000131191M 0000 OPERATIONAL 00 0000000009.07 00000000 00000046 09070000 0000000032 254 0 256 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

DISPLAY TIMEOUTPurpose

Use the DISPLAY TIMEOUT command to display the maximum number ofseconds that the issuing I/O operations will wait to receive votes from the I/Ooperations that form its voting constituency and that have not been reset off withthe command described under “RESET HOST” on page 345. If one or more votesis still outstanding when the time interval lapses, the issuing I/O operationsdeclares a negative consensus.

Syntax

►► Display Timeout ►◄

ExamplesD TIHVC860I Current timeout value is 60 seconds

DISPLAY VARYPurpose

Use the DISPLAY VARY command to display a specified number (up to 1500) offailed vary path requests that have resulted either from the issuing I/Ooperations’s most recently processed connectivity command or that were built withthe Sync Switch command.

The data displayed depends on the type of command that failed and the optionsthat you specify on the Display Vary command.

DISPLAY SWITCH


See “DISPLAY HOST” on page 316 and “DISPLAY RESULTS” on page 324 forrelated commands, and “Processing a Vary Path Request” on page 582 for moreinformation.

Syntax

►► Display Vary vtamname number_of_varystcphostname * FAIL

SYNC

►◄

Parameters

vtamnameSpecifies the participating I/O operations by its VTAM application ID. Thefailed vary requests will be listed in the output for that I/O operations (host),but only for a command that was initiated by the issuing I/O operations.

You can specify THIS-SYS in uppercase characters if the issuing I/O operationsis the target program and any of the following conditions holds:v The issuing I/O operations does not have a valid VTAM application name

and TCP/IP host name.v The issuing I/O operations’ VTAM name and the TCP/IP host name are not


tcphostnameSpecifies the participating I/O operations by its TCP/IP host name. The failedvary requests will be listed in the output for that I/O operations (host), butonly for a command that was initiated by the issuing I/O operations.

You can specify THIS-SYS in uppercase characters if the issuing I/O operationsis the target program and any of the following conditions holds:v The issuing I/O operations does not have a valid VTAM application name

and TCP/IP host name.v The issuing I/O operations’ VTAM name and the TCP/IP host name are not


number_of_varys | *Replace number_of_varys with a decimal integer from 1 through 1500. Theasterisk (*) specifies all (up to the maximum of 1500). The number of failedvary path requests displayed is independent from similar data displayed byother commands. For example, if you had already displayed three vary pathrequests using the Display Vary command and want to display 15 additionalvary path requests with the Display Vary command, specify 18 vary pathrequests.

Options

FAILSpecifies only the failed vary path requests (if any), or Varies from aconnectivity command be displayed.

SYNCSpecifies that the vary path requests built with the Sync Switch command bedisplayed.

DISPLAY VARY


Usagev Failed vary path requests listed in this command relate to the path from a

CHPID to a device.v If a vary path request fails, the path through the port or ports specified in the

connectivity command could not be brought offline or online, depending on thecommand that was entered.

v One or more of the following messages are displayed:

IHVC212I(....,..)(....,..)(....,..)(....,..)

IHVC213I.......... caused VARYs by ........ on ........

IHVC214IONLINE .... .... (....,..,"..........................")

IHVC215IBACKOUT .... .... (....,..,"..........................")

IHVC231I.......... caused CONFIGs by ........ on ........

IHVC232IConfig type Tried Failed 1st .... failures (Chp)

IHVC233IOFFLINE .... .... (..,..,..,..,..,..,..,..)

IHVC234IBACKOUT .... .... (..,..,..,..,..,..,..,..)

IHVC235IONLINE .... .... (..,..,..,..,..,..,..,..)

IHVC244I(..,..,..,..,..,..,..,..)

IHVC271ISYNC SWITCH detected VARYs by ........ on ........

IHVC272ISYNC SWITCH detected CONFIGs by ........ on ........

IHVC525IThis host has been RESET off

IHVC811IVary type Tried Failed 1st .... failures (Dev,Chp,Msg)

IHVC819IOFFLINE .... .... (....,..,"..........................")

IHVC822I(....,..,"..........................")

IHVC853IConfig type Number 1st .... CONFIGs (Chp)

IHVC854IOFFLINE .... (..,..,..,..,..,..,..,..)

IHVC855IONLINE .... (..,..,..,..,..,..,..,..)

DISPLAY VARY


IHVC856ICVC CHPIDs may require ENABLEMENT: ..,..,..,..,..,..,..,..

IHVC857I..,..,..,..,..,..,..,..

IHVC871INo failed VARYs on previous command

IHVC872ISYNC type Number 1st .... VARYs (Dev,Chp)

IHVC873IOFFLINE .... (....,..)(....,..)(....,..)(....,..)

IHVC874IONLINE .... (....,..)(....,..)(....,..)(....,..)

IHVC875INo SYNC VARYs detected on previous command

IHVC877INo SYNC CONFIGs detected on previous command

IHVC879INo failed CONFIGs on previous command

Note that the message IDs are suppressed, otherwise some messages do not fitonto the text line of a multiline message.

ExamplesD V name *IHVC999I I/O operations displayVary type Tried Failed 1st 90 failures (Dev,Chp,Msg)OFFLINE 5 3 (0190,3A)(019E,3A)(019D,3A)(,)BACKOUT 2 0 (,)(,)(,)(,)Config type Tried Failed 1st 90 failures (Chp)No failed CONFIGs on previous commandSYNC type Number 1st 90 VARYs (Dev,Chp)No SYNC VARYs detected on previous commandConfig type Number 1st 90 CONFIGs (Chp)No SYNC Configs detected on previous command

GETLOCKPurpose

Use the GETLOCK command to obtain the processing lock for a user ID thatenters a command to any instance of I/O operations within the same set of I/Ooperations. (A set of I/O operations incorporates all the base programs that canparticipate in consensus processing of a connectivity command initiated by theissuing instance of I/O operations and those that can communicate with one ofthese participants via VTAM.)

See “UNLOCK” on page 356 for the reciprocal command.

Syntax

►► GETLOCK ►◄

DISPLAY VARY


Usagev The GETLOCK command is used when a user wants to perform a series of I/O

operation commands without interruption.v You may need to enter the GETLOCK command if another user ID has the lock

and will not, or cannot, release it. Such a situation could arise, for example, ifthe other user’s terminal is inactive.

v Note that default conditions for obtaining the processing lock are provided withthe I/O operations the sample ISPF dialog. You can accept these defaults orcustomize them for your ISPF user ID.

v The GETLOCK command takes control of I/O operations processing and can,therefore, potentially interrupt a series of connectivity commands being enteredby another user ID with unpredictable results.

v If your user ID has control authorization required to enter the Getlockcommand, be sure you have considered all pertinent aspects of the system I/Oenvironment before issuing this command.

v Note that you can release the lock with the Unlock command and should, ofcourse, do so when you are finished entering I/O operations commands for thesession.

ExamplesGETLOCKIHVC000I GETLOCK command successful

LOGRECPurpose

Use the LOGREC command to have I/O operations instruct the specified switch orswitches to send their log data to the host (system control program) that theissuing I/O operations is running on.

Syntax

►► LOGREC swchdevn*

►◄

Parameters

swchdevn|*Specifies one switch or all the switches (* not enclosed in parentheses)allocated to the issuing I/O operations. For a discussion, see “SwitchIdentifiers” on page 565.

Usagev The LOGREC command remains in effect across I/O operations sessions, unless

the host image becomes dysfunctional.v If you enter the LOGREC command, it is advisable to do so when the I/O

operations base program is started.v The LOGREC command causes any data that I/O operations has accumulated

for display with the DISPLAY RESULTS command to be refreshed.

GETLOCK


ExamplesLOGREC 100IHVC000I LOGREC command successful

PROHIBITPurpose

Use the PROHIBIT command to prevent data transfer between ports on the sameswitch or on all switches allocated to the issuing I/O operations.

Unlike the BLOCK command, the PROHIBIT command allows the two ports tohave dynamic connections with other ports. You can prohibit data transfer betweenports according to the following syntax diagram. See “ALLOW” on page 303 forthe reciprocal command.

Syntax

►► Prohibit (portaddress_x)portname_xgeneric_name

(portaddress_y)portname_ygeneric_name(*)*

swchdevn*

►

►IGNore

Vary NOForce BAckout



►◄

Parameters

(portaddress_x)|portname_x|generic_nameSpecifies the port to be prohibited by its port address (enclosed inparentheses), by its individual port name, or by a generic port name. For adiscussion, see “Switching Commands” on page 573.

(portaddress_y)|portname_y|generic_name|(*)|*Specifies the other ports in one of the following ways: a port address (enclosedin parentheses), an individual port name, a generic port name, all other portaddresses (* enclosed in parentheses), or all other port names (* not enclosed inparentheses). For a discussion, see “Switching Commands” on page 573.

swchdevn|*Specifies one switch or all the switches (* not enclosed in parentheses)allocated to the issuing I/O operations. For a discussion, see “SwitchIdentifiers” on page 565.

Options


LOGREC





Usagev If you specify an individual or generic port name, all the switches involved must

have at least one port implemented with an applicable port name.v If a parallel channel path and CV converter are involved, consider the

information in “A Parallel Channel in Block (BL) Mode” on page 581.

ExamplesP (FB) (D6) 100IHVC000I PROHIBIT command successful

P HB.CHP_39 CU.* 200IHVC000I PROHIBIT command successful

Before │ After│

┌──────┬──┬─────┐ │ ┌──────┬──┬─────┐│ 0100 │C0│ │ │ │ 0100 │C0│ │├──┐ └──┘ ┌──┤ │ ├──┐ └──┘ ┌──┤│FB├───────┐ │D4│ │ │FB├──(P)──┐ │D4│├──┘ │ └──┤ │ ├──┘ │ └──┤├──┐ │ ┌──┤ │ ├──┐ │ ┌──┤│EA│ └─┤D6│ │ │EA│ └─┤D6│├──┘ ┌──┐ └──┤ │ ├──┘ ┌──┐ └──┤│ │E0│ │ │ │ │E0│ │└──────┴──┴─────┘ │ └──────┴──┴─────┘

Figure 143. PROHIBIT Command: Sample 1

CH.CHP_32 HA.CHP_39┌────┬─▼┬┬─▼┬────┐│ │C0││C1├┐ │├──┐ └──┘└┬┬┘│┌──┤

HA.CHP_3A ►│FB│ ┌────┘│ ││D4│◄ LINK.200├──┘ │ ┌──┘ │└──┤│ │ │ (P) │├──┐(P) │ │┌──┤

CU.190 ►│EA├─┘ (P) └┤D6│◄ CU.F00├──┘ ┌┴─┐ └──┤│ 0100 │E0│ │└──────┴─▲┴──────┘

CU.B20.9034

Figure 144. PROHIBIT Command: Sample 2

PROHIBIT


REMOVE CHPPurpose

Use the REMOVE CHP command to configure the specified CHPID offline to thehost image of the target I/O operations in the command. See “RESTORE CHP” onpage 349 for information on the reciprocal command.

Syntax

►► REMOVE Chp chpid vtamnametcphostname

Vary NOForce

NOCheck

BAckout

NOBackout►

►CONDitional

UNCONDitional►◄

Parameters

chpidSpecify the CHPID as a hexadecimal number in the range X'00' through X'FF'.

vtamnameSpecify the VTAM application name of the target I/O operations.

The target I/O operations is the program that instructs its host image toconfigure the specified CHPID offline.

The target system can be any I/O operations host that a VTAM session isestablished with.

You can specify THIS-SYS in uppercase characters if the issuing I/O operationsis the target program and any of the following conditions holds:v The issuing I/O operations does not have a valid VTAM name and TCP/IP

host name.v The issuing I/O operations’ VTAM name and TCP/IP host name are not


To review a list of applicable VTAM names, you can use the Display Hostcommand. If you enter D H *, you can determine whether the issuing I/Ooperations calls itself THIS-SYS.

tcphostnameSpecify the TCP/IP host name of the target I/O operations.


The target system can be any I/O operations host that a TCP/IP connection isestablished with.


host name.v The issuing I/O operations’ VTAM name and TCP/IP host name are not

available.

REMOVE CHP


v VTAM and TCP/IP are not available.

Options

VARYVARY is the default and NOVary is not an alternative.

I/O operations issues the appropriate vary path-offline requests for all thepaths that have been defined to the specified CHPID in the relevant host I/OControl Data Set (IOCDS).

Only after all these paths have been varied offline does the target I/Ooperations request the target host image to configure the specified CHPIDoffline.


NOForce|NOCheckNOForce is the default. Although you can specify NOCheck, that alternativehas no additional effect in this command.

BAckout|NOBackoutIf you specify BAckout, I/O operations attempts to vary those paths backonline that had been varied offline successfully if either:v At least one vary path-offline request failed.v All the vary path requests were successful, but the program could not

configure the CHPID offline.

CONDitionalThis is the default option for both the REMOVE CHP and RESTORE CHPcommands. It indicates that no special configure offline or configure onlineaction should be performed.

UNCONDitionalFor the REMOVE CHP command, this option puts the specified chpidsimmediately into pending offline status, even if the chpids are currently active,allocated, or reserved.

For the RESTORE CHP command, this option brings the specified chpidsonline, even if there are no paths to the chpids, or if the chpids are pendingoffline and boxed.

Usagev The CHPID type must be known to the target I/O operations.v If the REMOVE CHP command causes one or more devices to be removed from

the host image that the target I/O operations is running on, I/O operationsautomatically attempts to delete these devices from its internal configurationmap.

v I/O operations does not attempt to configure the channel offline if any of therelevant vary path requests failed.

v I/O operations does not attempt to configure the channel offline if the targetI/O operations is reset off or purged from intersystem communication.

v If the target I/O operations is running in an MVS environment and if theprogram timed out with the state of the CHPID unknown, I/O operationsattempts to configure the channel back online.

REMOVE CHP


v If you are considering specifying a CVC channel for this command, note thatSA z/OS automatically configures a CVC CHPID offline when it processes anyof the following commands for a path defined with that CHPID: BLOCK,DISCONNECT, REMOVE SWITCH, and UNCHAIN.

v The command is not supported if the target I/O operations is running on a hostsystem that is operating as a guest in a VM environment.

REMOVE SWITCHPurpose

Use the REMOVE SWITCH command to vary all logical paths through thespecified switch offline and, optionally, to disable the unit.

The switch must be allocated to the issuing I/O operations. See “RESTORESWITCH” on page 351 for the reciprocal command, and “Remove (Quiesce) aSwitch” on page 576 for discussion.

Syntax

►► REMOVE Switch swchdevnVary NOForce BAckout



►

►NODisable

Disable►◄

Parameters

swchdevnSpecifies the switch to be varied offline and optionally to be disabled. Theswitch must be allocated to the issuing I/O operations. For a discussion, see“Switch Identifiers” on page 565.

Options

NODisable|DisableNODisable (default) specifies that every path that passes through the switch isvaried offline. (The path to the control unit port, or CUP, is not varied offline.)The switch is not deallocated, or detached, from I/O operations.

Disable specifies that every path that passes through the switch is variedoffline. (The path to the control unit port, or CUP, is not varied offline.) Theswitch is then deallocated, or detached, from I/O operations.



For a discussion of why it sometimes is not obvious that the status of a path ora device has changed after an operator has issued a connectivity command, see“Device and Path Status After Connectivity Commands” on page 588.

REMOVE CHP


Usagev If a path through the switch is chained and you intend to remove the switch,

physically cancel the definition of the chain first.v If you specify the Disable option, power to the switch must be turned off and

then on before communications can be restored to the unit. See “RESTORESWITCH” on page 351.Attention: Issuing the REMOVE Switch command with the Disable option willswitch power off to the IBM 9032 Model 2 ESCON Director but will just cyclethe power (power stays switched on) for the IBM 9032 Model 3 ESCON Director.

v If you specify the Disable option, and if you plan to restore what is physicallythe same switch using the RESTORE S command later, do not change the switchdevice offline to MVS or z/OS. However, if you are planning to restore aphysically different switch, for example, when replacing a 9032-003 ESCONDirector with a 9032-005 ESCON Director, the correct sequence of operations isas follows:1. Issue REMOVE S.2. Change the switch device offline to the operation system.3. Perform the physical replacement of the switch.4. Change the switch online to the operating system.5. Then issue RESTORE S.

SA z/OS’s REMOVE DEVICE and RESTORE DEVICE can be used to vary thedevice offline or online to multiple systems as one operation. For furtherinformation, see the description of “REMOVE and RESTORE DEV (API)” in IBMTivoli System Automation for z/OS Programmer's Reference.

v If the command fails, display pathing status with “DISPLAY HOST” on page316, “DISPLAY RESULTS” on page 324, or “DISPLAY VARY” on page 333.Consider rerunning the command with the Force and Disable options.

ExamplesREMOVE S 200 DIHVC000I REMOVE command successful

REMOVE SWITCH


RESET CHANGECHECKPurpose

Use the RESET CHANGECHECK command to limit the check for data changes ina switch or not when processing a connectivity command. Normally, all openedswitches are checked for a data change prior to the execution of a connectivitycommand. If any switch responds with a data change indication or cannot respondto the check the connectivity command is rejected. Limiting the check to theswitches that are actually affected by the connectivity command avoids therejection of the command by any other switch.

Syntax

RESET CHANGECHECK

►►ON

Reset ChangeCheck OFF ►◄

Parameters

OFF Specifies that only those switches are checked for a data change prior to aconnectivity command which are actually affected by the command.

ON Specifies that all opened switches are checked for a data change prior to aconnectivity command. This is the default setting on the startup of I/OOperations.

Usage

Prior to a connectivity command all opened switches are checked for a datachange. If any switch responds with a data change indication or cannot respond to

Before │ After│

┌────────────────┐ ┌────────────────┐ │ ┌────────────────┐ ┌────────────────┐│ I/O Operations │ │ I/O Operations │ │ │ I/O Operations │ │ I/O Operations ││ IHVAPPLA │ │ IHVAPPLB │ │ │ IHVAPPLA │ │ IHVAPPLB │├────────────────┤ ├────────────────┤ │ ├────────────────┤ ├────────────────┤│ SYSA │ │ SYSB │ │ │ SYSA │ │ SYSB │└┬──┬┬──┬┬──┬┬──┬┘ └────────┬──┬┬──┬┘ │ └┬──┬┬──┬┬×─┬┬×─┬┘ └────────┬×─┬┬×─┬┘│3A││3B││3C││3D│ │32││39│ │ │3A││3B││3C││3D│ │32││39│└┬─┘└┬─┘└┬─┘└┬─┘ └┬─┘└┬─┘ │ └┬─┘└┬─┘└┬─┘└┬─┘ └┬─┘└┬─┘│ │ │ └──────────┐ ┌┘ └─┐ │ │ │ │ └──────────┐ ┌┘ └─┐│ │ └───────┐ │ │ │ │ │ │ └───────┐ │ │ ││ └─────────┐ │ │ │ │ │ │ └─────────┐ │ │ │ │└────┐ │ │ │ │ │ │ └────┐ │ │ │ │ │

┌─────┬┴─┬─────┐│ │ ┌───┬┴─┬┬┴─┬───┐│ │ ┌─────┬┴─┬─────┐│ │ ┌───┬┴─┬┬┴─┬───┐││ │C0│ ││ │ │ │C0││C1│ ││ │ │ │C0│ ││ │ │ │C0││C1│ ││├──┐ └──┘ ┌──┤│ │ ├──┐└──┘└──┘┌──┤│ │ ├──┐ └──┘ ┌──┤│ │ ├──┐└──┘└──┘┌──┤││FB│ │D4├┘ │ │FB│ │D4├┘ │ │FB│ │D4├┘ │ │FB│ │D4├┘├──┘ 0100 └──┤ │ ├──┘ 0200 └──┤ │ ├──┘ 0100 └──┤ │ ├──┘ 0200 └──┤├──┐ ┌──┤ │ ├──┐ ┌──┤ │ ├──┐ ┌──┤ │ ├──┐ ┌──┤│EA│ │D6│ └─┤EA│ │D6│ │ │EA│ │D6│ └─┤EA│ │D6│├──┘ ┌──┐ └──┤ ├──┘ ┌──┐ └──┤ │ ├──┘ ┌──┐ └──┤ ├──┘ ┌──┐ └──┤│ │E0│ │ │ │E0│ │ │ │ │E0│ │ │ │E0│ │└─────┴──┴─────┘ └─────┴──┴─────┘ │ └─────┴──┴─────┘ └─────┴──┴─────┘

│ All logical paths to switch 200are offline

Figure 145. REMOVE SWITCH Command Sample

RESET CHANGECHECK


the check for whatever reason the connectivity command is rejected. In case theswitch causing the rejection of the command is actually not affected by theconnectivity command you can turn off the CHANGECHECK option forcing I/OOperations only to check the switches that are affected by the command.

ExamplesR CC OFFIHVC000I RESET command successful.

RESET HOSTPurpose

Use the RESET HOST command to include or exclude any participant in theissuing I/O operations consensus processing.

With this command, you can avoid having the issuing I/O operations stop thecommand from completing because, for example, a participant could not return avote.

See “DISPLAY HOST” on page 316 for the related command.

Syntax

►► Reset Host vtamnametcphostname

ON

OFFPURGE

►◄

Parameters

vtamnameSpecifies the VTAM application name, or VTAM ID, of the I/O operationstargeted in the command.

When I/O operations is started, it writes its VTAM ID and the TCP/IP hostname to all the switches allocated to it. Should the I/O configuration have nouse or restricted use of switches, dynamic communication between I/Ooperations may not be achieved, in which case the RESET HOST command isused. The RESET HOST command allows an operator or automated programto declare the VTAM IDs of peers to I/O operations. I/O operations that areparticipating in consensus processing use these VTAM IDs to communicatewith each other.

tcphostnameSpecifies the TCP/IP host name of the I/O operations targeted in thecommand.

When I/O operations is started, it writes its VTAM application name and theTCP/IP host name to all the switches allocated to it. Should the I/Oconfiguration have no or restricted use of switches, dynamic communicationbetween I/O operations may not be achieved, in which case, the RESET HOSTcommand is used. The RESET HOST command allows an operator orautomated program to declare the TCP/IP host name of peers to I/Ooperations. I/O operations that are participating in consensus processing usethese TCP/IP host names to communicate with each other.

RESET CHANGECHECK


ON Is the default. It specifies that the issuing I/O operations will include the targetI/O operations in its consensus processing. (The issuing I/O operations caninclude itself.) Should the VTAM ID or TCP/IP host name not be recognized,I/O operations records the name and attempts to establish a communicationsession with the peer. The new peer is included in all subsequent consensusprocessing. If the name resolves to a TCP/IP host name, I/O operationsattempts to establish a TCP/IP connection to the host. Otherwise, a VTAMapplication name is assumed and I/O operations attempts to establish a VTAMsession.

OFFSpecifies that the issuing I/O operations will exclude the target I/O operationsin consensus processing. (The issuing I/O operations can exclude itself.)

PURGESpecifies that the issuing I/O operations will exclude the targeted I/Ooperations from participating in its consensus processing until the target hostre-registers its VTAM name or TCP/IP host name when it sends a command toone of the switches allocated to both the purged I/O operations and the I/Ooperations that issued the purge, when the purged I/O operations is restarted,or when a RESET HOST command with the ON operand is issued. Use thisoption to exclude systems that have ended abnormally or when an incorrectVTAM ID or TCP/IP host name was entered using the RESET HOST commandwith the ON operand. (The issuing I/O operations cannot purge itself.)

Usage

The RESET HOST command affects an I/O operations’s participation only inconsensus processing initiated by the issuing I/O operations. It does not affectconsensus vary path processing initiated by any other I/O operations, including abroadcast initiated by a host that has been reset off.

When the VTAM ID or TCP/IP host name is not known command processing forRESET HOST name ON is as follows:1. The VTAM ID or TCP/IP host name is recorded by I/O operations and is

included in subsequent consensus processing. Should the name not besuccessfully recorded the following messages are issued:IHVC002I Reset command failed. RC = 8 Reas= 5000000AIHVC401I Host(s) unable to process the RESET command

2. If the name resolves to a TCP/IP host name an attempt is made to establish aTCP/IP connection. Otherwise, an attempt to establish a VTAM session ismade. If the session is successfully established with the peer its VTAM ID orTCP/IP host name is automatically passed to other I/O operations in thedomain. Then each I/O operations dynamically establishes its own session tothe peer. The following message is issued:IHVC000I RESET command successful

3. If the TCP/IP connection or the VTAM session is not successfully establishedthe TCP/IP host name or VTAM ID is retained by I/O operations, but thename is not broadcast to other peers. This can be caused, for example, by thespecification of an incorrect TCP/IP host name or VTAM ID. Should this occurthe following messages are issued:IHVC001I Reset command successful. RC = 4 Reas= 5000000AIHVC401I Host(s) unable to process the RESET command

Additional information is presented in the Display Results output that indicatesthe VTAM session was not established.

RESET HOST


ExamplesR H IHVAPPLB OFFIHVC000I RESET command successful

R H IHVAPPLB ONIHVC000I RESET command successful

R H IHVAPPLB PURGEIHVC000I RESET command successful

Examples of Using RESET HOST to Declare Peer I/O Operations

No Switch Configuration:

In the above figure all three I/O operations start without the knowledge of theirpeers. To establish communication among them, two RESET HOST commands arerequired, issued on any of the I/O operations. For example, on IHVAPPL1, thefollowing commands are issued:

R H IHVAPPL2 ONIHVC000I RESET command successfulR H IHVAPPL3 ONIHVC000I RESET command successful

This results in all I/O operations establishing a communication session betweenthem.

Restricted Switch Configuration:

In the above figure, I/O operations IHVAPPL1 and IHVAPPL2 dynamicallyestablish a session with one another at startup. IHVAPPL3 and IHVAPPL4 do so aswell. However, neither group knows about the other due to a lack of a switchattachment. To establish communication among the two groups, only a singleRESET HOST command is required and may be issued on any of the I/Ooperations. For example, on IHVAPPL1, the following command is issued:

┌──────────┐ ┌──────────┐ ┌──────────┐│ IHVAPPL1 │←────────────→│ IHVAPPL2 │←────────────→│ IHVAPPL3 │├──────────┤ RESET HOST ├──────────┤ RESET HOST ├──────────┤│ X1.SYS1 │ ON command │ X1.SYS2 │ ON command │ X1.SYS3 │└──────────┘ └──────────┘ └──────────┘

Figure 146. RESET HOST Command: Scenario 1

┌──────────┐ ┌──────────┐ ┌──────────┐ ┌──────────┐│ IHVAPPL1 │←────→│ IHVAPPL2 │←────────────→│ IHVAPPL3 │←────→│ IHVAPPL4 │├──────────┤ ├──────────┤ RESET HOST ├──────────┤ ├──────────┤│ X1.SYS1 │ │ X1.SYS2 │ ON command │ X1.SYS3 │ │ X1.SYS4 │└───┬──┬───┘ └───┬──┬───┘ └───┬──┬───┘ └───┬──┬───┘

└┬─┘ └┬─┘ └┬─┘ └┬─┘└───────┐ ┌───────┘ └───────┐ ┌───────┘

┌─┴─┴─┐ ┌─┴─┴─┐│ 100 │ │ 200 │└─────┘ └─────┘

Figure 147. RESET HOST Command: Scenario 2

RESET HOST


R H IHVAPPL4 ONIHVC000I RESET command successful

This results in all I/O operations establishing a communication session betweenthemselves.

RESET SWITCHPurpose

Use the RESET SWITCH command to update the issuing I/O operations’configuration map about a single switch or all the switches that are allocated to it.

Syntax

►► Reset Switch swchdevn*

►◄

Parameters

swchdevn|*Specifies one switch or all switches (* not enclosed in parentheses) allocated tothe issuing I/O operations.

For a discussion, see “Switch Identifiers” on page 565.

Usagev If you specify R S *, thus resetting all the switches, the issuing I/O operations

tries to allocate, or attach, all the switches defined to its host image. In this way,you can provide access to a new switch device number to the issuing I/Ooperations.

v Make sure you enter this command when you add or modify a switch allocatedto the issuing I/O operations during operations.

v Issues a RESET SWITCH command if manipulation of CHPDs or Channel Pathsis performed outside I/O operations (for example, using the system console).

ExamplesR S 100IHVC000I RESET command successful

The following data is updated:v The VTAM application names of the I/O operations that participate in consensus

vary-path processing initiated by the issuing I/O operations application.v Switch device number. (See “Switch Identifiers” on page 565.)v Port names and port attributes. (See “Switching Commands” on page 573.)v Chaining information.

RESET HOST


RESET TIMEOUTPurpose

Use the RESET TIMEOUT command to specify the limit of the time interval, inseconds, that any participating I/O operations will wait for votes to be returnedwhen it broadcasts as the issuing I/O operations.

Syntax

►► Reset Timeout seconds*

►◄

Parameters

seconds|*Specifies the number of seconds from 0 up to and including 999,999 or theIBM-supplied default of 60 seconds (* not in parentheses).

Usagev If the issuing I/O operations receives responses from all eligible voters (all

voters except any that have been reset off by the issuing I/O operations) beforethe time limit is reached, and if all the votes are affirmative, commandprocessing continues.Unless the command is being forced, either a negative vote or a failure torespond within the time limit causes the issuing I/O operations to fail thecommand.

ExamplesR T 120IHVC000I RESET command successful

RESTORE CHPPurpose

Use the RESTORE CHP command to configure a specified channel online to thehost image that the target I/O operations is running on. See “REMOVE CHP” onpage 340 for information on the reciprocal command.

Syntax

►► RESTORE Chp chpid vtamnametcphostname

Vary NOForce

NOCheck

BAckout

NOBackout►

►CONDitional

UNCONDitional►◄

RESET TIMEOUT


Parameters

chpidSpecify the CHPID to be restored as a hexadecimal number in the range X'00'through X'FF'.

vtamnameSpecify the VTAM application name of the target I/O operations. The targetprogram is the I/O operations that instructs its host image to configure thespecified CHPID online.

The target system can be any I/O operations host that a VTAM session isestablished with.


host name.v The issuing I/O operations VTAM name and TCP/IP host name are not


Note: Use the Display Host * command to see if the issuing I/O operationscalls itself THIS-SYS.)

tcphostnameSpecify the TCP/IP host name of the target I/O operations.


The target system can be any I/O operations host that a TCP/IP connection isestablished with.


host name.v The issuing I/O operations VTAM name and TCP/IP host name are not


Options

VARYVARY is the default and NOVary is not an alternative.

The target I/O operations configures the CHPID online before issuing the varypath-online requests for all the relevant paths that are defined to the specifiedCHPID in the host I/O Control Data Set (IOCDS).


NOForce|NOCheckNOForce is the default. Although you can enter NOCheck, it has no additionaleffect in this command.

RESTORE CHP


BAckout|NOBackoutBAckout is the default. Although you can enter NOBackout, I/O operationsprocessing is not different for this command.

For both BAckout and NOBackout, I/O operations:v Attempts to configure the channel back offline if the program is running

under MVS and timed out with the status of the channel uncertain.v Does not attempt to vary any paths back offline if one or more relevant vary

path-online requests fail.

CONDitionalThis is the default option for both the REMOVE and RESTORE CHPcommands. It indicates that no special configure offline or configure onlineaction should be performed.

UNCONDitionalFor the REMOVE CHP command, this option puts the specified chpidsimmediately into pending offline status, even if the chpids are currently active,allocated, or reserved.

For the RESTORE CHP command, this option brings the specified chpidsonline, even if there are no paths to the chpids, or if the chpids are pendingoffline and boxed.

Usagev The CHPID type must be known to the target I/O operations.v If the RESTORE CHP command causes one or more devices to be made

available to the host image that the target I/O operations is running on, I/Ooperations automatically attempts to add these devices to its internalconfiguration map.

v I/O operations does not attempt to configure the channel online if the target I/Ooperations is reset off or purged from intersystem communication.

v The target I/O operations cannot bring a channel online if that channel is notavailable to the host image that the target program is running on.

v If the target I/O operations is running in an MVS environment and if theprogram timed out with the state of the CHPID unknown, I/O operationsattempts to configure the channel back offline.

v If you are considering specifying a CVC channel for this command, note thatI/O operations does not automatically attempt to configure a CVC CHPIDoffline when it processes any of the following commands for a path defined withthat CHPID: Chain, Restore Switch, or Unblock. You can, however, use theRESTORE CHP command to configure the CVC CHPID online.

v The command is not supported if the target I/O operations is running on a hostsystem that is operating as a guest in a VM environment.

RESTORE SWITCHPurpose

Use the RESTORE SWITCH command to restore logical path status through aswitch. I/O operations automatically issues any vary path requests that are neededto synchronize path status with the current physical settings stored at the switch.

If the switch is not allocated that will now be done.

RESTORE CHP


See “REMOVE SWITCH” on page 342 for the reciprocal command and “Restore(Enable) a Switch” on page 577 for a discussion.

Syntax

►► RESTORE Switch swchdevnVary NOForce BAckout


Novary Force NOBackout

►◄

Parameters

swchdevnSpecifies the switch to be restored. For a discussion, see “Switch Identifiers” onpage 565.

Options




Usagev The Restore Switch command restores paths attached to the switch according to

the current switch settings-to units.v If you have previously issued the command “REMOVE SWITCH DISABLE” you

must do the following before you issue the “RESTORE SWITCH” command:– For ESCON switches, either POWER®-ON or IML the switch.– For FICON switches, use the Fabric Manager to set the switch online.

v If you replace a switch that was disabled with the Remove Switch commandwith another switch, any previous chaining data is made void. Chaining data inthe new switch is used, instead. If the replacement switch is physically linked toanother switch, you must define the chained path. See “Chain and Unchain aSwitchable Path (ESCON only)” on page 577 for more information.

ExamplesRESTORE S 100IHVC000I RESTORE command successful

SYNC SWITCHPurpose

Use the SYNC SWITCH to build and, optionally, to issue vary path requests thatwould be required to synchronize path status with the current settings maintainedat the specified switch.

RESTORE SWITCH


Syntax

►► SYNC Switch swchdevnProcess

NOProcess►◄

Parameters

swchdevnSpecifies the switch. For a discussion, see “Switch Identifiers” on page 565.

Options

Process(default) instructs the issuing I/O operations to issue the appropriate vary pathrequests.

NOProcessinstructs I/O operations to build the list, but not to process it.

Usagev Use the command described in “DISPLAY VARY” on page 333 to display the

vary path requests that would be required if you choose the NOProcess optionor the failed vary path requests if you chose the process option.

v Consider using the command if you have entered one or more connectivitycommands with the Force option, knowing that pathing status will no longer besynchronous with the switch settings.

v Consider using the SYNC SWITCH command if connectivity changes have beenmade to the switch at the switch console.

v SYNC SWITCH differs from RESET SWITCH in that the latter commandsynchronizes the issuing I/O operations' internal configuration map with thephysical settings of the switch, but does not synchronize path status.

UNBLOCKPurpose

Use the UNBLOCK command to permit data transfer through a port that had beenblocked. See “BLOCK” on page 305 for the reciprocal command.

Syntax

►► Unblock (portaddress)portnamegeneric_name

swchdevn* IGNore

►




►◄

SYNC SWITCH


Parameters

(portaddress)|portname|generic_nameSpecifies the port to be unblocked by its port address (enclosed inparentheses), by its individual port name, or by a generic port name. For adiscussion, see “Switching Commands” on page 573.


Options





Usage

If a CVC or parallel CHPID is involved, see “A "Partially-ESCON" Path” on page581 for more information.

ExamplesUNBLOCK (D6) 100IHVC000I UNBLOCK command successful

U CU.F00 *IHVC000I UNBLOCK command successful

Before │ After│

┌──────┬──┬─────┐ │ ┌──────┬──┬─────┐│ 0100 │C0│ │ │ │ 0100 │C0│ │├──┐ └──┘ ┌──┤ │ ├──┐ └──┘ ┌──┤│FB│ │D4│ │ │FB│ │D4│├──┘ └──┤ │ ├──┘ └──┤├──┐ ┌──┤ │ ├──┐ ┌──┤│EA│ │D6× │ │EA│ │D6│ D6 is no longer blocked├──┘ ┌──┐ └──┤ │ ├──┘ ┌──┐ └──┤ and allows data transfer│ │E0│ │ │ │ │E0│ │└──────┴──┴─────┘ │ └──────┴──┴─────┘

Figure 148. UNBLOCK Command: Sample 1

UNBLOCK


UNCHAINPurpose

Use the UNCHAIN command to cancel the definition of a chain in a chained path.See “Chain and Unchain a Switchable Path (ESCON only)” on page 577 for moreinformation. See “CHAIN” on page 307 for the reciprocal command.

Note: The UNCHAIN command is not applicable to FICON switches.

Syntax

►► UNCHAIN (portaddress_e)portname_e

destination_swchdevn (portaddress_m)portname_m

►

► (portaddress_a)portname_a

passthru_swchdevn ►




►◄

Parameters

(portaddress_e)|portname_eSpecifies the end port by its port address (enclosed in parentheses) or by itsport name. For a discussion, see “Switching Commands” on page 573.

destination_swchdevnSpecifies the device number of the destination switch in the chained path. Fora discussion, see “Switch Identifiers” on page 565.

(portaddress_m)|portname_mSpecifies middle port by its port address (enclosed in parentheses) or by itsport name. For a discussion, see “Switching Commands” on page 573.

(portaddress_a)|portname_aSpecifies the port in the chained path that the CHPID or control unit isphysically attached to by its port address (enclosed in parentheses) or by itsport name. For a discussion, see “Switching Commands” on page 573.

Before │ After│

┌──────┬──┬─────┐ ┌──────┬──┬─────┐ │ ┌──────┬──┬─────┐ ┌──────┬──┬─────┐│ 0100 │C0│ │ │ 0200 │C0│ │ │ │ 0100 │C0│ │ │ 0200 │C0│ │├──┐ └──┘ ┌──┤ ├──┐ └──┘ ┌──┤ │ ├──┐ └──┘ ┌──┤ ├──┐ └──┘ ┌──┤│FB│ │D4│ │FB│ │D4│ │ │FB│ │D4│ │FB│ │D4│├──┘ └──┤ ├──┘ └──┤ │ ├──┘ └──┤ ├──┘ └──┤├──┐ ┌──┤ ├──┐ ┌──┤ │ ├──┐ ┌──┤ ├──┐ ┌──┤│EA│ CU.F00 ►│D6× │EA│ CU.F00 ►│D6× │ │EA│ CU.F00 ►│D6│ │EA│ CU.F00 ►│D6│├──┘ ┌──┐ └──┤ ├──┘ ┌──┐ └──┤ │ ├──┘ ┌──┐ └──┤ ├──┘ ┌──┐ └──┤│ │E0│ │ │ │E0│ │ │ │ │E0│ │ │ │E0│ │└──────┴──┴─────┘ └──────┴──┴─────┘ │ └──────┴──┴─────┘ └──────┴──┴─────┘

│D6 on switches 100 and 200 are both unblocked

Figure 149. UNBLOCK Command: Sample 2

UNCHAIN


passthru_swchdevnSpecifies the device number of the passthru switch in the chained path. For adiscussion, see “Switch Identifiers” on page 565.

Options



Usagev Use the Force option to remove a chained path that is supporting the last path

to the switch.v Make sure that you cancel the definition of a chain before you recable either of

the chained switches of the chained ports that are affected.v The definition of a chain is made void if either of the chained switches is

replaced.

ExamplesUNCHAIN (F2) 200 (D4) (C1) 100IHVC000I UNCHAIN command successful

UNLOCKPurpose

Use the UNLOCK command to release I/O operations processing from your userID, so that another user ID can use an I/O operations within the same set. (A setof I/O operations consists of the participants in the issuing I/O operations'vary-path processing and those I/O operations that can communicate with any ofthe participants.)

Before │ After│


│3A│ │3C│ │ │3A│ │3C│└┬─┘ └┬─┘ │ └┬─┘ └┬─┘│ │ │ │ │

┌─┬┴─┬─┬──┬─┬┴─┬─┐ ┌────────────────┐ │ ┌─┬┴─┬─┬──┬─┬┴─┬─┐ ┌────────────────┐│ │FB├─┤FE│ │C1│ │ │ │ │ │ │FB├─┤FE│ │C1│ │ │ ││ └──┘ └──┘ └╥─┘ │ │ │ │ │ └──┘ └──┘ └──┘ │ │ ││ ║┌──┤ ├──┐ ┌──┤ │ │ ┌──┤ ├──┐ ┌──┤│ ╚╡D4╞═══╡F2├──────────┤C5│ │ │ │D4╞═══╡F2├──────────┤C5││ 0100 └──┤ ├──┘ 0200 └──┤ │ │ 0100 └──┤ ├──┘ 0200 └──┤└────────────────┘ └────────────────┘ │ └────────────────┘ └────────────────┘Passthru switch Destination switch │C1-D4-F2 are chainedC1 is physically-attached portD4 is the middle portF2 is the end-of-chain port

Figure 150. UNCHAIN Command Sample

UNCHAIN


See “GETLOCK” on page 336 for the reciprocal command.

Syntax

►► UNLOCK ►◄

ExamplesUNLOCKIHVC000I UNLOCK command successful

WRITEPurpose

Use the WRITE command to assign or write a port name to an addressable port onone or on all the switches that are allocated to the issuing I/O operations.

Syntax

►► Write portname (portaddress) swchdevn*

►◄

Parameters

portnameSpecifies the port name you want to be assigned. To avoid assigning a portname that contains an unprintable character, specify the name in uppercaseletters and use only the following special characters: digits, period, underscore.Do not exceed 24 characters. See “Using Port Names as a Tool in SwitchingCommands” on page 577 for more information.

(portaddress)Specifies the addressable port that the port name is being assigned to.


Usagev When assigning a name to a port, consider whether you want that port to be

targeted by a generic name.v The Write command refreshes the data that could be displayed with the Display

Results command. Therefore, it is advisable to assign port names when I/Ooperations is started.

v If you are using the sample ISPF dialog, you can assign a switch device name toa switch. The name will be displayed in the dialog's display of that switchconfiguration in matrix format.– Either name the name of the switch in the SWCH Name field of the matrix, as

described in “A Sample Way to Modify a Switch Matrix” in IBM Tivoli SystemAutomation for z/OS User's Guide.

– Or, use the Write command to write a port name to the switch's control unitport (CUP). If you do not know the CUP address, you can find out with the

UNLOCK


DISPLAY DEV command. (For example, enter D D 0500 * for switch 500. Inthe displayed output, the CUP is to the right of CONTROL UNIT DATA.)

ExamplesW HA.CHP_88.CVC (C0) 100IHVC000I WRITE command successful

WRITE CU.F00 (D6) *IHVC000I WRITE command successful

┌────────────────┐│ I/O Operations │├────────────────┤│ SYSA │└─┬──┬───────────┘

│88│└┬─┘└─┐HA.CHP_88.CVC

┌───┬┴▼┬┬──┬───┐│ │C0││C1│ │ C0 is assigned a port name├──┐└──┘└──┘┌──┤│FB│ │D4│├──┘ 0100 └──┤├──┐ ┌──┤│EA│ │D6│├──┘ ┌──┐ └──┤│ │E0│ │└─────┴──┴─────┘

Figure 151. WRITE Command: Sample 1

┌─────┬──┬─────┐ ┌─────┬──┬─────┐│ │C0│ │ │ │C0│ │├──┐ └──┘ │ ├──┐ └──┘ ┌──┤│FB│ │ │FB│ │D4│├──┘ 0100 │ ├──┘ 0200 └──┤ Both D6 ports are assigned│ ┌──┤ │ ┌──┤ the same name│ CU.F00 ►│D6├─┐ │ CU.F00 ►│D6├─┐│ ┌──┐ └──┤ │ │ ┌──┐ └──┤ ││ │E0│ │ │ │ │E0│ │ │└─────┴──┴─────┘ │ └─────┴──┴─────┘ │

│ ┌────────────────┘┌─┴─┴─┐│ F00 │└─────┘

Figure 152. WRITE Command: Sample 2

WRITE


Part 4. SA z/OS Processor Operations Commands

This part describes SA z/OS processor operations commands in detail — theirpurpose, their format, and specifics of how to use them.

For general information about the SA z/OS commands, see IBM Tivoli SystemAutomation for z/OS User's Guide.


Chapter 6. Using Processor Operations Commands

The following Processor Operations commands are available:

General InformationProcessor operations commands consist of the following basic types:v Host-based commandsv Common commands

You generally issue processor operations commands at a NetView console from thefocal-point system. Alternatively, you can use an NMC, customized for SA z/OSexploitation to issue context-sensitive processor operations commands for targethardware or target system objects by supplementing the prepared commandtemplates.

Commands that start with ISQ are issued as shown in the syntax diagrams,starting with the command name.

Except for the common commands, processor operations commands whose namesdo not start with ISQ are preceded by the ISQSEND command.

Host-based Commands

The ISQSEND command sends the command to a target operating system forprocessing, using the processor operations connection to the processor hardware.Processor operations connections from the focal-point to the target hardware useeither the support element of the addressed target hardware or can be customizedto use an HMC, connected to the target hardware or can be customized to use anHMC, connected to the target hardware LAN for communication. Because theconnection to a target hardware and the operating systems running on thathardware is available at target system initialization time or system shutdown time,the ISQSEND command can be used to respond to IPL prompt messages or toanswer outstanding replies at system shutdown time.

The ISQSEND command addresses the operating system running on a processorhardware. The command ISQCCMD addresses the processor hardware or aprocessor hardware (logical partition). The processor hardware that can bemonitored and controlled by processor operations provide the OCF (operationscommand facility). This system management interface is called by ISQCCMD toperform hardware commands, for example, ACTIVATE or SYSRESET.

Other host-based processor operations commands control the start and the stop ofthe processor operations component of SA z/OS, invoke the status display system,control the monitoring of messages from the target systems, and allow the displayand modification of processor operations configuration information.


Common CommandsCommon commands are preceded by the ISQCCMD command (described in detailon page “ISQCCMD” on page 363). Use common commands in APIs wheneverpossible because they provide a single product image across various hardware andsoftware implementations. Regardless of the processor type or the operatingsystem running at your target system, the common command is the same. This canpotentially minimize the need for future modifications to your automation routinesshould you modify or upgrade your processor hardware or operating system type.

Ensemble CommandsEnsemble commands are preceded by the ISQECMD command (described in detailin Chapter 9, “Ensemble Commands,” on page 523). They provide a single operatorinterface and API for the System zEnterprise Blade Extension (zBX) and itsresources, like blades or virtual servers.

In a zEnterprise mainframe environment, up to 8 zEnterprise CPCs, with orwithout a zBX attachment can be defined as zEnterprise ensemble nodes. You canuse the ISQECMD to monitor, control, and automate the zBX resources in thisenvironment.

For the zEnterprise CPC itself, its logical partitions, and the operating systemsrunning in the LPARs, use the ISQCCMD common command and ISQSENDcommands for monitoring, control and automation.

PSM CommandsA special VM service machine, the ProcOps Service Machine (PSM) is required tomonitor and control VM guest systems, which are defined as ProcOps targetsystems. For problem determination and maintenance purposes a set of PSMcommands is provided.

If a VM user is logged on as PSM, these commands can be entered from the PSM'sterminal. Because a PSM normally runs in VM disconnected mode, a subset of thePSM commands can be routed from a ProcOps focal point NetView to the PSM,using command ISQXPSM. See “ISQXPSM” on page 435 for more informationabout the ISQXPSM command.


Chapter 7. Host-based Commands

ISQCCMDPurpose

The ISQCCMD command issues a processor operations common command(connection types 'SNMP' and 'TCPIP') or an SA z/OS LPAR managementcommand (connection type 'INTERNAL').

Syntax

►► ISQCCMD target_system_ProcOps_nametarget_hardware_name.LPAR_namegroup_namesubgroup_nametarget_hardware_name

common_command ►◄

Requirements

ProcOps command environmentv Processor operations must be active.v The addressed target system must be initialized unless the specified common

command is ACTIVATE (see “ACTIVATE” on page 523).

LPAR management environmentv SA z/OS must be fully initialized.v The processor hardware of the addressed target system or target hardware LPAR

must be configured for connection type INTERNAL in the SA z/OScustomization dialogs.

Parameters

target_system_ProcOps_nameIs the name of a target system in the ProcOps or LPAR managementenvironment.

target_hardware_name.LPAR_nameIs the identifier of the target system using its LPAR location on the specifiedtarget hardware. The period is used to separate the hardware from the LPARname.

group_nameIs the name of a valid group for ProcOps. The group must contain subgroupnames or target system names or both.

subgroup_nameIs the name of a valid subgroup for ProcOps. The subgroup must containtarget system names.

target_hardware_nameIs the name of the target hardware definition that is associated with the targetsystem.


common_commandRepresents the common command and any associated parameters to beprocessed. Multiple parameters are separated from each other by a blankspace.

Defaults

None.

Usage

Use the ISQCCMD command to issue a HW common command to the specifiedtarget object of a ProcOps or LPAR management environment.


ProcOps environmentv Target_hardware_name is valid for the common commands CBU, CCNTL,

CONDATA, CPCDATA, CTRLCONS, DEACTIVATE, GETCLUSTER, GETSDGR,GETSINFO, GETSSTAT, OOCOD, PROFILE, TCDATA, TCM, STPDATA, STP,and POWERMOD.

v Group_name or subgroup_name must be processor operations-enabled as definedin the SA z/OS customization dialogs to be a valid parameter.

LPAR management environmentv Target_hardware_name is valid for the common commands CCNTL, CONDATA,

CPCDATA, CTRLCONS, GETCLUSTER, GETSDGR, GETSINFO, GETSSTAT,PROFILE, TCDATA and STPDATA.

If a ISQCCMD common command parameter value is defined in mixed case on thetarget environment, you must use the 'NetVasis ISQCCMD' form to make sure thatthe data is passed without uppercase translation. Failure to do so may result inISQCCMD command errors.

Return Codes0 Command completed execution.8 Command processing has been rejected.12 Command processing has failed.32 The required environment for processor operations or LPAR Management does

not exist. The ISQCCMD command was not processed.

Using LPAR management and ProcOps for processors definedwith multiple connection protocols

With the SA configuration dialogs you can specify ProcOps SNMP andINTERNAL(BCPii) connections in a single processor entry. If both connections areconfigured as active, you can no longer use the ISQCCMD target_system_nameform for LPAR Management commands; instead you must use the ISQCCMDtarget_hardware_name.LPAR_name form.

Failure to do so will result in always executing the LPAR Management requestover the SNMP connection. If the system name is not defined to SA, messageISQ400I will be issued, informing you that the target system name is not known.

ISQCCMD


The dual protocol selection allows only using the target hardware names that haveto be specified for each protocol, as the differentiator between the protocols, butnot the target system name.

If you still want to use the target system name to differentiate between the LPARmanagement and ProcOps common commands for a single processor, you mustdefine separate processor entries and associate system entries to them through theSA dialogs. Define one processor-system set for the ProcOps SNMP connection,and the other set for the INTERNAL connection protocol.

Specifying an SNMP Timeout ValueThe default timeout value can be modified by setting the NetView task globalvariable ISQ.SNMP.WAIT to another value. The timeout format is hh:mm:ss, where'hh' represents the hours of the timeout, 'mm' the minutes and 'ss' of the period towait for hardware command completion before terminating ISQCCMD. The valueof the variable is checked each time before a ISQCCMD request is performed. Ifthe timeout variable is not set, or it has an invalid format, the default value of thecorresponding command is used.

In the following REXX example a timeout value of 8 minutes and 30 seconds is setprior calling ISQCCMD to perform an EXTERNAL interrupt hardware command:tme = ’ISQ.SNMP.WAIT’ // SNMP timout varname //mytgt = ’KEY6’ // our TGT system name //Interpret tme"= ’00:08:30’" // Set timeout to use //’GLOBALV PUTT ’tme // Update task variable//Say ’SNMP Timeout value set to ’Tglobal(tme) // Send info msg //’ISQCCMD ’mytgt’ EXTINT’ // External irpt to Sys//If RC > 0 Then Do // Error occured //End // ...more to add //Else Do // All went well //End // ...more to add //

Using Immediate ISQCCMD Common Command ResponsesThe immediate command responses cannot be captured with TRAP and WAIT inprograms that issue the ISQCCMD command. You can retrieve the immediate HWresponses by using a PIPE KEEP stage in your programs. Use 'ISQ.SNMP' as theKEEP name. Note that this command set is also the LPAR management commandset and that the KEEP ISQ.SNMP is valid for the LPAR management commands:v “CCNTL” on page 445v “CONDATA” on page 528v “CPCDATA” on page 451v “ICNTL” on page 469v “GETCLUSTER” on page 457v “GETIINFO” on page 459v “GETIPSW” on page 461v “GETITKN” on page 463v “GETILDI” on page 460v “GETISTAT” on page 462v “GETSDGR” on page 465v “GETSINFO” on page 466v “GETSSTAT” on page 468v “PROFILE” on page 487v “STPDATA” on page 514v “TCDATA” on page 518

ISQCCMD

Chapter 7. Host-based Commands 365

In the following REXX example, the maximum weight that is allowed for asystem's LPAR is retrieved and the HW response report containing thisinformation is displayed:mytgt = ’KEY4’ // our TGT system name //’ISQCCMD ’mytgt’ ICNTL CMD(READ) VAR(PWMX)’ // Max weight //If RC > 0 Then Do // Error occurred //End // ...more to add //Else Do // All went well //

’PIPE KEEP ISQ.SNMP | CONS ONLY’ // ...display HW report//End // ...more to add //

ISQCHKPurpose

The ISQCHK command checks whether processor operations is active.

Syntax

►► ISQCHKcommand_name

►◄

Requirements

None.

Parameters

command_nameIs the name of an automation procedure.

Defaults

None.

Usage

This command is intended for use in automation procedures to determine whetherprocessor operations is active. It provides a method of exiting from the automationprocedure cleanly when processor operations is not active. If you issue ISQCHKfrom an operator station and processor operations is running, you will receive noresponse.

The optional command_name parameter is placed in the text of the error messagegenerated when processor operations is not active. This identifies the automationprocedure that cannot run because processor operations is not active.

For example, place the following statements near the beginning of a processoroperations automation procedure that is written in REXX:’ISQCHK STARTALL’If RC<>0 then; Exit;

If you issue the STARTALL command when processor operations is not active, theerror message will inform you that “the STARTALL command” cannot be run untilprocessor operations is active, rather than simply informing you “the command”cannot be run until processor operations is active.

ISQCCMD


You can issue ISQCHK from an operator station task (OST) or from automation.


None.

Return Codes0 Processor operations is active.32 Processor operations is not active.

ISQCMONPurpose

The ISQCMON command causes the current NetView task to be added to orremoved from the list of tasks to receive processor operations communicationsmanagement messages.

Syntax

►► ISQCMONON

OFF►◄

Requirements

None.

Parameters

ON Adds the current NetView task to the list of tasks to receive processoroperations communications management messages. This is the default.

OFFRemoves the current NetView task from the list of tasks to receive processoroperations communications management messages.

Defaults

ISQCMON defaults to ON, adding you to the list.

Usage

You can issue ISQCMON when processor operations is not running to add ordelete yourself from the interested operators list for messages relating to thecontrol of processor operations-managed resources. These messages are notassociated with a specific target system.

Messages not associated with a specific target system are sent only to operatorswho used ISQCMON to place themselves on the interested operators list for suchmessages. These messages are not sent to the ISQXMON interested operator list.You are automatically added to the ISQCMON interested operator list when youissue the ISQSTART command (see “ISQSTART” on page 382).

See IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS User's Guide for further informationabout these two types of messages and interested operator lists.

ISQCHK



Do not issue this command with ISQEXEC.

Return Codes0 The ISQCMON command completed successfully.8 You used incorrect command syntax.

ISQECMDPurpose

The ISQECMD command shell issues a Processor operations ensemble command tomanage zEnterprise Ensemble and zBX (Blade Center Extension) resources.

Syntax

►► ISQECMD target_hardware_ProcOps_nameensemble_ProcOps_namereal_ensemble_name

ensemble_command ►◄

Requirementsv Processor operations must be active.v Processor operations must be in session with the ensemble HMC that has the

targeted resource in its scope. Session initialization to a ensemble HMC can beconfigured to happen at ISQSTART time automatically, or can be done whenprocessor operations is already active, using the ISQXIII command.

Parameters

target_hardware_ProcOps_name Is the name of a defined target hardware. It must be selected as member inan ensemble definition. For a target hardware only membership to a singleensemble is supported.

ensemble_ProcOps_nameIs the entry name of an ensemble definition in the SA z/OS policy database. The configuration dialogs enforce that the name is unique and inuppercase.

real_ensemble_nameEnsemble name as defined using an ensemble HMC. See “Restrictions andLimitations” on page 369 for additional information.

ensemble_commandRepresents the actual ensemble command and any associated parameter tobe processed. Multiple parameters are separated from each other by ablank space.

Defaults

None.

ISQCMON


Usage

Use the ISQECMD command to issue an ensemble command to the specified targetensemble. The individual ensemble command may address additional zBXresources that can be managed over the ensemble HMC connection used.

Ensemble commands can be grouped in the following categories:v zBX resource notification subscriptionv zBX resource discoveryv zBX resource query and list andv zBX resource management

For Online Help information about the available ensemble commands you can usethe ISQHELP interface and select: E Access Help panels for ProcOps EnsembleCommands

Restrictions and Limitationsv If a ISQECMD command target or ensemble command parameter value is

defined in mixed case on the ensemble zBX environment, you must use the'NetVasis ISQECMD' form to make sure that the data is passed withoutuppercase translation to the case-sensitive ensemble zBX environment. Failure todo so may result in ISQECMD command or ensemble command errors.

v In the ensemble definitions of the System Automation policy, you must definethe real ensemble name exactly as it is defined on the HMC. You cannot use thereal ensemble name as ISQECMD target parameter if this name contains anyblanks.

v If you have multiple sessions to different ensemble HMCs active on a processoroperations FP domain and these HMCs are located in different HW LANenvironments, duplicate real ensemble names may be present. The ISQECMDdoes not recognize this. Always the first occurrence of the real ensemble namesatisfies the internal name search.

Return Codes0 Command completed execution successfully.8 The command syntax is not correct.12 Command failed.32 The processor operations environment does not exist. The ISQECMD command

was not processed.

Specifying a Timeout ValueThe default timeout value can be modified by setting the NetView task globalvariable ISQ.ZBX.WAIT to another value. The timeout format is hh:mm:ss, where'hh' represents the hours of the timeout, 'mm' the minutes and 'ss' the seconds ofthe period to wait for hardware command completion before terminatingISQECMD. The value of the variable is checked each time before a ISQECMDcommand request is performed. If the timeout variable is not set, or it has aninvalid format, the default value of the corresponding command is used.

In the following REXX example a timeout value of 4 minutes and 30 seconds is setprior calling ISQECMD to perform a DISCOVERY of all virtual servers in thisensemble domain.tme = ’ISQ.ZBX.WAIT’ // zBX timout varname //myens = ’R35ZBX’ // our ENS name //’PIPE LIT /00:04:30/ | VAR (TASK) ’tme // Our Tgbl timeout //

ISQECMD


Say ’zBX Timeout value set to ’Tglobal(tme) // Send info msg //’ISQECMD ’myens’ DISCOVERY VS’ // Do the discovery //If RC > 0 Then Do // Error occured //End // ...more to add //Else Do // All went well //End // ...more to add //

Using ISQECMD Ensemble Command ResponsesImmediate command responses cannot be captured with TRAP and WAIT inprograms that issue the ISQECMD. You can retrieve the immediate responses byusing a PIPE KEEP stage in your programs. Use 'ISQ.ZBX' as the KEEP name. Allensemble commands support this PIPE KEEP. In the following REXX example, ablade extension summary is requested from the addressed ensemble. If theinformation is available, it is displayed using the 'ISQ.ZBX' data KEEP.myens = ’R35ZBX’ // our ensemble //’ISQECMD ’myens’ ZBXDATA’ // Get a ZBX Summary //If RC > 0 Then Do // Error occurred //End // ..more to add //Else Do // All went well //’PIPE KEEP ISQ.ZBX | CONS ONLY’ // ..display ZBX report//

End // ..more to add //

If you issue a ISQECMD from the NetView console, the immediate commandresponses are returned as ISQ800I messages in the netlog. If you used theISQXMON command to add yourself to the interested operator list for messagesand notifications from the targeted ensemble, you will receive copies of thesemessages as ISQ801I messages on the screen.

Asynchronous ensemble command responses (for example, ACTIVATE) will notprovide the complete response in the 'ISQ.ZBX' PIPE KEEP. In order to see theasynchronous parts of an ensemble command response you must have subscribedyour operator/task to receive at least JOB and STATUS notifications from theensemble object (for example, VS, BL). At ensemble connection initialization time,the processor operations ISQXIII command subscribes the ensemble target controltask (ISQET*) assigned to the targeted ensemble to receive JOB and STATUSnotifications automatically. Use the SUBSCRIBE/UNSUBSCRIBE ensemblecommands to modify the processor operations standard subscriptions for theensemble notifications.

You can find notifications as ISQ800I messages in the netlog. If you want to seecopies of the notification messages on your NetView screen, use the ISQXMONcommand to add your operator/task as an interested operator for messages andnotifications from the ensemble.

The following ensemble commands are implemented as asynchronous commands:ACTIVATE, DEACTIVATE.

Note, that the ISQECMD command shell issues message ISQ856I as its finalmessage. There may be notification messages outstanding, related to a justexecuted asynchronous command, arriving after the ISQECMD commandcompleted.

ISQECMD


ISQEXECPurpose

The ISQEXEC command sends a command to a target control task to be processed.Commands sent by ISQEXEC are processed by the target control task in the orderin which they are presented.

Syntax

►► ISQEXEC target_system_name SCtarget_hardware_name Starget_ensemble_name

command_name►◄

Requirements

The requirements for this command to complete successfully are:v Processor operations must be active.v The target entity specified with target_system_name or target_ensemble_name must

be initialized. If target_ensemble_name was specified, at least one target systemrunning on that hardware must be initialized.

Parameters

target_system_nameSpecifies the name of the target system.

SC Specifies the active system console connection.

target_hardware_nameSpecifies the name of the target hardware (processor).

S Specifies the active system console connection.

target_ensemble_nameSpecifies the name of the target ensemble. (zEnterprise ensemble for zBXmanagement)

commandIs the name of the user automation command to be processed.

Defaults

None.

Usage

The main advantage of the ISQEXEC command is that it frees the operator stationtask (OST) for other work because commands issued by ISQEXEC are processed bya target control task rather than in the OST.

You may require that a set of commands to a target connection are processed in theorder in which the commands are presented (that is, serially). ISQEXEC isprocessed by a target control task, which ensures that the commands are processedin the correct order. A set of commands to be processed serially can be packaged inan automation procedure and be called by the ISQEXEC command, for example:ISQEXEC target_system_name console_connection exec_name exec_operands

ISQEXEC


You can write automation procedures that issue ISQSEND commands. ISQSENDsends commands to a target system. You can enter the ISQEXEC command in theNCCF command line to cause an automation procedure to be processed.


The following restrictions or limitations apply to this command:v Do not issue ISQXDST, ISQHELP, or ISQXOPT with ISQEXEC.v Do not issue any user automation with ISQEXEC that results in a full-screen

panel.v ISQEXEC does not lock a target console connection; the serialized commands

can be interrupted by commands from other tasks. See “Usage” on page 371.

Return Codes0 The ISQEXEC command completed successfully and it caused the command to

be queued to a target control task.8 The command syntax is not correct.10 The specified target system was not initialized.12 An internal error occurred.32 The processor operations environment does not exist. The ISQEXEC command

was not processed.

ISQHELPPurpose

The ISQHELP command provides help on using processor operations commands.

Syntax

►► ISQHELPISQ

command_nameISQCCMD

common_command_nameISQECMD

ensemble_command_name

►◄

Requirements

The NetView program must be running for this command to complete successfully.

Parameters

ISQIndicates the processor operations Main Help Panel is being requested. Notspecifying any parameters with the ISQHELP command also presents theprocessor operations Main Help Panel.

command_nameIs the name of any parameter with which you need help. This can be aprocessor operations host-based or any parameter valid to the NetView helpprocessor.

ISQCCMDIndicates that the variable following it is the name of a common command.

ISQEXEC


|

|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||

|

|

common_command_nameIs the name of the common command for which you want help; only thefirst 3 characters of the common command need to be specified.

ISQECMDIndicates that the variable following it is the name of an ensemble command.

ensemble_command_nameIs the name of the ensemble command for which you want help.

Defaults

The processor operations Main Help Panel.

Usage

The ISQHELP command does not require the processor operations environment.

Issue the ISQHELP command to obtain high-level information about processoroperations, to obtain help about the syntax of a processor operations command, toobtain help with the output generated by the command, or to see examples ofusing the command.

See IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS User's Guide for further information onthe ISQHELP command and for a description of other help functions.


The ISQHELP command cannot be issued from a program.

Return Codes

Return codes are not applicable because the ISQHELP command cannot be issuedfrom a program.

ISQIPSWTPurpose

The ISQIPSWT command is used to switch IP addresses stored in the processoroperations variables:

SEADDRThe IP address or host name of the SE (or HMC) that the target hardware isconnected to. This value is used by processor operations as the primaryinformation to connect to the target hardware.

HMCADDRThe IP address or host name that is used by processor operations as alternateinformation to connect to the target hardware.

This command can be used, for example, to switch to the secondary SE networkadapter card if the connection to the primary adapter card of the SE fails.

Syntax

ISQHELP


||

||

►►FORCE(NO)

ISQIPSWT target-hardware-nameFORCE(YES)

►◄

Requirements

Processor operations must be active.

For the target hardware, both variables SEADDR and HMCADDR must be set(that is, not be blank).

Parameters

target-hardware-nameIs the name of the target hardware.

FORCE

FORCE(NO)Check the connection to SEADDR; switch IP addresses only if theconnection to SEADDR fails.

FORCE(YES)Switch IP addresses even if the current SEADDR can still be connected.

Defaults

If no FORCE parameter is specified, FORCE(NO) is assumed by the command.

Usage

It is assumed that the processor operations variable HMCADDR contains the IPaddress or host name of the secondary network adapter card of the SE.

Use the ISQIPSWT command to switch the connection address that is used toconnect to the target hardware. By default, processor operations will use the valuethat is stored in the variable SEADDR to connect to the target hardware. Uponexecution, the command will:v Close active systems running on the target hardwarev If the target hardware was using a connection to a HMC: check if other target

hardware entities use the same connection (that is, the same IP address); close allactive systems for these target hardware entities, as well

v Check that the target hardware has a connection status of 'NOT_CONNECTED'v Switch values between processor operations variables SEADDR and HMCADDRv Re-start the previously closed systems using the alternate IP addressv If the target hardware was using a connection to a HMC: for all target hardware

entities that used the same IP address, switch values between processoroperations variables SEADDR and HMCADDR for each target hardware entityand try to restart all previously closed target systems.

In order to restore the original settings, simply execute ISQIPSWT command again.

ISQIPSWT


|||

|

||||


The command can be executed only for target hardware connected using SNMP.

The specified target hardware name must be defined for processor operations.

If HMCADDR contains the IP address of a HMC, ISQIPSWT will be executed onlyif no active connection to that IP address exists for another target hardware usingthe same IP address.

Return Codes0 Command executed successfully.4 Target hardware name blank or invalid.5 Invalid FORCE option specified.6 Processor operations variable SEADDR or HMCADDR is (or both are) blank.7 Alternate IP address cannot use an already active HMC connection of one or

more Target Hardware using the same HMC IP address.8 Error occurred retrieving a processor operations variable.9 Connection to SEADDR still active and FORCE(YES) not specified.10 Connection test to alternate address (HMCADDR) failed.11 IP address mismatch: this happens if after a connection start, the value of

processor operations variable SEADDR was changed using ISQVARS commoncommand.

12 Target hardware name is not SNMP connected.13 Target hardware still has the status 'CONNECTED' after closure of all active

target systems.14 Reactivate of systems failed.16 Initialize pending for some target systems of the target hardware.32 Processor operations not started or active.

ISQOVRDPurpose

The ISQOVRD command unconditionally removes an entity lock. Entities can beeither target system names together with a console designator or ensemble names.

Syntax

►► ISQOVRD target_system_ProcOps_name OCSC

target_hardware_name Sensemble_ProcOps_name

►◄

Requirements

The requirements for this command to complete successfully are:v The use of this command usually requires special authorization.v Processor operations must be active.v The target_system_ProcOps_name syntax requires that the addressed target system

be initialized.

ISQIPSWT


|||

|||

||||

|||

||

Parameters

target_system_ProcOps_nameIs the name of the target system.

OC Specifies the active operator console (not valid for the couplingfacility).

SC Specifies the active system console

target_hardware_nameIs the name of the target hardware.

S Specifies the active system console.

ensemble_ProcOps_nameIs the ProcOps name of a zBX ensemble.

Defaults

None.

Usage

The ISQOVRD command removes the entity lock established by any command orautomation procedure.

This command is intended to be used for emergencies only. Overriding a reservecan cause processing to fail, with unpredictable results.


The following restrictions or limitations apply to this command:v This command does not establish an entity lock for the issuing operator, it

simply removes the lock on the entity.v This command does not interrupt or cancel any command or automation

procedure currently running.

Return Codes0 The ISQOVRD command completed successfully; the lock has been removed.4 You used syntax that is not valid, specified an entity name that is not valid, or

specified a target system that is not initialized.8 A NetView CNMLOCK service problem occurred.32 The processor operations environment does not exist; the ISQOVRD command

was not processed.

ISQROUTEPurpose

The ISQROUTE command sends a command to a control task to be processed.Commands sent by ISQROUTE are processed by the control task in the order inwhich they are presented.

Syntax

►► ISQROUTE entity_name command_name ►◄

ISQOVRD


System environment

The requirements for this command to complete successfully are:v Processor operations must be active.

Parameters

entity_name

Target hardware name:Specifies the name of the target hardware.

Target system name:Specifies the name of the target system.

Ensemble name:Specifies the name of the ensemble.

commandIs the name of the user automation command to be processed.

Defaults

None.

Usage

The main advantage of the ISQROUTE command is that it frees the operatorstation task (OST) for other work because commands issued by ISQROUTE areprocessed by a processor operations control task rather than in the OST.

This is similar to the ISQEXEC command, however ISQROUTE accepts targetsystem, target hardware, or ensemble names for control task selection. In addition,the entity needs not to be in a required status as this is the case for ISQEXEC,where target systems must have a status of INITIALIZED.

You can require that a set of commands to a target entity are processed in theorder in which the commands are presented (that is, serially). ISQROUTE isprocessed by a control task, which ensures that the commands are processed in thecorrect order. A set of commands to be processed serially can be packaged in anautomation procedure and be called by the ISQROUTE command, for example:ISQROUTE target_system_name exec_name exec_operands

You can write automation procedures that issue ISQSEND commands. ISQSENDsends commands to a target system. You can enter the ISQROUTE command in theNCCF command line to cause an automation procedure to be processed.

If the entity_name of the ISQROUTE command is a target system name, thecommand assigned to ISQROUTE is executed using the processor operationscontrol task assigned to the target hardware. The target system is running on toensure command serialization.


The following restrictions or limitations apply to this command:v Do not issue ISQXDST, ISQHELP, or ISQXOPT with ISQROUTEv Do not issue any user automation with ISQROUTE that results in a full-screen

panel.

ISQROUTE


||||

v ISQROUTE does not lock a target console connection; the serialized commandscan be interrupted by commands from other tasks. See “Usage” on page 377.

Return Codes0 The ISQROUTE command completed successfully and it caused the command

to be queued to a control task.8 The command syntax is not correct or entity name is not defined.12 An internal error occurred.32 The processor operations environment does not exist. The ISQROUTE

command was not processed.

ISQSENDPurpose

The ISQSEND command sends a command to a target system for execution, usingthe processor operations target hardware connection and the console integrationfacility.

Note: This is an Application Programming Interface.

Syntax

►►NETVASIS

ISQSEND target_system_ProcOps_nametarget_hwname.Lparname

OCSC

command ►◄

Requirements

The requirements for this command to complete successfully are:v Processor operations must be active.v The addressed target system connection must have been initialized.

Parameters

NETVASISPrefix the ISQSEND command with NETVASIS if you want to pass thecommand text in lower or mixed case.

target_system_ProcOps_nameThe name of the target system.

target_hwname.LparnameThe target hardware name and logical partition name, separated by a period.This is an alternative to the target system name notation, for all operatingsystems running on a target hardware activated in LPAR mode.

OC Specifies the active operator console function as the target for an operatingsystem command.

SC Specifies the active system console function as the target for an operatingmanagement command.

commandThe command that is to be processed and any parameters that are associatedwith that command. Use the ISQSEND command to send operating system

ISQROUTE


commands or operations management commands. If you want to pass thecommand text in lower or mixed case, prefix the ISQSEND command withNETVASIS.

Note that if you omit the command parameter, a nullstring is sent to thehardware, which is received and may be acknowledged by the target operatingsystem or hardware. See your hardware or operating system documentationfor more information.

Operating System CommandsThis ISQSEND command type is valid for all ProcOps connections. Thefollowing operating systems are supported: MVS (z/OS), VM (z/VM),VSE (z/VSE®), LINUX (Linux on System z), KVMIBM (a special Linuxon z Systems distribution from IBM), ZAPP (System z appliances, likezAware), and CF (Coupling Facility Control Code). In addition,Standalone Utility programs running on System z hardware, such asSADump (Standalone Dump).

Operations Management CommandsThis type of ISQSEND commands is valid only for ProcOps TCPIPconnections. For ProcOps SNMP connections, ISQCCMD must be usedto perform Operations Management functions.

Operations management commands using TCPIP means that VM/CPcommands can be sent to the virtual machine of a ProcOps targetsystem, which is running as a VM guest. Only CP Query commandsare supported. For all other operations management functions, use theISQCCMD command.

Defaults

None.

Usage

For target systems running on processors supported by processor operations,operating system commands can be entered through ISQSEND. The commands aretransmitted to the operating system through console integration, an interfaceprovided by the operating system and the processor hardware support element(SE) or hardware management console (HMC).


The following restrictions or limitations apply to this command:v With SA z/OS, the ISQSEND command is the only way to send data to the

operating system of a target through the console integration connection. Theinformation that is passed to the target system is not interpreted by SA z/OS.

v Successful ISQSEND completion does not indicate successful completion of thecommand itself. It only indicates that the command was successfully deliveredto the receiver. Your automation routines should interpret the asynchronousmessage responses of the command to determine the command executionresults.

v Note that the operating systems supporting console integration may havecommands to activate or deactivate this function, or may provide facilities andcommands to prevent response messages from being routed to console

ISQSEND


integration. For MVS operating systems, the VARY CN(*),DEACTIVATE and VARYCN(*),ACTIVATE commands are available for the deactivation and reactivation ofconsole integration.

Return Codes0 The ISQSEND command completed successfully and the message was sent.8 Either the message was not sent, the message was sent with errors, or the

specified target system was not initialized.32 The processor operations environment does not exist. The ISQSEND command

was not processed.

Specifying an SNMP Timeout ValueFor target hardware connections of type SNMP, the default timeout value of oneminute can be modified by setting the NetView task global variableISQ.SNMP.WAIT to another value. The timeout format is hh:mm:ss, where 'hh'represents the hours of the timeout, 'mm' the minutes and 'ss' the seconds of theperiod to wait for HW command completion before terminating ISQSEND. Thevalue of the variable is checked each time a ISQSEND request for an SNMPconnected target system is performed. If the timeout variable is not set, or it has aninvalid format, the default value of one minute is used.

In the following REXX example a timeout value of 8 minutes and 30 seconds is setprior calling ISQSEND:tme = ’ISQ.SNMP.WAIT’ // SNMP timout varname //mytgt = ’KEY6’ // our TGT system name //Interpret tme"= ’00:08:30’" // Set timeout to use //’GLOBALV PUTT ’tme // Update task variable//Say ’SNMP Timeout value set to ’Tglobal(tme) // Send msg //’ISQSEND ’mytgt’ D T’ // External irpt to Sys//If RC > 0 Then Do // Error occured //End // ...more to add //Else Do // All went well //End // ...more to add //

ISQSNDH

Purpose

The ISQSNDH command sends a high priority command to a target system forexecution, using the processor operations target hardware connection and consoleintegration facility.

Note: This is an Application Programming Interface.

Syntax

►►NETVASIS

ISQSNDH target_system_ProcOps_nametarget_hwname.Lpar_name

OCcommand

►◄

Requirements

The requirements for this command to complete successfully are:v Processor operations must be active.v The addressed target system connection must have been initialized.

ISQSEND


|

|

|||

|

|

||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||

|

|

|

|

|

Parameters

NETVASISPrefix the ISQSEND command with NETVASIS if you want to pass thecommand text in lower or mixed case.

target_system_ProcOps_nameThe name of the target system.

target_hwname.Lpar_nameThe target hardware name and logical partition name, separated by a period.This is an alternative to the target system name notation, for all operatingsystems running on a target hardware activated in LPAR mode.

OC Specifies the active operator console as the target for an operating systemcommand.

commandIs the command to be processed and any parameters that are associated withthat command. Use the ISQSNDH command to send operating systemcommands or operations management commands with priority flag set.

If you want to pass the command text in lower or mixed case, prefix theISQSNDH command with NETVASIS.

Note that if you omit the command parameter, a nullstring is sent to thehardware, which is received and may be acknowledged by the target operatingsystem or hardware. See your hardware or operating system documentationfor more information.

Defaults

None.

Usage

For target systems running on processors supported by processor operations,operating system commands can be entered through ISQSNDH. The commands aretransmitted to the operating system through console integration, an interfaceprovided by the operating system and the processor hardware support element(SE) or hardware management console (HMC).

Note: This command is supposed to be used to reply to critical Operating Systemmessages (reply ID of Zero). In order to help to detect such messages, thecorresponding ISQ900I message contains console identifier 'OCP' instead of 'OC',for example,ISQ900I CPC1.LPAR1 OCP *00 IEAxxxx <message text>

Specifying an SNMP Timeout Value:

The default timeout value of one minute can be modified by setting the NetViewglobal task variable ISQ.SNMP.WAIT to another value. The timeout format ishh:mm:ss, where 'hh' represents the hours of the timeout, 'mm' the minutes and 'ss'the seconds of the period to wait for HW command completion before terminatingISQSNDH. The value of the variable is checked each time a ISQSNDH request foran SNMP connected target system is performed. If the timeout variable is not set,or it has an invalid format, the default value of one minute is used.

ISQSNDH


|

|||

||

||||

|||

||||

||

||||

|

|

|

|||||

||||

|

|

|||||||


The following restrictions or limitations apply to this command:v The ISQSNDH command is supported for connection type SNMP only.v Successful ISQSNDH completion does not indicate successful completion of the

command itself. It only indicates that the command was successfully deliveredto the receiver. Your automation routines should interpret the asynchronousmessage responses of the command to determine the command executionresults.

v Note that the operating systems supporting console integration may havecommands to activate or deactivate this function, or may provide facilities andcommands to prevent response messages from being routed to consoleintegration. For MVS operating systems, the "VARY CN(*),DEACTIVATE" and"VARY CN(*),ACTIVATE" commands are available for the deactivation andreactivation of console integration.

Return Codes

0 The ISQSNDH command completed successfully and the message was sent.

8 Either the message was not sent, the message was sent with errors, or thespecified target system was not initialized or has a THW connection pathstatus of SUSPENDED.

32 The processor operations environment does not exist. The ISQSNDH commandwas not processed.

ISQSTARTPurpose

The ISQSTART command starts processor operations. It establishes the processoroperations environment with the NetView program and permits the control oftarget resources with processor operations commands. Such resources are: Targetsystems or virtual systems, mainframe processors or virtual machines, andzEnterprise BladeCenter Extensions. This command can be issued from anautomation routine.

Syntax

►► ISQSTARTACF DEBUGACFCLEANOptionfile

►◄

Requirements

If you specify:v With parameter ACF or ACFCLEAN, SA z/OS initialization must be complete

before ISQSTART can be usedv With the Optionfile parameter, the NetView program must have at least read

authority to the dataset

You may need special authorization to use this command.

ISQSNDH


|

|

|

|||||

||||||

|

||

||||

|||

|

Parameters

ACFIf specified, processor operations is started, taking the required configurationinformation from the current active automation control file (ACF).

ACFCLEANIf specified, the INGCLEAN command is called to perform a clean up of thein-storage data model on the processor operations focal point NetView domain,before the ISQSTART ACF processing starts.

The processor operations configuration information is stored in ACF entrytypes like: PROCESSOR, SYSTEM, AOF?ENS, and GROUP. Since none of theseentry types is associated with type SUBSYSTEM, a delete or rename of aprocessor operations related ACF entry will not result in an automatic cleanupof the no longer valid associated global variables during a System Automationrefresh.

This can cause problems or ISQSTART time for processor operations runtime,especially when no longer available HW resources are still present in theprocessor operations data model.

Using the INGCLEAN before starting processor operations is one way to avoidsuch problems.

OptionfileAn additional debug or configuration source. This parameter is for IBM Servicesupport only.

DEBUGProvides additional diagnostics that are written to the NetView log.

Defaults

There are no defaults for this command when processor operations is first started:you must specify the ACF, ACFCLEAN or Optionfile parameter. When restarting,the command defaults to the parameter used for the previous initial start.

Usage

To perform an initial start, use the ACF or ACFCLEAN parameter. For a restart(warmstart), this parameter is not needed.

An initial start loads the processor operations configuration data from the activeACF and starts all processor operations tasks to establish the processor operationstask environment. The configuration data also indicates which, if any, target systemor ensemble connection should be initialized (not the IPL process).

The initial start with the ACF parameter takes the available configuration data forprocessor operations from the loaded ACF to build the processor operationsruntime environment. In case processor operations configuration data was changedusing the configuration dialogs and a new ACF file was built, you first refresh theACF on the processor operations FP system with the new user configuration,before this new configuration data is available for processor operations. Use theISQSTOP command to processor operations before issuing the ISQSTART ACF orISQSTART ACFCLEAN command to activate the changes in the ProcOps runtimeenvironment.

ISQSTART


You usually perform a restart after a processor operations task has failed to restartall processor operations tasks to reestablish the processor operations taskingenvironment. If the processor operations environment has not already beenestablished by a previous ISQSTART command that specified ACF/ACFCLEAN orOptionfile, the restart will fail.

When you issue ISQSTART, it adds you to the interested operators list that isaccessed by the ISQCMON command. This list is for messages that are notassociated with a specific target system. The messages relate to the control ofprocessor operations-managed resources.


The following restrictions or limitations apply to this command:v If the ACF or ACFCLEAN start parameters are used, SA z/OS on the processor

operations focal point system must be fully initialized, otherwise ISQSTARTprocessing will fail.Note that this restriction also applies if ISQSTART is issued while an ACFREFRESH is in progress on the processor operations focal point system.

v A restart re-establishes the previous configuration. The processor operationsenvironment must exist (an initial start must have already been performed)before a restart can be performed.

v Processor operations must be stopped before an initial start can be performed.v The XML_config_file name cannot be DEBUG.v The specified XML_config_file must be a sequential data set.

Return Codes0 Command accepted.4 You used incorrect syntax.8 An internal command error occurred.

ISQSTOPPurpose

The ISQSTOP command stops processor operations. It can be issued in anautomation routine.

Syntax

►► ISQSTOPDEBUG

►◄

Requirements

You may require special authorization to use this command.


Parameters

DEBUGProvides additional diagnostics, which are written to the NetView log.

ISQSTART


Defaults

None.

Usage

The ISQSTOP command immediately stops the processor operations environmentand all processor operations tasks. If you do not have the shutdown of processoroperations automated via SA z/OS, issue ISQSTOP and ISQSTART as part ofnormal shutdown procedures to restart failed processor operations tasks or toestablish a new operating environment (see the “ISQSTART” on page 382command).


The ISQSTOP command does not shut down target systems.

All current processor operations status information is lost when you issueISQSTOP. You should exit any displays presented by the ISQXDST, or ISQXOPTcommands or ProcOps SDF Interface panels showing LPARs, before stoppingprocessor operations.

Return Codes0 The ISQSTOP command completed successfully.4 You used incorrect syntax.8 An internal command error occurred.32 The processor operations environment does not exist; the ISQSTOP command

was not processed.

ISQVARSPurpose

The ISQVARS command lets you view and change certain SA z/OS values. Table 3on page 392 identifies the keywords for the values you can view or change withthe ISQVARS command.

Syntax

►► ISQVARS GETGETLGETTGETC

TGT target_system_ProcOps_nameOCF ocf_nameTHW target_hardware_nameLUN lunameENS target_ProcOps_ensembleGRP group_name

subgroup_name

keyword ►

► MSGvariable

►◄

►► ISQVARS PUTPUTLPUTTPUTC

TGT target_system_ProcOps_nameTHW target_hardware_nameLUN lunameENS target_ProcOps_ensembleGRP group_name

subgroup_name

keyword ►

ISQSTOP


► ‘value’variable

►◄

►► ISQVARS GETGETLGETTGETC

LIST TGTLISTTHWLISTGRPLISTSBGLISTENSLIST

variable ►◄

Requirements


Parameters

GETSpecifies that you want to retrieve the value of a SA z/OS keyword to bedisplayed or to be placed into a specified NetView local variable.

GETLSpecifies that you want to retrieve the value of a SA z/OS keyword to bedisplayed or to be placed into a specified NetView local variable. This keywordis the same as the GET keyword. This is the default if you specify GET.

GETTSpecifies that you want to retrieve the value of a SA z/OS keyword to bedisplayed or to be placed into a specified NetView task variable.

GETCSpecifies that you want to retrieve the value of a SA z/OS keyword to bedisplayed or to be placed into a specified NetView common variable.

TGTIndicates that the variable following it is the name of the target system.


OCFIndicates that the variable following it is the name of the target system’ssecondary operations command facility (OCF). A secondary OCF is usedon an OCF-based processor in LPAR mode to represent a logical partitionand to process commands for that CPC image (logical partition). The nameof the secondary OCF is specified on the “Target System Description”panel for OCF-based processors in the configuration dialogs. On aSystem/390® microprocessor cluster, the name of the secondary OCF is thesame as the name of the logical partition and of the Image profile used toactivate the partition.

ocf_nameIs the name of the target system’s secondary OCF.

THWIndicates that the variable following it is the name of the target hardware.


LUNIndicates that the variable following it is the logical unit name.

ISQVARS


lunameIs the logical unit name.

GRPIndicates that the variable following is a group or subgroup name.

group_nameIs the name of the group of which the subgroup is a member.

subgroup_nameIs the name of the subgroup of which the target system is a member.

ENSIndicates that the variable following it is the name of an ensemble.

target_ProcOps_ensembleIs the name of the ensemble.

keywordIs the name of the SA z/OS value to be retrieved or set. Table 3 on page 392identifies the SA z/OS values that can be read or changed by the ISQVARScommand.

MSGIndicates the SA z/OS value is to be displayed on the console as line-modeoutput.

variableIs the name of the NetView variable whose value is to be set to that of thespecified SA z/OS keyword. Local variable names are most commonly usedwhen values are being read and written from within automation procedures.The names of the SA z/OS values are defined in Table 3 on page 392.

PUTSpecifies that you want to set the value of a SA z/OS keyword to either thecurrent value of a specified NetView local variable or to a value specified inthe command string.

PUTLSpecifies that you want to set the value of a SA z/OS keyword to either thecurrent value of a specified NetView local variable or to a value specified inthe command string. This keyword is the same as the PUT keyword. This isthe default if you specify PUT.

PUTTSpecifies that you want to set the value of a SA z/OS keyword to either thecurrent value of a specified NetView task variable or to a value specified in thecommand string.

PUTCSpecifies that you want to set the value of a SA z/OS keyword to either thecurrent value of a specified NetView common variable or to a value specifiedin the command string.

TGTIndicates that the variable following it is the name of the target system.


THWIndicates that the variable following it is the name of the target hardware.

ISQVARS



LUNIndicates that the variable following it is the logical unit name.

lunameIs the logical unit name.

GRPIndicates that the variable following is a group or subgroup name.

group_nameIs the name of the group of which the subgroup is a member.

subgroup_nameIs the name of the subgroup of which the target system is a member.

ENSIndicates that the variable following it is the name of an ensemble.

target_ProcOps_ensembleIs the name of the ensemble.

keywordIs the name of the SA z/OS keyword whose value is to be retrieved or set.Table 3 on page 392 identifies the values that can be read or changed by theISQVARS command.

'value'Is the value to be assigned to the SA z/OS keyword. The straight singlequotation marks are required.

variableIs the name of the NetView variable which contains the value to which theSA z/OS keyword is to be set (PUT). Local variable names are mostcommonly used when SA z/OS values are being read and written from withinautomation procedures. The keywords used for SA z/OS values are defined inTable 3 on page 392.

LISTIndicates the keyword following it identifies which list is being referenced.This keyword is valid from automation programming only.

TGTLISTRefers to the list of defined target system names.

THWLISTRefers to the list of defined target hardware names.

GRPLISTRefers to the list of defined target group names.

SBGLISTRefers to the list of defined target subgroup names.

ENSLISTRefers to the list of defined target ensemble names.

variableIs the name of the NetView variable whose value is to be set to that of thespecified SA z/OS keyword. Local variable names are most commonly usedwhen values are being read and written from within automation procedures.The names of the SA z/OS values are defined in Table 3 on page 392.

ISQVARS


Defaults

None.

Usage

There are several ways to specify the desired information:

Target system nameget|put TGT target_system_ProcOps_name keyword...

Target hardware nameget|put THW target_hardware_name keyword...

Group nameget|put GRP group_name keyword...

Subgroup nameget|put GRP subgroup_name keyword...

LU nameget|put LUN luname keyword...

Ensemble nameget|put ENS ensemble_name keyword...

OCF nameget OCF ocf_name keyword...

Return a listget LIST keyword...

You can display (on the NetView console) the value of a NetView variable byusing the MSG keyword.

The ISQVARS command allows access to SA z/OS values. Values relating to targetsystems or ports require the name of the component (target system processoroperations name or port name). The keyword is a processor operations-definedcharacter string identifying the name of the processor operations value.

If issued from a program, a NetView variable is specified to contain the SA z/OSvalue.v In the GET case, the specified NetView variable (variable) is set to the specified

SA z/OS value (keyword).v In the PUT case, the specified SA z/OS value is set to the current value of the

specified NetView variable, or to the value specified within straight singlequotation marks.

For example, assume target system names system1, system2, and system3 have beendefined. The following command:ISQVARS GET LIST TGTLIST TARGETS

will place the following character string into the NetView local variable targets:system1 system2 system3


The following restrictions or limitations apply to this command:

ISQVARS


v SA z/OS values are defined through the use of configuration panels duringinstallation. Not all of these values can be changed by the ISQVARS command.Table 3 on page 392 identifies the SA z/OS values that can be changed by theISQVARS command.

v Any changes you make to a SA z/OS value with the ISQVARS commandremain in effect only for the current session of SA z/OS. Stopping and thenstarting SA z/OS resets the variables.

v GET LIST is valid only from within automation programming. You cannot issueGET LIST from an OST.

v GET LIST has the following length restrictions:– The NetView variable is restricted to 32767 bytes when a REXX command

processor calls the ISQVARS command using the NetView local variable form(GET|GETL LIST). The ISQVARS command truncates the data to this lengthif necessary.

– The NetView variable is restricted to 255 bytes when a REXX commandprocessor, high-level language, or NetView command list calls the ISQVARScommand using the NetView task variable form or NetView common variableform (GETT|GETC LIST). The ISQVARS command truncates the data to thislength if necessary.

v Updates for 'Path Poll Frequency' (pollfreq) or 'Path Poll Retries' (pollrtry) haveno impact on the polling task itself; to effectively change these values, theupdate must be performed in the SA z/OS Customization Dialog ProcessorInformation panel (AOFGCPD0); afterwards, rebuild and reload the automationcontrol file and restart processor operations.

Caution: Use ISQVARS with care. Value changes are made immediately and mayseriously affect the running of SA z/OS.

Return Codes0 Processed without errors.30 The processor operations environment does not exist; the ISQVARS

command was not processed.32 The processor operations environment does not exist; the ISQVARS

command was not processed.131 You did not enter enough parameters.132 The second argument you specified is unknown.133 You specified a form of the command that is not valid with the list option.134 msg and list options are mutually exclusive.135 Neither get nor put were specified.136 You used an uneven number of single straight quotation marks.137 You used single straight quotation marks other than for the last argument.138 Unable to write to the specified variable.139 Unable to read the specified variable.141 msg is a keyword and cannot be used as a variable name.142 Variable answer could not contain all of the data, variable truncated to 255

bytes.143 Variable answer could not contain all of the data, variable truncated to

32767 bytes.144 Addressed port not initialized to a target system.145 System console not defined for addressed target system.161 You specified a target hardware name that is not valid.162 You specified an unknown keyword.163 You specified a target system name that is not valid.166 You specified a keyword restricted to LPAR systems.

ISQVARS


|||||

167 The specified port is not connected to an operator console.168 The specified port is not connected to a system console.169 IOCDS cannot be located, system is in LPAR mode.170 The port definition and the target hardware definition in the SA z/OS

configuration panels conflict with one another — the system consolecannot be found.

171 The port definition and the target hardware definition in the SA z/OSconfiguration panels conflict with one another — the operator consolecannot be found.

172 You specified a keyword that is not valid for the PUT function.173 NetView CNMLOCK failure.174 Internal locking sequence error.175 Unable to obtain lock for PUT function.176 You specified a PUT function with non-hexadecimal characters for a

keyword field that can contain only hexadecimal characters; the commandis ignored.

177 You specified a PUT function with non-integer characters for a keywordfield that can contain only integer characters; the command is ignored.

178 Unknown operating system type for specified target system.179 The specified keyword only valid if the addressed target system is running

the MVS or VM operating systems.182 You tried to write (PUT) values to a keyword field that are not valid

values for that field.183 You tried to write (PUT) a value that is too large for the keyword field to

which it is being written.184 You tried to write (PUT) a time offset value that is not valid.185 You specified a parameter that cannot be used with the keyword you

specified (the parameter values that can be specified are list, tgt, ens orthw).

186 It is not valid to change the internal variable you specified from its currentstatus value to the status value you specified.

188 It indicates that the status of the target system or logical partition cannotbe identified.

189 You specified a logical partition name that is not valid.191 You specified a variable that requires a qualified name (such as target.lpar),

but the qualified name you provided is not valid.192 Logical partition name missing. You specified a target hardware name, but

it was not followed by a logical partition name (such as target.lpar).193 The memory requested is larger than the maximum that can be installed.194 The system name entered is not a valid target system name, but it is a

valid target hardware name.195 You specified a target ensemble name that is not valid.

ISQVARS Keywords

SA z/OS provides keywords you can use to define your configuration and todetermine the status of the elements in your configuration.

When you develop automation routines, you need to read these keyword valuesand perhaps write to them as well. For example, a routine may change the primaryIPL address used by automation. Assuming the old address was 03FE, thefollowing command changes the address to 0123:ISQVARS PUT TGT SILVER pipla ’0123’

ISQVARS


This section explains the keywords and the valid values each keyword accepts. Italso identifies the SA z/OS messages that trigger SA z/OS automation to updatethe keyword values. You may want to use these status messages to begin yourown automation routines.

Variable Value Lengths: In addition to using the correct form of ISQVARS for thevariable type, you must be aware of the length limits of variables for yourparticular programming environment. This is a particular concern when you areretrieving long data strings such as lists of defined target systems. If you areprogramming in REXX, the variable value length limit is 32 KB. For otherprogramming environments supported by NetView, the variable value length limitis 256 bytes.

Keyword Valid Values: This column shows the values of SA z/OS keywords. Youcan retrieve or change these values with the ISQVARS command if they are validvalues.

In Table 3, the SA z/OS values are sorted according to the contents of the Namecolumn, which identifies the keyword name of the value. The Access columnindicates the type of access allowed for the keyword through the ISQVARScommand. A keyword may have either read-only access, designated by read (GET),or read/write access, designated by write (PUT).

The ISQVARS column indicates which command keyword you should use after theGET or PUT keyword of the ISQVARS command to access the SA z/OS value.

SA z/OS Keywords and Status Messages: Table 3 lists the ISQVARS keywordssorted by keyword name.

Table 3. ISQVARS Keywords Sorted by Keyword Name

Keyword Description Name Access ISQVARS Valid Values and Comments

Last activated THWNAME acthw write LUN Allows the obtaining or setting of the lasttarget hardware (THWNAME) to beactivated for a specified LUNAMEcorresponding to a NetView ConnectionPath. The setting of the THWNAME needsto be done before the THWNAME can beobtained. If PUT specified, input must beequal to a valid THWNAME.

THW: active target system name atsname read OCF orTHW

When OCF, the name of the active targetsystem that is associated with OCF. WhenTHW, the name of the active target systemthat initialized on the specified targethardware; one name for XA, ESA, and 370,multiple names for LPAR-mode targethardware.

Backup focal point backfp read THW Backup focal point NetView domain ID.

ISQVARS


Table 3. ISQVARS Keywords Sorted by Keyword Name (continued)


Number of retry steps for callingthe Hardware Interface

cmdretry write THW Processor Operations commands will callthe Hardware Interface; this call may fail atfirst, and, for some return codes ProcessorOperations tries to re-execute the call. Thisvariable defines how often a retry shouldbe executed. The value is set to 10 atProcessor Operations start time(ISQSTART). Valid number range is 00 to99.Note: This variable is only used for SNMPconnections.

Number of retry steps whencalling the Ensemble to execute acommand or function

cmdretry write ENS Processor Operations commands will callthe Ensemble Interface; this call may fail inthe first place, and for some return codesProcessor Operations tries to re-execute thecall. This variable defines how often a retryshould be executed. Valid number range is00 to 99.

Wait time between retry stepsfor the Hardware Interface

cmdwait write THW Processor Operations commands will callthe Hardware Interface; this call may fail atfirst, and, for some return codes ProcessorOperations tries to re-execute the call. Thisvariable defines the wait time in secondsbetween 2 retries. The value is set to 01 atProcessor Operations start time(ISQSTART). Valid number range is 00 to99.Note: This variable is only used for SNMPconnections.

Wait time between retry stepsfor calling the EnsembleInterface function

cmdwait write ENS Processor Operations commands will callthe Ensemble Interface; this call may fail inthe first place, and for some return codesProcessor Operations tries to re-execute thecall. This variable defines the wait time inseconds between 2 retries. Valid numberrange is 1 to 600.

Target hardware connection type ctype read THW Type of processor operations SNMP tofocal-point NetView.

IPL message: response toduplicate volume IEA213A IPLmessage

dvolar write TGT Allowed values are 'Y' (required) or 'N' (notrequired).

Alternate Ensemble HardwareManagement Console Address

ensaddr read ENS IP address or hostname of the EnsembleHMC, defined as the alternate one.

Ensemble anchor addressinformation

ensanch read ENS Returns the address of shared memoryused to store internal data model andconnection information in hexadecimalcharacters.

ISQVARS




Blade center list ensbcl read THW For target THW, a list of the discoveredzBX blade centers is returned in the form:bcname/serial. Multiple bcname/serial pairsare separated by one or more blanks. Thislist is filled at ISQXIII time for theensemble where the target member is amember. If the Ensemble Management Flagfor the THW is set to NO or blank, or noBlade Center information could bediscovered, a blank is returned.

Target ensemble connectionstatus

enscs write ENS Connection status to the ensemble HMC,used as the SPOC for the targetedensemble. Valid values are: ACTIVE, ENSSESSION PROBLEM or blank. For read, youmay also get the following values inaddition to the values you can write:CLOSED, DORMANT, SUSPENDED, CONNECTING.

Status panel error message ensemsg write ENS Status panel error message line.

Ensemble list enslist read GET LIST List of the defined ensemble entry names inthe current ProcOps configuration. Thenames are separated by one or moreblanks.

Ensemble lock enslockn read ENS Name of operator who issued the lock;blank if not set.

Ensemble management flag ensmflag write THW This flag controls the management of theEnsemble Blade Extension (zBX) for thespecified THW. Allowed values are 'YES','NO' or blank. If the value is 'YES', ProcOpswill try to discover zBX resources likeBlade Centers and Blades of the specifiedTHW and allow commands to manage thediscovered resources. If the value is 'NO' orblank, no resource discovery is done for thezBX resources of the specified THW atISQXIII time and subsequent ProcOps cmdsto manage the zBX resources for this THWwill fail.

Ensemble entry name ensname read THW Returns the ensemble entry name if thespecified THW is defined as a membernode of an ensemble. If no ensemblemembership is defined, a blank value isreturned.

List ensemble node information ensnodes read ENS Returns a list of all Processors (THW) thatare part of the ensemble. List entries thatare separated by one or more blanks.

Primary ensemble hardwaremanagement console address

enspaddr read ENS IP address or hostname of the EnsembleHMC, defined as the primary one.

ISQVARS




Password to be used forautomatic logon

enspw read ENS Password for Ensemble HMC user id to beused for automatic logon. Note that theISQVARS response message may notcontain a password in readable format. Ifthe ISQVARS calling application specifies atarget variable for the PW query result, it isthis application's responsibility to ensurethat the security guidelines that may be inplace, are met.

Real ensemble name ensrname write ENS Name of the zEnterprise Ensemble asdefined in the zManager environment. Thisname may contain mixed case charactersand can be up to 16 characters long. Thisvariable is filled if the ISQXIII processingwas successful.

Userid used for automatic logonto Ensemble HMC

ensuser read ENS This userid automatically logs on at theEnsemble HMC at ISQXIII time and logsoff again when an ISQXCLS is performedfor the ensemble.

Group name list grplist read GET LIST A list of group names. The names areseparated by one or more blanks.

Hardware management consoleaddress

hmcaddr write THW IP address or hostname of a HMC wherethe THW is defined.

Before changing the value of this variable,make sure that all target systems that sharethis address as their target hardwareconnection have been closed using theISQXCLS command. The modified addressvalue will only be used if no moreconnections are active from the ProcOps FPto the HMC. Issue command ISQXIII torestart the connections with the changedaddress.

Target hardware processor type htype read TGT orTHW

Mainframe

LPAR: partition initial state ilpars read TGT ACTIVE or INACTIVE (LPAR target systemsonly).

IPL message: response to mastercatalog action IEA347A IPLmessage

iplmsgmc write TGT 75 characters (MVS only).

IPL message: response toIEA101A IPL message

iplmsgsp write TGT 75 characters (MVS only).

IPL message: VM IPL startmessage

iplmsgvm write TGT 75 characters (VM only).

ISQVARS




Name of the IP stack for theSNMP connection

ipstack write THW The name of the IP stack on the ProcOpsFP system that is to be used for this SNMPconnection. If defined, the ProcOps FPTCP/IP must be configured for multiple IPstacks. If blank, the default IP stack is used,regardless of the TCP/IP stackconfiguration.

Note that with SNMP connect over a HMC,the IPSTACK definition of the first CPCthat is connected is used for all other CPCsof this HMC connection, regardless of theother IPSTACK definitions that may existfor the other CPCs.

The ipstack value used must be a validz/OS jobname, representing the alternate IPstack. Only length checking is performed inISQVARS.

Name of the IP stack for theensemble connection

ipstack write ENS The name of the IP stack on the ProcOpsFP system to be used for this ensembleconnection. If defined, the ProcOps FPTCP/IP must be configured for multiple IPstacks. If blank, the default IP stack is used,regardless of the TCP/IP stackconfiguration.

The ipstack value used must be a validz/OS jobname, representing the alternate IPstack. Only length checking is performed inISQVARS.

LPAR: partition name in use? lparact read THW Null (not logically partitioned) or name ofthe initialized target system that has thespecified LPAR name, in the formtarget_hardware_name.LPAR_name. Thevariable contains the name of the initializedtarget system that has LPAR name or a nullvalue if none of the target systemsinitialized to the target hardware have thatLPAR name.

LPAR scope lparscop read THW ALL (default) or DEFONLY

ALL: sessions will discover all detectablepartitions on that target hardware.

DEFONLY: sessions will discover onlypartitions defined as target systems for thattarget hardware.

NetView connection pathLUNAME

nplu read TGT orTHW

SNA LUNAME for connection to an OCF-basedprocessor support element.

NetView connection path NETID npnetid read TGT orTHW

SNA NETID for connection to OCF-basedprocessor support element.

NetView connection path TargetHardware Names

npthw read LUN Returns all defined target hardware namesfor an SNMP connection.

ISQVARS


|||||

||

|||



NetView connection statussummary

nvcs write THW Valid values are: ACTIVE, SNMP SESSIONPROBLEM or blank.

For read, you may also get CLOSED andDORMANT in addition to the values that youcan write.

Secondary OCF name ocf2nd read TGT Returns the value of the secondary OCFname

Operator console lock oclockn read TGT The name of operator who issued the lock.Blank if it has not been set.

Operator console status ocstat read TGT ACTIVE, CLOSED, UNKNOWN, LINK ERROR,UNDEFINED, and CONSOLE LOST

Target operating system type ostype read TGT MVS, VM, LINUX, VSE, CF, ZAPP, or KVMIBM

IPL: primary IPL address pipla write TGT Specifies the device address to be used forthe IPL.

IPL: primary IPL CP address piplcpua write TGT Specifies the central processor address (nolonger used).

IPL: primary IPL parameter piplp write TGT 8 characters allowed.

LPAR: partition status pnstatus write TGT I (inactive) or A (active).

Path poll frequency for thetarget hardware connection

pollfreq write THW Defines how often (in minutes) SA z/OSProcessor Operations should poll thesupport element for its status. Valid valuesare 0 to 99 minutes. Specify 0 to deactivatepolling.Note: Changing the value has no impacton the polling frequency of the polling taskitself, see “Restrictions and Limitations” onpage 389 for details.

Path poll frequency for theensemble connection

pollfreq write ENS Defines how often (in minutes) SA z/OSProcessor Operations should poll theensemble HMC connection. Valid values are0 to 359 minutes. Specify 0 to deactivatepolling.Note: Changing the value has no impacton the polling frequency of the polling taskitself, see “Restrictions and Limitations” onpage 389 for details.

Path poll option pollopt write THW CPC (default) or CONN

CPC: Issue CPCDATA request to validate theconsole application for a target hardwareconnection.

CONN: Issue ISQXCON and GETSSTAT toverify only target hardware connection.

ISQVARS


|||||

|||||

|||

||



Path poll retries for the targethardware connection

pollrtry write THW Defines the number of attempts SA z/OSProcessor Operations should make to pollthe support element for its status beforenotifying the operator that the connectionfailed. Valid values are 0 to 99 retries.Note: Changing the value has no impacton the polling retries of the polling taskitself - see “Restrictions and Limitations”on page 389 for details.

Path poll retries for the ensembleconnection

pollrtry write ENS Defines the number of attempts SA z/OSProcessor Operations should try and pollthe HMC connection for status beforenotifying the operator that the connectionfailed. Valid values are 0 to 99 retries.Note: Changing the value has no impacton the polling retries of the polling taskitself - see “Restrictions and Limitations”on page 389 for details.

Primary focal point primfp read THW Primary focal-point NetView domainid.

Force an IPv4 connection to PSMserver

psmipv4 write THW Allowed values are 'Y' or 'N'. If set to 'Y', aIPv4 connection will be used although IPv6could be tried. This is useful inenvironments where the IPv6 support is notfully enabled or IPv6 related connectionproblems may exist. In IPv4 onlyenvironments the setting of the flag isignored.Note: This flag is only tested if the PSMserver is defined using the Hostnameaddress form.

Subgroup name list sbglist read GET LIST A list of subgroup names. The names areseparated by one or more blanks.

System console lock sclockn read TGT The name of operator who issued the lock.Blank if it has not been set.

System console status scstat read TGT SNMP SESSION PROBLEM, ACTIVE, CLOSED,DORMANT, and blank.

Support Element address seaddr write THW IP address or hostname of THW's SupportElement

Before changing the value of this variable,make sure that all target systems that sharethis address as their target hardwareconnection have been closed using theISQXCLS command. The modified addressvalue will only be used if no moreconnections are active from the ProcOps FPto the HMC. Issue command ISQXIII torestart the connections with the changedaddress.

Target hardware site info site write THW Location information, if provided with theprocessor for the target hardware.

ISQVARS


||||||||||||||

||||||||||||||



Use SNMPv3 protocol snmpv3 read THW YES: indicates that the THW requiresSNMPv3 authentication.

NO (or empty): indicates default SNMPv2cauthentication using SNMP community.

Target system attention tattn write TGT Blank, DCCF, EXCEPTIONS, DISABLED WAIT,SERIOUS ALERT, ALERT, and ENV ALERT.

Authorization token tauth read TGT orTHW

Authorization token or SNMP communityname of the processor support element orHMC.

Target system description tdesc read TGT Target system description whichcorresponds to the System ShortDescription in System Automation'sCustomization Dialog.

Desired Image profile tdipf write TGT Desired Image profile name for thespecified target system name.

Desired Load profile tdlpf write TGT Desired Load profile name for the specifiedtarget system name.

Desired Reset profile tdrpf write TGT Desired Reset profile name for the specifiedtarget hardware name.

Status Panel Error Message temsg write TGT orTHW

Status panel error message line.

Target System Group name tgrp read TGT orGRP

Target system names within a group andsubgroups associated with this group or thegroup names for a target system.

Target system name list tgtlist read GET LIST A list of target system names. The namesare separated by one or more blanks.

Target hardware name list thwlist read GET LIST A list of target hardware names. The namesare separated by one or more blanks.

Target hardware name thwname read TGT Name of target hardware definitionassociated with the specified target system.

Target hardware status thwstat write TGT Blank, LPAR DEFINITION PROBLEM,TARGET HARDWARE PROBLEM, POWERED OFF,POWER-ON RESET REQUIRED, SERVICE,POWERSAVE, SERVICE REQUIRED, DEGRADED,UNKNOWN or OK.

Target time offset timeoff write TGT A number in the range of -23 through +23the TGT time deviates from FP.

Status Panel Info Message timsg write TGT orTHW

Status panel informational message line.

Target system initialized? tinit read TGT YES or NO

LPAR: partition name tlpar read TGT Null or LPAR name for the specified targetsystem if the target system is not in anLPAR. Use the TGT form of the command.

Target system mode tmode read TGT ESA, LINUX, ZACI, SSC, or CF.

Target system console statussummary

toca read TGT Blank.


tocb read TGT Blank.

ISQVARS


||||||

||

|||||




tsca read TGT Blank.

SNMP SESSION PROBLEM and ACTIVE


tscb read TGT Blank.

Target system name tsname read THW orOCF

When THW, names of all defined targetsystems on specified target hardware name,whether initialized or not (one name forXA, ESA*, and 370, multiple names forLPAR-mode target hardware).

When OCF, the target system nameassociated with a secondary OCF name.

Target system status tstat write TGT UNDECIDABLE, UNKNOWN, INITIALIZED,IPL COMPLETE, LOAD FAILED, IPL FAILED,CLOSED, WAITING FOR IEA101A MESSAGE,WAITING FOR IEA347A MESSAGE,WAITING FOR VM START MESSAGE,STAGE-1 ACTIVATE COMPLETE, NOT OPERATING,and NOT ACTIVE.

Target System SubGroup name tsubgrp read TGT orGRP

Target system names within a subgroup orthe subgroup names for a target system.

Group processoroperations-enabled indicator

vgrp read GET Y or N.

Subgroup processoroperations-enabled indicator

vsubgrp read GET Y or N.

SNMPv3 Password v3pwd read THW Password for SNMPv3 authentication.

SNMPv3 Username v3user read THW Username for SNMPv3 authentication.

ISQVARS Resource Type: The ISQVARS command syntax also includes a resourcetype. Use the correct resource type (TGT, THW, ENS, LIST, PUT LUN, or PUTGRP) for the requested keyword.

Automation from Status Messages: When SA z/OS processor operations detects astatus change for any element of your SA z/OS configuration, it updates theappropriate status table variables and may generate a message or an alert. You cancreate a routine and a NetView automation table entry to automate the operatorresponse to these status change messages. For the recommended operator responseto each of these messages, see IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS Messages andCodes.

ISQXCLSPurpose

End communication with a target system (console) or ensemble HMC and set thetarget system or ensemble connection status to CLOSED. For a target system, thecommunication with the SE/HMC of the target system's processor is alsoterminated if this was the last INITIALIZED target system on that processor.

ISQVARS


|||||

|||||

When closing target hardware, ISQXCLS closes the console connections to all targetsystems defined, running on the specified hardware. This implicitly terminates thecommunication with the target hardware processor's SE/HMC.

Syntax

►► ISQXCLS target_system_ProcOps_nameOCSC

ensemble_ProcOps_nametarget_hardware_ProcOps_name

►◄

Requirements

The requirements for this command to complete successfully are:v Processor operations must be active.v The target_system_ProcOps_name syntax requires the addressed target system to

be initialized.v No console connection to be closed can be locked by another task.v No ensemble connection to be closed can be locked by another task.

Parameters

target_system_ProcOps_nameIs the name of the target system to be closed.

OC Specifies the active operator console connection.

SC Specifies the active path for an SNMP connection.

ensemble_ProcOps_nameIs the name of ensemble to be closed.

target_hardware_ProcOps_nameIs the name of the target hardware. This is a required parameter, and must bea valid target hardware name.

Defaults

None.

Usage

You can close a target system, target ensemble, or target hardware to end thecommunication between the target entity and focal point over the processoroperations path.

Closing communication for a Target System: Issue the following to close a targetsystem:ISQXCLS target_system_ProcOps_name

Closing a target system sets its status to CLOSED.

Closing communication for an ensemble HMC: Issue the following to close anensemble:ISQXCLS ensemble_ProcOps_name

ISQXCLS


Closing an ensemble connection sets its status to CLOSED.

Closing communication for a Target Hardware: Issue the following to closeconsole communication to all target systems on a target hardware and finally endcommunication between the target hardware processor's SE/HMC and ProcOps:ISQXCLS target_hardware_ProcOps_name

Using this command form allows you to close ProcOps console communicationwith all target systems running on a defined target hardware in one step. Theindividual ISQXCLS commands for the target systems are scheduled to run on theProcOps control task of the target hardware.


The following restrictions or limitations apply to this command:v The close of a target system does not end the processing of that target system.

Use the common command DEACTIVATE to perform this task.v Do not close a system console on a logically partitioned system if any logical

partition on that target hardware is active.

Return Codes0 The ISQXCLS command completed successfully, no errors occurred.8 You used syntax that was not valid.12 A NetView or processor operations service problem occurred or the THW

connection path status is SUSPENDED.16 A severe error occurred.32 The processor operations environment does not exist; the ISQXCLS command

was not processed.

ISQXCONPurpose

This command is used to manage Processor Operations connections during eventssuch as the planned maintenance of processor Support Elements (SEs) or HardwareManagement Consoles (HMCs) (that are used by Processor Operations). In order toprevent error retries and recovery actions by Processor Operations, theSUSPENDED status for a target hardware connection and its associated targetsystems can be set while the SEs/HMCs are not available. After maintenance, aRESUME function allows normal Processor Operations connection processing tocontinue.

In addition, the STATUS function provides a consolidated summary of importantconnection-related information in the multi-line message ISQ350I. This is analternative to the ISQXDST status dialog panels, which provide similarinformation, available in different panel views.

Syntax

►►*

ISQXCON entity_nameSTATUSRESUME

FORCE(ALL)FORCE(NO)

SUSPENDFORCE(fopt)

MSGKEEP►◄

ISQXCLS


Requirements

The requirements for this command to complete successfully are:v Processor Operations must be active.v The SUSPEND/RESUME functions of this command make use of the NetView

DSISVRT VSAM DB to save status variables. If your NetView is not customizedto use this facility, the ISQXCON SUSPEND/RESUME functions cannot be used,only the STATUS function will work.

Parameters

entity_name

Is the name of a configured target hardware (processor) in your activeProcessor Operations policy.

or

Is the name of a configured zEnterprise ensemble (zBX) in your activeProcessor Operations policy.

You can use the '*' wildcard as the last character in your thwname specificationto let ISQXCON select all target hardware names, which match the partialstring preceding the '*' for processing.

Using only the '*' wildcard character as entity_name selects all configured targethardware and ensemble names.

STATUSGenerates an ISQ350I multi-line message status report for the selected targetentity name(s).

RESUMEFor the selected entity name(s), the connection path status is first checked tosee if it is currently SUSPENDED. If so, it is set to DORMANT. For targethardware connections, the configured target system status is set to CLOSED.This enables normal Processor Operations for them. In order to re-establishcommunication to an entity name, use the ISQXIII command.

SUSPENDFor the selected entity name(s), the active connections are first CLOSED to endcommunication. Then the connection path status is changed to SUSPENDED.This status is saved in the DSISVRT to keep it available across NetViewrecycles. For target hardware, each configured target system of that targethardware is also set to SUSPENDED. In a SUSPENDED state, ProcessorOperations commands that use this connection will not work. Use theISQXCON RESUME function to re-enable the entity name connection again fornormal Processor Operations.

FORCE (fopt)Required parameter of the SUSPEND request and optional parameter of theRESUME request. The parameter controls the processing of the requestaccording to the parameter's specification or fopt. Valid values are:

ALLFor SUSPEND, it causes that in case of an HMC connection, other targethardware connections over this HMC (same IP address) will also besuspended, if not already in SUSPENDED state.

For RESUME, it causes that all previously suspended target hardwareconnections over the same HMC connection will be resumed.

ISQXCON


YESFor SUSPEND, it causes the existing target systems sessions to be closedbefore the connection path is suspended.

For RESUME, this option is not valid.

NO For SUSPEND, it causes the request to be executed only if no active targetsystem sessions exist to the target hardware over the connection path to besuspended. FORCE (NO) is the SUSPEND default.

For RESUME, this option is not valid.

MSGKEEPThe Message Output option. If specified, the message output of the commandis written to a PIPE KEEP with the name ISQXCON. For compatibility reasonswith other Processor Operations commands, the successful completionresponse ISQ017I is not written to the message KEEP. Use a PIPE with KEEPISQXCON as its first stage to analyse the message output. Each time thecommand ISQXCON is executed with the MSGKEEP option, the PIPE KEEP isre-initialized. If the MSGKEEP option is not specified, all ISQXCON messagesare written to the NetView console.

Defaults

If no parameters are specified for ISQXCON, this will result in a STATUS requestfor all configured entity name connections. The resulting messages are written tothe NetView console.

If the SUSPEND function is used, the FORCE(NO) option is in effect to prevent anunintended close of active target system or ensemble sessions.

For the SUSPEND function, if the target hardware entity is connected to an HMC,active target system connections of other target hardware entities with the sameHMC IP address are closed as well.

If the connection is SUSPENDED, no Processor Operations session polling islimited.

Usage

When using ISQXCON to manage a single or multiple entity name connections, itis recommended to use the ISQXCON STATUS function first, before suspending orresuming a connection.

Please note that for SUSPENDED connections, no Processor Operations sessionpolling is done.


The SUSPEND and the RESUME functions of ISQXCON currently accept only theSNMP connection protocol for target hardware names and the HTTP connectionprotocol for ensemble names. TCP/IP connections to PSMs are not supported.

If multiple target hardware connections are processed in a request, the ISQXCONreturn code is always 0.

Return Codes0 The command completed successfully. If multiple entity name connections are

ISQXCON


processed, but one or more connections have set return codes 6,8,10 and 16,use the responded messages ISQ357I - ISQ359I to determine which of theconnections failed and the reason.

2 Function/option parameter invalid or missing. The ISQXCON command is notexecuted.

4 The entity name parameter is not specified or could not be resolved. TheISQXCON command is not executed.

6 Session is active, FORCE (YES) option is required.8 Connection protocol is not supported.10 Status is not SUSPENDED.16 Suspend/Resume HW command failed.32 The Processor Operations environment does not exist; the ISQXCON command

was not processed.

ISQXDRLPurpose

The ISQXDRL command displays the outstanding MVS requests from a targetsystem; the command is rejected for operating systems other than MVS. ISQXDRLissues the following MVS command to the active operator console port of thetarget system, and sends the response to the requesting NetView operator:D R,L,CN=(ALL)

Syntax

►► ISQXDRL target_system_ProcOps_name ►◄

Requirements

The requirements for this command to complete successfully are:v Processor operations must be active.v The addressed target system must have a status of INITIALIZED.v The addressed target system must be running MVS.v The operator console must not be locked by another task.v You must be on the interested operators list for the operator console to see the

reply messages.

Parameters

target_system_ProcOps_nameIs the name of the target system. It is a required parameter, and must be avalid target system name.

Defaults

None.

Usage

The ISQXDRL command provides a convenient alternative to using thepassthrough facility to issue the MVS D R,L command.

ISQXCON


Each line of the MVS response to the D R,L command is displayed as a single-linemessage. Processor operations does not trap the responses. There is no prefix to themessage lines and the last line is followed by a line of dashes. Other messages tothe operator may be interspersed with these messages, especially for the last line ofdashes. The line of dashes may be issued some time after the last real line ofoutput from the MVS command.


The ISQXDRL command works only when issued to systems running MVS.

Return Codes0 The ISQXDRL command completed successfully.4 You used syntax that is not valid, specified a target system that is not running

MVS, or specified a target system that is not initialized.8 A problem occurred during the processing of the “ISQSEND” on page 378

command or the console is locked by another task.32 The processor operations environment does not exist; the ISQXDRL command

was not processed.

ISQXDSTPurpose

The ISQXDST command displays status panels, which provide the followinginformation:v Status summary (all target systems)v Status summary (all blades of a zBX)v Individual ensemble connection statusv Individual target hardware statusv Individual target hardware connection statusv Individual target system statusv Interested operator list

Syntax

►► ISQXDSTISQXDSTI target_entity_name

►◄

Requirements


Parameters

target_entity_nameThis can be:

target_system_nameIs the name of a valid target system for which you want to seeindividual target system status. If omitted, the summary status of alltarget systems is displayed.

target_hardware_nameIs the name of a valid target hardware for which you want to see

ISQXDRL


individual hardware information in ProcOps. If the hardware has azBX attached, you can enter the zBX blade view from here.

ensemble_nameIs the name of a valid zEnterprise ensemble for which you want to seeindividual information and connection status.

Defaults

If your ProcOps configuration has target systems and the associated targethardware (processors) defined, issuing the ISQXDST command without a targetentity parameter will show the overall status of all target systems.

If your ProcOps configuration has only ensemble definitions, but no target systemsand no associated target hardware definitions, issuing the ISQXDST commandwithout a target entity will show the ensemble selection panel.

While in the ISQXDST status sytem, the NetView® OVERRIDE=NO option is ineffect, which suppresses immediate messages sent to your NCCF screen, so thepanel navigation is not interrupted. Note, that if you perform the NetView ROLLfunction, the DISPLAY=NO option is temporarily changed to DISPLAY=DEFAULT.

If you invoke the ProcOps status system using the ISQXDSTI command, thedisplay option currently in effect for you, is not changed. As a result messagesdirected to your operator ID may interrupt the panel navigation flow.

Usage

Issue the ISQXDST command from an operator console to access the processoroperations status facility. If you issue the command to access the status summarypanel, you will be able to use the status facility to view multiple panels formultiple ProcOps entities without exiting the status facility. Refer to IBM TivoliSystem Automation for z/OS Defining Automation Policy and IBM Tivoli SystemAutomation for z/OS User's Guide for more information about how to set up and usethe status facility.

To display the Status Summary, issue:ISQXDST

This will invoke the target system summary.

To display the status of a specific target entity, issue:ISQXDST target_entity_name

If you enter the status facility by issuing the ISQXDST command with no otherparameters, all of the status panels give you access to the other status panels thatare supported by the status facility, including the zBX blade and ensemble views.Some of these status panels cannot be directly accessed by command. Refer to IBMTivoli System Automation for z/OS User's Guide for further information about how touse the status panels.

To display the status of a specific target entity, issue:ISQXDST ensemble_name

From the displayed ensemble status screen, you can navigate to the views of theother ensembles you may have configured.

ISQXDST



The following restrictions or limitations apply to this command:v Do not issue this command with ISQEXEC, ISQROUTE or from an automation

procedure.v You can issue the ISQXDST command only from an operator console.

Return Codes

Return codes are not applicable because the ISQXDST command cannot be issuedfrom a program.

Examples

Figure 153 shows an example of the ProcOps Ensemble view panel ISQEENS thatis displayed when you enter the command ISQXCMD and you have ensemblesdefined in your ProcOps configuration, but no target systems.

“How to Monitor and Control Ensemble connections and zBX resources” on page417 shows an example of the ProcOps Ensemble view panel ISQEENS that isdisplayed when you enter the command ISQXDST and you have ensemblesdefined in your ProcOps configuration, but no target systems.

The following values can be displayed on the ISQXDST panel to describe the statusof target systems:

CLOSED(Green) The target system has been closed.

DCCF (Red) A target system attention status indicating that a DCCF message hasbeen detected.

DISABLED WAIT(Red) A target system attention status indicating that a disabled waitcondition has been detected.

ISQESUM SA z/OS Proc-Ops Target Status Summary Updates: DynamicControl file in use: ACF

I isqxiii C isqxcls O isqxopt A,B view netlogs E events Debug Mode: OFFS Force a THW path suspend R Resume a suspended THW pathCmd Target System Status Focal Points - Primary: IPSNO Backup: IPSFL

BOEVMSPA CLOSEDBOEVMTSA (*) INITIALIZEDBOEVMT1 CLOSEDBOEVM9 (*) CLOSEDKEY1 CLOSEDKEY2 CLOSEDKEY3 LOAD FAILEDKEY4 CLOSEDKEY6CFF CLOSEDKEY6CF1 CLOSEDKEY7 IPL COMPLETELNXT0 INITIALIZEDLNXT1 NOT ACTIVETRX1 SUSPENDED

Enter=Static PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF4=Tgt Sys Summary PF5=Debug On/OffPF6=Roll PF7=Up PF8=Down PF9=Tgt HW Summary PF11=PATH Details PF12=Quit

Figure 153. ISQXDST Status Summary Panel

ISQXDST


INITIALIZED(Green) The target system has been successfully initialized.

IPL COMPLETE(Green, yellow, or red) The meaning of this status depends on theoperating system:v For a TPF or VSE system, the Load or Load Clear process started.v For a z/OS system, processor operations automation responded to the

IEA347A message.v For a VM system, processor operations automation responded to the VM

start message.

If this condition is displayed in red, it means that something is wrong(such as processor operations having lost its communication link with thetarget system) rather than that the IPL process failed. This condition revertsto green when the problem is corrected.

IPL FAILED(Red) z/OS only. Error messages were generated during the initialprogram load process.

LOAD FAILED(Red) The Load or Load Clear operation did not complete successfully.

NOT ACTIVE(Yellow) Activate response was received from the target and did notindicate that stage 1 activation was completed. If the target is running inan LPAR, the logical partition found is not activated.

NOT OPERATING(Red) Target hardware indicates a not operating condition for the image.No CP status is available for problem determination.

POWER-ON RESET REQUIRED(Red) A POWER-ON RESET of the target system hardware is requiredbefore a BCP load.

POWERED OFF(Red) The target hardware is physically powered off.

POWERSAVE(Red) SNMP Path Only: Power® utility for the target hardware failed.Target hardware put in power save state.

SERIOUS ALERT(Red) SNMP Path Only: Target system attention status indicating a seriousalert has been detected.

SERVICE(Red) SNMP Path Only: Service status enabled for the target hardware.

SNMP SESSION PROBLEM(Red) SNMP Path Only: An attempt to use the SNMP Connection returnedan error.

STAGE-1 ACTIVATE COMPLETE(Yellow) The support element power-on reset has occurred but the load isnot yet complete.

SUSPENDED(Yellow) The connection path to the target hardware of the target systemhas been suspended. All defined target systems using the suspended

ISQXDST


connection path cannot be operated with Proc-Ops until the connectionpath is resumed again. For suspend/resume operation you can use thecommand characters of the ISQXDST panel ISQESUM or the ISQXCONcommand.

UNDECIDABLE(Yellow) SNMP Path Only: The target hardware is not communicating withthe support element or the support element is not communicating with theHMC.

UNKNOWN(Green) No attempt has been made to initialize or activate this targetsystem. This status can be set only by a cold start of processor operations.

WAITING FOR IEA101A START MESSAGE(Yellow or red) MVS only: ACTIVATE, ISQXIPL, or ISQXLOD commandprocessing has completed for an MVS system and processor operations iswaiting for the IEA101A message on the operator console. If this conditionis displayed in red, it means that something is wrong (such as processoroperations having lost its communication link with the target system)rather than that processor operations has been waiting for the message toolong.

WAITING FOR IEA347A MESSAGE(Yellow or red) MVS only: processor operations has replied to the IEA101Amessage and is waiting for the IEA347A message on the operator console.

If this condition is displayed in red, it means that something is wrong(such as processor operations lost its communication link with the targetsystem) rather than that processor operations has been waiting for themessage too long.

WAITING FOR VM START MESSAGE(Yellow or red) VM only: processor operations is waiting for the first VMIPL message on the operator console. ISQXLOD, ISQXIPL, or ACTIVATEcommand processing has completed for a VM system and processoroperations is waiting for the first VM IPL message on the operator console.

If this condition is displayed in red, it means that something is wrong(such as processor operations having lost its communication link with thetarget system) rather than that processor operations has been waiting forthe message too long.

If you issue ISQXDST with the name of a target system, the Target SystemSummary panel is displayed (Figure 154 on page 411).

ISQXDST


This panel has the following PF keys:v The PF7 key displays the Processor Operations Interested Operator List panel

(the one accessed with the ISQXMON command).v The PF9 key displays the Target Hardware Summary panel (“Displaying

Processor Resource Information (SNMP Connections)” on page 415). This panelprovides detailed status information about the target hardware that the targetsystem is defined on.

v The PF11 key displays the connection Path Detail panel. This panel providesdetailed status information about a specific connection path.

The Target System Summary panel shows the following specific information:

Target System NameThe name assigned in the customization dialog to this target system.

Target System DescriptionShort textual description of this target system, defined in the customizationdialog.

Status (Updated dynamically) The current value of the processor operationsinternal variable tstat.

You can change this status from INITIALIZED, LOADFAILED, orIPLFAILED to IPLCOMPLETE by issuing the ISQVARS command tochange the internal variable tstat. (For more information about specifyingtstat as a keyword on the ISQVARS command, see the description of theISQVARS command in IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS Operator'sCommands). You would want to do this when you perform a cold start ofprocessor operations while a target system is already running.

After the cold start, you issue the ISQXIII command to the target systemthat is already running so that its status becomes INITIALIZED, then youchange the value of tstat to IPLCOMPLETE.

ISQETARG SA z/OS Proc-Ops Target System Summary Updates: Dynamic

Target SystemName : KEY3Description :O.S. : MVSLoad Profile :Status : UNKNOWNAttention :

Target HardwareName : FREEWAY Mode : LPARAttention :Path Status : DORMANT

Target Hardware LPARName : KEY3 Mode : ESAImage Profile: KEY3

Last Significant Message:

Enter=Static PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF6=Roll PF7=Oper ListPF9=Target Hardware PF11=Path Detail PF12=Quit

Figure 154. Target System Summary Panel

ISQXDST


You may also want to change the status manually if the cause of theLOADFAILED status was corrected by using the pass-through facility ofprocessor operations, or if it was corrected locally at the site of the targetsystem.

You can also issue the ISQVARS command to change the internal variabletstat from IPLCOMPLETE to IPLFAILED. Processor operations sets a statusof IPLCOMPLETE when it initiates a load of a target system and receivesan operating system specific message that indicates that the operatingsystem received a level where it is ready to work. However, neither ofthese operating systems provide a sufficient indication that the loadprocess failed, preventing processor operations from changing the targetsystem status appropriately.

Valid values for this status field are as follows:

CLOSED(Green) The target system has been closed.

INITIALIZED(Green) The target system has been successfully initialized.

IPL COMPLETE(Green, yellow, or red) For a TPF or VSE system, the Load or LoadClear process started. For an z/OS system, processor operationsautomation responded to the IEA347A message. For a VM system,processor operations automation responded to the VM startmessage. If this condition is displayed in red, this is done to getyour attention to inform you that something is wrong (such asprocessor operations lost its communication link with the targetsystem) rather than that the IPL process failed. This condition willrevert to being displayed in green when the problem is corrected.

IPL FAILED(Red) z/OS only: Error messages were generated during the initialprogram load process.

LOAD FAILED(Red) The Load or Load Clear operation did not completesuccessfully.

NOT ACTIVE(Yellow) Activate response was received from the target and didnot indicate that stage-1 activation was complete. If the target isrunning in an LPAR, the logical partition is found not activated.

NOT OPERATING(Red) Target hardware indicates a not operating condition for theimage. No CP status is available for problem determination.

STAGE-1 ACTIVATE COMPLETE(Yellow) The Support Element power-on reset has occurred but theload is not yet complete.

UNDECIDABLE(Yellow) SNMP Path Only: The target hardware is notcommunicating with the support element or the support element isnot communicating with the HMC.

ISQXDST


UNKNOWN(Green) No attempt has been made to initialize or activate thistarget system. This status can be set only by a cold start ofprocessor operations.

WAITING FOR IEA101A START MESSAGE(Yellow or red) z/OS only: ACTIVATE, ISQXIPL, or ISQXLODcommand processing has completed for an z/OS system andprocessor operations is waiting for the IEA101A message on theoperator console. If this condition is displayed in red, it is to getyour attention to inform you that something is wrong (such asprocessor operations lost its communication link with the targetsystem) rather than that processor operations has been waiting forthe message too long.

WAITING FOR IEA347A MESSAGE(Yellow or red) z/OS only: processor operations has replied to theIEA101A message and is waiting for the IEA347A message on theoperator console. If this condition is displayed in red, this is doneto get your attention to inform you that something is wrong (suchas processor operations lost its communication link with the targetsystem) rather than that processor operations has been waiting forthe message too long.

WAITING FOR VM START MESSAGE(Yellow or red) VM only: processor operations is waiting for thefirst VM IPL message on the Support Element CI. The ACTIVATEor LOAD command processing has completed for a VM systemand processor operations is waiting for the first VM IPL message.If this condition is displayed in red, it is to get your attention toinform you that something is wrong (such as processor operationslost its communication link with the target system) rather than thatprocessor operations has been waiting for the message too long.

Target Hardware(Updated dynamically) The current value of the processor operationsinternal variable thwstat. Valid values are as follows:

blank (Not highlighted) No problem has been reported for the targethardware. You can also use the ISQVARS command to changethwstat to blanks after correcting an error condition reflected in thisfield.

DEGRADED(Yellow) SNMP Path Only: Target hardware runs with degradedperformance (specific hardware types only).

POWERED OFF(Red) The CPC is physically powered off.

POWERSAVE(Red) SNMP Path Only: Power utility for the target hardwarefailed. Target hardware put in power save state.

SERVICE(Red) SNMP Path Only: Service status enabled for the targethardware.

SERVICE REQUIRED(Yellow) SNMP Path Only: The next disruption in the targethardware will result in degraded capacity or will fail.

ISQXDST


TARGET HARDWARE PROBLEM(Red) The Support Element of the processor (CPC) reported atarget hardware problem.

Attention(Updated dynamically) The current value of the processor operationsinternal variable tattn. Valid values are as follows:

blank (Not highlighted) The target system has not encountered any of thefollowing conditions. You can also use the ISQVARS command tochange tattn to blanks after correcting an error condition reflectedin this field.

ALERT(Yellow) SNMP Path Only: Target system attention status indicatingan alert has been detected.

DCCF (Red) z/OS only: Processor operations has detected a DCCFmessage.

DISABLED WAIT(Red) Processor operations has detected a Disabled Wait condition.

ENV ALERT(Yellow) SNMP Path Only: Target system attention status indicatingan environment alert has been detected.

SERIOUS ALERT(Red) SNMP Path Only: Target system attention status indicating aserious alert has been detected.

Target HardwareThe name of the target hardware that this target system is running on.

O.S. MVS, VM, VSE, LINUX, ZAPP, or CF

Mode LPAR, ESA

LPAR nameThe name of the logical partition that this target system is running in.

Connection Path InformationIdentifies the connection type and current status of the connection betweenthe processor operations focal point and the CPC support element orHMC.

Type SNMP (IP-based Simple Network Management Protocol connection)

Status (Updated dynamically) The current value of the processor operationsinternal variable scstat.

blank (Not highlighted) Either the target system has not encountered anyof the following conditions, or the condition has been resolved.

PATH PROBLEM(Red) The focal point system cannot communicate with theSupport Element on the NetView connection. View the Path Detailpanel for more information (see “Display Path Details” on page424).

ACTIVE(Green) The path is ready for communications.

ISQXDST


SNMP SESSION BUSY(Red) Processor operations cannot presently communicate with thetarget Support Element, the problem appears to be recoverable.

SNMP SESSION PROBLEM(Red) Processor operations cannot communicate with the targetSupport Element.

SUSPENDED(Red) The connection path to the target hardware has beensuspended. No ISQXIII command that is using this connection pathwill work until it is resumed again. For suspend/resume operationyou can use the command characters of ISQXDST panel ISQESUMor the ISQXCON command. Note that this status is propagated toall affected target systems.

Lock Holder(Updated dynamically) The current NetView operator that owns the lockfor the target system and the connection path. Locks can be set using theISQXLOC and ISQXUNL commands. Locks grant the exclusive use of theconnection path of a target hardware and its associated target systems.

Last Significant Message(Updated dynamically) The text of the last command response or reportreceived from the target system. The date and time of the message is alsodisplayed. The text of the message is truncated to 79 characters, includingthe message identifier but not including the time stamp. The message isnot removed from the panel when the condition that generated themessage is resolved.

Displaying Processor Resource Information (SNMPConnections)

To view target hardware summary of a processor, select PF9 from the TargetSystem Summary panel (Figure 154 on page 411) or from the Status Summarypanel (Figure 153 on page 408) on a NetView console.

ISQXDST


This panel has the following PF keys:v PF2 displays the zBX Base Operation Blade View panel ISQEZBX (see “ISQEZBX

Panel Example” on page 422). This function is only available if the targethardware has a zEnterprise blade extension attached and if an ensembledefinition exists, with this target hardware selected as a member.

v PF7 displays the Processor Operations Interested Operator List panel (accessedwith the ISQXMON command).

v PF11 displays the Path Detail panel (“Display Path Details” on page 424). Thispanel provides detailed status information about a specific NetView path. Firstplace the cursor on the line with the name of the path that you want moreinformation about, and then press PF11.

The Target Hardware Summary panels show the following specific information:

Ensemble MembershipEnsemble entry name or n/a. Shows the name of the ensemble, this targethardware is assigned as a member.

Target Hardware NameThe name assigned to this definition of target hardware in thecustomization dialog.

Target Hardware TypeIndicates the machine type of a System z or 390-CMOS processor.

Target Hardware ModeLPAR, ESA

Target Hardware DescriptionShort textual description of this definition of target hardware, defined inthe customization dialog.

Initialized Target Systems(updated dynamically) List of target systems currently initialized to thistarget hardware. For non-LPAR-mode target hardware, this field lists one

ISQEHARP SA z/OS Proc-Ops THW Summary Updates: DynamicTarget Hardware Name: R35 Type: 9672 Mode: LPARzBX Extensions: YES Model: M49 Serial Number: 02-0089F25Ensemble Membership: R35ZBX zBX Management: YESTHW Description: Development/Test MainframeTHW Site Information: LAB-BB, Block_19––––––––––––––––––––––––––Initialized Target Systems–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––TRX1 TRX2 TRX3 TRX4 TRX5 TRX6SYSA SYSB SYSC SYSD SYSE SYSFKEY1 KEY2 KEY3 KEY4 KEY5 KEY6KEYA KEYB KEYC KEYD KEYE KEYFAOC1 AOC2 AOC3 AOC4 AOC5 AOC6AOC7 AOC8 AOC9 AOC10 AOC11 AOC12TSCF1 TSCF2 TSCF3 TSCF4 TSCF5 TSCF6TSCF7 TSCF8 TSCF9 TSCF10 TSCF11 TSCF12BUMU LAND YDRAG THBR EMTI HIRE09WAS65 GFG11 GUNN10 HWRE34 SANDBX1 ALEXIRLCommunication Path Error Status:


Enter=Static PF1=Help PF2=zBXcntl PF3=Exit PF6=Roll PF7=Oper List PF11=PATH DtlsPF12=Quit

Figure 155. Target Hardware SummaryPanel for OCF-Based Processors

ISQXDST


or none. For LPAR-mode target hardware, this field can list multiple targetsystems. This field is blank if no target systems are initialized to this targethardware.

Communication Path Error Status (updated dynamically) Status information in case of a communicationproblem between the NetView focal point and the target hardware.

Valid values for the status of the NetView connection path are:

SNMP SESSION BUSY(red) Processor operations cannot presently communicate with thetarget support element, the problem appears recoverable.

SNMP SESSION PROBLEM(red) Processor operations cannot communicate with the targetsupport element.

Last Significant MessageThe last significant message or alert associated with this target hardware.

THW Site InformationTHW location information for this target hardware as defined in the PolicyDatabase.

ZBX ExtensionsYES or NO. Indicates if the target hardware has a blade extension unitattached.

ZBX ManagementYES, NO, n/a. If the target hardware has a zBX attached and is alsodefined as an ensemble member, the value is YES. If the target hardwarehas no zBX attached, the value is n/a. If a zBX is attached, but noensemble membership is defined, the value is NO.

How to Monitor and Control Ensemble connections and zBXresources

If you have defined ensemble connections together with target hardware that has azBX unit attached, you can use the ProcOps ISQXDST status system to monitorand control the following zEnterprise blade extension resources: blade centers,blades, the zBX unit, and the connection to the ensemble HMC, which is thecommunication end point for the ProcOps.

For a standard ProcOps configuration, with target systems and a ensembleconnection to a target hardware with a zBX attachment, use the command form:ISQXDST <ensemble_name> to display the ensemble main selection panel ISQEENS.

For a ProcOps configuration with no target system definitions, the ISQXDSTcommand entered without a parameter is sufficient to display the ensemble mainselection panel ISQEENS.

Figure 156. Ensemble Main View

ISQXDST


ISQEENS SA z/OS - Proc-Ops Ensemble View Updates: DynamicEnsemble(s) 001 to 003 of 003: GRY2ZBX ▌HYDRA▐ R35ZBX ........ ........Description : Remote test EnsembleReal EnsName : Hydra Connection Type : HTTPConn Status : ACTIVE IP Stack : TCPIP7HMC Login User : TADDM03 Lock Holder :Poll Frequency : 30 Cmd Retries : 3Poll Retries : 3 Cmd Wait : 15

(P)rimary, (A)lternate HMC:P: ensemble.hmc.ibm.comA: ensemble.hmca.ibm.com

THW Nodes: R91:IBM390PS.R91 R93:IBM390PS.R93.......................... .................................................... .................................................... ..........................


Enter=Static PF1=Help PF2=zBXCntl PF3=Exit PF4=ISQXIII PF5=ISQXCLSPF6=Roll PF10=Previous PF11=Next PF12=Quit

The panel has the following PF keys:v The PF1 key displays the ISQEENS panel help.v The PF2 key (zBXCntl) invokes the zBX Base Operation Blade View panel to

manage zBX resources of the selected THW Node. Place the cursor on one of the8 ensemble THW Node fields and press PF2. Note, that this function works onlyfor THW node names shown in the format: <thwname>:<netid>.<nau>. For emptyfields (....) or node members without a configured HTTP protocol, the zBXcntlfunction has no effect.

v The PF3 key returns from the ISQEENS panel to the previous panel view.v The PF4 key schedules the ISQXIII command to initialize the current ensemble

connection for execution on the associated ensemble control task. When theISQXIII command is complete, the Conn Status field will be updated with thelatest status.

v The PF5 key schedules the ISQXCLS command to close the current ensembleconnection for execution on the associated ensemble control task. When theISQXCLS command is complete, the Conn Status field will be updated with thelatest status.

v The PF6 key invokes the NetView ROLL function.v The PF10 key selects the ensemble previous to the currently selected one and

refreshes the ISQEENS panel with the new selected ensemble. If the ensembleselected is the first one, pressing PF10 selects the last ensemble.

v The PF11 key selects the ensemble next to the currently selected one andrefreshes the ISQEENS panel with the new selected ensemble. If the ensembleselected is the last one, pressing PF11 selects the first ensemble.

v The PF12 key terminates the ISQXDST dialog and returns to the NCCF screen.

The Ensemble View panel shows the following specific information:

Connection configuration and status fieldsDescription

Shows the text you entered in the SA customization dialog as a shortdescription of this ensemble.

ISQXDST


Real EnsNameIs the ensemble name defined on the HMC for this ensemble. This name canbe different to the ensemble entry name used in ProcOps. SA ProcOps requiresthe entry names for its operation. Real ensemble names can be longer than 8character and can contain mixed case characters or blanks. Note, that the realensemble name is required when you define an ensemble with the SAcustomization dialog. The real ensemble name is also a supported targetparameter of the ISQECMD ensemble command interface.

Conn StatusCurrent® status of the ensemble connection. Valid status values are:

Table 4. Ensemble Connection Status

Status Value Color Meaning

ACTIVE green Ensemble connection wassuccessfully established andis currently active.

CLOSED green Ensemble connection iscurrently closed.

CONNECTING yellow Ensemble connectioninitialization failed. It will beretried after the specifiedpolling frequency timeperiod.

DORMANT green Ensemble connection notinitialized since the lastProcOps start.

SUSPENDED red The ensemble connection hasbeen suspended and cannotbe used until it is resumedagain, using the ISQXCONcommand. No polling isperformed while anensemble connection issuspended.

ENS SESSION PROBLEM red The ensemble connectionexperienced a PROBLEMproblem after a successfulinitialization. If a pollingfrequency was defined forthe connection, ProcOps willtry to re-establish theconnection at every pollingtime.

HMC Login UserThis is the userid defined on the zEnterprise ensemble HMC, ProcOps uses forits HMC communication. Depending on the userid's task level and resourcescope, which is set on the HMC when the userid is defined, zBX resources areaccessible to be managed by ProcOps.

Poll frequency, poll retries (for the ensemble HMC connection)The frequency is defined in minutes and represents the time period betweentwo ensemble connection pollings. A polling frequency value of 0 means thatno polling is performed. The frequency value for an ensemble can be set usingthe SA customization dialog, or at ProcOps runtime with the ISQVARS

ISQXDST


command. The polling retry value is used by the polling routine to determineif and how often a failing ensemble communication command should beretried before giving up the polling.

Cmd retries, cmd wait (the ensemble HMC connection)These are general ensemble command control values to define how often afailing ensemble command should be retried before reporting it as failed andhow long to wait for a command response from the HMC before reporting atimeout condition. The command retry and command wait values for ensemblecommands can be set using the SA customization dialog, or at ProcOpsruntime with the ISQVARS command.

Connection TypeAlways set to HTTP. ProcOps exploits the System z HMC Web Services APIwhich is a HTTP based IP Stack (alternate to the default stack). If you want touse a different IP stack on the ProcOps FP system for the HTTPcommunication with the zEnterprise ensemble HMC, you can define this usingthe SA customization dialog, or at ProcOps runtime with the ISQVARScommand. Note, that after you have specified an alternate IP stack at ProcOpsruntime, you must recycle the HMC connection to activate this change.

Lock HolderWith ProcOps you can use the ISQXLOC/ISQXUNL commands to lock anensemble connection, so that only your operator tasks can use it. Otheroperators or autotasks cannot use the ensemble connection while it is locked.The Lock Holder field shows the name of the operator or autotask, currentlyholding the lock. Note, that normally locks are set only for a short time period,to gain exclusive control for important ensemble work.

HMC AddressesIn a zEnterprise ensemble environment a primary and an alternate HMC mustbe configured. The primary HMC's IP address or hostname is required whenyou define an ensemble in the SA customization dialog. If an alternate HMCaddress is specified, the ProcOps ensemble connection polling will PING bothHMC addresses and report bad results. Note, that in case of an HMC switch(primary becomes alternate) the IP address of the 'old' primary HMC willremain the IP address of the 'new' HMC.

THW Node informationIn a zEnterprise ensemble, up to 8 nodes can be defined as members. A node isa IBM zEnterprise (TM) System, with or without a zEnterprise BladeCenterExtension (zBX) attached. In ProcOps, a node is a target hardware (processor)with a membership to an ensemble. The processor and the ensemblemembership can be defined using the SA customization dialog.

Panel ISQEENS lists the THW ensemble member nodes in two columns each withfour fields. Unused member fields are marked: '........'. If a node is listed in theformat <thw>:<netid>.<nau>, means that a zBX is expected to be attached and thatmanagement for the zBX resources is intended. This is configured by adding'HTTP' to the connection protocol list for a processor with the SA configurationdialog. If only the <thw> target hardware name is displayed, the processor targethardware has an ensemble membership defined, however the zBX support protocol'HTTP' is not configured.

How to Monitor and Control zBX resourcesThe ISQEZBX panel can be used to query information of the following zBX objects:v The blade extension unit,

ISQXDST


v The associated ensemble,v The rack mounted blade centers,v The blades mounted in the blade centers

For the mounted blades, the ACTIVATE and DEACTIVATE operations commandsare available to manage them. The ISQEZBX panel has no data entry fields. It usesthe cursor position on the displayed zBX screen objects to select them for thePF-key assigned functions. Especially the panel operation with a 3270 screenemulator is supported, where you can position the cursor using a pointing device.If your 3270 emulator provides a customizable on-screen keypad function, you caneven have the ISQEZBX panel function keys on the keypad, which allows you tocontrol your zBX resources just with a pointing device.

Note: The layout of the view for racks, blade centers, and blades in panelISQEZBX does not represent the exact physical layout of a zBX and itscomponents, only a schematic view of a zBX is displayed. The blades are notshown in a view that represents their exact physical location in a blade center.

Cursor sensitive panel areas ( A ... F )

▌A▐ EnsembleField shows the ensemble name. When cursor selected, an Ensemble report willbe displayed in the report window when the PF2 function is performed.

▌B▐ RacksThe line lists the configurable racks of the zBX in the range rack B to rack D.Available, accessible rack IDs are displayed highlighted. When this line iscursor selected, a PF2 Report function will generate a zBX Unit report anddisplay the results in the report window area.

▌C▐ Blade CentersThe line lists all blade centers detected, when the ISQEZBX panel was invoked.Unavailable blade centers are shown with a name of 'n/a'. Blade centersavailable are shown with their names. Only the first 6 characters of theirnames are displayed in this line. If the cursor is positioned on a blade centername field, a PF2 report function will display the report for this blade center inthe report window area.

▌D▐ BladesIn this screen area, the mounted blades of a zBX are listed in columns. Foreach possible rack of a zBX and its two possible blade centers, two bladecolumns are shown as the display location for the individual blades. If thecursor position is on a mounted blade on one of the columns, the blade center

▌F▐ISQEZBX ProcOps zBX Base Operation Blade View

Ensemble / THW Node Member: ▌A▐ / MYCPC--- Rack: ▌B▐ - B --- Rack: C --- --- RackD ----B.1 B.2 C.1 ▌C▐ n/a n/a=o= ▌D▐ =p= ... ▌D▐ .. =x= ... ... ... ... ...-o- ... _X_ ... =x= ... _P_ ... ... ... ... ..._O_ ... -p- ... -x- ... =p= ... ... ... ... ...

( 14 Rows 8 Columns for detected blades )... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------| ▌E▐ ( Report window for zBX query information )+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------PF1=Hlp PF2=Reprt PF3=Exit PF4=Act PF5=Deact PF6=Roll PF9=Show/Refr PF12=Quit

Figure 157. ISQEZBX cursor sensitive areas

ISQXDST


of that column and the rack of the blade center are used to locate the correctzBX blade. The PF2 report function displays the result in the report windowarea.

▌E▐ zBX Report Output WindowThis screen section is used as the output area for the zBX reports. They start allwith a AOFBxxxx report id. The remaining report data is shown in acondensed form to make best use of the limited area size. If you wish to seethe original zBX report, just position the cursor in the window area andperform PF2. A WINDOW panel is displayed showing the original AOFBxxxxreport. If you need help information for a AOFBxxxx report id, use PF1 in thereport window area.

▌F▐ Any other screen areaWith the cursor on any other area than A to E , performing the PF2 reportfunction has no effects. When you use the PF1 Help function, this panel helpwill be displayed. Independent from the cursor location you can alwaysperform the PF9 Show/Refresh function.

ISQEZBX Panel Example

In the above ISQEZBX panel snapshot the cursor was positioned on the Rackheader line and PF2 key was pressed. As a result a zEnterprise Blade Extensionunit report was returned in the ISQEZBX message window area.

Panel ISQEZBX provides the following PF key functions:v The PF1 key invokes the AOFBxxxx report message specific help function,

depending on the cursor position, either the general panel help, or if the cursorposition is on the report window.

v The PF2 key executes the specific query command function for this object, if thecursor is positioned on a zBX object line or column. The result is displayed in aspecial report window at the lower part of the panel. The following ensemblecommands are used: ZBXDATA, ENSDATA, BCDATA, and BLDATA. Thereports are presented in a condensed form, however you can use the PF2

ISQEZBX SA z/OS Proc-Ops zBX Base Operation Blade ViewEnsemble / THW Node Member: HYDRA / R93--- Rack B --- --- Rack C --- --- Rack D --- --- Rack E ---B.1 B.2 C.1 C.2 D.1 D.2 E.1 n/a=p= ... ... ... =p= ... =o= ... =x= ... =x= ... _P_ ... ... ...=p= ... ... ... =p= ... =p= ... =x= ... =x= ... -p- ... ... ...=x= ... ... ... =x= ... =x= ... =x= ... =p= ... =p= ... ... ...=x= ... ... ... =p= ... =o= ... =p= ... =p= ... _O_ ... ... ...=p= ... ... ... =x= ... =o= ... =p= ... =p= ... -o- ... ... ...=p= ... ... ... =p= ... =o= ... =x= ... =p= ... =o= ... ... ...=x= ... ... ... =p= ... =o= ... =x= ... =p= ... _X_ ... ... ...=x= ... ... ... =x= ... =o= ... =x= ... =p= ... -x- ... ... ...=p= ... ... ... =p= ... ... ... =x= ... =p= ... =x= ... ... ...=p= ... ... ... =x= ... ... ... =x= ... =x= ... ... ... ... ...=x= ... ... ... =p= ... ... ... =x= ... =x= ... ... ... ... ...=x= ... ... ... =p= ... ... ... =x= ... =x= ... ... ... ... ...=p= ... ... ... =x= ... ... ... =x= ... ... ... ... ... ... ...=x= ... ... ... =p= ... ... ... =x= ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

AOFB0011 ZBXDATA HYDRA STATUS(SUCCESS) TSTIME(120303085035) HYDRA CPC(R93)ZBX NAME(2458-001-000000033333) MTYPE(2458) MMODEL(001)MSERIAL(000000033333) DESC(Represents one zBX) CDPXI50E(6) CISAOPTE(3)CPOWERE(29) CXE(35) MAXDPXI50E(112) MAXISAOPTE(112) MAXPOWERE(112) MAXXE(112)

PF1=Hlp PF2=Report PF3=Exit PF4=Act PF5=Deact PF6=Roll PF9=Show/Refr PF12=Quit

Figure 158. zBX Base Operation Blade View

ISQXDST


function again with the cursor positioned in the report window area to display anew panel with the original report messages. With BCDATA and BLDATAprocessing, the panel status of the selected blade or blade center object willautomatically change to the new status shown in the report if there was a statuschange. Note, that when you place the cursor on an empty (...) blade columnposition, an empty report window is shown.

v The PF3 key returns from this panel to the next higher level in the ISQXDSTpanel hierarchy.

v The PF4 key ACTIVATEs a blade, before the function starts, you must confirm it(PF10) to proceed or cancel (PF11) the request. This function activates theselected blade unit which is located in a Blade Center Chassis of a zBX rack.After a successful activation, the blade status of a BLDATA report (PF2) shows'operating'. Note, that the zBX VH (virtual host) related to this blade will beautomatically activated. The VS (virtual server) objects related to the VH mustbe extra configured for automatic activation. VSs not configured for automaticactivation have a status of 'not-operating' after a successful blade activation.Activating a blade while the blade is still active and work is still running on thevirtual servers of that blade, will interrupt this work because the blade isdeactivated before it is activated again. The PF4 blade activation calls theISQROUTE ProcOps function to schedule a ISQECMD with the blade activateensemble command. This allows the user to perform other ISQEZBX functionsimmediately after the blade activation has been scheduled. You must use eitherPF9 or PF2 with the cursor on the blade position to get any blade status changeinformation displayed on the panel.

v The PF5 key DEACTIVATEs a blade, before the function starts, you mustconfirm it (PF10) to proceed or cancel (PF11) the request. This functiondeactivates the selected blade unit which is located in a Blade Center Chassis ofa zBX rack. After a successful deactivation, the blade status of a BLDATA report(PF2) shows 'no-power'. Note, that the zBX VH (virtual host) related to thisblade will be automatically deactivated. The VS (virtual server) objects related tothe VH will automatically be deactivated and any work running is disrupted.After successful deactivation of a blade, the related VS objects have a status of'not-operating'. The PF5 blade deactivation calls the ISQROUTE ProcOpsfunction to schedule a ISQECMD with the blade deactivate ensemble command.This allows the user to perform other ISQEZBX functions immediately after theblade activation has been scheduled. You must use either PF9 or PF2 with thecursor on the blade position to get any blade status change informationdisplayed on the panel.

v The PF6 key invokes the NetView ROLL functionv The PF9 key invokes the zBX Show/Refresh function. When panel ISQEZBX is

initially displayed in a panel session, the list of the mounted blades on the zBXis empty. The initial panel display shows the available racks highlighted withtheir available blade center names displayed. The PF9 function must beperformed first to fill the blades columns with the available mounted bladeinformation. The PF9 function can also be used to refresh all blade columns.

v The PF12 key (Quit) returns from ISQEZBX panel and exit ISQXDST. Thisreturns you to the NCCF screen.

Acceptable status properties for bladesWith the exception of racks and workloads, the possible status values of other zBXobjects can be configured to be an 'ACCEPTED' status. zBX objects with this statusattribute set can be considered as not requiring special attention, regardless of theiractual status. In fact, the HMC user interface marks all zBX objects in an acceptablestatus with a green status indicator. You can use the HMC Ensemble Management

ISQXDST


task and set/unset the accepted status marker for a status value using the zBXobject's Details view. Press the apply button to activate the changes.

The ISQEZBX panel displays all blades with the accepted status property set ingreen. The accepted status properties for blades are also shown in the AOFB0016BLDATA reports. Acceptable status properties for other zBX objects than blades arecurrently ignored by the ISQEZBX panel display, but can be determined in thereports.

Blade type and status indicatorsThe following blade status indicators are shown in the rows/columns reserved forthe zBX blades:v Indicates an empty place, no blade is mounted:

... (color blue)v Indicators for a mounted blade of type 'system-x':

=x= (color green, status is accepted)-x- (color yellow reverse, status is transient)_X_ (color red reverse, status is unaccepted)

v Indicators for a mounted blade of type 'power':=p= (color green, status is accepted)-p- (color yellow reverse, status is transient)_P_ (color red reverse, status is unaccepted)

v Indicators for a mounted optimizer hardware component of type 'isaopt' or'dpxi50z':

=o= (color green, status is accepted)-o- (color yellow reverse, status is transient)_O_ (color red reverse, status is unaccepted)

How to Monitor Communications Path StatusThe communications paths from the processor operations focal point system totarget systems are of two types: NVC and SNMP. You can display details of theconnection for these types of path.

Display Path DetailsPress PF11 on the Target System Summary panel or Target Hardware Summarypanel to display the Path Detail Panel, as shown in Figure 159 on page 425.

ISQXDST


The Path Detail panel shows the following information:

Target Hardware NameThe name assigned in the customization dialog for the processor that thisconnection path details belong to.

Connection TypeType of path assigned in the customization dialog to be used forcommunication between the processor operations focal point and the targethardware. Connection types can be the following:

SNMPIP-based communications protocol that requires that the addressinformation for either SE or HMC are defined. If both addressesare customized in the customization dialog, the SE address haspriority.

NVC SNA-based communications protocol that requires the CPC SNAaddress.

LU NameThe NAU part of the CPC SNA address, which is also the logical unitname assigned to the NetView connection path.

Network IDThe NETID part of the CPC SNA address, which is also the name of theSNA network ID for the NetView connection.

Support Element IP Address or HostnameThe name or IP address assigned in the customization dialog to the SE ofthis target hardware.

Hardware Management Console IP Address or HostnameThe name or IP address assigned in the customization dialog to the HMCof this target hardware.

Connection AuthorizationIn case of an NVC connection, the authorization token is displayed. For

ISQEPNVC SA z/OS PATH Detail Updates: Dynamic

Target Hardware Name: RAP2 Connection Type: SNMP

Network ID : IBM390PS LU Name : TEST99IP Stack :Support Element IP Address or Hostname:196.168.11.9Hardware Management Console IP Address or Hostname:196.168.11.11

Connection Authorization: PROCOPS Lock Holder :SNMPv3 Security : YSNMPv3 User : SNMPUSER1PATH Status : DORMANT

Poll Frequency : 30 Poll Retries : 2


Enter=Static PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF6=RollPF7=Oper List PF12=Quit

Figure 159. Path Detail Panel

ISQXDST


||||||||||||||||||||||||||||

SNMP connections the community value is shown. The authorizationvalues are defined in the customization dialog for a selected targethardware.

Lock Holder(Updated dynamically) The current NetView operator owning the lock forthe connection path. Locks can be set and unset using the ISQXLOC andISQXUNL command. Locks grant the exclusive use of a connection path.

SNMPv3 SecuritySNMPv3 security status.

Y The connection is SNMPv3 and authenticated by SNMPv3 User andPassword.

N The connection is SNMPv2 and authenticated by the community name(Connection Authorization).

SNMPv3 UserSNMPv3 User specified for the connection.

Path Status(Updated dynamically) The status of the NetView path. Valid values are:

UNKNOWN(Green) No command was ever issued to this path name.

ACTIVE(Green) The path is ready for communications.

PATH PROBLEM(Red) The focal point system cannot communicate with theSupport Element on the NetView connection. This status isaccompanied by a Last Significant Message.

Poll FrequencyThe time (in minutes) that processor operations should poll the SupportElement for status.

Poll Retries (Updated dynamically) The number of attempts to retry that should occurbefore processor operations notifies the operator that the connection failed.

Note: Updates for 'Path Poll Frequency' (pollfreq) or 'Path Poll Retries'(pollrtry) have no impact on the polling task; to effectively change thesevalues, the update must be performed in the SA z/OS customizationdialog Processor Information panel (AOFGCPD0); afterwards, rebuild andreload the Automation Control File (ACF) and restart processor operations.

Last Significant Message(Updated dynamically) The text of the last command response or reportreceived from the target system. The text of the message is truncated to 79characters, including the message identifier but not including the timestamp. The message is not removed from the panel when the conditionthat generated the message is resolved.

ISQXDST


||

|||

|||

||

|||||

ISQXIIIPurpose

The ISQXIII command initializes (or re-initializes) a target system, or a targetsystem connection. When initializing a target system, ISQXIII establishes aconnection to the target processor and enables its console connections.

When initializing a target hardware, ISQXIII establishes a connection to the targetprocessor and enables the console connection for all target systems defined thatrun on the specified target hardware.

In addition, this command can be used to establish a session to an Ensemble HMC,which is required to manage zBX Blade resources with ProcOps.

Syntax

►► ISQXIII target_system_ProcOps_nameOCSC

ensemble_ProcOps_nametarget_hardware_ProcOps_name

►◄

Requirements

The requirements for this command to complete successfully are:v Processor operations must be active.v The addressed target system must have a status of UNKNOWN or CLOSED.v The addressed target system must be initialized if you use the

target_system_ProcOps_nameconsole_designator syntax.v No associated console or ensemble connection can be locked by another task.

Parameters

target_system_ProcOps_nameIs the name of the target system. This is a required parameter, and must be avalid target system name.


SC Specifies the system console connection.

ensemble_ProcOps_nameIs the ProcOps name of a zBX Ensemble.

target_hardware_ProcOps_nameIs the name of the target hardware. This is a required parameter, and must bea valid target hardware name.

Defaults

None.

ISQXIII


Usage

Issue the ISQXIII command to a target system to prepare it for processoroperations monitoring and control.

Issue the ISQXIII command to a zBX ensemble HMC to prepare it for processoroperations monitoring and control.

Issue the ISQXIII command to a target hardware to prepare it and all definedtarget systems for processor operations monitoring and control.


The following restrictions or limitations apply:v To re-initialize a target system, you must first close it with the ISQXCLS

command (see “ISQXCLS” on page 400).v To initialize a console connection, the target system must have been initialized

previously.v To re-initialize an ensemble session, you must first close it with the ISQXCLS

command.

Return Codes0 The ISQXIII command processed successfully and the processor operations

environment for the specified target system or ensemble has been initialized orre-initialized.

4 During initialization of a target system or ensemble one or more of thefollowing problems occurred:v No system consoles could be contacted.v No operator consoles could be contacted.v No ensemble HMC could be contacted.

8 You used syntax that is not valid, specified a target system that is notinitialized, or specified an invalid ensemble name.

12 An internal error occurred or connection path status is SUSPENDED to eitherthe processor hardware (SE/HMC) or ensemble HMC.

16 A severe error occurred.32 The processor operations environment does not exist; the ISQXIII command

was not processed.

Initializing a Target SystemInitializing a target system starts communication with the target hardware andenables the console connections. It also updates the interested operator lists forconsoles at the target system. The interested operator lists are updated because anoperator can join an interested operator list by issuing the ISQXMON commandafter processor operations has been started but before the target system has beeninitialized.

Initializing an Ensemble HMC ConnectionInitializing this connection starts by logging in at the addressed Ensemble HMC. Itthen starts to discover the zBX base resources such as blades, available formonitoring and control, using this ensemble connection. The defined userid for thisensemble remains connected to the HMC, until an ISQXCLS is performed orprocessor operations is eliminated.

ISQXIII


Operators can use the ISQXMON command to join/leave the interested operatorgroup of an ensemble to get notifications and reports from the ensemble and itsresources.

Initializing a Target HardwareUsing this command form allows you to initialize target systems of a targethardware defined to ProcOps in one step. The individual ISQXIII commands fortarget systems are scheduled to run on the ProcOps control task of the targethardware. When a target system is already INITIALIZED while ISQXIII for a targethardware is running, it is ignored.

ISQXLOCPurpose

The ISQXLOC command locks access to a ProcOps entity to serialize operations tothat console with other operator tasks. Entities can be either target system namestogether with a console designator or ensemble names.

Syntax

►► ISQXLOC target_system_ProcOps_name OCSC


►◄

Requirements

The requirements for this command to complete successfully are:v Processor operations must be active.v The entity must not be locked by another task.v The target_system_ProcOps_name syntax requires that the addressed target

system be initialized.

Parameters



SC Specifies the active system console (not valid for the OCF-basedprocessors).


S Specifies the active system console.

ensemble_ProcOps_nameIs the ProcOps name of a zBX ensemble.

Defaults

None.

ISQXIII


Usage

All processor operations commands that require serialization automatically lock theentity when they start and unlock the entity when they complete.

The lock prevents processor operations from sending requests to an entity —theyare rejected unless issued by the same task that issued the ISQXLOCcommand—until the lock is removed by the ISQXUNL command (see “ISQXUNL”on page 437).

If you are going to issue several commands to an entity, you can issue theISQXLOC command to lock access to the entity to ensure the commands areprocessed without interruption by commands from other tasks. When you arefinished with this sequence of commands, issue the ISQXUNL command to unlockaccess to the entity.

If the ISQXLOC command is issued within an automation procedure, or within aset of called automation procedures, the locked entity should be unlocked (usingthe ISQXUNL command) after all processing of the automation procedure iscompleted. It is not normally necessary to lock an entity for the processing of anautomation procedure because of the serialization of the ISQEXEC command.

Any change in lock status is reflected in the status facility.


The following restrictions or limitations apply to this command:v The parameters are not checked for validity.v Once obtained by a task, another task cannot obtain the lock until it is released

by the owning task.v An ISQXLOC command issued from within a locked sequence of commands is

rejected.

Return Codes0 The ISQXLOC command completed successfully.4 The entity was already locked by the current task.8 You used syntax that is not valid, specified an entity that is not valid, or in the

case that the entity is a target system, it is not initialized.12 The entity is locked by another task.32 The processor operations environment does not exist; the ISQXLOC command

was not processed.

Any return codes greater than 8 that are not listed above indicate that an erroroccurred in the NetView CNMLOCK service.

ISQXMONPurpose

The ISQXMON command adds you to or deletes you from the interested operatorlist for a target system console or an ensemble. When added, you can monitor aconsole and receive all message traffic from the target system or ensemble.

The following messages are sent to the interested operator's NetView screen:v Operating system messages from target systems (target systems only)

ISQXLOC


v Processor hardware messages (target hardware only)v Hardware status or Ensemble object status changesv Command completion messages from the processor hardware or ensemblev Query command responses from the processor hardware or ensemble

For target system and target hardware entities, messages for interested operatorsare all prefixed with the message ID ISQ901I and are copies of the original ISQ900Imessages that ProcOps provides for its internal processing and automation.

For ensembles, messages for interested operators are prefixed with the message IDISQ801I and are copies of the original ISQ800I messages that ProcOps provide forits internal processing and automation.

Syntax

►►ON

ISQXMON target_system_ProcOps_nameOFF

ONSCOC OFF

ONensemble_ProcOps_name

OFF

►◄

Requirements


Parameters

target_system_ProcOps_nameIs the name of the target system you want to monitor. The name must be avalid target system name.

If the specified target system is a logical partition, you will receive messagesfrom other LPARs running on the same target hardware if they are defined inyour active ProcOps control file. The target system must be operational and itsProcOps status must not be UNKNOWN or CLOSED.

ON Indicates that you are to be added to the list of interested operators.

OFF Indicates that you are to be deleted from the list of interestedoperators.

SC Specifies the hardware connection that includes the operating systemconsole and the hardware system console functions.

OC Specific operator console connection (no longer supported, messageISQ042I will be issued when specified).

ensemble_ProcOps_nameIs the name of the ensemble you want to monitor. The name must be a validensemble name.

ON Indicates that you are to be added to the list of interested operators.

OFF Indicates that you are to be deleted from the list of interestedoperators.

ISQXMON


Defaults

ON.

Usage

The ISQXMON command may be issued at any time after processor operations hasbeen started.

For target systems: Interested operator lists are maintained per console connection.There is one list for each target system. System console and operator consolefunctions are supported. The maximum number of interested operators is 12 perconnection (but only 10 can be specified through the configuration dialogs).

As an alternative to ISQXMON, clist script ISQGMSRT is available as a sampleapplication. Member INGEI002 in your SINGSAMP library contains the REXXsource code, together with the instructions to install and use the application.ISQGMSRT allows you to maintain interested operator lists for single targetsystems and to colorize the ISQ901I messages.

For ensembles: Interested operator lists for ensembles cannot be pre-defined usingthe configuration dialogs. If you are interested in messages from ensemble objectsto be displayed on your screen, you must first use ISQXMON to receive them,after ProcOps is started.


The following restrictions or limitations apply:v Issuing ISQXMON ON for a target system running on a target hardware in

LPAR mode has the effect that you will receive messages from other targetsystems that are running on the same target hardware.

v Issuing ISQXMON OFF for a target system running on a target hardware inLPAR mode has the effect that, as long as other target systems on that hardwarestill have set ISQXMON ON, you will receive messages from all target systemsthat share the connection.

v There is a maximum of 12 interested operators per console.v A NetView group name cannot be added or removed from a list with the

ISQXMON command.v There can be no more than 256 unique operator names in all interested operator

lists.v ISQ901I messages sent to the interested operators are suppressed in the NetView

log by ProcOps.v ISQ801I messages sent to the interested operators are suppressed in the NetView

log by ProcOps

Return Codes0 The ISQXMON command processed successfully. The operator who issued the

ISQXMON command has been added to or deleted from the interestedoperators list of the specified console, as requested.

4 You specified incorrect command syntax.6 The interested operator list is full.8 You specified a NetView group name for the list to which you want to be

added as an interested operator.16 An internal error occurred.

ISQXMON


32 The processor operations environment does not exist; the ISQXMON commandwas not processed.

ISQXOPTPurpose

The ISQXOPT command displays target system information. Some information canbe changed at this panel.

Syntax

►► ISQXOPT target_system_ProcOps_name ►◄

Requirements


Parameters

target_system_ProcOps_nameIs the name of the target system. It must be a valid target system name of 8characters or less.

Defaults

None.

Usage

Issue ISQXOPT target_system_ProcOps_name to display a full-screen panel thatshows the values of the variables that define the operation of a specific targetsystem, such as initial program load parameters and the responses to IPLmessages. The following fields cannot be modified:v Hardware modev Partitionv Target modev Operating systemv Hardware typev Automatic response selection

Examples of this panel are shown in the following:v Figure 160 on page 434 in basic-mode using an OCF-based processorv Figure 161 on page 434 in LPAR mode using an OCF-based processor

ISQXMON


Issuing this command for a non-existent target system results in a panel for aBasic-mode system with a message that the specified target system does not exist.You can recover from this condition by simply typing in the name of the desiredtarget system in the first field of the panel and pressing the Enter key. You can alsotype over the name of a valid target system on a valid panel and press the Enterkey to change the display to that for a different target system.

Some variables can be changed by typing a new value over the old value andpressing Enter. When the variable is updated, the ISQXOPT panel is displayedagain and another variable can be updated.

ISQHOPT SA z/OS - Target System Options

Modifiable options specified for target system KEY6BHardware Mode: Basic Mode Target Mode: ESA ...

... Time Offset: +00Operating System: MVS Hardware Type: eServerTarget description: KEY6 on Basic Mode HW

Image Profile Name KEY6Load Profile NameReset Profile Name KEY6BSC

Auto resp sel Y

Response to IEA101A:


Required addresses:

PF1= Help PF3= End PF6= Roll Enter= Process changes

Figure 160. Sample System Options Panel for an OCF-Based Processor in a Basic-ModeMVS Target System

ISQHOPT1 SA z/OS - Target System Options

Modifiable options specified for target system KEY6

Hardware Mode: LPAR Partition: KEY6 Target Mode: ESAOperating System: MVS Hardware Type: 9672 Time Offset: +00

Target description:

Image Profile Name KEY6Load Profile NameReset Profile NameSecondary OCF Name KEY6

Auto resp sel Y ...... (Only valid for Operating System MVS)



Required addresses:

PF1= Help PF3= End PF6= Roll Enter= Process changes

Figure 161. Sample System Options Panel for an OCF-Based Processor in LPAR-Mode MVSTarget System

ISQXOPT


The information contained in the panel is retrieved, and the NetView Viewcommand presents the panel. The information you enter is checked and errormessages are generated if the information is not valid. These error messages,which identify the field with the problem, are displayed on a separate panel thatshows all error messages for all fields.

Restrictions and Limitationsv You cannot issue the ISQXOPT command from within a program.v You must issue the ISQXOPT command from an NCCF command line.

Return Codes

Return codes are not applicable because you cannot issue this command fromwithin a program.

ISQXPSMPurpose

The ISQXPSM command starts and stops the ProcOps Service Machine (PSM) orreturns its VM CP status from the system where it is running. In addition, PSMcommands can be forwarded to the PSM for execution with this command.

Syntax

►► ISQXPSM target_hardware_name STARTSTOPSTATUSCMD( PSM command )

►◄

PSM command:

ISQACT MHISQCLEAR M

CISQQUERY Q

EISQSTATUSISQTRACE MSERV ON

CSERV OFFMHLOGGERCNSERVERTCPIP

Requirements

The requirements for this command to complete successfully are:v Processor operations must be active.v To issue a START, STOP, or STATUS command:

1. The hosting VM system and the PSM name must be defined in ProcOps.2. The VM host system of the PSM, associated with the specified

target_hardware_name, must have been initialized with the ProcOps ISQXIIIcommand.

ISQXOPT


3. A VM user, having the authority to issue XAUTOLOG, FORCE, and QUERYcommands, must be logged on to the console via SE/HMC.

v To issue a CMD command, the PSM must be active.

Parameters

target_hardware_nameThe name of a processor of type PSM.

STARTStarts the PSM virtual machine that is specified in target_hardware_name.

STOPStops the PSM virtual machine that is specified in target_hardware_name.

STATUSReturns the VM CP status for the PSM virtual machine that is specified intarget_hardware_name.

CMDForwards a PSM command to the ProcOps Service Machine of the specifiedtarget hardware for execution and returns the result.

PSM commandOne of the PSM diagnosis and service commands that is listed in the syntaxfragment, see Chapter 10, “PSM Commands - Special Requests,” on page 559for more details.

Defaults

None.

Usage

See Chapter 10, “PSM Commands - Special Requests,” on page 559 for informationabout the PSM commands that are available.


Only a subset of the available PSM commands can be used with the CMD optionof ISQXPSM. To use the full set of commands, a VM user must be logged on asPSM and enter the commands at the PSM console.

The following commands can only be entered from the PSM console directly:v ISQMSGv ISQPSMv STOPALL

Return Codes0 The ISQXPSM command completed successfully.4 One of the following occurred:v No VM host system has been defined for this PSM.v The PSM's VM host target system has not initialized.v The PSM has not been defined for the specified target hardware.v The specified target hardware type is not PSM.v There is an error in the parameter list.

6 Authorization error. Either the user ID that was checked to access the specifiedtarget hardware has not been authorized, or the allowed access level is notsufficient.

ISQXPSM


8 One of the following occurred:v ISQSEND returned an error while processing a START, STOP, or STATUS

request.v An error occurred while waiting for the response of a START, STOP, or

STATUS request.32 The ProcOps environment does not exist; the ISQXPSM command was not

processed.

ISQXUNLPurpose

The ISQXUNL command cancels a ProcOps entity lock instituted by the ISQXLOCcommand. Entities can be either target system names together with a consoledesignator or ensemble names.

Syntax

►► ISQXUNL target_system_ProcOps_name OCSC


►◄

Requirements

The requirements for this command to complete successfully are:v Processor operations must be active.v The addressed entity must not be locked by another task.v The target_system_ProcOps_name entity requires that the addressed target system

be initialized.

Parameters

target_system_ProcOps_nameIs the name of the target system for the specified console.OC Specifies the active operator console (not valid for the coupling facility).SC Specifies the active system console (not valid for OCF-based processors).

target_hardware_nameIs the name of the target hardware.S Specifies the active system console.

ensemble_ProcOps_nameIs the name of the ProcOps name of a zBX Ensemble.

Defaults

None.

Usage

The ISQXUNL command removes a entity lock established by the ISQXLOCcommand (see “ISQXLOC” on page 429). Any change in lock status is reflected inthe status facility.

ISQXPSM



The ISQXUNL command is effective only when issued from the same task thatissued ISQXLOC to establish the entity lock.

Return Codes0 The ISQXUNL command completed successfully.4 The specified entity was not locked.8 One of the following was specified:v Invalid syntaxv Invalid entity namev Target system entity that is not initialized

12 The console is locked by another task.32 The processor operations environment does not exist; the ISQXUNL command

was not processed.

For return codes greater than 12 that are not listed, a NetView CNMLOCK serviceproblem occurred.

ISQXUNL


Chapter 8. Common Commands

Common commands are preceded by the ISQCCMD command (described in detailon page “ISQCCMD” on page 363). Use common commands in APIs wheneverpossible because they provide a single product image across various hardware andsoftware implementations. Regardless of the processor type or the operatingsystem running at your target system, the common command is the same. This canpotentially minimize the need for future modifications to your automation routinesshould you modify or upgrade your processor hardware or operating system type.

ACTIVATEPurpose

The ACTIVATE command causes the target system to perform a completeinitialization. This initialization extends from a power-on reset to performing theinitial program load process.

Syntax

►► ISQCCMD target_system_ProcOps_nametarget_hardware_name.LPAR_namegroup_namesubgroup_nametarget_hardware_name

ACTIVATE ►

►FORCE(NO)

FORCE( NO )YES

CNAME(profile_name)►◄

Requirements

The requirements for the ACTIVATE command to complete successfully are:v Processor operations must be active.v The addressed target system must have a status of UNKNOWN, CLOSED, or

INITIALIZED for the default setting of FORCE(NO) to work. See Examples for alist of status settings.

Parameters

For a definition of target_system_ProcOps_name, target_hardware_name.LPAR_name,group_name, subgroup_name, and target_hardware_name see “ISQCCMD” on page363.

FORCERequests conditional processing of commands that are disruptive to theoperating system control program and application work that is in progress.Use of this operand is based on the operating state of the target processor.NO Specifies that processing of the command is to continue only if the target


CPU control program is not in the operating state. Specify FORCE(NO) ina situation where you would not want to disrupt the control programwork-in-progress.

YESSpecifies that processing of the command is to continue even if the targetCPU control program is in the operating state. Specify FORCE(YES) in asituation where disruption of the control program work-in-progress is notimportant, such as in recovery situations.

FORCE(NO) requires that the associated command fails when useful work istaking place. For ACTIVATE, fail states occur if an operating mode is detectedand FORCE(NO) is specified, or when FORCE defaults to NO. The commandfails whenever the processor is in those states.

CNAMESpecifies the name of an image or reset profile to be sent to the processor'ssupport element.

For image activation, it is recommended to let processor operations select theprofile name automatically rather than overriding processor operations'sselection with the profile_name parameter. If specified, the operand must matchthe target_hardware_name.LPAR_name.

For CPC activation, as indicated by target_hardware_name, SA z/OS uses thereset profile in the ACTIVATE operations management command that is sent tothe support element. If this keyword is not used, SA z/OS selects theactivation reset profile that is specified in the configuration dialog fortarget_hardware_name. If an activation reset profile was not specified in theconfiguration dialog, SA z/OS selects the default activation reset profile that isspecified with the CCNTL common command or on the support elementdirectly.

profile_nameIndicates the name of the image or reset profile. It is recommended thatyou let processor operations select the profile name automatically ratherthan overriding processor operations' selection with the profile_nameparameter.

Usage

Caution: The ACTIVATE command can be very disruptive when you specifyFORCE(YES), so use this command carefully. The SA z/OS processor operationsstatus facility only knows about status changes that are performed from withinSA z/OS. If you load and start a target system’s operating system outside ofSA z/OS (such as from the SA z/OS processor operations passthru facility orfrom the console at the remote target system) rather than by using the SA z/OScommands, SA z/OS does not know that the status of the target system haschanged.

The effect of the ACTIVATE FORCE keyword applies only to target systems thatare defined to SA z/OS. Because SA z/OS does not know that the target systemwas activated from outside of SA z/OS, it considers the target system status to beUNKNOWN. The functions performed by the ACTIVATE common command willdisrupt the operating system even if you specify the FORCE(NO) option, because theSA z/OS status facility does not indicate that the target system is alreadyinitialized and running.

If you do not specify FORCE(YES):

ACTIVATE


v The ACTIVATE command checks whether the same logical partition name is inuse by another target system. If so, the ACTIVATE command is rejected; if not,processing continues.

v The ACTIVATE command also checks target hardware that is not logicallypartitioned to see if the target hardware is in use by another target system. If so,the ACTIVATE command is rejected; if not, processing continues.

ACTIVATE processing can also produce the result that more target systems areaffected than the one explicitly specified in the command or those included in atarget group or subgroup specified in the command. The additional target systemsare CPC images on a processor in LPAR mode. These additional target systems areactivated when a Reset or Image profile specifies additional profile names in theAUTOACT operand. To avoid unintended activations, operators should be keptaware of the linkages between profiles.

Using either scheduled requests or auto-activated logical partitions causesSA z/OS to receive "unsolicited" responses from one or more target systems.SA z/OS uses these responses to update its status information and to attempt toinitialize the corresponding target systems.

When you specify FORCE(YES):v The ACTIVATE command overrules the requirement that a target system must

have a status of UNKNOWN, CLOSED, or INITIALIZED.v Processing of the ACTIVATE command is performed even if the target system

has a status condition of IPL COMPLETE, IPL FAILED, LOAD FAILED, or oneof the WAITING FOR...MESSAGE conditions.

The ACTIVATE command performs only the processing that is required. Forexample, it performs a power-on reset only when required, and it does notinitialize a target system that is already initialized correctly.

Remember: A real THW can only do one ACTIVATE at any time. On a VMsystem, no such restriction applies and no serialization is done.


The ACTIVATE command does not perform resource requirement checks.

The default form of the ACTIVATE command is rejected if the addressed targetsystem has a status other than UNKNOWN, CLOSED, or INITIALIZED.

Return Codes

The ISQCCMD command (see “ISQCCMD” on page 363) generates the returncodes for common command processing.

ACTIVATE of VM Guest SystemsPurpose

If a target system running on a guest machine is part of an ACTIVATE request, thisresults in an XAUTOLOG command being issued to the VM system. This starts theguest machine using the profile defined for it in VM. This profile usually causes aguest operating system (MVS, LINUX, VSE, VM) to be loaded, but it is possiblethat no IPL command is executed. This corresponds to the use of a hardware

ACTIVATE

Chapter 8. Common Commands 441

profile where no automatic IPL is done. For an MVS target system the RUN stateof the VM guest machine is set to ON.

Parameters

FORCE(YES)A CP FORCE command is issued to the VM system to stop the guest, if theguest is currently active. Then CP XAUTOLOG is issued to start the guestagain.

FORCE(NO)Guest status is checked. If the guest is known to be NOT OPERATING then aCP FORCE command is issued to stop the guest.

CP XAUTOLOG is issued. This means if the guest is already started (loggedon) and known to be processing normally, the ACTIVATE command is rejected.


The CNAME parameter is not supported.

CBUPurpose

The CBU command causes the target hardware processor to perform the specifiedcapacity backup (CBU) function if available.

With the CBU command you can temporarily increase the central processor (CP)capacity of your central processor complex (CPC). In case of an outage, which mayhave reduced your overall processor capacity, additional workload can beprocessed on that CPC.

Syntax

►► ISQCCMD target_system_ProcOps_nametarget_hardware_name.LPAR_nametarget_hardware_name

CBU ►

►CMD(STATUS)

CMD(UNDO)

CMD(ACTIVATE) PW(password)CMD(TESTACT)

►◄

Requirements

The requirements for the CBU command to complete successfully are:v Processor operations must be active.v The addressed target system must be initialized, or, if the target hardware is

addressed, at least one target system on that hardware must be initialized.v For UNDO, ACTIVATE and TESTACT, the SE of the target hardware must have

Capacity backup set to ‘Enabled’ in either the Customize Console Serviceswindow (Console Workplace 2.9 and later versions) or the Enable Support

ACTIVATE


Element Console Services window (Console Workplace 2.8 and previousversions). This applies to ACTIVATE and TESTACT regardless of whether theCBU activation password is provided or not.With Console Workplace 2.10 and later versions, for ACTIVATE and TESTACT,the CBU records must be loaded on the SE of the target hardware. Multiple CBUrecords are supported.

v With Console Workplace 2.10 and later versions, for ACTIVATE, TESTACT andUNDO, the flag 'Allow capacity change API requests' must be set in 'CustomizeAPI Settings' on the SE.

Parameters

For a definition of target_system_ProcOps_name, target_hardware_name.LPAR_name,and target_hardware_name, see “ISQCCMD” on page 363.

CBUIndicates the CBU command function to be executed.

CMDThe command to be executed

STATUSReturns the current status of the CBU facility of the addressed CPC. Thepossible status values returned are:

AVAILABLECBU is installed on the CPC.

ACTIVATEDCBU is started through ACTIVATE command.

NOT_ACTIVATEDCBU is installed but not activated.

NOT_ENABLEDCBU is installed but not enabled.

NOT_INSTALLEDCBU is not installed on the CPC.

UNAVAILABLECBU is installed but no longer available.

In addition, if the CBU Status is ACTIVATED, the activation and expirationdates are returned. Note that for System z9® and older hardware, theexpiration date corresponds to the activation period expiration date. ForSystem z10™ hardware and later, the expiration date corresponds to thecapacity record expiration date.

The ISQCCMD response message ISQ464I contains the status report.

ACTIVATEActivates the previously installed and enabled CBU.

For Console Workplace 2.10 and later versions: Multiple CBU records canexist on the SE. In this case, the decision logic is as follows:v If one of the CBU records is marked as Default, CBU Activate works with

this record.v If none of the CBU records is marked as Default, CBU Activate works with

the 'oldest' CBU record.

CBU


This Logic applies for TESTACT as well. Note that with the CBU commoncommand, it is NOT possible to select a specific CBU record.

TESTACTActivates the previously installed and enabled CBU in test mode.

UNDODeactivates a previously activated CBU to the regular configuration. Note thatthis function is not available on all CPCs supporting CBU. If the UNDOcommand fails, the regular CPC configuration must be restored by performinga POWERON-RESET of the CPC.

For Console Workplace 2.10 and later versions: Multiple CBU records canexist on the SE. In this case, the decision logic for the UNDO command is asfollows:v If one of the CBU records is marked as Default, CBU Undo works with this

record.v If none of the CBU records is marked as Default, CBU Undo works with the

'oldest' CBU record.

PW The CBU activation password for ACTIVATE or TESTACT. If provided, thispassword is used for CBU activation instead of calling the Remote ServiceFacility (RSF).

For Console Workplace 2.10 and later versions: The CBU activation passwordis no longer supported. If provided, it is ignored.

Defaults

The default of the CBU command is CMD(STATUS).

Usage

Issue the CBU command to temporarily increase the central processor (CP)capacity of your central processor complex (CPC). The increased capacity mayrequire to update your CPC's activation profiles, so that the additional processorresources can be used in your processor configuration.

Note that the term Console Workplace refers to the title line, that is displayed in theMain Application Window of each CPC Support Element. The following lists theSE Workplace Version numbers and their related IBM System names:

2.14: IBM z142.13: IBM z132.12: IBM zEC122.11: IBM z1962.10: IBM z10

For more information about CBU, see System z Capacity on Demand User's Guide orCapacity Backup User's Guide, available for the particular System z on IBM ResourceLink®.


The CBU common command is only supported for SNMP connections. Whenissuing a CBU request for another ProcOps connection type, it will be rejected.

CBU


Return Codes


CCNTLPurpose

The CCNTL commands let you modify function assignments or settings related tothe central processor complex (CPC), or list the current values of CPC attributevariables:v List or set: APNAME, ENDTSL, PPRT, and PRTv List: LASTAPRF

Syntax


CCNTL CMD ( LIST ) ►

► CMD ( UPDATE ) VAR ( vnm ) VAL ( vll ) ►

► CMD ( READ ) VAR ( vnm ) ►◄

vnm::

APNAMEENDTSLLASTAPRFPRTTPRT

Requirements

The requirements for the CCNTL command to complete successfully are:

Processor operations environmentv Processor operations must be active.v The addressed target system or target hardware.lpar must have been initialized

using the ISQXIII command.

LPAR Management environmentv SA z/OS must be fully initialized.v The processor hardware of the addressed target system or target hardware LPAR


Parameters

For a definition of target_system_ProcOps_name, andtarget_hardware_name.LPAR_name, see “ISQCCMD” on page 363.

CBU


CMDThe CPC control command that is to be executed.

LIST Returns a list of the current CPC control variable settings in aAOFA0006 response report from the target hardware.

Only variables supported by the target processor type are shown in theresponse report. Other read errors are marked as 'ReadErr:xxx' in thevariable's value field.

UPDATEChanges the value of the specified image control variable and returns aAOFA0006 response report.

Only variables supported by the target processor type can be updated.An update error is marked as 'WriteErr:xxx' in the variable's valuefield.

READ Returns the current setting of the specified CPC control variable in aAOFA0006 response report. A read error is marked as 'ReadErr:xxx' inthe variable's value field.

VARCPC control variable name vnm.

APNAMEName of the reset activation profile to be used for the next CPCactivation.

vll Profile name can have a maximum length of 19 alpha-numericcharacters.

ENDTSLFlag to indicate it for the shared logical processors on the addressedCPC the processor runtime timeslice (PRT) should end in case aprocessor enters a wait state.

vll NO - Processor timeslice is not ended.

YES - Processor timeslice is ended.

LASTAPRFName of the last profile used to ACTIVATE the CPC from the console(SE/HMC). This can only be the name of a RESET type activationprofile. This is a READONLY variable.

vll Profile name can have a maximum length of 19 alpha-numericcharacters.

PRTT Processor runtime type. Available types are 'System controlled' or 'Usercontrolled'.

vll 0 - System controlled processor runtime.

1 - User controlled processor runtime.

PRT Processor runtime value. Denotes the constant amount of time inmilliseconds, a shared logical processor gets time to perform workbefore being redispatched.

vll 1-100 is the allowed numeric value range.

Defaults

Command LIST.

CCNTL


Usage

Use this command to control the set of z System API variables for the addressedCPC. Any change goes into effect immediately. Note, that only in 'User controlled'processor runtime mode, ENDTSL and PRT settings go actually into effect.

Use APNAME to control the default activation profile assignments of a CPC. Youcan prepare CPC configuration changes, such as changes in the IOCDS, in aseparate RESET activation profile, then use this profile for the next CPC activation,and if successful use CCNTL to set it as new default activation profile.

Note, that in the processor policy of SA z/OS customization dialog, you can definea RESET activation profile to be used for a target hardware (CPC) activation. Thisis ProcOps specific and overrides the profile assignment made with CCNTL.

The RESET activation profile name that can be changed using CCNTL is thedefault name that is provided by the processor hardware. This default applies foractivation from the Support Element or the HMC operator interfaces.

Use PRTT to change the processor runtime type from system- to user-controlled, orvice-versa. Only in user-controlled mode can the duration of a shared logicalprocessor timeslice end behavior be adjusted and timeslice end behavior can bechanged. Use these adjustments carefully, as they may have an effect on the overallperformance of the addressed CPC. Before changing the PRTT, PRT, or ENDTSLsettings it is highly recommended to use the 'Processor Resource/Systems ManagerPlanning Guide' information in 'Operating logical partitions' as a reference.

The CCNTL response is returned in a AOFA0006 multi-line report. For moreinformation about this report format see the appendix "Response Messages, ErrorStrings, Condition Codes" in IBM System Automation for z/OS Messages and Codes.

In case of data access errors, please refer to the appendix section "Data ExchangeServices 0B100xxx" in IBM System Automation for z/OS Messages and Codes. Accesserrors are 'ReadErr:xxx' or 'WriteErr:xxx' strings, returned in the AOFA0006 datalines.

The command response reports from the processor hardware are available asProcOps ISQ900I messages with a console indicator of SC. Note, that the messageoriginator following the message identifier is either a ProcOps target system name,or a target hardware name together with an LPAR name. In order to get a copy ofsuch hardware messages on your screen as ISQ901I messages, use the ISQXMONcommand.

Additional Programming Information

On command completion, the immediate HW response report messages are alsoavailable in a PIPE KEEP with the name 'ISQ.SNMP'. You can directly access thisHW data when using this KEEP as your first Pipe stage. See “Using ImmediateISQCCMD Common Command Responses” on page 365.


The CCNTL common command is only supported for SNMP connections and BCPinternal interface connections configured for LPAR management. When issuing aCCNTL request for another ProcOps connection type, it is rejected.

CCNTL


Only the length of the specified APNAME name string is verified. No otheractivation profile validations are performed.

Return Codes


CLRHWMSG

Purpose

The CLRHWMSG command deletes one message from the list of messages shownin the Hardware Messages window of the Support Element or HardwareManagement console, sent to ProcOps FP system as an AOFA0400 HW messageevent report. The message selector is the timestamp, preceding the message text.This allows you to perform automated/manual housekeeping of the hardwaremessages sent to ProcOps.


CLRHWMSG ►

► MTS ( msg_timestamp ) ►◄

Requirements

The requirements for the CLRHWMSG command to complete successfully are:



Parameters

For a definition of target_hardware_ProcOps_name, target_hardware_name.LPAR_name,and target_hardware_name, see “ISQCCMD” on page 363.

MTS

msg_timestampDate and Time when the message occurred. The timestamp format is asfollows:

mm-dd-yyyy hh:mn:ss:mis

Date

mm month of the year 01-12

dd day of the month 01-31

yyyyfour digit year

Time

hh hour of day 00-23

CCNTL


mn minute of the hour 00-59

ss second of the minute 00-59

mismillisecond 000-999

Note: Depending on the processor type a two digit hundredths ofseconds value may also be specified.

Date and Time information must be separated by a blank character.

Hardware message example:07-21-2015 12:37:59:581 A logically partitioned mode event occurred.

Defaults

None.

Usage

Use this command to delete a hardware message from either the HMC or SE of theaddressed CPC, depending on its ProcOps SNMP connection address. Aftersuccessful deletion, the hardware message is no longer visible in the consolehardware message window. On completion, a AOFA0028 report is issued.


On command completion, the immediate HW response report messages are alsoavailable in a PIPE KEEP with the name 'ISQ.SNMP'. You can directly access thisHW data when using this KEEP as your first Pipe stage. See “ISQCCMD” on page363.


The CLRHWMSG common command is only supported for SNMP connections.You cannot use CLRHWMSG to perform housekeeping of multiple messages atonce. In order to delete a message you must specify the complete timestamp,including the millisecond value.

Return Codes

The ISQCCMD command generates the return codes for common commandprocessing.

CONDATAPurpose

The CONDATA command collects basic information about the console of theaddressed target hardware and presents this information in a multi-line report.

The term console designates either a Support Element (SE) or HardwareManagement Console (HMC), whatever console type is in use for the connection.

CCNTL


Syntax


CONDATA ►◄

Requirements

The requirements for the CONDATA command to complete successfully are:

Processor Operations environment

v Processor operations must be active.v The addressed target system must be initialized, or, if the target

hardware is addressed, at least one target system on that hardware mustbe initialized.

LPAR Management environment

v SA z/OS must be fully initialized.v The processor hardware of the addressed target system or target

hardware LPAR must be configured for connection type INTERNAL inthe SA z/OS customization dialogs.

Parameters


Defaults

None.

Usage

Use this command to get basic information about a console, such as console nameand type, console application version number, or the configured IP addresses ofthis console. In addition, the HW EC Level of the console is shown and if analternate console will take over automatically in case the primary fails.

The data is returned in an AOFA0022 multi-line report. For more informationabout this report format see the appendix "Response Messages, Error Strings,Condition Codes" in IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS Messages and Codes.

The command response reports from the processor hardware are available asProcOps ISQ900I messages with a console indicator of SC. Note that the messageoriginator following the message identifier is either a ProcOps target system name,or a target hardware name together with an LPAR name. In order to get a copy ofsuch hardware messages on your screen as ISQ901I messages, use the ISQXMONcommand.

This common command can also be used for processors or systems that you haveconfigured with a BCP Internal Interface connection in your SA z/OS policy. IfProcOps is active, and your common command targets a processor or system thathas the same name in your ProcOps and BCP Internal Interface configuration,ProcOps is always preferred. To avoid this, you must either stop ProcOps or usenames that are uniquely assigned to either ProcOps or the BCP Internal Interface.

CONDATA





The CONDATA common command is only supported for SNMP connections andBCP Internal Interface connections configured for LPAR Management. Whenissuing a CONDATA request for another ProcOps connection type, it will berejected.

Depending on the console version, not all basic console information is availablesuch as EC Level, console IP address or autoswitch setting. The autoswitch settingapplies only to Support Element consoles.

Return Codes


CPCDATAPurpose

The CPCDATA command collects configuration and status information about theaddressed target hardware and presents this information in a multi-line report.

The report includes CPC and IMAGE (logical partition) information if theprocessor is running in LPAR mode.

Syntax


CPCDATA ►◄

Requirements

The requirements for the CPCDATA command to complete successfully are:


v Processor operations must be active.v The addressed target system or target hardware.lpar must have been

initialized using the ISQXIII command.




CONDATA


Parameters


Defaults

None.

Usage

Use this command to get a snapshot of the current CPC and LPAR configuration.The data is returned in a AOFA0016 multiline report. For more information aboutthis report format see the appendix "Response Messages, Error Strings, ConditionCodes" in IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS Messages and Codes.






The CPCDATA common command is only supported for SNMP connections andBCP Internal Interface connections configured for LPAR Management. Whenissuing a CPCDATA request for another ProcOps connection type, it will berejected.

Return Codes


CTRLCONSPurpose

The CTRLCONS common command allows you to:v RESTART the console application of the addressed HMC or SE (for an SE, either

the primary or the alternate application can be restarted)

CPCDATA


v RESTART or SHUTDOWN the addressed HMC or SE console (for an SE, eitherthe primary or the alternate console can be restarted or shut down)

Syntax


CTRLCONS ►

► CMD(SHUTDOWN) ITEM(CONS)CMD(RESTART) ITEM(CONS)

ITEM(APPL)

TYPE(PRIMARY)

TYPE(ALTERNATE)►◄

Requirements

The requirement for the CTRLCONS command to complete successfully is:v Processor operations must be active.

Parameters


CMDThe command to be executed. Can be either RESTART or SHUTDOWN.

Note: SHUTDOWN is only allowed with ITEM(CONS). If it used withITEM(APPL), the CTRLCONS command will be rejected.

ITEMThe target of the command. Specify either:v CONS for the SE or HMC consolev APPL for the SE or HMC console application

TYPEThe type of console or console application.

PRIMARYRefers to the primary SE or HMC console or console application.

ALTERNATERefers to the secondary SE console or console application.

Note: ALTERNATE can only be used for SE connections; if it is used for anHMC connection, the CTRLCONS command will fail.

Defaults

The CTRLCONS command defaults to TYPE(PRIMARY).

Usage

Use this command to shut down or restart the HMC or SE Console or to restart theHMC or SE console application. On command execution, all ProcOps connectionsto that console or console application that are still active will be closed before

CTRLCONS


executing the Shutdown or Restart itself in order to avoid uncontrolled connectionloss as a consequence of the Shutdown or Restart command.

Note: If a console SHUTDOWN is performed, the console must be restartedmanually.


The CTRLCONS common command is only supported for SNMP connections.When issuing a CTRLCONS request for another ProcOps connection type, it willbe rejected.

All required command parameters are checked if provided with the CTRLCONScommand. All command parameters are checked for valid content.

Due to technical limitations on the SE console side, an SE Application Restart willactually be executed as a SE Console Restart.

Condition Codes

The following condition code is returned in the form 00B000xx, where xx is thecondition code:82 Invalid Session Type of ASYNC encountered. It must be SYNC.

Return Codes


DEACTIVATEPurpose

The DEACTIVATE command causes the target system to end normal operation. Italso closes the system console and operator console ports.

Syntax

►► ISQCCMD target_system_ProcOps_nametarget_hardware_name.LPAR_nametarget_hardware_namegroup_namesubgroup_name

DEACTIVATE ►

►FORCE ( NO )

FORCE( NO )YES

►◄

Requirements

Processor operations must be active for this command to complete successfully.

The addressed target system must be initialized.

CTRLCONS


Parameters

For a definition of target_system_ProcOps_name, target_hardware_name,target_hardware_name.LPAR_name, group_name, and subgroup_name, see “ISQCCMD”on page 363.

FORCERequests conditional processing of commands that are disruptive to theoperating system control program and application work that is in progress.Use of this operand is based on the operating state of the target processor.

NO Specifies that processing of the command is to continue only if the targetCPU control program is not in the operating state. Specify FORCE(NO) ina situation where you would not want to upset the control programwork-in-progress.


The default, if FORCE is not explicitly stated, is FORCE(NO).

FORCE(NO) requires that the associated command fail when useful work istaking place. The DEACTIVATE command’s formal fail criteria whenFORCE(NO) is specified or when FORCE defaults to NO is operating.

Defaults

The DEACTIVATE command defaults to FORCE(NO).

Usage

Use this common command to close a target system. Closing a target system doesthe following:v Ends any active sessions with the target systemv Disables the target systemv Performs any required end-of-day activitiesv Quiesces the target system

If this command is directed to a target hardware name rather than to a targetsystem ProcOps name, the entire processor complex is brought to a power-off state.

If you do not specify FORCE(YES), the DEACTIVATE command checks to makesure it will not be disruptive by performing the following processing:v If the target system runs in a logical partition and the same logical partition

name is initialized to another target system in the same target hardware, theDEACTIVATE command is rejected and processing of the command halts.

v On a non-partitioned target system, if the target hardware has another targetsystem initialized to it, the DEACTIVATE command is rejected and processing ofthe command halts.

Restrictions and Limitationsv When closing a target system, the DEACTIVATE common command issues an

MVS QUIESCE (or equivalent) command and hardware system reset at the

DEACTIVATE


system console port if appropriate. This processor command may be processedin the NNT-driven part of shutdown procedures, if necessary.

v The DEACTIVATE common command also performs a system reset of the targetsystem, and disables and releases the focal-point ports.

v To reinitialize a target system that was shut down with the DEACTIVATEcommon command, you must issue the ACTIVATE common command(see“ACTIVATE” on page 439).

Return Codes


DEACTIVATE of VM Guest SystemsPurpose

If a target system running in a guest machine is part of a DEACTIVATE request, aCP FORCE command is issued by the PSM for that guest machine. The VM hostsystem is not affected.

Parameters

FORCE(NO)If FORCE(NO) is specified for a guest machine, the guest status is checked. Ifit is NOT OPERATING then a CP FORCE command is issued to stop theguest. If the status is any other value, the CP FORCE command is not issuedand the DEACTIVATE request is rejected.

FORCE(YES)If FORCE(YES) is specified for a guest machine, a CP FORCE command isissued for the guest. If there is an active operating system running in the guestmachine, it is first stopped using the appropriate QUIESCE processing for theoperating system.

For LINUX systems, the use of CP FORCE command means that a shutdownsignal is sent to the operating system. This, in turn, allows the LINUX systemto initiate its own controlled shutdown process.


DEACTIVATE is not supported for target_hardware_names. (The PSM cannot bepowered off.)

EXTINTPurpose

The EXTINT command causes the target system to perform the external interruptfunction on a central processor that exists on a target hardware processor.

Syntax

►► ISQCCMD target_system_ProcOps_nametarget_hardware_name.LPAR_namegroup_namesubgroup_name

EXTINT ►◄

DEACTIVATE


Requirements


The addressed target system must be initialized for this command to completesuccessfully.

Parameters

For a definition of target_system_ProcOps_name, target_hardware_name.LPAR_name,group_name, and subgroup_name, see “ISQCCMD” on page 363.

Defaults

None.

Usage

Issue the EXTINT command to generate an interrupt request to the processorwhich will be processed at the end of the current unit of work (unless otherinterrupt requests are pending), causing the program status word (PSW) to beswapped with a new PSW, and initiating processing from an address in the newPSW.

Restrictions and Limitationsv This command is not supported for coupling facility target systems.

Return Codes

The ISQCCMD command (see ISQCCMD Return Codes) generates the return codesfor common command processing.

EXTINT for a VM Guest SystemPurpose

This causes a CP EXTERNAL KEY command to be issued for the guest machine.

GETCLUSTERPurpose

The command returns a list of the CPC addresses that are in the scope of control inthe current CPC environment. If the ProcOps SNMP connection is to a SupportElement, the list represents the defined CPCs of the so called Master HMC, whichhas the LIC Change function enabled. If the ProcOps SNMP is to a HMC, theGETCLUSTER command returns the CPC addresses of the Defined CPCs Group ofthis HMC.

Use the GETCLUSTER command to get basic information about all CPCs in theneighborhood of your CPC, regardless if the processors are defined to SystemAutomation, or not.

EXTINT


Syntax


GETCLUSTER ►◄

Requirements

The requirements for the GETCLUSTER command to complete successfully are:







Parameters


Defaults

None.

Usage



On command completion, the immediate HW response report messages are alsoavailable in a Pipe KEEP with the name 'ISQ.SNMP'. When using this KEEP asyour first Pipe stage, you can directly access this HW data.


The GETCLUSTER common command is only supported for SNMP connectionsand BCP Internal Interface connections configured for LPAR Management. Whenissuing this request for another ProcOps connection type, it will be rejected.

Return Codes


GETCLUSTER


GETIINFOPurpose

The GETIINFO command returns a subset of the CPCDATA command response. Itallows you to retrieve the status and mode of the specified target system LPARtogether with the defined LPAR number. If available, OS-related information suchas operating system name or version data is returned.

Use the GETIINFO command if you know the LPAR name or system name andyou are interested only in HW information for this LPAR or system. Forperformance reasons you are not recommended to use CPCDATA in such cases.

Syntax

►► ISQCCMD target_system_ProcOps_nametarget_hardware_name.LPAR_name

GETIINFO ►◄

Requirements

The requirements for the GETIINFO command to complete successfully are:







Parameters

None.

Defaults

None.

Usage




GETIINFO



The GETIINFO common command is only supported for SNMP connections andBCP Internal Interface connections configured for LPAR Management. Whenissuing this request for another ProcOps connection type, it will be rejected.

Return Codes


GETILDIPurpose

The GETILDI query command returns the load parameter information used withthe last executed LOAD of the specified target system or LPAR.

Use the GETILDI command if you know the LPAR name or system name and youare interested in getting the IPL address and load parameters used for the last IPL.

Syntax

►► ISQCCMD target_system_ProcOps_nametarget_system_name.LPAR_name

GETILDI ►◄

Requirements

The requirements for the GETILDI command to complete successfully are:





Parameters

None.

Defaults

None.

Usage

GETILDI can be used to implement re-IPL automation without the need topreconfigure this in the operating system. Prior to the re-IPL, simply query the last

GETIINFO


used load address and loadparm data and use this information with the new loadcommand when re-IPLing the specified target system or LPAR.

Note, that specifying LOAD without a load address or loadparm uses the ProcOpsprepared defaults from the ProcOps Policy or the runtime overwrite dialogISQXOPT. If no such default information is available, ProcOps passes the loadcommand to the console (SE/HMC). The console tries to supplement the missingLOAD parameters with data found from the last LOAD for the LPAR using theconsole GUI. This information may however be no longer valid. It is thereforerecommended to use GETILDI to determine the accurate last used loadinformation prior to performing automated re-IPLs with SA z/OS.


On command completion, the immediate HW response report messages are alsoavailable in a Pipe KEEP with the name 'ISQ.SNMP'. When using this KEEP asyour first PIPE stage, you can directly access this HW data.


The GETILDI common command is only supported for SNMP connections andBCP internal interface connections configured for LPAR management. Whenissuing this request for another ProcOps connection type, it is rejected.

Return Codes


GETIPSW


GETIPSW ►◄

Purpose

The GETIPSW command returns the content of the Program Status Word of alogical partition for each active central processor.

Requirements

The requirements for the GETIPSW command to complete successfully are:


v Processor operations must be active.v The addressed target system or target.lpar must have been initialized





GETIINFO


Parameters

For a definition of target_system_ProcOps_name andtarget_hardware_name.LPAR_name, see “ISQCCMD” on page 363.

Defaults

None.

Usage

You can use GETIPSW to determine Disabled Wait State Condition details. If thecommand is entered when all CPs are operational and the status of the image(LPAR) is OPERATING, then the returned PSW information is undetermined.




The GETIPSW common command is only supported for SNMP connections andBCP Internal Interface connections configured for LPAR management. Whenissuing this request for another ProcOps connection type, it is rejected.

Return Codes


GETISTATPurpose

The GETISTAT command returns a subset of the CPCDATA command response. Itallows you to retrieve the current HW status of a target system LPAR.

Use the GETISTAT command if you know the LPAR name or system name andyou are interested only in HW information for this LPAR or system. Forperformance reasons you are not recommended to use CPCDATA in such cases.

Syntax


GETISTAT ►◄

Requirements

The requirements for the GETISTAT command to complete successfully are:


v Processor operations must be active.

GETIINFO


v The addressed target system or target hardware.lpar must have beeninitialized using the ISQXIII command.




Parameters

None.

Defaults

None.

Usage





The GETISTAT common command is only supported for SNMP connections andBCP Internal Interface connections configured for LPAR Management. Whenissuing this request for another ProcOps connection type, it will be rejected.

Return Codes


GETITKNPurpose

The GETITKN command returns the current IPL TOKEN value of the addressedtarget system LPAR.

Use the GETITKN command if you know the LPAR name or system name and youare interested in the token value to find out if there has been a value change sincethe last time it was set.

GETISTAT


►► ISQCCMD target_system_ProcOps_nametarget_system_name.LPAR_name

GETITKN ►◄

Requirements

The requirements for the GETITKN command to complete successfully are:





Parameters

None.

Defaults

None.

Usage

LOAD, SYSTEM RESET, and entering a DISABLED WAIT, all change the value ofthe IPL TOKEN associated with the LPAR. The token is known to both, thehardware and the operating system. Given that you query the token value directlyafter a successful LOAD(IPL) and days later the token query returns a differentvalue, you have determined that the lifetime of your initiated IPL ended, maybeearlier than expected by a SYSTEM RESET, DISABLED WAIT or another LOAD(IPL).




Note, that the IPL TOKEN support is available with console version 2.10.1 or later.With older hardware you may receive an 'object not defined' error.

The GETITKN common command is only supported for SNMP connections andBCP internal interface connections configured for LPAR management. Whenissuing this request for another ProcOps connection type, it is rejected.

GETISTAT


Return Codes


GETSDGRPurpose

The command returns the reason details available from target hardware processorsthat operate in DEGRADED state.

Use the GETSDGR command if you need information about the reason of theDEGRADED status.

Syntax


GETSDGR ►◄

Requirements

The requirements for the GETSDGR command to complete successfully are:







Parameters


Defaults

None.

ISQVARS Keywords

NOT_DEGRADEDSystem is not in DEGRADED mode

MEM_REDUCEDLoss of memory

MEM_BUS_FAILURELoss of channels due to CPC hardware failure

GETISTAT


NODE_NOT_RUNNINGOne or more books are no longer functioning

RING_OPENThe ring connecting the books is open

CBU_EXPIRATIONCapacity backup resources have expired

MRU_FAILUREModular Refrigeration Unit (cooling) problem

TEMPERATURE_PROBLEMProcessor frequency reduced due to temperature problem

IML_WAS_IN_DEGRADED_MODECPC was IMLed during temperature problem

Usage





The GETSDGR common command is only supported for SNMP connections andBCP internal interface connections configured for LPAR management. Whenissuing this request for another ProcOps connection type, it will be rejected.

Not all processor types provide DEGRADED support. If you issue GETSDGR forsuch target hardware, the GETSDGR command will fail with a condition code of0B100001, object not defined, which means that the HW does not provide thisfunction.

Return Codes


GETSINFOPurpose

The GETSINFO command returns a subset of the CPCDATA command response. Itallows you to retrieve the status and mode of the specified target hardwaretogether with information about the machine type model or serial number.

GETSDGR


Use the GETSINFO command if you know the target hardware or a target systemname running on that hardware. For performance reasons you are notrecommended to use CPCDATA in such cases.

Syntax


GETSINFO ►◄

Requirements

The requirements for the GETSINFO command to complete successfully are:







Parameters


Defaults

None.

Usage





The GETSINFO common command is only supported for SNMP connections andBCP Internal Interface connections configured for LPAR Management. Whenissuing this request for another ProcOps connection type, it will be rejected.

GETSINFO


Return Codes


GETSSTATPurpose

The GETSSTAT command returns a subset of the CPCDATA command response. Itallows you to retrieve the current HW status of target hardware.

Use the GETSSTAT command if you know the target hardware or a target systemname running on that hardware. For performance reasons you are notrecommended to use CPCDATA in such cases.

Syntax


GETSSTAT ►◄

Requirements

The requirements for the GETSSTAT command to complete successfully are:







Parameters


Defaults

None.



GETSINFO



The GETSSTAT common command is only supported for SNMP connections andBCP Internal Interface connections configured for LPAR Management. Whenissuing this request for another ProcOps connection type, it will be rejected.

Return Codes


ICNTLPurpose

The ICNTL common command allows you to query and change LPAR-specificvalues and settings. The PR/SM™ hardware component or WLM use thisinformation to manage partition performance and to distribute shared processorresources among the images of a CPC. Changing the image control values andsettings with ICNTL allows you to influence LPAR performance and LPARresource capacities at run time.

Syntax


ICNTL ►

►CMD(LIST)

CMD(UPDATE) VAR( vnm ) VAL(vll)CMD(READ) VAR( vnm )

PT(GPP)

PT( proctp )►◄

vnm:

GETSSTAT


ACFLGACVALAESFLGAPNAMECCBFLGCCCFLGCCPFLGCLUSTRCSBFLGCSDFLGCXCFLGDEAFLGDEFCAPGACFLGGACVALGPDCFLGGRPCAPGRPPRFIOCTLFLGLASTAPRFLPARIFLGLPARXFLGPWCPWCCPWIPWICPWMNPWMXWLME

proctp:

GPPAAPIFLICFIIP

Requirements

The requirements for the ICNTL command to complete successfully are:







Parameters

For a definition of target_system_ProcOps_name andtarget_hardware_name.LPAR_name, see “ISQCCMD” on page 363.

ICNTL


CMDThe image control command that is to be executed.

LISTReturns a list of the current image control variable settings in a AOFA0007response report from the target hardware image.

Only variables supported by the target processor type are shown in theresponse report. Other read errors are marked as 'ReadErr:xxx' in thevariable value field.

Refer to the appendix section "Data Exchange Services "0B100xxx" in IBMTivoli System Automation for z/OS Messages and Codes, if you receive'ReadErr:xxx' responses for additional information.

UPDATEChanges the value of the specified image control variable and returns anAOFA0007 response report.

READReturns the current setting of the specified image control variable in anAOFA0007 response report.

VARImage control variable name vnm.

ACFLAGFlag that indicates whether LPAR absolute capping capability is active andprocessor value settings are permitted.

Value information:

YESAbsolute shared processor capping is enabled. The processor ACVALsetting is used and can be changed for the selected processor type. Thisprocessor value is the upper limit. Available shared processor valuesthat exceed the capping limit are not assigned to the LPARs in thegroup.

NO Absolute shared processor capping is disabled. The processor ACVALvalue is not used and cannot be changed. The assignment of sharedprocessor values for the LPAR is dynamically determined and adjustedaccording to the available resources for that processor type.

Note: Absolute capping is supported on console version 2.12.1 or later.

ACVALShared processor value. Defines the upper limit of shared processor valuesa LPAR can get when the ACFLAG is set to YES.

Value Information:

The allowed absolute capping processor value range is: 0.01 - 255.0

Note: Absolute capping is supported on console version 2.12.1 or later. Ifthe ACFLG is set to 'NO', an undetermined value (for example, '-1') may bereturned by the hardware when querying ACVAL. Ignore this value, donot interpret it for any reason.

AESFLGThe logical partition allows to import AES encryption keys.

Value Information:

ICNTL


YESThe flag is enabled.

NO The flag is disabled.

Note: A LIST request does not reference this variable, and only explicitqueries are supported.

APNAMEName of the activation profile to be used for the next image activation.

Value Information:

alpha-numProfile name can have a maximum length of 19 alpha-numericcharacters.

Note: Assigning a profile name different from the image's name istolerated, but has no effect on the image ACTIVATE command whenspecified without an activation profile name. In this case, the imageactivation profile having the name of the LPAR is always used.

CCBFLGBasic CPU counter control. If the flag is enabled, the function can be used.

Value information:




CCCFLGCrypto activity CPU counter control. If the flag is enabled, the function canbe used.

Value information:




CCPFLGProblem state CPU counter control. If the flag is enabled, the function canbe used.

Value information:




ICNTL


CLUSTRName of the CPC LPAR cluster that the LPAR belongs to.

This is a READONLY variable. Value information: Cluster of one or moreLPARs, running on one zSeries 900 or later CPC, that are in the samesysplex and are running z/OS 1.1 or later in z/Architecture® mode. Thescope of an LPAR Cluster is currently the same as the scope of an I/OCluster, however the term LPAR Cluster is also used in relation to WLMLPAR CPU Management and Channel Subsystem I/O Priority Queuing.LPAR clusters are used for z/OS Intelligent Resource Director (IRD)capabilities. Cluster names can be defined using HCD.

CSBFLGBasic CPU sampling control. If the flag is enabled, the function can beused.

Value information:




CSDFLGDiagnostic sampling authorization control. This function applies only if theCSBFLG is set to YES. The CSDFLG controls whether it is allowed tocontrol or collect sampling data, such as instruction addresses and CPUinformation.

Value information:




CXCFLGExtended CPU counter control. If the flag is enabled, the function can beused.

Value information:




DEAFLGThe logical partition allows to import DEA encryption keys.

Value information:


ICNTL




DEFCAPDefined capacity.

Value information:0 No defined capacity for the LPAR.1–2147483647

Amount of defined LPAR capacity.

Note that the maximum value represents the highest value accepted bythe SE/HMC, which may not represent the correct capacity limit inyour environment.

The defined capacity expressed in terms of Millions of Service Units(MSUs) per hour. MSUs is a measure of processor resource consumption.The amount of MSUs that a logical partition consumes is dependent on themodel, the number of logical processors that are available to the partition,and the amount of time that the logical partition is dispatched. The definedcapacity value specifies how much of the logical partition capacity is to bemanaged by Workload Manager (WLM) for the purpose of softwarepricing.

GACFLGFlag that indicates whether LPAR absolute group capping capability isactive and processor value settings are permitted.

Value information:

YESAbsolute shared processor group capping is enabled. The processorGACVAL setting is used and can be changed for the group assigned toselected LPAR. This processor value is the upper limit. Availableshared processor values that exceed the capping limit are not assignedto the LPARs in the group.

NO Absolute shared processor group capping is disabled. The processorGACVAL value is not used and cannot be changed. The assignment ofshared processor values for the LPAR is dynamically determined andadjusted according to the available resources for that processor type, orif the ACFLG is set to YES and a valid ACVAL is set for the LPAR, thiscapping value goes into effect.

Note: Absolute group capping is supported on console version 2.13.1 orlater.

GACVALShared processor group value. Defines the upper limit of the processorvalue that is shared among the LPARs assigned to the group.

Value information:


Note: Absolute capping is supported on console version 2.13.1 or later. Incase the GACFLG is set to 'NO', an undetermined value (for example, '-1')may be returned by the hardware when querying GACVAL. Ignore thisvalue, and do not interpret it by any means.

ICNTL


GPDCFLGGlobal performance data control flag. If the flag is enabled, the partitioncan view CP utilization and IO busy data for all partitions in theconfiguration. If the flag is disabled, only the data of the own partition canbe viewed.

Value information:




GRPCAPDefined group capacity.

Value information:0 No defined group capacity for the LPAR.1-2147483647

Amount of defined group capacity the LPAR belongs to.


The defined capacity expressed in terms of Millions of Service Units(MSUs) per hour. MSUs is a measure of processor resource consumption.

GRPPRFGroup Profile name where the addressed target system or logical partitionis a member. Members of capacity groups share a common MSU value.This is an alternative to the DEFCAP specification, where the MSU value ispartition-specific. You can change the MSU CAPACITY value of a groupprofile using the PROFILE common command.

Note: With console version 2.13.1 or later, groups additionally allowabsolute capping of shared processor values, applicable to all LPARsassigned to that group. Group assignments can be made at LPAR run-time,or preconfigured in the image activation profile. Only one groupassignment at a time is possible for an LPAR.

Value information:

nnnnnnnnThe name of the group profile. The name must be alpha-numeric and amaximum of eight characters. If you specify a name that does not existas an activation profile of type GROUP, the ICNTL command fails witha condition code of 0B100005.

Note: GRPPRF is available on System z processors or later. ReadingGRPPRF on older processors will return GRPPRF without a value.Updating GRPPRF on older processors fails with a condition code of0B100001.

. (dot) specifying a dot as value, clears GRPPRF.

IOCTLFLGInput/Output configuration control flag. If the flag is enabled, the partition

ICNTL


is authorized to read and write any non-write protected IOCDS in theconfiguration and can change the configuration dynamically.

Value information:




LASTAPRFName of the last profile used to activate the image with the console(SE/HMC). This can be either an image activation profile, which implicitlyhas the name of the partition, or is the name of a load activation profile.This is a READONLY variable.

Value information:

alpha-numProfile name can have a maximum length of 19 alpha-numericcharacters.

LPARIFLGLogical partition isolation flag. If the flag is enabled, unshared butreconfigurable channel paths remain in exclusive use for that partition.

Value informations:




LPARXFLGCross partition flag. Operation management commands to other LPARs canbe sent over the BCPii only when this flag is enabled. This is aREADONLY variable.

Value informations:




PWCCurrent processing weight.

This is a READONLY variable.

Value information:0 The CPC image does not represent a logical partition, or the LPAR has

only dedicated processors assigned to it.

ICNTL


1–999Represents the relative amount of shared processor resources that iscurrently allocated to the LPAR.

PWCCCurrent processing weight capped indicator.

This is a READONLY variable.

Value information:YES

The current processing weight for the LPAR is capped. It represents themaximum share of processor resources regardless of the availability ofexcess processor resources.

NO The current processing weight for the LPAR is not capped. Itrepresents the share of resources that is guaranteed to the LPAR whenall CP resources are in use. When excess processor resources areavailable, the LPAR can use them if necessary.

PWIInitial processing weight.


only dedicated processors assigned to it. This value is not valid forUPDATE.

1–999Represents the relative amount of shared processor resources that isinitially allocated to the LPAR.

Note: If the WLME flag has a value of YES, the PWI value must be in therange from PWMN to PWMX.

PWICInitial processing weight capped indicator.


The initial processing weight for the LPAR is capped. It represents themaximum share of processor resources regardless of the availability ofexcess processor resources.

NO The initial processing weight for the LPAR is not capped. It representsthe share of resources that is guaranteed to the LPAR when all CPresources are in use. When excess processor resources are available, theLPAR can use them if necessary.

PWMNMinimum processing weight.

The guaranteed minimum share of non-dedicated processor weight, whenall processing resources are in use.



1–999A value that is less than or equal to the initial processing weight that isused to define the minimum relative amount of shared processorresources that is allocated to the LPAR.

ICNTL


Note: This value is only applied if the WLME flag has a value of YES.

PWMXMaximum processing weight.

Maximum relative amount of shared processor resources for this LPAR.



1–999A value that is greater than or equal to the initial processing weightthat is used to define the maximum relative amount of sharedprocessor resources that is allocated to the LPAR.


WLMEWorkload Manager Enabled flag.


z/OS Workload Manager is used to manage shared processor resourcesfor a logical partition, according to the settings of the minimum andmaximum weight specifications.

NO PR/SM is managing the processing weight. The PWMN and PWMXvalues do not apply.

VALValue specification for variable UPDATE operation.

vllSee the value information for the VAR parameter.

PT The Processor Type parameter allows you to specify which processor type thecorresponding Image Control information should be read or updated for.

proctp The processor type:GPP General Purpose ProcessorAAP Application Assist ProcessorIFL Integrated Facility for LINUX processorICF Internal Coupling Facility processorIIP z9 Integrated Information Processor

Notes:

1. The IFA processor type (Integrated Facility for Application processor) hasbeen replaced by AAP.

2. You cannot specify special purpose processors (AAP, IFL, ICF, IIP) for theCLUSTR, DEFCAP, GRPCAP, GRPPRF or WLME command parameters.

Defaults

If no ICNTL parameters are specified, a CMD(LIST) is executed.

If no processor type is specified with the PT parameter, the default value of GPP(general purpose processor) is used.

ICNTL


Usage

The ICNTL common command can be used to set LPAR performance relatedparameters, such as an LPAR's initial processing weight, PWI, or the DefinedCapacity, DEFCAP.

For example, DEFCAP can be used to automate the lowering and raising of theMSU value (defined capacity, soft-cap). This LPAR value is important whenSub-Capacity License charging for software is in place. An optimized setting of theDEFCAP value can help to control software cost.

The equivalent to the ICNTL common command can be performed on the HMCusing the CPC Operational Customization tasks: Change LPAR Controls andChange LPAR Group Controls.






The ICNTL common command is only supported for SNMP connections and BCPInternal Interface connections configured for LPAR Management. If you issue anICNTL request for another ProcOps connection type, it will be rejected.

The ICNTL common command works only for processors running in LPAR mode.Depending on the processor machine type, the number of ICNTL variables mayvary. Use ICNTL CMD(LIST) to determine the set of the available ICNTL variablesfor a processor.

You cannot specify special purpose processors (AAP, IFL, ICF, IIP) for the CLUSTR,DEFCAP, or WLME command parameters.

For Special Purpose Processor types (AAP, IFL, ICF, IIP), variables ‘CLUSTR’,‘DEFCAP’ and ‘WLME’ are not supported.

For an ICF-type (Internal Coupling Facility processor) special purpose processor,ensure that LPAR that you specify corresponds to a Coupling Facility LPAR inorder to read or update meaningful values.

ICNTL


Condition Codes

The following are condition codes that ICNTL might encounter. They are returnedin the form 00B000xx, where xx is the condition code.62 No (valid) ICNTL command (LIST, UPDATE, READ) is specified in the request

or the command is incomplete. The request is rejected.63 The variable name that is specified in the request is not supported. The request

is rejected.65 The value operand of the request was not recognized by ICNTL. The request is

rejected. Contact IBM Support.6G The processor type value of the request is invalid. The request is rejected.

Return Codes


LOADPurpose

The LOAD command performs the initial program load process for a target systemprocessor. This command is not supported for coupling facility target systems.

Syntax


LOADCLEAR(NO)

CLEAR(YES)►

►FORCE(NO)

FORCE( NO )YES

▼

CNAME(profile_name)IPLADDR(ipl_address)IPLPARM(ipl_parameter)

►◄

Requirements

The requirements for this command to complete successfully are:v Processor operations must be active.v The addressed target system must be initialized.v The addressed target system must have a status of at least INITIALIZED.v The addressed target system cannot have a status of UNKNOWN, CLOSED, or

IPLCOMPLETE for the default setting of FORCE(NO) to work.

Parameters


ICNTL


CLEAR(NO)Indicates the function of clearing storage is not to be performed; the LOADcommon command issues a normal LOAD command. No space is allowedbetween the keyword CLEAR and the left parenthesis. This is the default.

CLEAR(YES)Indicates the function of clearing storage is to be performed; the LOADcommon command issues a LOADCLEAR command. No space is allowedbetween the keyword CLEAR and the left parenthesis.


CPU control program is not in the operating state. Specify FORCE(NO) ina situation where you would not want to upset the control programwork-in-progress.



FORCE(NO) requires that the associated command fails when useful work istaking place. For this command the formal fail criteria when FORCE(NO) isspecified or when FORCE defaults to NO is the operating state.

IPLADDRIndicates that the variable following it in parenthesis is the IPL addressparameter.

(ipl_address)Specifies the IPL address as four hexadecimal digits. No space is allowedbetween the keyword IPLADDR and the left parenthesis.

IPLPARMIndicates that the variable following it in parenthesis is an IPL parameter.

(ipl_parameter)Specifies an IPL parameter to be issued with the Load command. Thisparameter can be 1 through 8 characters long. Lowercase letters aretranslated to uppercase letters. No space is allowed between the keywordIPLPARM and the left parenthesis.

CNAMESpecifies the name of a Load profile to be sent to the processor's supportelement. If this keyword is not used, the LOAD operations managementcommand that SA z/OS sends to the support element has a CNAME operandwith the Load profile name that was specified in the configuration dialogs.

If this keyword is not used and no Load profile name was specified in theconfiguration dialogs, SA z/OS omits the CNAME operand from the LOADcommand sent to the support element. In this latter case, the support elementuses the load parameters that were saved from the last LOAD command forthe corresponding target image.

profile_nameIndicates the name of the Load profile. IBM recommends that you let

LOAD


SA z/OS select the profile name automatically rather than overriding theSA z/OS selection with the profile_name parameter.

Defaults

The LOAD command defaults to CLEAR(NO) and to FORCE(NO).

The ipl_address and ipl_parameter parameter default to the values defined in theconfiguration dialogs, unless they have been changed with the ISQVARS orISQXOPT command, see “ISQXOPT” on page 433, in which case the valuesdefined by the ISQVARS or ISQXOPT command are used.

For OCF-based processors, the ipl_address and ipl_parameter parameters default tothe values specified in the Load profile.

Usage

This common command assumes that the processor operations environment hasbeen established and that the system console function has been assigned. For atarget system operating on an LPAR-mode processor, it also assumes that thelogical partition is active and that any required channels are online to the partition.If these assumptions are not correct, other initialization commands should be runfirst. These functions of the LOAD common command are all performed by theACTIVATE common command.

If you do not specify FORCE(YES), the LOAD common command checks to makesure it will not be disruptive by performing the following processing:v If the target system runs in a logical partition and the same logical partition

name is initialized to another target system in the same target hardware, theLOAD command is rejected and processing of the command halts.

v On a non-partitioned target system, if the target hardware has another targetsystem initialized to it, the LOAD command is rejected and processing of thecommand halts.


This command is not supported for coupling facility target systems.

If you do not specify FORCE(YES), the LOAD common command is rejected if theaddressed target system has a status of UNKNOWN, CLOSED, or IPLCOMPLETE. To perform the load process for a target system that is in a statuscondition of UNKNOWN or CLOSED, issue the ACTIVATE common command(see “ACTIVATE” on page 523). If the addressed target system has a status ofIPLCOMPLETE, you can specify FORCE(YES) to perform the IPL process withoutdeactivating the target system first.

For SNMP connections, if a CNAME keyword is specified with the LOADcommand, any other load keyword operands are ignored. Note that this does notapply to the FORCE(YES) or FORCE(NO) parameter.

Return Codes


LOAD


LOAD for a VM Guest SystemPurpose

The CP IPL command is issued for the guest machine. (This assumes that the guestmachine is already active.)

Parameters

IPLADDRThis parameter must be present.

IPLPARMThis parameter is translated into a LOADPARM operand.


The CNAME parameter is not supported.

OOCODPurpose

The OOCOD common command allows you to:v Query the status of the On/Off Capacity on Demand feature for a specific CPCv Activate the On/Off Capacity on Demand featurev Undo a previously performed Activate

Syntax


OOCOD ►

►CMD ( STATUS )

CMD ( UNDO )CMD ( ACTIVATE ) CTR ( contrno )

►◄

Requirements

The requirements for the OOCOD command to complete successfully are:v Processor operations must be active.v The addressed target system must be initialized, or, if the target hardware is

addressed, at least one target system on that hardware must be initialized.v For the STATUS command: No further requirements.v For the ACTIVATE command: The On/Off Capacity on Demand feature must be

enabled and installed and be in a status of not activated.v For UNDO: This is only applicable after a successful ACTIVATE.v With Console Workplace 2.10 and later versions, for ACTIVATE and UNDO, the

flag 'Allow capacity change API requests' must be set in 'Customize APISettings' on the SE.

LOAD


Parameters


CMDThe OOCOD command that is to be executed. This can be:STATUS

Query the status of the On/Off Capacity on Demand feature and issue areport. If activated, the activation date is also provided.

Note: The INSTALLED status is set when an On/Off Capacity on Demandcontract is activated. If no contract is active, the status is NOTINSTALLED.

ACTIVATEPut the On/Off Capacity on Demand feature in an active state. Thiscommand requires a valid contract number for successful execution.

UNDOPut the On/Off Capacity on Demand feature in an inactive state.

CTROnly required for the ACTIVATE command. The order number (contrno) mustcorrespond to a valid contract number for the hardware that has the On/OffCapacity on Demand feature implemented.

Note: For SE Console Workplace 2.10 and later versions, contrno correspondsto the record ID of one of the On/Off Capacity on Demand records that havealready been loaded on the processor hardware.

Defaults

The OOCOD command defaults to STATUS.

Usage

Use the OOCOD command to activate and deactivate the On/Off Capacity onDemand feature. You can retrieve the current On/Off Capacity on Demand featuresettings with the STATUS command.

Note that the term Console Workplace refers to the title line that is displayed in theMain Application Window of each CPC Support Element. The following lists theSE Workplace Version numbers and their related IBM System names:


For more information about OOCOD, see System z Capacity on Demand User'sGuide, available for the particular System z on IBM Resource Link.


The OOCOD command is only supported for SNMP connections. If you issue anOOCOD request for another ProcOps connection type, it will be rejected.

OOCOD


The OOCOD command applies only to hardware that supports the On/OffCapacity on Demand feature. For other hardware, the OOCOD command will fail.

Condition Codes

The following lists the condition codes that are returned in the form 00B000xx,where xx is the condition code:83 Invalid OOCOD command provided (it must be STATUS, ACTIVATE or

UNDO).84 No Order Number (CTR) provided for the OOCOD ACTIVATE command.85 The current ooCoD status of the target does not allow the action (for example,

an UNDO without a previous ACTIVATE).

Return Codes


POWERMODPurpose

The POWERMOD common command allows you to:v Query the power mode status of a specific CPCv Change the power mode of a specific CPC (Static power save mode)

Static power save mode is designed to reduce power consumption on z196 whenfull performance is not required. It can be switched on and off during runtimewith no disruption to currently running workloads, aside from the change inperformance.

Syntax


POWERMOD ►

►CMD(STATUS)

CMD(UPDATE) VAL(mode-value)►◄

Requirements

The requirements for the POWERMOD command to complete successfully are:v Processor operations must be active.v The addressed target system must be initialized or, if the target hardware is

addressed, at least one target system on that hardware must be initialized.v Hardware Console Workplace must be version 2.11 or higher.v For the STATUS command: No further requirements.v For the UPDATE command: The CPC must be allowed or entitled to perform a

power mode change.

OOCOD


Parameters


CMDThe POWERMOD command that is to be executed. This can be:STATUS

Query the power mode status of the CPC. The report issued by thecommand contains the following information:v Current power mode settingv Supported power mode valuesv Power mode change allowed (Y/N)

UPDATEChange the CPC's power mode, for example, from 100 (High Performance)to one of the supported Power Save values.

VALOnly required for the UPDATE command. Contains the power mode the CPCshould be changed to.

Defaults

The POWERMOD command defaults to STATUS.

Usage

Use the POWERMOD command to query and the change the CPC's power mode.

Note that the term 'Console Workplace' refers to the title line, displayed on theMain Application Window of each CPC Support Element (SE) or on the HardwareManagement Console (HMC).

The following lists the SE/HMC Workplace Versions numbers and their relatedIBM System names:



The POWERMOD command applies only to hardware that supports the PowerManagement feature. For other hardware, the POWERMOD command will fail.

The POWERMOD command is only supported for SNMP connections. If you issuea POWERMOD request for another Processor operations connection type, it will berejected.

On air-cooled models, Static power save mode can be entered only once in acalendar day.

POWERMOD


Condition Codes

The following lists the condition codes that are returned in the form 00B00xxx,where xx is the condition code:097

Unable to retrieve CPC's current power mode status.098

Unable to retrieve CPC's supported power modes list.099

Unable to retrieve power mode change allowed information.100

Unsupported POWERMOD command.101

Invalid POWERMOD 'UPDATE' parameter.

Return Codes


PROFILEPurpose

The PROFILE common command allows you to access the activation profiles of aCPC. Activation profiles contain configuration information about the CPC itselfand its images (LPARs), as well as load information for the operating systems to beinitialized on the CPC or its LPARs.

With PROFILE, the names of the activation profiles can be listed and the content ofa profile can be queried. The profile content can be changed.

The activation profiles are stored in the Support Element of a CPC. They are usedfor CPC or image activation and for processor load operations that are executedusing load profile information.

Syntax


PROFILE ►

► CMD( OPEN )CLOSE

CMD(LIST) TYPE( ptype )PT(GPP)

CMD(UPDATE) update parmsCMD(READ) read parms PT( proctp )

►◄

ptype:

RESETIMAGELOADGROUP

POWERMOD


update parms:

TYPE( ptype ) NAME(pname) VAR( pvar ) VAL(pval)

read parms:

TYPE( ptype ) NAME(pname)VAR( pvar )

proctp:

GPPAAPIFLICFIIP

pvar:

timecpctcryploadcpwghtcpctymemacppDESCENDTSLGPDCFLGGRPPRFIMODEIOCTLFLGIOCDSLICVFLGLPARIFLGLPARXFLGPRTPRTT

time:

CLOCKXDCLOCKXHCLOCKXICLOCKXMCLOCKT

PROFILE


cpct:

CCBFLGCCCFLGCCGFLGCCPFLGCSBFLGCSDFLGCXCFLG

mem:

CSCSRESESESRES

cryp:

AESFLGDEAFLG

load:

AUTOIPLBRLBABPSIPLADRIPLPRMIPLTYPOSSLPLUNWWPN

cp:

CPDCPDRESCPSCPSRES

cpcty:

CAPACITYDEFCAP

wght:

PWIPWICPWMNPWMXWLME

PROFILE


acpp:

ACFLGACVALGACFLGGACVAL

Requirements

The requirements for the PROFILE command to complete successfully are:







Parameters


CMDThe profile command that is to be executed. This can be:OPEN

This command must be executed as the first profile access command. Itbuilds an internal list of the available profiles names for faster profileaccess. On successful completion an AOFA0020 report is returned, with thenumber of the available activation profiles for each of the profile types.

CLOSEThis command should be executed when your profile access is complete. Itclears the internal profile name list. If the CLOSE is omitted, you canre-access the profiles without performing an OPEN command, however theinternal profile list may no longer be current. On completion, anAOFA0020 report is returned.

LISTReturns a list of the profile names for the specified profile TYPE in anAOFA0020 response report.

UPDATEThe content of the specified profile variable is changed to the valuedefined with the VAL parameter. The update response is returned in anAOFA0020 report. The update fails or is rejected if the hardware detects aninvalid value.

READReturns the contents of the specified profile NAME and TYPE in anAOFA0020 response report. If a VAR parameter is added, only the contentof the specified profile variable is returned.

Note that if the profile content is retrieved, variable names without a valuemay be listed. If this is the case, either the CPC does not support thisprofile variable, or a supported variable is not initialized.

PROFILE


You can use the HMC's CPC Operational Customization Task:Customize/Delete Activation Profiles to determine which profile variablesare supported by a CPC's machine type.

TYPEThe activation profile type, ptype, which can be one of the following:RESET

This profile type is used to activate a CPC. The following profile variablesare supported: IOCDS, ENDTSL, PRT, PRTT.

IMAGEThis profile type is used to activate images (LPARs). The following profilevariables are supported: AUTOIPL, BRLBA, BPS, CS, CSRES, CPD,CPDRES, DEFCAP, ES, ESRES, GRPPRF, IPLADR, IPLPRM, IPLTYP, LUN,OSSLP, PWI, PWIC, PWMN, PWMX, WLME, WWPN.

LOADThis profile type is used to load a CPC or an image. The following profilevariables are supported: BRLBA, BPS, IPLADR, IPLPRM, IPLTYP, LUN,OSSLP, WWPN.

GROUPThis profile type is used to define capacity limits for a group of logicalpartitions. The CAPACITY profile variable is supported.

NAMEThe activation profile name.

pnameName, 1-16 alphanumeric characters, without blanks. The named profilemust be available on the Support Element.

VARThe activation profile variable name pvar. The following is a list of variablenames and their associated values.

ACFLAGFlag that indicates whether LPAR absolute capping capability is active andprocessor value settings are permitted.

Value information:

YESAbsolute shared processor capping is enabled. The processor ACVALsetting is used and can be changed for the selected processor type. Thisprocessor value is the upper limit. Available shared processor valuesthat exceed the capping limit are not assigned to the LPARs in thegroup.

NO Absolute shared processor capping is disabled. The processor ACVALvalue is not used and cannot be changed. The assignment of sharedprocessor values for the LPAR is dynamically determined and adjustedaccording to the available resources for that processor type.

Note that absolute capping is supported on console version 2.12.1 or later.

ACVALShared processor value. Defines the upper limit of shared processor valuesan LPAR can get when the ACFLAG is set to YES.

Value information:


Note that absolute capping is supported on console version 2.12.1 or later.

PROFILE


AESFLGThe logical partition allows you to import AES encryption keys.

Value information:



AUTOIPLThis flag indicates if an automatic LOAD should be performed as part ofthe LPAR activation. The variable is valid for IMAGE profile only.


Perform an automatic LOAD after LPAR activation is complete, usingthe IPLTYP, IPLADR, and IPLPRM information that is stored in theIMAGE profile.

NO Do not perform a LOAD after LPAR activation.

BRLBAThe boot record logical block address that is used for IPLs from a SCSIdevice. Valid for profile types IMAGE and LOAD.

Value information:pval

The eight-byte (16 hexadecimal digit) boot record logical block addressspecifies the logical block address (LBA) of the boot record. (A bootrecord is used to locate an OS loader on an IPL disk. Normally, thisboot record is located at LBA 0. The SCSI IPL function allows the bootrecord to be located at a different LBA.)

* When an asterisk (*) is specified as the UPDATE value, the actual datavalue is copied from the NetView Task Global variable BRLBA.

BPSThe boot partition specification that is used for IPLs from a SCSI device.Valid for profile types IMAGE and LOAD.


The boot program selector, a decimal value between 0 and 30, is usedto select the section of the IPL disk on which the desired OS resides.(The SCSI IPL function allows up to 31 different operating systems toreside on one IPL disk.)

* When an asterisk (*) is specified as the UPDATE value, the actual datavalue is copied from the NetView Task Global variable BPS.

CAPACITYThe defined capacity limit not only for a single LPAR (see The DEFCAPparameter), but for a group of LPARs running on the same CPC, known asa capacity group. It represents the number of workload units (WLUs) acapacity group has assigned as its limit. Valid for profile type GROUP only.

Value information:0 No group capacity limit defined.1–2147483647


PROFILE


For more information about Group Capacity settings and howworkload management and workload license charges are related, seez/OS MVS Planning: Workload Management, SA22-7602.

CCBFLGBasic CPU counter control. If the flag is enabled, the function can be used.

Value information:



CCCFLGCrypto activity CPU counter control. If the flag is enabled, the function canbe used.

Value information:



CCGFLGCoprocessor group CPU counter control. If the flag is enabled, the functioncan be used.

Value information:



CCPFLGProblem state CPU counter control. If the flag is enabled, the function canbe used.

Value information:



CLOCKXIClock time offset direction, increase/decrease.

Value information:

EASTIncrease - The local time zone is East of GMT.

WESTDecrease - the local time zone is West of GMT.

CLOCKXMClock time offset minutes.

Value information:

mm One of the following values: 0, 15, 30, 45

CLOCKXHClock time offset hours.

PROFILE


Value information:

hh Range 0 - 23

CLOCKXDClock time offset days.

Value information:

dddRange 0 - 999

CLOCKTClock type assignment of the partition.

Value information:

STDStandard time of day. Select this option to set the logical partition'sclock to the same time set for the CPC's time source (either the CPCTOD clock or an external time reference, such as the STP).

LPARLogical partition time of day. Select this option to set the logicalpartitions clock using an offset from the time of day supplied by itstime source. Use the following variables to define an offset: CLOCKXI,CLOCKXM, CLOCKXH, and CLOCKXD.

CPDThe number of logical central processors assigned to the partition for itsdedicated use. The assignment occurs at partition activation time.

Value information:

n The number of logical processors. For processor type GPP, 1 is theallowed minimum. For other processor types 0 is allowed. Themaximum number of logical processors possible depends on yourphysical processor configuration.

CPDRESThe number of logical central processors assigned to the partition for itsdedicated use. The logical processors are reserved to be used after partitionactivation, when needed.

Value information:


CPSThe number of logical central processors assigned to the partition, butshared with other partitions. The assignment occurs at partition activationtime.

Value information:


PROFILE


CPSRESThe number of logical central processors assigned to the partition, butshared with other partitions. The logical processors are reserved to be usedafter partition activation, if needed.

Value information:


CS The amount of Central Storage, in megabytes, allocated at partitionactivation time for its exclusive use.

Value information:

n Enter a value that is compatible with the storage granularity supportedby your CPC.

For storage granularity information, see the Processor Resource/SystemsManager Planning Guide, available for your CPC on IBM Resource Link.

CSBFLGBasic CPU sampling control. If the flag is enabled, the function can beused.

Value information:



CSDFLGDiagnostic sampling authorization control. This function applies only if theCSBFLG is set to YES. The CSDFLG controls whether it is allowed tocontrol or collect the sampling data, such as instruction addresses and CPUinformation.

Value information:



CSRESThe amount of Central Storage, in megabytes, that can be allocateddynamically to the partition after activation.

Reserved storage provides the logical partition with an additional amountof storage that can be used only if it is not already being used by anotheractive logical partition.

There is no minimum for reserved storage. Zero megabytes (0 MB) is avalid amount of reserved storage.

Value information:

0–nEnter a value that is compatible with the storage granularity supportedby your CPC.


PROFILE


CXCFLGExtended CPU counter control. If the flag is enabled, the function can beused.

Value information:



DEAFLGThe logical partition allows to import DEA encryption.

Value information:



DEFCAPThe logical partition's defined capacity. Valid for profile type IMAGE.

Value information:0 No defined capacity for the LPAR.1–2147483647

Amount of defined LPAR capacity.


The defined capacity expressed in terms of Millions of Service Units(MSUs) per hour. MSUs is a measure of processor resource consumption.The amount of MSUs that a logical partition consumes is dependent on themodel, the number of logical processors that are available to the partition,and the amount of time that the logical partition is allocated. The definedcapacity value specifies how much of the logical partition capacity is to bemanaged by Workload Manager (WLM) for the purpose of softwarepricing.

DESCActivation profile description text string. Valid for profile types: RESET,LOAD, IMAGE, and GROUP.

Value information: A maximum length of 50 characters is allowed. Pass anull string to clear the current DESC content.

ENDTSLThe end time slice if the CPC image enters a wait state. Valid for theRESET profile type.


Indicates that a CPC Image should lose its share of running time whenit enters a wait state.

NO Indicates that a CPC Image should not lose its share of running timewhen it enters a wait state.

Note: This value can only be set if the processor running time type is setto 1, that is, set to a constant value (see The PRTT Parameter).

PROFILE


ES The amount of Central Storage, in megabytes, allocated at partitionactivation time for use as expanded storage.

There is no minimum for expanded storage. Zero megabytes (0 MB) is avalid amount of expanded storage.

Value information:



ESRESThe amount of Expanded Storage, in megabytes, that can be allocateddynamically to the partition after activation. This variable applies only ifthe partition mode is ESA/390 or ESA/390 TPF.

Reserved storage provides the logical partition with an additional amountof storage that can be used only if it is not already being used by anotheractive logical partition.

There is no minimum for reserved storage. Zero megabytes (0 MB) is avalid amount of reserved storage.

Value information:



GACFLGFlag that indicates whether LPAR absolute group capping capability isactive and processor value settings are permitted.

Value information:

YESAbsolute shared processor group capping is enabled. The processorGACVAL setting is used and can be changed for the group assigned toselected LPAR. This processor value is the upper limit. Availableshared processor values that exceed the capping limit are not assignedto the LPARs in the group.

NO Absolute shared processor group capping is disabled. The processorGACVAL value is not used and cannot be changed. The assignment ofshared processor values for the LPAR is dynamically determined andadjusted according to the available resources for that processor type, orif the ACFLG is set to YES and a valid ACVAL is set for the LPAR, thiscapping value goes into effect.

Note: Absolute group capping is supported on console version 2.13.1 orlater.

GACVALShared processor group value. Defines the upper limit of the processorvalue that is shared among the LPARs assigned to the group.

Value information:

PROFILE


The allowed absolute capping processor value range is: 0.01 - 255.0.

Note: Absolute capping is supported on console version 2.13.1 or later. Incase the GACFLG is set to 'NO', an undetermined value (for example, '-1')may be returned by the hardware when querying GACVAL. Ignore thisvalue, and do not interpret it by any means.

ICNTL common command updates of GACVAL are only possible while theaddressed LPAR is a member of the GROUP activation profile, shown invariable GRPPRF at the time GACVAL is updated. The GACVAL in thisprofile must have been initialized.

GPDCFLGGlobal performance data control flag. If the flag is enabled, the partitioncan view CP utilization and IO busy data for all partitions in theconfiguration. If the flag is disabled, only the data of the own partition canbe viewed.

Value information:



GRPPRFThe name of the LPAR capacity group that the LPAR is a member of. Thisvariable is valid for IMAGE profiles only.


An alphanumeric name with a maximum length of 8 characters.* If you specify an asterisk as the UPDATE value, the actual data value

is copied from the NetView task global variable GRPPRF.

IMODEOperating mode of the partition. Depending on the mode, the LPARcapabilities are different. Use the mode that is required by the operatingsystem or the appliance running in the partition.

Value information:1 (ESA390)2 (ESA390TPF)3 (CF)4 (LINUX)5 (FMEX)6 (HMEX)7 (HMAS)8 (ZVM)9 (ZACI or ZAWARE)

IOCTLFLGInput/Output configuration control flag. If the flag is enabled, the partitionis authorized to read and write any non-write protected IOCDS in theconfiguration and can change the configuration dynamically.

Value information:

PROFILE




IPLADRThe IPL address (load address) for IPLs from a channel attached device.(IPLTYP NORMAL) Valid for profile types IMAGE and LOAD.


Hexadecimal device number of a channel attached load device.NEXT

Indicates that the IPLPRM value that is supplied by HCD through itshardware interface is to be used.

* When an asterisk (*) is specified as the UPDATE value, the actual datavalue is copied from the NetView Task Global variable IPLADR.

Note: Depending on the CPC hardware type, a device number of '0000' isaccepted as IPLADR by the hardware. Do not use this value, either withSA z/OS ProcOps, or when using the HMC to specify a LOAD address.Unpredictable results may occur.

IPLPRMThe IPL parameter (load parm) for IPLs from a channel attached device.(IPLTYP NORMAL) Valid for profile types IMAGE and LOAD.


OS-supported, 8-character load parameter field of CMOS S/390® andzSeries hardware. See the OS documentation for information about theIPL parameters that it supports.

NEXTIndicates that the IPLPRM value that is supplied by HCD through itshardware interface is to be used.

* When an asterisk (*) is specified as the UPDATE value, the actual datavalue is copied from the NetView Task Global variable IPLPRM.

IPLTYPThe type of IPL.

Value information:NORMAL

Use a channel attached device address to load a basic control program(OS). When this IPL type is used, IPLADR must be specified. IPLPRMis optional.

SCSILOADUses the address of a SAN-attached SCSI device to load a BCP (OS).

When this IPL type is used, the following profile variables must bespecified: BRLBA, BPS, LUN, WWPN. OSSLP is optional.

SCSIDUMPUses the address of a SAN-attached SCSI device to load a StandaloneDump Utility. The utility uses a dump area on the same SCSI device tostore the main storage content.

When this IPL type is used, the following profile variables must bespecified: BRLBA, BPS, LUN, WWPN. OSSLP is optional.

* When an asterisk (*) is specified as the UPDATE value, the actual datavalue is copied from the NetView Task Global variable IPLTYP.

PROFILE


IOCDSThe input/output configuration data set identifier. Valid for profile typeRESET.


Two-character identifier of the IOCDS that is to be used for CPCactivation with this profile.

* When an asterisk (*) is specified as the UPDATE value, the actual datavalue is copied from the NetView Task Global variable IOCDS.

LICVFLGLicense Internal Code validation. When enabled, the activation profile datamust conform to the current LICCC configuration.

Value information:



LPARIFLGLogical partition isolation flag. When enabled, unshared but reconfigurablechannel paths remain in exclusive use for that partition.

Value information:



LPARXFLGCross partition flag. Only when this flag is enabled, can operationsmanagement commands to other LPARs be sent over the BCP internalinterface.

Value information:



LUNThe logical unit number of the SCSI IPL boot device. Valid for profiletypes: IMAGE, LOAD.


Eight-byte identifier (16 hexadecimal digits) of the logical unitrepresenting the SCSI IPL device.

* When an asterisk (*) is specified as the UPDATE value, the actual datavalue is copied from the NetView Task Global variable LUN.

OSSLPThe operating-system-specific load parameter for IPL from SCSI device.Valid for profile types: IMAGE, LOAD.

For a READ operation, the data that is returned in the AOFA0020 responsereport is split into 8 lines. If OSSLP is not set, a string of 256 blanks isreturned from the hardware. If not all OSSLP bytes are used, the stringreturned is always padded with blanks.

PROFILE



The operating system specific load parameters to be used for theSCSILOAD or SCSIDUMP. The character string can be up to 256 byteslong.

The OS-specific load parameter is optionally used to pass a string ofcharacters to the program that is being loaded. Neither the system northe machine loader interprets or uses these parameters. For example,the OS-specific load parameter can be used to identify additional I/Odevices and related storage addresses that are required by the OS beingloaded.

* When an asterisk (*) is specified as the UPDATE value, the actual datavalue is copied from the NetView Task Global variable OSSLP.

Use this method if you want to copy a mixed case character string, orif the string contains multiple blank separated words.

PRTProcessor Running Time. Valid for the RESET profile type.

Value information:

1–100User-defined processor running time.

Defines the amount of continuous time allowed for logical processorsto perform jobs on shared processors for the Defined CPC object.

Note:

1. This value can only be set if the processor running time type is setto 1, that is, set to a constant value (see The PRTT Parameter).

2. If the processor running time type is set to 0, the value forprocessor running time displayed with the READ command willalways be 0.

PRTTProcessor Running Time Type. Valid for the RESET profile type.

Value information:0 The processor running time is dynamically determined by the system.1 The processor running time is set to a constant value.

Defines whether the processor running time is dynamically determined bythe system or set to a constant value for the Defined CPC object.

PWIThe initial processing weight. Valid for profile type IMAGE.



1-999Represents the relative amount of shared processor resources that isinitially allocated to the LPAR.

* When an asterisk (*) is specified as the UPDATE value, the actual datavalue is copied from the NetView Task Global variable PWI.

PROFILE


Note: If the WLME flag has a value of YES, the PWI value must be in therange from PWMN to PWMX.

PWICThe initial processing weight capped indicator. Valid for profile typeIMAGE.


The initial processing weight for the LPAR is capped. It represents themaximum share of processor resources regardless of the availability ofexcess processor resources.

NO The initial processing weight for the LPAR is not capped. It representsthe share of resources that is guaranteed to the LPAR when all CPresources are in use. When excess processor resources are available, theLPAR can use them if necessary.

* When an asterisk (*) is specified as the UPDATE value, the actual datavalue is copied from the NetView Task Global variable PWIC.

PWMNThe minimum processing weight. Valid for profile type IMAGE.

The guaranteed minimum share of non-dedicated processor weight, whenall processing resources are in use.



1-999A value that is less than or equal to the initial processing weight that isused to define the minimum relative amount of shared processorresources that is allocated to the LPAR.

* When an asterisk (*) is specified as the UPDATE value, the actual datavalue is copied from the NetView Task Global variable PWMN.


PWMXThe maximum processing weight. Valid for profile type IMAGE.

Maximum relative amount of shared processor resources for this LPAR.



1-999A value that is greater than or equal to the initial processing weightthat is used to define the maximum relative amount of sharedprocessor resources that is allocated to the LPAR.

* When an asterisk (*) is specified as the UPDATE value, the actual datavalue is copied from the NetView Task Global variable PWMX.


WLMEThe Workload Manager enabled flag. Valid for profile type IMAGE.

Value information:

PROFILE


YESz/OS Workload Manager is used to manage shared processor resourcesfor a logical partition, according to the settings of the minimum andmaximum weight specifications.

NO PR/SM is managing the processing weight. The PWMN and PWMXvalues do not apply.

* When an asterisk (*) is specified as the UPDATE value, the actual datavalue is copied from the NetView Task Global variable WLME.

WWPNThe worldwide port name of the disk controller for the SCSI IPL. Valid forprofile type IMAGE.


The worldwide port name is the eight-byte permanent name (16hexadecimal digits) that is assigned to the FC (fibre channel) adapterport of the SCSI target device containing the logical unit serving as theIPL device. The FC fabric must be configured in such a way that theFCP channel that is used for the IPL operation has access to this port.

* When an asterisk (*) is specified as the UPDATE value, the actual datavalue is copied from the NetView Task Global variable WWPN.

VALThe value specification for an UPDATE operation.

pvalSee the value information for the VAR parameter.

PT The Processor Type parameter allows you to specify which processor type thecorresponding activation profile information should be read or updated for.

proctp The processor type:GPP General Purpose ProcessorAAP Application Assist ProcessorIFL Integrated Facility for LINUX processorICF Internal Coupling Facility processorIIP z9 Integrated Information Processor

Notes:

1. The IFA processor type (Integrated Facility for Application processor) hasbeen replaced by AAP.

2. Processor types other than GPP are only applicable for the IMAGE profiletype and the activation profile variables PWI, PWIC, PWMN or PWMX.

Defaults

For UPDATE and READ actions, if a processor type is not specified with the PTparameter, the default value of GPP (general purpose processor) is used.

Usage

The PROFILE common command for SNMP connected processors can be used tomanage important CPC and LPAR activation and operating system loadinformation.

The supported set of profile variables can be queried and modified using theISQCCMD PROFILE common command with automation procedures.

PROFILE


Automation of IPLs from SCSI devices can be performed using LOAD or IMAGEactivation profiles.






The PROFILE common command is only supported for SNMP connections andBCP Internal Interface connections configured for LPAR Management. If you issuea PROFILE request for another ProcOps connection type, it will be rejected.

The PROFILE common command cannot be used to create or delete activationprofiles; use the HMC to perform these tasks. The PROFILE command supports asubset of the available activation profile variables.

Processor types other than GPP are only applicable for the IMAGE profile type andthe activation profile variables PWI, PWIC, PWMN or PWMX.

Condition Codes

The PROFILE common command uses the internal APROF service to process therequests. The following lists the condition codes that are returned in the form00B000xx, where xx is the condition code:62 The variable name that is specified in the request is not supported. The request

is rejected.63 The variable name that is specified in the request is not supported. The request

is rejected.64 The request was not recognized by the APROF service. The request is rejected.

Contact IBM Support.65 The value operand of the request was not recognized by APROF. The request is

rejected. Contact IBM Support.66 OPEN error. APROF could not allocate the profile list storage. The request is

rejected. Contact IBM Support.67 OPEN error. Profile was already opened. The request is rejected. Issue a

CLOSE request first.68 Profile TYPE error. Allowed types are RESET, IMAGE, and LOAD. The request

is rejected.

PROFILE


69 Profile is not open. Issue an OPEN request first. The request is rejected.6A Profile not found error. If the named profile was created since the last OPEN,

issue a CLOSE and reopen the profiles to access the new list of profiles. Therequest is rejected.

6B Profile UPDATE error. Error in APROF parameter list. The request is rejected.Contact IBM Support.

6C Profile UPDATE error. Internal variable name list error. The request is rejected.Contact IBM Support.

6D Profile UPDATE error. The specified variable name is not valid. Re-specify thevariable name and repeat the request. The request is rejected.

6E Profile UPDATE error. The specified update value was not accepted. Re-specifythe value and repeat the request. The request is rejected.

6F Profile UPDATE error for OSSLP. A NetView Cglobal could not be accessed.The request is rejected. Contact IBM Support.

Return Codes


RESERVEPurpose

The RESERVE common command allows you to gain exclusive control over a CPCand lock the execution of disruptive commands. While a CPC is reserved, noapplication, including the one holding the reserve, can issue hardware commandsto the CPC itself or one of its logical partitions until the lock is released again. Thelock also applies for manual CPC and LPAR operation using the CPC's SupportElement or an HMC.

Syntax

►► ISQCCMD target_system_ProcOps_nametarget_hardware_name

RESERVE ►

►RCMD ( LIST )

RCMD ( OFF ) RNAME ( rnm )ON

►◄

Requirements

The requirements for the RESERVE command to complete successfully are:v Processor operations must be active.v The addressed target system must be initialized for this command to complete

successfully. If the target hardware is addressed, at least one target system onthat hardware must have the ProcOps status INITIALIZED.

Parameters

For a definition of target_system_ProcOps_name and target_hardware_name, see“ISQCCMD” on page 363.

PROFILE


RCMDReserve command to be executed.LIST

Returns the current reserve ID, if one is set in the field APPLNAME of theAOFA0001 response report from the target hardware. If the APPLNAMEfield that is returned is empty, no reserve condition exists for the CPC. Theformat 'majorname.minorname' is used if the APPLNAME field indicates areserve condition. The majorname '0AUTOOPS' is used if a reserve is setby ProcOps or other applications using the z900 API. The minornamereturned is the reserve ID that is specified by an application.

ON Sets a CPC reserve using the name that is specified with the RNAMEparameter keyword.

OFFReleases a previously set CPC reserve condition using the name that isspecified with the RNAME parameter keyword.

RNAMEReserve identification minor name.

rnmReserve ID minor name. The maximum length that is allowed is eightcharacters.

Defaults

If no RESERVE parameters are specified, an RCMD(LIST) is executed.

Usage

Locking a CPC with the RESERVE command for disruptive command executionshould only be performed in recovery situations, where access to the CPC or itsLPARs has to be controlled. The operator or recovery application can issue theISQCCMD RESERVE to isolate and release a CPC.

Note that the hardware commands issue a reserve internally to indicate a busycondition to the HMC operator or to other applications for the duration of acommand. This internal reserve is object specific (CPC, image) and is differentfrom the ISQCCMD RESERVE in ProcOps.

The RESERVE command can be used to determine whether a Support Element hasexclusive control enabled. Usually hardware service sets this control to make sureno hardware command can disrupt SE service activity. After service, exclusivecontrol is usually reset to disable.

Issue a RESERVE RCMD(LIST) common command to determine whether exclusivecontrol has been set from the CPC's Support Element. The AOFA0001 report that isreturned shows an application name in the format APPLNAME(netid.nau), wherenetid is the CPC's netid, and nau is the CPC's nau.


RESERVE



The RESERVE common command is only supported for SNMP connections. Whenissuing a RESERVE for other ProcOps connection types, it will be rejected.

The RESERVE hardware command works only for ProcOps sessions to the SupportElement of the addressed CPC. ProcOps sessions to an HMC are not supportedand the RESERVE command will fail.

The RESERVE hardware command is available for machine types from 2064onwards.

The RESERVE hardware command is not available for machine types 967x or olderS/390 CMOS processor types. For these machine types the RESERVE commandwill fail.

Return Codes


RESTARTPurpose

The RESTART command causes the target system processor to perform the restartfunction. This function consists of loading the restart program status word (PSW).

Syntax


RESTART ►◄

Requirements



Parameters


Defaults

None.

Usage

The RESTART command is normally used to return the processor to an activeprocessing state from a QUIESCE or SHUTDOWN condition.

RESERVE


The RESTART command can also be used to recover from various systemproblems.


None.

Return Codes


RESTART of a VM Guest SystemPurpose

For a guest machine a CP SYSTEM RESTART command is sent.

SECLOGPurpose

The SECLOG command provides routing for security records as they are written inthe Support Element (SE) or Hardware Management Console (HMC) logs ofProcessor operations for automation. The routing can be turned ON or OFF andthe current routing STATUS can be determined. Depending on the sessionendpoint, the Security Log of an SE or HMC can be monitored.

Syntax

►► ISQCCMD target_system_ProcOps_nametarget_hardware_name

SECLOGCMD(STATUS)

CMD(slopt)►◄

Requirements

The requirements for the SECLOG command to complete successfully are:v Processor operations must be activev The addressed target system must be initialized, or, if the target hardware is

addressed, at least one target system on that hardware must be initialized.

Parameters

For a definition of target_system_ProcOps_name and target_hardware_name, see“ISQCCMD” on page 363.

CMDPrefix for sub-command/Options.

sloptThe following sub-commands/Options are supported:

StatusReturns the current SECLOG setting.

ON Turns ON the routing of SECLOG messages to Processor operations.

RESTART


OFFTurns OFF the routing of SECLOG messages to Processor operations.

Defaults

The default of SECLOG is Sub-command CMD(STATUS).

Usage

The monitoring of Security Log messages in Processor operations exists for consoleevents, such as User Access, Software Updates, Data Mirroring, ConfigurationChanges and additional information about operational commands. Use the task'View Security Logs' available on the console Graphical User Interface (GUI) toview additional information. A typical scenario for SECLOG is to start it, beforeissuing an Operations Management or Configuration command, such as TCM orCBU. For further issues, the SECLOG messages in the Netlog of the Processoroperations focal point, may be useful. It is recommended to turn SECLOG OFFagain, once the management or configuration command is complete.


The SECLOG command is only supported with SNMP connections.

Return Codes


STARTPurpose

The START command causes the target system processor to perform the startfunction. This function consists of returning the operating system to the operatingstate from the stopped state initiated by the STOP command.

Syntax


START ►◄

Requirements



Parameters


SECLOG


Defaults

None.

Usage

The START command is equivalent to pressing the START key at a target system.

Use the START command to cancel the effects of the STOP command and allowthe operating system to run again.

Restrictions and Limitationsv This command is not supported for coupling facility target systems.

Return Codes


START of a VM Guest SystemPurpose

For a guest machine the CP BEGIN command is entered.

STOPPurpose

The STOP command causes the target system processor to perform the stopfunction. This function consists of placing the processor in the stopped state at theend of the current unit of operation.

Syntax


STOP ►◄

Requirements



Parameters


Defaults

None.

START


Usage

Use the STOP command to temporarily halt normal operations. You can use thiscommand to interrupt processing to perform various hardware maintenancefunctions (such as cleaning the heads of a tape drive) and then continue processingfrom the point at which it stopped.

Note: The STOP command triggers a hardware status change event from the SE orHMC which sets the target hardware status to ’TARGET HARDWARE PROBLEM’.If you execute the ISQXDST command to display the target status, the compoundstatus is displayed in the main panel. For more details about the target hardwarestatus, refer to ISQVARS variable ’thwstat’.



Return Codes


STOP of a VM Guest SystemPurpose

For a guest machine the CP STOP command is entered. (This will place the guestmachine in a CP READ state, and a message is issued to this effect.)

STPPurpose

The STP command allows you to manipulate server time protocol (STP) settings inan STP network. You can:v Join, leave, or change an STP-only Coordinated Timing Network (CTN)v Swap a Current Time Server (CTS) from Preferred to Backup, or vice versav Set Preferred, Backup, Arbiter, and CTS server rolesv Enable or disable the Daylight Saving Time setting in an STP-only CTN

Syntax

►► ISQCCMD target_system_ProcOps_nametarget_hardware_nametarget_hardware_name.LPAR_name

STP ►

STOP


|||||

►FORCE(NO)

CMD(SET) STPID(stpid) ConfigFORCE(YES)

CMD(DST) STPID(stpid) MODE( ENABLE )DISABLE

CMD( JOIN ) STPID(stpid)SWAPCHANGE

CMD(LEAVE)

►◄

Config:

PREF(node) CTS(ct)BACKUP(node)

ARBITER(node)

Requirements

The requirements for the STP command to complete successfully are:v Processor operations must be active.v The addressed target system must be initialized, or if the target hardware is

addressed, at least one target system on that hardware must be initialized.v The target hardware must be an STP-capable IBM z System mainframe.v The target hardware mainframe must be configured and enabled in the

Coordinated Timer Network identified by the STPID.

Parameters


CMDIndicates the type of STP command to be performed. It can be one of thefollowing:JOIN

This command allows a CPC to join an STP-only CTN.

If the CPC is already participating in an STP-only CTN, it is removed fromthat CTN and joins the specified one.

If the CPC has an external time reference (ETR) ID, it is removed.

The target system cannot be the CTS.LEAVE

This command removes a central processor complex (CPC) from anSTP-only CTN. The target system cannot be the CTS.

CHANGEThis command is sent to the Defined CPC with the role of CTS in anSTP-only CTN and changes the STP ID portion of the CTN ID for theentire STP-only CTN. The target system must be the CTS.

SETThis command sets the configuration for an STP-only Coordinated TimingNetwork (CTN). The target system must be the system that will becomethe Current Time Server (CTS).

SWAPIn a configured STP-only CTN, one CPC has the role of CTS. If the CTN

STP


has both a Preferred Time Server and a Backup Time Server configured,either one can be the CTS. This command swaps the role of CTS fromPreferred Time Server to Backup Time Server or vice versa.

The target system must be the system that will become the CTS.DST

In an STP-only CTN, the configured Daylight Saving Time setting can beenabled or disabled with this command. Note that the active DST settingscannot be queried. This is a z System API limitation.

STPIDAn alphanumeric string that represents the current STP identifier for theDefined CPC object. The string must not exceed eight characters. It isapplicable for the CMD options JOIN, CHANGE, SWAP, SET, and DST.

FORCEThis parameter is only applicable for CMD (SET). It bypasses a number ofvalidity checks on server connectivity, and it allows the configuration ofservers that may not be in POR-complete state or do not yet have couplinglink connectivity to the selected CTS.NO Specifies that various verifications will be made before allowing the

configuration to be set. For example, connections between the PreferredTime Server (CPC), Backup Time Server (CPC), and Arbiter will beverified. If the connections are not there, the configuration will fail.

YESSpecifies that the configuration will be applied without verifications.

MODEThis parameter is only applicable for CMD (DST). It defines the CTN time torun with the daylight saving time either enabled or disabled.

ENABLEMODE value of the STP sub-command DST. Specifying ENABLE sets aconfigured daylight time saving offset in the current CTN time and thenormal time setting is inactive in the CTN, identified by the STPID.

DISABLEMODE value of the STP sub-command DST. Specifying DISABLE removesa configured daylight time saving offset from the current CTN time andthe normal time setting becomes active in the CTN, identified by theSTPID.

ConfigSpecifies the type of server that a configuration is being set for. It is onlyapplicable for CMD(SET). It can be one of the following:

PREFAssigns the Preferred Time Server role (the server that is assigned to be thePreferred Stratum 1 server) in an STP-only CTN. The PREF parameter ismandatory for the CMD(SET) command.

This is usually also the Current Time Server (CTS).

BACKUPAssigns the Backup Time Server role in an STP-only CTN. This is theserver that is assigned to take over as the CTS, either because of a plannedor unplanned reconfiguration. This is usually a Stratum 2 server thatshould be attached to the Preferred Time Server as well as all the serversthat are attached to the Preferred Time Server.

STP


If you do not specify BACKUP for the SET command, the BTS role will beunset (that is, not configured).

ARBITERAssigns the Arbiter role in an STP-only CTN. This is the server that isassigned to provide additional means for the Backup Time Server todetermine whether it should take over as the Current Time Server.

If you do not specify ARBITER for the SET command, the Arbiter role willbe unset (that is, not configured). You must configure the Backup TimeServer (that is, specify the BACKUP parameter) if you configure an Arbiter.

CTSAssigns the Current Time Server role in an STP-only CTN. This is theserver that is currently the Stratum 1 server for an STP-only CTN. The onlyvalues that are allowed are Preferred or Backup. The CTS parameter ismandatory for the CMD(SET) command.

nodeAn alphanumeric string that represents the name of the CPC and must notexceed eight characters.

Defaults

The STP command defaults to FORCE (NO).

Usage

Use this command to modify the STP configuration in an STP-only CTN.


The STP common command is only supported for SNMP connections. If an STPrequest is issued for another processor operations connection type, it will berejected.

Note: To perform an STP CMD (SET) command, all nodes that are referenced inthe command should be defined in main HMC console.

Return Codes


STPDATAPurpose

The STPDATA command allows you to query the Server Time Protocol (STP)configuration for the defined CPC object.

Syntax

►► ISQCCMD target_system_ProcOps_nametarget_hardware_nametarget_hardware_name.LPAR_name

STPDATA ►◄

STP


Requirements

The requirements for the STPDATA command to complete successfully are:v The target hardware must be an STP-capable server. IBM System z196, IBM

System z10 ECT, z10 BC, System z9 EC, z9 BC, and zSeries 990 and 890 with therequired LIC installed are STP-capable.

v The target hardware must be an STP-enabled server.







Parameters


Defaults

None.

Usage

Use this command to query the Server Time Protocol (STP) configuration for aspecific CPC object. The data is returned in an AOFA0024 multiline report. Formore information about this report format see the appendix “Response Messages,Error Strings, Condition Codes” in IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS Messagesand Codes.

The command response reports from the processor hardware are available asprocessor operations ISQ900I messages with a console indicator of SC. Note thatthe message originator following the message identifier is either a processoroperations target system name or a target hardware name together with an LPARname. To have a copy of these hardware messages on your screen as ISQ901Imessages, use the ISQXMON command.

This common command can also be used for processors or systems that you haveconfigured with a BCP Internal Interface connection in your SA z/OS policy. Ifprocessor operations is active, and your common command targets a processor orsystem that has the same name in both your processor operations and BCP InternalInterface configuration, processor operations is always preferred. To avoid this, youmust either stop processor operations or use names that are uniquely assigned toeither processor operations or the BCP Internal Interface.

STPDATA



On command completion, the immediate HW response report messages are alsoavailable in a PIPE KEEP with the name ISQ.SNMP. You can access this HW datadirectly when using this KEEP as your first Pipe stage. See “Using ImmediateISQCCMD Common Command Responses” on page 365.


The STPDATA common command is only supported for SNMP connections andBCP Internal Interface connections that are configured for LPAR Management.When issuing a STPDATA request for another processor operations connectiontype, it will be rejected.

Condition Codes

The following condition codes are returned in the form 00B000xx, where xx is thecondition code:

96 No STP configuration was found.

Return Codes


SYSRESETPurpose

The SYSRESET command causes the target system processor to perform the systemreset function. This function consists of resetting and initializing the processor.

Syntax


SYSRESETCLEAR(NO)

CLEAR(YES)►

►FORCE(NO)

FORCE( NO )YES

►◄

Requirements



STPDATA


Parameters


CLEAR(NO)Indicates that the option of clearing storage is not being specified. This is thedefault value. No space is allowed between the keyword CLEAR and the leftparenthesis.

CLEAR(YES)Indicates that the option of clearing storage is being specified. No space isallowed between the keyword CLEAR and the left parenthesis.


CPU control program is not in the operating state. Specify FORCE(NO) ina situation where you would not want to upset the control programwork-in-progress.



FORCE(NO) requires that the associated command fail when useful work istaking place. For SYSRESET the formal fail criteria is operating whenFORCE(NO) is specified or when FORCE defaults to NO. The command willfail whenever the processor is in this state.

Defaults

The SYSRESET command defaults to FORCE(NO) and to CLEAR(NO).

Usage

Issue SYSRESET to recover a processor from a machine stop condition. Thiscommand places the processor into the operating state from the check-stop state.

If you do not specify FORCE(YES), the SYSRESET command checks to make sure itwill not be disruptive by performing the following processing:v If the target system runs in a logical partition and the same logical partition

name is initialized to another target system in the same target hardware, theSYSRESET command is rejected and processing of the command halts.

v On a non-partitioned target system, if the target hardware has another targetsystem initialized to it, the SYSRESET command is rejected and processing of thecommand halts.



SYSRESET


For SNMP-connected target hardware, the CLEAR parameter is supported by theIBM Z hardware family.

Return Codes


SYSRESET of a VM Guest SystemPurpose

For a guest machine the CP SYSTEM RESET command is entered.

Parameters

CLEARIf CLEAR(YES) is specified for a guest machine, a CP SYSTEM CLEAR isissued.

FORCE(NO)Guest status is checked. If NOT OPERATING then a CP SYSTEM RESETcommand is issued.

TCDATAPurpose

The TCDATA common command allows you to query the status and settings for aspecific temporary capacity record.

Syntax


TCDATA RECID(recid) ►◄

Requirements

The requirements for the TCDATA command to complete successfully are:v On/Off Capacity on Demand (ooCoD) or Capacity Backup Unit (CBU) records,

or both, must be installed on the addressed target hardware.v The required temporary capacity record must be available on the addressed

target hardware.







SYSRESET


Parameters


RECIDDefines the ooCoD or CBU record that TCDATA query should be executed for.If you specify a record ID of 'LIST', the TCDATA command will display a listof the installed capacity record IDs.

Defaults

None.

Usage

Use this command to query the status and settings for a specific temporarycapacity record.

The data is returned in an AOFA0023 multiline report. For more information aboutthis report format, see the appendix, “Response Messages, Error Strings, ConditionCodes” in IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS Messages and Codes.

The command response reports from the processor hardware are available asProcOps ISQ900I messages with a console indicator of SC. Note that the messageoriginator following the message identifier is either a ProcOps target system name,or a target hardware name together with an LPAR name. To get a copy of suchhardware messages on your screen as ISQ901I messages, use the ISQXMONcommand.





The TCDATA common command applies only to Series z10 hardware and later.The command fails for older hardware.

The TCDATA common command is only supported for SNMP connections andBCP Internal Interface connections configured for LPAR Management. Whenissuing a TCDATA request for another ProcOps connection type, it is rejected.

If parameter RECID should be passed in mixed case, you must use the 'NetVasisISQQCMD' form to make sure that the data is passed without uppercase

TCDATA


translation. Failure to do so may result in TCDATA command errors (invalidrecord id).

Condition Codes

The following condition codes are returned in the form 00B000xx, where xx is thecondition code:

90 No temporary capacity record list was found.

91 Object not found. In this case, the temporary capacity record object was notfound.

92 No matching record found for provided record ID.

93 Error found while parsing temporary capacity record XML data.

Return Codes


TCMPurpose

The TCM common command allows you to add or remove temporary capacityresources (processors) for specific target hardware.

Syntax


TCM ►

►TEST(NO) PRIO(NO)

CMD(ADD)TEST(YES) PRIO(YES)

CMD(REMOVE)

RECID(recid)SWMDL(xxx)

►

► ▼

PROC(type/step)►◄

Requirements

The requirements for the TCM command to complete successfully are:v Processor operations must be active.v The addressed target system must be initialized, or, if the target hardware is

addressed, at least one target system on that hardware must be initialized.v On/Off Capacity on Demand (ooCoD) or Capacity Backup Unit (CBU) records,

or both, must be installed on the addressed target hardware.

TCDATA


v The required resources (processors) must be available on the addressed targethardware.

v With Console Workplace 2.10 and later versions, for ADD and REMOVE, theflag 'Allow capacity change API requests' must be set in 'Customize APISettings' on the SE.

Parameters


CMDPossible commands are:ADD Add processor resources to the addressed target hardware.REMOVE

Remove processor resources from the addressed target hardware.

TESTOnly applicable for CMD(ADD). It is used to indicate whether the activation ofadditional processors should be done on a test basis. The default is NO, that is,real activation.

Note: TEST(YES) is only supported for CBU records.

PRIOOnly applicable for CMD(ADD). It is used to indicate whether the activation ofadditional processors should be handled with priority. The default is NO, thatis, no priority activation.

RECIDDefines the ooCoD or CBU record that the add or remove command should beexecuted for. The value consists of 8 alphanumeric characters.

SWMDLDefines the Software Model that the add or remove command should result in.It is used to add or remove General Purpose Processors. The value consists ofthree alphanumeric characters.

PROCUsed to define up to five Special Purpose Processors, using the followingvariables:

typeDefines the processor type. The following values are allowed:AAP

Application Assist ProcessorIFL

Integrated Facility for Linux processorICF

Internal Coupling Facility processorIIP

Integrated Information ProcessorSAP

System Assist Processor

stepDefines the number of processors that should be added or removed. Thevalid value range for step is 0–9999.

Note: The two values must be separated with the / character.

TCM


Defaults

The PRIO and TEST parameters for CMD(ADD) default to NO.


The TCM common command applies only to Series z10 hardware and later. Thecommand fails for older hardware. The number of PROC parameters must notexceed five.

The TCM common command is only supported for SNMP connections. If a TCMrequest is issued for another processor operations connection type, it is rejected.

If parameter RECID should be passed in mixed case, you must use the 'NetVasisISQQCMD' form to make sure that the data is passed without uppercasetranslation. Failure to do so may result in TCM command errors (invalid recordid).

Condition Codes

The following condition code is returned in the form 00B000xx, where xx is thecondition code:

94 Error found while composing temporary capacity add or remove XML data.

Return Codes


TCM


Chapter 9. Ensemble Commands

This information describes the ensemble commands provided by SA z/OSprocessor operations. Ensemble commands provide a single operator interface andAPI to monitor and control the resources of a zEnterprise Blade Extension HW.

ACTIVATEPurpose

The ACTIVATE command accepts a request to perform asynchronously a completeinitialization of the identified resource (virtual server or blade).

Syntax


ACTIVATE BL bl_filterVS vs_filter

►◄

bl_filter:

NAME(blname) CPC(cpcname) TYPE(bltype)

vs_filter:

NAME(vsname) CPC(cpcname) BL(blname)VH(vhname)

TYPE(vstype)

Requirements

The requirements for the ACTIVATE command to complete successfully are:v Processor operations must be active.v Processor operations must be in session with the ensemble that has the targeted

resource in its scope.v ACTIVATE VS command, virtual servers must be discovered to the Processor

operations data model for the session using DISCOVERY VS ensemblecommand.

Parameters

For a definition of target_hardware_ProcOps_name, ensemble_ProcOps_name andreal_ensemble_name refer to “ISQECMD” on page 368.

*_filterIs a set of parameters allowing unambiguous identification of a target resource.Only full specification of all *_filter parameters ensures selection of a singleobject. Depending on the complexity of your ensemble, you may not need allthe parameters; in most cases it is enough to specify NAME and CPC


parameters to identify a target resource. If more than one resource correspondsto the selected filter, the command is rejected with condition code "00B6001B".For more information about the condition codes refer to the appendix"Response Messages, Error Strings, Condition Codes" in IBM Tivoli SystemAutomation for z/OS Messages and Codes.

NAMEThe name of the resource to ACTIVATE. The name is case-sensitive.

CPCDefines the name (NAU) of a single zEnterprise Central Processor Complex(CPC) controlling appropriate IBM zEnterprise BladeCenter Extension (zBX).

BL Defines the Unified Resource Manager-assigned name of the blade.

VH Defines the Unified Resource Manager-assigned name of the virtualizationhost. The name is equal to the blade name.

TYPEDefines the type of the objects to be activated. Values are:

For ACTIVATE BL command:

powerthe System z Power blade

system-xthe System x blade

isaoptthe IBM Smart Analytics Optimizer blade

dpxi50zthe DataPower® XI50 blade

For ACTIVATE VS command:

power-vma virtual server running on a Power blade

x-hypa virtual server running on a System x blade

Defaults

None.


Virtualization hosts and virtual servers of the types "zvm" and "prsm" supportedby the IBM zEnterprise Unified Resource Manager are not supported by theISQECMD command.

The ACTIVATE command can be very disruptive and FORCE(NO) is not yetsupported for the command so use this command carefully.

Usage

Use ACTIVATE BL command to activate a blade. This command also activates avirtualization host, hosted on the blade as a consequence of activating the hosting

ACTIVATE


environment. If "auto-start-virtual-servers" is true, the virtualization host activationwill also activate all virtual servers on the virtualization host whose auto-startproperty is true.

Use ACTIVATE VS command to activate a virtual server.

Once the activation request is accepted, the command returns with an AOFB0001report showing activation job initiation status and adds the "activate vs" request tointernal list of submitted asynchronous commands. You may use LIST JOBcommand to see all successfully submitted asynchronous commands.

Once the activation job has completed on the target ensemble HMC, ajob-completion notification is sent with the activation completion report as anAOFB0300 report and removes the activation request from the list of submittedasynchronous commands. The session should have a subscription for type JOB forappropriated resource classes (BL or VS) in order to receive job completionnotifications and correctly manage the list of submitted asynchronous commands.For more information about AOFB* reports refer to the appendix "ResponseMessages, Error Strings, Condition Codes" in IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OSMessages and Codes.

The command response reports and notifications from the ensemble HMC areavailable as ProcOps ISQ800I messages with a console indicator of SC. In order toget a copy of such hardware messages on your screen as ISQ801I messages, use theISQXMON command.

Return Codes

The ISQECMD command generates the return codes for common commandprocessing.

BCDATAPurpose

The BCDATA ensemble command collects configuration and status informationabout addressed blade center and presents this information in a multi-line report.

Syntax


BCDATACPC(cpcname)

►

►BC(bcname)

►◄

Requirements

The requirements for the BCDATA command to complete successfully are:v Processor operations must be active.v Processor operations must be in session with the ensemble that has the targeted

resource in its scope.

ACTIVATE

Chapter 9. Ensemble Commands 525

Parameters



BC Defines the Unified Resource Manager-assigned name of the single zBX bladecenter.

Defaults

None.


None.

Usage

Use this command to get a snapshot of a single BC object properties. The data isreturned as an AOFB0012 multiline report. For more information about this reportformat refer to the appendix "Response Messages, Error Strings, Condition Codes"in IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS Messages and Codes.

If you have more than one blade center in your ensemble, use BC and CPCparameters to limit the query to the single BC object. You may use the LIST BCensemble command to see names and managing CPCs of all blade centers objectsdiscovered for the target ensemble. Only a full specification of commandparameters ensures selection of a single object. If more than one resourcecorresponds to the selected parameters, the command is rejected with conditioncode "00B6001B". For more information about the condition codes refer to theappendix "Response Messages, Error Strings, Condition Codes" in IBM TivoliSystem Automation for z/OS Messages and Codes.

The command response reports from the ensemble HMC are available as ProcOpsISQ800I messages with a console indicator of SC. In order to get a copy of suchhardware messages on your screen as ISQ801I messages, use the ISQXMONcommand.

Return Codes


BLDATAPurpose

The BLDATA ensemble command collects configuration and status informationabout addressed zBX blade and presents this information in a multi-line report.

BCDATA


Syntax


BLDATACPC(cpcname)

►

►BL(blname) TYPE(bltype)

►◄

Requirements

The requirements for the BLDATA command to complete successfully are:v Processor operations must be active.v Processor operations must be in session with the ensemble that has the targeted


Parameters




TYPEDefines the type of a blade. Values are:




dpxi50zthe DataPower XI50 blade

Defaults

None.


None.

Usage

Use this command to get a snapshot of the blade properties. The data is returnedas an AOFB0016 multiline report. For more information about this report formatrefer to the appendix "Response Messages, Error Strings, Condition Codes" in IBMTivoli System Automation for z/OS Messages and Codes.

BLDATA


If you have more than one blade in your ensemble, use BL, TYPE and CPCparameters to limit the query to the single blade object. You may use the LIST BLensemble command to see names, types and managing CPCs of all blade objectsdiscovered for the target ensemble. Only a full specification of commandparameters ensures selection of a single object. If more than one resourcecorresponds to the selected parameters, the command is rejected with conditioncode "00B6001B". For more information about the condition codes refer to theappendix "Response Messages, Error Strings, Condition Codes" in IBM TivoliSystem Automation for z/OS Messages and Codes.


Return Codes


CONDATAPurpose

The CONDATA ensemble command collects basic information about thezEnterprise Hardware Management Console (HMC) managing the target ensembleand presents this information in a multi-line report.

Syntax


CONDATA ►◄

Requirements

The requirements for the CONDATA command to complete successfully are:v Processor operations must be active.v Processor operations must be in session with the ensemble that has the targeted


Parameters


Defaults

None.


None.

BLDATA


Usage

Use this command to get basic information about a console. The data is returned inan AOFB0022 multiline report. For more information about this report format referto the appendix "Response Messages, Error Strings, Condition Codes" in IBM TivoliSystem Automation for z/OS Messages and Codes.


Return Codes


DEACTIVATEPurpose

The DEACTIVATE command accepts a request to deactivate asynchronously theidentified resource (virtual server or blade).

Syntax


DEACTIVATE ►

► BL bl_filterVS vs_filter

FORCE(NO)

FORCE(YES)►◄

bl_filter:


vs_filter:


TYPE(vstype)

Requirements

The requirements for the DEACTIVATE to complete successfully are:v Processor operations must be active.v Processor operations must be in session with the ensemble that has the targeted


CONDATA


v For DEACTIVATE VS command, virtual servers must be discovered to theProcessor operations data model for the session using DISCOVERY VS ensemblecommand.

Parameters


*_filterIs a set of parameters allowing unambiguous identification of a target resource.Only full specification of all *_filter parameters ensures selection of a singleobject. Depending on the complexity of your ensemble, you may not need allthe parameters; in most cases it is enough to specify NAME and CPCparameters to identify a target resource. If more than one resource correspondsto the selected filter, the command is rejected with condition code "00B6001B".For more information about the condition codes refer to the appendix"Response Messages, Error Strings, Condition Codes" in IBM Tivoli SystemAutomation for z/OS Messages and Codes.

NAMEThe name of the resource to DEACTIVATE. The name is case-sensitive.




TYPEDefines the type of the objects to be activated. Values are:

For DEACTIVATE BL command:





For DEACTIVATE VS command:



FORCERequests conditional processing of commands that are disruptive to theoperating system and application work that is in progress. Use of this operandis based on the operating state of the target resource.

NO Specifies that processing of the command is to continue only if the

DEACTIVATE


target resource (blade or virtual server) is not in the operating state.Specify FORCE(NO) in a situation where you would not want todisrupt the operating environment.

YES Specifies that processing of the command is to continue even if thetarget resource (blade or virtual server) is in the operating state.Specify FORCE(YES) in a situation where disruption of the operatingenvironment is not important, such as in recovery situations.

Defaults

The DEACTIVATE command defaults to FORCE(NO).



Usage

Use DEACTIVATE BL command to deactivate a blade. This command alsodeactivates a virtualization host, hosted on the blade as a side effect of deactivatingthe hosting environment. The virtualization host deactivation will also deactivateall virtual servers on the virtualization host.

Use DEACTIVATE VS command to deactivate a virtual server.

If you do not specify FORCE(YES), the DEACTIVATE command checks to makesure it will not be disruptive by querying and validating the resource status.

Once the deactivation request is accepted, the command returns with an AOFB0001report showing deactivation job initiation status and adds the "de-activate bl/vs"request to internal list of submitted asynchronous commands. You may use LISTJOB command to see all successfully submitted asynchronous commands.

Once the activation job has completed on the target ensemble HMC, ajob-completion notification is sent with the deactivation completion report as anAOFB0300 report and removes the deactivation request from the list of submittedasynchronous commands.

The session should have a subscription for type JOB for appropriated resourceclasses (BL or VS) in order to receive job completion notifications and correctlymanage the list of submitted asynchronous commands. For more information aboutAOFB* reports refer to the appendix "Response Messages, Error Strings, ConditionCodes" in IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS Messages and Codes.

The command response reports and notifications from the ensemble HMC areavailable as ProcOps ISQ800I messages with a console indicator of SC. In order toget a copy of such hardware messages on your screen as ISQ801I messages, use theISQXMON command.

Return Codes


DEACTIVATE


DISCOVERYPurpose

Use this command to get a snapshot of basic properties of the virtual serversmanaged by the ensemble or the workload resource groups within the targetensemble and add the discovered data to the ProcOps data model.

Syntax


DISCOVERY ►

► WLTYPES(ALL)

VSTYPES(vstypes)

►◄

Requirements

The requirements for the DISCOVERY command to complete successfully are:v Processor operations must be active.v Processor operations must be in session with the ensemble that has the targeted


Parameters


TYPESA comma-separated list of the VS types to be discovered. Supported values are:

POWER-VMVirtual servers of type "power-vm"

X-HYPVirtual servers of type "x-hyp"

ALLAll Virtual Servers of the types "power-vm"and "x-hyp" should bediscovered.

Defaults

TYPES(ALL)


Virtual servers of the types "zvm" and "prsm" supported by the IBM zEnterpriseUnified Resource Manager are not supported by the ISQECMD command.

Usage

ProcOps session to an ensemble manages internal data model allowingidentification of ensemble objects based on their names, types, logical parents and

DISCOVERY


managing CPCs. The data model can be extended for dynamic resources usingDISCOVERY VS and DISCOVERY WL ensemble commands.

Only objects discovered and available in the data model can be managed usingensemble commands and monitored for notifications.v Use DISCOVERY VS command to add the virtual servers managed by the target

ensemble to the data model. Only virtual servers physically residing on the zBXblade centers managed by the CPCs selected for the ensemble in thecustomization dialogs of SA z/OS are added to the data model.

v Use DISCOVERY WL command to add the workloads defined within the targetensemble to the data model.

The objects discovered using the command can be removed later from the datamodel using DROP ensemble command. You may use LIST command to showobjects available in the data model and identify criteria for DISCOVERY/DROPcommands.

DISCOVERY command just adds new objects and replaces existing objects withnew data. The command does not delete any objects from the data model. It isrecommended to use DROP and DISCOVERY commands in a sequence in case ofinventory changes related to the VS and WL.

The number of discovered objects is returned in an AOFB0030 report. For moreinformation about this report format refer to the appendix "Response Messages,Error Strings, Condition Codes" in IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS Messagesand Codes.


Return Codes


DROPPurpose

Use this command to delete specified objects from the ProcOps data model.

Syntax


DROP WLTYPES(ALL)

VSTYPES(vstypes)

►◄

Requirements

The requirements for the DROP command to complete successfully are:v Processor operations must be active.

DISCOVERY


v Processor operations must be in session with the ensemble that has the targetedresource in its scope.

Parameters


TYPESA comma-separated list of the VS types to be deleted from data model.Supported values are:

POWER-VMVirtual servers of type "power-vm".

X-HYPVirtual servers of type "x-hyp".

ALLAll Virtual Servers of the types "power-vm" and "x-hyp" should be deleted.

Defaults

TYPES(ALL)


Virtual servers of the types "zvm" and "prsm" supported by the IBM zEnterpriseUnified Resource Manager are not supported by the ISQECMD command.

Usage

ProcOps session to an ensemble manages internal data model allowingidentification of ensemble objects based on their names, types, logical parents andmanaging CPCs.

Only objects discovered and available in the data model can be managed usingensemble commands and monitored for notifications.v Use the DROP VS command to delete the virtual servers from the data model.

The servers deleted from the data model are not available for further ensemblecommands and the session will not receive any further notification related to thedeleted objects.

v Use the DROP WL command to delete the workload resource groups from thedata model. The workloads deleted from the data model are not available forfurther ensemble commands and the session will not receive any furthernotification related to the deleted objects.

The objects deleted with the command can be discovered later again using theDISCOVERY command. You may use the LIST command to show objects availablein the data model and identify criteria for DISCOVERY/DROP commands.

It is recommended to use the DROP and DISCOVERY commands in a sequence incase of inventory changes related to the VS and WL to rediscover the data andkeep the data model in sync with the ensemble definitions on the HMC.

DROP


The number of deleted objects is returned in an AOFB0030 report. For moreinformation about this report format refer to the appendix "Response Messages,Error Strings, Condition Codes" in IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS Messagesand Codes.


Return Codes


ENSDATAPurpose

The ENSDATA ensemble command collects basic information about the targetensemble and presents this information in a multi-line report.

Syntax


ENSDATA ►◄

Requirements

The requirements for the ENSDATA command to complete successfully are:v Processor operations must be active.v Processor operations must be in session with the ensemble that has the targeted


Parameters


Defaults

None.


None.

Usage

Use this command to get basic information about the ensemble. The data isreturned in an AOFB0017 multiline report. For more information about this reportformat refer to the appendix "Response Messages, Error Strings, Condition Codes"in IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS Messages and Codes.

DROP



Return Codes


GETBCSTATPurpose

The GETBCSTAT ensemble command retrieves the current status of target bladecenters and presents this information in a multi-line report.

Syntax


GETBCSTATCPC(cpcname)

►

►BC(bcname)

►◄

Requirements

The requirements for the GETBCSTAT command to complete successfully are:v Processor operations must be active.v Processor operations must be in session with the ensemble that has the targeted


Parameters



BC Defines the Unified Resource Manager-assigned name of the single zBX bladecenter.

Defaults

None.


None.

ENSDATA


Usage

Use this command to retrieve status of one ore more blade centers. The data isreturned in an AOFB0020 report. For more information about this report formatrefer to the appendix "Response Messages, Error Strings, Condition Codes" in IBMTivoli System Automation for z/OS Messages and Codes.

If you have multiple blade centers in your ensemble, use BC and CPC parametersto limit the query to specific blade centers. You may use the LIST BC ensemblecommand to see names and managing CPCs of all blade center objects discoveredfor the target ensemble.


Return Codes


GETBLSTATPurpose

The GETBLSTAT ensemble command retrieves the current status of target bladesand presents this information in a multi-line report.

Syntax


GETBLSTATCPC(cpcname)

►

►BL(blname) TYPE(bltype)

►◄

Requirements

The requirements for the GETBLSTAT command to complete successfully are:v Processor operations must be active.v Processor operations must be in session with the ensemble that has the targeted


Parameters




GETBCSTAT


TYPEDefines the type of a blade. Values are:





Defaults

None


None

Usage

Use this command to retrieve the status of one or more blades. The data isreturned in an AOFB0020 report. For more information about this report formatrefer to the appendix "Response Messages, Error Strings, Condition Codes" in IBMTivoli System Automation for z/OS Messages and Codes.

If you have multiple blades in your ensemble, use BL, TYPE and CPC parametersto limit the query to specific blades. You may use the LIST BL ensemble commandto see names, types and managing CPCs of all blades discovered for the targetensemble.


Return Codes


GETESTATPurpose

The GETESTAT ensemble command retrieves the current ensemble communicationstatus and presents this information in a single-line report.

Syntax


GETESTAT ►◄

GETBLSTAT


Requirements

The requirements for the GETESTAT command to complete successfully are:v Processor operations must be active.v Processor operations must be in session with the ensemble that has the targeted


Parameters


Defaults

None.


None.

Usage

Use this command to retrieve an ensemble communication status representing thecurrent communication status between the primary and alternate HMC. The data isreturned in an AOFB0020 report. For more information about this report formatrefer to the appendix "Response Messages, Error Strings, Condition Codes" in IBMTivoli System Automation for z/OS Messages and Codes.


Return Codes


GETVHSTATPurpose

The GETVHSTAT ensemble command retrieves the current status of targetvirtualization hosts (hypervisors) and presents this information in a multi-linereport.

Syntax


GETVHSTATCPC(cpcname)

►

GETESTAT


►BL(blname)VH(vhname)

TYPE(vhtype)►◄

Requirements

The requirements for the GETVHSTAT command to complete successfully are:v Processor operations must be active.v Processor operations must be in session with the ensemble that has the targeted


Parameters


Parameters




TYPEDefines the type of a hypervisor. Values are:

power-vma virtualization host running on a Power blade

x-hyp a virtualization host running on a System x blade

Defaults

None.


Virtualization Hosts of types "zvm" and "prsm" supported by the IBM zEnterpriseUnified Resource Manager are not supported by the ISQECMD command.

Usage

Use this command to retrieve status of one or more virtualization hosts. The datais returned in an AOFB0020 report. For more information about this report formatrefer to the appendix "Response Messages, Error Strings, Condition Codes" in IBMTivoli System Automation for z/OS Messages and Codes.

If you have multiple hypervisors in your ensemble, use VH, BL, TYPE and CPCparameters to limit the query to specific virtualization hosts. You may use the LISTVH ensemble command to see names, types and managing CPCs of allvirtualization hosts discovered for the target ensemble.

GETVHSTAT



Return Codes


GETVSSTATPurpose

The GETVSSTAT ensemble command retrieves the current status of target virtualservers and presents this information in a multi-line report.

Syntax


GETVSSTATCPC(cpcname)

►

►VS(vsname) BL(blname)

VH(vhname)TYPE(vstype)

►◄

Requirements

The requirements for the GETVSSTAT command to complete successfully are:v Processor operations must be active.v Processor operations must be in session with the ensemble that has the targeted

resource in its scope.v Virtual Servers must be discovered to the Processor operations data model for

the ensemble session using DISCOVERY VS ensemble command.

Parameters



VS Defines the name of the virtual server. The name is unique to other existingvirtual servers on the virtualization host/blade. The name is case-sensitive.



TYPEDefines the type of the server. Values are:


GETVHSTAT



Defaults

None.


Virtual servers of types "zvm" and "prsm" supported by the IBM zEnterpriseUnified Resource Manager are not supported by the ISQECMD command.

Usage

Use this command to retrieve the status of one or more discovered virtual servers.The data is returned in an AOFB0020 report. For more information about thisreport format refer to the appendix "Response Messages, Error Strings, ConditionCodes" in IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS Messages and Codes.

If you have multiple hypervisors in your ensemble, use VS, VH/BL, TYPE andCPC parameters to limit the query to specific virtual server objects. You may usethe LIST VS ensemble command to see names, types and managing CPCs of allvirtual servers discovered for the target ensemble. Only servers discovered usingthe DISCOVERY VS ensemble command and available in the ProcOps data modelcan be queried.


Return Codes


HMCSWITCH

Purpose

The HMCSWITCH ensemble command initiates a primary/alternative HardwareManagement Console (HMC) role switch. The command is directed at a HMC thatis currently operating in an alternative role and defined as the alternative HMC inthe automation policy. As this command causes both consoles to be rebooted, anyactive sessions (GUI-based or ProcOps-based) are terminated. Processor operationssession recovery recovers the session after a successful HMC switch inenvironments supporting IP address swapping for the HMCs.

Syntax


HMCSWITCH ►◄

GETVSSTAT


|

|

|||||||

|

|||||||||||||||||||||

|

Requirements

The requirements for the HMCSWITCH command to complete successfully are:v Processor operations must be active.v Processor operations must be in session with the ensemble that has the targeted

resource in its scope.v TCP/IP Address or Hostname of alternative HMC should be defined in the

policy for the ensemble.v Both primary and the alternative HMC should use the same userid and

password as defined in the policy for the ensemble.v TCP/IP Address of the alternative HMC should be defined in the AT-TLS policy

and loaded by the Policy Agent (PAGENT) in your z/OS environment.

Parameters

For a definition of target_hardware_ProcOps_name,ensemble_ProcOps_name,andreal_ensemble_name, refer to ISQECMD in IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OSOperator's Commands.

Defaults

None.


HMCSWITCH command requires IP address swapping configured for theensemble HMCs. In this case the current primary HMC IP addresses is movedwhen making the alternative HMC the new primary. Otherwise, ProcOps does notrecover the current ensemble session. You may verify your configuration using theISQECMD CONDATA ensemble command. AOFB0022 multi-line report providesyou with a property IPSWP showing IP swapping support.

When configured as recommended by IBM, the process of recovering from thefailure of the primary HMC by a takeover of the alternative HMC includes themovement of the IP address from the former primary HMC to the new primaryHMC. When this occurs, explicit redirection of API requests to the newly HMCWeb Services API designated primary HMC is not needed.

However, if the IP address swapping is not possible in your network configuration,do not use the HMCSWITCH command.

Usage

Use this command to initiate a primary/alternative HMC role switch for theensemble.

Return Codes


GETVSSTAT


|

|

|

||

||

||

||

|

|||

|

|

|

||||||

|||||

||

|

||

|

||

LISTPurpose

The LIST ensemble command allows you to query the ProcOps internal datadiscovered for target ensemble session. The list of discovered objects is presentedas a multi-line report. The command does not interact with the HMC.

Syntax


LIST BC bc_filterBL bl_filterCPC cpc_filterJOBVH vh_filterVS vs_filterWL wl_filterZBX zbx_filter

►◄

bc_filter:

NAME(bcname) CPC(cpcname)

bl_filter:


cpc_filter:

NAME(cpcname)

vh_filter:

NAME(vhname) CPC(cpcname) BL(blname) TYPE(vhtype)

vs_filter:


TYPE(vstype)

wl_filter:

NAME(wlname)

LIST


zbx_filter:

NAME(zbxname)

Requirements

The requirements for the LIST command to complete successfully are:v Processor operations must be active.v Processor operations must be in session with the ensemble that has the targeted

resource in its scope.v For LIST VS and LIST WL commands, Virtual Servers and Workloads must be

discovered to the Processor operations data model for the ensemble sessionusing DISCOVERY VS and DISCOVERY WL ensemble commands.

Parameters


*_filterIs a set of parameters limiting the command to a subset of objects of therequired object type. Only full specification of all *_filter parameters ensuresselection of a single object.

NAMEThe name of the object(s) to be selected for LIST report. The name iscase-sensitive.




TYPEDefines the type of the objects(s) to be selected for LIST report. Values are:

For LIST BL command:





For LIST VH and LIST VS commands:


LIST



Defaults

None.



Usage

ProcOps session to an ensemble manages internal data model allowingidentification of ensemble objects based on their names, types, logical parents andmanaging CPCs. The data model is filled in during initialization of the sessionusing ISQXIII command and extended using DISCOVERY VS and DISCOVERYWL ensemble commands.

The following objects are discovered during initialization of the session:v Ensemblev Ensemble nodes (CPCs). Only CPCs selected for the ensemble in the

customization dialogs of SA z/OS are added to the data model.v IBM zEnterprise BladeCenter Extension (zBX) managed by the selected CPCs.v zBX blade centers (BC), blades (BL) and virtualization hosts (VH)

Only objects discovered and available in the data model can be managed usingensemble commands and monitored for notifications. The LIST commands allowyou to query the data model and identify objects for any other ensemblecommands. LIST does not require communication to the ensemble HMC andgenerates no external IP traffic.v Use LIST BC command to see one or more discovered blade centers.v Use LIST BL command to see one or more discovered blades.v Use LIST CPC command to see one or more discovered CPCs.v Use LIST JOB command to see all the active asynchronous commands executed

for the ensemble session using ACTIVATE and DEACTIVATE ensemblecommands which are not yet completed.

v Use LIST VH command to see one or more discovered virtualization hosts(hypervisors).

v Use LIST VS command to see one or more discovered virtual servers discoveredusing DISCOVERY VS commands.

v Use LIST WL command to see one or more discovered workload resourcegroups discovered using DISCOVERY WL commands.

v Use LIST ZBX command to see one or more discovered zBXs.

The data is returned in an AOFB0020 multiline report. If no objects are available inthe data model for specified *_filter, the commands return empty report. For moreinformation about this report format refer to the appendix "Response Messages,Error Strings, Condition Codes" in IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS Messagesand Codes.

LIST



Return Codes


SUBSCRIBEPurpose

The SUBSCRIBE/UNSUBSCRIBE ensemble commands provide a filteringmechanism for event notifications received from the ensemble HMC for a session.The SUBSCRIBE command permits registration of a session to an ensemble forspecific notification types and object classes.

Syntax


SUBSCRIBE ►

►TYPES(ALL) CLASSES(ALL)

TYPES(types) CLASSES(classes)LIST

►◄

Requirements

The requirements for the SUBSCRIBE command to complete successfully are:v Processor operations must be active.v Processor operations must be in session with the ensemble that has the targeted


Parameters


TYPESA comma-separated list of the notification types. Supported values are:

STATUS the status change notifications

PROPERTYthe property change notifications

INVENTORYthe inventory change notifications

JOBthe asynchronous commands completion notifications

LIST


ALLall of the above

NONEleaves the list of notification lists unchanged

CLASSESA comma-separated list of the object classes requiring notifications. Supportedvalues are:

ENSthe notifications for the ensemble

CPCthe notifications for the CPCs

ZBXthe notifications for the zBXs

RACKthe notifications for the racks

BC the notifications for the blade centers

BL the notifications for the blades

VH the notifications for the virtualization hosts (hypervisors)

VS the notifications for the virtual servers

WL the notifications for the workload resource groups

ALLall of the above

NONEleaves the list of object classes unchanged

LISTWhen specified, report AOFB0019, containing the current subscriptioninformation for the selected ensemble session is returned. The parametercannot be combined with TYPES and CLASSES.

Defaults

TYPES(ALL)

CLASSES(ALL)


The TYPES and CLASSES are treated independently, just adding/removingsubscriptions to internal types and classes lists. For example:SUBSCRIBE TYPES(PROPERTY) CLASSES(BC)SUBSCRIBE TYPES(STATUS) CLASSES(BL)

results in a subscription for PROPERTY and STATUS for both BC and BL managedobjects.

SUBSCRIBE


Usage

The IBM zEnterprise Unified Resource Manager includes an asynchronousnotification facility by which client applications may subscribe to and receivenotification messages regarding a set of predefined management events. Theseevents include:v Addition and removal of managed objects to/from the inventory of resources

that are managed by the HMC (INVENTORY change notification).v Changes to specified properties of managed object instances (PROPERTY change

notification).v Changes to the operational status of managed objects (STATUS change

notification).v Completion of asynchronously processed jobs (JOB completion notification).

The SUBSCRIBE command allows the ProcOps ensemble session to subscribe tothese notifications for specific managed objects. The command is session-wide andaffects all interested operators registered using ISQXMON command for a targetensemble, so use this command carefully. A session initialization using ISQXIIIcommand performs initial subscription for the STATUS and JOB notifications forALL classes. You may use SUBSCRIBE command to subscribe to additionalnotifications required for your automation procedures.

You may use SUBSCRIBE LIST command to query your current subscription for anensemble session.

The notifications are delivered in a set of AOFB* reports:v AOFB0100 for STATUS changev AOFB0200 for PROPERTY changev AOFB0300 for COMPLETIONv AOFB0400 for INVENTORY

For more information about these reports refer to the appendix "ResponseMessages, Error Strings, Condition Codes" in IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OSMessages and Codes.

The notification reports from the ensemble HMC are available as ProcOps ISQ800Imessages with a console indicator of SC. In order to get a copy of suchnotifications on your screen as ISQ801I messages, use the ISQXMON command.

Return Codes


UNSUBSCRIBEPurpose

The SUBSCRIBE/UNSUBSCRIBE ensemble commands provide a filteringmechanism for event notifications received from the ensemble HMC for a session.The UNSUBSCRIBE command permits the de-registering of the session to anensemble for specific notification types and object classes.

SUBSCRIBE


Syntax


UNSUBSCRIBETYPES(ALL)

TYPES(types)►

►CLASSES(ALL)

CLASSES(classes)►◄

Requirements

The requirements for the UNSUBSCRIBE command to complete successfully are:v Processor operations must be active.v Processor operations must be in session with the ensemble that has the targeted


Parameters


TYPESA comma-separated list of the notification types. Supported values are:

STATUSthe status change notifications

PROPERTY the property change notifications

INVENTORYthe inventory change notifications

JOBthe asynchronous commands completion notifications

ALLall of the above

NONEleaves the list of notification lists unchanged

CLASSESA comma-separated list of the object classes requiring notifications. Supportedvalues are:

ENSthe notifications for the ensemble

CPCthe notifications for the CPCs

ZBXthe notifications for the zBXs

RACKthe notifications for the racks

BC the notifications for the blade centers

UNSUBSCRIBE


BL the notifications for the blades

VH the notifications for the virtualization hosts (hypervisors)

VS the notifications for the virtual servers

WL the notifications for the workload resource groups

ALLall of the above

NONEleaves the list of object classes unchanged

Defaults

TYPES(ALL)

CLASSES(ALL)


The TYPES and CLASSES are treated independently, just adding/removingsubscriptions to internal types and classes lists. For example:UNSUBSCRIBE TYPES(PROPERTY) CLASSES(BC)

removes subscription to PROPERTY change notifications for ALL managed objectsand removes subscription to ALL notification types for the blade centers.

Usage

The IBM zEnterprise Unified Resource Manager includes an asynchronousnotification facility by which client applications may subscribe to and receivenotification messages regarding a set of predefined management events. Theseevents include:v Addition and removal of managed objects to/from the inventory of resources

that are managed by the HMC (INVENTORY change notification).v Changes to specified properties of managed object instances (PROPERTY change

notification).v Changes to the operational status of managed objects (STATUS change

notification).v Completion of asynchronously processed jobs (JOB completion notification).

The UNSUBSCRIBE command allows the ProcOps ensemble session to remove asubscription for particular notification types and managed objects. The command issession wide and affects all interested operators for a target ensemble, so use thiscommand carefully.

Return Codes


UNSUBSCRIBE


VHDATAPurpose

The VHDATA ensemble command collects configuration and status informationabout addressed zBX virtualization host (hypervisor) and presents this informationin a multi-line report.

Syntax


VHDATACPC(cpcname)

►

►BL(blname)VH(vhname)

TYPE(vhtype)►◄

Requirements

The requirements for the VHDATA command to complete successfully are:v Processor operations must be active.v Processor operations must be in session with the ensemble that has the targeted


Parameters





TYPEDefines the type of a hypervisor. Values are:

power-vma virtualization host running on a Power blade

x-hypa virtualization host running on a System x blade

Defaults

None.


Virtualization Hosts of types "zvm" and "prsm" supported by the IBM zEnterpriseUnified Resource Manager are not supported by the ISQECMD command.

VHDATA


Usage

Use this command to get a snapshot of the virtualization host properties. The datais returned as an AOFB0013 multiline report. For more information about thisreport format refer to the appendix "Response Messages, Error Strings, ConditionCodes" in IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS Messages and Codes. If you havemore than one blade/virtualization host in your ensemble, use BL, VH, TYPE andCPC parameters to limit the query to the single hypervisor object. You may use theLIST VH ensemble command to see names, types and managing CPCs of allvirtualization hosts discovered for the target ensemble. Only full specification ofcommand parameters ensures selection of a single object. If more than one resourcecorresponds to the selected parameters, the command is rejected with conditioncode "00B6001B". For more information about the condition codes refer to theappendix "Response Messages, Error Strings, Condition Codes" in IBM TivoliSystem Automation for z/OS Messages and Codes.


Return Codes


VSDATAPurpose

The VSDATA ensemble command collects configuration and status informationabout addressed zBX virtual server and presents this information in a multi-linereport.

Syntax


VSDATACPC(cpcname)

►

►VS(vsname) BL(blname)

VH(vhname)TYPE(vstype)

►◄

Requirements

The requirements for the VSDATA command to complete successfully are:v Processor operations must be active.v Processor operations must be in session with the ensemble that has the targeted

resource in its scope.v Virtual Servers must be discovered to the Processor operations data model for

the ensemble session using the DISCOVERY VS ensemble command.

VHDATA


Parameters



VS Defines the name of the virtual server. The name is unique to other existingvirtual servers on the virtualization host/blade. The name is case-sensitive.



TYPEDefines the type of the server. Values are:



Defaults

None.


Virtual servers of types "zvm" and "prsm" supported by the IBM zEnterpriseUnified Resource Manager are not supported by the ISQECMD command.

Usage

Use this command to get a snapshot of the virtual server properties. The data isreturned as an AOFB0014 multiline report. For more information about this reportformat refer to the appendix "Response Messages, Error Strings, Condition Codes"in IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS Messages and Codes.

If you have more than one virtual server in your ensemble, use VS, BL, VH, TYPEand CPC parameters to limit the query to the single server object. You may use theLIST VS ensemble command to see names, types, hosting blades and managingCPCs of all virtual servers discovered for the target ensemble. Only a fullspecification of command parameters ensures selection of a single object. If morethan one resource corresponds to the selected parameters, the command is rejectedwith condition code "00B6001B". For more information about the condition codesrefer to the appendix "Response Messages, Error Strings, Condition Codes" in IBMTivoli System Automation for z/OS Messages and Codes.

Only servers discovered using DISCOVERY VS ensemble command and availablein the ProcOps data model can be queried.


VSDATA


Return Codes


WLDATAPurpose

The WLDATA ensemble command collects basic configuration about a workloadresource group object and presents this information in a multi-line report.

Syntax


WLDATAWL(wlname)

►◄

Requirements

The requirements for the WLDATA command to complete successfully are:v Processor operations must be active.v Processor operations must be in session with the ensemble that has the targeted

resource in its scope.v Workloads must be discovered to the Processor operations data model for the

ensemble session using DISCOVERY WL ensemble command.

Parameters


WL Defines the display name specified for the workload resource group. The nameis case-sensitive.

Defaults

None.


None.

Usage

Use this command to get basic information about workload resource group and listof virtual servers assigned to the workload. The data is returned as an AOFB0015multiline report. For more information about this report format refer to theappendix "Response Messages, Error Strings, Condition Codes" in IBM TivoliSystem Automation for z/OS Messages and Codes.

If you have more than one workload defined in your ensemble, use WL parameterto limit the query to the single workload object. You may use the LIST WLensemble command to see names of all workloads discovered for the targetensemble.

VSDATA


Only workloads discovered using the DISCOVERY WL ensemble command andavailable in the ProcOps data model can be queried.


Return Codes


ZBXDATAPurpose

The ZBXDATA ensemble command collects configuration information aboutaddressed IBM zEnterprise BladeCenter Extension (zBX) and presents thisinformation in a multi-line report.

Syntax


ZBXDATACPC(cpcname)

►◄

Requirements

The requirements for the ZBXDATA command to complete successfully are:v Processor operations must be active.v Processor operations must be in session with the ensemble that has the targeted


Parameters



Defaults

None.


None.

Usage

Use this command to get a snapshot of a single zBX object. The data is returned asan AOFB0011 multiline report. For more information about this report format refer

WLDATA


to the appendix "Response Messages, Error Strings, Condition Codes" in IBM TivoliSystem Automation for z/OS Messages and Codes.

If you have more than one zBX in your ensemble, use CPC parameter to limit thequery to a single ZBX object. You may use the LIST zBX ensemble command to seeall zBX objects with their managing CPCs for the target ensemble.


Return Codes


ZBXDATA


ZBXDATA


Chapter 10. PSM Commands - Special Requests

The following special requests can be executed by the ProcOps Service Machine(PSM) Command Server. To issue these requests you must be logged on to thePSM.

Requests can either only be entered directly from the PSM console or be used withthe ISQXPSM command as well as being entered from the PSM console:v PSM commands that operate with ISQXPSM are:

– “ISQACT”– “ISQCLEAR”– “ISQQUERY” on page 560– “ISQSTATUS” on page 560– “ISQTRACE” on page 561

v PSM console commands that can only be entered from the console are:– “ISQMSG”– “ISQPSM” on page 560– “STOPALL” on page 561

ISQACT

►► ISQACT MH ►◄

ISQACT is used to activate a thread after it has stopped.

MH indicates that the Message Handler thread is to be reactivated. This is usefulin cases where the MH thread fails or terminates itself.

ISQCLEAR

►► ISQCLEAR MC

►◄

ISQCLEAR empties the Messages Queue or Commands Queue. All entries areemptied. The queue itself is not deleted.

ISQMSG

►► ISQMSG INDENTMSGID ON

OFF

►◄

ISQMSG is used to change the way that messages are displayed to the console userthat is logged on the PSM. If these messages are also routed to NetView it alsoalters the form of the messages.


If INDENT ON is specified this alters the indentation of each message. Messagesthat are issued by different threads are indented by different amounts. This makesit easier to see the flow of a thread because all its messages are indented by thesame amount. Trace messages (activated by an ISQTRACE request) are alsoindented. Messages from the Main Thread are not indented. Messages that areissued as responses to PSM requests are not indented. If an indented messagecontinues on further lines, the continuation lines are not indented.

INDENT OFF causes all non-trace messages to be displayed without indentation.The initial setting for the PSM is INDENT OFF. This initial setting is set each timethe PSM Control Program is started.

If MSGID OFF is specified, this causes each non-trace message to be displayedwithout its message ID. This may be useful when INDENT ON is in effect, becauseit reduces the length of each message and reduces the continuation of message texton subsequent lines.

MSGID ON causes all non-trace messages to be displayed with their message IDs.The initial setting for the PSM is ON. Trace messages do not have message IDs.

Restrictions and LimitationsThe ISQMSG command can only be entered directly from the console of the PSM.

ISQPSM

►► ISQPSM ►◄

The ISQPSM command starts the PSM server. This command should only beentered after the PSM server has been stopped successfully with a STOPALLcommand and the PSM virtual machine is in CMS mode.

Restrictions and LimitationsThe ISQPSM command can only be entered directly from the console of the PSM.

ISQQUERY

►► ISQQUERYQE

►◄

ISQQUERY displays:

Q How many entries are in the Message Queue.

E A list of current events and event monitors.

Listing the current events and event monitors is useful in problem determination.

ISQSTATUS

►► ISQSTATUS ►◄


ISQSTATUS gives the status of important components of the PSM operation.

ISQTRACE

►► ISQTRACE component ONOFF

►◄

ISQTRACE is used to start or stop PSM tracing of a component of the PSM. Tracemessages are always written to the VM console.

The value of component can be one of:

MSERVMessage server thread.

CSERVCommand server thread.

MH Message handler thread.

LOGGERLogger thread.

CNSERVERConsole server thread.

TCPIP Selected TCPIP requests within the Message Server and Command Serverthreads.

If any trace is set on, regular messages issued to the VM console as part of theVMCONIO stream are sent to the VM console and are no longer routed back toProcOps NetView.

Trace settings are maintained when a PSM is stopped. If the PSM is then restarted(without a re-logon of the CMS machine) the previous trace settings are retained.

When a PSM virtual machine is started all traces are set off.

STOPALL

►► STOPALL ►◄

STOPALL stops all threads and terminates the PSM control program. The PSMvirtual machine remains active.

Restrictions and LimitationsThe STOPALL command can only be entered directly from the console of the PSM.

Chapter 10. PSM Commands - Special Requests 561

Part 5. Appendixes


Appendix A. Definitions for I/O Operations Commands

This information describes using I/O operations (I/O-Ops) commands.

ESCON/FICON DirectorFigure 162 is an example of a diagram that is used in this document to illustrate anESCON director (or switch, as it is usually called).

I/O-Ops has been designed to manage these kinds of switches and provides asingle point of control for each switch whose device is allocated by I/O-Ops. Theallocation avoids an unintentional remove of the switch while I/O-Ops is running.If you plan to remove the device of a switch that is managed by I/O-Ops, forexample, through a dynamic allocation of your configuration, you first need todelete the switch from the I/O-Ops internal database. Please refer to the command“REMOVE SWITCH” on page 342 for details. Another possibility is stopping allI/O-Ops applications that have attached the switch whose device is to be removed.

Note: Unpredictable results may occur if you remove a switch device from theactive configuration when the device is allocated to I/O-Ops.

Switch IdentifiersA switch device number is a hexadecimal number containing up to four digits withany leading 0’s (zeros) padded by I/O-Ops.

The ADDRESS parameter of the IODEVICE macro in the I/O Definition File(IODF) specifies the switch device number.

In many I/O-Ops commands, a switch device number is required in the input toidentify a switch that is allocated to the issuing I/O-Ops (primary host). Theprogram also displays the switch device number on output.

Two related terms apply in this context:

┌──────────────────── Control unit port (CUP) (always FE)↓ ┌─────────── A dynamic connection (──)

┌──┬─┬──┬──↓────────┐│FE│ │C0├─────┐ ┌──┤├──┘ └─┬┘ └──┤D2││ │ └──┤│ └────────┐┌──┤│ ││D4⊗←─ A blocked port

┌─→BLDG_222_SWCH3 │└──┤│ │ │ ││┌───→0300 (P)←──── Prohibited connection (between C0 and D6)││├──┐ ┌──┐ ┌─┴┐ ││││EA╞═╡E0│ │D6│ │││└──┴↑┴──┴─────┴──┴──┘││ └────────────────── A static connection (══)│└─────────────────────── Switch number (0300)└──────────────────────── Location description (BLDG_222_SWCH3)

Figure 162. Sample of an ESCON Director Diagram


v A logical switch number (LSN) is a 2-digit hexadecimal number that is assignedwith the SWITCH parameter on the CHPID macro of the IOCP. I/O-Ops doesnot use an LSN as input, but it does display an LSN in the output of many of itsDisplay and Query commands.

v Hardware Configuration Definition (HCD) uses the term switch identifier(Switch ID), which is identical with the switch's LSN.

Note: In a cascaded switch environment, it is recommended that all switches aredefined to the HCD including their device numbers. This allows I/O-Ops toshow the LSN also for cascaded switches.

Switch Unique IdentifierYou can use the DISPLAY SWITCH command to display the 26-character switchunique identifier.

The format is:009032002IBM26000001234567└─┬──┘└┬┘└┬┘└┤└───┬──────┘│ │ │ │ └─────── 12-character sequence number│ │ │ │ (IBM serial number 1234567 with leading 0s)│ │ │ └──────────── 2-character plant of manufacturer│ │ └─────────────── 3-character manufacturer (IBM)│ └────────────────── 3-character model number (002 is model 2)└─────────────────────── 6-character machine type

(9032 is an IBM Director Model 2 with leading 0s)

Logical Switch Number (LSN)An LSN is a 2-digit hexadecimal number that is assigned with the SWITCHparameter on the CHPID macro of the IOCP.

I/O-Ops does not use an LSN as input, but it does display an LSN in the output ofmany of its display and query commands. Note that the LSN will show "- -" whenthis value is not valid. This can happen only to cascaded switches that have nochannel attachment -- which is normally the case -- to the channel subsystem thatI/O-Ops is running on. For this reason, it is recommended that all switches aredefined to the Hardware Configuration Definition (HCD) including their devicenumbers. This allows I/O-Ops to resolve the LSN also for the above-mentionedswitches.

In many I/O-Ops commands, a switch device number is required in the input toidentify a switch that is allocated to the issuing I/O-Ops (primary host). Theprogram also displays the switch device number on output.

Port AddressesA port address is a two-digit hexadecimal number that identifies an addressableport on a switch.

Switch PortsCH A CNC or CVC CHPID is defined for this port.CU A control unit is assigned to this port.CHCH

More than one CNC or CVC CHPID is assigned to this port.


CHCUBoth a CHPID and a control unit are assigned to this port. CHCU is validif the CHPID is a CTC channel. I/O-Ops does not report such a dualassignment as a configuration mismatch. However, CHCU is not a validcombination for any other type of CHPID. I/O-Ops does report such adual assignment as a configuration mismatch.

CV An ESCON Converter Model 2 (CV converter) is attached to this port. ACV converter (9035) converts ESCON protocol to a parallel CHPIDoperating in block or byte mode.

CVCHA CV converter and an ESCON channel (CNC or CVC) are both assignedto this port. I/O-Ops reports such a dual assignment as a configurationmismatch.

CVCU A CV converter and a control unit are assigned to this port. I/O-Opsreports such a dual assignment as a configuration mismatch.

ISL An Inter-Switch-Link is connected to this port.

Allow or Prohibit Mask of a PortEach port is either allowed to have, or prohibited from having, a dynamicconnection with another port on the same switch.

Collectively, these pairs of connectivity attributes form an allow/prohibit mask.

A Designates the ports for which a dynamic connection is allowed

P Designates the ports for which a dynamic connection is prohibited

An allow/prohibit mask is displayed by I/O-Ops as part of a matrix of a switchconfiguration. The program displays switch matrixes in its sample I/O-Ops ISPFdialog. See examples in IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS User's Guide.

Switch Port Hardware Status on a Display CommandOn the output of DISPLAY commands, I/O-Ops displays the hardware status for aport.

Refer to Figure 163 on page 568.

Appendix A. Definitions for I/O Operations Commands 567

For further information, see the program information block (PIB), which isdescribed in the output block listed in “QUERY SWITCH” in IBM Tivoli SystemAutomation for z/OS Programmer's Reference.

Logical TokensA logical token is an identifier created by hardware configuration description (HCD)for each I/O resource that is defined in an input output definition file (IODF). Iftwo or more systems share an IODF, they will have the same logical token for thesame I/O resource.

Physical TokensA physical token is a 32-byte field that describes an I/O resource.

Information in the physical token comes from either a node element descriptor(NED) or a node descriptor (ND). A NED is a 32-byte field that describes a nodeelement of an I/O resource. A NED is associated with a physical control unit ordevice. An ND is a 32-byte field that describes a node interface of an I/O resource.An ND identifies a physical CHPID. When a physical token is input, the first 4bytes are not used for comparison.

Channel TypesTypes of channels:BLOCK

A parallel channel operating in block modeBYTE A parallel channel operating in byte modeCFR Coupling facility receiverCFS Coupling facility senderCFP Coupling facility peer channelCBR Integrated Cluster Bus receiver

Port StatusH S C P│ │ │ ││ │ │ └── P - Port is prohibitedfrom being dynamically connected with│ │ │ at least one other port│ │ ││ │ └───── xx - Address of the port with which this port is statically│ │ connected│ ││ └──────── � - Port is DCM ineligible│ B - Port is blocked from all communications│ + - Port is DCM eligible and allowed for DCM activities│ - - Port is DCM eligible and not allowed for DCM activities│└─────────── � - Port is online

A - Attachment of port is not validCx - Port is 1 of 3 ports in a chain (C is displayed to the

left of another state)D - Bridge port degradedI - Bridge port offline (inactive)L - Link failure detectedM - Port is in maintenance modeN - Port is not installedO - Port is offlineS - Service is required for this port

Figure 163. Switch Port Hardware Status Format


CBS Integrated Cluster Bus senderCBP Integrated Cluster Bus peerCBY_P

An ESCON to byte converter channelCIB Coupling over InfinibandCNC_P

A point-to-point ESCON channelCNC_S

A switched ESCON channelCNC_?

A switched or point-to-point ESCON channelCTC_P

A point-to-point channel-to-channel channelCTC_S

A switched channel-to-channel channelCTC_?

A switched or point-to-point channel-to-channel channelCVC_P

An ESCON to block converter channelDSD Direct system deviceEIO An emulated I/O channelFC A FICON point-to-point channelFC_S A FICON switched channelFC_? A FICON incomplete channelFCP A FCP channelFCV A FICON-to-ESCON bridgeICR Internal coupling receiverICS Internal coupling senderICP Internal coupling peerIQD Internal queued direct communicationISD Internal system deviceNATVE

Native interfaceOSA An open systems adapter channelOSC OSA consoleOSD An OSA direct express channelOSE An OSA express channelOSN An OSA NCP channelUNDEF

A channel that is not defined

Note: The last character of the DCM managed channels' acronyms is 'M', forexample, FCM or CNCSM.

I/O-Ops can display, or return data on, all the channels known to it. For ESCONchannels, FICON channels, and for parallel channels operating in block mode, theprogram can be used to change the connectivity between these resources andothers in their paths.

A Parallel ChannelI/O-Ops can display information about parallel channels that operate in either byte(BY) or block (BL) mode. I/O-Ops can also change connectivity to a parallelchannel operating in block mode.


An ESCON (CNC) ChannelA CNC channel path is used to transfer data between a host system image and anESCON control unit. I/O-Ops can display data about a CNC channel path andchange its connectivity.

An ESCON Channel Operating in Converted (CVC) ModeA CVC channel path transfers data in blocks and a CBY channel path transfersdata by bytes. A CVC or CBY channel path is an ESCON channel that has beenconverted so that it can interface with an ESCON Converter Model 1 (9034), orequivalent, for communication with a parallel control unit.

A CVC or CBY path always resembles a point-to-point parallel path, regardlesswhether it passes through a switch or not. Thus, a switchable CVC or CBY pathmust pass through a switch as a static connection.

A FICON (FC) ChannelAn FC channel path is used to transfer data between a host system image and anFICON control unit.

I/O-Ops can display data about an FC channel path and change its connectivity.

Coupling Facility ChannelsI/O-Ops can display and return data about a Coupling Facility Receiver (CFR)channel and a Coupling Facility Sender (CFS) channel. However, I/O-Ops does notprovide connectivity control for these types of channels.

OSA ChannelsThe OSA channel provides an S/390 internal channel attachment to local areanetworks (LANs) that support Internet protocols such as fiber distributed datainterface (FDDI), token ring, Ethernet, and high speed serial interface (HSSI).

Making Connectivity ChangesYou can use I/O-Ops as the single point of control for I/O connectivity changes inthe active I/O configurations under its management.

In addition to an I/O-Ops base program running on a host, the host must be ableto play a role with a group of hosts.

To develop safe procedures to protect your system’s connectivity, you need tounderstand the functional characteristics of the dynamic switches that you controlwith I/O-Ops. For example, the local console of Switch Directors has a setting thatallows you to choose how the switch is restarted. If your operating procedures areto restart:v From the same configuration that was most recently active on the Switch

Director, use the Switch Director’s ACTIVE=SAVED settingv From a fixed IPL file, regardless of what was most recently active on the Switch

Director, you can set the Switch Director to use that file

But note that your use of I/O-Ops varies accordingly. Changes that you makethrough I/O-Ops are only automatically restored after events like power failures, ifthe Switch Directors are set to ACTIVE=SAVED. If they are not, consider using


I/O-Ops functions to update each Switch Director’s IPL file in accordance withyour updates directly to the active configuration.

Switch resources are self-defining. The relevant data is contained in a nodedescriptor (ND) of a port or an ESCON/FICON channel and in a node elementdescriptor (NED) of a switch device. I/O-Ops uses this data to ensure systemintegrity in its commands. It can also use the serial number of an ESCON/FICONresource to identify it.

When only the channel or the control unit is an ESCON unit, the non-ESCON unitcan impose some limitations on I/O-Ops’s ability to ensure coordination betweenthe logical definition of the unit and its physical presence. (Unlike ESCON units, anon-ESCON unit is not self-defining.)

NOForce|NOCheck|Force Option SetWith your choice among NOForce, NOCheck, and Force, you determine thestringency with which I/O-Ops forces the completion of a switching connectivitycommand under two conditions:v If any of I/O-Ops’s relevant vary path requests fail.v If I/O-Ops checked and detected the presence of a protocol converter (CV)

between the I/O interface of a parallel channel operating in block mode and theport on a dynamic switch. (NOForce is required for the REMOVE CHP andRESTORE CHP commands. NOCheck has an identical effect on these 2commands.)

NOForce: (IBM-supplied default) instructs I/O-Ops to send a connectivitycommand to the specified switch(es) only if all of the following conditions havebeen met:1. The results of consensus vary-path processing results are unanimously

affirmative.2. If a CV converter has been detected in the parallel channel path, completion of

the command will not potentially interrupt dynamic data transfer through thespecified switch(es).

3. If the command is disrupting a CVC channel, that CHPID has been configuredoffline.

If you specify NOForce, you must also specify Vary. NOForce requires theUPDATE level of authorization if I/O-Ops is secured by RACF® or an equivalentprogram.

NOCheck: instructs I/O-Ops to send a connectivity command to the specifiedswitch(es) only if all of the following conditions listed below have been met:1. The results of consensus vary-path processing results are unanimously

affirmative.2. If the command is disrupting a CVC channel, that CHPID has been configured

offline.

If you specify NOCheck, you must also specify Vary. NOCheck requires theUPDATE level of authorization if I/O-Ops is secured by RACF or an equivalentprogram. Commands entered at the system console automatically receive thehighest, or control, authorization level.

Force: instructs I/O-Ops to send a connectivity command to the specifiedswitch(es).


v If you specify Force, you must specify NOBackout.v You cannot specify Force on a Remove Chp or Restore Chp command.v Force requires the control level of authorization if I/O-Ops is secured by RACF

or equivalent.

Backout|Nobackout Option SetBy choosing between BAckout and NOBackout, you can determine whetherI/O-Ops will attempt to reverse, or to back out, its successful vary path offlinerequests if at least one relevant path could not be varied offline successfully.v If the changes could be backed out, pathing status is returned to the state before

the command was processed.v If the changes are not backed out, pathing status may be mixed. (You can enter a

DISPLAY RESULTS or DISPLAY VARY command to study the resulting status.)

BAckout (IBM-supplied default): instructs I/O-Ops to attempt to back out the varypath offline requests that were successful under a number of error conditions, suchas: requests if at least one path affected by the command could not be variedoffline successfully. Some of the conditions that would require I/O-Ops to attemptto back out vary path requests are:v At least one relevant vary path offline request was not successful. For example, a

voting I/O-Ops has returned a negative vote or the time limit for consensusprocessing was reached before all votes were returned.

v A switch affected by the connectivity command responded negatively.v A channel could not be configured offline successfully with a Remove Chp

command.

If you select BAckout, you cannot select Force.

NOBackout: instructs I/O-Ops to not reverse any vary path requests that havebeen completed successfully during command processing or that are still inprogress. You must specify NOBackout if you specify either NOVary or Force.

When a Command FailsIf you receive a message that a command failed, you first make sure I/O-Ops isrunning. Then, you should try to determine why the command failed, so you cancorrect it or report the problem to IBM.v Make sure I/O-Ops is started. In MVS/ESA, to check if I/O-Ops has been

started on the primary host, enter “display jobs,I/O_operations_procedure_name”. If the I/O-Ops procedure name appears in thelist, I/O-Ops has been started.

v Determine why the command failed. If a command does not completesuccessfully, I/O-Ops issues an error message indicating a host did not performthe command or a switch failed to perform the command, or both. Return codesand reason codes are issued when commands fail when using the API.

v Use the DISPLAY RESULTS command. This command displays information tohelp you quickly determine if the problem is host-related, switch-related, orboth. A command can fail for one or more reasons, including switch-related orI/O-Ops-related problems.The error message you receive might not provide you with sufficientinformation to determine the reasons why your command failed. If you needmore information to understand the problem, you can display information aboutyour configuration status to determine the specific reasons.


v Correct the command failure. Once you have determined the cause of acommand failure and the present configuration status, you can begin to correctthe problem using backout, reset, force, or other options.

Switching CommandsThe members of a group (domain) must be either:v The issuing I/O-Ops, which is the base program (primary host) at which you

enter, or to which you send, the command.v An I/O-Ops base program that shares access to at least one dynamic switch in

common with the issuing I/O-Ops.

If the switching command contains Vary (path) as an implicit or explicit option, theissuing I/O-Ops broadcasts the request to the other base programs. Each baseprogram issues the appropriate vary path requests to its own system (host) image.The results must be known by the issuing I/O-Ops within a preset time interval.After the results are in or when the time interval expires, the issuing I/O-Opsdetermines whether it and the voters have reached the consensus that all the varypath requests completed successfully. If so, the issuing I/O-Ops proceeds withcommand processing.

Notes:

1. Because an issuing I/O-Ops is also called the primary host, or the primaryI/O-Ops host, a voter is also called a secondary host, or a secondary I/O-Opshost.

2. A voter is active if it has not been excluded, or reset, from voting, by the ResetHost command.

3. A voter is inactive if it has been excluded by a Reset Host Off command.4. A voter is purged if it has been excluded by a Reset Host Purge command. To

I/O-Ops, a purged voter simply does not exist.5. The preset time interval is either the IBM-supplied default of 60 seconds or a

time interval set with the Reset Timeout command.

You can change connections of ports on a switch with these commands:v ALLOWv BLOCKv CONNECTv DISCONNECTv PROHIBITv UNBLOCK

The following examples help to illustrate the hierarchy of port attributes.

PROHIBITExample

P (CO) (EA) 0100

ExplanationProhibits data from being transferred dynamically between C0 and EA.Dynamic data transfer between C0 and D4 is not affected.


CONNECTExample

C (CO) (EA) 0100

ExplanationStatically connects C0 and EA for exclusive data transfer, despite theprohibition of a dynamic connection between these two ports. However,data cannot be transferred between C0 and D4.

BLOCKExample

B (CO) 0100

ExplanationBlocks all data transfer through C0, regardless of its other connectivity.Data cannot be transferred between C0 and EA.

Before │ After│

┌─────┬──┬─────┐ │ ┌─────┬──┬─────┐│0100 │C0│ │ │ │0100 │C0│ │├──┐ └┬┬┘ ┌──┤ │ ├──┐ └┬┬┘ ┌──┤│FB│ │└───┤D4│ │ │FB│ │└───┤D4│├──┘ │ └──┤ │ ├──┘ │ └──┤├──┐ │ ┌──┤ │ ├──┐ (P) ┌──┤│EA├───┘ │D6│ │ │EA├───┘ │D6│├──┘ ┌──┐ └──┤ │ ├──┘ ┌──┐ └──┤│ │E0│ │ │ │ │E0│ │└─────┴──┴─────┘ │ └─────┴──┴─────┘

Figure 164. PROHIBIT Command Example

Before │ After│

┌─────┬──┬─────┐ │ ┌─────┬──┬─────┐│0100 │C0│ │ │ │0100 │C0│ │├──┐ └┬┬┘ ┌──┤ │ ├──┐ └╥─┘ ┌──┤│FB│ │└───┤D4│ │ │FB│ ║ │D4│├──┘ │ └──┤ │ ├──┘ ║ └──┤├──┐ (P) ┌──┤ │ ├──┐ ║ ┌──┤│EA├───┘ │D6│ │ │EA╞═══╝ │D6│├──┘ ┌──┐ └──┤ │ ├──┘ ┌──┐ └──┤│ │E0│ │ │ │ │E0│ │└─────┴──┴─────┘ │ └─────┴──┴─────┘

Figure 165. CONNECT Command Example

Before │ After│

┌─────┬──┬─────┐ │ ┌─────┬×─┬─────┐│0100 │C0│ │ │ │0100 │C0│ │├──┐ └╥─┘ ┌──┤ │ ├──┐ └╥─┘ ┌──┤│FB│ ║ │D4│ │ │FB│ ║ │D4│├──┘ ║ └──┤ │ ├──┘ ║ └──┤├──┐ ║ ┌──┤ │ ├──┐ ║ ┌──┤│EA╞═══╝ │D6│ │ │EA╞═══╝ │D6│├──┘ ┌──┐ └──┤ │ ├──┘ ┌──┐ └──┤│ │E0│ │ │ │ │E0│ │└─────┴──┴─────┘ │ └─────┴──┴─────┘

Figure 166. BLOCK Command Example


UNBLOCKExample

U (CO) 0100

ExplanationUnblocks C0, so that the static connection is again in effect.

DISCONNECTExample

N (CO) (EA) 0100

ExplanationRemoves the static connection between C0 and EA, but data cannot betransferred between these two ports because they are still prohibited fromhaving a dynamic connection. However, data can now be transferredbetween C0 and D4.

ALLOWExample

A (CO) (EA) 0100

ExplanationAllows data to be transferred dynamically between C0 and EA.

Before │ After│

┌─────┬×─┬─────┐ │ ┌─────┬──┬─────┐│0100 │C0│ │ │ │0100 │C0│ │├──┐ └╥─┘ ┌──┤ │ ├──┐ └╥─┘ ┌──┤│FB│ ║ │D4│ │ │FB│ ║ │D4│├──┘ ║ └──┤ │ ├──┘ ║ └──┤├──┐ ║ ┌──┤ │ ├──┐ ║ ┌──┤│EA╞═══╝ │D6│ │ │EA╞═══╝ │D6│├──┘ ┌──┐ └──┤ │ ├──┘ ┌──┐ └──┤│ │E0│ │ │ │ │E0│ │└─────┴──┴─────┘ │ └─────┴──┴─────┘

Figure 167. UNBLOCK Command Example

Before │ After│

┌─────┬──┬─────┐ │ ┌─────┬──┬─────┐│0100 │C0│ │ │ │0100 │C0│ │├──┐ └╥─┘ ┌──┤ │ ├──┐ └┬┬┘ ┌──┤│FB│ ║ │D4│ │ │FB│ │└───┤D4│├──┘ ║ └──┤ │ ├──┘ │ └──┤├──┐ ║ ┌──┤ │ ├──┐ (P) ┌──┤│EA╞═══╝ │D6│ │ │EA├───┘ │D6│├──┘ ┌──┐ └──┤ │ ├──┘ ┌──┐ └──┤│ │E0│ │ │ │ │E0│ │└─────┴──┴─────┘ │ └─────┴──┴─────┘

Figure 168. DISCONNECT Command Example


Types Of ChannelsI/O-Ops supports the following channel operational modes:v ESCON Multiple Image Facility (EMIF) modev Logical Partition (LPAR) reconfigurable modev LPAR non-reconfigurable modev Basic mode

I/O-Ops can display, or return data on, all the channels known to it. For ESCONchannels and for parallel channels operating in block mode, the I/O Ops programcan be used to change the connectivity between these channel resources and othersin their paths.

Remove (Quiesce) a SwitchWhen a service representative needs to have a switch quiesced and disabled inorder to remove the unit, you can enter the I/O-Ops REMOVE SWITCH commandto vary all the paths to and through the switch offline, including any paths to theswitch (device) from the other hosts in its group and any chained paths leading toanother switch.

Optionally, you can specify the Disable option, so the service representative onlyhas to turn power off to the unit. (You should not use the VARY DEV or theREMOVE DEV commands.)

I/O-Ops issues the appropriate vary path offline requests to the hosts. (It will notvary the path to the control unit port of the switch because it needs tocommunicate with the switch.)

The issuing I/O-Ops then sends the command “SET OFFLINE” to the switch andinforms you that the command completed successfully. If the command completedunsuccessfully (for example, if a vary path request failed) you can analyze the datawith the appropriate display command. If you cannot resolve the situation and theswitch must be removed, you can rerun the REMOVE SWITCH command with theForce option. However, no paths will be varied offline.

For a discussion of why it sometimes isn't obvious that the status of a path or adevice has changed after an operator has issued a connectivity command, see“Device and Path Status After Connectivity Commands” on page 588.

Before │ After│

┌─────┬──┬─────┐ │ ┌─────┬──┬─────┐│0100 │C0│ │ │ │0100 │C0│ │├──┐ └┬┬┘ ┌──┤ │ ├──┐ └┬┬┘ ┌──┤│FB│ │└───┤D4│ │ │FB│ │└───┤D4│├──┘ │ └──┤ │ ├──┘ │ └──┤├──┐ (P) ┌──┤ │ ├──┐ │ ┌──┤│EA├───┘ │D6│ │ │EA├───┘ │D6│├──┘ ┌──┐ └──┤ │ ├──┘ ┌──┐ └──┤│ │E0│ │ │ │ │E0│ │└─────┴──┴─────┘ │ └─────┴──┴─────┘

Figure 169. ALLOW Command Example


Restore (Enable) a SwitchWhen the system operator completes a maintenance procedure and turns power tothe unit on, you enter the RESTORE SWITCH command and specify the switchdevice number.

The I/O-Ops at which you issued the command (the issuing I/O-Ops) firstallocates, or attaches the switch. Then it activates the configuration for the switchthat the unit is programmed to select whenever power is turned on to it. Finally, itensures all the paths in the selected configuration are varied online.

I/O-Ops informs you the command completed successfully. (If it completedunsuccessfully, you can enter the DISPLAY RESULTS command to obtain moredata.)

For a discussion of why it sometimes isn't obvious that the status of a path or adevice has changed after an operator has issued a connectivity command, see“Device and Path Status After Connectivity Commands” on page 588.

Using Port Names as a Tool in Switching CommandsWhen you enter a switching command, you change the port attributes that controldata transfer on the ports of the switch through which the path passes. The singleswitch or the pair of chained switches in a switchable path must be allocated to theissuing I/O-Ops (primary host) in the command.

To facilitate the connectivity management of these switchable paths, I/O-Ops letsyou assign, or write, a name of up to 24 characters to each addressable port on aswitch.

A port name can consist of character strings, each of which identifies one of theresources in the path leading to or from the port. If you use the same characterstring in more than one port name, that character string effectively serves as ageneric name.

To use a generic name instead of a full port name, you only need to mask off theirrelevant characters in the port name that precede or succeed or intervenebetween the generic character string you want to use. As a mask, you can placeone asterisk (*) in each port name.

Chain and Unchain a Switchable Path (ESCON only)A chained path is a path that passes statically (without dynamic connections)through one switch, which is called the passthru switch in the chain, and ends in asecond, or destination switch. The two switches must be physically linked to eachother.

The ports in a chained path can be designated as the:

A Port that the I/O interface of the channel is physically attached to in a CHchain and the I/O interface of the control unit is attached to in a CU chain.

M Port that the A port is statically connected to in the passthru switch.

E Port that ends the chain in the destination switch.

D Is the destination link address of the chain as defined in the I/O definition


file (IODF) or I/O control data set (IOCDS). As you can see, port D issimultaneously port E in a CU chain, but not in a CH chain.

Chaining a Path (ESCON only)1. You must define a chained path to I/O-Ops, and remove this definition when it

is no longer needed.2. The I/O-Ops that is used to define a chain or remove its definition must have

dynamic access via a CNC channel to the control unit port (CUP) on bothswitches in the chained path. (In Directors, the CUP address is X'FE'.)

3. I/O-Ops will not permit you to define, or remove the definition of, a chain if itcan foresee that the chain command would fail these precursory checks:v Remove the last path to the specified switch(es) in a Block, Connect, or

Chain commandv Affect an unimplemented portv Affect the control unit port (CUP) except to assign it a port namev Allow a port to connect dynamically to itselfv Connect a port statically to itself or to more than one other portv Connect a port that is not installed.v Disconnect 2 ports that are not statically connectedv Chain a port that is already part of a different chainv Chain ports so that they would create a loopChaining can affect the vary path requests that I/O-Ops issues. See “Processinga Vary Path Request” on page 582 for more information.

4. If you intend to define a chain that includes a parallel channel operating inblock mode with a CV converter, such as an ESCON Converter Model 2 (9035)attached, use these guidelines for selecting noforce, nocheck, or force. Theguidelines should help you decide whether to select NOForce, NOCheck, orForce as an option in a connectivity command that affects a CV converter.If the path is not chained and the foregoing requirements are met, you can enter aconnectivity command with either the NOForce option or the NOCheck option.

Chain: C1-D4-F2 │ Chain: E0-D6-CB┌──┐ │ ┌──┐│3C├───────────┐ │ │3A├───────────┐└──┘ │ │ └──┘ │┌───────────┐ │ ┌───────────┐ │ ┌───────────┐ │ ┌───────────┐│ 100 ┌──┤A │ │ 200 │ │ │ 100 ┌──┤ │ │ 200 ││ │C1├──┘ │ │ │ │ │FB├──┘ │ ││ └╥─┤ │ │ │ │ └┬─┤ │ ││ ║ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ ││ ┌╨─┤ ├──┐ ┌──┤ │ │ ┌┴─┤D,E ├──┐ ┌──┤│ │D4╞══════╡F2├─────┤C5├──┐ │ │ │E0╞══════╡D6╞═════╡CB├──┐│ └──┤M E├──┘ └──┤D │ │ │ └──┤ M│──┘ └──┤A │└───────────┘ └───────────┘ │ │ └───────────┘ └───────────┘ │

Passthru Destination │ │ Destination Passthru │switch switch ┌──┴──┐ │ switch switch ┌──┴──┐

│ 820 │ │ │ 990 │└──┬──┘ │ └──┬──┘┌──┴──┐ │ ┌──┴──┐│ 821 │ │ │ 991 │└─────┘ │ └─────┘

Figure 170. Examples of Chained Paths


v If you specify NOForce, I/O-Ops will check for an operational CV converterin the path and process the command under the set of rules that apply.a. If the CV converter is operational, I/O-Ops will:

1) Fail a Block, Connect, Remove Switch, or Chain command that affectsthe port.

2) Fail a Prohibit command that affects the path to the CV converter.b. If the CV converter is not operational, I/O-Ops will:

1) Issue a warning if an Unblock, Disconnect, RESTORE SWITCH, orUnchain command is entered that affects the port.

2) Issue a warning if an Allow command is entered that affects the pathto the CV converter.

v If you specify NOCheck, I/O-Ops will not check for a CV, and will processthe command under the set of rules that apply.

If the path is chained and the foregoing requirements are met, you must specifyNOCheck or Force to unchain the path or to block any of the ports in the path.

5. Make sure the channel I/O interface, the control unit I/O interface, and thelink between the two switches are all attached properly. Ports A, M, E, and D inFigure 170 on page 578 are determined by these attachments. Also make surethe destination link address (port D) is defined properly in the IODF or IOCDS.

6. Remember that defining a chain and removing a defined chain can affect all theparticipants in the issuing I/O-Ops’ consensus vary-path processing.

Two Scenarios for a CH Chain in a CNC PathConfiguration:

Procedure:VARY PATH(200,3C),OFFLINE,FORCECF CHP(3C),OFFLINE,FORCE

CONNECT (C1) (D4) 100


│3A│ │3C│└┬─┘ └┬─┘│ │

┌─┬┴─┬─┬──┬─┬┴─┬─┐ ┌──────┬──┬─┬──┬─┐│ │FB├─┤FE│ │C1│ │ │ │FE│ │C2│ ││ └──┘ └──┘ └╥─┘ │ │ └┬─┘ └──┘ ││ ║┌──┤ │ │ ││ ║│D1│ │ │ ││ ║└──┤ │┌──────┘ ││ ║┌──┤ ├┴─┐ ┌──┤│ ╚╡D4╞═══╡F2├──────────┤C5├──┐│ 0100 └──┤ ├──┘ 0200 └──┤ │└────────────────┘ └────────────────┘ │

┌──┴──┐│ 820 │└──┬──┘┌──┴──┐│ 821 │└─────┘

Figure 171. Chain: Scenario 1


CF CHP(3C),ONLINEVARY PATH(200,3C),ONLINE,FORCE

RESET S 200CHAIN (F2) 200 (D4) (C1) 100

To remove the definition, enter:UNCHAIN (F2) 200 (D4) (C1) 100 VARY FORCE NOB

The Force option is required because the Unchain command removes the last pathto the CUP on the destination switch.

If you do not configure CHPID 3C offline, enter:BLOCK (C1) 100

Configuration:

Procedure:

Enter from SYSA:VARY PATH(200,3C),OFFLINE,FORCECF CHP(3C),OFFLINE,FORCE

Then, enter from SYSB:CHAIN (F2) 200 (D4) (C1) 100

Finally, enter from SYSA:CF CHP(3C),ONLINEVARY PATH(200,3C),ONLINE,FORCERESET S 200

To remove the definition, enter from SYSB:UNCHAIN (F2) 200 (D4) (C1) 100 VARY FORCE NOB

┌────────────────┐ ┌────────────────┐│ I/O Operations │ │ I/O Operations │├────────────────┤ ├────────────────┤│ SYSA │ │ SYSB │└─┬──┬──────┬──┬─┘ └─┬──┬──────┬──┬─┘

│3A│ │3C│ │36│ │38│└┬─┘ └┬─┘ └┬─┘ └┬─┘│ │ ┌────┘ │

┌─┬┴─┬─┬──┬─┬┴─┬─┐ │ ┌──────┬──┬─┬┴─┬─┐│ │FB├─┤FE│ │C1│ │ │ │ │FE├─┤C2│ ││ └──┘ └┬─┘ └╥─┘ │ │ │ └┬─┘ └──┘ ││ │ ║┌──┤ │ │ │ ││ └────╫┤D1├─┘ │ │ ││ ║└──┤ │┌──────┘ ││ ║┌──┤ ├┴─┐ ┌──┤│ ╚╡D4╞═══╡F2├──────────┤C5├──┐│ 0100 └──┤ ├──┘ 0200 └──┤ │└────────────────┘ └────────────────┘ │

┌──┴──┐│ 820 │└──┬──┘┌──┴──┐│ 821 │└─────┘

Figure 172. Chain: Scenario 2


The Force option is required because the Unchain command removes the last pathto the CUP on the destination switch. If you do not configure CHPID 3C offline,enter:BLOCK (C1) 100

A "Partially-ESCON" PathA partially-ESCON path is a path in which either the channel or the control unit inthe I/O path is not an ESCON object.

To ensure system integrity when processing its switching commands, I/O-Opsrelies on node descriptor (ND) or node element descriptor (NED) data from theESCON objects involved. In a switchable partially-ESCON path, therefore, I/O-Opscannot always ensure the same degree of system integrity that it can for “fully”ESCON paths.

An ESCON-in-Converted-Mode (CVC) PathAn ESCON converted channel (CVC) is an ESCON channel that has beeninitialized to operate in converted mode to allow data to be transferred between itshost and a parallel control unit.

A protocol converter such as the ESCON Converter Model 1, or equivalent, mustbe attached to the control unit. This type of converter is transparent to I/O-Ops.

A Parallel Channel in Block (BL) ModeRequirements for a Parallel Channel

v The parallel channel must be operating in block (BL) mode.v The control unit in the path must be an ESCON-capable and “cooperating”

control unit.v The path can be switchable or nonswitchable.v If the path is switchable:

– A protocol converter, such as the ESCON Model 2 (9035), or equivalent, mustbe attached between the channel I/O interface and the switch.

– The switch must be allocated to the issuing I/O-Ops.

┌────────────────┐ ┌────────────────┐│ I/O Operations │ │ I/O Operations │├────────────────┤ ├────────────────┤│ SYSA │ │ SYSB │└─┬───┬──────────┘ └─┬───┬──────────┘

│CVC│ ┌─────────┐ │CVC│ ┌─────────┐└─┬─┘ ├──┐ │ └─┬─┘ ├──┐ │

│ │C0│ │ └────┤C0│ ││ ├──┘ │←─ Switch ───────────→├─┬┘ ││ ├──┐ │ ├─┴┐ ││ │E0│ │ ┌────┤E0│ ││ ├──┘ │ │ ├──┘ ││ └─────────┘ │ └─────────┘

┌──┼──┐ ┌──┼──┐│ │ │←─ Protocol converter ───→│ │ │└──┼──┘ └──┼──┘┌──┴──┐ ┌──┴──┐│ B20 │ │ B20 │└─────┘ └─────┘

Figure 173. ESCON-in-Converted-Mode Sample


Processing a Vary Path RequestWhen you have chosen Vary as a connectivity option, the issuing I/O-Ops and itsactive voting constituency issue the appropriate vary path requests to their hostoperating system images.

The host images comply with the appropriate VARY PATH ON|OFF commands.

General RulesI/O-Ops adheres to the following rules. When the vary path processing has beencompleted successfully, these rules are of only moderate interest to you. However,if one or more requests failed, you need to know these rules to help you analyzethe cause of the failure.v If I/O-Ops knows that the appropriate vary path requests have already been

performed, it takes no action. For example, if a port is blocked, all paths arevaried offline. If a Prohibit command is then entered for the blocked port, nofurther action is taken for that port.

v If two port attributes are to be changed with the same Writeport or Writeswchcommand, the hierarchy remains in effect. (See Switching Commands for moreinformation on port hierarchy.) For example, if you specify that a port be bothblocked and disconnected with the same command, I/O-Ops will perform thevary path processing needed to block that port and disconnect it.

v To keep I/O path disruption to a minimum should a command fail, I/O-Opsvaries:– Offline before it sends a command to a switch.– Online after it sends a command to a switch.

A chained path adds another level of complexity to these rules. Paths through all threeports involved in a chain might be affected by the same connectivity command.For example, the command might affect the middle port’s connectivity. However,vary path processing might be required for the port on the destination switch thatends the chain.

┌────────────────┐ ┌────────────────┐│ I/O Operations │ │ I/O Operations │├────────────────┤ ├────────────────┤│ SYSA │ │ SYSB │└─┬─────┬┬─────┬─┘ └─┬─────┬────────┘

│BLOCK││BLOCK│ │BLOCK│└──┬──┘└──┬──┘ └──┬──┘

│ ┌────┴────┐ ┌────┴────┐│ │ ESCON │ │ ESCON ││ │Converter│ │Converter││ └────┬────┘ └────┬────┘

┌────┴────┐ └────────┐ ┌────────┘│ ESCON │ ┌┬┴┬────┬┴┬┐│Converter│ │└─┘ └─┘│└────┬────┘ │ Switch │

│ │┌─┐ ┌─┐││ └┴┬┴────┴┬┴┘

┌──┴──┐ ┌──┴──┐┌──┴──┐│3990 │ │3990 ││3990 │└─────┘ └─────┘└─────┘

Figure 174. Parallel Channel in Block Mode Sample


If a CV converter is in the chained path, you must specify NOCheck or Force as aconnectivity option if you want to block any of the 3 ports involved or you wantto unchain the chain. (If you specify NOForce, the command will fail.)

VTAM Application NameFor communication among I/O-Ops base programs, I/O-Ops uses VTAM orTCP/IP, or both. To participate in this intersystem communication using VTAM, abase program must be defined as an application according to the rules for VTAMdefinitions.

For information on these definitions, see the I/O-Ops program directory for thehost operating system on which you intend to use the application.

VTAM returns the VTAM application name to a base program when it is started,thus identifying that base program. The base program uses its VTAM applicationname and TCP/IP host name as its host names to register itself to the members ofits group when it allocates each dynamic switch.

To get a list of the VTAM (application), or host names known to an issuingI/O-Ops (primary host), enter the Display Host command as D H * or view thepages of that host's online notebook.

To remove or restore a base program (host) from participating in consensusvary-path processing, use the Reset Host command. (This command has threeoptions: Off, Purge, and On.)

TCP/IP Host NameFor communication among I/O-Ops base programs, I/O-Ops uses VTAM and/orTCP/IP. To participate in this intersystem communication using TCP/IP, a baseprogram must have defined the server port and optionally the client port.

For information on these definitions, see the step “Perform TCP/IP Definitions forI/O Operations” in “Configuring SA z/OS on Host Systems” of IBM Tivoli SystemAutomation for z/OS Planning and Installation.

Note: If server port is not defined the base program suppresses the TCP/IPcommunication.

If TCP/IP is configured to run multiple stacks (CINET) you should specify the hostname on the PARM parameter to tell I/O-Ops what stack it has to use. For detailson how to specify the PARM parameter see the step “Configuring I/O-Ops” in“Configuring SA z/OS on Host Systems” of IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OSPlanning and Installation. If you omit the parameter the base program connects tothe next available stack.

TCP/IP returns its host name after the base program has connected to the stack. Ifthe base program detects that the host name has more than 8 characters it looks foran alias of up to 8 characters. For details on how to specify an alias see the step“Perform TCP/IP Definitions for I/O Operations” in “Configuring SA z/OS onHost Systems” of IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS Planning and Installation.The base program uses its TCP/IP host name and VTAM application name as itshost names to register itself to the members of its group when it allocates eachdynamic switch.


Note: If the host name has more than 8 characters and an appropriate alias cannotbe found the base program suppresses the TCP/IP communication.

To get a list of the TCP/IP (application), or host names known to an issuingI/O-Ops (primary host), enter the Display Host command as "D H *".

To remove or restore a base program (host) from participating in consensusvary-path processing, use the Reset Host command. (This command has threeoptions: Off, Purge, and On.)


Appendix B. General Considerations for I/O OperationsCommands

I/O operations commands do not require access authorization, although it ishighly advisable. For a cross-reference of the access authorization levels that theyrequire see “Defining an RACF Profile for I/O operations” in the appendix“Security and Authorization” of IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OS Planning andInstallation.

General Information and Tips for Using Multisystem Commands1. If you are entering an array or table, it must be fully contained in a single

variable, by itself, and with no leading blanks (trailing blanks are acceptablebecause they will be ignored). Without this restriction, you could enter an arrayor table that has bytes that look like blanks, will be parsed as blanks, and willmake the results unpredictable.

2. Array elements are checked for validity because they are all character data.Tables are not checked for validity because numeric data is assumed to behexadecimal (and so can never be invalid). Tables are not subject to translationand only the RNUMs are taken from the table.

3. Host application names will be checked for validity. Valid names follow MVSmember name rules.

Query commands only: “HOST()” and “XSYS()” are interpreted as an error (noname is included between the beginning and ending parenthesis).

4. For table input, the responder must be the same as the host targeted to returnthe response.

5. A summary ROW for each host will be returned as the FIRST row for eachresponder host that is returning data (that is, that does not have a commandstart failure). This ROW is marked by RCODE=X'5100FFFF'and contains(currently) status bits.

6. For Query Interface commands (only), when the interface is not found on theentity1 switch/cu, row is marked by RCODE=X'5100 0016'.

7. Query Interface Switch/CntlUnit commands change their output structures tomove the switch/control unit description into every row instead of having itreside in the header. With multi-host responses, there is no way to resolvewhich switch description would have stayed in the command header (each hostcould have a different description of the switch/control unit).

8. Query Interface Switch returns no rows when the switch being queried isclosed. Also, Query Interface CntlUnit returns no rows when the PID for thecontrol unit is not valid.

9. The lock owner field in the QEH command is only valid when the responderhost is the same as the object/entity host. For example, if you issue a QueryEntity Host Value HOST(*) SCOPE Value HOST(*) command, the QEH that isreturned will contain #hosts x #hosts ROWs (because each host will return allthe hosts it knows about) but the only valid lockowner fields will be where:QEH.ROW(i).RESPONDER.APPLNAME = QEH.ROW(i).APPL_NAME.


General Considerations for Using the Query Entity|Interface|RelationsCommands

1. Input for Query Entity and Query Interface commands: A Query Relationtable can be input for all Query Entity and Query Interface Switch commands.

2. Data returned: For the Query Entity, Query Interface, and Query Relationcommands, use the self-description data (header size, row size, format ID) thatis returned with each output structure to parse the data.

3. Duplicate rows: No duplicate rows will be returned unless an array or table isused as the second entity asking for duplicate information to be returned. Thisimplies that unless complete pathing (host-to-device or CHPID-to-device) isspecified in your command, you could be getting summary data back.For example, assume your configuration contains CHPIDs 10, 11, and 12, eachwith a path to control unit 100. Additionally, control unit 100 has devices100–107 on it.A Query Relation CU 100 Chp Value * (tell me all CHPIDs that access device100) would return 3 data QRO.ROWs to describe the 3 paths (CHPID 10 todevice 100, CHPID 11 to device 100 and CHPID 12 to device 100). These areexamples of complete path definitions.If you issue Query Relation CU 100 Dev Value 100 (tell me whether device100 is defined to be on CU 100), only 1 data QRO.ROW is returned (not 3)indicating that there is a logical relationship between the two entities but notcomplete details (paths) about the relation because the command did not askfor complete pathing.

4. Multiple rows: A single array entry could generate more than one rowreturned. For example, the relation between a device and a host will return asmany rows as there are CHPIDs that access the given device.

5. Rules for columns of data: Although the same structure is returned for everyQuery Relation command, different columns of data are returned for thedifferent variations of the commands. The following rules apply:a. STATBITS are set for every command.b. The columns between HOST and DEVICE are command-dependent; that

is, Query Relation Host-Host commands return only the HOST column,Query Relation Host-Chp commands return both the HOST and CHPIDcolumns, Query Relation Host-Switch commands return HOST, CHPID,PORTIN, SWDEVN, and LSN columns (note that STATBITS are required tovalidate PORTIN and SWDEVN as these might or might not be known),and so on.

c. Like entities are not allowed except host-to-host relations, which indicateVTAM relations, and switch-to-switch relations, which indicate chainingrelations.

d. Data for a secondary host (voting I/O-Ops) will be marked INCOMPLETEbecause data bases are not shared among participating I/O-Ops.

e. When no host is named in a command, the primary host (issuing I/O-Ops)is assumed.

6. Sorting of output: Sorting is done only if you specify Value or Range asoptions for the format of the output. If you specify Array or Table, I/O-Opsreturns data in the same order as the input array or table.

7. Chpid filtering of pathing information is handled as follows:

a. If a channel is reserved to a partition that is not the one you are runningon, the channel will appear as not defined.


b. I/O-Ops only returns paths where the Chpid is not reserved to anotherpartition.

8. Reason codes that are related to Return codes:

In addition to the return codes (RCs) and reason codes that are also returnedfor the Display and the Query Switch commands, such as CHSC datarefreshed, lock indicators, switch configurations, and so on, the followingcombinations are unique to the Query commands:v With RC = 4, a reason code of X'51001004' indicates that some host has at

least one summary row bit set.v For RC = 8, a Getmain failure occurred.v With RC = 20, a reason code of X'51xxyyyy' indicates that I/O-Ops has

detected an internal error. You should report this problem to IBM.9. Overflow conditions: In the Query Entity, Query Interface, and Query

Relation commands the header and summary rows of the output contains abit to indicate that an overflow condition was detected in the response buffer.v If you entered a Query Entity or Query Interface command:

Enter another (similar) command to retrieve the subset of data that has notbeen returned.For example, if the command that overflowed was Query Entity Dev Value* and the last device entry returned to you is (device number) 743, the nextcommand you should issue is Query Entity Dev Range 744-*.If you are using an array (or table) as input for a command, you shouldcontinue to use the array/table form of command but adjust yourarray/table input to begin at the (output_num_rows+1) element in your nextarray command.

v If you entered a Query Relation command:

When translating your original command to a new format due to anoverflow return/reason code, you might need to begin your new commandwith the last value returned for the second entity (not the one after the lastvalue returned) or some pathing information could be lost.For example, assume you have the following partial configuration:Host = IHVAPPL1 CHPIDs = 1,2,3,4,5 CntlUnits = 100 (accessed by CHPIDs1,2,3), 200 (accessed by CHPIDs 3,4,5) Devices = 100-10F (off CU 100),200-20F (off CU 200)Assume (for the purposes of this example only) that 7 is the maximumnumber of rows that can be returned with any Query Relation command (inreality this number is more on the order of 2700).You issue Query Relation Host IHVAPPL1 Dev Value * to request all theIOCDS paths defined for this host.I/O-Ops returns 7 rows describing paths (1,100), (2,100), (3,100), (1,101),(2,101), (3,101) and (1,102) with RC and RSN indicating overflow and theMORE_DATA bit in the output table set.Because you only received 1 of 3 rows (paths) back for device 102, youmust now use the command Query Relation Host IHVAPPL1 Dev Range102-* to retrieve the pathing information for this host.

10. Chaining: Chaining is indicated in an AEAM for a port by virtue of thelog_class=switch (port) and the LOGICAL bit being set.If the path is chained, the switch that appears in the row for a path is either:a. The dynamic switch in the chain, or (if there is no dynamic switch)

Appendix B. General Considerations for I/O Operations Commands 587

b. The switch that the CHPID for the path is defined (in IOCDS) to be on (bythe SWITCH= parameter).

11. “Physical” rules with respect to the EAM/AEAM are:

a. EAM.LOGICAL or AEAM.LOGICAL = 1 (binary) means the entity isdefined in the IOCDS. Additionally, Chain commands are consideredlogical definition data so they are also included in “logical” data.

b. PHYSICAL (current, history and not valid) means “according to link leveldata” (node element descriptors [NEDs] or node descriptors [NDs]).

c. Physical OTHERS bits (and NDs) are set when the interface for an entitybeing queried does not have the same validity as the entity itself (asrepresented in the physical ID). OTHER_NDs are validated by AEAM bits(OTHERS bits are never set in EAMs). The OTHER_ND that is returnedcontains a ND for the attached entity that is causing the PID to be “morevalid” than the interface being queried.

d. Logical OTHER bit (and value) is set when the interface for an entity beingqueried does not have an IOCDS path defined to it on the interface beingqueried (that is, a physical-only path to the entity) but the entity is definedin the IOCDS and is accessible by other paths. The OTHER_LOG field willbe set to the smallest logical value for the entity (for example, if controlunits 100 and 200 are hung off a port in a physical-only relationship butare defined to have other (IOCDS) paths elsewhere, the LOG_OTHER bitwould be set for the (QIS) port’s AEAM and the OTHER_LOG wouldcontain 100).

12. P_AMB, when on, means at least one of the following:

a. All the (IOCP/IODF) defined interfaces to the control unit do not have thesame WWID (only valid NDs are checked).

b. For switches only: Even if all the WWIDs in the interfaces for the CNTLmatch, if the CNTLPID.WWID is different from the SWITPID.WWID(which is obtained from the NED), the CNTLPID is marked P_AMB andremains REFLECTED.

c. For CHPIDs only: When the attached ND's WWID is not the same as thePID.WWID of the switch that it is supposed to be attached to.

Device and Path Status After Connectivity CommandsThis section describes the results of I/O-Ops connectivity commands such asPROHIBIT/ALLOW, BLOCK/UNBLOCK, and REMOVE/RESTORECHP/SWITCH. Sometimes it isn't obvious why the status of a path or a device hasnot changed after an operator has issued one of these connectivity commands.

Generally, if the status of a path or device is OFFLINE before a PROHIBIT,BLOCK, or REMOVE command is issued, the status will not be changed when theopposite command is issued afterwards.

This is also true for the ALLOW, UNBLOCK, and RESTORE commands if theOFFLINE status of a path or device was not the result of a PROHIBIT, BLOCK, orREMOVE command.

The status of a path is also OFFLINE even if the path was ONLINE before issuingthe connectivity commands when all of the following conditions are true:v The path's device is attached to a cascaded switch.v The device of the path's entry switch is OFFLINE, which makes the switch

unknown to I/O-Ops.


v The destination switch has been manipulated by two connectivity commandsresulting in varying the path to the device first OFFLINE and then ONLINE.

Note: MVS handles the device status after varying ONLINE the very first path toa device differently, depending on the status that the device had before the lastpath to the device was varied OFFLINE:v If the device status is ONLINE when the last path is forced to OFFLINE, the

first path to the device that becomes ONLINE will also vary the deviceONLINE.

v If the device status is OFFLINE when the last path is varied OFFLINE, thedevice is kept OFFLINE regardless of how many paths become ONLINE.

Table 5 shows a sample that uses the REMOVE SWITCH and RESTORE SWITCHcommands to demonstrate how the status of a device and its paths are affected byan I/O-Ops connectivity command.

Table 5. Device and Path Status Before and After the REMOVE SWITCH and RESTORESWITCH CommandsSystem KEY3 System KEY4

D M=DEV(297F)IEE174I 13.13.37 DISPLAY M 033DEVICE 297F STATUS=ONLINECHP AE ABENTRY LINK ADDRESS 6257 6280DEST LINK ADDRESS 613C 6420PATH ONLINE N YCHP PHYSICALLY ONLINE Y YPATH OPERATIONAL Y YMANAGED N N:

V PATH(297F,AB),OFFLINE,FORCEIOS444I DYNAMIC PATHING NOT OPERATIONAL ON DEVICE 297FIEE303I PATH(297F,AB) OFFLINEIEE303I 297F OFFLINE

D M=DEV(297C-297F)IEE174I 13.14.08 DISPLAY M 052DEVICE 297C STATUS=ONLINECHP AE ABENTRY LINK ADDRESS 6257 6280DEST LINK ADDRESS 613C 6420PATH ONLINE Y YCHP PHYSICALLY ONLINE Y YPATH OPERATIONAL Y YMANAGED N N:DEVICE 297D STATUS=ONLINECHP AE ABENTRY LINK ADDRESS 6257 6280DEST LINK ADDRESS 613C 6420PATH ONLINE Y NCHP PHYSICALLY ONLINE Y YPATH OPERATIONAL Y YMANAGED N N:DEVICE 297E STATUS=ONLINECHP AE ABENTRY LINK ADDRESS 6257 6280DEST LINK ADDRESS 613C 6420PATH ONLINE N YCHP PHYSICALLY ONLINE Y YPATH OPERATIONAL Y YMANAGED N N:DEVICE 297F STATUS=OFFLINECHP AE ABENTRY LINK ADDRESS 6257 6280DEST LINK ADDRESS 613C 6420PATH ONLINE N NCHP PHYSICALLY ONLINE Y YPATH OPERATIONAL Y YMANAGED N N:

D M=DEV(297C-297F)IEE174I 13.04.24 DISPLAY M 798DEVICE 297C STATUS=OFFLINECHP AE ABENTRY LINK ADDRESS 6257 6280DEST LINK ADDRESS 613C 6420PATH ONLINE Y YCHP PHYSICALLY ONLINE Y YPATH OPERATIONAL Y YMANAGED N N:DEVICE 297D STATUS=OFFLINECHP AE ABENTRY LINK ADDRESS 6257 6280DEST LINK ADDRESS 613C 6420PATH ONLINE Y NCHP PHYSICALLY ONLINE Y YPATH OPERATIONAL Y YMANAGED N N:DEVICE 297E STATUS=OFFLINECHP AE ABENTRY LINK ADDRESS 6257 6280DEST LINK ADDRESS 613C 6420PATH ONLINE N YCHP PHYSICALLY ONLINE Y YPATH OPERATIONAL Y YMANAGED N N:U NUMBER 297C 297CDEVICE 297F STATUS=OFFLINECHP AE ABENTRY LINK ADDRESS 6257 6280DEST LINK ADDRESS 613C 6420PATH ONLINE N NCHP PHYSICALLY ONLINE Y YPATH OPERATIONAL Y YMANAGED N N:

F E,REMOVE S 1013IHVR001I I/O-OPS command 261IHVR010I Command entered by SYS OPER on IPSAOIHV:IHVR011I REMOVE SWITCH 1013 NODISABLE NOFORCE VARY BACKOUTIEE303I PATH(297F,AB) OFFLINE BY ESCMIEE303I PATH(297E,AB) OFFLINE BY ESCMIEE303I 297E OFFLINE BY ESCMIEE303I PATH(297D,AB) OFFLINE BY ESCMIEE303I PATH(297C,AB) OFFLINE BY ESCMIHVR021I REMOVE command successful, RC=0 RSN=40000004.IHVC998I I/O-OPS command response 268IHVC000I REMOVE command successful.IHVO000I I/O-OPS is ready to process operator commands.IEE633I SWITCH 1013, PORT 20, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 270ATTACHED NODE = 002107.9A2.IBM.75.000000074011

IEE303I PATH(297F,AB) OFFLINE BY ESCMIEE303I PATH(297E,AB) OFFLINE BY ESCMIEE303I PATH(297D,AB) OFFLINE BY ESCMIEE303I PATH(297C,AB) OFFLINE BY ESCMIEE633I SWITCH 1013, PORT 20, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 992ATTACHED NODE = 002107.9A2.IBM.75.000000074011


Table 5. Device and Path Status Before and After the REMOVE SWITCH and RESTORESWITCH Commands (continued)System KEY3 System KEY4

D M=DEV(297C-297F)IEE174I 13.27.01 DISPLAY M 272DEVICE 297C STATUS=ONLINECHP AE ABENTRY LINK ADDRESS 6257 6280DEST LINK ADDRESS 613C 6420PATH ONLINE Y NCHP PHYSICALLY ONLINE Y YPATH OPERATIONAL Y YMANAGED N N:DEVICE 297D STATUS=ONLINECHP AE ABENTRY LINK ADDRESS 6257 6280DEST LINK ADDRESS 613C 6420PATH ONLINE Y NCHP PHYSICALLY ONLINE Y YPATH OPERATIONAL Y YMANAGED N N:DEVICE 297E STATUS=OFFLINECHP AE ABENTRY LINK ADDRESS 6257 6280DEST LINK ADDRESS 613C 6420PATH ONLINE N NCHP PHYSICALLY ONLINE Y YPATH OPERATIONAL Y YMANAGED N N:DEVICE 297F STATUS=OFFLINECHP AE ABENTRY LINK ADDRESS 6257 6280DEST LINK ADDRESS 613C 6420PATH ONLINE N NCHP PHYSICALLY ONLINE Y YPATH OPERATIONAL Y YMANAGED N N:

D M=DEV(297C-297F)IEE174I 13.31.05 DISPLAY M 006DEVICE 297C STATUS=OFFLINECHP AE ABENTRY LINK ADDRESS 6257 6280DEST LINK ADDRESS 613C 6420PATH ONLINE Y NCHP PHYSICALLY ONLINE Y YPATH OPERATIONAL Y YMANAGED N N:DEVICE 297D STATUS=OFFLINECHP AE ABENTRY LINK ADDRESS 6257 6280DEST LINK ADDRESS 613C 6420PATH ONLINE Y NCHP PHYSICALLY ONLINE Y YPATH OPERATIONAL Y YMANAGED N N:DEVICE 297E STATUS=OFFLINECHP AE ABENTRY LINK ADDRESS 6257 6280DEST LINK ADDRESS 613C 6420PATH ONLINE N NCHP PHYSICALLY ONLINE Y YPATH OPERATIONAL Y YMANAGED N N:DEVICE 297F STATUS=OFFLINECHP AE ABENTRY LINK ADDRESS 6257 6280DEST LINK ADDRESS 613C 6420PATH ONLINE N NCHP PHYSICALLY ONLINE Y YPATH OPERATIONAL Y YMANAGED N N:

IEF236I ALLOC. FOR IOZPS33H EIEF237I 1013 ALLOCATED TO SWIT1013IHVA201I Switch 1013 Port 04 state changed.:IHVA201I Switch 1013 Port 20 state changed.IHVD344I Control unit 297C status update.IHVA201I Switch 1013 Port 21 state changed.IHVA201I Switch 1013 Port FE state changed.IHVD344I Control unit 1013 status update.IEE302I PATH(297E,AB) ONLINE BY ESCMIEE302I 297E ONLINE BY ESCMIEE302I PATH(297C,AB) ONLINE BY ESCMIEE302I PATH(1013,AB) ONLINE BY ESCMIEE302I PATH(1013,AA) ONLINE BY ESCMIEE633I SWITCH 1013, PORT 20, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 351ATTACHED NODE = 002107.9A2.IBM.75.000000074011THE FOLLOWING DEVICE PATHS ARE ONLINE THROUGH THIS PORT:(297C,AB),(297E,AB)

F E,RESTORE S 1013IHVR001I I/O-OPS command 024IHVR010I Command entered by SYS OPER on IPSAPIHV:IHVR011I RESTORE SWITCH 1013 NOFORCE VARY BACKOUTIEF236I ALLOC. FOR IOZPS33H EIEF237I 1013 ALLOCATED TO SWIT1013IHVA201I Switch 1013 Port 04 state changed.IHVA201I Switch 1013 Port 05 state changed.:IHVA201I Switch 1013 Port FE state changed.IHVD344I Control unit 1013 status update.IEE302I PATH(297E,AB) ONLINE BY ESCMIEE302I PATH(297C,AB) ONLINE BY ESCMIEE302I PATH(1013,AB) ONLINE BY ESCMIEE302I PATH(1013,AA) ONLINE BY ESCMIHVR021I RESTORE command successful, RC=0 RSN=40000004.IHVC998I I/O-OPS command response 099IHVC000I RESTORE command successful.IHVO000I I/O-OPS is ready to process operator commands.IEE633I SWITCH 1013, PORT 20, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 101ATTACHED NODE = 002107.9A2.IBM.75.000000074011THE FOLLOWING DEVICE PATHS ARE ONLINE THROUGH THIS PORT:(297C,AB),(297E,AB)


D M=DEV(297C-297F)IEE174I 13.39.04 DISPLAY M 103DEVICE 297C STATUS=OFFLINECHP AE ABENTRY LINK ADDRESS 6257 6280DEST LINK ADDRESS 613C 6420PATH ONLINE Y YCHP PHYSICALLY ONLINE Y YPATH OPERATIONAL Y YMANAGED N N:DEVICE 297D STATUS=OFFLINECHP AE ABENTRY LINK ADDRESS 6257 6280DEST LINK ADDRESS 613C 6420PATH ONLINE Y NCHP PHYSICALLY ONLINE Y YPATH OPERATIONAL Y YMANAGED N N:DEVICE 297E STATUS=OFFLINECHP AE ABENTRY LINK ADDRESS 6257 6280DEST LINK ADDRESS 613C 6420PATH ONLINE N YCHP PHYSICALLY ONLINE Y YPATH OPERATIONAL Y YMANAGED N N:DEVICE 297F STATUS=OFFLINECHP AE ABENTRY LINK ADDRESS 6257 6280DEST LINK ADDRESS 613C 6420PATH ONLINE N NCHP PHYSICALLY ONLINE Y YPATH OPERATIONAL Y YMANAGED N N:

V PATH(297F,AE),ONLINEIEE302I PATH(297F,AE) ONLINEIEE302I 297F ONLINE



D M=DEV(297F)IEE174I 13.41.22 DISPLAY M 391DEVICE 297F STATUS=ONLINECHP AE ABENTRY LINK ADDRESS 6257 6280DEST LINK ADDRESS 613C 6420PATH ONLINE Y NCHP PHYSICALLY ONLINE Y YPATH OPERATIONAL Y YMANAGED N N:

V PATH(297F,AE),OFFLINE,FORCEIOS444I DYNAMIC PATHING NOT OPERATIONAL ON DEVICE 297FIEE303I PATH(297F,AE) OFFLINEIEE303I 297F OFFLINE

IEE303I PATH(297F,AE) OFFLINE BY ESCMIEE303I PATH(297E,AE) OFFLINE BY ESCMIEE303I PATH(297D,AE) OFFLINE BY ESCMIEE303I 297D OFFLINE BY ESCMIEE303I PATH(297C,AE) OFFLINE BY ESCMIEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 05, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 394ATTACHED NODE = 002107.9A2.IBM.75.000000074012IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 0A, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 395ATTACHED NODE = 002105.800.IBM.75.000000029410IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 0D, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 396ATTACHED NODE = 002107.9A2.IBM.75.000000074012IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 12, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 397ATTACHED NODE = 002107.922.IBM.75.0000000CVBM1IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 17, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 398ATTACHED NODE = 002107.932.IBM.75.0000000CF811IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 1A, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 399ATTACHED NODE = 002107.932.IBM.75.0000000CD111IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 1B, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 400ATTACHED NODE = 002107.932.IBM.75.0000000CC481IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 23, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 401ATTACHED NODE = 002107.932.IBM.75.0000000CF811IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 25, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 402ATTACHED NODE = 002107.9A2.IBM.75.000000074011IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 2D, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 403ATTACHED NODE = 002107.932.IBM.75.0000000CW931IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 2F, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 404ATTACHED NODE = 002107.932.IBM.75.0000000CC481IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 31, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 405ATTACHED NODE = 002107.932.IBM.75.0000000CW931IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 3C, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 406ATTACHED NODE = 002107.9A2.IBM.75.000000074011IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 40, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 407ATTACHED NODE = 002107.9A2.IBM.75.000000074011IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 42, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 408ATTACHED NODE = 002105.800.IBM.75.000000026079

F E,REMOVE S 1010IHVR001I I/O-OPS command 129IHVR010I Command entered by SYS OPER on IPSAPIHV:IHVR011I REMOVE SWITCH 1010 NODISABLE NOFORCE VARY BACKIEE303I PATH(297F,AE) OFFLINE BY ESCMIEE303I PATH(297E,AE) OFFLINE BY ESCMIEE303I PATH(297D,AE) OFFLINE BY ESCMIEE303I PATH(297C,AE) OFFLINE BY ESCMIEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 05, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 118ATTACHED NODE = 002107.9A2.IBM.75.000000074012IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 0A, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 119ATTACHED NODE = 002105.800.IBM.75.000000029410IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 0D, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 120ATTACHED NODE = 002107.9A2.IBM.75.000000074012IHVR021I REMOVE command successful, RC=0 RSN=40000004.IHVC998I I/O-OPS command response 122IHVC000I REMOVE command successful.IHVO000I I/O-OPS is ready to process operator commands.IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 12, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 124ATTACHED NODE = 002107.922.IBM.75.0000000CVBM1IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 17, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 125ATTACHED NODE = 002107.932.IBM.75.0000000CF811IEF196I IEF237I 5015 ALLOCATED TO SYS00261IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 1A, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 127ATTACHED NODE = 002107.932.IBM.75.0000000CD111IEF196I IEF285I SYS1.LINKLIBIEF196I IEF285I VOL SER NOS= 190923.IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 1B, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 130ATTACHED NODE = 002107.932.IBM.75.0000000CC481IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 23, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 131ATTACHED NODE = 002107.932.IBM.75.0000000CF811IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 25, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 132ATTACHED NODE = 002107.9A2.IBM.75.000000074011IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 2D, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 133ATTACHED NODE = 002107.932.IBM.75.0000000CW931IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 2F, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 134ATTACHED NODE = 002107.932.IBM.75.0000000CC481IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 31, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 135ATTACHED NODE = 002107.932.IBM.75.0000000CW931IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 3C, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 136ATTACHED NODE = 002107.9A2.IBM.75.000000074011IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 40, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 137ATTACHED NODE = 002107.9A2.IBM.75.000000074011IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 42, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 138ATTACHED NODE = 002105.800.IBM.75.000000026079

D M=DEV(297C-297F)IEE174I 13.51.52 DISPLAY M 431DEVICE 297C STATUS=ONLINECHP AE ABENTRY LINK ADDRESS 6257 6280DEST LINK ADDRESS 613C 6420PATH ONLINE N YCHP PHYSICALLY ONLINE Y YPATH OPERATIONAL Y YMANAGED N N:DEVICE 297D STATUS=OFFLINECHP AE ABENTRY LINK ADDRESS 6257 6280DEST LINK ADDRESS 613C 6420PATH ONLINE N NCHP PHYSICALLY ONLINE Y YPATH OPERATIONAL Y YMANAGED N N:DEVICE 297E STATUS=ONLINECHP AE ABENTRY LINK ADDRESS 6257 6280DEST LINK ADDRESS 613C 6420PATH ONLINE N YCHP PHYSICALLY ONLINE Y YPATH OPERATIONAL Y YMANAGED N N:DEVICE 297F STATUS=OFFLINECHP AE ABENTRY LINK ADDRESS 6257 6280DEST LINK ADDRESS 613C 6420PATH ONLINE N NCHP PHYSICALLY ONLINE Y YPATH OPERATIONAL Y YMANAGED N N:

D M=DEV(297C-297F)IEE174I 13.53.34 DISPLAY M 146DEVICE 297C STATUS=OFFLINECHP AE ABENTRY LINK ADDRESS 6257 6280DEST LINK ADDRESS 613C 6420PATH ONLINE N YCHP PHYSICALLY ONLINE Y YPATH OPERATIONAL Y YMANAGED N N:DEVICE 297D STATUS=OFFLINECHP AE ABENTRY LINK ADDRESS 6257 6280DEST LINK ADDRESS 613C 6420PATH ONLINE N NCHP PHYSICALLY ONLINE Y YPATH OPERATIONAL Y YMANAGED N N:DEVICE 297E STATUS=OFFLINECHP AE ABENTRY LINK ADDRESS 6257 6280DEST LINK ADDRESS 613C 6420PATH ONLINE N YCHP PHYSICALLY ONLINE Y YPATH OPERATIONAL Y YMANAGED N N:DEVICE 297F STATUS=OFFLINECHP AE ABENTRY LINK ADDRESS 6257 6280DEST LINK ADDRESS 613C 6420PATH ONLINE N NCHP PHYSICALLY ONLINE Y YPATH OPERATIONAL Y YMANAGED N N:



F E,RESTORE S 1010IHVR001I I/O-OPS command 478IHVR010I Command entered by SYS OPER on IPSAOIHV:IHVR011I RESTORE SWITCH 1010 NOFORCE VARY BACKOUTIEF236I ALLOC. FOR IOZPS33H EIEF237I 1010 ALLOCATED TO SWIT1010IHVA201I Switch 1010 Port 04 state changed.:IHVD344I Control unit 297C status update.:IHVA201I Switch 1010 Port FE state changed.IHVD344I Control unit 1010 status update.IEE302I PATH(297D,AE) ONLINE BY ESCMIEE302I 297D ONLINE BY ESCMIEE302I PATH(297C,AE) ONLINE BY ESCMIEE302I PATH(1010,AA) ONLINE BY ESCMIEE302I PATH(1010,AE) ONLINE BY ESCMIEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 05, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 217ATTACHED NODE = 002107.9A2.IBM.75.000000074012IHVR021I RESTORE command successful, RC=4 RSN=50000030.IHVC998I I/O-OPS command response 219IHVC001I RESTORE command successful, RC=4 RSN=50000030.IHVC615I Host(s) issued WARNING(s) for the RESTORE command.IHVO000I I/O-OPS is ready to process operator commands.IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 0A, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 221ATTACHED NODE = 002105.800.IBM.75.000000029410IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 0D, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 222ATTACHED NODE = 002107.9A2.IBM.75.000000074012IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 12, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 223ATTACHED NODE = 002107.922.IBM.75.0000000CVBM1IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 17, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 224ATTACHED NODE = 002107.932.IBM.75.0000000CF811IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 1A, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 225ATTACHED NODE = 002107.932.IBM.75.0000000CD111IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 1B, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 226ATTACHED NODE = 002107.932.IBM.75.0000000CC481IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 23, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 227ATTACHED NODE = 002107.932.IBM.75.0000000CF811IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 25, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 228ATTACHED NODE = 002107.9A2.IBM.75.000000074011IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 2D, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 229ATTACHED NODE = 002107.932.IBM.75.0000000CW931IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 2F, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 230ATTACHED NODE = 002107.932.IBM.75.0000000CC481IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 31, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 231ATTACHED NODE = 002107.932.IBM.75.0000000CW931IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 3C, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 232ATTACHED NODE = 002107.9A2.IBM.75.000000074011THE FOLLOWING DEVICE PATHS ARE ONLINE THROUGH THIS PORT:(297C-297D,AE)IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 40, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 233ATTACHED NODE = 002107.9A2.IBM.75.000000074011IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 42, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 234ATTACHED NODE = 002105.800.IBM.75.000000026079

IEF236I ALLOC. FOR IOZPS33H EIEF237I 1010 ALLOCATED TO SWIT1010IHVA201I Switch 1010 Port 04 state changed.:IHVD344I Control unit 297C status update.:IHVA201I Switch 1010 Port FE state changed.IHVD344I Control unit 1010 status update.IEE302I PATH(297D,AE) ONLINE BY ESCMIEE302I PATH(297C,AE) ONLINE BY ESCMIEE302I PATH(1010,AA) ONLINE BY ESCMIEE302I PATH(1010,AE) ONLINE BY ESCMIEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 05, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 912ATTACHED NODE = 002107.9A2.IBM.75.000000074012IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 0A, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 913ATTACHED NODE = 002105.800.IBM.75.000000029410IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 0D, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 914ATTACHED NODE = 002107.9A2.IBM.75.000000074012IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 12, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 915ATTACHED NODE = 002107.922.IBM.75.0000000CVBM1IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 17, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 916ATTACHED NODE = 002107.932.IBM.75.0000000CF811IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 1A, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 917ATTACHED NODE = 002107.932.IBM.75.0000000CD111IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 1B, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 918ATTACHED NODE = 002107.932.IBM.75.0000000CC481IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 23, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 919ATTACHED NODE = 002107.932.IBM.75.0000000CF811IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 25, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 920ATTACHED NODE = 002107.9A2.IBM.75.000000074011IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 2D, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 921ATTACHED NODE = 002107.932.IBM.75.0000000CW931IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 2F, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 922ATTACHED NODE = 002107.932.IBM.75.0000000CC481IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 31, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 923ATTACHED NODE = 002107.932.IBM.75.0000000CW931IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 3C, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 924ATTACHED NODE = 002107.9A2.IBM.75.000000074011THE FOLLOWING DEVICE PATHS ARE ONLINE THROUGH THIS PORT:(297C-297D,AE)IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 40, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 925ATTACHED NODE = 002107.9A2.IBM.75.000000074011IEE633I SWITCH 1010, PORT 42, DCM STATUS=OFFLINE 926ATTACHED NODE = 002105.800.IBM.75.000000026079


D M=DEV(297C-297F)IEE174I 14.05.01 DISPLAY M 928DEVICE 297C STATUS=OFFLINECHP AE ABENTRY LINK ADDRESS 6257 6280DEST LINK ADDRESS 613C 6420PATH ONLINE Y YCHP PHYSICALLY ONLINE Y YPATH OPERATIONAL Y YMANAGED N N:DEVICE 297D STATUS=OFFLINECHP AE ABENTRY LINK ADDRESS 6257 6280DEST LINK ADDRESS 613C 6420PATH ONLINE Y NCHP PHYSICALLY ONLINE Y YPATH OPERATIONAL Y YMANAGED N N:DEVICE 297E STATUS=OFFLINECHP AE ABENTRY LINK ADDRESS 6257 6280DEST LINK ADDRESS 613C 6420PATH ONLINE N YCHP PHYSICALLY ONLINE Y YPATH OPERATIONAL Y YMANAGED N N:DEVICE 297F STATUS=OFFLINECHP AE ABENTRY LINK ADDRESS 6257 6280DEST LINK ADDRESS 613C 6420PATH ONLINE N NCHP PHYSICALLY ONLINE Y YPATH OPERATIONAL Y YMANAGED N N:

Table 6 summarizes the states.

Table 6. Path and Device Status Summary

Device 297C 297D 297E 297F

System KEY3 KEY4 KEY3 KEY4 KEY3 KEY4 KEY3 KEY4

Status before command REMOVE SWITCH 1013

Device ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF

Path AE (1013,3C) ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF


Table 6. Path and Device Status Summary (continued)

Device 297C 297D 297E 297F

System KEY3 KEY4 KEY3 KEY4 KEY3 KEY4 KEY3 KEY4

Path AB (1010,20) ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF

Status after command REMOVE SWITCH 1013

Device ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF


Path AB (1010,20) OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

Status after command RESTORE SWITCH 1013




Status before command REMOVE SWITCH 1010




Status after command REMOVE SWITCH 1010

Device ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF

Path AE (1013,3C) OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF


Status after command RESTORE SWITCH 1010




The device status changed from ONLINE to OFFLINE after forcing the last path to OFFLINE, yielding the samestatus as on KEY4.


Appendix C. Notices

This information was developed for products and services offered in the US. Thismaterial might be available from IBM in other languages. However, you may berequired to own a copy of the product or product version in that language in orderto access it.

IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document inother countries. Consult your local IBM representative for information on theproducts and services currently available in your area. Any reference to an IBMproduct, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBMproduct, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product,program, or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right maybe used instead. However, it is the user's responsibility to evaluate and verify theoperation of any non-IBM product, program, or service.

IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matterdescribed in this document. The furnishing of this document does not grant youany license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to:

IBM Director of LicensingIBM CorporationNorth Castle Drive, MD-NC119Armonk, NY 10504-1785US

For license inquiries regarding double-byte character set (DBCS) information,contact the IBM Intellectual Property Department in your country or sendinquiries, in writing, to:

Intellectual Property LicensingLegal and Intellectual Property LawIBM Japan Ltd.19-21, Nihonbashi-Hakozakicho, Chuo-kuTokyo 103-8510, Japan

INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THISPUBLICATION "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHEREXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIEDWARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some jurisdictions do not allow disclaimer ofexpress or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement maynot apply to you.

This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will beincorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvementsand/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in thispublication at any time without notice.

Any references in this information to non-IBM websites are provided forconvenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those


websites. The materials at those websites are not part of the materials for this IBMproduct and use of those websites is at your own risk.

IBM may use or distribute any of the information you provide in any way itbelieves appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.

Licensees of this program who wish to have information about it for the purposeof enabling: (i) the exchange of information between independently createdprograms and other programs (including this one) and (ii) the mutual use of theinformation which has been exchanged, should contact:

IBM Director of LicensingIBM CorporationNorth Castle Drive, MD-NC119Armonk, NY 10504-1785US

Such information may be available, subject to appropriate terms and conditions,including in some cases, payment of a fee.

The licensed program described in this document and all licensed materialavailable for it are provided by IBM under terms of the IBM Customer Agreement,IBM International Program License Agreement or any equivalent agreementbetween us.

The performance data and client examples cited are presented for illustrativepurposes only. Actual performance results may vary depending on specificconfigurations and operating conditions.

Information concerning non-IBM products was obtained from the suppliers ofthose products, their published announcements or other publicly available sources.IBM has not tested those products and cannot confirm the accuracy ofperformance, compatibility or any other claims related to non-IBM products.Questions on the capabilities of non-IBM products should be addressed to thesuppliers of those products.

Statements regarding IBM's future direction or intent are subject to change orwithdrawal without notice, and represent goals and objectives only.

All IBM prices shown are IBM's suggested retail prices, are current and are subjectto change without notice. Dealer prices may vary.

This information is for planning purposes only. The information herein is subject tochange before the products described become available.

This information contains examples of data and reports used in daily businessoperations. To illustrate them as completely as possible, the examples include thenames of individuals, companies, brands, and products. All of these names arefictitious and any similarity to actual people or business enterprises is entirelycoincidental.

COPYRIGHT LICENSE:

This information contains sample application programs in source language, whichillustrate programming techniques on various operating platforms. You may copy,modify, and distribute these sample programs in any form without payment to


IBM, for the purposes of developing, using, marketing or distributing applicationprograms conforming to the application programming interface for the operatingplatform for which the sample programs are written. These examples have notbeen thoroughly tested under all conditions. IBM, therefore, cannot guarantee orimply reliability, serviceability, or function of these programs. The sampleprograms are provided "AS IS", without warranty of any kind. IBM shall not beliable for any damages arising out of your use of the sample programs.

Each copy or any portion of these sample programs or any derivative work must include a copyright notice as follows:© (your company name) (year).Portions of this code are derived from IBM Corp. Sample Programs.© Copyright IBM Corp. _enter the year or years_.

TrademarksIBM, the IBM logo, and ibm.com are trademarks or registered trademarks ofInternational Business Machines Corp., registered in many jurisdictions worldwide.Other product and service names might be trademarks of IBM or other companies.A current list of IBM trademarks is available on the web at "Copyright andtrademark information" at www.ibm.com/legal/copytrade.shtml.

Terms and conditions for product documentationPermissions for the use of these publications are granted subject to the followingterms and conditions.

Applicability

These terms and conditions are in addition to any terms of use for the IBMwebsite.

Personal use

You may reproduce these publications for your personal, noncommercial useprovided that all proprietary notices are preserved. You may not distribute, displayor make derivative work of these publications, or any portion thereof, without theexpress consent of IBM.

Commercial use

You may reproduce, distribute and display these publications solely within yourenterprise provided that all proprietary notices are preserved. You may not makederivative works of these publications, or reproduce, distribute or display thesepublications or any portion thereof outside your enterprise, without the expressconsent of IBM.

Rights

Except as expressly granted in this permission, no other permissions, licenses orrights are granted, either express or implied, to the publications or anyinformation, data, software or other intellectual property contained therein.

IBM reserves the right to withdraw the permissions granted herein whenever, in itsdiscretion, the use of the publications is detrimental to its interest or, asdetermined by IBM, the above instructions are not being properly followed.

Appendix C. Notices 597

http://www.ibm.com/legal/us/en/copytrade.shtml

You may not download, export or re-export this information except in fullcompliance with all applicable laws and regulations, including all United Statesexport laws and regulations.

IBM MAKES NO GUARANTEE ABOUT THE CONTENT OF THESEPUBLICATIONS. THE PUBLICATIONS ARE PROVIDED "AS-IS" AND WITHOUTWARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDINGBUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,NON-INFRINGEMENT, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.


Glossary

This glossary includes terms and definitions from:v The IBM Dictionary of Computing New York:

McGraw-Hill, 1994.v The American National Standard Dictionary for

Information Systems, ANSI X3.172-1990,copyright 1990 by the American NationalStandards Institute (ANSI). Copies can bepurchased from the American NationalStandards Institute, 1430 Broadway, New York,New York 10018. Definitions are identified bythe symbol (A) after the definition.

v The Information Technology Vocabulary developedby Subcommittee 1, Joint Technical Committee1, of the International Organization forStandardization and the InternationalElectrotechnical Commission (ISO/IECJTC1/SC1). Definitions of published parts ofthis vocabulary are identified by the symbol (I)after the definition; definitions taken from draftinternational standards, committee drafts, andworking papers being developed by ISO/IECJTC1/SC1 are identified by the symbol (T) afterthe definition, indicating that final agreementhas not yet been reached among theparticipating National Bodies of SC1.

The following cross-references are used in thisglossary:

Contrast with. This refers to a term that hasan opposed or substantively differentmeaning.Deprecated term for. This indicates that theterm should not be used. It refers to apreferred term, which is defined in its properplace in the glossary.See. This refers the reader to multiple-wordterms in which this term appears.See also. This refers the reader to terms thathave a related, but not synonymous, meaning.Synonym for. This indicates that the term hasthe same meaning as a preferred term, whichis defined in the glossary.Synonymous with. This is a backwardreference from a defined term to all otherterms that have the same meaning.

A

ACF See automation configuration file.

ACF/NCPAdvanced Communications Function for

the Network Control Program. SeeAdvanced Communications Function andNetwork Control Program.

ACF/VTAMAdvanced Communications Function forthe Virtual Telecommunications AccessMethod. Synonym for VTAM. SeeAdvanced Communications Function andVirtual Telecommunications AccessMethod.

active monitoringIn SA z/OSautomation control file, theacquiring of resource status informationby soliciting such information at regular,user-defined intervals. See also passivemonitoring.

adapterHardware card that enables a device, suchas a workstation, to communicate withanother device, such as a monitor, aprinter, or some other I/O device.

adjacent hostsSystems connected in a peer relationshipusing adjacent NetView sessions forpurposes of monitoring and control.

adjacent NetViewIn SA z/OS, the system defined as thecommunication path between twoSA z/OS systems that do not have adirect link. An adjacent NetView is usedfor message forwarding and as acommunication link between twoSA z/OS systems. For example, theadjacent NetView is used when sendingresponses from a focal point to a remotesystem.

Advanced Communications Function (ACF)A group of IBM licensed programs(principally VTAM, TCAM, NCP, andSSP) that use the concepts of SystemsNetwork Architecture (SNA), includingdistribution of function and resourcesharing.

advanced program-to-program communication(APPC)

A set of inter-program communicationservices that support cooperativetransaction processing in a Systems


Network Architecture (SNA) network.APPC is the implementation, on a givensystem, of SNA's logical unit type 6.2.

Advanced Workload Analysis Reporter (zAware)IBM analytics appliance running in a zSystems partition, activated in zACImode. Customers can use the appliance tomonitor the console message streams ofother LPARs running in the same Systemz cluster and create trend reports.Exploiting zAware and these trend reportscan help to better predict OS outages orperformance degradations and initiateproactive clusters.

alert In SNA, a record sent to a systemproblem management focal point or to acollection point to communicate theexistence of an alert condition.

In NetView, a high-priority event thatwarrants immediate attention. A databaserecord is generated for certain event typesthat are defined by user-constructedfilters.

alert conditionA problem or impending problem forwhich some or all of the process ofproblem determination, diagnosis, andresolution is expected to require action ata control point.

alert focal-point systemSee NPDA focal point system.

alert thresholdAn application or volume service valuethat determines the level at whichSA z/OS changes the associated icon inthe graphical interface to the alert color.SA z/OS may also issue an alert. Seewarning threshold.

AMC See Automation Manager Configuration.

The Auto Msg Classes entry type.

American Standard Code for InformationInterchange (ASCII)

A standard code used for informationexchange among data processing systems,data communication systems, andassociated equipment. ASCII uses a codedcharacter set consisting of 7-bit codedcharacters (8-bit including parity check).The ASCII set consists of control

characters and graphic characters. See alsoExtended Binary Coded DecimalInterchange Code.

APF See authorized program facility.

API See application programming interface.

APPC See advanced program-to-programcommunication.

applicationIn SA z/OS, applications refer to z/OSsubsystems, started tasks, or jobs that areautomated and monitored by SA z/OS.On SNMP-capable processors, applicationcan be used to refer to a subsystem orprocess.

Application entryA construct, created with thecustomization dialogs, used to representand contain policy for an application.

application groupA named set of applications. Anapplication group is part of an SA z/OSenterprise definition and is used formonitoring purposes.

application programA program written for or by a user thatapplies to the user's work, such as aprogram that does inventory or payroll.

A program used to connect andcommunicate with stations in a network,enabling users to performapplication-oriented activities.

application programming interface (API)An interface that allows an applicationprogram that is written in a high-levellanguage to use specific data or functionsof the operating system or anotherprogram.

ApplicationGroup entryA construct, created with thecustomization dialogs, used to representand contain policy for an applicationgroup.

ARM See automatic restart management.

ASCB Address space control block.

ASCB statusAn application status derived bySA z/OS running a routine (the ASCBchecker) that searches the z/OS addressspace control blocks (ASCBs) for address


spaces with a particular job name. The jobname used by the ASCB checker is the jobname defined in the customization dialogfor the application.

ASCII See American Standard Code forInformation Interchange.

ASF See automation status file.

authorized program facility (APF)A facility that permits identification ofprograms that are authorized to userestricted functions.

automated console operations (ACO)The use of an automated procedure toreplace or simplify the action that anoperator takes from a console in responseto system or network events.

automated functionSA z/OS automated functions areautomation operators, NetView autotasksthat are assigned to perform specificautomation functions. However, SA z/OSdefines its own synonyms, or automatedfunction names, for the NetView autotasks,and these function names are referred toin the sample policy databases providedby SA z/OS. For example, theautomation operator AUTBASEcorresponds to the SA z/OS automatedfunction BASEOPER.

automatic restart management (ARM)A z/OS recovery function that improvesthe availability of specified subsystemsand applications by automaticallyrestarting them under certaincircumstances. Automatic restartmanagement is a function of theCross-System Coupling Facility (XCF)component of z/OS.

automatic restart management element nameIn MVS 5.2 or later, z/OS automaticrestart management requires thespecification of a unique sixteen charactername for each address space that registerswith it. All automatic restart managementpolicy is defined in terms of the elementname, including the SA z/OS interfacewith it.

automationThe automatic initiation of actions inresponse to detected conditions or events.SA z/OS provides automation for z/OSapplications, z/OS components, and

remote systems that run z/OS. SA z/OSalso provides tools that can be used todevelop additional automation.

automation agentIn SA z/OS, the automation function issplit up between the automation managerand the automation agents. Theobserving, reacting and doing parts arelocated within the NetView address space,and are known as the automation agents.The automation agents are responsiblefor:v Recovery processingv Message processingv Active monitoring: they propagate

status changes to the automationmanager

automation configuration fileThe SA z/OS customization dialogs mustbe used to build the automationconfiguration file. It consists of:v The automation manager configuration

file (AMC)v The NetView automation table (AT)v The NetView message revision table

(MRT)v The MPFLSTxx member

automation control file (ACF)In SA z/OS, a file that containssystem-level automation policyinformation. There is one masterautomation control file for each NetViewsystem that SA z/OS is installed on.Additional policy information and allresource status information is containedin the policy database (PDB). TheSA z/OS customization dialogs must beused to build the automation control files.They must not be edited manually.

automation flagsIn SA z/OS, the automation policysettings that determine the operatorfunctions that are automated for aresource and the times during whichautomation is active. When SA z/OS isrunning, automation is controlled byautomation flag policy settings andoverride settings (if any) entered by theoperator. Automation flags are set usingthe customization dialogs.

automation managerIn SA z/OS, the automation function issplit up between the automation manager

Glossary 601

and the automation agents. Thecoordination, decision making andcontrolling functions are processed byeach sysplex's automation manager.

The automation manager contains amodel of all of the automated resourceswithin the sysplex. The automation agentsfeed the automation manager with statusinformation and perform the actions thatthe automation manager tells them to.

The automation manager providessysplex-wide automation.

Automation Manager ConfigurationThe Automation Manager Configurationfile (AMC) contains an image of theautomated systems in a sysplex or of astandalone system. See also automationconfiguration file.

Automation NetViewIn SA z/OS the NetView that performsroutine operator tasks with commandprocedures or uses other ways ofautomating system and networkmanagement, issuing automatic responsesto messages and management servicesunits.

automation operatorNetView automation operators areNetView autotasks that are assigned toperform specific automation functions.See also automated function. NetViewautomation operators may receivemessages and process automationprocedures. There are no logged-on usersassociated with automation operators.Each automation operator is an operatingsystem task and runs concurrently withother NetView tasks. An automationoperator could be set up to handle JES2messages that schedule automationprocedures, and an automation statementcould route such messages to theautomation operator. Similar to operatorstation task. SA z/OS message monitortasks and target control tasks areautomation operators.

automation policyThe policy information governingautomation for individual systems. Thisincludes automation for applications,z/OS subsystems, z/OS data sets, andz/OS components.

automation policy settingsThe automation policy informationcontained in the automation control file.This information is entered using thecustomization dialogs. You can display ormodify these settings using thecustomization dialogs.

automation procedureA sequence of commands, packaged as aNetView command list or a commandprocessor written in a high-levellanguage. An automation procedureperforms automation functions and runsunder NetView.

automation routinesIn SA z/OS, a set of self-containedautomation routines that can be calledfrom the NetView automation table, orfrom user-written automation procedures.

automation status file (ASF)In SA z/OS, a file containing statusinformation for each automatedsubsystem, component or data set. Thisinformation is used by SA z/OSautomation when taking action or whendetermining what action to take. InRelease 2 and above of AOC/MVS, statusinformation is also maintained in theoperational information base.

automation table (AT)See NetView automation table.

autotaskA NetView automation task that receivesmessages and processes automationprocedures. There are no logged-on usersassociated with autotasks. Each autotaskis an operating system task and runsconcurrently with other NetView tasks.An autotask could be set up to handleJES2 messages that schedule automationprocedures, and an automation statementcould route such messages to theautotasks. Similar to operator station task.SA z/OS message monitor tasks andtarget control tasks are autotasks. Alsocalled automation operator.

availableIn VTAM programs, pertaining to alogical unit that is active, connected,enabled, and not at its session limit.

B


Base Control Program (BCP)A program that provides essential servicesfor the MVS and z/OS operating systems.The program includes functions thatmanage system resources. These functionsinclude input/output, dispatch units ofwork, and the z/OS UNIX SystemServices kernel. See also Multiple VirtualStorage and z/OS.

basic modeA central processor mode that does notuse logical partitioning. Contrast withlogically partitioned mode.

BCP See Base Control Program.

BCP Internal InterfaceProcessor function of System z processorfamilies. It allows for communicationbetween basic control programs such asz/OS and the processor support elementin order to exchange information or toperform processor control functions.Programs using this function can performhardware operations such as ACTIVATEor SYSTEM RESET.

beaconingThe repeated transmission of a frame ormessages (beacon) by a console orworkstation upon detection of a linebreak or outage.

blade A hardware unit that providesapplication-specific services andcomponents. The consistent size andshape (or form factor) of each bladeallows it to fit in a BladeCenter chassis.

BladeCenter chassisA modular chassis that can containmultiple blades, allowing the individualblades to share resources such asmanagement, switch, power, and blowermodules.

BookManager®

An IBM product that lets users viewsoftcopy documents on theirworkstations.

C

central processor (CP)The part of the computer that contains thesequencing and processing facilities forinstruction execution, initial program load(IPL), and other machine operations.

central processor complex (CPC)A physical collection of hardware thatconsists of central storage, (one or more)central processors, (one or more) timers,and (one or more) channels.

central siteIn a distributed data processing network,the central site is usually defined as thefocal point for alerts, application design,and remote system management taskssuch as problem management.

CFR/CFS and ISC/ISRI/O operations can display and returndata about integrated system channels(ISC) connected to a coupling facility andcoupling facility receiver (CFR) channelsand coupling facility sender (CFS)channels.

channelA path along which signals can be sent;for example, data channel, outputchannel. See also link.

channel path identifierA system-unique value assigned to eachchannel path.

channel-attachedAttached directly by I/O channels to ahost processor (for example, achannel-attached device).

Attached to a controlling unit by cables,rather than by telecommunication lines.Contrast with link-attached. Synonymouswith local.

CHPIDIn SA z/OS, channel path ID; the addressof a channel.

CHPID portA label that describes the system name,logical partitions, and channel paths.

CI See console integration.

CICS/VSCustomer Information Control System forVirtual Storage. See Customer InformationControl System.

CLIST See command list.

clone A set of definitions for applicationinstances that are derived from a basicapplication definition by substituting anumber of different system-specific valuesinto the basic definition.

Glossary 603

clone IDA generic means of handlingsystem-specific values such as the MVSSYSCLONE or the VTAM subareanumber. Clone IDs can be substituted intoapplication definitions and commands tocustomize a basic application definitionfor the system that it is to be instantiatedon.

CNC A channel path that transfers databetween a host system image and anESCON control unit. It can bepoint-to-point or switchable.

commandA request for the performance of anoperation or the execution of a particularprogram.

command facilityThe component of NetView that is a basefor command processors that can monitor,control, automate, and improve theoperation of a network. The successor toNCCF.

command list (CLIST)A list of commands and statements,written in the NetView command listlanguage or the REXX language, designedto perform a specific function for the user.In its simplest form, a command list is alist of commands. More complexcommand lists incorporate variablesubstitution and conditional logic, makingthe command list more like aconventional program. Command lists aretypically interpreted rather than beingcompiled.

In SA z/OS, REXX command lists thatcan be used for automation procedures.

command procedureIn NetView, either a command list or acommand processor.

command processorA module designed to perform a specificfunction. Command processors, which canbe written in assembler or a high-levellanguage (HLL), are issued as commands.

command processor control blockAn I/O operations internal control blockthat contains information about thecommand being processed.

Command Tree/2An OS/2-based program that helps youbuild commands on an OS/2 window,then routes the commands to thedestination you specify (such as a 3270session, a file, a command line, or anapplication program). It provides thecapability for operators to buildcommands and route them to a specifieddestination.

common commandsThe SA z/OS subset of the CPCoperations management commands.

Common User Access (CUA) architectureGuidelines for the dialog between ahuman and a workstation or terminal.

communication controllerA type of communication control unitwhose operations are controlled by one ormore programs stored and executed inthe unit or by a program executed in aprocessor to which the controller isconnected. It manages the details of linecontrol and the routing of data through anetwork.

communication lineDeprecated term for telecommunicationline.

connectivity viewIn SA z/OS, a display that uses graphicimages for I/O devices and lines to showhow they are connected.

console automationThe process of having NetView facilitiesprovide the console input usually handledby the operator.

console connectionIn SA z/OS, the 3270 or ASCII (serial)connection between a PS/2 computer anda target system. Through this connection,the workstation appears (to the targetsystem) to be a console.

console integration (CI)A hardware facility that if supported byan operating system, allows operatingsystem messages to be transferredthrough an internal hardware interface fordisplay on a system console. Conversely,it allows operating system commandsentered at a system console to be


transferred through an internal hardwareinterface to the operating system forprocessing.

consolesWorkstations and 3270-type devices thatmanage your enterprise.

Control unitsHardware units that control I/Ooperations for one or more devices. Youcan view information about control unitsthrough I/O operations, and can start orstop data going to them by blocking andunblocking ports.

controllerA unit that controls I/O operations forone or more devices.

converted mode (CVC)A channel operating in converted (CVC)mode transfers data in blocks and a CBYchannel path transfers data in bytes.Converted CVC or CBY channel paths cancommunicate with a parallel control unit.This resembles a point-to-point parallelpath and dedicated connection, regardlesswhether the path passes through a switch.

couple data setA data set that is created through the XCFcouple data set format utility and,depending on its designated type, isshared by some or all of the z/OSsystems in a sysplex. See also sysplexcouple data setand XCF couple data set.

coupling facilityThe hardware element that provideshigh-speed caching, list processing, andlocking functions in a sysplex.

CP See central processor.

CPC See central processor complex.

CPC operations management commandsA set of commands and responses forcontrolling the operation of System/390CPCs.

CPC subsetAll or part of a CPC. It contains theminimum resource to support a singlecontrol program.

CPCB See command processor control block.

CPU Central processing unit. Deprecated termfor processor.

cross-system coupling facility (XCF)A component of z/OS that providesfunctions to support cooperation betweenauthorized programs running within asysplex.

CTC The channel-to-channel (CTC) channel cancommunicate with a CTC on another hostfor intersystem communication.

Customer Information Control System (CICS)A general-purpose transactional programthat controls online communicationbetween terminal users and a database fora large number of end users on areal-time basis.

customization dialogsThe customization dialogs are an ISPFapplication. They are used to customizethe enterprise policy, like, for example,the enterprise resources and therelationships between resources, or theautomation policy for systems in theenterprise. How to use these dialogs isdescribed in IBM Tivoli System Automationfor z/OS Customizing and Programming.

CVC See converted mode.

D

DataPower X150zSee IBM Websphere DataPowerIntegration Appliance X150 forzEnterprise (DataPower X150z).

DASDSee direct access storage device.

data services task (DST)The NetView subtask that gathers,records, and manages data in a VSAM fileor a network device that contains networkmanagement information.

data setThe major unit of data storage andretrieval, consisting of a collection of datain one of several prescribed arrangementsand described by control information towhich the system has access.

data set membersMembers of partitioned data sets that areindividually named elements of a largerfile that can be retrieved by name.

DBCS See double-byte character set.

DCCF See disabled console communicationfacility.

Glossary 605

DCF See Document Composition Facility.

DELAY ReportAn RMF report that shows the activity ofeach job in the system and the hardwareand software resources that are delayingeach job.

device A piece of equipment. Devices can beworkstations, printers, disk drives, tapeunits, remote systems or communicationscontrollers. You can see information aboutall devices attached to a particular switch,and control paths and jobs to devices.

DEVR ReportAn RMF report that presents informationabout the activity of I/O devices that aredelaying jobs.

dialog Interactive 3270 panels.

direct access storage device (DASD)A device that allows storage to be directlyaccessed, such as a disk drive.

disabled console communication facility (DCCF)A z/OS component that provideslimited-function console communicationduring system recovery situations.

disk operating system (DOS)An operating system for computersystems that use disks and diskettes forauxiliary storage of programs and data.

Software for a personal computer thatcontrols the processing of programs. Forthe IBM Personal Computer, the full nameis Personal Computer Disk OperatingSystem (PCDOS).

displayTo present information for viewing,usually on the screen of a workstation oron a hardcopy device.

Deprecated term for panel.

distribution managerThe component of the NetView programthat enables the host system to use, send,and delete files and programs in anetwork of computers.

Document Composition Facility (DCF)An IBM licensed program used to formatinput to a printer.

domainAn access method and its application

programs, communication controllers,connecting lines, modems, and attachedworkstations.

In SNA, a system services control point(SSCP) and the physical units (PUs),logical units (LUs), links, link stations,and associated resources that the SSCPcan control with activation requests anddeactivation requests.

double-byte character set (DBCS)A character set, such as Kanji, in whicheach character is represented by a 2-bytecode.

DP enterpriseData processing enterprise.

DSIPARMThis file is a collection of members for thecustomization of NetView.

DST Data Services Task.

E

EBCDICSee Extended Binary Coded DecimalInterchange Code.

ECB See event control block.

EMCS Extended multiple console support. Seealso multiple console support.

ensembleA collection of one or more zEnterprisenodes (including any attached zBX) thatare managed as a single logicalvirtualized system by the UnifiedResource Manager, through the HardwareManagement Console.

ensemble memberA zEnterprise node that has been addedto an ensemble.

enterpriseThe composite of all operational entities,functions, and resources that form thetotal business concern and that require aninformation system.

enterprise monitoringEnterprise monitoring is used bySA z/OS to update the NetViewManagement Console (NMC) resourcestatus information that is stored in theResource Object Data Manager (RODM).Resource status information is acquiredby enterprise monitoring of the Resource


Measurement Facility (RMF) Monitor IIIservice information at user-definedintervals. SA z/OS stores this informationin its operational information base, whereit is used to update the informationpresented to the operator in graphicdisplays.

Enterprise Systems Architecture (ESA)A hardware architecture that reduces theeffort required for managing data sets andextends addressability for system,subsystem, and application functions.

entriesResources, such as processors, entered onpanels.

entry typeResources, such as processors orapplications, used for automation andmonitoring.

environmentData processing enterprise.

error thresholdAn automation policy setting thatspecifies when SA z/OS should stoptrying to restart or recover an application,subsystem or component, or offload adata set.

ESA See Enterprise Systems Architecture.

event In NetView, a record indicatingirregularities of operation in physicalelements of a network.

An occurrence of significance to a task;for example, the completion of anasynchronous operation, such as aninput/output operation.

Events are part of a trigger condition,such that if all events of a triggercondition have occurred, a startup orshutdown of an application is performed.

event control block (ECB)A control block used to represent thestatus of an event.

exception conditionAn occurrence on a system that is adeviation from normal operation.SA z/OS monitoring highlights exceptionconditions and allows an SA z/OSenterprise to be managed by exception.

Extended Binary Coded Decimal InterchangeCode (EBCDIC)

A coded character set of 256 8-bitcharacters developed for therepresentation of textual data. See alsoAmerican Standard Code for InformationInterchange.

extended recovery facility (XRF)A facility that minimizes the effect offailures in z/OS, VTAM, the hostprocessor, or high availability applicationsduring sessions between high availabilityapplications and designated terminals.This facility provides an alternatesubsystem to take over sessions from thefailing subsystem.

F

fallback systemSee secondary system.

field A collection of bytes within a record thatare logically related and are processed asa unit.

file manager commandsA set of SA z/OS commands that readdata from or write data to the automationcontrol file or the operational informationbase. These commands are useful in thedevelopment of automation that usesSA z/OS facilities.

focal pointIn NetView, the focal-point domain is thecentral host domain. It is the centralcontrol point for any managementservices element containing control of thenetwork management data.

focal point systemA system that can administer, manage, orcontrol one or more target systems. Thereare a number of different focal pointsystem associated with IBM automationproducts.

NMC focal point system. The NMC focalpoint system is a NetView system with anattached workstation server and LAN thatgathers information about the state of thenetwork. This focal point system usesRODM to store the data it collects in thedata model. The information stored inRODM can be accessed from anyLAN-connected workstation withNetView Management Console installed.

Glossary 607

NPDA focal point system. This is aNetView system that collects all theNPDA alerts that are generated withinyour enterprise. It is supported byNetView. If you have SA z/OS installedthe NPDA focal point system must be thesame as your NMC focal point system.The NPDA focal point system is alsoknown as the alert focal point system.

SA z/OS Processor Operations focalpoint system. This is a NetView systemthat has SA z/OS host code installed. TheSA z/OS Processor Operations focal pointsystem receives messages from thesystems and operator consoles of themachines that it controls. It provides fullsystems and operations console functionfor its target systems. It can be used toIPL these systems. Note that somerestrictions apply to the HardwareManagement Console for an S/390microprocessor cluster.

SA z/OS SDF focal point system. TheSA z/OS SDF focal point system is anSA z/OS NetView system that collectsstatus information from other SA z/OSNetViews within your enterprise.

Status focal point system. In NetView,the system to which STATMON, VTAMand NLDM send status information onnetwork resources. If you have a NMCfocal point, it must be on the same systemas the Status focal point.

Hardware Management Console.Although not listed as a focal point, theHardware Management Console acts as afocal point for the console functions of anS/390 microprocessor cluster. Unlike allthe other focal points in this definition,the Hardware Management Console runson a LAN-connected workstation,

frame For a System/390 microprocessor cluster,a frame contains one or two centralprocessor complexes (CPCs), supportelements, and AC power distribution.

full-screen modeIn NetView, a form of panel presentationthat makes it possible to display thecontents of an entire workstation screen atonce. Full-screen mode can be used forfill-in-the-blanks prompting. Contrastwith line mode.

G

gateway sessionAn NetView-NetView Task session withanother system in which the SA z/OSoutbound gateway operator logs onto theother NetView session without humanoperator intervention. Each end of agateway session has both an inbound andoutbound gateway operator.

generic alertEncoded alert information that uses codepoints (defined by IBM and possiblycustomized by users or applicationprograms) stored at an alert receiver, suchas NetView.

group A collection of target systems definedthrough configuration dialogs. Aninstallation might set up a group to referto a physical site or an organizational orapplication entity.

group entryA construct, created with thecustomization dialogs, used to representand contain policy for a group.

group entry typeA collection of target systems definedthrough the customization dialog. Aninstallation might set up a group to referto a physical site or an organizationalentity. Groups can, for example, be oftype STANDARD or SYSPLEX.

H

Hardware Management Console (HMC)A user interface through which datacenter personnel configure, control,monitor, and manage System z hardwareand software resources. The HMCcommunicates with each central processorcomplex (CPC) through the SupportElement. On an IBM zEnterprise 196(z196), using the Unified ResourceManager on the HMCs or SupportElements, personnel can also create andmanage an ensemble.

Hardware Management Console Application(HWMCA)

A direct-manipulation object-orientedgraphical user interface that provides asingle point of control and single systemimage for hardware elements. TheHWMCA provides grouping support,aggregated and real-time system status


using colors, consolidated hardwaremessages support, consolidated operatingsystem messages support, consolidatedservice support, and hardware commandstargeted at a single system, multiplesystems, or a group of systems.

heartbeatIn SA z/OS, a function that monitors thevalidity of the status forwarding pathbetween remote systems and the NMCfocal point, and monitors the availabilityof remote z/OS systems, to ensure thatstatus information displayed on theSA z/OS workstation is current.

help panelAn online panel that tells you how to usea command or another aspect of aproduct.

hierarchyIn the NetView program, the resourcetypes, display types, and data types thatmake up the organization, or levels, in anetwork.

high-level language (HLL)A programming language that providessome level of abstraction from assemblerlanguage and independence from aparticular type of machine. For theNetView program, the high-levellanguages are PL/I and C.

HLL See high-level language.

host (primary processor)The processor that you enter a commandat (also known as the issuing processor).

host systemIn a coupled system or distributed systemenvironment, the system on which thefacilities for centralized automation run.SA z/OS publications refer to targetsystems or focal-point systems instead ofhosts.

HWMCASee Hardware Management ConsoleApplication.

HypervisorA program that allows multiple instancesof operating systems or virtual servers torun simultaneously on the same hardwaredevice. A hypervisor can run directly onthe hardware, can run within anoperating system, or can be imbedded in

platform firmware. Examples ofhypervisors include PR/SM, z/VM, andPowerVM Enterprise Edition.

I

IBM bladeA customer-acquired, customer-installedselect blade to be managed by IBMzEnterprise Unified Resource Manager.One example of an IBM blade is aPOWER7 blade.

IBM Smart Analyzer for DB2 for z/OSAn optimizer that processes certain typesof data warehouse queries for DB2 forz/OS.

IBM System z Application Assist Processor(zAAP)

A specialized processor that provides aJava execution environment, whichenables Java-based web applications to beintegrated with core z/OS businessapplications and backend databasesystems.

IBM System z Integrated Information Processor(zIIP) A specialized processor that provides

computing capacity for selected data andtransaction processing workloads and forselected network encryption workloads.

IBM Websphere DataPower IntegrationAppliance X150 for zEnterprise (DataPowerX150z) A purpose-built appliance that simplifies,

helps secure, and optimizes XML andWeb services processing.

IBM Enterprise 196 (z196)The newest generation of System z familyof servers built on a new processor chip,with enhanced memory function andcapacity, security, and on demandenhancements to support existingmainframe workloads and large scaleconsolidation.

IBM zEnterprise BladeCenter Extension (zBX)A heterogeneous hardware infrastructurethat consists of a BladeCenter chassisattached to an IBM zEnterprise 196 (z196).A BladeCenter chassis can contain IBMblades or optimizers.

IBM zEnterprise BladeCenter Extension (zBX)blade Generic name for all blade types

supported in an IBM zEnterpriseBladeCenter Extension (zBX). This termincludes IBM blades and optimizers.

Glossary 609

IBM zEnterprise System (zEnterprise)A heterogeneous hardware infrastructurethat can consist of an IBM zEnterprise 196(z196) and an attached IBM zEnterpriseBladeCenter Extension (zBX) Model 002,managed as a single logical virtualizedsystem by the Unified Resource Manager.

IBM zEnterprise Unified Resource ManagerLicensed Internal Code (LIC), also knownas firmware, that is part of the HardwareManagement Console. The UnifiedResource Manager provides energymonitoring and management,goal-oriented policy management,increased security, virtual networking,and data management for the physicaland logical resources of a given ensemble.

I/O operationsThe part of SA z/OS that provides youwith a single point of logical control formanaging connectivity in your active I/Oconfigurations. I/O operations takes anactive role in detecting unusual conditionsand lets you view and change pathsbetween a processor and an I/O device,using dynamic switching (the ESCONdirector). Also known as I/O Ops.

I/O OpsSee I/O operations.

I/O resource numberCombination of channel path identifier(CHPID), device number, etc. See internaltoken.

imagesA grouping of processors and I/O devicesthat you define. You can define asingle-image mode that allows amultiprocessor system to function as onecentral processor image.

IMS See Information Management System.

IMS/VSSee Information ManagementSystem/Virtual Storage.

inboundIn SA z/OS, messages sent to thefocal-point system from the PC or targetsystem.

inbound gateway operatorThe automation operator that receivesincoming messages, commands, andresponses from the outbound gateway

operator at the sending system. Theinbound gateway operator handlescommunications with other systems usinga gateway session.

Information Management System (IMS)Any of several system environmentsavailable with a database manager andtransaction processing that are capable ofmanaging complex databases andterminal networks.

Information Management System/VirtualStorage (IMS/VS)

A database/data communication(DB/DC) system that can managecomplex databases and networks.Synonymous with InformationManagement System.

INGEIO PROCThe I/O operations default procedurename. It is part of the SYS1.PROCLIB.

initial microprogram loadThe action of loading microprograms intocomputer storage.

initial program load (IPL)The initialization procedure that causes anoperating system to commence operation.

The process by which a configurationimage is loaded into storage at thebeginning of a workday or after a systemmalfunction.

The process of loading system programsand preparing a system to run jobs.

initialize automationSA z/OS-provided automation that issuesthe correct z/OS start command for eachsubsystem when SA z/OS is initialized.The automation ensures that subsystemsare started in the order specified in theautomation control files and thatprerequisite applications are functional.

input/output configuration data set (IOCDS)A configuration definition built by theI/O configuration program (IOCP) andstored on disk files associated with theprocessor controller.

input/output support processor (IOSP)The hardware unit that provides I/Osupport functions for the primary supportprocessor and maintenance supportfunctions for the processor controller.


Interactive System Productivity Facility (ISPF)An IBM licensed program that serves as afull-screen editor and dialog manager.Used for writing application programs, itprovides a means of generating standardscreen panels and interactive dialogsbetween the application programmer andthe terminal user. See also Time SharingOption.

interested operator listThe list of operators who are to receivemessages from a specific target system.

internal tokenA logical token (LTOK); name by which theI/O resource or object is known; stored inIODF.

IOCDSSee input/output configuration data set.

IOSP See input/output support processor..

IPL See initial program load.

ISPF See Interactive System ProductivityFacility.

ISPF consoleYou log on to ISPF from this 3270-typeconsole to use the runtime panels for I/Ooperations and SA z/OS customizationpanels.

issuing hostThe base program that you enter acommand for processing with. Seeprimary host.

J

JCL See job control language.

JES See job entry subsystem.

JES2 An MVS subsystem that receives jobs intothe system, converts them to internalformat, selects them for execution,processes their output, and purges themfrom the system. In an installation withmore than one processor, each JES2processor independently controls its jobinput, scheduling, and output processing.See also job entry subsystem and JES3

JES3 An MVS subsystem that receives jobs intothe system, converts them to internalformat, selects them for execution,processes their output, and purges themfrom the system. In complexes that haveseveral loosely coupled processing units,

the JES3 program manages processors sothat the global processor exercisescentralized control over the localprocessors and distributes jobs to themusing a common job queue. See also jobentry subsystem and JES2.

job A set of data that completely defines aunit of work for a computer. A job usuallyincludes all necessary computerprograms, linkages, files, and instructionsto the operating system.

An address space.

job control language (JCL)A problem-oriented language designed toexpress statements in a job that are usedto identify the job or describe itsrequirements to an operating system.

job entry subsystem (JES)An IBM licensed program that receivesjobs into the system and processes alloutput data that is produced by jobs. InSA z/OS publications, JES refers to JES2or JES3, unless otherwise stated. See alsoJES2 and JES3.

K

Kanji An ideographic character set used inJapanese. See also double-byte characterset.

L

LAN See local area network.

line modeA form of screen presentation in whichthe information is presented a line at atime in the message area of the terminalscreen. Contrast with full-screen mode.

link In SNA, the combination of the linkconnection and the link stations joiningnetwork nodes; for example, aSystem/370 channel and its associatedprotocols, a serial-by-bit connection underthe control of synchronous data linkcontrol (SDLC). See synchronous data linkcontrol.

In SA z/OS, link connection is thephysical medium of transmission.

link-attachedDescribes devices that are physicallyconnected by a telecommunication line.Contrast with channel-attached.

Glossary 611

Linux on System zUNIX-like open source operating systemconceived by Linus Torvalds anddeveloped across the internet.

local Pertaining to a device accessed directlywithout use of a telecommunication line.Synonymous with channel-attached.

local area network (LAN)A network in which a set of devices isconnected for communication. They canbe connected to a larger network. See alsotoken ring.

A network that connects several devicesin a limited area (such as a singlebuilding or campus) and that can beconnected to a larger network.

logical partition (LP)A subset of the processor hardware that isdefined to support an operating system.See also logically partitioned mode.

logical switch number (LSN)Assigned with the switch parameter ofthe CHPID macro of the IOCP.

logical token (LTOK)Resource number of an object in theIODF.

logical unit (LU)In SNA, a port through which an enduser accesses the SNA network and thefunctions provided by system servicescontrol points (SSCPs). An LU cansupport at least two sessions, one with anSSCP and one with another LU, and maybe capable of supporting many sessionswith other LUs. See also physical unit andsystem services control point.

logical unit 6.2 (LU 6.2)A type of logical unit that supportsgeneral communications betweenprograms in a distributed processingenvironment. LU 6.2 is characterized by:v A peer relationship between session

partnersv Efficient use of a session for multiple

transactionsv A comprehensive end-to-end error

processingv A generic application program interface

(API) consisting of structured verbsthat are mapped to a productimplementation

Synonym for advancedprogram-to-program communication.

logically partitioned (LPAR) modeA central processor mode that enables anoperator to allocate system processorhardware resources among several logicalpartitions. Contrast with basic mode.

LOGR The sysplex logger.

LP See logical partition.

LPAR See logically partitioned mode.

LSN See logical switch number.

LU See logical unit.

LU 6.2 See logical unit 6.2.

LU 6.2 sessionA session initiated by VTAM on behalf ofan LU 6.2 application program, or asession initiated by a remote LU in whichthe application program specifies thatVTAM is to control the session by usingthe APPCCMD macro. See logical unit 6.2.

LU-LU sessionIn SNA, a session between two logicalunits (LUs) in an SNA network. Itprovides communication between twoend users, or between an end user and anLU services component.

M

MAT Deprecated term for NetView automationtable.

MCA See Micro Channel architecture.

MCS See multiple console support.

memberA specific function (one or more modulesor routines) of a multisystem applicationthat is defined to XCF and assigned to agroup by the multisystem application. Amember resides on one system in thesysplex and can use XCF services tocommunicate (send and receive data) withother members of the same group.

message automation table (MAT)Deprecated term for NetView automationtable.

message classA number that SA z/OS associates with amessage to control routing of themessage. During automated operations,the classes associated with each message


issued by SA z/OS are compared to theclasses assigned to each notificationoperator. Any operator with a classmatching one of the message’s classesreceives the message.

message forwardingThe SA z/OS process of sendingmessages generated at an SA z/OS targetsystem to the SA z/OS focal-pointsystem.

message groupSeveral messages that are displayedtogether as a unit.

message monitor taskA task that starts and is associated with anumber of communications tasks.Message monitor tasks receive inboundmessages from a communications task,determine the originating target system,and route the messages to the appropriatetarget control tasks.

message processing facility (MPF)A z/OS table that screens all messagessent to the z/OS console. The MPFcompares these messages with acustomer-defined list of messages (basedon this message list, messages areautomated and/or suppressed from z/OSconsole display), and marks messages toautomate or suppress. Messages are thenbroadcast on the subsystem interface(SSI).

message suppressionThe ability to restrict the amount ofmessage traffic displayed on the z/OSconsole.

Micro Channel architectureThe rules that define how subsystems andadapters use the Micro Channel bus in acomputer. The architecture defines theservices that each subsystem can or mustprovide.

microprocessorA processor implemented on one or asmall number of chips.

migrationInstallation of a new version or release ofa program to replace an earlier version orrelease.

MP Multiprocessor.

MPF See message processing facility.

MPFLSTxxThe MPFLST member that is built bySA z/OS.

multi-MVS environmentphysical processing system that is capableof operating more than one MVS image.See also MVS image.

multiple console support (MCS)A feature of MVS that permits selectivemessage routing to multiple consoles.

Multiple Virtual Storage (MVS)An IBM operating system that accessesmultiple address spaces in virtual storage.The predecessor of z/OS.

multiprocessor (MP)A CPC that can be physically partitionedto form two operating processorcomplexes.

multisystem applicationAn application program that has variousfunctions distributed across z/OS imagesin a multisystem environment.

multisystem environmentAn environment in which two or moresystems reside on one or more processors.Or one or more processors cancommunicate with programs on the othersystems.

MVS See Multiple Virtual Storage.

MVS imageA single occurrence of the MVS operatingsystem that has the ability to processwork. See also multi-MVS environmentand single-MVS environment.

MVS/ESAMultiple Virtual Storage/EnterpriseSystems Architecture. See z/OS.

MVS/JES2Multiple Virtual Storage/Job EntrySystem 2. A z/OS subsystem that receivesjobs into the system, converts them to aninternal format, selects them forexecution, processes their output, andpurges them from the system. In aninstallation with more than one processor,each JES2 processor independentlycontrols its job input, scheduling, andoutput processing.

N

NAU See network addressable unit.

Glossary 613

See network accessible unit.

NCCF See Network Communications ControlFacility..

NCP See network control program (generalterm).

See Network Control Program (an IBMlicensed program). Its full name isAdvanced Communications Function forthe Network Control Program.Synonymous with ACF/NCP.

NCP/token ring interconnectionA function used by ACF/NCP to supporttoken ring-attached SNA devices. NTRIalso provides translation from tokenring-attached SNA devices (PUs) toswitched (dial-up) devices.

NetViewAn IBM licensed program used tomonitor a network, manage it, anddiagnose network problems. NetViewconsists of a command facility thatincludes a presentation service, commandprocessors, automation based oncommand lists, and a transactionprocessing structure on which the sessionmonitor, hardware monitor, and terminalaccess facility (TAF) network managementapplications are built.

NetView (NCCF) consoleA 3270-type console for NetViewcommands and runtime panels for systemoperations and processor operations.

NetView automation proceduresA sequence of commands, packaged as aNetView command list or a commandprocessor written in a high-levellanguage. An automation procedureperforms automation functions and runsunder the NetView program.

NetView automation table (AT)A table against which the NetViewprogram compares incoming messages. Amatch with an entry triggers the specifiedresponse. SA z/OS entries in the NetViewautomation table trigger an SA z/OSresponse to target system conditions.Formerly known as the messageautomation table (MAT).

NetView command list languageAn interpretive language unique toNetView that is used to write commandlists.

NetView Graphic Monitor Facility (NGMF)Deprecated term for NetViewManagement Console.

NetView hardware monitorThe component of NetView that helpsidentify network problems, such ashardware, software, and microcode, froma central control point using interactivedisplay techniques. Formerly callednetwork problem determination application.

NetView logThe log that NetView records eventsrelating to NetView and SA z/OSactivities in.

NetView Management Console (NMC)A function of the NetView program thatprovides a graphic, topologicalpresentation of a network that iscontrolled by the NetView program. Itprovides the operator different views of anetwork, multiple levels of graphicaldetail, and dynamic resource status of thenetwork. This function consists of a seriesof graphic windows that allows you tomanage the network interactively.Formerly known as the NetView GraphicMonitor Facility (NGMF).

NetView message tableSee NetView automation table.

NetView paths via logical unit (LU 6.2)A type of network-accessible port (VTAMconnection) that enables end users to gainaccess to SNA network resources andcommunicate with each other. LU 6.2permits communication betweenprocessor operations and the workstation.See logical unit 6.2.

NetView-NetView task (NNT)The task that a cross-domain NetViewoperator session runs under. EachNetView program must have aNetView-NetView task to establish oneNNT session. See also operator stationtask.

NetView-NetView task sessionA session between two NetView programsthat runs under a NetView-NetView task.In SA z/OS, NetView-NetView task


sessions are used for communicationbetween focal point and remote systems.

networkAn interconnected group of nodes.

In data processing, a user applicationnetwork. See SNA network.

network accessible unit (NAU)In SNA networking, any device on thenetwork that has a network address,including a logical unit (LU), physicalunit (PU), control point (CP), or systemservices control point (SSCP). It is theorigin or the destination of informationtransmitted by the path control network.Synonymous with network addressableunit.

network addressable unit (NAU)Synonym for network accessible unit.

Network Communications Control Facility(NCCF)

The operations control facility for thenetwork. NCCF consists of a presentationservice, command processors, automationbased on command lists, and atransaction processing structure on whichthe network management applicationsNLDM and NPDA are built. NCCF is aprecursor to the NetView commandfacility.

Network Control Program (NCP)An IBM licensed program that providescommunication controller support forsingle-domain, multiple-domain, andinterconnected network capability. Its fullname is Advanced CommunicationsFunction for the Network ControlProgram.

network control program (NCP)A program that controls the operation ofa communication controller.

A program used for requests andresponses exchanged between physicalunits in a network for data flow control.

Network Problem Determination Application(NPDA)

An NCCF application that helps youidentify network problems, such ashardware, software, and microcode, froma central control point using interactivedisplay methods. The alert manager for

the network. The precursor of theNetView hardware monitor.

Networking NetViewIn SA z/OS the NetView that performsnetwork management functions, such asmanaging the configuration of a network.In SA z/OS it is common to also routealerts to the Networking NetView.

NGMFDeprecated term for NetViewManagement Console.

NGMF focal-point systemDeprecated term for NMC focal pointsystem.

NIP See nucleus initialization program.

NMC focal point systemSee focal point system

NMC workstationThe NMC workstation is the primary wayto dynamically monitor SA z/OSsystems. From the windows, you seemessages, monitor status, view trends,and react to changes before they causeproblems for end users. You can usemultiple windows to monitor multipleviews of the system.

NNT See NetView-NetView task.

notification messageAn SA z/OS message sent to a humannotification operator to provideinformation about significant automationactions. Notification messages are definedusing the customization dialogs.

notification operatorA NetView console operator who isauthorized to receive SA z/OSnotification messages. Authorization ismade through the customization dialogs.

NPDASee Network Problem DeterminationApplication.

NPDA focal-point systemSee focal point system.

NTRI See NCP/token ring interconnection.

nucleus initialization program (NIP)The program that initializes the residentcontrol program; it allows the operator to

Glossary 615

request last-minute changes to certainoptions specified during systemgeneration.

O

objective valueAn average Workflow or Using value thatSA z/OS can calculate for applicationsfrom past service data. SA z/OS uses theobjective value to calculate warning andalert thresholds when none are explicitlydefined.

OCA In SA z/OS, operator console A, theactive operator console for a targetsystem. Contrast with OCB.

OCB In SA z/OS, operator console B, thebackup operator console for a targetsystem. Contrast with OCA.

OPC/ASee Operations Planning andControl/Advanced.

OPC/ESASee Operations Planning andControl/Enterprise Systems Architecture.

Open Systems Adapter (OSA)I/O operations can display the OpenSystem Adapter (OSA) channel logicaldefinition, physical attachment, andstatus. You can configure an OSA channelon or off.

operating system (OS)Software that controls the execution ofprograms and that may provide servicessuch as resource allocation, scheduling,input/output control, and datamanagement. Although operating systemsare predominantly software, partialhardware implementations are possible.(T)

operationsThe real-time control of a hardwaredevice or software function.

Operations Planning and Control/Advanced(OPC/A)

A set of IBM licensed programs thatautomate, plan, and control batchworkload. OPC/A analyzes system andworkload status and submits jobsaccordingly.

Operations Planning and Control/EnterpriseSystems Architecture (OPC/ESA)

A set of IBM licensed programs thatautomate, plan, and control batchworkload. OPC/ESA analyzes system andworkload status and submits jobsaccordingly. The successor to OPC/A.

operatorA person who keeps a system running.

A person or program responsible formanaging activities controlled by a givenpiece of software such as z/OS, theNetView program, or IMS.

A person who operates a device.

In a language statement, the lexical entitythat indicates the action to be performedon operands.

operator consoleA functional unit containing devices thatare used for communications between acomputer operator and a computer. (T)

A display console used forcommunication between the operator andthe system, used primarily to specifyinformation concerning applicationprograms and I/O operations and tomonitor system operation.

In SA z/OS, a console that displaysoutput from and sends input to theoperating system (z/OS, LINUX, VM,VSE). Also called operating system console.In the SA z/OS operator commands andconfiguration dialogs, OC is used todesignate a target system operatorconsole.

operator station task (OST)The NetView task that establishes andmaintains the online session with thenetwork operator. There is one operatorstation task for each network operatorwho logs on to the NetView program.

operator viewA set of group, system, and resourcedefinitions that are associated together formonitoring purposes. An operator viewappears as a graphic display in thegraphical interface showing the status ofthe defined groups, systems, andresources.

OperatorView entryA construct, created with the


customization dialogs, used to representand contain policy for an operator view.

optimizerA special-purpose hardware componentor appliance that can perform a limitedset of specific functions with optimizedperformance when compared to ageneral-purpose processor. Because of itslimited set of functions, an optimizer is anintegrated part of a processingenvironment, rather than a stand-aloneunit. One example of an optimizer is theIBM Smart Analytics Optimizer for DB2for z/OS.

OS See operating system.

OSA See Open Systems Adapter.

OST See operator station task.

outboundIn SA z/OS, messages or commands fromthe focal-point system to the targetsystem.

outbound gateway operatorThe automation operator that establishesconnections to other systems. Theoutbound gateway operator handlescommunications with other systemsthrough a gateway session. Theautomation operator sends messages,commands, and responses to the inboundgateway operator at the receiving system.

P

page The portion of a panel that is shown on adisplay surface at one time.

To transfer instructions, data, or bothbetween real storage and external page orauxiliary storage.

panel A formatted display of information thatappears on a terminal screen. Panels arefull-screen 3270-type displays with amonospaced font, limited color andgraphics.

By using SA z/OS panels you can seestatus, type commands on a commandline using a keyboard, configure yoursystem, and passthru to other consoles.See also help panel.

In computer graphics, a display imagethat defines the locations andcharacteristics of display fields on adisplay surface. Contrast with screen.

parallel channelsParallel channels operate in either byte(BY) or block (BL) mode. You can changeconnectivity to a parallel channeloperating in block mode.

parameterA variable that is given a constant valuefor a specified application and that mayrepresent an application, for example.

An item in a menu for which the userspecifies a value or for which the systemprovides a value when the menu isinterpreted.

Data passed to a program or procedureby a user or another program, specificallyas an operand in a language statement, asan item in a menu, or as a shared datastructure.

partitionA fixed-size division of storage.

In VSE, a division of the virtual addressarea that is available for programprocessing.

On an IBM Personal Computer fixed disk,one of four possible storage areas ofvariable size; one can be accessed byDOS, and each of the others may beassigned to another operating system.

partitionable CPCA CPC that can be divided into 2independent CPCs. See also physicalpartition, single-image mode, MP, andside.

partitioned data set (PDS)A data set in direct access storage that isdivided into partitions, called members,each of which can contain a program, partof a program, or data.

passive monitoringIn SA z/OS, the receiving of unsolicitedmessages from z/OS systems and theirresources. These messages can promptupdates to resource status displays. Seealso active monitoring

PCE A processor controller. Also known as thesupport processor or service processor insome processor families.

PDB See policy database.

PDS See partitioned data set.

Glossary 617

physical partitionPart of a CPC that operates as a CPC inits own right, with its own copy of theoperating system.

physical unit (PU)In SNA, the component that manages andmonitors the resources (such as attachedlinks and adjacent link stations) of a node,as requested by a system services controlpoint (SSCP) through an SSCP-PU session.An SSCP activates a session with thephysical unit to indirectly manage,through the PU, resources of the nodesuch as attached links.

physically partitioned (PP) configurationA mode of operation that allows amultiprocessor (MP) system to function astwo or more independent CPCs havingseparate power, utilities, and maintenanceboundaries. Contrast with single-imagemode.

PLEXID groupPLEXID group or "extended XCFcommunication group" is a term used inconjunction with a sysplex. The PLEXIDgroup includes System AutomationAgents for a subset of a sysplex or for theentire sysplex. It is used to provide XCFcommunication beyond the SAplexboundaries. For a detailed description,refer to "Defining the Extended XCFCommunication Group" in IBM TivoliSystem Automation for z/OS Planning andInstallation.

POI See program operator interface.

policy The automation and monitoringspecifications for an SA z/OS enterprise.See IBM Tivoli System Automation for z/OSDefining Automation Policy.

policy databaseThe automation definitions (automationpolicy) that the automation programmerspecifies using the customization dialog isstored in the policy database. Also knownas the PDB. See also automation policy.

POR See power-on reset.

port System hardware that the I/O devices areattached to.

In an ESCON switch, a port is anaddressable connection. The switch routesdata through the ports to the channel or

control unit. Each port has a name thatcan be entered into a switch matrix, andyou can use commands to change theswitch configuration.

An access point (for example, a logicalunit) for data entry or exit.

A functional unit of a node that data canenter or leave a data network through.

In data communication, that part of adata processor that is dedicated to asingle data channel for the purpose ofreceiving data from or transmitting datato one or more external, remote devices.

power-on reset (POR)A function that re-initializes all thehardware in a CPC and loads the internalcode that enables the CPC to load andrun an operating system. See initialmicroprogram load.

PP See physical partition.

PPI See program to program interface.

PPT See primary POI task.

PR/SMSee Processor Resource/Systems Manager.

primary hostThe base program that you enter acommand for processing at.

primary POI task (PPT)The NetView subtask that processes allunsolicited messages received from theVTAM program operator interface (POI)and delivers them to the controllingoperator or to the command processor.The PPT also processes the initialcommand specified to execute whenNetView is initialized and timer requestcommands scheduled to execute underthe PPT.

primary systemA system is a primary system for anapplication if the application is normallymeant to be running there. SA z/OSstarts the application on all the primarysystems defined for it.

problem determinationThe process of determining the source ofa problem; for example, a programcomponent, machine failure,telecommunication facilities, user orcontractor-installed programs or


|||||||||||||

equipment, environment failure such as apower loss, or user error.

processorA device for processing data fromprogrammed instructions. It may be partof another unit.

In a computer, the part that interprets andexecutes instructions. Two typicalcomponents of a processor are a controlunit and an arithmetic logic unit.

processor controllerHardware that provides support anddiagnostic functions for the centralprocessors.

processor operationsThe part of SA z/OS that monitors andcontrols processor (hardware) operations.Processor operations provides aconnection from a focal-point system to atarget system. Through NetView on thefocal-point system, processor operationsautomates operator and system consolesfor monitoring and recovering targetsystems. Also known as ProcOps.

Processor Resource/Systems Manager™ (PR/SM)The feature that allows the processor touse several operating system imagessimultaneously and provides logicalpartitioning capability. See also logicallypartitioned mode.

ProcOpsSee processor operations.

ProcOps Service Machine (PSM)The PSM is a CMS user on a VM hostsystem. It runs a CMS multitaskingapplication that serves as "virtualhardware" for ProcOps. ProOpscommunicates via the PSM with the VMguest systems that are defined as targetsystems within ProcOps.

product automationAutomation integrated into the base ofSA z/OS for the products CICS, DB2,IMS, TWS (formerly called features).

program operator interface (POI)A NetView facility for receiving VTAMmessages.

program to program interface (PPI)A NetView function that allows userprograms to send or receive data buffersfrom other user programs and to send

alerts to the NetView hardware monitorfrom system and application programs.

protocolIn SNA, the meanings of, and thesequencing rules for, requests andresponses used for managing the network,transferring data, and synchronizing thestates of network components.

proxy resourceA resource defined like an entry type APLrepresenting a processor operations targetsystem.

PSM See ProcOps Service Machine.

PU See physical unit.

R

RACF See Resource Access Control Facility.

remote systemA system that receives resource statusinformation from an SA z/OS focal-pointsystem. An SA z/OS remote system isdefined as part of the same SA z/OSenterprise as the SA z/OS focal-pointsystem to which it is related.

requesterA workstation from that user can log onto a domain from, that is, to the serversbelonging to the domain, and usenetwork resources. Users can access theshared resources and use the processingcapability of the servers, thus reducinghardware investment.

resourceAny facility of the computing system oroperating system required by a job ortask, and including main storage,input/output devices, the processing unit,data sets, and control or processingprograms.

In NetView, any hardware or softwarethat provides function to the network.

In SA z/OS, any z/OS application, z/OScomponent, job, device, or target systemcapable of being monitored or automatedthrough SA z/OS.

Resource Access Control Facility (RACF)A program that can provide data securityfor all your resources. RACF protects datafrom accidental or deliberateunauthorized disclosure, modification, ordestruction.

Glossary 619

resource groupA physically partitionable portion of aprocessor. Also known as a side.

Resource Measurement Facility (RMF)A feature of z/OS that measures selectedareas of system activity and presents thedata collected in the format of printedreports, System Management Facility(SMF) records, or display reports.

Resource Object Data Manager (RODM)In NetView for z/OS, a component thatprovides an in-memory cache formaintaining real-time data in an addressspace that is accessible by multipleapplications. RODM also allows anapplication to query an object and receivea rapid response and act on it.

resource tokenA unique internal identifier of an ESCONresource or resource number of the objectin the IODF.

restart automationAutomation provided by SA z/OS thatmonitors subsystems to ensure that theyare running. If a subsystem fails,SA z/OS attempts to restart it accordingto the policy in the automationconfiguration file.

Restructured Extended Executor (REXX)A general-purpose, high-level,programming language, particularlysuitable for EXEC procedures or programsfor personal computing, used to writecommand lists.

return codeA code returned from a program used toinfluence the issuing of subsequentinstructions.

REXX See Restructured Extended Executor.

REXX procedureA command list written with theRestructured Extended Executor (REXX),which is an interpretive language.

RMF See Resource Measurement Facility.

RODMSee Resource Object Data Manager.

S

SAF See Security Authorization Facility.

SA IOMSee System Automation for IntegratedOperations Management.

SAplexSAplex or "SA z/OS Subplex" is a termused in conjuction with a sysplex. In fact,a SAplex is a subset of a sysplex.However, it can also be a sysplex. For adetailed description, refer to "Using SAz/OS Subplexes" in IBM Tivoli SystemAutomation for z/OS Planning andInstallation.

SA z/OSSee System Automation for z/OS.

SA z/OS customization dialogsAn ISPF application through which theSA z/OS policy administrator definespolicy for individual z/OS systems andbuilds automation control data andRODM load function files.

SA z/OS customization focal point systemSee focal point system.

SA z/OS data modelThe set of objects, classes and entityrelationships necessary to support thefunction of SA z/OS and the NetViewautomation platform.

SA z/OS enterpriseThe group of systems and resourcesdefined in the customization dialogsunder one enterprise name. An SA z/OSenterprise consists of connected z/OSsystems running SA z/OS.

SA z/OS focal point systemSee focal point system.

SA z/OS policyThe description of the systems andresources that make up an SA z/OSenterprise, together with their monitoringand automation definitions.

SA z/OS policy administratorThe member of the operations staff whois responsible for defining SA z/OSpolicy.

SA z/OS satelliteIf you are running two NetViews on anz/OS system to split the automation andnetworking functions of NetView, it iscommon to route alerts to the NetworkingNetView. For SA z/OS to process alertsproperly on the Networking NetView, you


must install a subset of SA z/OS code,called an SA z/OS satellite on theNetworking NetView.

SA z/OS SDF focal point systemSee focal point system.

SCA In SA z/OS, system console A, the activesystem console for a target hardware.Contrast with SCB.

SCB In SA z/OS, system console B, thebackup system console for a targethardware. Contrast with SCA.

screen Deprecated term for panel.

screen handlerIn SA z/OS, software that interprets alldata to and from a full-screen image of atarget system. The interpretation dependson the format of the data on thefull-screen image. Every processor andoperating system has its own format forthe full-screen image. A screen handlercontrols one PS/2 connection to a targetsystem.

SDF See status display facility.

SDLC See synchronous data link control.

SDSF See System Display and Search Facility.

secondary systemA system is a secondary system for anapplication if it is defined to automationon that system, but the application is notnormally meant to be running there.Secondary systems are systems to whichan application can be moved in the eventthat one or more of its primary systemsare unavailable. SA z/OS does not startthe application on its secondary systems.

Security Authorization Facility (SAF)An MVS interface with which programscan communicate with an externalsecurity manager, such as RACF.

server A server is a workstation that sharesresources, which include directories,printers, serial devices, and computingpowers.

service language command (SLC)The line-oriented command language ofprocessor controllers or service processors.

service periodService periods allow the users toschedule the availability of applications. A

service period is a set of time intervals(service windows), during which anapplication should be active.

service processor (SVP)The name given to a processor controlleron smaller System/370 processors.

service thresholdAn SA z/OS policy setting thatdetermines when to notify the operator ofdeteriorating service for a resource. Seealso alert threshold and warningthreshold.

sessionIn SNA, a logical connection between twonetwork addressable units (NAUs) thatcan be activated, tailored to providevarious protocols, and deactivated, asrequested. Each session is uniquelyidentified in a transmission header by apair of network addresses identifying theorigin and destination NAUs of anytransmissions exchanged during thesession.

session monitorThe component of the NetView programthat collects and correlates session-relateddata and provides online access to thisinformation. The successor to NLDM.

shutdown automationSA z/OS-provided automation thatmanages the shutdown process forsubsystems by issuing shutdowncommands and responding to prompts foradditional information.

side A part of a partitionable CPC that can runas a physical partition and is typicallyreferred to as the A-side or the B-side.

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)A set of protocols for monitoring systemsand devices in complex networks.Information about managed devices isdefined and stored in a ManagementInformation Base (MIB).

single imageA processor system capable of beingphysically partitioned that has not beenphysically partitioned. Single-imagesystems can be target hardwareprocessors.

Glossary 621

single-MVS environmentAn environment that supports one MVSimage. See also MVS image.

single-image (SI) modeA mode of operation for a multiprocessor(MP) system that allows it to function asone CPC. By definition, a uniprocessor(UP) operates in single-image mode.Contrast with physically partitioned (PP)configuration.

SLC See service language command.

SMP/ESee System ModificationProgram/Extended.

SNA See Systems Network Architecture.

SNA networkIn SNA, the part of a user-applicationnetwork that conforms to the formats andprotocols of systems network architecture.It enables reliable transfer of data amongend users and provides protocols forcontrolling the resources of variousnetwork configurations. The SNA networkconsists of network addressable units(NAUs), boundary function components,and the path control network.

SNMPSee Simple Network ManagementProtocol.

solicited messageAn SA z/OS message that directlyresponds to a command. Contrast withunsolicited message.

SSCP See system services control point.

SSI See subsystem interface.

start automationAutomation provided by SA z/OS thatmanages and completes the startupprocess for subsystems. During thisprocess, SA z/OS replies to prompts foradditional information, ensures that thestartup process completes within specifiedtime limits, notifies the operator ofproblems, if necessary, and bringssubsystems to an UP (or ready) state.

startupThe point in time that a subsystem orapplication is started.

status The measure of the condition oravailability of the resource.

status display facility (SDF)The system operations part of SA z/OSthat displays status of resources such asapplications, gateways, andwrite-to-operator messages (WTORs) ondynamic color-coded panels. SDF showsspool usage problems and resource datafrom multiple systems.

status focal-point systemSee focal point system.

steady state automationThe routine monitoring, both for presenceand performance, of subsystems,applications, volumes and systems.Steady state automation may respond tomessages, performance exceptions anddiscrepancies between its model of thesystem and reality.

structureA construct used by z/OS to map andmanage storage on a coupling facility.

subgroupA named set of systems. A subgroup ispart of an SA z/OS enterprise definitionand is used for monitoring purposes.

SubGroup entryA construct, created with thecustomization dialogs, used to representand contain policy for a subgroup.

subplexSee SAplex.

subsystemA secondary or subordinate system,usually capable of operating independentof, or asynchronously with, a controllingsystem.

In SA z/OS, an z/OS application orsubsystem defined to SA z/OS.

subsystem interface (SSI)The z/OS interface over which allmessages sent to the z/OS console arebroadcast.

support elementA hardware unit that providescommunications, monitoring, anddiagnostic functions to a central processorcomplex (CPC).

support processorAnother name given to a processor


controller on smaller System/370processors. See service processor.

SVP See service processor.

switch identifierThe switch device number (swchdevn),the logical switch number (LSN) and theswitch name

switchesESCON directors are electronic units withports that dynamically switch to routedata to I/O devices. The switches arecontrolled by I/O operations commandsthat you enter on a workstation.

symbolic destination name (SDN)Used locally at the workstation to relateto the VTAM application name.

synchronous data link control (SDLC)A discipline for managing synchronous,code-transparent, serial-by-bit informationtransfer over a link connection.Transmission exchanges may be duplex orhalf-duplex over switched or nonswitchedlinks. The configuration of the linkconnection may be point-to-point,multipoint, or loop. SDLC conforms tosubsets of the Advanced DataCommunication Control Procedures(ADCCP) of the American NationalStandards Institute and High-Level DataLink Control (HDLC) of the InternationalStandards Organization.

SYSINFO ReportAn RMF report that presents an overviewof the system, its workload, and the totalnumber of jobs using resources ordelayed for resources.

SysOpsSee system operations.

sysplexA set of z/OS systems communicatingand cooperating with each other throughcertain multisystem hardware components(coupling devices and timers) andsoftware services (couple data sets).

In a sysplex, z/OS provides the couplingservices that handle the messages, data,and status for the parts of a multisystemapplication that has its workload spreadacross two or more of the connectedprocessors, sysplex timers, coupling

facilities, and couple data sets (whichcontains policy and states forautomation).

A Parallel Sysplex® is a sysplex thatincludes a coupling facility.

sysplex application groupA sysplex application group is a groupingof applications that can run on anysystem in a sysplex.

sysplex couple data setA couple data set that containssysplex-wide data about systems, groups,and members that use XCF services. Allz/OS systems in a sysplex must haveconnectivity to the sysplex couple dataset. See also couple data set.

Sysplex TimerAn IBM unit that synchronizes thetime-of-day (TOD) clocks in multipleprocessors or processor sides. ExternalTime Reference (ETR) is the z/OS genericname for the IBM Sysplex Timer (9037).

systemIn SA z/OS, system means a focal pointsystem (z/OS) or a target system (MVS,VM, VSE, LINUX, or CF).

System Automation for Integrated OperationsManagement

An outboard automation solution forsecure remote access tomainframe/distributed systems. TivoliSystem Automation for IntegratedOperations Management, previouslyTivoli AF/REMOTE, allows users tomanage mainframe and distributedsystems from any location.

The full name for SA IOM.

System Automation for OS/390The full name for SA OS/390, thepredecessor to System Automation forz/OS.

System Automation for z/OSThe full name for SA z/OS.

system consoleA console, usually having a keyboard anda display screen, that is used by anoperator to control and communicate witha system.

A logical device used for the operationand control of hardware functions (for

Glossary 623

example, IPL, alter/display, andreconfiguration). The system console canbe assigned to any of the physicaldisplays attached to a processor controlleror support processor.

In SA z/OS, the hardware system consolefor processor controllers or serviceprocessors of processors connected usingSA z/OS. In the SA z/OS operatorcommands and configuration dialogs, SCis used to designate the system consolefor a target hardware processor.

System Display and Search Facility (SDSF)An IBM licensed program that providesinformation about jobs, queues, andprinters running under JES2 on a series ofpanels. Under SA z/OS you can selectSDSF from a pull-down menu to see theresources’ status, view the z/OS systemlog, see WTOR messages, and see activejobs on the system.

System entryA construct, created with thecustomization dialogs, used to representand contain policy for a system.

System Modification Program/Extended(SMP/E)

An IBM licensed program that facilitatesthe process of installing and servicing anz/OS system.

system operationsThe part of SA z/OS that monitors andcontrols system operations applicationsand subsystems such as NetView, SDSF,JES, RMF, TSO, RODM, ACF/VTAM,CICS, IMS, and OPC. Also known asSysOps.

system services control point (SSCP)In SNA, the focal point within an SNAnetwork for managing the configuration,coordinating network operator andproblem determination requests, andproviding directory support and othersession services for end users of thenetwork. Multiple SSCPs, cooperating aspeers, can divide the network intodomains of control, with each SSCPhaving a hierarchical control relationshipto the physical units and logical unitswithin its domain.

System/390 microprocessor clusterA configuration that consists of central

processor complexes (CPCs) and mayhave one or more integrated couplingfacilities.

Systems Network Architecture (SNA)The description of the logical structure,formats, protocols, and operationalsequences for transmitting informationunits through, and controlling theconfiguration and operation of, networks.

T

TAF See terminal access facility.

target A processor or system monitored andcontrolled by a focal-point system.

target control taskIn SA z/OS, target control tasks processcommands and send data to targetsystems and workstations throughcommunications tasks. A target controltask (a NetView autotask) is assigned to atarget system when the target system isinitialized.

target hardwareIn SA z/OS, the physical hardware onwhich a target system runs. It can be asingle-image or physically partitionedprocessor. Contrast with target system.

target systemIn a distributed system environment, asystem that is monitored and controlledby the focal-point system. Multiple targetsystems can be controlled by a singlefocal-point system.

In SA z/OS, a computer system attachedto the focal-point system for monitoringand control. The definition of a targetsystem includes how remote sessions areestablished, what hardware is used, andwhat operating system is used.

task A basic unit of work to be accomplishedby a computer.

In the NetView environment, an operatorstation task (logged-on operator),automation operator (autotask),application task, or user task. A NetViewtask performs work in the NetViewenvironment. All SA z/OS tasks areNetView tasks. See also message monitortask, and target control task.


telecommunication lineAny physical medium, such as a wire ormicrowave beam, that is used to transmitdata.

terminal access facility (TAF)A NetView function that allows you tolog onto multiple applications either onyour system or other systems. You candefine TAF sessions in the SA z/OScustomization panels so you don't have toset them up each time you want to usethem.

In NetView, a facility that allows anetwork operator to control a number ofsubsystems. In a full-screen or operatorcontrol session, operators can control anycombination of subsystemssimultaneously.

terminal emulationThe capability of a microcomputer orpersonal computer to operate as if it werea particular type of terminal linked to aprocessing unit to access data.

thresholdA value that determines the point atwhich SA z/OS automation performs apredefined action. See alert threshold,warning threshold, and error threshold.

time of day (TOD)Typically refers to the time-of-day clock.

Time Sharing Option (TSO)An optional configuration of theoperating system that providesconversational time sharing from remotestations. It is an interactive service onz/OS, MVS/ESA, and MVS/XA.

Time-Sharing Option/Extended (TSO/E)An option of z/OS that providesconversational timesharing from remoteterminals. TSO/E allows a wide variety ofusers to perform many different kinds oftasks. It can handle short-runningapplications that use fewer sources aswell as long-running applications thatrequire large amounts of resources.

timers A NetView instruction that issues acommand or command processor (list ofcommands) at a specified time or timeinterval.

Tivoli Workload Scheduler (TWS)A family of IBM licensed products that

plan, execute and track jobs on severalplatforms and environments. Thesuccessor to OPC/A.

TOD Time of day.

token ringA network with a ring topology thatpasses tokens from one attaching deviceto another; for example, the IBMToken-Ring Network product.

TP See transaction program.

transaction programIn the VTAM program, a program thatperforms services related to theprocessing of a transaction. One or moretransaction programs may operate withina VTAM application program that isusing the VTAM application programinterface (API). In that situation, thetransaction program would requestservices from the applications programusing protocols defined by thatapplication program. The applicationprogram, in turn, could request servicesfrom the VTAM program by issuing theAPPCCMD macro instruction.

transitional automationThe actions involved in starting andstopping subsystems and applications thathave been defined to SA z/OS. This caninclude issuing commands andresponding to messages.

translating hostRole played by a host that turns aresource number into a token during aunification process.

triggerTriggers, in combination with events andservice periods, are used to control thestarting and stopping of applications in asingle system or a parallel sysplex.

TSO See Time Sharing Option.

TSO consoleFrom this 3270-type console you arelogged onto TSO or ISPF to use theruntime panels for I/O operations andSA z/OS customization panels.

TSO/E See Time-Sharing Option/Extended.

TWS See Tivoli Workload Scheduler.

U

Glossary 625

UCB See unit control block.

unit control block (UCB)A control block in common storage thatdescribes the characteristics of a particularI/O device on the operating system andthat is used for allocating devices andcontrolling I/O operations.

unsolicited messageAn SA z/OS message that is not a directresponse to a command.

uniform resource identifier (URI)A uniform resource identifier is a string ofcharacters used to identify a name of aweb resource. Such identification enablesinteraction with representations of theweb resource over the internet, usingspecific protocols.

user taskAn application of the NetView programdefined in a NetView TASK definitionstatement.

Using An RMF Monitor III definition. Jobsgetting service from hardware resources(processors or devices) are using theseresources. The use of a resource by anaddress space can vary from 0% to 100%where 0% indicates no use during aRange period, and 100% indicates that theaddress space was found using theresource in every sample during thatperiod.

V

view In the NetView Graphic Monitor Facility,a graphical picture of a network or part ofa network. A view consists of nodesconnected by links and may also includetext and background lines. A view can bedisplayed, edited, and monitored forstatus information about networkresources.

Virtual ServerA logical construct that appears tocomprise processor, memory, and I/Oresources conforming to a particulararchitecture. A virtual server can supportan operating system, associatedmiddleware, and applications. Ahypervisor creates and manages virtualservers.

Virtual Server CollectionA set of virtual servers that supports a

workload. This set is not necessarilystatic. The constituents of the collection atany given point are determined by virtualservers involved in supporting theworkload at that time.

virtual Server ImageA package containing metadata thatdescribes the system requirements, virtualstorage drives, and any goals andconstraints for the virtual machine {forexample, isolation and availability). TheOpen Virtual Machine Format (OVF) is aDistributed Management Task Force(DMTF) standard that describes apackaging format for virtual serverimages.

Virtual Server Image CaptureThe ability to store metadata and diskimages of an existing virtual server. Themetadata describes the virtual serverstorage, network needs, goals andconstraints. The captured information isstored as a virtual server image that canbe referenced and used to create anddeploy other similar images.

Virtual Server Image CloneThe ability to create an identical copy(clone) of a virtual server image that canbe used to create a new similar virtualserver.

Virtual Storage Extended (VSE)A system that consists of a basicoperating system (VSE/AdvancedFunctions), and any IBM supplied anduser-written programs required to meetthe data processing needs of a user. VSEand the hardware that it controls form acomplete computing system. Its currentversion is called VSE/ESA.

Virtual Telecommunications Access Method(VTAM)

An IBM licensed program that controlscommunication and the flow of data in anSNA network. It provides single-domain,multiple-domain, and interconnectednetwork capability. Its full name isAdvanced Communications Function forthe Virtual Telecommunications AccessMethod. Synonymous with ACF/VTAM.

VM Second Level Systems SupportWith this function, Processor Operationsis able to control VM second level


|||||||

systems (VM guest systems) in the sameway that it controls systems running onreal hardware.

VM/ESAVirtual Machine/Enterprise SystemsArchitecture. Its current version is calledz/VM.

volumeA direct access storage device (DASD)volume or a tape volume that serves asystem in an SA z/OS enterprise.

VSE See Virtual Storage Extended.

VTAMSee Virtual Telecommunications AccessMethod.

W

warning thresholdAn application or volume service valuethat determines the level at whichSA z/OS changes the associated icon inthe graphical interface to the warningcolor. See alert threshold.

workstationIn SA z/OS workstation means thegraphic workstation that an operator usesfor day-to-day operations.

write-to-operator (WTO)A request to send a message to anoperator at the z/OS operator console.This request is made by an applicationand is handled by the WTO processor,which is part of the z/OS supervisorprogram.

write-to-operator-with-reply (WTOR)A request to send a message to anoperator at the z/OS operator consolethat requires a response from theoperator. This request is made by anapplication and is handled by the WTOprocessor, which is part of the z/OSsupervisor program.

WTO See write-to-operator.

WTORSee write-to-operator-with-reply.

WWV The US National Institute of Standardsand Technology (NIST) radio station thatprovides standard time information. Asecond station, known as WWVB,provides standard time information at adifferent frequency.

X

XCF See cross-system coupling facility.

XCF couple data setThe name for the sysplex couple data setprior to MVS/ESA System ProductVersion 5 Release 1. See also sysplexcouple data set.

XCF groupA set of related members that amultisystem application defines to XCF. Amember is a specific function, or instance,of the application. A member resides onone system and can communicate withother members of the same group acrossthe sysplex.

XRF See extended recovery facility.

Z

z Appliance Container Infrastructure (zACI) IBM z Systems partitions, activated to runin zACI operating mode, provide thebasic infrastructure run-time anddeployment support for firmware orsoftware based appliances, such aszAware or z/VSE VNA.

z/OS An IBM mainframe operating system thatuses 64-bit real storage. See also BaseControl Program.

z/OS componentA part of z/OS that performs a specificz/OS function. In SA z/OS, componentrefers to entities that are managed bySA z/OS automation.

z/OS subsystemSoftware products that augment the z/OSoperating system. JES and TSO/E areexamples of z/OS subsystems. SA z/OSincludes automation for some z/OSsubsystems.

z/OS systemA z/OS image together with its associatedhardware, which collectively are oftenreferred to simply as a system, or z/OSsystem.

z196 See IBM Enterprise 196 (z196).

zAAP See IBM System z Application AssistProcessor (zAAP).

zBX See IBM zEnterprise BladeCenterExtension (zBX).

Glossary 627

zBX bladeSee IBM zEnterprise BladeCenterExtension (zBX) blade.

zCPC The physical collection of main storage,central processors, timers, and channelswithin a zEnterprise mainframe. Althoughthis collection of hardware resources ispart of the larger zEnterprise centralprocessor complex, you can apply energymanagement policies to zCPC that aredifferent from those that you apply to anyattached IBM zEnterprise BladeCenterExtension (zBX) or blades. See also centralprocessor complex.

zIIP See IBM System z Integrated InformationProcessor (zIIP).

zEnterpriseSee IBM zEnterprise System (zEnterprise).


Index

Aaccessibility xiACF command dialog 19ACF file manager command 19ACTIVATE command

description 439of a VM guest system 441status checks 480

active, ACTIVE=SAVED on ESCD 570adding your user ID to the interested

operator list 430additional parameters for system

operations commands 14allocating alternate couple data set

(CDS) 196ALLOW command 303alternate couple data set (CDS)

allocating 196spare volumes 196turn into primary CDS 197

AOCHELP command dialog 26AOCTRACE command dialog 27API

Query command rules 586application

related events 47, 48application group, setting status or

attribute of 163application move, resource aware 204ASF file manager command 32ASFUSER file manager command 34assigning names, WRITE command 357attribute hierarchy 573attribute of a resource or application

group, setting 163attributes 582authorization levels 585automatic connectivity checks 578automation

from status message 385keywords 385turning flags on or off 93

automation control file WARM start 19automation manager

diagnostic functions 90initiating diagnostic functions 91showing details about 87work item statistics 91

automation manager commandsINGAMS 79INGEVENT 126INGFILT 127INGINFO 152INGLIST 155INGMOVE 173INGRELS 215INGREQ 218INGRPT 228INGSESS 246INGSET 250INGSTR 255

automation manager commands(continued)

INGTOPO 265INGTRIG 266INGVOTE 277

Automation manager commandsINGSCHED 235

automation operators, determiningactive 38

Bbackout option 572backout processing 572BLOCK command 305

Ccanceling a console lock

with ISQXUNL 437canceling a console lock with

ISQXUNL 435cascaded switch

FICON 302CBU command 442CCNTL command 445CFRM policy

pending changes 115, 197policy switch 108

chainplanning 578ports 577

CHAIN command 307chained path

examples 577vary path requests 582

changing values with ISQVARS 385channel

CVC 581DISPLAY CHP command 312parallel 581REMOVE CHP command 340

closing a target system withISQXCLS 400

commandauthorization level 585availability 585

command failures 572command output, port I/O

definition 566command routing mechanism 242commands

ACF 19ACTIVATE 439ACTIVATE, of a VM guest

system 441ALLOW 303AOCHELP 26AOCTRACE 27ASF 32

commands (continued)ASFUSER 34BLOCK 305CBU 442CCNTL 445CHAIN 307common 362, 439CONDATA 449CONNECT 309CPCDATA 451CTRLCONS 452DEACTIVATE 454DEACTIVATE, of a VM guest

system 456DISCONNECT 311DISPACF 36DISPAOPS 38DISPAPG 40DISPASF 42DISPAUTO 44DISPERRS 45DISPEVT 47DISPEVTS 48DISPFLGS 51DISPGW 54DISPINFO 56DISPLAY CHANGECHECK 312DISPLAY CHP 312DISPLAY DEV 314DISPLAY HOST 316DISPLAY NAME 319DISPLAY PORT 322DISPLAY RESULTS 324DISPLAY SWITCH 329DISPLAY TIMEOUT 333DISPLAY VARY 333DISPMSGS 58DISPMTR 59DISPSCHD 63DISPSFLT 65DISPSTAT 67DISPSYS 72DISPTREE 73DISPTRG 75DRAINJES 77ensemble 362EXPLAIN 78EXTINT 456EXTINT, for a VM guest system 457GETCLUSTER 457GETIINFO 459GETILDI 460GETIPSW 461GETISTAT 462GETITKN 463GETLOCK 336GETSDGR 465GETSINFO 466GETSSTAT 468ICNTL 469IDQECMD 368


commands (continued)INGAMS 79INGAUTO 93INGCF 97INGCF DRAIN 104INGCF ENABLE 108, 111INGCF MAINT 111INGCF PATH 112INGCF STRUCTURE 113INGCFG 115INGCFL 115INGCICS 117INGDLA 124INGEVENT 126INGFILT 127INGGROUP 134INGHIST 142INGHWSRV 144INGIMS 147INGINFO 152INGLIST 155INGLKUP 165INGMDFY 170INGMOVE 173INGMSGS 178INGNTFY 181INGPAC 184INGPLEX 191INGPLEX CDS 196INGPLEX CONSOLE 204INGPLEX IPL 207INGPLEX SDUMP 208INGPLEX SLIP 214INGPLEX SVCDUMP 211INGPLEX SYTEM 202INGPLEX SYTEM, WLM-related

data 204INGPW 187INGRELS 215INGREQ 218INGRPT 228INGRUN 231INGSCHED 235INGSEND 242INGSESS 246INGSET 250INGSTR 255INGTHRES 261INGTOPO 265INGTRIG 266INGTWS 268INGVOTE 277ISQACT 559ISQCCMD 363ISQCLEAR 559ISQCMON 367ISQEXEC 371ISQHELP 372ISQIPSWT 373ISQMSG 559ISQOVRD 375ISQPSM 560ISQQUERY 560ISQROUTE 376ISQSEND 378ISQSNDH 380ISQSTART 382

commands (continued)ISQSTATUS 560ISQSTOP 384ISQTRACE 561ISQVARS 385, 406ISQXCLS 400ISQXCON 402ISQXDRL 405ISQXDST 406ISQXIII 427ISQXLOC 429ISQXMON 430ISQXOPT 433ISQXPSM 435ISQXUNL 437LOAD 480LOAD, for a VM guest system 483LOGREC 337MONITOR 281OOCOD 483OPCAQRY 282POWERMOD 485PROFILE 487PROHIBIT 338PSM 362Query rules 586REMOVE CHP 340REMOVE SWITCH 342RESERVE 505RESET CHANGECHECK 344RESET HOST 345RESET SWITCH 348RESET TIMEOUT 349RESTART 285RESTART, of a VM guest system 508RESTORE CHP 349RESTORE SWITCH 351RESYNC 286SECLOG 508SETHOLD 288SETSTATE 290SETTIMER 293START 509START, of a VM guest system 510STOP 510STOP, of a VM guest system 511STOPALL 561STP 511STPDATA 514SYNC SWITCH 352SYSRESET 516SYSRESET, of a VM guest

system 518TCDATA 518TCM 520types 361UNBLOCK 353UNCHAIN 355UNLOCK 356varying paths 582WRITE 357

common commands 362, 439ACTIVATE of a VM guest

system 441CTRLCONS 452DEACTIVATE 454

common commands (continued)DEACTIVATE of a VM guest

system 456EXTINT 456EXTINT, for a VM guest system 457GETCLUSTER 457GETIINFO 459GETILDI 460GETIPSW 461GETISTAT 462GETITKN 463GETSDGR 465GETSINFO 466GETSSTAT 468ISQCCMD 363LOAD, for a VM guest system 483processor operations commands 361RESTART 507RESTART, of a VM guest system 508START 509START, of a VM guest system 510STOP 510STOP, of a VM guest system 511SYSRESET 516SYSRESET, of a VM guest

system 518TCDATA 518TCM 520

communications pathmonitoring status 424

CONDATA command 449configuration data, refreshing,

sysplexwide 89CONNECT command 309connectivity

backout option 572chained paths 582force option 571making changes to 570nobackout option 572nocheck option 571noforce|nocheck|force 571port attributes 582UNBLOCK command 353varying paths 582

consensus processing, I/Ooperations 301

consolecanceling a lock with ISQXUNL 435,

437closing with ISQXCLS 400locking access 429

controlling secondary automationmanager functions 86

converter in CVC path 581converter, CVC channel 581couple data set (CDS), alternate

allocating 196spare volumes 196turn into primary CDS 197

coupling facility (CF)channels 570draining 104enabling 108, 111populating 109receiver path 99sender path 105, 108


coupling facility (CF) (continued)states 99

CPCDATA command 451CRM 242CTRLCONS command 452CU chain 577CV converter, support 581CVC channel 581

DDEACTIVATE command

defined 454of a VM guest system 456reinitialize 456

deleting your user ID from the interestedoperator list 430

destination switch 577detail about automation manager,

showing 87device, DISPLAY DEV command 314diagnostic functions

automation manager 90initiating for automation manager 91

disability xidisabling a switch 576DISCONNECT command 311DISPACF command dialog 36DISPAOPS command 38DISPAPG command 40DISPASF command 42DISPAUTO command 44DISPERRS command 45DISPEVT command 47DISPEVTS command 48DISPFLGS command 51DISPGW command 54DISPINFO command 56DISPLAY CHANGECHECK

command 312DISPLAY CHP command 312DISPLAY HOST command 316DISPLAY NAME 319DISPLAY PORT command 322DISPLAY RESULTS command 324display results of commands 324DISPLAY SWITCH command 329DISPLAY TIMEOUT command 333DISPLAY VARY command 333displaying

NetView connection path status 424outstanding MVS requests 405status panels with ISQXDST 406sysplex timer information 72target system information 433

DISPMSGS command 58DISPMTR command 59DISPNTFY command 181DISPSCHD command 63DISPSFLT command 65DISPSTAT command 67DISPSYS command

defined 72DISPTREE command 73DISPTRG command 75distributed feature code, starting with

ISQXIII 427

DR,L command (MVS) 405DRAINJES command dialog 77duplexing

system-managed 114user-managed 114

dynamic connection, and PROHIBITcommand 338

Eenabling a switch 577ensemble commands 362Ensembles 417enter a console command for

automation 378error recovery 572establish processor operations

environment 382event and related applications 47, 48EXPLAIN command 78EXTINT command

defined 456for a VM guest system 457

Ffailed commands 572FICON cascaded switches 302FICON switches 302file manager commands

ACF 19ASF 32ASFUSER 34

flags 93focal-point ports, disable 456force option 571functions of secondary automation

manager, controlling 86

Ggateway sessions 54GETCLUSTER command 457GETIINFO command 459GETILDI command 460GETIPSW command 461GETISTAT command 462GETITKN command 463GETLOCK command 336GETSDGR command 465GETSINFO command 466GETSSTAT command 468getting help, ISQHELP command 372

Hhardware status 567help

EXPLAIN command dialog 78for commands 26, 372ISQHELP 372

hierarchy of port attributes 573host response timeout 349host, primary 573

II/O operations

consensus processing 301safe switching 301

I/O operations commandsALLOW 303BLOCK 305CHAIN 307CONNECT 309DISCONNECT 311DISPLAY CHANGECHECK 312DISPLAY CHP 312DISPLAY DEV 314DISPLAY HOST 316DISPLAY NAME 319DISPLAY PORT 322DISPLAY RESULTS 324DISPLAY SWITCH 329DISPLAY TIMEOUT 333DISPLAY VARY 333GETLOCK 336LOGREC 337PROHIBIT 338REMOVE CHP 340REMOVE SWITCH 342RESET CHANGECHECK 344RESET HOST 345RESET SWITCH 348RESET TIMEOUT 349RESTORE CHP 349RESTORE SWITCH 351SYNC SWITCH 352UNBLOCK 353UNCHAIN 355UNLOCK 356WRITE 357

I/O operations, inter-I/O operationscommunication 344, 345

ICNTL command 469identifier, switch 566IEA101A message 385, 400IEA212A message 385IEA213A message 385IEA347A message 385, 400INGAMS command 79INGAUTO command 93INGCF command 97

authorizations 98DRAIN 104ENABLE 108, 111MAINT 111PATH 112STRUCTURE 113

INGCFG commands 115INGCFL command 115INGCICS command 117INGDB2 system utility 121INGDLA command 124INGEVENT command 126INGFILT command 127INGGROUP command 134INGHIST command 142INGHWSRV command 144INGIMS command 147INGINFO command 152INGLIST command 155INGLKUP 165

Index 631

INGMDFY command 170INGMOVE command 173INGMSGS command 178INGNTFY command 181INGPAC command 184INGPLEX command 191

CDS 196CONSOLE 204IPL 207SDUMP 208SLIP 214SVCDUMP 211SYSTEM 202SYSTEM, WLM-related data 204

INGPW command 187INGRELS command 215INGREQ command 218INGRPT command 228INGRUN command

INGRUN 231INGSCHED command 235INGSEND command 242INGSEND command dialog 242INGSESS command 246INGSET command 250INGSTR command 255INGTHRES command 261INGTOPO command 265INGTRIG command 266INGTWS command 268INGVOTE command 277initial status determination 286initializing a target system with

ISQXIII 427initiating automation manager diagnostic

functions 91interested operator list

adding or deleting your userid 430ISQSTART command 367viewing 406

intersystem communicationDISPLAY HOST command 316DISPLAY TIMEOUT 333RESET CHANGECHECK 344RESET HOST 345

IODF 99IPL

ACTIVATE common command 439LOAD common command 480

ISQACT command 559ISQCCMD command 363ISQCHK command 366ISQCLEAR command 559ISQCMON command

defined 367issued by ISQSTART 382restrictions 368

ISQECMD command 368ISQEXEC command

defined 371usage with ISQXLOC 429

ISQHELP command 372ISQIPSWT command 373ISQMSG command 559ISQOVRD command 375ISQPSM command 560ISQQUERY command 560

ISQROUTE command 376ISQSEND command

defined 378limited by ISQXCLS 400service language commands 378

ISQSNDH command 380ISQSTART command 382ISQSTATUS command 560ISQSTOP command

defined 384restrictions 384

ISQTRACE command 561ISQVARS command

called by ISQXOPT 433change status

target hardware 406target system 406target system attention 406

defined 385keywords and status messages 385

ISQXCLS command 400ISQXCON command

managing connections 402ISQXDRL command 405ISQXDST command

defined 406restrictions 406target system status values 406

ISQXIII command 427ISQXIPL command check status 480ISQXLOC command

defined 429usage with ISQXUNL 437

ISQXMON command 430ISQXOPT command 433ISQXPSM command 435ISQXUNL command

defined 437usage with ISQXLOC 429

JJES2, draining resources 77

Kkeyboard xikeywords

ISQVARS 385sorted by keyword name 385

keywords and status messages 385

LLOAD command

defined 480for a VM guest system 483

locking console access 429locks

canceling a console lock 437locks, canceling a console lock 435logical switch number 565, 566logical tokens 568logical-to-physical coordination 352LOGREC command 337LSN 566

Mmask, allow|prohibit 567message holding parameters 288messages

IEA101A 385, 400IEA212A 385IEA213A 385IEA347A 385, 400ISQCMON command 367status 385waiting for IEA101A start

message 406waiting for IEA347A start

message 406waiting for VM start message 406

MONITOR command 281monitoring

communications paths 424MVS commands

DR,L command 405QUIESCE 456

MVS, displaying outstandingrequests 405

MVSESA.RELOAD.ACTION flag 19MVSESA.RELOAD.CONFIRM flag 19

Nname

generic 577port 577TCP/IP host 583VTAM 583WRITE command 357

naming a port 577NetView

commands, View 433establishing processor operations 382RMTCMD 242

NetView connection path 424displaying status 424NVC 424SNMP 424

nobackout option 572nocheck option 571noforce option 571

OOOCOD command 483OPCAQRY command 282OUTDSN parameter 17OUTMODE parameter 16

Ppanels

AOCHELP 26AOCTRACE 27authorized message receivers 58Automation Operators 38autoterm status 78Command Dialogs 15, 16Command Response 36, 42DISPAOPS 38


panels (continued)DISPAPG 40DISPASF 42DISPAUTO 44DISPERRS 45DISPEVT 47DISPEVTS 48DISPFLGS 51DISPGW 54DISPINFO 56DISPMSGS 58DISPMTR 59DISPSCHD 63DISPSFLT 65DISPSTAT 67DISPSYS 72DISPTREE 73DISPTRG 75EVJFILT 268EXPLAIN 78gateway display 54INGAMS 79, 86, 87, 89, 90INGCICS, REQ=BROADCAST 117INGCICS, REQ=CMD 117INGCICS, REQ=INFO 117INGFILT 127INGHIST 142INGIMS 147INGINFO 152INGLIST 155, 163INGLKUP 165INGMDFY 170INGMOVE 173INGMSGS 178INGNTFY 181INGRELS 215INGREQ 218INGRUN 231INGSCHED 235INGSESS 246INGTHRES 261, 265, 293INGTRIG 266INGTWS 268INGTWS, filter selection 268INGTWS, REQ=LIST

TYPE=APPL 268INGTWS, REQ=LIST TYPE=CAL 268INGTWS, REQ=LIST TYPE=OP 268INGTWS, REQ=LIST TYPE=SR 268INGTWS, REQ=LIST TYPE=WS 268INGVOTE 277ISQXDST 406OPCAQRY 282Path Detail 424RESYNC 286SETSTATE 290SETTIMER 293Target Hardware Summary 415Target System Options 433TIMER 293

parallel channel, support 581parameters, additional, for system

operations commandsOUTDSN 17OUTMODE 16TARGET 14

passthru switch 577

path, chain 577pending policy changes 115, 197physical tokens 568policy switch 197port

allow|prohibit mask 567name, in switching commands 577port attributes 582status 567

port address, DISPLAY PORTcommand 322

port attribute hierarchy 573port I/O definition 566port name

assigning (WRITE command) 357DISPLAY NAME command 319in switching commands 577

POWERMOD command 485primary host 573problems

correcting 572issuing ISQSEND with ISQXDRL 405

processing failures 572processing lock, UNLOCK

command 356processing, consensus, I/O

operations 301processor operations

check if active 366issuing commands 361stopping 384

processor operations commandsACTIVATE 439ACTIVATE, of a VM guest

system 441CBU 442CCNTL 445CONDATA 449CPCDATA 451CTRLCONS 452DEACTIVATE 454DEACTIVATE, of a VM guest

system 456EXTINT 456EXTINT, for a VM guest system 457GETCLUSTER 457GETIINFO 459GETILDI 460GETIPSW 461GETISTAT 462GETITKN 463GETSDGR 465GETSINFO 466GETSSTAT 468ICNTL 469IDQECMD 368ISQCCMD 363ISQCHK 366ISQCMON 367ISQEXEC 371ISQHELP 372ISQIPSWT 373ISQOVRD 375ISQROUTE 376ISQSEND 378ISQSNDH 380ISQSTART 382

processor operations commands(continued)

ISQSTOP 384ISQVARS 385ISQXCLS 400ISQXLOC 429ISQXMON 430ISQXOPT 433ISQXPSM 435ISQXUNL 437LOAD, for a VM guest system 483OOCOD 483POWERMOD 485PROFILE 487RESERVE 505RESTART 507RESTART, of a VM guest system 508SECLOG 508START 509START, of a VM guest system 510STOP 510STOP, of a VM guest system 511STP 511STPDATA 514SYSRESET 516SYSRESET, of a VM guest

system 518TCDATA 518TCM 520

Processor operations commandsISQXDRL 405ISQXDST 406ISQXIII 427LOAD 480

Processor Operations commandsISQXCON 402

processor, target hardware summary 415PROFILE command 487program status word (PSW),

loading 507PROHIBIT command 338PSM commands

introduced 362ISQACT 559ISQCLEAR 559ISQMSG 559ISQPSM 560ISQQUERY 560ISQSTATUS 560ISQTRACE 561STOPALL 561

QQuery commands, rules 586QUIESCE command (MVS) 456quiescing an ESCON Director, REMOVE

SWITCH 342

Rrebuild

structure 105, 113system-managed 105, 114user-managed 105, 114

receiver path 99

Index 633

recovery automation flag 93refreshing configuration data

INGAMS 79sysplexwide 89

reload action flag 19reload confirm flag 19RELOAD.ACTION flag 19RELOAD.CONFIRM flag 19REMOVE CHP command 340REMOVE SWITCH command 342removing a switch 576RESERVE command 505RESET CHANGECHECK command 344RESET HOST command 345RESET SWITCH command 348RESET TIMEOUT command 349resetting target processor 516resource

defined 5setting status or attribute of 163

resource aware application move 204resources, specifying 6RESTART command

for processor operations 507for system operations 285of a VM guest system 508

restarting target system processor 507RESTORE CHP command 349RESTORE SWITCH command 351restoring a switch 577restrictions

ISQCMON command 368ISQSTOP command 384ISQXDST command 406

RESYNC command 286ROUTE command 242routine monitor 281routing commands with INGSEND 242

Ssafe switching, I/O operations 301saved, ACTIVE=SAVED on ESCD 570SECLOG command

turning security loggingON/OFF 508

secondary automation manager,controlling functions of 86

security loggingturning security logging

ON/OFF 508sender path 105, 108service language commands, entering

with ISQSEND 378SETHOLD command 288SETSTATE command 290SETTIMER command 293setting

attribute of a resource or applicationgroup 163

status of a resource or applicationgroup 163

shortcut keys xishowing details about the automation

manager 87shutdown procedure 384simulate pressing a console key 378

SLIP TRAP 214spare volumes, alternate couple data set

(CDS) 196specifying resources 6START command

defined 509of a VM guest system 510

starting a target processor 509static connections

CONNECT command 309DISCONNECT command 311establishing 309

statusalert 406changing with SETSTATE 290clear to send 424closed

target system 406DCCF 406degraded 406disabled wait 406displaying status panels 406environment alert 406gateways 54initialized 406IPL complete 406IPL failed 406last significant message 424load failed 406NetView connection path 424not active 406not operating 406of a resource or application group,

setting 163path problem 424power save 406powered off 406processor operations

attention status 406path detail 424path status 424target system attention status 406

Processor operationstarget system status 406

serious alert 406service 406service required 406stage-1 activation complete 406target hardware problem 406target systems 406undecidable 406unknown 406values for target systems 406waiting for IEA101A start

message 406waiting for IEA347A start

message 406waiting for VM start message 406

status messages 385STOP command


STOPALL command 561stopping

processor operations 384target processors 510

STP command 511

STPDATA command 514structure

conditions 101, 115deallocation 105, 113duplexing

system-managed 114user-managed 114

pending policy changes 115, 197rebuild

system-managed 105, 114user-managed 105, 114

switchchained 577disabling 576FICON 302FICON cascaded 302logical switch number (LSN) 565,

566port 566removing 576restoring (enabling) 577switch identifier 566

switch chain 307switch data, DISPLAY SWITCH 329switch device number 566switch log, LOGREC command 337switching, safe, I/O operations 301SYNC SWITCH command 352syntax diagrams, format 9sysplex timer, displaying information 72sysplexwide, refreshing configuration

data 89SYSRESET command


system operations commandsACF 19additional parameters 14

OUTDSN 17OUTMODE 16TARGET 14

AOCHELP 26AOCTRACE 27DISPACF 36DISPAOPS 38DISPAPG 40DISPASF 42DISPAUTO 44DISPERRS 45DISPEVT 47DISPEVTS 48DISPFLGS 51DISPINFO 56DISPMSGS 58DISPMTR 59DISPSCHD 63DISPSFLT 65DISPSTAT 67DISPSYS 72DISPTREE 73DISPTRG 75DRAINJES 77EXPLAIN 78general info 13INGAMS 79INGAUTO 93INGCICS 117


system operations commands (continued)INGDLA 124INGEVENT 126INGFILT 127INGGROUP 134INGHIST 142INGHWSRV 144INGIMS 147INGINFO 152INGLIST 155INGLKUP 165INGMDFY 170INGMOVE 173INGMSGS 178INGNTFY 181INGPAC 184INGPW 187INGRELS 215INGREQ 218INGRPT 228INGRUN 231INGSEND 242INGSESS 246INGSET 250INGSTR 255INGTHRES 261INGTOPO 265INGTRIG 266INGTWS 268INGVOTE 277MONITOR 281OPCAQRY 282RESTART 285SETSTATE 290

System operations commandsINGSCHED 235

System Operations commandsSETHOLD 288

system operationscommandsDISPGW 54RESYNC 286SETTIMER 293

system parameters 72system utility

INGDB2 121system-managed duplexing 114system-managed rebuild 105, 114

Ttarget console lock, removing with

ISQOVRD 375target control task

ISQEXEC 371target control task, ISQEXEC 371target hardware

status 406target hardware summary 415TARGET parameter 14target processors

resetting 516starting 509stopping 510

target systemstatus 406

target system processor, restarting 507

target system, displaying and changinginformation 433

TCDATA command 518TCM command 520TCP/IP host name 583thresholds, setting 261timeout value, changing 349tokens

logical 568physical 568

trace, with AOCTRACE command 27

UUNBLOCK command 353UNCHAIN command 355UNLOCK command 356updating I/O operations information

about an ESCON Director 348user ID, and interested operator list 430user-managed duplexing 114user-managed rebuild 105, 114

Vvary path requests

chained path 582displaying failed varys 333port attributes 582viewing failed requests 333

varying paths 582View command (NetView) 433VM guest system

ACTIVATE command 441DEACTIVATE command 456EXTINT command 457LOAD command 483RESTART command 508START command 510STOP command 511SYSRESET command 518

VTAM application name 583

Wwildcards 6WLM-related data

INGPLEX command 204work item statistics 91WRITE command 357

ZzEnterprise Ensembles

ISQECMD command 368

Index 635

IBM®

Printed in USA

SC34-2720-00

€¦ · ingrpt .............. . 228 ingrun .............. . 231 ingsched ............. . 235...

Documents